Associate Constructor Study Guide

American Institute of Constructors
Constructor Certification Commission
ASSOCIATE CONSTRUCTOR
STUDY GUIDE
LEVEL 1 CONSTRUCTION FUNDAMENTALS
A Review for the

Construction Fundamentals Examination
Revised and Printed May 11, 2005

The AIC Constructor Certification Commission (AICCCC), and American Institute of Constructors (AIC)
assume no liability for personal injury or property damage incurred by any person or organization making
use of the material contained herein. Use of the materials herein is for educational purposes only and it is
advisory only.
The following study materials on the examination topics are suggested to assist in preparation for the
Associate Constructor (AC) Level 1 - Construction Fundamentals Examination. Candidates are encouraged
to review these materials, as well as other related sources of information.
Copyright July 2004 Edward M. Brayton
American Institute of Constructors

Constructor Certification Commission
ASSOCIATE CONSTRUCTOR STUDY GUIDE
LEVEL 1 - CONSTRUCTION FUNDAMENTALS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ASSOCIATE CONSTRUCTOR EXAMINATION .........................................................................1
Associate Constructor Examination Objectives ....................................................................1
The Level I Examination Content Areas .............................................................................2
Detailed Content Outline for the Level 1 Examination .........................................................3
References for the Level 1 Associate Constructor Examination .........................................16
EXAMINATION PREPARATION AND EXAM TAKING STRATEGIES ................................20
Associate Constructor Material Mastery ............................................................................20
Examination Preparation - The Day Before the Examination .............................................21
Examination Preparation - The Day of the Examination .....................................................22
Examination Strategies - During the Examination ..............................................................23
Multiple-Choice Test Questions .........................................................................................23
Question Strategies - Selection of the Best Response .........................................................24
COMMUNICATION SKILLS ......................................................................................................25
Memorandums ...................................................................................................................25
Business Letters ..................................................................................................................26
Effective Meeting Skills .....................................................................................................27
Working Agenda Content ...................................................................................................28
Meeting Minutes Content ....................................................................................................29
Pre-construction Meeting Content ......................................................................................30
Meeting Leadership Skills ..................................................................................................30
Effective Oral Communication Skills .................................................................................32
Communication Skills Exercise .........................................................................................33
Communication Skill Instructions for the Gimpy Case ..........................................39
Project Writing Exercise for the Gimpy Case .....................................................................40
Communication Skill Instructions for the Design Omission Case ...........................41
Project Writing Exercise for the Design Omission Case .....................................................42
Level I Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

ENGINEERING CONCEPTS .......................................................................................................43
Engineering Material Properties ....................................................................................... 43
Aggregate Properties ............................................................................................. 43
Concrete Mix Properties ........................................................................................45
Concrete Reinforcement ....................................................................................... 46
Types of Bar Supports ............................................................................................47
Reinforcement Placement ..................................................................................... 48
Masonry Properties ........................................................................................................... 48
Types of Masonry Cement .....................................................................................49
Types of Masonry Walls and Their Components ...................................................49
Masonry Brick Positions and Patterns ....................................................................50
Structural Steel ..................................................................................................................51
Open-web Steel Joists ............................................................................................52
Steel Floor and Roof Deck .....................................................................................52
Fireproofing Structural Steel ..................................................................................52
Welding Symbols ...................................................................................................53
Structural Lumber ..............................................................................................................54
Allowable Stresses and Strengths ..........................................................................56
Plywood and Plyform .............................................................................................56
Statics and Strength of Materials .......................................................................................58
Moment .................................................................................................................60
Shear ......................................................................................................................61
Engineering Materials Exercise .........................................................................................63
Concrete Formwork ...........................................................................................................79
Lateral Concrete Pressure on Wall Forms ..............................................................81
Lateral Concrete Pressure on Column Forms .........................................................83
Wall Formwork Components .................................................................................84
Plyform Sheathing and Sheathing Tables ...............................................................85
Maximum Allowable Stud Spacing .......................................................................86
Uniform Stud Load and the Allowable Wale Spacing ...........................................89
Uniform Wale Load and the Maximum Allowable Tie Spacing ............................91
Load Capacity of Available Wall Ties .................................................................. 93
Elevated Slab Form Load .......................................................................................94
Formwork Design Exercise ...............................................................................................95
Formwork Exercise - Partial ACI Table 7-2 .........................................................103
Formwork Exercise Partial ACI TABLE 7-5.1: ...................................................104
Formwork Exercise - Partial ACI TABLE 7-5.2: .................................................105
Formwork Exercise - Partial ACI Table?-8.1 ......................................................106
ii
Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

Soil Meehan'
Soil Investigation Tests ......................................................................................107
Proposed Public Service Building Soil Boring Location Plan ........................ 108
Proposed Public Service Building Soil Boring Example .................................109
Reading the Soil Boring .................................................................................... 110
Soil Categories .................................................................................................... III
Soil Classification Systems .............................................................................. 111
Types of Distress that Result in Trench Failure ............................................. 113
Field Visual Inspections for Excavation ........................................................... 113
Field Tests for Soil Analysis ............................................................................. 115
Volume Changes, Swell Percentage and Shrinkage Percentage ..................... 117
Soil Mechanics Exercise ............................................................................................... 119
Soil Mechanics Exercise - Soil Investigation Report ...................................... 129
Soil Mechanics Exercise - Soil Boring #5 ....................................................... 130
Psychrometry and the Psychrometric Chart ................................................................. 131
Psychrometry Example ..................................................................................... 133
Psychrometric Exercise ................................................................................................. 135
MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS .................................................................................................137
Legal Entities ......................................................................................................137
Management Systems ........................................................................................138
Statistical Process Control (SPC) the Tools of Quality .................................. 139
Project Delivery Methods ..................................................................................142
Contract Formation Principles .......................................................................... 144
Management, Legal Entities & Delivery Methods Exercise ....................................... 145
Financial Statements .......................................................................................................153
Balance Sheet ..................................................................................................... 155
Income Statement ...............................................................................................157
Cash Flow Statement ........................................................................................ 160
Financial Analysis Exercise ........................................................................................... 161
Financial Analysis Exercise - Balance Sheet and Income Statement ...............163
Financial Analysis Exercise - Cash Flow Statement ........................................ 164
Depreciation Methods .................................................................................................... 165
Straight-line Example ....................................................................................... 165
Declining Balance Example .............................................................................. 165
Double Declining Method ................................................................................. 166
Sum-of-the-Year-Digits method ........................................................................166
Depreciation Methods Exercise .....................................................................................167
Depreciation Methods and Formulas ................................................................ 168
Constructor's Code of Ethics ........................................................................................ 169
Ethics Exercise ............................................................................................................... 170
iii

CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, METHODS AND PLAN READING ....................................173
CSI MasterFormat Document Organization .....................................................................173
CSI MasterFormat Structure ............................................................................................173
MasterFormat Numbering System .......................................................................174
CSI MasterFormat Divisions ................................................................................174
Masterformat- Broadscope Section Titles ............................................................175
CSI MaterFormat Parts ........................................................................................177
CSI Master Format Exercise ............................................................................................179
Construction Methods. Materials and Equipment .............................................................185
Temporary Shoring Systems ................................................................................185
Excavation Shoring Systems ................................................................................186
Concrete Support Systems ...................................................................................187
Lifting Systems ................................................................................................................188
Working Range of a Crane Chart .........................................................................188
Excavation Equipment .....................................................................................................191
Compaction Equipment ...................................................................................................192
Types of Equipment Suited for Compacting Different Types of Soils ................. 193
Temporary Material and Equipment Exercise ..................................................................194
Schedules on Plans and in the Technical Specification ....................................................201
Column, Beam and Slab Schedules ..................................................................................202
Concrete Beam Exercise ................................................................................................. 203
Concrete Beam Exercise - Schedule ................................................................... 206
Door and Window Exercise .............................................................................................207
Door and Window Exercise - Door Schedule .......................................................209
Door and Window Exercise - Diagrams ...............................................................210
Finish and Paint Exercise .................................................................................................211
Finish and Paint Exercise - Room Finish Schedule ..............................................213
Finish and Paint Exercise - Painting Specifications .............................................214
Plumbing Schedule Exercise ...........................................................................................217
Plumbing Exercise - Pipe Size Schedule ............................................................ 219
Plumbing Schedule Exercise - Natatorium Plans .................................................220
Mechanical Equipment Exercise ......................................................................................221
Fan and Fin Tube Schedules ............................................................................... 223
Convector, Unit Heaters and Cabinet Unit Heater Schedules ..............................224
Air Handling, Cooling Coil and Heating Coil Schedules ......................................225
Boiler and Pump Schedules .................................................................................226
Gas Fired Package Rooftop Unit Schedules ........................................................227
Louver, Diffuser, Register and Grille Schedules ..................................................228
iv

Electrical Exercise ..........................................................................................................229
Electrical Symbols Legend and Mounting Heights .......................................... 234
One Line Diagram ............................................................................................. 235
Power Plan Upper Level ................................................................................... 236
Panel Board Load Sheet .................................................................................... 237
Lighting Plan Upper Level ................................................................................ 238
Lighting Fixture Legend ................................................................................... 239
Lighting Fixture Notes ...................................................................................... 240
BIDDING AND ESTIMATING ............................................................................................... 241
Document Relationships ............................................................................................... 241
Project Manual Arrangement ............................................................................ 242
Bidding Requirement Documents .................................................................... 243
Contractors Bid Submittal Documents ............................................................ 247
Conditions of the Contract ................................................................................ 252
Conditions of the Contract vs. Division 1 - General Requirements ............... 256
General Requirements - Division 01 ............................................................... 257
Technical Specifications ................................................................................... 258
Plans or Drawings ............................................................................................. 260
Document Contradictions ................................................................................ 260
Bid Document Exercise ................................................................................................ 261
Laws, Regulations, Codes and Specifications ............................................................ 265
Types of Specifications .....................................................................................269
Laws, Regulations, Codes and Specifications Exercise ..............................................271
Types of Insurances ...................................................................................................... 277
Types of Bonds ................................................................................................. 281
Insurance and Bonds Exercise ...................................................................................... 283
Productivity and Labor Unit Cost ................................................................................ 289
Productivity & Unit Cost Exercise .............................................................................. 293
Wood Sheet Piling Material and Unit Cost Example ................................................. 297
Wood Sheet Piling Material and Unit Cost Exercise .................................................. 299
Equipment Production and Unit Cost Examples ......................................................... 301
Hauling Production Example ........................................................................... 301
Power Shovel Production Example .............................................................. 303
Steel Drum Roller Compaction Production Example ..................................... 304
Vibrating Plate Production ............................................................................... 306
Equipment Production and Unit Cost Exercise ........................................................... 307
v

Excavation Quantity Takeoff .......................................................................................................311
Depth of the Excavation (Cut) for the Building Excavation ............................................312
Bulk Excavation ..............................................................................................................312
Working Space Excavation ..............................................................................................313
Angle of Repose Excavation ............................................................................................314
Compacted Fill ................................................................................................................315
Trench Excavation ...........................................................................................................316
Cut Fill Excavation ..........................................................................................................317
Caisson Auger and Bell Excavation .................................................................................318
Average Soil Weights & Formulas ..................................................................................321
Excavation Allowable Slope or Angle of Repose ............................................................322
Excavation Quantities Exercise ...................................................................................................323
Concrete Quantity Takeoff ..........................................................................................................331
Concrete Formwork Systems ...........................................................................................332
Footing Formwork and Rebar Quantity Takeoff ..............................................................333
Wall Formwork and Rebar Quantity Takeoff ..................................................................335
Height of the Wall ...........................................................................................................335
Slab on Grade Rebar Quantity Takeoff ............................................................................338
Elevated Slab Formwork Quantity Takeoff .....................................................................338
Beam Rebar Quantity Takeoff .........................................................................................338
Concrete and Rebar Quantities Exercise ......................................................................................339
Framing Quantity Takeoff ............................................................................................................343
Sub Flooring Framing Components .................................................................................344
Sub Flooring Quantity Takeoff ........................................................................................345
Interior Wall Systems .......................................................................................................345
Exterior Wall System .......................................................................................................346
Wall Framing Quantity Takeoff .......................................................................................347
Types of Roofs .................................................................................................................348
Roof Framing Components ..............................................................................................348
Roofing Terminology ......................................................................................................349
Gable Roof Quantity Takeoff Example ...........................................................................350
Intersecting Gable Roof Quantity Takeoff Example ........................................................351
Hip Roof Quantity Takeoff Example ...............................................................................352
Framing Quantity Takeoff Exercise .............................................................................................353
vi

BUDGETING, COSTS, AND COST CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
The Estimate and the Project Budget . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
The Earned Workhour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
The Earned Workhour Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Earned Workhour Report Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
The Labor Cost Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Labor Cost Report for the Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
The Project Cost Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Project Cost Summary Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
The Work Breakdown Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Cost Reports Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Cost Reports Exercise - Earned Workhour Report Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Cost Reports Exercise - Labor Cost Report Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Cost Reports Exercise - Project Cost Summary Report Information . . . . . . . . . 380
PLANNING, SCHEDULING, AND CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
The Components of the Precedence Diagram Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
The Project Activity Event Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Logic Network and Schedule Event Times Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
The Design Sequence for each Engineering Discipline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
The Procurement Sequence for each Discipline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
The Time Scaled Network Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
The Actual or the Effective Amount of Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
The Crew Distribution (Utilization) Chart and Graph . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Project Scheduling Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Activity Relationships . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Planning & Scheduling Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Planning & Scheduling Exercise for the John Adams Logic Network . . . . . . . 401
Planning & Scheduling Exercise for the George Mason Logic Network . . . . . 403
Planning & Scheduling Exercise for the George Washington Logic . . . . . . . . 405
vii

CONSTRUCTION SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
The Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
OSHA Recordkeeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Recordable Work-Related Medical Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Non-recordable Work-Related First Aid Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Other Nonfatal Criteria to Determine if an Injury is Recordable . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
OSHA Record Keeping Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
OSHA Inspection Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
OSHA Inspection Priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
The Types of OSHA Safety Violations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
The Supervisors Responsibilities under OSHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Multi-employer Work Site Citations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
OSHA Inspection Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Personal Protective Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Eye and Face Protector Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Recommended Protectors based upon the Operation and the Hazards . . . . . . . 433
Respirators Nonmandatory Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
Personal Protection Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Portable Fire Extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
OSHA Standards Requiring Fire Extinguisher in Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Fire Extinguishers Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Slings and Rigging Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Sling Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Sling Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Sling Inspection Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
Angle of the Hook and the Sling Hook Lifting Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Angle of the Sling and the Effect on the Lifting Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Rigging Equipment Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Table H - 3. Rated Capacities for Single Leg Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Table H - 4. Rated Capacities for Single Leg Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Table H - 7. Rated Capacities for 2-leg and 3-leg Bridle Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Table H - 8. Rated Capacities for 2-leg and 3-leg Bridle Slings . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
viii

OSHA Scaffolding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Scaffolding Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Scaffolding Exercise for Single Wood Pole Scaffolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Scaffolding Exercise for Independent Wood Pole Scaffolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Scaffolding Exercise for Tube and Coupler Scaffolds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
OSHA Soil Classification System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Soil Classification Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
OSHA Timber Shoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Shoring Tables Classified by Soil Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Shoring Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Example of Timber Shoring Requirements for Arrangement #1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
OSHA Soil Classification System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
OSHA Shoring Tables Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Table C-1.1 Timber Trench Shoring - Minimum Timber Requirements . . . . . 479
Table D - 1.1 Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING AND PROJECT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Trigonometry Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Elevations and Surveying Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Surveying and Layout Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
PROJECT ADMINISTRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Vendors and Suppliers and The Uniform Commercial Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
The Procurement Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Supplier Payment Request Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
Shipping Terms on the Purchase Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
The Accounting Terms on the Purchase Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Expediting Materials and Leadtime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
Material Receiving Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
ix

The Subcontract Agreement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Vendor and Subcontractor Agreement Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Organization and Job Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Project Management Team . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Construction Crafts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Organization and Job Description Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
Employment Laws and Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Hiring Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Employment Law Legislation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
Employment Law Discrimination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Management and Union Labor Laws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Employment Law Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
Job Site Administration and the Contract Administration Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
Shop Drawings, Product Data Sheets and Reference Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Contract Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
New Contract Change Order Proposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Net Contract Change Order Proposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
Site Administration and Contract Documents Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Project Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Daily Job Diary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
Daily Job Diary Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Rules for Keeping a Job Diary or Daily Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
The content of the diary or log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
Daily Construction Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Daily Construction Report Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Job Site Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Job Site Records Filed According to the CSI Master Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Project Documentation Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Project Documentation Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Project Documentation Instructions for the Crew Size Case . . . . . . . . 580
Daily Construction Report Exercise for the Crew Size Discrepancy Case . . . . . . . . . . 581
Project Documentation Instructions for the Gimpy Case . . . . . . . . . . . 583
Daily Job Diary Exercise for the Gimpy Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584

EXERCISE SOLUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Communication Skills Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
Communication Skills Exercise Solution for the Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
Communication Skills Exercise Solution for the Business Letter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
Engineering Materials Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
Formwork Design Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Soil Mechanics Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
Psychrometric Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Management, Legal Entities & Delivery Methods Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Financial Analysis Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
Depreciation Methods Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Ethics Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
CSI Master Format Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 597
Temporary Material and Equipment Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
Concrete Beam Schedule Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
Door and Window Schedule Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
Finish and Paint Schedule Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 601
Plumbing Schedule Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Mechanical Schedule Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
Electrical Schedule Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Bid Document Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 604
Laws, Regulations, Codes and Specifications Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605
Insurance and Bonds Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Productivity & Labor Unit Cost Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
Wood Sheet Piling Material and Unit Cost Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
Equipment Production and Unit Cost Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Excavation Quantities Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Concrete Quantities Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
Framing Quantity Takeoff Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
Cost Reports Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
Earned Workhour Report Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Labor Cost Reports Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
Project Cost Summary Reports Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
Planning & Scheduling Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
John Adams Logic Network Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
George Mason Network Logic Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
xi

OSHA Record Keeping Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
OSHA Inspection Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Personal Protection Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
Fire Extinguishers Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
OSHA Rigging Equipment Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
OSHA Scaffolding Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
OSHA Soil Classification Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
OSHA Shoring Tables Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
Surveying and Layout Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
Vendor and Subcontractor Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
Organization and Job Description Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
Employment Law Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Site Administration and Contract Documents Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
Project Documentation Exercise Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637
Project Documentation Exercise Construction Report Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Project Documentation Exercise Daily Job Diary Solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
xii

ASSOCIATE CONSTRUCTOR EXAMINATION
Examination Qualifications for the Associate Constructor
To qualify for the Associate Constructor, an individual must have completed four (4) years of
Acceptable Education from an accredited institution and/or have Acceptable Experience
Equivalence at the time of application. The standard for the educational requirement is based on
a four-year baccalaureate degree in an accredited construction program. Thus a graduate from
one of these programs will receive four (4) years of credit toward qualifying for the Level 1
Construction Fundamentals Examination. Other undergraduate and graduate degrees and
acceptable work experience will receive varying amounts of credit toward meeting the four-year
pre-qualification requirement for the Level 1 Examination.
Specific information concerning the qualifications necessary to sit for the Level 1 Construction
Fundamentals Examination can be found in the Certified Professional Constructor Candidate
Handbook, published by the AIC Constructor Certification Commission.
Associate Constructor Examination Objectives
The Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Examination is designed to measure the broad spectrum
of fundamental construction knowledge required of an entry-level professional constructor. The
orientation of this examination is toward the measurement of academic knowledge expected of
the entry-level constructor professional. While applied knowledge questions are included, the
applications are relatively basic and do not rely on extensive experience to answer.
Passing the Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Examination Documentation
Upon passing the Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Examination, The Associate Constructor
(AC) designation is awarded. Before receiving your Associate Constructor Certificate and card,
you must have an Official Transcript indicating your graduation date sent directly to the AIC
Constructor Certification Commission office immediately upon graduation. This should be done
within sixty days after graduation.

The Level 1 Examination Content Areas
The Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Examination is a two-part written examination
composed of a maximum of 300 multiple-choice, objective questions and several writing
samples with a total testing time of eight (8) hours. The questions for the examination are
obtained from individuals with expertise in construction and they are reviewed for construction
accuracy by the AIC Constructor Certification Commission.
The Construction Fundamentals Examination consists of ten major subject areas or content areas.
The number of questions in each subject area is determined from data derived from validation
studies on relative frequency of use and importance of the knowledge tested. The approximate
percentage of questions for each of the ten subject areas is shown in the following table.
CONSTRUCTION FUNDAMENTALS EXAMINATION
Approximate Percentages of Subject Areas
Subject Area
% of Questions
Communication Skills
6.0%
Engineering Concepts
9.0%
Management Concepts
4.5%
Materials, Methods and Plan Reading
10.5%
Bidding and Estimating
15.0%
Budgeting, Costs and Cost Control
11.0%
Planning, Scheduling & Schedule Control
17.0%
Construction Safety
8.0%
Construction Surveying and Project Layout
4.0%
Project Administration
15.0%

Detailed Content Outline for the Level 1 Examination
The ten subject areas of the examination specification have been further broken down into its
component parts to clarify the level of understanding expected. The following information
provides the name of each subject area, the subject area percentage, a written description of the
focus for each subject, an outline of the content in each subject area with bullets emphasizing the
objectives and the level of understanding expected for the Level1 Construction Fundamentals
Examination.
I.
Communication Skills
6%
This section focuses on the application of oral, written communication skills, listening
skills necessary to enhance the communication process. The oral communication section
focuses on defining different forms of communication. The written communication
section contains writing business letters and memos. These writing situations will be
evaluated based upon the following criteria: Followed the directions, provided a clear
purpose, addressed the audience, developed coherent paragraphs, supported your claims
with concrete examples, contained statements that are logical, contained proper sentence
structure, grammar and spelling and selected the proper words.
A.
Oral Communication
1.
Presentations, Telephone and Listening
!
Identify effective Oral Communication practices.
2.
Written Communications
1.
Business Letters
!
Write a formal Business Letter with proper grammar and spelling.
2.
Memorandums
!
Write a Memo with proper grammar and spelling.
3.
Job Diary
!
Identify the content and legal requirements for an effective diary.
4.
Construction Reports
!
Read information and a complete Construction Report accurately.

II.
Engineering Concepts
9%
This section concentrates on the properties of engineering materials, soil mechanics,
concrete formwork design and applied mechanics, air mechanics and fluid mechanics.
These areas are described in detail below.
Material Science. The study of the physical properties of aggregate, concrete, structural
steel, and wood.
Soil Mechanics. The study of the soil properties, laboratory testing methods, soil
investigation testing methods, compaction methods, and the soil boring reports.
Formwork Design and Applied Mechanics. The design of concrete formwork components
for walls and elevated slabs. Using the American Concrete Institutes, Formwork for
Concrete book. The study of the effects of static, dynamic forces and motion on
materials. Examples include loads and spacing of formwork and beam loads.
Air and Fluid Mechanics. This area covers psychrometry and hydrology. Psychrometry is
the study of properties of air-water mixtures. Hydrology is the study of the pressure and
flow of water.
A.
Engineering Material Properties

1.
Aggregate
!
Describe the weight, gradation, strength, permeability and uses.
2.
Concrete and Reinforcement
!
Identify the weight, compressive strength, air entrainment, ASTM,
workability, Portland Cement properties, water-cement reaction,
admixtures, mixing, placement and testing methods, and curing.
3.
Masonry
!
Describe the Types of Mortar, workability, compressive strength,
proportions, sizes, types of masonry units, efflorescence, bond
beam, pilaster, expansion joints, corbeling, coping and methods.
4.
Steel
!
Defines the structural shapes and symbols, types of connections,
tensile strength, reinforcing bar sizes, heat treatment, and
placement methods.
5.
Wood
!
Cites species, strength properties, compression, bending stress,
shear, lumber classification and grading, grain effect, board foot,
moisture content, plywood and plyform properties, plywood
grades, nominal dimension, glued laminated wood and fasteners.

B.
Soil Mechanics
1.
Soil Composition, Types and properties
!
Identify soil properties, name laboratory testing methods.
2.
Soil investigation testing methods and Soil Borings.

!
Describe Soil sampling methods, standard penetration tests (SPT),
determine the water table and the penetration resistance level from
the soil borings and compare to a standard soil classification chart.
3.
Types of Foundations
!
Identify strip foundation, spread footing, continuous footing, mat
foundations, pile foundations and types of piles and caissons.
4.
Field Soil Identification Methods

!
Describe plasticity test, dry test, thumb penetration test,
pentrometer, and unconfined compressive strength.
5.
Volume Changes and Compaction Methods

!
Calculate swell percentage, shrinkage percentage of various soils,
define optimum moisture content, compare standard proctor and
modified proctor testing methods.
C.
Mechanics and Strength of Materials

1.
Formwork Design
!
Calculate a formwork load on walers, studs, and ties, determine the
spacing of walers, studs and ties
2.
Beam Loads
!
Calculate beam loads.
D.
Air and Fluid Mechanics

1.
Psychrometry
!
Determines atmospheric air properties and the relationships
between them such as Absolute humidity, Relative humidity,
Humidity Ratio, Dry Bulb Temperature, Wet-Bulb Temperature,
Enthalpy, Saturation Temperature, and define BTU.
2.
Hydrology
!
Calculate wetted perimeters and determine a cross-sectional flow
rate of fluids.

III.
Management Concepts
4.5%
This content area examines the contract formation principles, types of business entities,
accounting principles and financial ratios, management systems and business ethics
including the Constructors Code of Ethics.
A.
Contract Types
1.
Elements of a Contract
2.
Lump Sum
3.
Unit Price
4.
Design Build
5.
Cost Plus
!
Identify various types of contracts such as Design/Build, unit price,
cost plus, lump sum, identify the elements of a contract.
B.
Business Entities
1.
Sole Proprietors
2.
Partnerships and Joint Ventures
3.
Corporations and LLC
!
Describe business entities such as a corporation, partnership, a
joint venture, sole proprietor, limited liability corporation.
C.
Accounting and Financial Systems

1.
Accounting Principles
2.
Financial Reports and Ratios
!
Interpret accounting, determine assets, liabilities and owner equity,
calculate forms of depreciation, and calculate financial ratios.
D.
Management Systems
1.
Total Quality Management
2.
ISO 9000 and Statistical Process Control
3.
Partnering
!
Define TQM, ISO, partnering, and Statistical Process Control
E.
Business Ethics
1.
Constructors Code of Ethics
2.
Bidding, Purchasing and Professional Practice
!
Describe ethical practices from the Constructors Code of Ethics.
!
Identify the proper procedure for handling ethical situations.

IV.
CSI Materials, Methods, Plan Reading, Specification

10.5%
This section is the interpretation of plans and schedules of the materials and methods
found in the sixteen Construction Specifications Institutes (CSI) Divisions. This section
focuses on the entire construction process including the ability to read civil, architectural,
structural, mechanical and electrical schedules and plans. Another objective is the ability
to identify which CSI Master format Division and Section number contains specific
items.
A.
Construction Equipment
1.
Piling Equipment
2.
Sheet Piling, Cofferdams, Tie-backs
3.
Excavation Equipment
4.
Compaction Equipment
5.
Cranes and Lifting Equipment
!
B.
Selects proper construction equipment for based upon sling angles

and boom angles, lifting capacity and the type of soil and
determine the compaction depth.
Plan and Schedule Reading

1.
Sitework
2.
Concrete, Forms and Rebar
3.
Structural Steel
4.
Carpentry
5.
Exterior Finishes
6.
Doors and Windows
7.
Interior Finishes
8.
Mechanical
9.
Electrical
!
Read site layout plans, find reinforced concrete rebar requirements

from the schedules, identify mortar and mix design principles,
identify the structural steel components from the schedules,
describe the door and window requirements from the schedules,
determine the interior finish specified from the plans and
schedules, identify the plumbing requirements from the schedules,
determine the HVAC requirements from the schedules, read the
electrical diagram, determine the power requirements, and identify
the panel box circuits, determine the lighting needs, and describe
the communication requirements from the schedules.
V.
Bidding and Estimating

15%
This section focuses on the entire bidding process including the ability to identify
appropriate codes, site conditions, perform quantity takeoff, calculate equipment
productivity, calculate total materials costs from components, generate total estimated
costs, and develop area and future cost estimates.
A.
Bidding Process
1.
Bid Documents
2.
Scales
3.
Types of Specifications
4.
Laws, Regulations, and Codes
5.
Site Evaluation and walk-thru
6.
Insurance and Bonds
7.
Value Engineering and Life cycle Costing
8.
Temporary Site Layout
!
Define bidding terms such as conceptual estimate, detailed

estimate, addenda, alternates, contingencies, allowances, identify
appropriate codes, define performance specs, method, specs,
proprietary of specifications, identify site conditions, defines bond
and insurance requirements, calculate a bond premium, determine
life cycle costs, and identify value engineering principles.
B.
Estimates
1.
Conceptual
2.
Total Future Costs
3.
Material Components
4.
Equipment Productivity
C.
Quantity Takeoff
1.
Excavation
2.
Forms, Rebar and Concrete
3.
Rough Carpentry
4.
Interior Finishes
!
Perform quantity takeoff for excavation, concrete, rebar, rough

framing, formwork, roofing and painting, calculate labor and
equipment productivity, calculate total material costs from
components, analyze subcontractor bids, generate total estimated
costs, develop area and future cost estimates.

VI.
Budgeting, Costs and Cost Control

11%
This section concentrates on the complete cost control process including the ability to
compute the budget, develop a work breakdown structure, calculate productivity rates,
prepare cost reports and forecast expenditures at completion.
A.
Budgeting
1.
Work Breakdown Structure
!
B.
Cost Control
1.
Productivity Rates and Earned Workhours
!
2.
3.
Calculate productivity rates, determine total workhours budgeted

and actual, compare a budget rate to the actual rate, generate the
number of days, calculate labor, material and equipment unit costs
Labor Unit Costs

!
Calculate labor unit costs, determine total labor costs budgeted and
actual, compare budget labor unit costs to the actual labor unit
costs, generate the number of days, calculate labor, material and
equipment unit costs
Forecasts at Completion Gains and Losses

!
C.
Compute the budget, define a work breakdown structure, identify

project control methods.
Calculate forecasted cost at completion for labor, materials and

equipment and determine gains or losses in labor, material,
subcontracts and equipment.
Progress Costs
1.
Retainage
2.
Back charges
3.
Payments
!
Define retainage and back charges, determine progress payment

and final payment procedures.

VII.
Planning, Scheduling and Schedule Control

17%
This section is concerned with the overall scheduling process including the ability to
distinguish design, procurement and construction in order to establish a project plan
showing the logical sequence of activities and their estimated time durations. Also, this
section focuses on the ability to crash a schedule, determine the impact, and identify an
alternative plan of action.
A.
Logical Sequences of Design, Procurement and Construction

1.
Multi Crew, Phase Durations, Activity Durations and Effective Durations
!
B.
Event Times, Calculations, and Scheduling Terminology

1.
Leadtime, Forward Pass, Backward Pass
!
2.
Identify design and leadtime activities, define fast tracking,

describe critical activities and near critical activities, describe
crashing, describe ES, EF, LS, LF, define total float, free float, and
describe job acceleration.
Total Float, Free Float, ES, EF, LS, LF, Critical Path(s), Completion Time
!
C.
Distinguish design, procurement and construction activities,

identify logical sequences of activities, estimate activity time
durations, determine effective (actual) durations using multi-crews
Calculate event times using forward and backward pass

procedures, determine floats, identify the critical path(s).
Schedule Analysis
1.
Crashing and Impact
!
Crash a schedule and determine the impact, describe methods to

update /revise the schedule and identify an alternative plan of
action.
10

VIII.
Construction Safety
8%
This section centers on the construction safety standards including the ability to interpret
the OSHA construction standards, establish safety and health procedures on the job site,
perform hazard analysis and enforce safety procedures.
A.
OSHA Administrative Requirements

1.
EMR
2.
General Duty Clause
3.
Site Procedures, MSDS
4.
Competent Person and Due Diligence
!
B.
Standard Safety Procedures

1.
Handrails
2.
Ladders
3.
Fire Extinguishers
4.
Excavations set backs, travel distances
5.
Recordkeeping and Employee Posters
!
C.
Describe the general duty clause, define hazard analysis, describe

EMR, identify the criteria of a competent person, define MSDS,
and describe due diligence.
Identify standard safety procedures for hand rails, ladder

extensions, ladder angle or horizontal distance, fire extinguisher
travel distance, excavation spoil setback, excavation horizontal
travel to exit, determine standard employee recordkeeping and
posting procedures, describe proper safety and health
documentation and inspection procedures.
Safety Procedures Interpretation

1.
Sloped and Shored Excavations
2.
Scaffolding
3.
Personal Protection Equipment
4.
Electrical Protection
!
Interpret the OSHA construction safety standard requirements for

sloped and shored excavation, scaffolding, personal protection and
electrical protection.
11

IX.
Surveying and Project Layout

4%
This section concentrates on the ability to establish distances and elevations from
established points, the setup of an instrument, the layout of the project and interpret the
topography map.
A.
Equipment
1.
Tapes, Plumb Bobs, level, transit, laser, Batter Boards
!
B.
Topography Map
1.
Contours
!
C.
Describe the purpose of different types of surveying equipment.
Read a topography map, calculate cut/fill volumes, and interpret

site information.
Calculations
1.
Horizontal Distances
!
2.
Calculate distances using trigonometry functions, convert

measurements.
Vertical Control Elevations

!
Calculate height of the instrument, determine total elevations,

calculate invert elevations and inverted rod readings.
12

X.
Project Administration
15%
This section is concerned with the overall field administration at the construction site
including developing a site plan, evaluating vendors and subcontractors and their progress
payment requests, writing field purchase orders and maintaining field records, such as
purchase orders, change orders, subcontract agreements, shop drawings, as built
drawings, daily job diaries and construction reports.
A.
Procurement of Resources
1.
Subcontractors
2.
Materials
3.
Equipment
!
B.
Identify the procurement process, define purchase orders, define

UCC rules, explain a bill of lading, identify discount terms, state
subcontractor procedures.
Duties and Responsibilities

1.
Construction Management and Engineering Job Descriptions
2.
Organizational Chart
3.
Design, Procurement and Construction Team
!
4.
Determine the duties and responsibilities of the owner, A/E,

inspector, utility company, contractor, subcontractor and vendors.
Craft trade Descriptions

!
Identify duties and responsibilities of the construction crafts.
13

C.
Job Site Administration

1.
Site Layout Considerations
!
2.
Shop Drawing, Product Data Submittal and Review Process

!
3.
4.
Identify the location of the field office, temporary facilities and

storage areas at the project
Describe shop drawing submittal procedures, claims procedures,

change procedures, dispute resolution methods, substantial
completion procedures, an occupancy certificate and state the
project closeout procedures using AIA General Conditions and/or
the EJCDC General Conditions.
Contract Clauses, Changes, Claims, Dispute Resolution Methods

!
Define Notice of Award, Notice to Proceed, Stop Work Orders,

Stop Work Notices, Schedule of Values, Sworn Statements,
contract Change Orders, Change Directives, Minor Changes and
Extra Work Orders, Certificate of Substantial Completion.
Using Standard Construction Documents such as AIA or EJCDC

General Conditions and Advertisement to Bidders, Instructions to
Bidders, Information Available to Bidders, Supplementary
Conditions, General Requirements (01) and the Technical
Specifications (02 -16) based upon the CSI Master Format. Name
the specific document which contains common clauses for the
contract administrative procedures, insurance requirements,
insurance coverages, temporary facilities, and project closeout
procedures.
Quality Control, Inspection and Regulations

!
Identify material quality control procedures, inspection procedures

and government regulations.
14

D.
Project Records
1.
Human Resources
!
2.
Project Documentation
!
E.
Determine the content of meeting documentation, identify meeting

leadership skills, identify employment law requirements, define
team work, recognize effective public relation techniques.
Cite appropriate content for agenda and minutes.
Project Closeout
1.
Punch Lists, Substantial Completion, Occupancy
2.
Documentation Turnover
3.
Final Payment and Final Completion

!
Define a punch list, identify the owners documentation necessary

to closeout a project, and compare substantial completion and final
completion.
15

References for the Level 1 Associate Constructor Examination
Allen, E. (1999). Fundamentals of Building Construction: Materials and Methods. 3rd ed. New
York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
American Institute of Architects (1997). General Conditions of the Contract for Construction
A201-1997. 15th ed. Washington: DC. Author.
American Institute of Constructors (2003). Constructor Code of Ethics. St. Petersburg, FL:
Author.
Andres, C.K. and Smith, R.C. (2004). Principles and Practices of Commercial Construction. 7th
ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Education, Inc.
Associated General Contractors (2001). Construction Estimating and Bidding. Alexandria, VA:
Author.
Associated General Contractors (2002). Construction Planning and Scheduling. Alexandria, VA:
Author.
Barrie, D.S., and Paulson, B. (2003). Professional Construction Management: Including CM,
Design-Construct, and General Contracting. 4th ed. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Beer, F.P., Johnston, E. R. and et al. (2003). Vector Mechanics for Engineers: Statics. 7th ed.
New York: McGraw-Hill.
Breyer, D. E., Fridley, K. J., et al (2003 ). Design of Wood Structures B ASD. 5th ed. New York:
McGraw-Hill.
Brown, W.C. (1997 ). Print Reading for Construction: Residential and Commercial. 4th ed.
South Holland, IL: Goodheart-Willcox Company, Inc.
CCH (Latest). OSHA Standards for the Construction Industry. Chicago: CCH Incorporated.
Ching, F.D.and Winkel, S.R. (2003). Building Codes Illustrated: A Guide to Understanding the
International Building Code. New York: John Wiley and Sons, Inc.
Clough, R.H., Sears, G.A., and Sears, S.K. (2000). Construction Project Management. 4th ed.
New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
16

Collier, K. (2001). Construction Contracts. 3rd ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (2001). Manual of Standard Practices. 27th ed. Schaumburg,
IL: author.
Construction Specifications Institute (1995). MasterFormat: Manual of Practice. Eighth
Printing. Alexandria, VA: Author.
Dagostino, F. and Feigenbaum, L. (2003). Estimating in Building Construction. 6th ed. Upper
Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Education, Inc.
Dishongh, B.E. (2001). Essential Structural Technology for Construction and Architecture.
Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.
Engineers Joint Contract documents Committee (1996). Standard General Conditions of the
Construction Contract EJCDC No. 1910-8 (1996 Edition). Alexandria, VA: National
Society of Professional Engineers.
Fisk, E.R. (2000). Construction Project Administration. 6th ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson
Education, Inc.
Gould, F.E. and Joyce, N.E. (2003). Construction Project Management. Upper Saddle River, NJ:
Pearson Education, Inc.
Gould, F.E. and Joyce, N.E. (2003). Managing the Construction Process: Estimating,
Scheduling, and Project Control. 2nd ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Education,
Inc.
Hurd, M. K. (1995). Formwork for Concrete. Farmington Hills, MI: American Concrete Institute.
International Code Council (2000). The International Building Code. Washington, D.C.: author.
Kavanagh, B.F. (2000). Surveying with Construction Applications. 4th ed. Upper Saddle River,
NJ: Prentice Hall.
Kosmatka, S.H. and Kerkhoff, B., Panarese, W.C., and Whitney, D.B. (2002). Design and
Control of Concrete Mixtures: Engineering Bulletin. 14th ed. Portland Cement
Association.
Liu, C. and Evett, (2003). Soils and Foundations. 6th ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.
17

Mangan Communications (Latest). 29CFR 1926 OSHA Construction Industry Regulations.
Davenport, IA: Author.
Marotta, T.W. and Herubin, C.A. (2001). Basic Construction Materials. 6th ed. Upper Saddle
River, NJ: Pearson Education, Inc.
McCormac, J.C. (2000). Design of Reinforced Concrete. 5th ed. New York: John Wiley & Sons,
Inc.
Means, R.S. (Latest). Means Building Construction Cost Data. Kingston, MA: Author.
Mincks, W.R. and Johnston, H. (2003). Construction Jobsite Management. 2nd ed. Albany, NY:
Delmar Publishers Inc.
Muller, E.J. and Grau, P.A. (1999). Reading Architectural Working Drawings: Residential and
Light Construction. 5th ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.
Muller, E.J. and Fausett, J.G. and Grau, P.A. (2001). Architectural Drawing and Light
Construction. 6th ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.
Nunnally, S.W. (2004). Construction Methods and Management. 6th ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ:
Pearson Prentice Hall.
Peurifoy, R.L. and Oberlender, G.D. (2002). Estimating Construction Costs. 5th ed. New York:
McGraw-Hill.
Peurifoy, R.L. and Schexnayder, C.J. (2002). Construction Planning, Equipment, and Methods.
6th ed. New York: McGraw-Hill.
Pfeifer, G. et al (2001). Brick and Block Construction Manual. Princeton: NJ: Princeton
Architectural Press.
Portland Cement Association (1994). Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures. 13th ed. Skokie,
IL: author.
Roberts, J. (1995). Construction Surveying: Layout and Dimension Control. Albany, NY:
Delmar Publishers Inc.
Shaeffer, R.E. (2001). Elementary Structures for Architects and Builders. 4th ed. Upper Saddle
River, NJ: Prentice Hall.
18

Stein, B. and Reynolds, J.S. (1999). Mechanical and Electrical Equipment for Buildings. 9th ed.
New York: John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
Surbrook, T.C., and Althouse, J.R. (2001). Interpreting the National Electrical Code. 6th ed.
Albany, NY: Delmar Learning.
Sweet, J. (1999). Legal Aspects of Architecture Engineering and the Construction Process. 6th
ed. Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks/Cole Publishing Company.
Tao, W. and Janis, R.R. (2001). Mechanical and Electrical Systems in Buildings. 2nd ed. Upper
Saddle River, NJ: Pearson Prentice Hall.
Thornton, W. A. et al (2001). Manual of Steel Construction: Load and Resistance Factor
Design. 3rd ed. American Institute of Steel Construction.
Walker, F.R. (2001). Walkers Building Estimators Reference Book. Lisle, IL: Frank R. Walker
Company.
Weidhaas, E.R. (2001). Architectural Drafting and Light Construction. Albany, NY: Delmar
Publishers Inc.
Wolf, P.R. and Ghilani, C.D. (2001). Elementary Surveying: An Introduction to Geomatics. 10th
ed. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.
Wujeck, J.B. (1999). Applied Statics, Strength of Materials, and Building Structure Design.
Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall.
19

EXAMINATION PREPARATION AND EXAM TAKING STRATEGIES
How to Prepare for the Examination
1.
Familiarize yourself with the examination process.
Determine how long the examination will be and what kinds of questions will be on it.
Ask which concepts are most important, which content to focus on, and what you will
have to do on the examination. Your aim is to determine both the content of the questions
and the type of memory and intellectual skills you will be asked to use. These skills
include the following.
Comparing, contrasting, and otherwise interpreting meaning in the information.
Applying principles and theories to solve problems. These may not be explicitly covered.
Predicting possible outcomes given a set of variables.
Evaluating the usefulness of certain ideas, concepts, or methods for a given event.
2.
Establish an overall study schedule to review all the work to be done.

On the basis of your familiarity with the examination content, make a list of all the tasks
you must complete to prepare for it. Given what topics you expect to be most important
on the test, set priorities among your study tasks and plan to do the most important ones
first. In scheduling your test preparation work, maintain your own routines.
Associate Constructor Material Mastery

The Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Examination is designed to measure the broad spectrum
of fundamental knowledge required of an entry-level professional constructor. This examination
is designed to make you think independently - do not count on recognizing the correct answer.
Instead, prepare yourself to make a fine discrimination to determine the correct answer. In
other words, the incorrect choices are all plausible answers, one is just the correct answer for the
situation encountered.
You know you have mastered the information if you can complete the following tasks.
1.
Distinguish the ways in which facts, concepts, principles, procedures etc. differ from each
other. Also, you should be able to categorize according to the ways these are similar.
2.
Answer the questions and solve the problems in the reference material.
3.
Create your own questions.
20

4.
Evaluate specific situations and identify the ideas, concepts, principles or procedures.
5.
Predict the best possible outcome given a set of correct options.
Examination Preparation - Months Prior to the Examination

1.
Familiarize yourself with the examination content areas.
2.
Identify your strengths and weakness in each content area of the examination.
3.
Study each content even if it is a strength to recognize other approaches to the content.
4.
Acquaint yourself with the examination process. An 8-hour examination consisting of

two four-hour sessions and the demands placed upon you.
Examination Preparation - The Day Before the Examination - Relieving the Anxiety
1.
Set out all necessary materials to bring with you to the test center (your letter, photo
identification, a calculator with fresh batteries, your watch, a snack, some water, and of
course, plenty of extra number 2 pencils. The use of a calculator with trigonometry
functions is permitted as long as it is non-printing, non-programmable, and it does not
have an alpha keyboard.
2.
Make sure you have arranged a ride to the testing location and know where it is.
3.
Eat a good meal prior to the examination, exercise to reduce tension and stimulate
thinking and take a shower to help you relax.
4.
Allow enough time to arrive at the designated location without hurrying.
5.
Provide yourself with time in the classroom to relax and compose yourself.
Items Allowable Inside the Examination Site

The only items allowable in the examination center are a Calculator with Trigonometry
functions. This is essential but the calculator must be non-programmable, non-printing, and it
cannot have an alpha keyboard. The only other items allowable are #2 pencils with an eraser.
21

Examination Preparation - The Day of the Examination
1.
Bring all necessary materials with you to the test center (your letter, photo identification,
a calculator with fresh batteries, your watch, a snack, some water, and of course, plenty of
extra number 2 pencils). The use of a calculator with trigonometry functions is permitted
as long as it is non-printing, non-programmable, and it does not have an alpha keyboard.
2.
Eat a good breakfast.
3.
Arrive early so you can have enough time to compose yourself.

If you're early, don't discuss the test with other candidates. Their concerns and
worries will increase any anxieties you might have.
If you're late, you may miss important verbal directions. Arriving late also makes
you feel anxious. If so, take a minute to relax and organize your thoughts.
4.
Reference your notes to the test question number on the paper provided in the booklet.
Find the formula page(s) and paper provided in the booklet.
5.
Preview the entire examination. Estimate the amount of time to spend on each item.
6.
Read all directions slowly and carefully. Many candidates ignore the directions. However,
directions often state information you need to receive full credit. They also provide
information about the way answers should be marked on the scantron sheet.
Underline key terms and steps in directions and in the test item.
7.
Answer the easiest questions first. This builds your confidence and triggers your memory.
8.
Answer every question, even with a best guess as you go. Place a mark next to the
questions you are not sure of and review later.
9.
Change answers ONLY if you are sure they are wrong.
10.
Work at you own pace. Don't be concerned about others. They may be just guessing.
11.
If time permits, review all of your answers. Verify that you marked all responses.
22

Examination Strategies - During the Examination
1.
Maximum your chances of passing the examination by maximizing your effort.

Dont spend too much time on one question. If, you dont know the answer to a question,
mark it, go on to the next question, and return to those difficult questions if time permits.
2.
If a question is presented in a context you are unfamiliar with, do not assume that you
cannot answer the question due to its context. The application problem presented in the
question will probably be applicable to all types of projects. For example, if the question
focuses on a problem at a hospital, and you have never done a hospital project, DO NOT
PASS OVER the questions.
3.
Fill out the answer sheet carefully and keep track of where you are in the test at all times.
4.
Don't spend too much time on one question.
5.
Guess wisely, eliminate choices.
6.
Try to relax, keep things in perspective.
7.
You are allowed to leave the room and go to the bathroom with a pass. Only one person is
allowed out of the room at a time and they will be monitored.
Multiple-Choice Test Questions

The Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Examination maximum score is 300 point which
consists of 293 multiple-choice questions and several writing activities worth a maximum of 7
points. These writing activities are designed to test your ability to solve construction-related
problems. Each multiple-choice test questions consist of 2 parts. They are called the Stem and the
Response Options and they are.
The stem is the statement or question.
The response options are the four-choices for each stem.
The four responses contains one correct response and three distractors or
plausible distractors. The key word here is plausible which means reasonably
persuasive at first sight with a hint of a possibility of not answering the question
being asked. These are considered the incorrect responses which do not receive
any credit.
23

Question Strategies - Selection of the Best Response
These multiple choice questions are used to test your ability to understand fundamental
construction information. Therefore, some helpful hints are provided below.
1.
Read the stem as if it were an independent, free standing statement. Anticipate the phrase
that would complete the thought expressed, then evaluate each answer choice against
your anticipated answer. It is important that you read each option, even if the first choice
matches the answer you anticipated because there may be a more plausible or better
response.
2.
Read the stem together with each answer choice as if it were a true-false statement. If the
answer makes the statement a false one, cross it out. Mark the choices that complete the
stem as true. Suspend judgment about the true choices until you have read all the options.
3.
Beware of words like not, but, except. Mark these words because they specify the
direction and limits of the answer.
4.
Watch out for words like always, never, and only . These must be interpreted as meaning
all of the time, not just 99% of the time. These options are frequently incorrect because
there are few statements that have no exceptions.
5.
If there are two or more options that could be the correct answer, compare them to each
other to determine the differences between them. Then, relate these differences with the
stem to deduce which of the responses is the best response or the most complete.
6.
Make an educated guess by eliminating the options that you know are incorrect.
7.
Test questions which ask for the best answer requires you to make a fine discrimination.
The best approach if you dont know the answer to is to apply the following strategies.
A.
Examine the responses for partially false statements.
B.
Consider the responses which are more general and eliminate.
C.
Look for statements which are false or impossible.
24

COMMUNICATION SKILLS
Effective Written Communication Skills
These are an essential skill in the construction industry. As technology and construction projects
become more complex, and our work force more diversified, more companies are being taken to
court for their poor writing correspondence, contracts and instructional materials. Therefore, all
correspondence must be clear, accurate, and brief. This section will discuss the purpose and
intent of formal business letters and memorandums.
There are two basic written forms of communication. They are the formal business letters
and the memorandum. The business letter is utilized between individuals who work for different
companies such as the Owner and Contractor or the Architect and the Contractor. The
memorandum is used to correspondence within a company.
Memorandums
A Memorandum is a form of correspondence utilized with a company. This form of
communications is usually a less formal type of communication. These are primarily utilized to
advise people of procedures, procedural changes, a disciplinary issue or to clarify existing
procedures. A memorandum contains the date, the To: the name of the primary receiver(s), the
From: the person sending the memo, the intent of the correspondence with the Job number, and
carbon copies. An example of a Memorandum is shown below.
MEMORANDUM
Date :
August 19, 20 _ _
To :
Jim Angelo, Project Manager Contractor, Inc
From :
Jim Bow, Superintendent
Hello Steve:
I sent a letter to Steve Blume, the Architect with Brayton AEC concerning the concrete mix
design submittal required from Western Concrete through their subcontractor LA Testing.
Mr. Blume stated that the concrete mix design must be based upon an Air Entrainment method.
He also said that the design must be submitted before August 25, 20_ _ addressed to his
attention. He will review and determine the adequacy of the design. We must have his approval
prior to the pouring of any concrete.
cc :
File
25

Business Letters
Business Letters are formal forms of communication which contain the date, name and address of
the sender, the name and address of the receiver, the intent of the correspondence with the Job
number, a formal introduction, a salutation and carbon copies. Below is an example of a formal
business letter.
Contractor, Inc
12909 Royal Road
Big Rapids, MI 49307
(231) 591-2370
August 19, 20_ _
James Bow, Superintendent
Steve Blume, Architect
Brayton AEC
P.O. Box 224, 001 Maple Street
Big Rapids, MI 49307
RE:
Jobsite, USA
Project Number 001
Dear Mr. Blume:

This is to confirm our telephone conversation on August 18, concerning the concrete mix design
criteria that will be utilized on the Jobsite, USA project. You stated that the L.A. Testing
company must submit a concrete mix design form based upon an Air Entrainment method before
August 25, 20_ _ for your review and approval prior to the pouring of any concrete. I talked with
Mike Lineman of L.A. Testing yesterday and he has agreed that the mix design will be submitted
to you for your approval on or before August 21. Your response to the mix design prior to
August 25, 20_ _ would be appreciated. If you have any question please contact me at (231) 5552323.
Sincerely,
Jim Bow
Superintendent
cc:
bc:
Mike Lineman, L.A. Testing

Carl Walker, Western Concrete
26

Effective Meeting Skills
The purpose of an Effective Meeting is to bring together a group of people with a common
interest that have relevant knowledge and expertise to accomplish some purpose or goal through
a process of group interaction. Therefore, there are two essentials steps in a productive meeting.
First, we must carefully preplan the meeting. Second we must provide meeting leadership while
conducting the meeting.
The pre planning of a meeting requires the leader to ask several basic questions to clarify the
purpose of the meeting, the roles of the group members and the specific tasks that must be
accomplished during the meeting. Answering the following questions prior to conducting the
meeting will improve your chances of a productive and successful meeting.
1.
What do I want to accomplish? You may have a general idea of what must be
accomplished, but have you clearly stated your objective? Is the objective realistic and
measurable? Are there too many objectives for the meeting and should some of these
objectives be accomplished using an informal meeting with the individuals?
2.
Are the members attending the meeting really necessary for its success? Many times
people are invited as a matter of courtesy this is a waste of their time and their
participation may disrupt the objectives of the meeting. Therefore, have you determined
who should be there, what their interest is and how they will contribute to the objectives
established?
3.
What do I need from each person to accomplish the objectives of this meeting? You
should know in advance the skills, expertise and knowledge of each person attending the
meeting. Therefore, have you determined what expertise they will bring with them? How
will this expertise contribute to the tasks or meeting objectives being discussed? Will
there be any attitude or personality clashes and what effect will this have on the group
decision making process?
4.
Have I provided each group member with a descriptive working agenda far enough in
advance? A working agenda provides a greater opportunity for the members to focus their
attention on the meeting objectives, and to clearly develop ideas and solutions. Therefore
to ensure the success of your meeting, have you discussed the topics prior to the meeting
for initial input and commitment? Have you identified and discussed with each group
member what information they need to have available? Is there any advance preparation
the members should do? Can the objectives be met in the time allotted?
A successful meeting requires the leader to set specific, realistic and measurable objectives that
can be used to provide satisfaction to the group members when they are accomplished and the
ability to reassess their efforts when they are not accomplished.
27

Some of the most common purposes or goals of a task-oriented meeting are to: plan, make a
decision, implement a plan, evaluate, solve a problem, identify a problem, inform, train, build
cooperation and commitment or to provide involvement.
Working Agenda Content
The Working Agenda should include the following items. Who should attend? When and where
should the meeting be held? What is the subject of the meeting? What is the purpose? What are
the specific objectives? Have you described each topic in paragraph from outlining who should
come prepared? Have you set time frames for each topic? Are the agenda items sequenced
properly? The following working agenda will provide you with the format and content:
TO:
FROM:
PROJECT:
Jim, Carol, Ken, Vicki, Keith, Deb

Ed B.
Jobsite, USA
SUBJECT:
DATE/TIME:
PLACE:
Activities Planned for September 2 - 15

Wednesday, August 27 from 10:00 A.M. - 11:15 A.M.
Jobsite, USA in the Conference Room 107
PURPOSE:
SPECIFIC
OBJECTIVES:
To Identify Potential Problems with the Schedule
10:00 - 10:15
CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES THAT MUST BE COMPLETED

Ed will discuss the completion dates of the activities for two weeks.
10:15 - 10:30
MATERIAL DELAYS
Carol says there will be a two week delay on CU #1 & ACCU #4. Jim will
discuss the impact on the erection of the structural steel. Keith will discuss
the impact on the electrical and HVAC. Vicki will discuss the impact on
the process piping and instrumentation.
10:30 - 10:45
INCREASE IN CREW SIZES AND AREA RESTRAINTS

The structural concrete, steel erection and precast concrete erection are
behind schedule. Carol, Deb, and Jim will discuss increasing crew sizes.
10:45 - 11:00
DESIGN CHANGES
We will discuss how these changes will be implemented. There has been a
major footing design change to Pier F2. Ken will discuss the completion.
PROJECT NO. 001
Review the Planned Activities

Generate Ideas for the Material Delay and Sub Problems
28

Meeting Minutes Content
The Meeting Minutes should be recorded during the meeting. The minutes should include the
Members in Attendance, Members Absent, Date/Time, Place, Agenda Topics, A Summary of the
Topics Discussed, Action to be Taken, Names of the person(s) responsible for Implementing and
a Time Limit for Completion. The Minutes should be distributed within 24 hours to provide
immediate feedback. The following minutes will provide you with the format and content:
SUBJECT:
DATE/TIME:
PLACE:
MINUTES OF THE PLANNING MEETING

Wednesday, August 27 from 10:00 A.M. - 10:45 A.M.
Jobsite, USA in the Conference Room 107
PRESENT:
ABSENT:
PROJECT:
Carol, Ken, Vicki, Keith, Deb, Ed

Jim - Vacation
Jobsite, USA
PROJECT NO. 001
CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES THAT MUST BE COMPLETED

Ed indicated that the redesigned Pier Footing F2 must be stripped by Sept. 6, all step footings by
Sept. 8, and structural steel columns and beams by Sept. 12. Deb indicated that the South wall
footing detail is needed. Ed said he would obtain a drawing by Aug. 28 at 10:00 A.M.
MATERIAL DELAYS
Carol indicated that the supplier said that Cooling Unit #1 (ACCU #1) will not arrive at the site
until Sept. 27. Ken suggested that we leave an opening in the Roof to drop the unit through.
Bob indicated that this will effect the Crane expected to leave the site on Sept. 15. Deb agreed to
call and request that the date be extended to Sept. 17.
INCREASE IN CREW SIZES AND AREA RESTRAINTS
Deb and Ken agreed to increase their crew sizes on the structural concrete and steel erection.
There will be 10 concrete workers and 6 ironworkers. Due to limited storage Keith and Carol
will store their materials and equipment at the Maple Street Building.
DESIGN CHANGES
Carol asked for a Contract Change Order for drawing E3, Revision #7. Ken said that the footing
design change to Pier F2 is expected to be complete by Sept. 2.
ADDITIONAL CONCERNS
Deb said that the unloading of deliveries has been extremely difficult, therefore we will
implement a daily schedule of times for material arrivals. Ed said he would develop a sign-up
sheet by Aug 28.
.
NEXT MEETING: Thursday September 6, at 3:45 PM in Conference Room 107
29

Pre-construction Meeting Content
Many times the General Requirements (01) state that the contractor must call a Pre-construction
Meeting normally within 15 days of the Notice to Proceed. This meeting will be attended by the
Owner's Representative, Architect, Contractor's Superintendent(s), Major Subcontractors and
Suppliers. Therefore, the working agenda should follow the guidelines in the specifications. The
working agenda should list the topics and describe the attendance and submittal requirements in
paragraph form. The Pre-Construction meeting should cover topics such as List of contacts;
Insurance certificates needed with amounts; Planned schedule with expected crew sizes; Material
delivery requirements; Submittal dates for Shop-drawings, etc; Permits; Change order
procedures; Progress payments; Warranties; Record drawings; Operation and Maintenance
manuals; Safety program; Ordinances; Inspections; Site storage; Progress meeting attendance;
Underground utilities; Collective bargaining and Prevailing wage requirements.
Meeting Leadership Skills
The Meeting Leadership needed to conduct a productive meeting requires the leader to provide
group leadership skills in the following areas. The first area is that the leader must Listen
attentively. One approach you might want to try is to paraphrase in a sentence or two, the major
idea presented by the group member. This technique has two advantages. First, you will be better
able to understand what others in the group are trying to communicate. Second, your example
will encourage others to better understand the ideas presented in the meeting.
The leader must also Respond constructively to ideas. This can be done through a technique
developed by William Gordon and George Prince, founders of Synectics, Inc., called the
Spectrum Approach. The Spectrum Approach is designed to encourage group members to build
on the contributions of their peers by identifying and correcting noticeable weaknesses in ideas in
a positive constructive manner. The Spectrum approach requires a leader to do the following
after an idea has been expressed: 1) State what you like about the idea, 2) State what you think
are its weaknesses, 3) Provide a suggestion for each weakness and always follow these in
sequence. A third area the leader must be cognizant of is to match their decision-making style to
each situation. Successful leaders make decisions for the group sometimes and other times allow
the group to make the decision depending on the situation. The fourth area is the leader must
ensure that they solicit ideas from all group members and resolve conflicts within the group. A
leader must be constantly aware of silence and dominance within the group. This requires leaders
to sometimes solicit ideas from the silent members or to politely intervene if one person is
dominating the conversation.
Finally, in a meeting, people should be facing each other. All other arrangements have one
person doing all of the talking. As a senior member who is relinquishing authority, you should be
aware of the power positions in the room such as away from the door, near the blackboard, back
to the window. You may want to avoid these positions since they can add immensely to the
intimidation factor that you are trying to minimize.
30

David Hon in his book titled, Meetings That Matter, says that In a Task-oriented meeting, the
most important aspect of the meeting should be the productivity that is possible through a group
mind (p 21). He also states that for the group to achieve high productivity they must follow a six
step mental sequence for each topic. The leaders responsibility, in a Task-oriented Meeting, is to
ensure that all activities are covered thoroughly. The leader must also decide which activities to
concentrate on with the group. An outline of Hons six mental activity sequence that should be
taken into consideration, for each topic being discussed, is provided below (p 22).
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
1.
1.
2.
Goal Setting
Set the boundaries of the meeting.
Solicit ideas from the group without direction.
Obtain the groups dedication to the project by letting:
a.
The group feel capable of achieving the results.
b.
Everyone feel they had a chance to shape the goals.
Information Gathering
Require that each subordinate have the information necessary to develop the ideas.
Summarize the facts, opinions and conclusions to one page and distribute the information
to all group members before the meeting.
Ask questions such as: Is there backup data on that? or How reliable have those been.
Problem Solving
The leader coordinates the group to:
a.
Identify the problem and sort out causes and effects.
b.
Develop a range of solutions from the group.
c.
Sort out best solutions agreed upon by the group.
d.
Restate the best solutions and let someone write them on the board.
Decision Making
Inform the group of your decision as soon as possible and thank them for their help.
Delegate the activities according to closeness of a members ideas and let the group decide
on how to complete the activities.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Action
Divide the activities up.
Commit to a schedule for each segment.
Estimate the materials and equipment required.
Sequence the activities.
1.
Coordinating
Monitor the progress by establishing milestones and measurable results.
31

Effective Oral Communication Skills
Some people would say that managing people would require primarily leadership and
motivational skills. These skills depend completely on Effective Oral Communication Skills
because you cannot effectively lead or motivate someone that you cannot communicate with,
therefore, managing people means communicating effectively. Communication is defined as the
actual exchange of understanding so that the other person behaves in a manner which
demonstrates understanding. Whenever contact is made communication occurs, but the meanings
embedded in the conversation are in the people not in the words that are exchanged. This means
that meanings cannot be transferred from one mind to another, only the words can be transferred.
The difficulty is that words have multiple meanings . For example, studies have shown that the
500 most common words in construction have more than 14,000 definitions.
The actual exchange of understanding so that both the sender and receiver understand the
message in exactly the same manner after stating it only once is not normal. Therefore, the
sender must constantly analyze the situation to ensure that you are communicating effectively
and that the message is being understood. Communicating makes up approximately 80% of your
time and most of this is done verbally. According to some oral research studies, the research has
proven that the Retention Rate of the Listener (Receiver) is:
10% of What they Hear
20% of What they Read
30% of What they See and
50% of What they Hear and See
What is even more impressive about the research is that the Sender remembers:
70% of What they Say and
90% of What they Say and Do.
This suggests that it is extremely valuable for you to have the listener restate in their own words
what they have understood to be the message. In conclusion, if you want to effectively
communicate with another person and find out what part of the communication they understood
you must execute these things. First, ask open-ended questions and make the words come out of
their mouth. Finally, if you are communicating procedures they must be in writing so that the
receiver has something to refer to if they are unsure of the steps or the sequence.
32

Communication Skills Exercise
1.
Which of the following documents is utilized for correspondence between the A/E or
Owner and the Contractor?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
Which of the following documents is used for correspondence between the home office
and the job site?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
As a follow-up to the meeting.

At the beginning of the meeting.
About one day after the meeting.
About one day prior to the meeting.
Which document describes the Suggested Agenda for the Preconstruction Meeting?
A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
Job Diary.
Memorandum.
Construction Report.
Formal Business Letter.
What is the best time to distribute the Working Agenda to the Participants?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Job Diary.
Memorandum.
General Conditions
General Requirements
Technical Specifications
Supplementary Conditions
What is the best time to distribute the Meeting Minutes to the Participants?
A.
B.
C.
D.
At the beginning of the meeting.

About one day after the meeting.
About one hour prior to the meeting.
About one day prior to the meeting.
33

6.
Which of the following descriptions are the primary content items for the meeting
minutes?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
Which of the following descriptions are the content items for the working agenda?
A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
Spectrum Approach.
Task-oriented Approach.
Decision Making Approach.
Listening Attentively Approach.
What are the mental activities that must be taken into consideration for each topic during
the planning phase of a meeting?
A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
Plan with goals and specific activities, priority, time needed, scheduled events.
Purpose, specific objectives, time frame, topical headings with paragraph, role.
Activity description, days, information needed crew size, material & equipment.
Attendance, topical headings with paragraph stating person assigned, completion.
What is the name of the approach designed to encourage group members to build on the
contributions of their peers when responding to an idea in a meeting?
A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
To, from, project, date, time place and subject.

Purpose, specific objectives, time frame, topical headings with paragraph, role.
Objective clear and measurable, attendance, role of each person, their expertise.
Attendance, topical headings with paragraph stating person assigned, completion.
Coordinating, Listening Attentively, Responding Critically, and Soliciting Ideas.

Planning, Timing, Coordinating, Probing, Responding Critically, and Follow-up.
Goals, Gathering, Problem Solving, Decision Making, Action Plan & Monitoring.
Goals, Planning, Scheduling, Priorities, Analyzing, Delegating, and Monitoring.
What are the leadership skills needed to conduct a productive meeting?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Planning, Probing Questions, Responding Critically, and Decision Making.

Planning, Timing, Coordinating, Probing, Responding Critically, and Followup.
Listening Attentively, Responding Constructively, Soliciting All Ideas, and
Matching Decision Making to the Situation.
Coordinating, Listening Selectively, Responding Critically, Soliciting supportive
Ideas and Adjusting Decision Making to the situation.
34

11.
Which one of the following is transferred from one mind to another?

A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
What is the retention percentage of a listener in an oral conversation?

A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
10
50
70
90
Which of the following communication methods is the most effective in knowing that the
communication has been understood?
A.
B.
C.
D.
15.
10
20
50
90
What percentage of a conversation does the sender remember of what they say and do?
A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
Words.
Meaning.
Information.
Understanding.
You the sender should ask closed ended-questions and tell them twice.
You the sender should ask open-ended questions and make them speak.
You the sender should ask how they feel and their attitude toward the activity.
You the sender should tell them what to do and get them back to work quickly.
Which of the following is the best example of an open-ended question?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Do you understand what work is suppose to be completed?

Please go to the tool shed and get me a shovel.
What steps are you going to take to complete the activity?
How do you feel about completing the activities assigned?
Check Answers
35

Evaluation Criteria for a Memorandum
Effective business writing requires the writer to be precise in their word use, clear in purpose,
accurate in stating the facts, and always aware of the legal implications of what is being written
and recorded. It should be understood that all writing including post-it notes, graphics, or
electronic transmissions are considered a business document and every document has the
potential to become a public document which is permanent.
A Memo, whether they are in paper or electronic form, is used to transmit information within an
organization or company, therefore, they must be accurate, correct, and complete. The evaluation
criteria for a complete memorandum is shown below.
The Memorandum Format:
!
Used correct format with the internal address including the

(To:
From: Date: Subject );
Contained your initials next to your typed name in paper memos to demonstrate that you
have personally reviewed the contents;
Skipped a line between paragraphs;
Informed the proper party in a positive light.
The Memorandum Structure:

!
Started with a brief statement giving the background and purpose;
Identified the main points quickly but completely and the memo should include
recommendations and rationales.
Concluded by describing the next step including the people you have contacted, the
expected completion date and the person the task has been assigned to.
Offered to provide follow up or help with implementation.
Finally, The Memorandum must be:

!
Proofread and run through spell check and grammar check.
36

Evaluation Criteria for a Business Letter and E-mail
The Business Letter whether they are in paper or electronic form, is used to transmit information
to professionals in other companies. Therefore, they must be accurate, correct, and complete. The
evaluation criteria for a complete business letter is shown below.
The Business Letter Format:
!
Contained the correct date, proper addresses, project address, tracking number, project
name/number, salutation, closing, signature and title, cc, bc, enclosure.
The Business Letter Content:

!
Contained a professional tone which was complete and correctly stated.
Referenced the complete scope content items.
Created and developed a detailed explanation of the individual items and the total impact.
Referenced all other documents which may impact the decision.
Requested confirmation and provided numerous contact options.
Stated acceptance time required to proceed.
The Business Letter Style:

!
Used a professional tone.
Used advanced and correct grammar with sophisticated punctuation, compound and
complex sentence structure and proper page design.
The E-mail Format:

!
Adopted the same high standards of communication as a business letter.
Followed the evaluation criteria stated above and proofread your work.
37

Project Writing Situations Communication Skill Instructions
All of these case incidents utilize this general information concerning the Taggart Building
project and the construction company. This is Project Number: 234
Client
Architect
Project Manager
Offices International
Pro Design
Ruse Construction
Keith Corbeil, Owner Rep
Mary Bockstahler, AIA
Ernest Meyer, CPC
676 Bell Street
775 Riverfront ST.
345 Michigan Avenue
Big Rapids. MI 49307
Cadillac, MI 49601
Mount Pleasant, MI 48858
(231) 796-6122
(231) 594-3100
(517) 485- 8535
corbeilk@officesint.com
bocckstahler@prodesign.com
Ernie@ruse.com
The superintendent at the job site is Rick Fornsorg. The phone number at the Taggart job site is
(517) 555-1213. Ricks cell phone number is (231) 250- 5555 and his e-mail address is
rick@ruse.com. The job site is located seventy five miles from the home office.
ORGANIZATION - Four employees report directly to Ruse: Jeff Skala, Chief Financial Officer;
Ernest Meyer, V.P., Estimating/Project Management; Carol Pery, Office Manager; and John
Fryberger, General Superintendent.
OFFICERS - Bruce Ruse, President; Jeff Skala, Chief Financial Officer and Treasurer; Ernest
Meyer, Vice President; Carol Percy, Office Manager and Secretary.
BOARD OF DIRECTORS - Bruce Ruse, Chairperson; Jeff Skala; Ernest Meyer; John Fryberger,
Harley Wallace, Attorney; and Claude Cook, President of Commercial Bank.
PROPERTY - The company owns an office building located outside Manton, Michigan. Ruse
Construction also owns a yard where all company equipment is stored. The yard is located
across the street from the office. Finally, the company owns or leases considerable equipment
including four office trailers for use by its field employees.
Given the Gimpy Case Communication Exercise and the Design Omission Case Communication
Exercise, and that these incidents all occurred on the same day at the job site, complete the
correspondence appropriate for the incidents described on the following pages. Your written
correspondence will be evaluated using the evaluation criteria provided.
38

Communication Skill Instructions for the Gimpy Case
Case:
Gimpy
Participants:
Roy Stokes, Laborer (Gimpy)

Stan Jackson, Carpenter
Mike Wards, Carpenter Foreman
Your Position:
Job Superintendent - Rick Fornsorg
Its Wednesday August 13 at 10:45 A.M. and everything had been going great until you heard the
clatter of shattering glass. You ran to the door to see what had happened. Roy saw you just as
you spotted him, and he slowly dropped his raised arm. But he knew you had seen him, and he
also knew that you hadn't missed noticing that the front window on the truck was smashed. You
didn't even have to tell him to come to the trailer, but as he entered the door his first words were,
"It's all Stan Jackson's fault." So you went back to the door and called Stan to come into the
trailer.
Almost as soon as Jackson joined you and Roy Stokes, Roy launched into his tale of woe. "I just
can't take it any more, Rick. Sure, I threw the rock at Jackson, but a man can just take so much.
Everybody's got a breaking point. He wont' leave me alone. Gimpy this, Gimpy that. Gotcha,
Gimpy. Hey, Gimpy the eighth dwarf, where's Snow White? I mean, he just doesn't let up."
Before you could get a word out, Stan piped up with his side, "Hey, can't a guy kid a pal? He
takes everything so serious. He can't even take a joke. He's getting dangerous! Hell, if I got mad
at everybody that kidded me, I'd..."
Additional Information:
1.
Roy Stokes hurt his leg in an auto accident about two years ago and ever since has had a
noticeable limp.
2.
The above incident represents the first time company equipment has been broken as a
result of a fight.
3.
Neither Stokes nor Jackson have been involved in any fights on the job before.
4.
The company has a written policy which says that employees who engage in fighting are
subject to dismissal.
39

Project Writing Exercise for the Gimpy Case
Correspondence
Instructions:
CASE NAME
Given the Gimpy Case information provided, if anyone else must be

informed about this incident, write a brief memo outlining the incident and
what action you have taken.
Gimpy
MEMORANDUM
TO:
PROJECT NAM E ___________________

PROJECT NUMBER ________________
FROM:
SUBJECT:
DATE:
40

Communication Skill Instructions for the Design Omission Case
Case:
Design Omission
Participants:
John Fryberger, General Superintendent

Sidewalk Subcontractor
Your Position
Last week you called the surveying firm to set the grade stakes for the curb and gutter. Its
Wednesday August 13 at 12:30 P.M. and you have just instructed the sidewalk, curb, and gutter
subcontractor on what needs to be done when you notice that the building entrance is about 10
feet higher than the curb and gutter grade. The building is set back from the road about ten feet,
therefore a retaining wall is required. You make a note to yourself to check the plans for a
retaining wall. You arrive at the job trailer at 1:12 P.M. and you review the plans and find that
none of the drawings indicate a retaining wall. You also realize that a retaining wall is along a
state business route and it will be required with this much of a change in elevation. Plans for a
retaining wall will have to be submitted based upon their standard plan details to the Michigan
Department of Transportation (MDOT) and shop drawings must be submitted and approved by
MDOT before installation begins. The preliminary design for the retaining wall indicates it will
be 12 feet high, 15 inches thick and 100 feet long, with #4 rebar horizontally and vertically. You
expected to attain your occupancy permit by next Monday.
As you turn to walk away the curb and gutter subcontractor calls you over and he says "Look at
these grade stakes, the slope of the road on each side is different," and you indicate that the
surveying firm must have staked the road wrong.
41

Project Writing Exercise for the Design Omission Case
Correspondence
Instructions:
Given the Design Omission Case information provided, write a formal

business letter to the Architect on the page provided below. The formal
letter is to inform the Architect of this design omission and any impact it
may have on the project.
BUSINESS LETTER
42

ENGINEERING CONCEPTS
Constructors must have a basic understanding of the natural characteristics of materials which are
incorporated into the construction process. This information can be obtained from published
technical reports and advertising material prepared by suppliers. Some sources of information
concerning technical properties of specific materials can be found in these sources.
Sweets Catalog compiles technical construction material advertising literature published by
suppliers. It is organized by the Construction Specification Institutes Master Format which is
organized by 16 Divisions. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) is an
organization engaged in the standardization of technical specifications and testing methods.
American Standards Association (ASA) develops national industrial standards representing
manufacturers, technical organizations and government agencies. Underwriters Laboratories
(UL) is a nonprofit organization which investigates and tests materials, products, equipment,
construction methods and construction systems in its laboratories. A UL-APPROVED seal of
approval is recognized as a safeguard against hazards to life and property. Many specifications
require UL approvals. Thomas Register complies manufacturers information on various
manufactured products.
Engineering Material Properties
The Materials most widely used in the construction industry are aggregates, asphalt, Portland
cement concrete, masonry, iron, steel and wood. Therefore, a basic understanding of their
material properties is reviewed here. The Specifications are developed to provide the contractor
with an in-depth description of what materials to use, the characteristics the materials must have,
the installation procedures the contractor must follow, the manufacturers instructions and the
inspection and testing procedures that will be utilized to verify the proper installation and
strengths. The properties most often considered when selecting materials are outlined below.
Aggregate Properties
Aggregates are particles of random shape and size. They are found in nature as sand, gravel, or
rock that can be crushed into particles. Aggregate sizes vary from several inches to the smallest
grains of sand. Particles smaller than the size of a grain of sand are considered impurities.
Aggregates are normally used as bases placed on top of the soil to uniformly distribute the load
over the soil for a footing or road. The qualities that indicate the usefulness of aggregate for the
construction industry are the weight, the strength of the particles to resist repetitive freezing and
thawing, the strength of the mass to transmit a compressive force, the strength of the individual
particles to resist being crushed the strength of the aggregate particles to resist wear by abrasion,
the adhesion of the aggregate particles to a cementing agent such as Portland cement or asphalt
and the permeability of the mass. Weight is important for large stone used for riprap. Riprap is
placed at the end of culverts or along the edge of a body of water to prevent erosion. The
aggregate quality of resisting weathering is called soundness of the aggregate. The aggregate
43

particles at the surface of asphalt or concrete are subject to abrasion from the vehicle wheels.
Also, in an asphalt pavement the aggregate particles throughout the asphalt pavement are subject
to abrasion because the pavement is continuously shifting under the weight of the vehicles which
causes the particles to rub against each other. Finally, permeability is a measure of the ease with
which water will flow through an aggregates voids. High permeability is needed if the aggregate
is used as a filter or drain.
Aggregate Size and Gradation are important for all construction applications. The most
important features are range of sizes and gradation. Gradation is the distribution within the range
covered. A set of sieves stacked on top of each other is used to determine size and gradation. A
sample of the aggregate to be analyzed is placed in the top sieve which has the largest holes. The
Sieve sizes commonly used for aggregates in the construction industry and the actual dimensions,
the sizes designated in millimeters and inches or fractions of an inch are shown below. The sieve
designations indicate the clear openings between wires which are squares with the given
dimensions. When a size is given as a number, such as a No. 40 sieve, it means there are that
number of holes in a lineal inch. Therefore, the No. 40 sieve has a total of 40 openings per lineal
inch and 1600 openings in a square inch. The openings are not 1/40 of an inch in width because
the wires take up much of the space. Therefore, the openings are actually smaller but it is an
approximate method for estimating opening sizes in inches.
Sieve Designation
mm
Sieve
Aggregate
Description
inches
Opening Size in Inches
4 inches
4.00
75 mm
3 inches
3.00
37.5 mm
1-1/2 inches
1.50
19.0 mm
3/4 inch
0.75
12.5
inch
0.50
6.3 mm
1/4 inch
0.25
4.76 mm
No. 4
0.187
2.36 mm
No. 8
0.0937
Course Sand No. 4-10
1.18 mm
No. 16
0.0469
Medium Sands
No 10 - No 40
0.6 mm
No. 30
0.0234
0.3 mm
No. 50
0.0117
0.15 mm
No. 100
0.0059
0.074 mm
No. 200
0.0029
44
Cobbles above 3inches
Coarse Gravels
3" - 3/4"
Fine Gravels
3/4 - No. 4
Fine Sands
No. 40 - No. 200
Below 200 Silt/Clay

Gradations can be identified on a graph as well graded, uniform, or gap graded. Well-graded
means sizes of particles within the entire range are in approximately equal amounts. Uniform
gradation means that a large percentage of the particles are of approximately the same size. Gap
graded means that most of the particles are of a large size or a small size with very few particles
of an intermediate size. The result of a sieve analysis is normally graphed using the percentage
retained for each gradation level and plotted on a gradation curve. The shape of the curve
provides visual help in identifying the type of gradation. A line nearly vertical indicates that a
large quantity of materials is retained on one or possibly two sieves. This is considered a
Uniform gradation. A line with a constant slope indicates that approximately the same amount of
material is retained on each successive sieve. This is considered a well-graded gradation. A
horizontal line or nearly horizontal line indicates that is no change or little change in percentage
finer through several successive sieves. This is considered a Gap gradation.
The American Society for Testing Materials ASTM Standard C125 defines various types of
aggregates as follows. Course Aggregate is defined as aggregate predominately retained on the
No. 4 (4.76-mm) sieve. Fine aggregate is defined as aggregate passing the 3/8 inch sieve and
almost entirely passing the No. 4 sieve and predominately retained on the No. 200 sieve. Gravel
is a granular material predominately retained on the No. 4 sieve and resulting from natural
disintegration of rock. Sand is a granular material passing the 3/8 inch sieve and almost entirely
passing the No. 4 sieve and predominately retained on the No. 200 sieve. Bank Gravel is a gravel
found in natural deposits, usually more or less intermixed with fine material, such as sand or
clay. Normally referred to as gravelly clay, gravelly sand, clayey gravel, and sandy gravel.
Concrete Mix Properties
Concrete is composed of 60-80 percent aggregates, Sand and gravel, and 20-40 percent of active
ingredients which is water and Portland cement. The commonly used aggregates and Portland
cement and water normally produces a concrete mixture which weighs 150 - 154 pounds per
cubic foot. There are numerous variables that affect the properties of concrete. The ease with
which concrete can be modified by its variables can often work to the disadvantage of the user
unless quality control measures are followed precisely. The Portland cement when mixed with
the water produces a chemical reaction called hydration and it forms a bond to other cement
particles, to the aggregates, and to any reinforcement that it contacts. Portland cement does not
need air to harden or set. The chemical reaction will harden as well under water as well as if it is
exposed to air. The heat generated when the Portland cement and water chemically react is called
the heat of hydration, and can be a critical factor in the use of concrete.
Portland Cement for individual use is shipped in 90 pound bags. ASTM identifies five types of
Portland cement with are produced for different applications as outlined below. Type 1 Portland
cement is reasonably resistant to most forms of chemical attack that might occur naturally. A
Type II Portland is used where resistance to moderate sulfate attack is important, as in areas
where sulfate concentration in groundwater is higher than normal but not severe.
45

A Type III Portland cement is called a High-Early-Strength because it achieves its specified
strength in 7 days rather than in 28 days, but there is also a corresponding increase in the heat of
hydration. A Type IV Portland cement referred to as Low Heat is used where the rate and amount
of heat generated must be minimized. It is primarily used in large mass placements of concrete
such as deep or thick foundations. A Type V Portland cement has high resistance to sulfate attack
is important. It is primarily used where the soil or ground water contains high sulfate
concentrations.
The Water/Cement Ratio determines the strength of Portland cement concrete. This ratio is the
most important parameter used to control the compressive strength of concrete. There is a
minimum Water/cement ratio required for complete hydration of all the cement molecules. But,
an excessive amount of water reduces its strength, hardness, durability and resistance to chemical
attack and resistance to freeze-thaw. Thus the construction worker who adds water to the mix to
make it more workable is significantly reducing all the desirable characteristics of the finished
concrete. All of the desirable properties of the finished concrete, such as durability, hardness,
abrasion resistance, etc. are improved as the strength increases.
Air-Entrainment of Portland cements is the process of adding microscopic bubbles of air which
are distributed uniformly throughout the mix. Air entrainment provides improved resistance to
freeze-thaw and to scaling caused by chemicals and salts used for ice and snow removal.
Concrete Reinforcement
Concrete Reinforcement is used in most structural applications because Portland cement concrete
is quite weak in tension. Therefore, it is reinforced for tension with deformed reinforcing bar also
known as rebar. In the United States, the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) Manual of
Standard Practice describes the selection, use and standard placement methods for bar supports
and reinforcing bar. The bar supports are commonly known as chairs and bolsters. Reinforcing is
manufactured for a variety of yield stresses or grades. The most common reinforcement grades
are Grade 40, Grade 50, Grade 60 and Grade 75. For these grades, the yield stress is 40,000,
50,000, 60,000, and 75,000 psi, respectively. Reinforcement is rolled into round bars with
deformed surfaces designed to improve the adhesion to the concrete.
There are a few different types of Concrete Reinforcement. The two primary types used in the
United States are Welded Wire Fabric (WWF) and Deformed reinforcing. Welded Wire Fabric
(WWF) containing of wires arranged in a square or rectangular configuration and welded at their
intersection. This designation identifies a Plain wire is denoted by the letter W [MW] and
deformed wire by the letter D [MD]. The brackets [ ] indicate Metric Units.
46

The Welded Wire fabric designation of: WWF 6 x 12 - W16 x W8 [152 x 305 - MW103 x
MW52]. This is identified as follows. The 6 indicates the Spacing (inches) of the longitudinal
wires which is 6 inches [152mm] in this example. The 12 indicates the Spacing (inches) of the
traverse wires which is 12 inches [305 mm] in this example. The W16 [MW103] indicates the
longitudinal plain wire size and the W8 [MW52] indicates the traverse wire size.
Deformed Reinforcing Bar is specified as a bar number such as a #3 bar or #4 bar. The diameter is
determined by taking the bar # and dividing by 8. Therefore, a #3 bar is 3/8 inch in diameter. A #4
bar is 4/8 or inch. The Deformed Rebar table below provides the identifying number on
reinforcing and its corresponding Nominal Dimension in inches, the Diameter and the Weight
per Foot in Pounds.
Bar No.
Bar size in
inches
Diameter
in inches
Area
Sq. in.
Perimeter in
inches
W eight-lbs per
foot
1/8
1/4 Rd.
0.250
0.05
0.786
0.167
3/8 rd.
0.375
0.11
1.178
0.376
rd.
0.500
0.20
1.571
0.668
5/8 rd.
0.625
0.31
1.963
1.043
3/4 rd.
0.750
0.44
2.356
1.502
7/8 rd.
1.875
0.60
2.749
2.044
1 rd.
1.000
0.79
3.142
2.670
1 sq.
1.128
1000
3.544
3.400
10
1 1/8 sq.
1.270
1.27
3.990
4.303
11
1 1/4 sq.
1.410
1.56
4.430
5.313
14
1 sq.
1.693
2,25
5.320
7.650
18
2 sq.
2.257
4.00
7.909
13.600
Types of Bar Supports

Bar supports are used to position reinforcing bars in reinforced concrete to ensure a minimum
amount of concrete cover over the rebar. The bar supports may be made of steel wire, plastic or
precast concrete. Bar supports are not normally shown on the plans and they are not furnished by
the reinforcing steel supplier which generally means that the contractor must follow the standard
which is incorporated by reference and the reference standard is found in the Technical
Specifications. Normally, the Bar Supports are not found on the Contractors plans.
47

Reinforcement Placement
Concrete Reinforcement is Placed according to a moment diagram for a beam that is supported
by two columns under typical load conditions. The beam will be under tension on the bottom of
the section at mid span between the two columns and it will be under tension on the top of the
section over the columns. Therefore, you must place the proper size of reinforcing bar, located in
the correct position in both regions to sustain these tensile forces.
As a general rule, the minimum standard Concrete Cover over Reinforcement is specified from
the outside of the bar to the face of the concrete and they are based on the size of the bar and the
location as follows. Three inches at sides where concrete is cast against earth and on bottoms of
footings. Two inches for bars larger than a #5 where concrete surfaces would be exposed to the
weather and 1-1/2 inches for smaller than #5 bars. 1-1/2 inches over spirals and ties in columns.
1-1/2 inches to nearest bars on the top, bottom and sides of beams and girders. Also, a 3/4 of an
inch cover is needed for #11 rebar and smaller bars on top, bottom and sides of joists and on top
and bottom of slabs where concrete surfaces are not exposed to the ground or weather. 1-1/2
inches for #14 and #18 bars. Also, 3/4 of an inch cover is required from the faces of all walls not
exposed directly to the ground for #11 and smaller bars.
Masonry Properties
Organizations such as the International Masonry Institute (IMA), and the Brick Institute of
America (BIA) have established an engineered approach to Masonry Design and Construction.
Their efforts continue to provide the latest in engineering data, design guidelines, and
construction practices for masonry construction. Masonry wall units are held together with
mortar and the quality of the mortar mix effects the wall. Mortar binds the masonry units
together into a single permanent structure and it seals the joints against moisture and air
penetration. The mortar acts as the bond for the various components of the masonry structure
such as reinforcement rebar, metal ties and anchor bolts. Portland cement, lime, sand and water
are combined to produce mortars which have good durability and high compressive strengths.
But, masonry cement, sand, and water are combined for convenience. The masonry cement is
pre-blended by the manufacturer and it will normally include lime, an air-entraining agent, and
other ingredients which produce the desired properties. The properties of the individual
ingredients are provided below.
Portland cement used in mortars allows Types I, II, and III. Air-entraining Portland cement
should be used with extreme caution since the research has shown that there are wide variations
in the actual measured air content at the job site. The compressive strength of the mortar depends
upon the proportion of Portland cement in the mix.
Hydrated Lime is essential to good quality mortar. It is a key ingredient and it is important to
understand its characteristics and effects on mortar. The lime component improves workability,
elasticity and water retention. Water retention in a mortar prevents rapid loss of water from
48

mortar in contact with the masonry units. Lime also improves its bond strength and improves the
mortars plasticity and flexibility. Lime undergoes the least amount of change in volume which
means it shrinks the least after hardening. Mortar is resistant to weather and should be able to
resist strong winds, freezing temperatures, and alternate wet and dry weather. These cycles are
beneficial to lime-based mortar, and they increase the overall strength of the mortar as it ages.
Sand acts as a filler in mortar which contributes to the strength of the mix. Natural sand is used
in most mortars. Sand decreases the shrinkage of mortar which occurs in setting and drying,
therefore, minimizing cracking. It is important to use a good grade of sand. Water used in mortar
should be clean and free from alkalis, salts, acids, and organic matter. Retempering is the
addition of water to mortar mixes that have lost water while sitting on the mortar board. The
practice of retempering will reduce the compressive strength, but it increases the bond strength of
the mortar mix. Many times, the CSI Division 04 Masonry, the technical specifications limit the
number of times that retempering is permitted and establishes a time limit for the use of a mortar.
Types of Masonry Cement
As mentioned before, Masonry Cement is a pre-blended by the manufacturer and used for
convenience at the job site. The American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) recognizes five
types of mortars for masonry. They are types M, S, N, O, and K. Type M is the strongest. Types
O and K are the weakest. Until recently, the masonry codes recognized all five mortar types, but,
the latest masonry codes focus primarily on the use of Type S and Type N.
Type N mortar is a medium-strength mortar recommended for use in exposed masonry above
grade. Typically it is used for exposed exterior building walls, interior load-bearing walls and
interior non load-bearing walls or partitions, chimneys, and parapet walls. Type S mortar is a
medium-high strength mortar which is used where high bond strength and lateral strength are
important. Type S mortar is recommended for use in foundations, basements, exterior walls,
interior load-bearing walls, reinforced walls and non-reinforced masonry where maximum
flexural strength is required.
Types of Masonry Walls and Their Components
Masonry Walls are formed from various types of masonry units and their backing can be block,
brick, wood or concrete. The descriptions below describe the most common types of masonry
walls. The concrete block wall consists of masonry units bonded together with mortar to form
load bearing or non-load bearing walls above or below grade. The concrete masonry block units
come in various sizes and wall thicknesses. The solid brick wall consists of two tiers or wythes of
brick which is bonded together with header bricks. The composite wall consists of face brick
with a header brick interlocked back into a block backup wall containing header blocks to receive
the header brick and regular block. The insulated cavity wall consists of two tiers or wythes of
masonry separated by a continuous air space and bonded together using metal ties to provide
water drainage using flashing and weep holes. The Brick Institute of America recommends the
49

construction of cavity walls where there is severe weather exposure, or where a maximum
resistance to rain penetration is desired. Finally, a veneer masonry wall is a single thickness of
masonry units attached to the backing with corrugated metal ties but it is not bonded to the
backing. A veneer wall is a non-load bearing wall used primarily for decorative purposes.
There are various types of metal ties used to bind the face wall to the backup wall. For instance,
the dovetail anchor is used to tie masonry units to a concrete wall. The anchor fits into a slot
embedded in the concrete wall. The galvanized metal tie is used to bind the veneer brick wall to
the backing. The rectangular tie is used to tie the face wall to the backup wall in a composite wall
or a cavity wall. The reinforced masonry wall consists of masonry units tied together using
horizontal reinforcing wire or metal ties and vertical reinforcing bars. The vertical reinforcing
bars in the masonry cores are grouted in either a low-lift or high-lift grouting process depending
upon what it calls for in the technical specifications.
A Masonry Wall contains the following components. Horizontal joint reinforcement is used to
tie masonry units together to form a single structural unit. There are some types of metal joint
reinforcement which are embedded in the horizontal mortar joint. The ladder or truss type
reinforcement is used to tie masonry units together. Control joints are vertical joints that separate
walls into sections and allow freedom of movement. They occur at specified intervals in long,
straight walls or where abrupt changes in wall thicknesses occur. They also should be placed at
openings; at intersections of main walls and cross walls; and at locations of structural columns in
main walls.
A bond beam is a continuous, cast-in-place lintel block with reinforcement bars placed in the
core of the lintel block. Bond beams may run around the perimeter of a building or between
control joints. They may also be utilized as a lintel over an opening. Bond Beams are used as a
continuous tie for exterior block walls where control joints are not required. They also act as
structural members transmitting lateral loads to other structural members, and they can provide
bearing for beams and joists. Lintels are used over openings in block walls to carry the load
around the opening. They can consist of precast concrete units, structural steel shapes, a bond
beam with reinforcement or a combination of materials. Bond beams and lintel are installed in
conjunction with the masonry wall is being placed.
Masonry Brick Positions and Patterns
Brick is laid in various positions in the construction of solid brick walls, reinforced brick walls,
or cavity walls. There are six Brick Positions. The stretcher position is a brick laid in a horizontal
position with the longest, narrowest side facing the front of the wall. The stretcher position is the
most common brick position. The header position is a brick laid in a horizontal position with the
shortest, narrowest side facing the front of the wall. This is also referred to the header course
where a masonry unit is laid over two individual wythes of walls, thereby tying them together.
The soldier position is a brick laid in a vertical position with its longest, narrowest side facing
50

the front of the wall. The shiner position is a brick laid in a horizontal position with the largest
side facing the front face of the wall. The rowlock position is a brick laid in a horizontal position
with the narrowest side or face edge placed in the bed of mortar and the longest side running
back into the wall. The rowlock position is commonly used on window sills. The Sailor position
is a brick that is laid in a vertical position with the largest side facing the front of the masonry
wall.
Many times the brick positions are arranged in a wall to form a Brick Pattern or recurring design
which is referred to as a Brick Pattern Bond. There are five basic structural bond patterns for
brick and they are described below. The Running bond pattern consists of all bricks laid in a
stretcher position with a one-half or one-third lap. This is commonly referred to as the stretcher
bond pattern. The Common or American bond pattern consists of all stretchers with a course of
header brick at a specified interval such as fifth course, sixth course or seventh course header.
Another version is the header course contains a Flemish header. The Flemish bond pattern
consists of alternating stretcher and header bricks on the same course. The headers on every other
course should be centered over the stretcher below. The English bond pattern consists of
alternating courses of header and stretcher bricks. The Stack bond pattern consists of masonry
units laid directly over one another so that all of the head joints line up in a plumb vertical
position. The stack bond is used for decorative purposes and structurally it is the poorest of all of
the bonds discussed since there is not overlapping of the masonry units.
Structural Steel
The most common Structural Steel Shapes are the Wide Flange (W), the Standard I section (S),
the Channels (C), the Hollow Structural Sections (HSS), Structural Tees (T, ST or TS), Angle
iron with equal and unequal legs (p), the I-shaped steel pile section (HP), and plate steel. Wide
Flange (W), the Standard I section (S), the Channels (C) all follow the same designation format.
The letter indicates the steel shape, the first number indicates the nominal depth of the steel
member and the second number indicates the nominal weight per foot. For example, the steel
shape designation of W 14 x 90 means the capital letter W tells you that the shape is a Wide
Flange (W), the 14 indicates that the nominal depth is 14 inches, and the 90 indicates that the
nominal weight per foot is 90 pounds per lineal foot.
Channels use the same designation sequence as the W and S except the structural steel shape and
design properties are different. Channels are usually used as secondary framing members when
loads and spans are too great. They are used as wall girts which are horizontal members attached
to the columns to support siding. Channel is also used as roof purlins which are the framing
members spanning between the roof beams to support the roof deck. Channel can also be used
for door and window frames, stairs, stringers, and as web and cord members in trusses. Angles
are used as the connecting pieces for beams, as chord and web members in light trusses and
joists. They are also used as bracing, and as reinforcing around openings normally called lintels
and as supports for mechanical equipment. The American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC)
51

publishes a manual titled, Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural
Steel for Buildings. This manual covers structural steel design properties with nominal
dimensions and weight, and steels construction methods.
Prior to the fabrication of each structural steel member the manufacturer must submit to the
contractor a shop drawing indicating the size of the member, the detailed dimensions for the
connectors and dimensions for each member in the structure. During the structural steel
fabrication process at the manufacturers location, each piece of steel is given an erection mark
that allows the contractor to identify each member at the job site. The erection markings for each
member are then organized into a set of erection drawings which are issued to the contractor
indicating the locations and proper positioning of each piece of steel within the structure.
Open-web Steel Joists
These are lightweight trusses that are used for supporting roofs and floors. The most common
joist series are the K-Series, the LH Series, the DLH Series and the Joist Girders. The K series is
normally fabricated in depths that range from 8 inches thru 30 inches and spans up to 60 feet.
The LH is fabricated in depths that range from 18 inches thru 48 inches and spans up to 96 feet.
The DLH is fabricated in depths that range from 52 inches thru 72 inches and spans up to 144
feet. The Steel Joist Institute (SJI) publishes numerous manuals such as the Standard
Specifications, Load Tables, and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders.
Steel Floor and Roof Deck
These are roll formed metal in varying configurations for composite metal decks, non-composite
metal decks and metal roofs. Composite floor deck is designated Type VL, VLI, and VLR.
The non-composite floor deck is designated Type C and the Roof deck is designated Type B,
F, A, N, and E. The Steel Deck Institute publishes numerous manuals such as the SDI
Manual of Construction with Steel Deck.
Structural steel and metal decking are extremely susceptible to fire, therefore, they must be
fireproofed based upon the major occupancy classification which is assigned to each building
during the initial design stages of the project. Some typical occupancy classifications include
arena and theater type occupancies, health care and detention type occupancies, business type
occupancies, industrial occupancies and residential occupancies.
Fireproofing Structural Steel
The amount of fireproofing that is applied to a structural steel member depends on the fireresistance rating required and the type of material that is to be protected. Materials normally used
for the protection of a structural steel frame include regular and lightweight concrete, cellular
concrete, gypsum wall board, plaster, and sprayed-on mineral wool. There are three common
methods for fireproofing structural steel. You can encase the steel member in concrete. Second,
you can encase the steel member with gypsum wallboard. Finally, you can protect the structural
52

steel beams, columns and decking with sprayed-on insulation.
Welding Symbols
The two most common methods for connecting structural steel members in structural steel frame
construction are bolting and welding. Welding can be done in the manufacturers shop under
controlled conditions and it can be done at the construction site. Welding is the fusing of two
pieces of metal together. The two most often used types of welded connections are the fillet weld
and the butt or groove weld. A fillet weld is used to weld two pieces of metal together that are
perpendicular to each other. A butt weld is used to weld two pieces of metal together that are set
end to end or parallel to each other. The typical butt welded, joints are the Square butt weld, the
single-V butt weld, and the Single Bevel butt joint. The American Welding Society has
established the basic welding symbols for fillet and butt welds, some supplementary weld
symbols and a standard location for elements of a welding symbol. Below is an example of the
welding arrow symbol and their meanings.
Welding Arrow Symbol
BASIC W ELDING SYMBOLS
SUPPLEM ENTARY W ELD SYMBOLS
BUTT OR GROOVE TYPE

SQUARE
BEVEL
W ELD
ALL
AROUND
**
('
FILLET
CONTOUR
FIELD
W ELD
=T
FLUSH
CONVEX
&
Adapted from the American Welding Society manual titled Structural Welding Code D1.1.
53

Structural Lumber
Each piece of lumber is assigned on the basis of its expected use to the category of factory and
shop lumber or yard lumber. Yard lumber is used structurally and includes most of the lumber for
construction. Yard lumber is further divided according to size and shape into boards, dimension
lumber and timbers. Most of the lumber in construction falls into the category of dimensional
lumber also called Structural Lumber. Boards are defined as 1" to 1-1/2" thick and 2 to 12"
wide. Boards are further classified as a common grade or rough sawn or surfaced grade or
dressed. Dimension lumber is 2" to 4" thick and 2" and wider. Timbers are 5" and thicker and 5"
and wider. Boards and dimensional lumber are known by their nominal size such as a 2 x 4
which is not 2" thick by 4" wide. Its actual dimensions are 1-1/2" thick x 3-1/2" wide.
Dimension lumber is further divided into Joists and Planks, Light Framing and Decking. Joists
are members that are 2 inches to 4 inches in nominal thickness and at least 6 inches wide. They
are graded according to their bending strength on their narrow edge. Planks have the same
dimensions as joists but they are graded on their wider dimension. Light Framing are members
that are 2 inches to 4 inches nominal thickness and 2 inches to 4 inches wide. They are
sometimes referred to as wood frame construction which consists of studs, plates, joists, and
rafters. Decking is 2 inches to 4 inches thick and 4 inches or wider, but they are used on their
wider dimension.
Timbers are further divided into Beams and Stringers and Posts and Timbers. Beams and
Stringers are members with a width more than 2 inches greater than the thickness. Normally,
something called a Beam or Stringer is at least 4 inches thick and at least 2 inches wider than
they are thick. They are installed horizontally and they are ranked according to the Extreme Fiber
Bending stress (Fb) when loaded on the narrower of the two dimensions. Posts and Timbers have
a width that is no more than 2 inches greater than the thickness. These are members that are
either square or nearly square in cross section. Normally, they are installed vertically and they are
ranked according to their Compression Parallel to the Grain (Fc //) because the loads are carried
on the cross section.
Structural lumber, also referred to as dimensional lumber, is a classification of lumber for pieces
at least 2 inches thick and it is graded according to its ultimate use and its strength in resisting the
stresses placed on each piece in that use. The top grade of most species is select structural grade,
which is used only where high strength, stiffness, and good appearance are all required. The next
lower grade is No. 1 grade lumber which may have tiny knots but otherwise it has almost the
same qualities as select structural. The No. 2 grade lumber may have larger knots than No. 1, but
they the knots are tight, and the grade is excellent for floor and roof framing members. The No. 3
grade has still more and larger defects and it can be used for sills and some plate members in
residential construction. The Construction grade falls somewhere between Select Structural and
No. 1 grade and it is used for extreme fiber stress in bending. Construction grade is the standard
where straightness and strength are more important, such as in concrete formwork. The Stud
54

grade is stiff, straight lumber with a high Compression Parallel to the Grain (Fc //) value. The
stud grade is excellent for vertical walls in residential construction. The Standard grade and the
Utility grade are still lower grades than stud grade lumber. The bottom grade is Economy grade
which is used for nonstructural purposes. The surfaces of a piece of lumber can be rough sawn or
dressed. A dressed piece of lumber with the designation of S1S means smooth on one side. The
designation of S2S means smooth two sides and S4S means smooth on all four sides. Dressed
can also be designated S1E which means smooth on one edge or S1S1E which means smooth
one side and one edge.
The ASTM D2555 standard titled Methods for Establishing Clear Wood Strength Values,
established the stresses at failure and an accurate modulus of elasticity for each wood species.
The samples tested under ASTM D2555 have no defects to reduce their strength or stiffness.
Allowable stresses for lumber are determined by reducing the stresses in the samples tested under
ASTM D2555 to provide for a safety factor of approximately 2.5. These allowable stresses and
the modulus of elasticity are published in ASTM D245, Methods for Establishing Structural
Grades for Visually Graded Lumber. The National Forest Products Association (NFPA)
publishes a manual titled National Design Specifications for Stress-Grade Lumber and Its
Fasteners. This manual includes grades established for each species of wood with allowable
stresses for each grade. These stresses are derived by multiplying the basic allowable clear wood
stresses by ratios.
Grading standards for softwoods are published by the U.S. Department of Commerce in Product
Standard PS 20 titled the American Softwood Lumber Standard. The grading rules for each
region are established by numerous organizations whose rules conform to the PS 20 grading
standard with additions for the special conditions in each region. Then each regional
manufacturers association adjusts or refines their grading rules to categorize its lumber products
according to their conditions. Some of the regional associations are the Western Wood Products
Association (WWPA), the Southern Forest Products Association (SFPA), the Northeastern
Lumber Manufacturers Association and the National Hardwood Lumber Association.
Each manufacturers association then places their Grading mark or stamp on each piece of
lumber. A typical grading mark shows in the upper left portion of the stamp the sawmill number
that processes the lumber and just below it is the logotype of the manufacturers organization
establishing the grading rules. In the lower right portion of the stamp is the species abbreviation
such as ES-AF which means Englemann spruce and Alpine fir, or Hem Fir for Hemlock and Fir,
or the symbol of a backwards P and a forward P together which means Ponderosa Pine or LP for
Lodgepole pine. The upper right portion of the stamp states the grade or stress rating such as SEL
for Select or CONST for Construction or 2 & BTR STUD which means a No 2. or better grading
for Studs. The upper right portion of the stamp may contain the stress rating instead of the grade
such as 1650 f or 1500 f 1.4 E. The remaining information which appears in the middle portion
of the stamp may contain its moisture content such as MC 15 which means surfaced at Moisture
55

content of 15% or less. Another abbreviation is S-DRY which means surfaced at M.C. of 19% or
less. Dry lumber has been seasoned to a moisture content of 19 percent or less. Green lumber has
a moisture content in excess of 19 percent.
Allowable Stresses and Strengths
The allowable stresses and strengths of wood are divided into the following types. The Extreme
Fiber Bending stress (Fb), as single member uses or repetitive member uses, is the stress that
must be resisted in a beam undergoing bending. The Fb value of a beam is the strength of extreme
fibers in bending when a member is used horizontally such as a floor joist. This generally means
that the top fibers of a joist will be in compression and the bottom fibers will be in tension. The
Fb rating value is the pounds per square inch (psi) that the beam will resist a force exerted
downward at the center of the joist.
The Compression Perpendicular to the Grain (Fc z ) is the stress induced by pressing the fibers
together in a traverse direction. There is no appreciable difference in strength to resist this
compression perpendicular to the annual rings or parallel to the rings. The Compression Parallel
to the Grain (Fc //) is the stress induced by pressing the fibers together longitudinally. The
Horizontal Shear Parallel to the Grain (Fv //) is the stress induced by the tendency for the upper
fibers to slide over the lower fibers as a beam bends. The Tension parallel to the grain (Ft //) is
the stress induced by pulling apart in a longitudinal direction. The resistance to tension
perpendicular to the grain is extremely weak that it is usually considered negligible. The Modulus
of Elasticity (E) is a measure of the stiffness or resistance to deflection. The Modulus of
Elasticity is a measure of the ability to resist failure due to excessive deformation. It is used to
predict movement under a load and avoid failure due to excessive movement. The modulus of
Elasticity (E) value of a piece of lumber is the ratio between the load of the member and the
amount the member will deflect under the load. The higher the E value, the stiffer the lumber.
Among common woods used for structural lumber Douglas fir and Southern yellow pine have
the highest F and E values. The table below provides the allowable stresses for some typical
species of structural lumber. These stresses were derived from recommendations of the National
Forest Products Association (NFPA) and the American Concrete Institute (ACI).
Plywood and Plyform
Plywood contains thin layers or plies of wood called veneers. The veneers are bonded together
with glues under heat and pressure. Plywood always has an odd number of plies such as three,
five or seven. The grain of the plies is alternated and glued at right angles to each other for
maximum strength. Plyform uses seven plies and water resistant glues for formwork.
56

Allowable Unit Stresses for Dimension Lumber Derived from the National Design Specification for Stress-Grade Lumber
and the American Concrete Institute Formwork for Concrete. Sixth Edition. (p 4-6). *
Species
Douglas Fir-Larch
Douglas Fir- South
Southern Pine
Spruce-Pine-Fir
Hem-Fir
Plyform B-B, Used W et

Note:
Grade
Size
in inches
t = Thick
w = W ide
Extreme Fiber Bending

in psi
Single
Repetitive
Fb
Fb
Compression
Horizontal
Shear
Perpendicular
Fc z
Parallel
Fc //
Tension
Parallel to
Grain
Fv //
//
Ft
Modulus
of
Elasticity
E
No. 2
2-4 t, 2" & w
875
625
1300
95
575
1,600,000
Construction
2-4 t, 2-4 w
1000
625
1600
95
650
1,500,000
No. 2
2-4 t, 2" & w
825
520
1300
90
525
1,200,000
Construction
2-4 t, 2-4 w
925
520
1550
90
600
1,200,000
No. 2
2-4 t, 2-4 w
1500
565
1650
90
1,600,000
No. 2
2-4 t, 5-6 w
1250
565
1600
90
1,600,000
No. 2
2-4 t, 8 w
1200
565
1550
90
1,600,000
Construction
2-4 t, 4 w
1100
565
1800
100
1,500,000
No. 2
2-4 t, 2 & w
875
425
1100
70
1,400,000
Construction
2-4 t, 4 w
975
425
1350
70
1,300,000
No. 2
2-4 t, 2 & w
850
405
1250
75
500
1,300,000
Construction
2-4 t, 2-4 w
975
405
1500
75
575
1,300,000
1545**
Face 210
Class 1
* Design values are in pounds per square inch.

* Plywood stresses include an experience factor of 1.3 recommended by the APA.
57
57
1,500,000

Plywood contains a center ply which is called the core, and the exposed plies are called the faces.
Any other plies between the core and the faces are called the cross bands. The standard width of a
sheet of plywood is four feet and the most common length is 8 feet. The Plywood sheet
thicknesses commonly available are 3/8", , 5/8" and 3/4" for residential structural purposes.
Plyform uses 5/8", 3/4", 1", 1-1/8" and 1-1/4". The 3/4" plyform is common.
Each piece of Plywood contains a grading mark or stamp. The American Plywood Association
(APA) organizes their plywood into Appearance grades and Engineered grades of plywood.
These grade tables are further subdivided into Interior and Exterior Types of plywood. The
interior types of plywood are made with glue that is adequate for indoor use. The exterior types
of plywood are made with hot resin glue that is unaffected by water and resists weathering. These
types are further subdivided by Grade Designation such as interior, structural I, sturd-i-floor,
underlayment, plugged and B-B Plyform.
The engineered grades stamp indicates the grade of the veneers, the species group number, the
identification index numbers or the species group, the type of plywood use, the thickness, the
mill number or product standard and the type of glue is specified. Across the top of most grade
stamps are two letters separated by a hyphen. The first letter is the grade of the veneer on the
panel face and the second letter is the grade of the veneer on the panel back. The only letters used
to grade the face veneers qualities are A, B, C, D, and N. A grade A face veneer is smooth, has
no open defects, but may have some neat repairs. A grade B veneer has a solid surface with no
splits wider than 1/32" and all of the defects are repaired with smooth plugs. The grade C veneer
may have splits up to " and knot holes up to 1-1/2" as long as they do not affect the required
strength of the plywood. The grade D veneer is the poorest grade and it has a rough appearance
and knots. The identification index has two numbers. The first identification index number states
the maximum span if the plywood sheet is used on the roof. The second identification number, to
the right of the slash provides the maximum span if the plywood is used for a sub flooring.
The B-B Plyform Class I or Class II is a concrete grade with a high reuse factor. This has a
smooth surface on both sides with no splits and all of the defects are plugged. The Plyform is
seven plies, it is water resistant, and it is milled oiled to resist concrete adhering to the surface.
Plyform is made only from certain wood species which conform to the APA specifications.
Plyform is also available in High Density Overlay (HDO) and Structural 1 grades. Class 1 is the
most commonly available plyform.
Statics and Strength of Materials
All construction materials must resist a force. A force is a push or pull on a material and the most
common force in construction is the pull of gravity. However, other forces that must be taken
into consideration are wind and water. A force exerted on the surface of an object is assumed to
be uniform over the internal areas of the object. Stress is a force per unit area over which the
force acts and it is calculated by dividing the force by the areas on which it acts and it is
58

expressed as pounds per square inch (psi) of kips per square inch (Ksi) where a kip is equal to
1000 pounds. The strength of a material is the ability to resist a force. Also, the strength of a
material in technical terms is equal to the stress that the material can resist. Therefore, the
strength of a material has the same units as stress which are expressed in psi or Ksi. This also
means that the useful strength of a material is equal to the stress at the point of failure. Failure
takes place when a material can no longer resist the weight applied upon it and the material either
breaks or it deforms. Deformation is defined as a change in the outside dimension of a material
caused by a force. This deformation is expressed in terms of strain which is the total change in
the dimension divided by the original dimension. The term strain means the total change in
dimension divided by the original dimension. Strain is a ratio, therefore, it has no units, but the
amount of deformation and the original length must utilize the same unit to provide a correct
ratio. They are usually measured in inches. The deformation that can be allowed a material
depends upon its intended use. A material that deforms slowly when a force is applied to it for an
extended period of years, even though the force is too small to cause failure in a short period of
time. This deformation is called creep.
The engineering profession has determined the stress that causes failure for various materials.
However, nothing is designed to be stressed to the point of failure. Instead, a lower stress called
the allowable stress is selected. The failure stress is greater than the allowable stress by a factor
which is called the safety factor. The safety factor and the allowable stresses for various materials
are published by various organizations. Some organizations that publish allowable stresses are
the American Concrete Institute (ACI) American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC), the
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), the Steel Joist Institute (SJI) and the National Forest
Products Association. Economy requires that the actual stress be near the allowable. If it is not,
then the material is being used inefficiently because using less material would be adequate. The
actual stress is called the working stress. There are three types of stresses and corresponding
strengths. They are compressive, tensile and shearing. Each depends upon the position of the
forces with respect to the object.
In Joseph Wujeks (1999) book titled Applied Statics, Strength of Materials, and Building
Structure Design he describes the following terms. A beam is a structural member that rests on
certain reactions and it is subject to forces acting normally perpendicular to its longitudinal axis,
thereby causing it to bend. In structural design, a beam is a horizontally positioned load-bearing
structural member used in buildings. However, in construction, joists, girders, headers, lintels or
purlins behave like and are treated as beams. A load is an external force applied to beams and
other structural forces. The reacting forces at the beam supports which counter the applied load
and keep the beam in static equilibrium are called reactions. The loads and reactions combine to
cause the beam to bend.
59

There are numerous types of beams. The simple beam spans between two reactions located at the
extreme ends of the beam. The overhanging beam is a beam that rests on two reactions and
extends beyond one bearing point. The double overhanging beam rests on two reactions and both
beams ends extend beyond the reactions. The continuous beam is supported by three or more
reactions. A cantilever beam extends from a single reaction (p 72).
Moment
The moment of a force is a measure of its ability to cause turning, rotating or twisting about an
axis of rotation. The moment (M) can be determined as the product of a force, P, and the
perpendicular distance, d, from the line of action of the force to the axis of rotation about which
we can find the moment.
The moment (M) = Pd. A moment is always expressed in unit of force (P) times distance (d) and
the common units for moments (M) are pound-inches (lb-in.), pound-feet (lb-ft.), newton-meters
(N-m), and kip-feet (k-ft.). A kip is 1000 pounds.
The equations of static equilibrium indicate that the sums of the horizontal forces must be zero.
This is expressed as 3 Fx = 0. Second, the sum of the vertical forces with an upward force
assigned a positive (+) sign and a downward force given a negative (-) sign and setting them
equal to zero. This is expressed as 3 Fv = 0. Third, the sum of the moments about any axis
must be zero. This is expressed as 3 M = 0 (p 74).
For example, a wooden beam 12 feet long and it carries a concentrated load of 150 pounds at a
distance of 4 feet from Reaction (R2). Reaction (R1) is pinned 8 feet from the load. What are the
values for R1 and R2?
Using the three equations of static equilibrium from above and the wooden beam example
described above, the sum of the horizontal forces is zero since there are no horizontal forces
provided. Therefore, 3 Fx = 0. Second, the sum of the vertical forces must be equal to zero. In
the example, 3 Fv = 0 which is: 150 lbs - R1 - R2 = 0. We also know that R1 + R2 = 150 lbs.
We know that Reaction R1 is pinned which is the axis of rotation and R2 is 12 feet from the axis
of rotation and is acting with a tendency to cause counterclockwise rotation about R1. Therefore,
3M=
0 = + (R2 x 12 feet) - (150 pounds x 8 feet)

0 = 12 R2 - 1200 lb-ft
12 R2 = 1200 lb-ft
12 ft R2 = 1200 lb-ft
12 ft
12 ft
R2 = 100 lb
60

Finally, 3 Fv = 0 =
Therefore,
0=
R1 =
R1 + R2 - 150 lb. Also, R2 = 100 lbs.

R1 + 100 lbs - 150 lbs.
R1- 50 lbs
50 lbs
Shear
A beam is designed to resist the bending and shearing stresses that are induced by the effects of
the applied loads and the resulting reactions. The designer utilizes the loads and the resultant
forces to determine the shear forces and the bending moments across the beam length. The shear
forces and bending moments determine the beam material properties and cross section required
to withstand these stresses. Shear stress occurs when two forces with parallel but offset lines of
action act in opposite directions on the beam.
A beam under a load has the tendencies for it to fail due to either vertical shear or horizontal
shear. Vertical shear is the shearing force that tends to cause a member to fail by cutting
perpendicular to the beams longitudinal axis. This occurs at or near the beam supports. This type
of failure is often a concern in short beams carrying heavy loads. Horizontal Shear is the
tendency of theoretical layers in a member to slide horizontally.
Joseph Wujek (1999) says that Vertical shear (V) is calculated at any point along a beam by
summing any forces acting upward (F up) and subtracting any forces acting downward (F down) to
the left of the section under consideration. This method assumes that the beam is in static
equilibrium. The definition for calculating a vertical shear force (V) is the vertical shear force at
the section under consideration is equal to the sum of the forces acting upward minus the sum of
the forces acting downward calculated to the left of the section. The formula is V @ x = 3 F up 3 F down to the left of the section under consideration (p 189).
The section under consideration and the shear force calculations are cited as a measurement from
the left end of the beam. For example, V @ 2 feet indicates that the computation is made with the
section placed 2 feet away from the left end of the beam. Also, the location of the section of the
shear force calculation is followed by a negative (-) or positive (+) symbol which denotes
placement of the section just to the left (-) or just to the right (+) of the concentrated force.
Also, there is no vertical shear force that exists directly below a reaction or concentrated load
because a shear force requires offsetting forces. Therefore, a reaction or concentrated force has
no offsetting forces, hence the vertical shear is undefined at these locations. Consequently, the
calculation of the shear force must be made a small distance to the right and left of the reaction or
the concentrated force (p189).
61

Using a wooden beam 12 feet long and it carries a concentrated load of 150 pounds at a distance
of 4 feet from Reaction (R2). Reaction (R1) is pinned 8 feet from the load. Reaction R1 = 50 lbs
and Reaction R2 = 100 lbs. The vertical shear forces at just to the right (+) of R1 at location R1 +
and ending at just to the left (-) of R2 at intervals of 4-feet along the length of the beam. What are
the vertical shear forces at various locations along the beam? The vertical shear forces are
calculated below.
V@x
V@ R1 +
V @ 4 foot
V @ 8 feet V @ 8 feet +
V @ 10 feet
V @ R2 -
= 3 F up - 3 F down to the left of the section under consideration.

= 50 lbs - 0 = 50 lbs
= 50 lbs - 0 = 50 lbs.
= 50 lbs - 0 = 50 lbs
= 50 lbs - 150 lbs = -100 lbs.
= 50 lbs - 150 lbs = -100 lbs.
= 50 lbs - 150 lbs = -100 lbs
Therefore, the maximum vertical shear is 100 lbs

Joseph Wujek (1999) defines the bending moment (M), as a moment found by summing the
moments of the external loads and reactions about a selected section. The bending moment is
calculated about any section in a beam by the following method. The sum of the moments of the
upward forces to the left of the section under consideration minus the moments of the downward
forces to the left of the section result in the Moment (M). The formula is M = 3 M up - 3 M
down to the left of the section under consideration (p 212). Using the wooden beam 12 feet long
and it carries a concentrated load of 150 pounds at a distance of 4 feet from Reaction (R2).
Reaction (R1) is pinned 8 feet from the load. Reaction R1 = 50 lbs and Reaction R2 = 100 lbs. The
bending moments at just to the right (+) of R1 at location R1 + and ending at just to the left (-) of
R2 at intervals of 4-feet along the length of the beam. What are the bending moments at different
intervals along the beam?
M = 3 M up - 3 M down to the left of the section under consideration.
M@ R1
= (50 lb-ft. x 0) - 0
= 00 lb-ft.
M @ 4 foot = (50 lb-ft. x 4) - 0
= 200 lb-ft.
M @ 8 feet = (50 lb-ft. x 8) - 0
= 400 lb-ft.
M @ 10 feet = (50 lb-ft x 10) - (150 x 2) = 200 lb-ft.
M @ R2 = (50 lb-ft x 12) - (150 x 4) = 0
Therefore, the maximum bending moment is 400 lb-ft.
62

Engineering Materials Exercise
1.
Which source or organization promotes a uniform organization system for organizing

construction materials, specifications and documentation into Divisions and Sections for
projects.
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
You are interested in finding all of the manufacturers technical lifting data for a
permanent overhead crane that the Contractor will install in a manufacturing facility.
What is the name of the Reference source?
A.
B.
C
D.
3.
Sweets Catalog.
Thomas Register.
Engineering News Record.
Crane and Riggers Association.
Which organization is engaged in the standardization of technical specifications and

testing methods?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Sweets Catalog.
Underwriters Laboratory.
Construction Specifications Institute.
American Society for Testing Materials.
Underwriters Laboratories.
American Standards Association.
Which organization investigates and tests materials, products, equipment, construction

methods and construction systems to safeguard against hazards to life and property?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Underwriters Laboratories.
American Standards Association.
63

5.
What are Large stones that are placed at the end of culverts or along the edge of a body of
water to prevent erosion called?
A.
B.
C.
D.
6.
What are aggregate particles smaller than the size of a grain of sand called?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
Riprap.
Impurities.
Weathering.
Permeability.
What is the aggregate quality of resisting weathering called?

A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
Riprap.
Abrasion.
Impurities.
Permeability.
What is a measure of the ease with which water will flow through an aggregates voids
called?
A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
Riprap.
Impurities.
Weathering.
Permeability.
Abrasion.
Adhesion.
Soundness.
Permeability.
What type of pavement system is subject to abrasion throughout because the pavement
continuously flexes under the weight of traffic?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Asphalt.
Concrete.
Gravel road.
Sandy road
64

10.
What does a sieve size of No. 40, mean?

A.
B.
C.
D.
11.
Which sieve size are the aggregates initially placed into for analysis?
A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
Gap graded.
Well graded.
Skip graded.
Uniform gradation.
What is the weight of a Cubic Yard of concrete?

A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
4 inches.
1/4 inch
No. 4
No. 200
A gradation chart shows a line with a constant slope which indicates that approximately
the same amount of material is retained on each successive sieve. What is this gradation
called?
A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
There are 40 openings per lineal inch.

There are 40 openings per lineal foot.
There are 40 inches of surface area.
There are 1600 inches of surface area.
150 pounds
1350 pounds
2430 pounds
4050 pounds
What is the term for a material that strains slowly when a force is applied to it for an
extended period of years, even though the force is too small to cause failure in a short
period of time?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Creep.
Deformation.
Working stress.
Allowable stress.
65

15.
What is the chemical reaction called when Portland cement is mixed with the water?
A.
B.
C.
D.
16.
Which of the following types of soil has high permeability?

A.
B.
C.
D.
17.
Type I.
Type III.
Type M.
Type O.
Which concrete characteristic is improved by air-entraining the concrete?

A.
B.
C.
D.
19.
Clay.
Gravel.
Solid Rock.
Fine Sands & Silts.
Which type of Portland cement is used where an early strength gain is important?
A.
B.
C.
D.
18.
Setting
Adhesion.
Hydration.
Air-entrainment.
Strength.
Hydration.
Sulfate resistance.
Freeze-thaw resistance.
What is the most important parameter used to control the strength of concrete?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Air-entrainment.
Water/Cement Ratio.
Type of Portland Cement.
Coarse/Fine Aggregate Ratio.
66

20.
What is Air-entrained Portland cement Concrete quite weak in?

A.
B.
C.
D.
21.
Which technical resource must be consulted to determine the bar support spacing for a
Concrete Bridge deck?
A.
B.
C.
D.
22.
1/8
1.0
8.0
What is the weight of a bag of Portland Cement in pounds?

A.
B.
C.
D.
24.
American Concrete Institute.

Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.
What is the diameter in inches of a #8 bar?

A.
B.
C.
D.
23.
Tension.
Durability.
Compression.
Bond Strength.
50
90
120
150
What is the weight of a #5 deformed bar in pounds?

A.
B.
C.
D.
0.310
0.625
1.043
1.963
67

25.
Which materials are incorporated by reference and not normally shown on the plans or in
the Technical Specifications?
A.
B.
C.
D.
26.
Which type of masonry cement is used where bond and lateral strength are important?
A.
B.
C.
D.
27.
Type K.
Type N.
Type O.
Type S.
Which type of masonry cement is used for reinforced masonry?

A.
B.
C.
D.
29.
Type I.
Type III.
Type N.
Type S.
Which type of masonry cement is used for foundation walls and isolated piers?
A.
B.
C.
D.
28.
Concrete.
Bar Supports.
Reinforcement.
Welded Wire Fabric.
Type K.
Type N.
Type O.
Type S.
Which of the following mortar ingredients improves the mortars workability?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Lime.
Sand.
Gravel.
Portland cement.
68

30.
Which of the following mortar ingredients decreases the shrinkage of mortar while setting
and drying?
A.
B.
C.
D.
31.
What ingredient is added to mortar for retempering?

A.
B.
C.
D.
32.
Oxidation.
Bond Strength.
Weather Resistance.
Compressive Strength.
What is the strongest overlap of masonry units when building a wall?

A.
B.
C.
D.
34.
Lime.
Sand.
Water.
Portland cement.
Which mortar property is increased by retempering?

A.
B.
C.
D.
33.
Lime.
Sand.
Water.
Portland cement.
No lap.
One-quarter lap.
One-half lap.
One-third lap.
Structural bonding can be accomplished by tying two wythes together with a brick. When
it is laid in this position, what is the brick position called?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Sailor.
Header.
Soldier.
Stretcher.
69

35.
What is the most common brick position?

A.
B.
C.
D.
36.
What brick position is commonly used on window sills?

A.
B.
C.
D.
37.
Stack.
Flemish.
Running.
Common.
Which of the following masonry components allows freedom of movement in a masonry

wall?
A.
B.
C.
D.
39.
Sailor.
Header.
Soldier.
Rowlock.
What is the weakest pattern bond?

A.
A.
B.
C.
38.
Shiner.
Header.
Rowlock.
Stretcher.
Bond Beam.
Control Joint.
Vertical Joint reinforcement.
Horizontal Joint reinforcement.
Which of the following masonry components are continuous, they may run around the
perimeter of a building or between control joints and act as structural members, and they
can provide bearing for beams and joists?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Lintels.
Bond Beam.
Control Joint.
70

40.
Which of the following masonry components are used over openings in block walls to
carry the load around the opening?
A.
B.
C.
D.
41.
Which type of wall is desired where there is severe weather exposure, or where a
maximum resistance to rain penetration is desired?
A.
B.
C.
D.
42.
C is the steel shape, 12 is the nominal depth and 20.7 is the pounds per foot.
C is the steel shape, 12 is the pounds per foot and 20.7 is the nominal depth.
C is the steel series, 12 is the nominal depth and 20.7 is the pounds per foot.
C is the flange width series, 12 is the pounds per foot, and 20.7 is the nominal
depth.
Which organization publishes structural steel design properties manuals and manuals that
cover steel construction methods?
A.
B.
C.
D.
44.
Cavity.
Veneer.
Composite.
Reinforced Masonry.
What does the steel designation C 12 x 20.7 mean?

A.
B.
C.
D.
43.
Lintels.
Bond Beam.
Control Joint.
American Welding Society.

The American Iron and Steel Institute.
American Institute of Steel Construction.
What are the drawings called that are issued to the contractor from the manufacturer
indicating the locations and proper positioning of each piece of steel within the structure?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Shop Drawings.
Erection Drawings.
Working Drawings.
Architectural Drawings.
71

45.
What structural steel component is the steel designation VL referring to?

A.
B.
C.
D.
46.
What structural steel component is the steel designation LH referring to?

A.
B.
C.
D.
47.
Fire.
Rain.
Snow.
Chemical.
What is sprayed onto structural steel to increase its fire resistance capability?
A.
B.
C.
D.
49.
Channel.
Steel Shape.
Metal Decking.
Open-web joist.
Which of the following is structural steel most susceptible to for failure?

A.
B.
C.
D.
48.
Angle.
Steel Shape.
Metal Decking.
Open-web joist.
Paint.
Creosote.
Preservative.
Mineral wool.
How is the fireproofing of a steel structure determined?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Size.
Height.
Occupancy.
Adjacent structures.
72

50.
What type of weld fits two pieces of metal together end-to-end for welding?
A.
B.
C.
D.
51.
Assume you have a fillet weld symbol on the top of the welding symbol arrow. Which
side will the weld be placed on?
A.
B.
C.
D.
52.
Field weld.
Flush weld.
Contour weld.
Weld all the way around.
If the weld is supposed to be on all four sides, what symbol will be used?
A.
B.
C.
D.
54.
The ends are welded.

All sides all the way around.
Arrow side that it is pointing to.
Other side from where the arrow is pointing.
Assume you have a square weld symbol with a solid flag on a pole coming up from the
change in direction of the arrow. What does the solid backwards flag on a pole tell you?
A.
B.
C.
D.
53.
Slot.
Butt.
Plug.
Fillet.
Circle.
Single- V.
Convex.
Right Triangle.
What is the wood member called that is graded according to its bending strength on its
narrow edge which is 2-4 inches thick and at least 6 inches wide?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Joists.
Planks.
Boards.
Timbers.
73

55.
narrow edge which is at least 4 inches thick and at least 2 inches wider than they are
thick?
A.
B.
C.
D.
56.
What is the stress term called that has the narrow dimension carrying the load with the
fibers at the top in compression and the bottom fibers are in tension?
A.
B.
C.
D.
57.
Modulus of Elasticity (E).

Extreme Fiber Bending (Fb).
Horizontal Shear Parallel to the Grain (Fv //).
Compression Perpendicular to the Grain (Fc z ).
What is the stress term called in a wood frame structure which works in unison to support
the load on the structure and allows part of the load from a weaker member to be
distributed to adjacent members?
A.
B.
C.
D.
58.
Planks.
Light Framing.
Post and Timbers.
Beams and Stringers.

Tension parallel to the grain (Ft //)
Extreme Fiber Bending (Fb) in a Single member.
Extreme Fiber Bending (Fb) in Repetitive members.
wider dimension which is 2-4 inches thick and at least 6 inches wide?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Joists.
Planks.
Boards.
Posts and Timbers.
74

59.
What is the wood member called that is graded according to its load being are carried on
the cross section?
A.
B.
C.
D.
60.
What is the stress term called that is induced by pressing the fiber together longitudinally
on its cross section?
A.
B.
C.
D.
61.

Compression Parallel to the Grain (Fc //)
What is the stress term called which is a measure of the stiffness or resistance to
deflection?
A.
B.
C.
D.
63.

What is the stress term called that is induced by the tendency for the upper fibers to slide
over the lower fibers as a beam bends?
A.
B.
C.
D.
62.
Joists.
Planks.
Boards.
Posts and Timbers.

Extreme Fiber Bending (Fb).
Which of the following values is a typical number for the Modulus of Elasticity (E)?
A.
B.
C.
D.
90
800
1,800
1,300,000
75

64.
Which of the following soft wood species used for structural lumber have the highest
Fiber bending and Modulus of Elasticity (E) values?
A.
B.
C.
D.
65.
Under the structural lumber classification system, What is the name of the top grade?
A.
B.
C.
D.
66.
No. 1.
Standard Grade.
Construction Grade.
Select Structural Grade.
What does the abbreviation of S2S stamp on a piece of lumber mean?

A.
B.
C.
D.
68.
No. 1
Stud Grade.
Construction Grade.
Select Structural Grade.
What is the structural lumber grade used where straightness and strength are the most
important consideration such as in concrete formwork?
A.
B.
C.
D.
67.
Cedar and Larch.

Loblolly Pine and Ponderosa Pine.
White spruce and Western White Pine.
Douglas Fir and Southern Yellow Pine.
Select Two Sides.

Select Two Edges.
Smooth Two Sides.
Smooth Two Edges.
What is the moisture content percentage of the lumber stamp abbreviation of S-DRY?
A.
B.
C.
D.
1
8
Less than 19.
Greater than 19.
76

69.
What does the B-B designation plyform refer to?

A.
B.
C.
D.
70.
What is the term for a material that deforms slowly when a force is applied to it for an
extended period of years, even though the force is too small to cause failure in a short
period of time?
A.
B.
C.
D.
71.

What is the term called that is a measure of its ability to cause turning, rotating or
twisting about an axis of rotation?
A.
B.
C.
D.
73.
Creep.
Strain.
Tension.
Compression.
What is the stress term called that when the stress is induced by pulling apart in a
longitudinal direction?
A.
B.
C.
D.
72.
The category classification of lumber.

The group number of relating to the number of plies.
The front and back surface plies which have knots up to 1 inch on both sides.
The front and back surface plies have a solid surface with smooth repair plugs.
Tension.
Moment.
Vertical Shear.
Horizontal Shear.
What is the term called where the force tends to cause a member to fail by cutting
perpendicular to the beams longitudinal axis at or near the beams supports?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Tension.
Moment.
Vertical Shear.
Horizontal Shear.
77

74.
Assume you have a wooden beam that is 20 feet long and it carries a concentrated load of
500 pounds at a distance of 15 feet from Reaction (R2). Reaction (R1) is pinned 5 feet
from the load. What are the values in lbs for R1 and R2?
A.
B.
C.
D.
75.
Assume you have a beam that is 16 feet long and it carries a concentrated load of 900
pounds at a distance of 4 feet from R2. Reaction (R1) is pinned 12 feet from the load.
Reaction R1 = 225 lbs and R2 = 675. What is the maximum shear in lbs?
A.
B.
C.
D.
76.
475 and 25.

500 and 00.
375 and 125.
125 and 375.
225
675
900
1800
Assume you have a beam that is 16 feet long and it carries a concentrated load of 900
pounds at a distance of 4 feet from R2. Reaction (R1) is pinned 12 feet from the load.
Reaction R1 = 225 lbs and R2 = 675 lbs. What is the maximum bending moment in lb-ft?
A.
B.
C.
D.
900
1800
2700
3600
Check Answers
78

Concrete Formwork
The design and use of concrete forms either job built or prefabricated is a common feature of
construction work. Most formwork is not shown on the plans or designed by a Registered
Professional Engineer, but rather it is designed in the field by the field engineer or project
engineer. It is therefore important that construction professionals have a demonstrated
understanding of the design principles for concrete formwork.
The American Concrete Institutes (1995) book titled, Formwork for Concrete, is the primary
reference for the design of vertical formwork for walls, the design of column formwork and the
design of horizontal formwork for elevated slabs. This publication is also referred to as ACI
Committee 347 Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork and ACI SP-4 Formwork for
Concrete. This publication is normally incorporated by reference in Division 03 titled Concrete,
Section 100 titled Concrete Formwork, and Part 1 titled General. For example, under Part 1.04
titled Reference Standards, under item D it states that Each Contractor shall maintain a copy of
this publication shall be on the job site at all times. Also, Part 1.05 titled Quality Assurance it
states under item A. Design of formwork is the Contractors responsibility and under item B.
Tolerances recommended in ACI 347 shall govern, . . . In conclusion, a copy of the book titled
Formwork for Concrete, shall be on the job site at all times for the field engineer to consult.
Concrete Rate of Pour
The Rate of Pour depends on the type of equipment that is being used to place the concrete. Castin-place concrete can be placed by direct chute, crane and bucket, concrete pump, motorized
concrete buggy, a conveyor, or by hand using a Georgia buggy. The rate of pour is expressed in
Feet (vertical) per hour.
Assume that you are pouring a wall that is 200' long by 8 feet high and it is 8 inches thick and
you are given the following information. The crew can place 345 Cubic Yards in a 10 - hour day
and the crew consists of 1 - Crew Leader, 5 - Building Laborers and 1 - Finisher. Calculate the
Concrete Rate of Pour for the Wall. The Placing Rate in cubic feet per hour is:
345 = 34.5 CY x 27 CF = 931.5 cubic feet per hour
10
Hr CY
The Plan area in square feet for the wall forms is = 200' x 8 " = 133.33 square feet
12"
The Rate of pour in Feet (vertical) per hour is =
79
931.5 = 6.98 Feet per Hour

133.33

An alternative method to calculate the rate of pour for the 200' long by 8 Feet High by 8 inches
thick wall. Assume the pour is 40 feet above grade. The bucket capacity is 1.5 cubic yards, and
the rate of travel up for the bucket is 90 feet per minute and the rate of travel down is 120 feet per
minute. Assume the load time is 20 seconds and the unload time is 1.5 minutes. The crane and
bucket cycle time is:
Activities
Calculations
Minutes
Load time
20 seconds/60 seconds
0.333
Travel up
40' / 90 ft/minute =
0.444
Unload time
1.5 minutes
1.500
Travel down
40' / 120 ft/minute
0.333
Total Minutes per Cycle
2.610
The Rate of delivery in cubic yards per hour is:

60 minutes
= 23 cycles per hour x 1.5 CY bucket/cycle = 34.48 CY per hour
2.610 minutes per cycle
The Volume of concrete in cubic yards to be poured is:
200 feet x 8 feet x 8"/12" = 1066.666 CF = 39.704 Cubic Yards.
27 CF/CY
The number of hours required to pour 39.704 cubic yards of concrete is:
39.704 CY
= 1.15 hours
34.480 CY/ hr.
The Rate of pour in feet per hour is: 8 feet high
1.15 hours
6.96 Feet per Hour
Finally, the rate of pour using a concrete pump which has a capacity of 930 cubic feet per hour.
The Volume of the concrete in cubic feet for the 200 feet x 8 feet x 0.667 = 1066.666 CF.
Therefore, the number of hours required to pour the concrete using the pump is:
1066.666 CF = 1.147 hours
930 CF/Hour
The Rate of pour in feet per hour is: 8 feet high = 6.97 Feet per Hour
1.147 hours
80

Lateral Concrete Pressure on Wall Forms
The Lateral Concrete Pressure exerted on vertical formwork is affected by several factors. First,
the freshly placed concrete initially acts as a fluid exerting hydrostatic pressure against the
vertical formwork. Second, the weight of the concrete exerts pressure on the forms and concrete
is assumed to weigh between 150 and 154 pounds per cubic foot. Third, the placement rate of
concrete affects the lateral pressure. The greater the height of the wall allows the concrete to
behave as a fluid which has a greater lateral pressure at the bottom. Fourth, The temperature of
the concrete and the atmospheric conditions affect the setting time which affects the pressure on
the forms. Fifth, vibration of the concrete increases the lateral pressure because the concrete acts
as a fluid for the full depth being vibrated. Sixth, the consistency of the concrete mix affects the
lateral pressure. In conclusion, the lateral concrete pressure is a function of the hydrostatic
pressure, the weight of the concrete, the rate of the pour, the temperature of the concrete, the
consolidation of concrete by vibration and the consistency of the concrete mix all effect the
lateral concrete pressure.
The ACI 347 Committee has developed the following formulas for calculating the maximum
lateral pressure (p) for the design of wall forms. The lateral pressure (p) is expressed in pounds
per square foot (psf). The ACI 347 Committee also insists that these formulas were developed for
very specific conditions. The basic lateral pressure formulas for the wall forms are based upon
the following placement conditions. The concrete is made with a Type I cement weighing 150
pounds per cubic foot, containing no pozzolans or admixtures, with a maximum slump of 4
inches. The internal vibration is limited to a depth of 4 feet or less below the concrete surface,
and the maximum rate of pour cannot exceed 10 feet per hour (p 5-12). The ACI 347 Committee
recommends these formulas with limitations for the lateral pressure on wall forms as follows. For
Walls with placement rates of less than 7 feet per hour, the pressure is:
p=
150 + 9000R
T
For Wall with placement rates of 7 feet per hour and up to10 feet per hour, the pressure is:
p=
150+ 43,400 + 2800 R
T
T
The abbreviations in the formulas represent the following units:
p = lateral pressure in pounds per square foot (psf)
R = the rate of concrete placement in feet per hour
T = the temperature of the concrete in the form, in degrees Fahrenheit.
Finally, the lateral pressure on the wall forms is limited as follows. The Maximum pressure is
2000 psf but in no case greater than 150 times the height of the wall, whichever is less. This is
expressed as p = 150h. The minimum pressure is 600 psf.
81

An example of the maximum lateral concrete pressure for the design of wall forms for a 12-foot
high wall that will be placed at 5 feet per hour. The temperature of the concrete at the time of the
pour will be 75F. Also, Type 1 cement was used without admixtures, and the slump with this mix
is typically 4 inches or less. The top 3 feet of the concrete must be vibrated according to the
specifications. For this case, the maximum fluid pressure is calculated under the assumption that
the unit weight of the concrete will be approximately 150 pounds per cubic foot (pcf). Therefore,
for walls with a placement rate of less than 7 feet per hour, the maximum pressure is:
p=
150 + 9000R
T
p=
150 + 9000 (5) = 750 psf

75
Check for maximum pressure: the lesser of 2,000 psf and 150h, whichever is less:
p=
150h = 150 (12) = 1800 psf
In this example, use the formula value of 750 psf because the conditions for the placement of the
concrete match the assumptions for the rate of placement formula, so that this maximum will be
reduced by the initial set within the lower portions of the concrete.
This pressure will build up as a fluid pressure based on the 150 pounds per cubic foot (pcf) unit
weight of the fluid. To determine the height of the maximum pressure, the 150h represents the
pressure of concrete in its liquid state which can be equated to the maximum pressure calculated.
The formula is p = 150h which can be expressed in terms of the distance (h) from the top of the
concrete pour as:
h=
p
150
The h represents the distance from the top of the concrete pour to where the calculated maximum
pressure begins. In this example, the distance from the top of the pour to the point of maximum
pressure is:
h=
750 psf = 5 feet

150 p
82

Lateral Concrete Pressure on Column Forms
The ACI 347 Committee has also developed the following formula for calculating the maximum
lateral pressure for the design of column forms. The lateral pressure is expressed in pounds per
square foot (psf). The ACI 347 Committee also insists that the column formula was developed
for very specific conditions. The basic lateral pressure formula for the column forms is based
upon the following placement conditions which are similar to the wall form formula. The
concrete is made with a Type I cement weighing 150 pounds per cubic foot, containing no
pozzolans or admixtures, with a maximum slump of 4 inches. The internal vibration is limited to
a depth of 4 feet or less below the concrete surface (p 5-13).
The ACI 347 Committee states that the column forms are small enough that the concrete is
frequently placed to their full height within the time that it takes the concrete to begin to set.
Also, the vibration of the concrete frequently extends the full height of the form which results in
greater maximum lateral pressures than those that occur in wall forms. Therefore, the pressure in
column forms is essentially a fluid (p 5-13). The ACI 347 Committee recommends this formula
with limitations for the lateral pressure on columns as follows:
For Columns, where the maximum height of a single lift of concrete for the pour does not exceed
18 feet per hour, the pressure is:
p=
150 + 9000R
T
Finally, the lateral pressure on the column forms is limited as follows. The Maximum pressure is
3000 psf but in no case greater than 150 times the height of the column, whichever is less. This is
expressed as p = 150h. The minimum pressure is 600 psf.
An example of the maximum lateral concrete pressure for the design of column forms given the
following conditions is shown below.
Height of column
Rate of pour (R)
Concrete Temperature (T)
=
=
=
15 Feet
10 Feet per hour
40 Degrees Fahrenheit
For columns, the maximum concrete pressure on the column is?

p = 150 + 9000 10
=
2400 psf
40
Check for maximum pressure: the lesser of 3000 psf and 150h = 150 x 15= 2250 psf. Therefore,
in this example, use the 150h = 2250 psf as the maximum pressure instead of the formula value.
83

Wall Formwork Components
Once the lateral pressure from the concrete has been determined, then the size and on-center
spacing of each component within the form system can be designed to withstand the forces due to
the fluid concrete. The components of a wall form system consist of sheathing, studs, wales, ties
and lateral bracing. The design proceeds out from the concrete pressures established. First, the
concrete is supported by the sheathing, which in turn is supported by studs, which are supported
by joists, which are supported by the ties as shown below.
It should be noted that a number of additional components would be provided in practice,

including perhaps a bottom plate or mud sill to prevent kickout of the bottom of the form and a
Wall Bracing system is installed to maintain the vertical orientation of the wall. The braces are
angled members and run between the ground and a point near the top of the wall form. These
components will not be treated in the design procedures outlined herein. Also note that the
function of this section is to review the design procedures outlined by ACI, not to replace them.
Readers are directed to the ACIs publication titled, Formwork for Concrete SP-4 for more
complete design guidelines.
The design of each component is a balance between the size of that component and the spacing
of the support for that component. For example, one can select thin sheathing with closely spaced
studs, or thick sheathing with widely spaced studs, or something in between. There are economic
implications: if new materials are to be acquired, or based on the materials already available.
84

Plyform Sheathing and Sheathing Tables
Sheathing is the material in contact with the concrete. The most common sheathing material for
job-built formwork is plyform. The American Plywood Association (APA) defines plyform as a
composite material made by gluing together thin layers or plies of wood. The quality of the plies
used for the surface has an impact on the smoothness of the concrete surface. Plyform for
concrete is graded B-B which is sanded smooth with some plugs allowed. The Plyform strength
is given by its Class; most plyform is Class 1 which is the stronger class. The grain direction is
alternated in each layer to provide resistance to warping and curling of the plywood. In the
United States, the plyform is made with an odd number of layers so that there is one more layer
with its grain in the same direction as the face grain than there is perpendicular to that direction
as shown below.
Plywood Grain Directions

As a result, the plywood is stronger when the face grain runs in the direction of the span. Since
the sheathing spans from stud to stud, the plywood is usually used with the face grain running
from one stud to the next, rather than parallel to the studs. This orientation is called face grain
parallel to the span. In the United States the plywood and the plyform is made with the face
grain parallel to the long dimension of the plywood.
The American Concrete Institute (ACI) has calculated the safe spans for numerous formwork
components and developed a series of formwork tables that provide the field engineer with a
quick method for selecting the appropriate spacing for the material sizes available. The tables
have been arranged into four groups. Tables 7-2, 7-3 and 7-4 are called plywood sheathing tables
and they are utilized to determine the maximum stud spacing. Tables 7-5, 7-6, 7-7 are called
joists, studs, stringers or any other beam components of the formwork where the framing
members are used singly. The joist tables are used to determine the maximum wale spacing.
Tables 7-8, 7-9, 7-10 are called double wale tables where the members are used double. The wale
tables are used to determine the maximum allowable wall tie spacing.
In summary, the design of a wall form system uses plywood sheathing tables 7-2, 7-3 and 7-4 to
determine the stud spacing. It uses the joist, stud, and stringer tables 7-5, 7-6, 7-7 to determine
the wale spacing and it uses the double wale tables 7-8, 7-9, 7-10 to determine the maximum
wall tie spacing.
85

Maximum Allowable Stud Spacing
The formwork design process begins with the selected sheathing and the tables are used to
determine the maximum stud spacing. It is common to start with an assumed sheathing thickness,
and with that thickness to calculate a stud spacing. The stud spacing comes from the ACIs
Plywood Sheathing Design Tables 7-2, 7-3 and 7-4. They are for plyform sheathing utilized in
the construction of walls, columns and elevated slabs. These tables cover three different load
situations. Table 7-2 is titled Safe Spacing, in Inches, of Supports for Plywood Sheathing,
Continuous over Four or More Supports (p 7-7). Table 7-3 is titled, Safe Spacing, in Inches, of
Supports for Plywood Sheathing, Continuous over Two Spans (p 7-8). Table 7-4 is titled Safe
Spacing, in Inches, of Supports for Plywood Sheathing with only two points of support (p 7-9).
The continuous over many spans approach is usually assumed, because ordinarily there are at
most 24 spacing over the 8-foot side of the plywood; hence, there will be at least four spans.
To use the sheathing design tables 7-2, 7-3 or 7-4, first calculate the maximum concrete pressure.
Then, select a sheathing thickness, and decide whether the loading will be short term or long
term. Short term loading is often referred to as a single use. Long term loading is often referred to
as forms that will be used several times. The Sheathing Design Tables 7-2, 7-3 and 7-4 were
calculated for both short term and long term using the working stresses for Class 1 concrete
plyform. The tables contain the concrete pressures down the left-hand side. Horizontally, the
table is divided into two halves by the vertical double line. The values to the left of this double
vertical line are the short term loads and the values to the right of the double vertical line are the
long-term loads. The long term loading is the more common in practice.
The Sheathing Design Tables also contain the parameters for the allowable bending stress (Fb),
the rolling shear, and the allowable design value for the modulus of elasticity (E) using B-B
Class 1 Plyform. The allowable bending stress (Fb) is either 1930 psi or 1545 psi. The rolling
shear is either 72 psi or 57 psi. The allowable modulus of elasticity (E) is 1,500,000. Next, the
designer must consider the orientation of the plywood and make a selection of which of the two
columns on each side of the double line will be used. The orientation of the plywood options on
each side of the double line is Face grain parallel to the span and Face grain perpendicular to the
span. Face grain parallel to the span is more common, but the Face grain perpendicular
orientation is sometimes used. After determining the proper portion of the table, it is a matter of
finding the intersection of the column for the sheathing thickness and the row for the maximum
expected pressure. The intersection will be the maximum allowable spacing of the studs. An
example for determining the maximum allowable spacing of studs for a wall form system based
upon the following conditions is:
Concrete pressure:
Stud Support Conditions:
Loading Duration:
Sheathing:
750 psf.
Continuous over 3 or more spans

Short term
1" B-B Class 1 Plyform, Face Grain Parallel to Span
86

Using the Partial ACI Sheathing Design Table 7-2 titled, Safe Spacing, in Inches, of Supports
for Plywood Sheathing, Continuous over Four or More Supports provided below with a
maximum concrete pressure of 750 psi. The Short term loading is to the left of the double
vertical line which results in an allowable bending stress (Fb) of 1930 psi. The Plywood is 1
inch thick and the orientation is given as Face grain is parallel to span, Therefore, use the Short
Term Loads half of the table with the heading of Face grain parallel to span and the intersection
of the column and the concrete pressure which results in a stud spacing of between 14 and 15
inches. This value is shown on the table as shaded. An interpolation of the spacing would be 14.5
inches, but plywood sheathing is normally 4 feet wide by 8 feet long, therefore, the stud spacing
would probably be reduced to 12 inches to accommodate the modular spacing of the materials.
The Joists, Studs and Beam Design Tables 7-5, 7-6 and 7-7 are applicable to formwork members
which are loaded uniformly as a beam. The tables in the 7-5 series, 7-5.1, 7-5.2, 7-5.3 and 7-5.4,
are all titled, Safe Spacing, in Inches, of Supports for Joists, Studs, or Other Beam Components
of Formwork, Continuous over Three or More Spans, but each table within the series has a
different adjusted horizontal shear (Fv) as shown in the table. All the tables indicate bending
(Fb) varies with each member and the Modulus of Elasticity (E) is either 1,600,000 or 1,300,000
psi. The America Concrete Institute has recommended the following adjusted allowable stresses
(p 7-2).
Bending Fb
Horizontal shear
(Fv)
Modulus of Elasticity (E)
Use of No. 2 Lumber of

indicated species
Southern Pine and
Douglas-Fir-Larch
960 to 1440 psi
180 psi
1,600,000 psi
1200 to 1810 psi
225 psi
1,600,000 psi
940 to 1400 psi
140 psi
1,300,000 psi
1170 to 1750 psi
175
1,300,000 psi
Spruce-Pine-Fir
and Hem-Fir
The tables in the 7-6 series, 7-6.1, 7-6.2, 7-6.3 and 7-6.4, are all titled, Safe Spacing, in Inches, of
Supports for Joists, Studs, or Other Beam Components of Formwork, Single Span, but each table
within the series has a different adjusted horizontal shear (Fv) as shown in the table. The Tables
in the 7-7 series, 7-7.1, 7-7.2, 7-7.3 and 7-7.4, are all titled, Safe Spacing, in Inches, of Supports
for Joists, Studs, or Other Beam Components of Formwork, Continuous Over Two Spans, but
each table in the series has a different adjusted horizontal shear (Fv) as shown in the table.
87

Partial ACI Table 7-2:
SAFE SPACING, IN INCHES, OF SUPPORTS FOR PLYW OOD SHEATHING,

CONTINUOUS OVER FOUR OR MORE SUPPORTS
Maximum deflection 1/360 of span, but not more than 1/16 inch.
Pressure or load of concrete,

pounds per square foot
Stresses and spans for short duration loads, for all sanded
grades of Group 1 plywood, E modified for deflection
calculations
rolling shear = 72 psi;
Stresses and spans for long duration loads, for all sanded
calculations
(Fb) = 1930 psi.

E = 1,500,000 psi
sanded thickness, face

grain parallel to span

grain perpendicular to span
(Fb) = 1545 psi.

E = 1,500,000 psi


5/8"
3/4"
1"
in
5/8"
3/4"
1 in
in
5/8"
3/4"
1 in
5/8"
3/4"
1 in
500
10
12
14
18
10
14
11
12
16
10
14
600
10
11
13
16
13
10
11
14
13
700
11
12
15
12
10
13
12
800
10
11
14
12
10
12
12
900
10
13
11
12
10
1000
10
12
11
11
10
1100
12
11
11
1200
11
10
10
N ote: Above solid, deflection controls span. B elow dash line, rolling shear governs. Betw een the lines, bending controls. Spans are given center to center of supports., assuming 1-1/2 inch support w idth for shear spans. If supports
of a different w idth are used, detailed calculations should be made to check spans in the range now show n as controlled by shear. Adapted from American C oncrete Institutes publication Form work for C oncrete. Sixth Edition,
Table 7-2 (p 7-7). This is a partial table for educational purposes only and you must reference AC Is publications for complete and accurate information.
88

Uniform Stud Load and the Allowable Wale Spacing
To use the stud design table 7-5.1: titled, Safe Spacing, in Inches, of Supports for Joists, Studs, or
Other Beam Components of Formwork, Continuous over Three or More Spans, first calculate the
uniform load on the studs in pounds per lineal feet which equals the maximum pressure in psf
times the stud spacing from the sheathing design table previously. The studs are loaded by the
concrete pressure on that portion of the sheathing supported by each stud. From the previous
example, the maximum concrete pressure was 750 psf and the spacing was found to be 14.5
inches but it was reduced to 12 inches. Therefore, the uniform load on the stud is as follows:
Uniform Stud Load = 750 psf x 12 inches x 1 foot
12 inches
= 750 pounds per lineal foot
Next, determine the stud size available and the allowable horizontal shear (Fv) based upon the
materials provided. After you have selected the correct stud design table based upon the adjusted
horizontal shear (Fv), the Bending Fb and the Modulus of Elasticity (E). Then it is a matter of
finding the intersection of the uniform stud load and the size of the material available. The
intersection will be the maximum allowable spacing of the wales.
An example for determining the maximum allowable spacing of wales for a wall form system
given the following conditions wall formwork design criteria:
Concrete pressure:
Rate of Pour:
Temperature of Concrete:
Wall Height:
Wall Thickness
Loading Duration:
Sheathing:
750 psf.
Stud Load:
Stud Lumber:
Stud Horizontal Shear (Fv)
Studs
750 pounds per lineal foot (plf)

No. 2 Douglas Fir-Larch, S4S
180 psi
2 x 4 studs, spaced 12 inches center-to-center
5 feet per hour

12 feet
10 inches
Long term
Using the Partial ACI Stud Design Table 7-5.1 below titled, Safe Spacing, in Inches, of Supports
for Joists, Studs, or Other Beam Components of Formwork, Continuous over Three or More
Spans, and a stud Horizontal Shear (Fv) of 180 psi stated above. Find the row containing the
uniform load of 750 plf and find the 2 x4 column, the intersection of the row and column will
provide you with the maximum wale spacing. The shaded area on the table shows that the wale
spacing is between 23 inches and 25 inches. The Maximum Wale Spacing is 24 inches.
89

Partial ACI TABLE 7-5.1:
SAFE SPACING, IN INCHES, OF SUPPORTS FOR JOISTS, STUDS, OR

OTHER BEAM COMPONENTS OF FORMW ORK, CONTINUOUS OVER
THREE OR M ORE SPANS.
Maximum deflection is 1/360 of the span or 1/4 in., whichever is smaller .

Uniform load, lb per lineal
feet (equals uniform load on
forms times spacing between
joists or studs (feet)
Fb varies with member
Fv = 180 psi
E = 1,600,000 psi
Nominal size of SxS lumber
2x4
2x6
2x8
2 x 10
3x4
3x6
3x8
3x10
4x2
Fb psi
1310
1140
1050
960
1310
1140
1050
960
1440
500
31
45
58
70
40
59
74
91
21
600
28
42
53
64
37
54
68
83
19
700
25
38
49
59
34
50
63
77
18
800
23
36
45
55
32
46
59
72
17
900
21
33
43
52
30
44
55
68
16
1000
20
31
41
50
28
42
53
64
15
1100
18
29
38
47
26
40
50
61
14
1200
18
28
36
44
25
38
48
58
14
1300
17
26
35
42
23
36
46
56
13
NOTE: Span values above solid line are controlled by deflection. Within the dashed box horizontal shear governs span. Elsewhere bending
controls span. Adapted from American Concrete Institutes publication Formwork for Concrete. Sixth Edition, Design
Table 7-5.1 (p 7-10). This is a partial table for educational purposes only and you must reference ACIs publications
for complete and accurate information.
The Wale Design Tables 7-8, 7-9 and 7-10 are for double members which are commonly used for
wales and frequently used for stringers. A stringer is a member used in the design of elevated
slabs. The 7-8 series, 7-8.1 and 7-8.2 are both for Double Wales, Continuous over Three or More
Spans, but 7-8.1 covers adjusted horizontal shear (Fv) of 180 psi and 225 psi respectively and the
Modulus of Elasticity (E) is 1,300,000. Table 7-8.2 covers adjusted horizontal shear (Fv) of 140
psi and 175 psi respectively, and the Modulus of Elasticity (E) is 1,300,000. Tables 7-9.1 and 79.2 are both for Double Wales, Single Span. Table 7-9.1 covers adjusted horizontal shear (Fv) of
180 psi and 225 psi respectively. Table 7-9.2 covers adjusted horizontal shear (Fv) of 140 psi
and 175 psi respectively. Tables 7-10.1 and 7-10.2 are both for Double Wales, Continuous Over
Two Spans. Table 7-10.1 covers horizontal shear (Fv) of 180 psi and 225 psi respectively. Table
7-10.2 covers horizontal shear (Fv) of 140 psi and 175 psi respectively.
90

Uniform Wale Load and the Maximum Allowable Tie Spacing
To use the Wales design table 7-8.1: titled, Safe Spacing, in Inches, of Supports for Double
Wales, Continuous over Three or More Spans, first calculate the uniform load on the wales in
pounds per lineal foot which equals uniform load in pounds per square foot times the spacing of
the wales. This uniform load was calculated from the previous design tables and the spacing of
the wales was found in the previous stud design table. From the previous example, the uniform
load on the stud was 750 pounds per lineal foot (plf) and the spacing of the wales was 24 inches.
Therefore, the uniform load on the wales is as follows:
Uniform Wale Load = 750 plf on the stud x 24 inches x 1 foot = 1500 pounds per foot
12 inches
Next, determine the wale size available and the allowable horizontal shear (Fv) based upon the
materials provided. After you have selected the correct wale design table based upon the adjusted
horizontal shear (Fv), the Bending Fb and the Modulus of Elasticity (E). Then it is a matter of
finding the intersection of the uniform wale load and the size of the material available. The
intersection will be the maximum allowable spacing of the wall ties.
An example for determining the maximum allowable spacing of wall ties for a wall form system
given the following conditions wall formwork design criteria:
Concrete pressure:
750 psf.
Stud Lumber:
Studs

180 psi
Wale Load:
Wale Lumber:
Wale Support Conditions:
Wale Horizontal Shear (Fv)
Wales

No. 2 Douglas-Fir-Larch, S4S
180 psi
2 x 6 double wales at 24 inches center-to-center.
Using the Partial Double Wales Design Table 7-8.1: titled, Safe Spacing, in Inches, of Supports
for Double Wales, Continuous over Three or More Spans and a Wale Horizontal Shear (Fv) of
180 psi stated above. Find the row containing the uniform wale load of 1500 plf and find the 2 x6
column, the intersection of the row and column will provide you with the maximum tie spacing.
The table shows that the wale spacing is 37 inches which is shown on the table as a shaded area.
Therefore, the maximum allowable tie spacing is 37 inches.
91

Partial ACI Table7-8.1:
Uniform load,
lb per lineal
feet (equals
uniform load,
psf, on forms
times spacing
of wales in ft.)
Fb
SAFE SPACING, IN INCHES, OF SUPPORTS FOR DOUBLE W ALES, CONTINUOUS OVER THREE OR MORE SPANS
varies with member
Fv = 180 psi
E = 1,600,000 psi
Fb
varies with member
Nominal size of S4S lumber
Fv = 225 psi
E = 1,600,000 psi
2x4
2x6
2x8
3x4
3x6
3x8
4x4
4x6
2x4
2x6
2x8
3x4
3x6
3x8
4x4
4x6
1310
1140
1050
1310
1140
1050
1310
1140
1640
1420
1310
1640
1420
1310
1640
1420
600
40
59
74
52
76
96
61
90
45
66
83
58
85
107
68
100
700
37
54
69
48
70
89
57
83
41
61
77
54
78
99
63
93
800
35
51
64
45
66
83
53
78
39
57
72
50
73
93
59
87
900
33
48
61
42
62
78
50
73
37
53
68
47
69
87
56
82
1000
31
45
58
40
59
74
47
69
35
51
64
45
66
83
53
78
1100
30
43
55
38
56
71
45
66
33
48
61
43
62
79
51
74
1200
28
42
53
37
54
68
43
63
32
46
59
41
60
76
48
71
1300
26
40
50
35
51
65
42
61
30
45
56
39
57
73
46
68
1400
25
38
49
34
50
63
40
59
29
43
54
38
55
70
45
66
1500
24
37
47
33
48
61
39
57
28
41
52
37
53
68
43
63
1600
23
36
45
32
46
59
37
55
27
40
51
35
52
66
42
61
NOTE: Span values above solid line are controlled by deflection. Within the dashed box horizontal shear governs span. Elsewhere bending controls span.
Adapted from American Concrete Institutes publication Formwork for Concrete. Sixth Edition, Design Table 7-8.1 (p 7-22). This is a partial table for educational purposes only and you must
reference ACIs publications for complete and accurate information.
92

Load Capacity of Available Wall Ties
The load capacity of available wall ties is the last step in the process. This requires the selection
of a wall tie that can resist the load, which will be applied to it. The load applied to the wall tie is
the concrete pressure times the wale spacing and times the tie spacing. The design process simply
requires determining whether the value calculated is less than the manufacturers rating for the tie
intended for use. When the expected load is less than the tie can resist, the tie is used. When the
expected load is too high, one must either reduce the tie spacing to reduce the load, or find a
bigger tie. An example for verifying the wall tie load capacity for a wall form system given the
following conditions wall formwork design criteria are as follows:
Concrete pressure:
Rate of Pour:
Wall Height:
Wall Thickness
Loading Duration:
Sheathing:
Stud Lumber:
Studs
Wale Load:
Wale Lumber:
Wales
750 psf.
Maximum Tie Spacing
37 inches
5 feet per hour

12 feet
10 inches
Long term
180 psi
180 psi
From the example, the concrete pressure is 750 psf, the wale spacing is 24 inches and the
maximum tie spacing is 37 inches. Therefore, the load capacity on the wall ties is as follows:
Wall Tie Load Capacity = 750 psf x 24/12 x 37/12 = 4,625 pounds
A wall tie with a safe working load of 5,000 pounds will resist the 4,625 pound load calculated
above. But based upon uniform or modular spacing, the 2 x 6 double wales would be more
practical if a tie spacing of 36 inches was utilized. Therefore, the tie spacing would be less than
the maximum allowed by table 7-8.1, and the average wall tie load would be reduced to:
Tie Load Capacity = 750 psf x 24/12 x 36/12 = 4500 pounds
93

Elevated Slab Form Load
The Vertical Load on elevated slab forms must be designed to resist the dead loads and the
various live loads during construction. Elevated slab forms must also be capable of resisting
lateral loads from the placement of the concrete, the movement of construction equipment and
the wind. The ACI 347 Committee suggests that the dead load consists of the weight of the fresh
concrete, the weight of the reinforcing bar, and the weight of the forms ( p 5-1). For example,
assume that you have concrete that weighs 154 pounds per cubic foot. It will place a load on the
forms of 12.83 pounds per square foot for each inch of slab thickness as shown below.
154
12
12.8333 pounds per Square Foot
Therefore, the Dead Load for a 6" thick slab is 12.8333 pounds per Square Foot x 6 inches =
76.999 pounds per square foot
The ACI Committee 347 recommends that a single story-elevated slab be designed for a
minimum Live Load 50 psf to provide for weight of workers, runways, screeds and other
equipment. This does not include the weight of the concrete formwork. If motorized concrete
buggies are being used, then the minimum live load should be 75 pounds per square foot (psf).
The ACI 347 Committee also says that regardless of slab thickness, the minimum design value
for combined dead and live loads should be 100 psf, or 125 psf if motorized buggies are used (p
5-1). Using the 6-inch slab dead load from above, and the recommended live load excluding the
weight of the forms. Then the minimum total horizontal design load is:
77 psf dead load + 50 psf live load = 127 pounds per square foot (psf)
Using the 6-inch slab dead load from above, and the recommended live load for motorized
concrete buggies excluding the weight of the forms. Then the minimum total horizontal design
load is: 77 psf dead load + 75 psf live load = 152 pounds per square foot (psf)
The design for an Elevated Slab consists of plyform sheathing, joists, stringer and shores or
posts. The ACIs Plywood Sheathing Design Tables 7-2, 7-3 and 7-4 are used to determine the
maximum joist spacing. Tables 7-5, 7-6 and 7-7 are used for the stringers to determine the
member sizes which can be used for the stringer span designated. Stringers are members placed
side by side with their longer dimensions as the depth of the beam. Finally, Tables 7-11 and 7-12
are for selecting the allowable loads on the posts. Table 7-11 is titled, Allowable Axial Load
(Pounds) on Simple Wood Shores of the Indicated Strength and Effective Length. Table 7-12: is
titled, Allowable Load Based on Maximum Shore Area in Direct Contact with Wood Member
Being Supported.
94

Formwork Design Exercise
1.
Which of the following references is incorporated by reference for the design of vertical
and horizontal forms and a copy shall be maintained on the job site at all times?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
Which party is responsible for the design of the concrete formwork?

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Owner.
Field Engineer.
Concrete Supplier.
Architect/Engineer.
According to the ACI 347 Committee, What is the Maximum Rate of Pour allowed for a
Wall in feet per hour?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
American Concrete Institutes publication ACI 347 titled, Formwork for

Concrete.
American Society for Testing Materials publication ASTM C 94 titled, ReadyMixed Concrete.
American Concrete Institutes publication ACI 301 titled, Specifications for
Structural Concrete for Buildings.
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institutes publication CRSI 65 titled, Recommended
Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and Nomenclature.
7 feet per hour

10 Feet per hour
18 feet per hour
150 feet per hour
What is the weight range of a cubic foot of normal concrete for design purposes?
A.
B.
C.
D.
65 - 90
91 - 120.
121 - 140
150 - 154
95

5.
Assume that you are pouring a wall that is 151 feet - 4 inches long, 14 Feet high and 16
inches thick and the daily placement rate is 375 cubic yards per 8-hour day. What is the
Rate of pour in feet per hour?
A.
B.
C.
D.
00.23
06.27
07.51
60.11
The information provided below is for Questions 6 through 11.

Assume that you are pouring a wall that is 151 feet - 4 inches long by 16 Feet High by 16
inches thick wall, and the placement will be done using a crane and bucket.
6.
Assume the bucket has a capacity of 2.5 cubic yards. The pour is 55 feet above the ground
and the rate of travel up for the bucket is 80 feet per minute and the rate of travel down is
100 feet per minute. Assume the load time is 30 seconds and the unload time is 4.0
minutes. What is the cycle time in minutes?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
Assume the bucket has a capacity of 2.5 cubic yards and it takes 7 minutes per cycle.
What is the rate of delivery in cubic yards per hour?
A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
4.55 minutes
5.74 minutes
7.77 minutes
35.24 minutes
2.86
8.57
12.86
21.43
What is the volume of concrete to be poured in cubic yards?

A.
B.
C.
D.
89.68
119.27
1434.83
3220.30
96

9.
Assume that you can place 33 Cubic Yards per hour. How many hours are required to
pour the cubic yards of concrete?
A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
Assume that it takes 2.25 hours to pour the 151 feet - 4 inches long by 16 Feet High by 16
inches thick wall. What is the rate of pour in feet(vertical) per hour?
A.
B.
C.
D.
11.
0.14
7.11
10.00
14.91
Assume the pour is using a concrete pump with a capacity of 635 cubic feet per hour.
How many hours are required to pour the cubic yards of concrete?
A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
0.28
3.61
14.91
2385.40
0.03
5.07
10.00
39.69
Given the following design conditions for a wall form system:

Wall height
Rate of Pour (R)
Wall Thickness
=
=
=
=
10 Feet high
6 Feet per hour
15 inches
What is the maximum pressure on the wall in pounds per square foot (psf)?
A.
B.
C.
D.
771
921
1010
1436
97

13.
A wall form system has the following design conditions:

Wall height
Rate of Pour (R)
Wall Thickness
=
=
=
=
12 feet high
10 feet per hour
15 inches
A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
1102
1200
1350
1800
A wall form system has the following design conditions:

Wall height
=
6 Feet high
Rate of Pour (R)
=
10 Feet per hour
=
Wall Thickness
=
15 inches
A.
B.
C.
D.
15.
900
1340
1500
1650
A column system has the following design conditions:

Column Height
=
15 Feet
Rate of Pour (R)
=
20 Feet per Hour
=
Column Thickness
=
24 inches by 24 inches
A.
B.
C.
D.
1527
2250
2571
2721
98

16.
Using the Partial ACI Design Tables 7-2, 7-5.1, 7-5.2 and 7-8.1 provided at the end of
this exercise, and given the following conditions for a wall form system:
Concrete pressure:
Rate of Pour:
Wall Height:
Wall Thickness
Loading Duration:
Sheathing:
1102 psf.
10 feet per hour

75F
22 feet
15 inches
Long term
3/4" B-B Class 1 Plyform, Face Grain Parallel to
Span
What is the maximum allowable spacing of the studs in inches?

A.
B.
C.
D.
17.
7
8
9
12
Given the following conditions for a wall form system:

Concrete pressure:
Rate of Pour:
Wall Height:
Wall Thickness
Stud Load:
Stud Lumber:
Studs
1102 psf.
10 feet per hour

75F
22 feet
15 inches
No. 2 Southern Pine, S4S
225 psi
What is the uniform Stud load (rounded) in pounds per lineal foot?
A.
B.
C.
D.
220
918
1102
1322
99

18.
Using the Partial ACI Design Tables 7-2, 7-5.1, 7-5.2 and 7-8.1 and given the following
conditions for a wall form system:
Concrete pressure:
Rate of Pour:
Wall Height:
Wall Thickness
Stud Load:
Stud Lumber:
Studs
1102 psf.
10 feet per hour
75F
22 feet
15 inches
1050 pounds per lineal foot
225 psi
What is the maximum allowable spacing of the wales?

A.
B.
C.
D.
19.
19.0
30.0
39.5
44.0

Concrete pressure:
1102 psf.
Stud Load:
Stud Lumber:
Stud Horizontal Shear (Fv) 225 psi
Studs
Wale Lumber:
Wale Horizontal Shear (Fv) 225 psi
Wales
What is the uniform Wale load (rounded) in pounds per lineal foot?
A.
B.
C.
D.
225
833
1000
3000
100

20.
Using the Partial ACI Design Tables 7-2, 7-5.1, 7-5.2 and 7-8.1 and given the following
conditions for a wall form system:
Wale load
Wale Lumber:
Wales

225 psi
What is the maximum allowable tie spacing in inches?

A.
B.
C.
D.
21.
36.5
40.5
46.0
51.5

Concrete pressure:
Stud Load:
Stud Lumber:
Studs
Wale Load:
Wale Lumber:
Wales
1102 psf.
225 psi
225 psi
Maximum Tie Spacing:
45 inches
What is the Wall Tie load capacity in pounds (rounded to whole number)?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2000
2755
2918
12398
101

22.
Assume that you have concrete that weighs 150 pounds per cubic foot and the concrete
slab is 10 inches thick. What is the dead load in pounds per square foot?
A.
B.
C.
D.
23.
What is the minimum Live Load for motorized buggies in pounds per square foot?
A.
B.
C.
D.
24.
Parallel to the span.

Parallel to the studs.
Perpendicular to the span.
Perpendicular to the Wales
You are ordering the wall ties, which of the following items must you provide the
supplier with to have a complete description?
A.
B.
C.
D.
26.
25
50
75
100
Which of the plyform orientations provides the strongest formwork system?

A.
B.
C.
D.
25.
12.5
50.0
75.0
125.0
Wall height, wall length, shear strength, and allowable deflection.

Wall thickness, tie load capacity, break back, and tie extension.
Lumber orientation, Type of lumber, wind force, and vibration.
Lateral Pressure, sheathing thickness, bending, and rolling shear.
What is the standard in North America for the outer layer of plyform?
A.
B.
C.
D.
The grain of the outer layer is parallel to the long dimension.

The grain of the outer layer is perpendicular to the long dimension.
The grain of the outer layer is at a 45-degree angle to the long dimension.
The grain of the outer layer is at a 45-degree angle to the short dimension.
Check Answers
102

Formwork Exercise - Partial ACI Table 7-2: SAFE SPACING, IN INCHES, OF SUPPORTS FOR PLYW OOD SHEATHING,
CONTINUOUS OVER FOUR OR MORE SUPPORTS
Maximum deflection 1/360 of span, but not more than 1/16 inch.
Pressure or load of concrete,

pounds per square foot
Stresses and spans for short duration loads, for all sanded
calculations
Stresses and spans for long duration loads, for all sanded
calculations
(Fb) = 1930 psi.

E = 1,500,000 psi


(Fb) = 1545 psi.

E = 1,500,000 psi


5/8"
3/4"
1"
in
5/8"
3/4"
1 in
in
5/8"
3/4"
1 in
5/8"
3/4"
1 in
500
10
12
14
18
10
14
11
12
16
10
14
600
10
11
13
16
13
10
11
14
13
700
11
12
15
12
10
13
12
800
10
11
14
12
10
12
12
900
10
13
11
12
10
1000
10
12
11
11
10
1100
12
11
11
1200
11
10
10
Note: Above solid, deflection controls span. Below dash line, rolling shear governs. Between the lines, bending controls. Spans are given center to center of supports., assuming 1-1/2 inch support width for shear spans. If supports of a different with are used, detailed
calculations should be made to check spans in the range now shown as controlled by shear. Adapted from American Concrete Institutes publication Formwork for Concrete. Sixth Edition, Design Table 7-2 (p 7-7). This is a partial table for educational purposes only
and you must reference ACIs publications for complete and accurate information.
103

Formwork Exercise Partial ACI TABLE 7-5.1:
SAFE SPACING, IN INCHES, OF SUPPORTS FOR JOISTS, STUDS, OR OTHER BEAM

COMPONENTS OF FORMW ORK, CONTINUOUS OVER THREE OR M ORE SPANS.
Maximum deflection is 1/360 of the span or 1/4 in., whichever is smaller.
Uniform load, lb
per lineal feet
(equals uniform
load on forms
times spacing
between joists or
studs (feet)
Fv = 180 psi
E = 1,600,000 psi
2x4
2x6
2x8
2 x 10
3x4
3x6
3x8
3x10
4x2
4x4
4x6
4x8
6x2
6x4
8x2
Fb psi
1310
1140
1050
960
1310
1140
1050
960
1440
1310
1140
1140
1310
1190
1210
500
31
45
58
70
40
59
74
91
21
47
69
92
25
57
28
600
28
42
53
64
37
54
68
83
19
43
63
84
23
52
26
700
25
38
49
59
34
50
63
77
18
40
59
77
22
48
24
800
23
36
45
55
32
46
59
72
17
37
55
72
20
45
22
900
21
33
43
52
30
44
55
68
16
35
52
68
19
42
21
1000
20
31
41
50
28
42
53
64
15
34
49
65
18
40
20
1100
18
29
38
47
26
40
50
61
14
32
47
62
17
38
19
1200
18
28
36
44
25
38
48
58
14
31
45
59
16
37
18
1300
17
26
35
42
23
36
46
56
13
29
43
57
16
35
17
NOTE: Span values above solid line are controlled by deflection. Within the dashed box horizontal shear governs span. Elsewhere bending controls span. Adapted from American Concrete Institutes
publication Formwork for Concrete. Sixth Edition, Design Table 7-5.1 (p 7-10). This is a partial table for educational purposes only and you must reference ACIs publications for complete and
accurate information.
104

Formwork Exercise - Partial ACI TABLE 7-5.2:
SAFE SPACING, IN INCHES, OF SUPPORTS FOR JOISTS, STUDS, OR OTHER BEAM

COMPONENTS OF FORMW ORK, CONTINUOUS OVER THREE OR M ORE SPANS.
Maximum deflection is 1/360 of the span or 1/4 in., whichever is smaller.
Uniform load, lb
per lineal feet
(equals uniform
load on forms
times spacing
between joists or
studs (feet)
Fv = 225 psi
E = 1,600,000 psi
2x4
2x6
2x8
2 x 10
3x4
3x6
3x8
3x10
4x2
4x4
4x6
4x8
6x2
6x4
8x2
Fb psi
1640
1422
1310
1200
1640
1420
1310
1200
1810
1640
1420
1420
1640
1490
1510
500
35
51
64
78
45
66
83
101
24
53
78
102
28
63
31
600
32
46
59
72
41
60
76
92
22
48
71
93
26
58
29
700
29
43
54
66
38
55
70
86
20
45
66
86
24
54
27
800
27
40
51
62
35
52
66
80
19
42
61
81
23
50
25
900
25
38
48
58
33
49
62
75
18
40
58
76
21
47
23
1000
23
36
45
55
32
46
59
72
17
37
55
72
20
45
22
1100
21
34
43
53
30
44
56
68
16
36
52
69
19
43
21
1200
20
32
41
51
29
42
54
65
15
34
50
66
18
41
20
1300
19
30
40
49
27
41
51
63
15
33
48
63
18
39
19
NOTE: Span values above solid line are controlled by deflection. Within the dashed box horizontal shear governs span. Elsewhere bending controls span. Adapted from American Concrete
Institutes publication Formwork for Concrete. Sixth Edition, Design Table 7-5.2 (p 7-11). This is a partial table for educational purposes only and you must
reference ACIs publications for complete and accurate information.
105

Formwork Exercise - Partial ACI Table7-8.1:
Uniform load,
lb per lineal
feet (equals
uniform load,
psf, on forms
times spacing
of wales in ft.)
Fb
varies with member
SAFE SPACING, IN INCHES, OF SUPPORTS FOR DOUBLE W ALES, CONTINUOUS OVER THREE
OR MORE SPANS
Fv = 180 psi
E = 1,600,000 psi
Fb
varies with member
Fv = 225 psi
E = 1,600,000 psi
2x4
2x6
2x8
3x4
3x6
3x8
4x4
4x6
2x4
2x6
2x8
3x4
3x6
3x8
4x4
4x6
1310
1140
1050
1310
1140
1050
1310
1140
1640
1420
1310
1640
1420
1310
1640
1420
600
40
59
74
52
76
96
61
90
45
66
83
58
85
107
68
100
700
37
54
69
48
70
89
57
83
41
61
77
54
78
99
63
93
800
35
51
64
45
66
83
53
78
39
57
72
50
73
93
59
87
900
33
48
61
42
62
78
50
73
37
53
68
47
69
87
56
82
1000
31
45
58
40
59
74
47
69
35
51
64
45
66
83
53
78
1100
30
43
55
38
56
71
45
66
33
48
61
43
62
79
51
74
1200
28
42
53
37
54
68
43
63
32
46
59
41
60
76
48
71
1300
26
40
50
35
51
65
42
61
30
45
56
39
57
73
46
68
1400
25
38
49
34
50
63
40
59
29
43
54
38
55
70
45
66
1500
24
37
47
33
48
61
39
57
28
41
52
37
53
68
43
63
1600
23
36
45
32
46
59
37
55
27
40
51
35
52
66
42
61
NOTE: Span values above solid line are controlled by deflection. Within the dashed box horizontal shear governs span. Elsewhere bending controls span. Adapted from American Concrete Institutes publication Formwork for Concrete. Sixth Edition, Design Table 78.1 (p 7-22). This is a partial table for educational purposes only and you must reference ACIs publications for complete and accurate information.
106

Soil Mechanics
Soil Investigation Tests
Soil Investigation or Soil Exploration consists of three steps: boring, sampling and testing. First,
the boring refers to the drilling of a hole in the ground. Some of the most common types of
borings are auger borings, wash borings, test pits, and core borings. Second, sampling refers to
the removing the soil from the holes. Samples may be classified as either disturbed or
undisturbed. Auger borings and wash boring methods bring the soil sample to the surface where
samples are collected. Soil samples by these methods are considered disturbed samples ans some
of their characteristics are changed. Soil sampling is the equipment used to extract, contain and
seal the samples from the borings during the subsurface soil investigation. At the surface, the
disturbed soil samples should be placed in airtight containers and labeled for the lab. Third,
testing refers to the lab and field tests that can be conducted to determine the soil properties.
There are numerous tests that can be made to evaluate various soil properties, but the most
common test in the United States is the Standard Penetration Test (SPT). The Standard
Penetration Test (SPT) is useful in determining certain properties of cohesionless soils. The SPT
utilizes a split spoon sampler which has an outside diameter (O.D.) of 2 inches and it is 18 - 24
inches long. The sampler is attached to the bottom of a drilling rod and driven into the soil with a
140 pound hammer falling 30 inches. As the sampler is driven the 18 inches into the sampler, the
number of blows required to penetrate each of the three 6 inch increments is recorded separately
on the boring log. The standard penetration resistance N value is the number of blows required
to penetrate the last 12 inches. Below is an example of a partial Geotechnical or Soil
Investigation Report and on the following pages is an example of the Soil Boring Location Plan,
the Soil Boring #8 and the Relative Density and Consistency Table. These are the Proposed
Public Service Building Procedures:
The borings were drilled using a CME model 45 skid drill rig. The drill rig utilized hollow
stem augers to sample depths where samples were obtained in a two-inch O.D. split spoon
sampler driven by a 140 pound hammer falling 30 inches. The number of blows required to drive
the sampler three six-inch increments are recorded on the boring logs. The first six inches is
considered the seating drive. The summation of the number of blows required for the second and
third six inches is termed the penetration resistance N value in blows per foot (bpf). This field
procedure is referred to as the Standard Penetration Test (SPT) and is an American Society for
Testing and Materials test procedure (ASTM D-1586).
The N values from the SPT are used for the determination of the relative density of granular
soils (sand, gravel, low plasticity silt, and mixtures of sand and gravel) or the consistency of
cohesive soils (clay and plastic silts). A chart is provided in the back of this report which
provides a correlation between N values and the relative density of granular soils or the
consistency of cohesive soils.
107

Proposed Public Service Building Soil Boring Location Plan
Soil Investigation Report

The Soil Investigation Report is used to identify the drilling procedures and the penetration
resistance N value. From each Soil Boring, you can extract the water table, the Penetration
Blow Counts and the Soil Classification provided by the testing firm. Finally, it is the
Contractors responsibility to determine the Penetration N value from the Soil Boring, which is
the summation of the number of blows required for the second and third penetration counts. Then
using this total number of blows, you must determine the relative density of sand or the
consistency of clay and compare the tables description to the to the Soil Classification
Description on the soil boring.
108

Proposed Public Service Building Soil Boring Example
109

Reading the Soil Boring
From the Soil Boring provided you can determine the following information.
Soil Boring Number
#8 (Pavement Area)
Ground Surface Elevation
683.6 Feet
Read the Report and Review the Borings for Unsuitable Soil
Not Provided
Read the Report and Review the Boring for the elevation of W ater Data
During Drilling at 680.6 Feet
Read the Report and Review the Borings to Determine depth of the water Table
3 Feet
Read the Report and Calculate the Penetration Resistance N value in blows per
foot (bpf)
2+3=5
Read the Soil Borings and for #8 at 3 feet the Soil Classification is stated as
Very Loose to Loose Brown

Fine to Course Sand
Relative Density and Consistency Table

Finally, the Report of Soil Investigation contains a standard table for determining the relative
density for sand and silt and the consistency of clay. This table is called the Relative Density and
Consistency Table and it is provided below. It is utilized by the Contractor to compare what is
called out at each depth of a soil boring to what the table indicates. The material relative density
and consistency is based upon blow count. For example, using the Penetration Resistance N
value of 5 found on soil boring #8 above at 3 feet, and using the Sand and Silt, Relative Density
portion of the table below for the blow count of 5, the soil should be classified as Loose Sand.
This matches the Boring #8 at 3 feet called a Very Loose to Loose Brown Fine to Course Sand.
Sand and Silt, Relative Density
No. of blows required to
drive a sampler I foot,
using a 140# hammer
falling 30"
2" O.D. Samplers
<4
Consistency of Clay
drive a sampler I foot,
using a 140# hammer
falling 30"
2" O.D. Samplers
RELATIVE DENSITY
CONSISTENCY
Very Loose
<2
Very Soft
4 - 10
Loose
2-4
Soft
11-15
Medium Loose
5-6
Medium Soft
16-30
Medium Dense
7-8
Medium Stiff
31-50
Dense
9-15
Stiff
> 50
Very Dense
16-30
Very Stiff
>30
110
Hard

Soil Categories
Soils are separated in three broad categories. They are cohesionless, cohesive and organic soils.
Cohensionless soils are gravel, sand, and silt. Gravel has particle sizes of 3 inches down to a #4
sieve. Sand particles range from a #4 sieve down to a #200 sieve. Sand and gravel can be further
divided into fine and course such as fine sand and course sand. Finally, clay or the fines is a #200
sieve on down. The common type of cohesive soil is clay which has particle sizes less than a
#200 sieve. Organic soil are undesirable for supporting structures and must not contaminate the
desirable sands and gravels. Finally, Loam roughly contains equal parts of sand, silt and clay.
A cohesive soils particle sizes may be determined by the hydrometer method which is a process
for indirectly observing the settling velocities of the particles in a soil-water mixture. Another
technique for analyzing cohesive soils is by use of the Atterberg limits method. Atterberg define
four states of consistency for cohesive soils. They are liquid, plastic, semisolid, and solid.
Soil properties and characteristics are influenced by changes in water content and there are three
phenomena that are directly related to the water in the soil. They are permeability, capillarity, and
frost heave. Permeability is the movement of water within a soil. Capillarity is the rise of water
above the ground water table against the pull of gravity but is in contact with the water table as
its source. Frost heave is the vertical expansion of soil caused by water freezing.
Soil Classification Systems
The most commonly used Soil Classification Systems based upon grain size are the Unified Soil
Classification System (USCS). and the American Association of State Highway and
Transportation Officials (AASHTO) system. The OSHA Standards for the Construction Industry
in 29 CFR PART 1926.650 in Appendix A of Subpart P titled Soil Classification paragraph (c)
Requirements (1) Classification and (2) Basis of classification it states that the classification of
the soil deposits shall be made based on the results of at least one visual inspection and at least
one manual analysis (p 257). The standard also incorporates by reference the American Society
for Testing Materials (ASTM) standard D2488 titled, Standard Recommended Practices
Description of Soils. Therefore, a person must have a basic understanding of soil terminology so
that they can properly identify and classify the soil. Your daily excavation inspections will
require you to use the following soil terminology. According to OSHA 1926 Appendix A
paragraph (b) Definitions it states that the definitions and example . . are based on, in whole or
in part, the following: American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standards D653-85 and
D2488; The Unified Soils Classification System; The U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA)
Textural Classification Scheme; and the National Bureau of Standards Report BSS-121.
A Cemented Soil means a soil in which the particles are held together by a chemical agent, such
as calcium carbonate, such that a hand-size sample cannot be crushed into a powder or individual
soil particles by finger pressure. Cemented soils include hardpan. These soils are also extremely
hard to excavate.
111

A Clay is a soil that is hard to break up when dry, but can be crushed to a powder (fine grained
soil) and can be moldable when wet and sticks together (cohesive). A Cohesive Soil is a soil with
a high clay content which sticks together when wet or dry. Cohesive soil does not crumble, can
be excavated with vertical side slopes, and is plastic when moist. Cohesive soil is hard to break
up when dry, and exhibits significant cohesion when submerged under water. Cohesive soils
include clayey silt, sandy clay, silty clay, clay and organic clay. A Cohensionless soil is a loose
sand or granular gravel that freely runs. A Dry Soil is a soil that does not exhibit visible signs of
moisture content.
A Granular Soil means a gravel , sand or silt with little or no clay content. Granular soil has no
cohesive strength. Some moist granular soils exhibit apparent cohesion. Granular soil cannot be
molded when moist and crumbles easily when dry. A Layered System means two or more
distinctly different soils or rock types arranged in layers. Micaceous seams or weakened planes in
rock or shale are considered layered. Moist soil means a soil condition in which a soil looks and
feels damp. Moist cohesive soil can easily be shaped into a ball and rolled into small diameter
threads before crumbling. Moist granular soil that contains some cohesive material will exhibit
signs of cohesion between particles. A Plastic soil means a property of a soil which allows the
soil to be deformed or molded without cracking, or appreciable volume change.
A Saturated Soil is a soil in which the voids are filled with water. Saturation does not require
flow. Saturation or near saturation, is necessary for the proper use of instruments such as a pocket
pentrometer or torvane. A Spoil refers to the earth and material drawn from an excavation. The
term Submerged Soil means soil which is under water or is free seeping. Wet soil means soil that
contains significantly more moisture than moist soil, but in such range of values that cohesive
material will slump or begin to flow when vibrated. Granular material that would exhibit
cohesive properties when moist will lose those cohesive properties when wet.
According to the standards, the acceptable Field Soil Visual Tests shall be conducted to provide
sufficient quantitative and qualitative information as may be necessary to identify properly the
properties, factors, and conditions affecting the classification of the soil. Visual analysis is
conducted to determine the qualitative information regarding the excavation site in general, the
soil adjacent to the excavation, the soil forming the sides of the open excavation, and the soil
taken as examples from excavated material. Therefore, it is imperative that while making a visual
inspection that you look for distress and the signs of trench failure. It should be understood that
Clay is one of the most dangerous materials because the vertical walls of an excavation appear to
be solid and stable. However, clay is drastically effected by water, wind, and pressure. Water
causes it to swell, wind causes it to dry and shrink rapidly, and the soil pressure causes clay to
bulge. Any or all of the conditions described above can cause trench failure. Below are the
definitions of the types of distress that result in trench failure.
112

Types of Distress that Result in Trench Failure
Distress means that the soil is in a condition where a cave-in is imminent or is likely to occur.
Distress is evidenced by such phenomena as the development of fissures in the face of or surface
of an open excavation; the subsidence of the horizontal plane of an excavation; the bulging of the
face of an excavation; the heaving of material from the bottom of an excavation; the spalling of
material from the face of a rock excavation; the raveling of small amounts of material trickling
down into the excavation; and the seeping of water into the excavation.
The initial signs of trench failure begin immediately after removing the soil, the trench becomes
unstable and the soil in the trench walls begins to move into the excavation. This movement
usually is not visible but the soil is moving because the surface of the ground is in tension,
therefore, the weight of the soil causes surface cracks parallel to the trench, approximately onethird to two-thirds of the trench depth from the trench edge. For example, if the depth of the
trench is 9 feet deep, these surface tension cracks may be found somewhere between three (3)
feet and six (6) feet from the edge of the trench. The edge of the excavation may also subside but
this is hard to see.
The second sign of trench failure is in the face of the excavation, Cracks, normally horizontal,
may appear on the face and the walls of the excavation may bulge into the excavation but these
signs of failure are also hard to see. The third sign of progressive trench failure is when the
bottom of the trench initially fails or kicks into the excavation. This leaves the upper portion of
the face unsupported and the trench wall is hanging on by the shear force. A second failure will
occur soon after the first failure as the upper portion of the excavation collapses into the trench.
Often a worker is trapped by the initial cave-in and co-workers will jump into the trench to help,
unaware that multiple cave-ins are likely. Normally, the second and third cave-ins are the ones
that will kill or injure the rescuers. Therefore, you should be aware that cave-ins normally occur
in multiples. The final sign of trench failure is rain flowing into the surface cracks will increase
the surcharge load in the soil. These fissures may appear to close while wet but they will reappear
wider after some drying takes place. Water will also be retained in the spoil pile and this will
create an increase in the surcharge load on the trench.
Field Visual Inspections for Excavation
There are over fifteen potential Types of Distress That Result in Trench Failure that you must
periodically visually inspect for when an excavation is open. The following distresses are defined
below to help you identify the potential types of soil conditions at the job site that may lead to a
trench failure. Fissured means a soil material that has a tendency to break along definite planes
of fracture with little resistance, or a material that exhibits open cracks, such as tension cracks, in
an exposed surface such as on the existing horizontal surface or on the excavation face. The
excavation face means the vertical or inclined earth surfaces formed as a result of the excavation
work. This is sometimes referred to as the excavation sides.
113

Unsupported Faces or Walls are immediately developed once an excavation is excavated and the
weight of the soil, due to gravity places vertical and horizontal (lateral) pressure on the wall.
This gravity translates directly to weight. In many cases, one cubic foot of soil weights an
average of 120 pounds per cubic foot. A column of soil one foot wide, five feet deep and six
long weighing 120 pounds per cubic foot would weigh 3600 pounds per side. (1 foot wide x 5
feet deep x 6 feet long x 120 pounds per cubic foot). If you multiply each vertical wall by two, a
full cave-in could easily be 7200 pounds.
Other visual inspections are for Bulging which occurs as a result of the vertical and lateral forces
being exerted on the unsupported walls. Bulging will first appear on the face of the wall as
protrusions into the open excavation. Subsidence occurs as a result of unbalanced stresses in the
soil. Subsidence causes the soil to sink on the surface and bulging of the vertical face of the
trench. If uncorrected, this condition can cause face failure and entrapment of workers in the
trench. Heaving or squeezing is caused by the downward pressure created by the weight of
adjoining soil. This pressure causes a bulge in the bottom of the cut. Heaving and squeezing can
occur even when shoring or shielding has been properly installed. Boiling is evidenced by an
upward water flow into the bottom of the cut. A high water table is one of the causes of boiling.
Boiling produces a "quick" condition in the bottom of the cut, and can occur even when shoring
or trench boxes are used. Some additional visual inspections are for Raveling which is evidenced
by small amounts of material suddenly separating from the face of an excavation and trickling or
rolling down into the excavation. Spalling is evidenced by small fragments of rock break up or
scale off the excavation face. This is caused by vibration near a fractured unstable rock face.
Other visual inspections are for a Surcharge Load means an excessive vertical load or weight
caused by the spoil pile being too close to the trench edge or equipment being too close to the
trench edge. These activities effect the trench stability. Vibration is a dynamic force introduced
into the ground from blasting, pile driving, traffic, construction equipment and proximity to
railroad tracks and industrial turbines. Undercutting is caused by excavating below the existing
foundation of a nearby structures and not providing enough clearance area. A Previously
Disturbed Soil is a soil which will never return to its original position or stability. The
previously disturbed soil will slide or ravel into the new excavation. Finally, you must inspect for
a Layered Soil System where two or more distinctly different soils or rock types are arranged in
layers. The soil layers slope into the excavation at a four Horizontal to one Vertical (4H:IV) or
steeper slope. A layered system is controlled by its weakest layer and this can result in a wedge
failure.
Some trench failure terms are Sliding or slumping may occur as a result of tension cracks, weak
soil, water soaked soil, hard soil or rock on top of a weak soil layer. Toppling is also caused by
tension cracks. Toppling occurs when the trench's vertical face shears along the tension crack line
and topples into the excavation. Sloughing is where the sides cave into the trench during
excavation.
114

Field Tests for Soil Analysis
The OSHA standards states that the classification of soil shall be made based upon the results of
at least one Field Manual Soil Analysis Test. The OSHA standards describes these manual tests
that can be performed by a qualified person at the test site. The manual tests are the plasticity
test, the pat test, the dry strength test, the thumb penetration or pocket pentrometer test and the
drying test. The plasticity test requires you to mold a moist or wet sample of soil into a ball and
attempt to roll it into threads as thin as 1/8 of an inch in diameter by two inches in length. Then
the soil sample is held by one end and if the soil sample does not tear or break then it is
considered a cohesive soil. The Pat Test is used to determine the presence of a cohesive clay or
silt. This test is conducted by spreading a 1/8 inch to 1/4 inch thick sample of wet soil on the
palm of your hand and then remove any visible water from the surface. With the sample in the
palm of your hand, slap the back of the hand moderately approximately eight times. If the surface
appears shiny due to water rising to the surface, this soil consists mostly of granular silt or sand
and it is considered a weaker soil. If no water appears on the surface, the soil consists of mostly
cohesive clay and this is considered a stronger soil.
The Dry Strength Test is used to determine the amount of strength and the presence of fissures in
dry soils. If the soil is dry and crumbles on its own or with moderate pressure into individual
grains of fine powder, it is granular (any combination of gravel, sand, or silt). If the soil is dry
and fall into clumps which break up into smaller clumps, but the smaller clumps can only be
broken up with difficulty, it may be clay in any combination with gravel, sand, or silt. If the dry
soil breaks into clumps which do not break into small clumps and which can only be broken with
difficulty, and there is no visual indication the soil is fissured, the soil may be considered
unfissured.
The Thumb Penetration Test can be used to estimate the unconfined compressive strength of
cohesive soils. This test is based on the thumb penetration test described in American Society for
Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standard designation D2488 titled Standard Recommended
Practice for Description of Soils (Visual - Manual Procedure). This test should be conducted on
an undisturbed soil sample, such as a large clump of spoil, as soon as practicable after excavation
to keep to a minimum the effects of exposure to drying influences. If the excavation is later
exposed to wetting influences (rain, flooding), the classification of the soil must be changed
accordingly. The thumb penetration test is used to estimate the unconfined compressive strength
of cohesive soils. From the thumb penetration level you can determine the type of soil using the
following chart from ASTM Standard Test D 2488.
THUM B PENETRATION
UNCONFINED
SOIL TYPE
1/4 " or less
1.5 Tons per sq.ft.
1/4" to 1"
0.5 to 1.5 Tons per sq. ft.
1" or more
0.5 Tons per sq.ft.
115

The Unconfined Compressive Strength is the load per unit area at which soil will fail in
compression. This measure can be determined by laboratory testing or it can be estimated in the
field using the Thumb Penetration test a pocket penetrometer, or a shearvane (Torvane) test. The
Pocket Pentrometer is used to determine the unconfined compression strength on the trench face
or on a large clump of soil. Penetrometers are direct reading, spring-operated instruments that are
used to determine the unconfined compressive strength of saturated cohesive soils. Once pushed
into the soil, an indicator sleeve displays the reading. The instrument is calibrated in either tons
per square foot (tsf) or kilograms per square centimeter (kPa). However, penetrometers have
error rates in the range of plus or minus 20-40 percent. Another hand operated strength test
instrument is the shearvane or torvane. The Shearvane has blades which are pressed into a level
section of undisturbed soil, and the torsional knob is slowly turned until soil failure occurs. The
direct instrument reading must be multiplied by 2 to provide results in tons per square foot (tsf)
or kilograms per square centimeter (kPa).
The Drying Test is used to differentiate between cohesive material with fissures, unfissured
cohesive material, and granular material. The procedure for the drying test involves drying a
sample of soil that is approximately one inch thick (2.54 cm) and six inches (15.24 cm) in
diameter until it is thoroughly dry. After drying, If the sample develops cracks as it dries,
significant fissures are indicated. Samples that dry without cracking are to be broken by hand. If
considerable force is necessary to break a sample, the soil has significant cohesive material
content. The soil can be classified as an unfissured cohesive material and the unconfined
compressive strength should be determined. Finally, If a sample breaks easily by hand, it is either
a fissured cohesive material or a granular material. To distinguish between the two, pulverize the
dried clumps of the sample by hand or by stepping on them. If the clumps do not pulverize easily,
the material is cohesive with fissures. If they pulverize easily into very small fragments, the
material is granular.
The table is provided below to help you differentiate between the soils using the dry test.
UNFISSURED COHESIVE SOIL
FISSURED SOIL
Surface drying cracks are not visible
Surface drying cracks are visible
Sample breaks with force
Sample breaks easily by hand
Clumps do not crush easily by hand or when stepped on.
Clumps do not crush easily by hand or when

stepped on
Granular Soil
Clumps crush easily
116

Volume Changes, Swell Percentage and Shrinkage Percentage
Soil is found in three fundamental conditions or states. They are Bank, Loose and Compacted
states. Bank material is in its natural or undisturbed condition. Bank is often referred to as in
place or in situ. The unit volume is identified as a bank cubic yard (BCY). The Loose
Material state is material that has been excavated, stockpiled or loaded a piece of equipment. The
unit volume is identified as a loose cubic yard (LCY). The Compacted Material is after applying
some type of compaction equipment to consolidate the material. The unit volume is identified as
compacted cubic yards (CCY). In conclusion, soil swells if disturbed and shrinks under pressure.
Therefore, volume corrections must be made depending on the soils change in state. The table
below provides the formula for the swell percentage which is used for hauling material and the
shrinkage percentage is used for compacting material. Also, the other table below provides the
average soil weights for calculating swell and shrinkage percentages based on the soils weight in
the various states and conditions.
AVERAGE SOIL WEIGHTS AND VOLUME CHANGE FORMULAS
SOIL TYPE
LCY
BCY
CCY 100%
STANDARD
PROCTOR
CCY 100%
MODIFIED
PROCTOR
LOAD
FACTOR
Clay - Dry
2050
2675
2835
3159
.81
Clay - Natural Bed W et
2800
3400
3575
3959
.82
Sand - Dry
2420
2740
3362
3510
.85
Sand - Damp
2760
3130
3362
3510
.85
Gravel - Damp
2623
2980
3375
3645
.85
Common Earth - Dry
2185
2883
3375
3510
.80
Common Earth - Moist
2463
3160
3375
3510
.79
Loam
2100
2600
2835
3150
.81
Sw % =(BCY - 1)100
LCY
Load Factor (LF)
100%
100% + % Swell
Sh % = (1- BCY)100
CCY
LCY x LF
BCY
BCY x SF
CCY
Shrinkage Factor (SF)
CCY
BCY
Using the tables above and assume that you are excavating a Natural Bed Wet Clay. The Swell
percentage is = Swell % =
(BCY - 1)100 Wet Clay = (3400 -1) 100 = (1.214 - 1) = 21.43%
(LCY)
(2800)
117

Now assume that you are compacting a wet sand around the structure. The shrinkage percentage
is:
Shrinkage % = (1- BCY)100
CCY
Damp Sand = (1 - 3,130) 100 = (1 - .892) = 10.8%

3,510
Compaction is defined as the voids in the soil are reduced as portions of the air and moisture are
driven out by the use of mechanical compaction equipment such as rollers, vibrating rollers and
tampers. Reduced voids and increased density produce a more stable earth fill., which will
provide a greater weight carrying capacity.
A standard laboratory test called a Proctor Test has been developed to evaluate a soils moisturedensity relationship under specified compaction conditions. Actually, there are two Proctor tests
which have been standardized by the American Society for Testing Materials and (ASTM) and
the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). These are
the Standard Proctor Test and the Modified Proctor Test.
The Standard Proctor Test is performed using a steel cylinder mold 4 inch in diameter with a
height of 4.59 inches and it is filled with a sample of the proposed material in three layers. Each
layer is struck with 25 blows from a 5.5-pound, 2 inch diameter hammer dropped from a height
of 12 inches. The Modified Proctor Test is performed using the same cylinder and the sample is
placed in 5 layers. Each layer is struck with 25 blows with a 10-pound, 2 inch diameter hammer
dropped from a height of 18 inches (stroke). The Modified Proctor is specified for fill material
designated for use under areas where high design loads are anticipated such as airport run ways
and paved areas.
The relationship between moisture content and density of the soil is similar with most soils.
Therefore, the amount of moisture required for the soil to attain its maximum density under
compaction is called the Optimum Moisture Content. The Optimum Moisture Content is the
primary factor that will determine if the desired density will be achieved in the least number of
passes. Normally the Technical Specifications specify the proctor test that will be utilized, the
density percentage that must be achieved and the optimum moisture content range.
Another factor that will effect whether density is attained is the thickness of the compacted
material normally referred to as the lift. The normal lift for compaction purposes is between 6
inches and 12 inches.
118

Soil Mechanics Exercise
Questions 1 through 16 pertain to the Soil Investigation Report and Soil Boring Procedures and
the Relative Density and Consistency Table provided at the end of this exercise. Answer the
following questions.
1.
The Soil Report discusses the Penetration Resistance N Blow Count Summation
procedure, What is the correct summation procedure?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
What type of hammer and fall distance was utilized for sampling the soil borings?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Owner.
Vendor.
Contractor.
Architect/Engineer.
What does the abbreviation bpf mean?

A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
a 5-pound hammer falling 12-inches.

Which party is responsible for comparing the soil borings to the standard Relative
Density and Consistency Table provided in the Soil Report?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Add Blow Counts 1 and 2.

Add Blow Counts 1, 2, and 3.
Bulk per foot.

Bank per foot.
Blows per foot.
Borings per foot.
What does the abbreviation SPT mean?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Stiff Penetration Test.

Standard Proctor Test.
Standard Penetration Test.
Society for Proctor Testing.
119

6.
Which organization established the penetration test boring procedures?

A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
What is the Ground Elevation for Soil Boring #5?

A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
0.0 Feet.
1.0 Foot.
2.5 Feet
15.0 Feet
Using Soil Boring #5, What is the Penetration Resistance N at 4 Feet in bpf?
A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
682.3'
683.3'
697.8'
807.0'
At what depth did they hit water during drilling for Soil Boring #5?
A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
Testing Services.
Standard Penetration Testing.
Society for Proctor Testing.
American Society for Testing and Materials.
3
6
7
10
Using Soil Boring #5, is there any unsuitable soil?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Organic Topsoil.
Rock and Boulders.
Very Stiff Clay and Gravel.
Loose to Very Loose Brown Fine to Course Sand.
120

11.
Using Soil Boring #5. What is the depth of the unsuitable soil in feet?
A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
What is the Soil Classification for Boring #5 shown at 6 feet?

A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
Soft.
Loose.
Medium Stiff.
Medium Dense.
At what depth was Boring #5 drilling operation stopped?

A.
B.
C.
D.
15.
Organic Topsoil.
Rock and Boulders.
Very Stiff Clay and Gravel.
Loose to Very Loose Brown Fine to Course Sand.
Using the Relative Density and Consistency Table, Soil Boring #5 and assume the
Penetration Resistance N is 7. What is the material description from the table?
A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
0.00'
1.00'
2.50'
3.08'
0.0 Feet.
1.0 Foot.
2.5 Feet
15.0 Feet
Assume the Penetration Resistance N is 29 for a clay, from the Relative Density and
Consistency table what is the material description?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Dense.
Very Stiff.
Medium Stiff.
Medium Dense.
121

16.
Using the Relative Density and Consistency table, If the soil boring indicated a Sand what
term are you looking for at the top of the Table?
A.
B.
C.
D.
17.
Which of the following soils is considered cohesionless?

A.
B.
C.
D.
18.
Clay
Sand.
Gravel.
Topsoil.
Which of the following tests is performed on cohesionless soil to determine the

distribution of grain size?
A.
B.
C.
D.
20.
Silt.
Clay
Gravel.
Topsoil.
Which of the following soils is considered cohesive?

A.
B.
C.
D.
19.
Consistency.
Medium Stiff.
Medium Dense.
Relative Density.
Vane Test.
Sieve Analysis.
Atterberg Limits.
Penetration Test.
Which of the following techniques is used to determine the liquid, plastic, semisolid, and
solid states of consistency for a cohesive soil?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Vane Test.
Sieve Analysis.
Atterberg Limits.
Penetration Test.
122

21.
Which of the following terms refers to the ability of water to flow through a soil by
traveling through the void spaces?
A.
B.
C.
D.
22.
What are the most commonly used soil classification systems based on grain size?
A.
B.
C.
D.
23.
Spoil.
Saturated Soil.
Submerged Soil.
Cohesionless Soil.
What type of soil is the most dangerous because the excavated faces appear to be solid
and stable, but they are drastically affected by water, wind, and pressure?
A.
B.
C.
D.
25.
Atterberg Limits and Permeability.

The U.S. Department of Agriculture (USDA) Textural Classification Scheme and
the National Bureau of Standards Report BSS-121.
The Construction Specification Institutes Master Format and the U.S.
Governments Master Work Breakdown Structure (WBS).
Unified Soil Classification System (USCS) and the American Association of State
Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
What is the earth material drawn from an excavation called?

A.
B.
C.
D.
24.
Capillarity.
Frost heave.
Permeability.
Ground Water Table.
Clay.
Sand.
Gravel.
Stable Rock.
According to OSHA, what is the minimum ratio for a layered soil system?
A.
B.
C.
D.
1H:1V
3H:1V
4H:1V
1H:4V.
123
26.

A small amount of material suddenly separates from the face of an excavation and
trickles or rolls down into the excavation. What is the visual inspection term called?
A.
B.
C.
D.
27.
The layers on the face of the excavation slope at a ratio of four horizontal to one vertical
(4H:1V) or greater. What is the visual inspection term called?
A.
B.
C.
D.
28.
Boiling.
Sloughing.
Submerged.
Surcharge Load.
The soil has sunk on the horizontal surface. What is the visual inspection term called?
A.
B.
C.
D.
30.
Sliding.
Toppling.
Undercutting.
Sloped system.
There is upward water flow into the bottom of the excavation. What is the visual
inspection term called?
A.
B.
C.
D.
29.
Spalling.
Heaving.
Toppling.
Raveling.
Boiling.
Bulging.
Heaving.
Subsidence.
The soil is protruding from the face of the open excavation into the excavation. What is
the visual inspection term called?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Boiling.
Bulging.
Heaving.
Subsidence.
124

31.
the soil is protruding up from the bottom of the excavation. What is the visual inspection
term called?
A.
B.
C.
D.
32.
the soil has open cracks on the horizontal ground or on the open face of the excavation.
What is the visual inspection term called?
A.
B.
C.
D.
33.
Impact load.
Undercutting.
Underpinning.
Surcharge load.
What do the field thumb penetration, pocket penetrometer and the shearvane measure?
A.
B.
C.
D.
35.
Fissure.
Bulging.
Sloughing.
Subsidence.
What is the term for an excessive vertical load caused by the spoil pile or construction
equipment being too close to the trench edge?
A.
B.
C.
D.
34.
Boiling.
Bulging.
Heaving.
Subsidence.
Shear Stress.
Impact Load.
Surcharge Load.
Unconfined Compressive Strength.
Which field manual test is used to differentiate between cohesive material with fissures,
unfissured cohesive material, and granular material?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Pat Test.
Drying Test.
Plasticity Test.
Dry Strength Test.
125

36.
Which field manual test checks for a cohesive soil?

A.
B.
C.
D.
37.
Which field manual test is used to determine the presence of a cohesive clay or silt?
A.
B.
C.
D.
38.
Clay.
Moist Soil.
Layered Soil.
Granular Soil.
What is the soil state called if it is in its natural, or in place or in situ or undisturbed state?
A.
B.
C.
D.
41.
Spoil.
Loam.
Moist Soil.
Common Earth.
Which of the following soil has no cohesive strength?

A.
B.
C.
D.
40.
Pat Test.
Drying Test.
Plasticity Test.
Thumb Penetration Test.
What is another name for a soil that contains equal parts of sand, silt and clay?
A.
B.
C.
D.
39.
Pat Test.
Drying Test.
Plasticity Test.
Thumb Penetration Test.
Bank.
Loose
Solid.
Compacted.
What is the soil state called when the soil is excavated?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Bank.
Loose
Solid.
Compacted.
126

42.
Using the Average Soil Weights Table, What is the swell percentage using a Loam?
A.
B.
C.
D.
43.
Using the Average Soil Weights Table, What is the shrinkage percentage for a Damp
Sand under the Modified Proctor method, What is the shrinkage percentage? .
A.
B.
C.
D.
44.
Soil Type.
Moisture Content.
Swell Percentage.
Shrinkage Percentage.
Which of the following procedures describes the Modified Proctor Test?

A.
B.
C.
D.
46.
10.8
12.1
13.4
85.0
Which of the following is the primary factor that will determine if 97% density using the
Modified Proctor Test will be achieved in a predetermined number of passes?
A.
B.
C.
D.
45.
08.3%
23.8%
31.9%
81.0%
It uses a 5-pound hammer dropped from a height of 12 inches.

It uses a 13,000 pound hammer dropped from a height of 20 feet.
Which of the following procedures describes the Standard Proctor Test?

A.
B.
C.
D.

It uses a 13,000 pound hammer dropped from a height of 20 feet.
127

47.
What is the normal lift range in inches stated in the documents for attaining the specified
density percentage when compacting structural fill?
A.
B.
C.
D.
48.
Which document specifies the Proctor Test and the percentage range and the Optimum
Moisture Content?
A.
B.
C.
D.
49.
Shearvane.
Penetrometer
Standard Proctor.
Modified Proctor.
The Soil Tables and formulas contain the abbreviation BCY, What does BCY mean?
A.
B.
C.
D.
51.
Bid Documents.
General Requirements.
Technical Specifications.
Supplementary Conditions.
Which test is specified for fill material designated for use under areas where high design
loads are anticipated such as airport run ways and paved areas?
A.
B.
C.
D.
50.
6 - 12.
13 - 24.
25 - 48.
49 - 60.
Bulk Cubic Yards.

Bank Cubic Yards.
Basic Cubic Yards.
Borrow Cubic Yards.
Which test instrument measures the unconfined compressive strength of soil?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Standard Proctor.
Modified Proctor.
Pocket Penetrometer.
Standard Penetration.
Check Answers
128

Soil Mechanics Exercise - Soil Investigation Report
Geotechnical Investigation Report
The purpose of this report is to present the results of a soil investigation performed at the project
site located in Big Rapids Township, Michigan. We have appended Drawing No. 1 which
identifies the project site location in Big Rapids Township.
The borings were drilled by Testing Services (TS), Inc., using a CME model 45 skid drill rig.
The drill rig utilized hollow stem augers to sample depths where samples were obtained in a twoinch O.D. split spoon sampler driven by a 140-pound hammer falling 30 inches. The number of
blows required to drive the sampler three six-inch increments are recorded on the boring logs.
The first six inches are considered the seating drive. The summation of the number of blows
required for the second and third six inches are termed the penetration resistance N value in
blows per foot (bpf). This field procedure is referred to as the Standard Penetration Test (SPT)
and is an American Society for Testing and Materials test procedure (ASTM D-1586). The N
values from the SPT are used for the determination of the relative density of granular soils (sand,
gravel, low plasticity silt, and mixtures of sand and gravel) or the consistency of cohesive oils
(clay and plastic silts). A chart is provided in the back of this report which provides a correlation
between N values and the relative density of granular soils or the consistency of cohesive soils.
Relative Density and Consistency Table
Sand and Silt, Relative Density
Consistency of Clay
drive a sampler 1 foot,
using a 140# hammer
falling 30"

drive a sampler 1 foot,
using a 140# hammer
falling 30"
2" O.D.
Samplers
<4
2" O.D.
Samplers
RELATIVE
DENSITY
CONSISTENCY
Very Loose
<2
Very Soft
4 - 10
Loose
2-4
Soft
11-15
Medium Loose
5-6
Medium Soft
16-30
Medium Dense
7-8
Medium Stiff
31-50
Dense
9-15
Stiff
> 50
Very Dense
16-30
Very Stiff
>30
129
Hard

Soil Mechanics Exercise - Soil Boring #5
130

Psychrometry and the Psychrometric Chart
This is the field of study concerned with the behavior of atmospheric air. Air in the atmosphere is
a mixture of gases including oxygen and nitrogen, and water vapor. When one wishes to
condition an air space to create comfort for the occupants of the space, one will make changes in
important properties of the air, including the temperature and the humidity. The impact of these
changes on the comfort of the occupants is determined by considering the changes in a number of
other properties, which could result. The most common approach to evaluate this impact is by
using a chart solution of a number of thermodynamic relationships.
The psychrometric chart is a representation of all the important properties of atmospheric air and
the relationships between them. There are a number of properties shown, and a great many axes
which run in different, often curving directions. The various properties and the direction of the
appropriate axis are shown below.
131
Problems in psychometrics are solved by connecting lines on any two intersecting axes to
identify a point which represents the properties of the air under the conditions of the problem.
The remaining properties can be read on the other axes.
132

Psychrometry Example
Using the Psychrometric chart, and given a Dry-Bulb (DB) Temperature is 90 degrees Fahrenheit
and the Wet-bulb (WB) Temperature is 76 degrees Fahrenheit, Determine the following values.
First, what is the Relative Humidity (RH) value from the chart?
This found by following the downward curving lines and it reads greater than 50% and
less than 60%. Therefore, the interpolation would be 54%.
Second, what is the Humidity Ratio (HR) value from the chart?
This is found by using the point of intersection between the Dry-bulb and the Wet-Bulb
Temperatures and then drawing a horizontal line to the right side. The Humidity ratio
reads 0.0162. This is the humidity ratio or the pounds of moisture per pound of dry air.
Third, What is the Dew Point (DP) value from the chart?
This is found by using the point of intersection between the Dry-Bulb and the Wet-Bulb
Temperatures and then drawing a horizontal line to the left side. The Dew Point reads 71
degrees F. This is the Dew Point of saturation.
Fourth, What is the Enthalpy value from the chart?
This is found using the point of intersection between the Dry-Bulb and the Wet-Bulb
Temperatures and then following the diagonal line to the left side. The Enthalpy reads
39.6 Btu per lb of dry air.
Heat is measured in British Thermal units, or BTU. A BTU is the amount of heat required to
raise 1 pound of water 1 degree F. The rate of heat flow is measured in BTU per hour abbreviated
btuh. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC systems use fluids to transport heat and
cold to satisfy loads and maintain comfort. The fluids such as air, water, steam, and refrigerant
are used to transport the heat and cold.
133
134

Psychrometric Exercise
Using the Psychrometric Chart and given a Dry Bulb Temperature of 85 degrees F and a Wet
Bulb Temperature of 65F answer the following questions.
1.
What is the Relative Humidity (RH) value?

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
What is the Humidity Ratio (HR) value?

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
0.0030
0.0088
30.0000
52.0000
What is the Enthalpy value?

A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
0.0030
0.0088
30.0000
52.0000
What is the Dew Point (DP) value?

A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
28
34
57
72
0.0030
0.0088
30.0000
52.0000
What is it called that measures the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of 1
pound of water 1 degree Fahrenheit?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Enthalpy.
Saturated.
Relative Humidity.
British thermal units.
135

Psychrometric Exercise
Using the Psychrometric Chart and given a Dry- Bulb Temperature of 75 degrees F and Relative
Humidity of 50% answer the following questions.
6.
What is the Wet-Bulb (WB) value?

A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
What is the Humidity Ratio (HR) value?

A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
0.0092
28.5000
56.0000
69.0000
What is the Enthalpy value?

A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
0.0092
28.5000
56.0000
69.0000
What is the Dew Point (DP) value?

A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
56
63
70
90
0.0092
28.5000
56.0000
69.0000
What is another term for the total heat content of air?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Enthalpy.
Saturated.
Relative Humidity.
British thermal units.
Check Answers
136
LEVEL 1 CONSTRUCTION FUNDAMENTALS STUDY GUIDE

MANAGEMENT CONCEPTS
Legal Entities
The major Legal Entities in the Construction Industry are the sole proprietorship, the partnership
and the corporation. The sole proprietorship is a business owned by one person. The advantages
of a sole proprietorship are the individual owns, operates, makes all decisions and they have
personal control of the business. This is the simplest form of ownership because no legal
documents are needed. One of the disadvantages is that the owner has unlimited liability for all
loss which extends to their personal assets. Another disadvantage is you are taxed on the full
earnings of the business whether or not they are withdrawn. A third disadvantage is the company
ceases to exist when the owner dies or is injured and cannot conduct business. Finally, because
only one person has all of the personal assets it is extremely difficult to generate new capital to
expand the business.
A partnership is a business which consists of two or more persons pooling their assets such as
cash, property, equipment and talent for a common goal. Each general partner has a voice in the
daily management of the company. All of the partnerships assets are considered personal assets,
but they are the sums of all partners, therefore, the credit line is greater than a sole proprietorship.
Company profits or losses are normally allocated to each partner in the same proportion as the
distribution of ownership. For tax purposes the partnership is not considered a legal entity,
therefore, the partnership does not pay income taxes. But they must file an informational tax
return and the individual partners must pay income taxes on their portion of the profits or losses.
The primary disadvantage is unlimited liability and each partner is held individually
responsibility for all contracts, debts and torts of the business and its employees. This means one
partner can be personally liable for all debts incurred by the partnership if the other partner
cannot pay. Then one partner is required to use their personal assets to satisfy all of the
businesses obligations. A joint venture is a form of partnership. It is an agreement between two
or more construction companies to combine their resources to build a specific project. Legally
there is little if any difference between a partnership and a joint venture. The joint venture is
formed for a specific project and for a limited amount of time.
A corporation is considered a separate legal entity created by state law through a charter which is
filed with the secretary of state. The corporation is separate and apart from the officers who
operate it and/or the shareholders who own it. A corporation can own property, issue stock and it
can sue or be sued. Some of the advantages are that the corporation can sell stock to generate
capital to expand the company. The sale of stock is not subject to repayment. The corporations
liability is limited to the assets in the corporation and the corporation is perpetual. The major
disadvantage is that the corporation is taxed twice. Another form of a corporation is a Subchapter
S corporation. A Subchapter S is used for federal government taxation purposes only. A
Subchapter S corporations income and deductions flow through to the individual tax returns of
the shareholders and it avoids federal income taxes as a corporation.
137

Management Systems
Partnering is normally initiated by the Owner during the conceptual phase of a project. The
primary goal of partnering is to get commitment from the top management of all project
participants and stakeholders to develop open communications and cooperation instead of the
traditional adversarial relationships. Some of the typical project participants and stakeholders are
the A/E firm, the Contractor, the Subcontractors, the major Vendors, and possibly the Public.
Normally partnering involves a meeting with all stakeholders and a third-party facilitator who
helps the parties discuss and agree to mutual goals and develop a charter for the project.
Total Quality Management (TQM) is a philosophy which was developed by Dr. W. Edwards
Deming. TQM focuses on customer focus, customer satisfaction, continuous improvement, and
total involvement. According to David Goetsch (2003) in his book, Construction Safety and
Health he defines the concept of TQM as an approach to doing business that maximizes the
competitiveness of an organization through continuous improvement of its products, services,
people, processes, and environments (p 449). He insists that there are ten characteristics that
describe how TQM achieves its purpose (p 449). They are Customer Focus, Obsession with
quality, a Scientific approach, Long term commitment, Teamwork, Continual process
improvements, Education and Training, Freedom through control, Unity of purpose and
Empowerment (p 450). The foundation of total quality is continuous improvement. Some
methods to measure improvement are through participation with the International Organization
of Standardization referred to in the U.S. as the International Standards Organization (ISO) 9000
series. These standards represent an international movement to establish world wide quality
standards for manufactured products and services. Another guide utilized to improve an
organization and evaluate their progress toward becoming the best in their field is the Malcolm
Baldrige National Quality Award. The Baldrige Award consists of 18 criteria items and it
describes the characteristics of excellence for each item.
Total Safety Management (TSM) was introduced to the safety profession by David Goetsch
(1997) in his book, Implementing Total Safety Management. Goetsch insists that TQM has
proven itself to be an effective way to maximize an organizations long-term competitiveness . .
. by eliminating the problem of isolation and making quality everybodys job and casting the
quality manager in the role of facilitator and catalyst (p 450). He suggests that the principles of
TQM can solve the safety isolation problem by making making safety everybodys job and
casting the safety manager in the role of facilitator and catalyst. Therefore, Total Safety
Management follows the same principles as TQM. David Goetsch (2003) defines TSM as
A performance and process-oriented approach to safety and health management that
gives organizations a sustainable competitive advantage in the marketplace by
establishing a safe and healthy work environment that is conducive to consistent peak
performance and that is improved continually. It involves applying the principles of TQM
to the management of safety and health (p 452).
138

Statistical Process Control (SPC) the Tools of Quality
There are numerous graphical tools used by teams to assist them in studying processes. Below is
a brief overview of these measurement tools. Pareto Chart is a bar graph of identified causes
shown in descending order of magnitude or frequency.
Magnitude
of
Concern
Concern Category
A second graphical tool is the Fishbone Chart . This chart displays the causes and effects on a
diagram for analyzing problems and the factors that contribute to them. The example below
shows the categories of potential problems or Causes and the Effect
Environment Factor
Weather
Technology Factor
No Ergonomics
Methods
No Training
Materials
Bags
Workers
No Exercise
Machinery Factor
Throwing
Effect
Soft Tissue
Injuries
A third graphical tool used is the Histogram. The Histogram is a bar graph displaying a
frequency distribution. The histogram below displays the frequency of responses for an item.
139

A fourth graphical tool is the Scatter Diagram. This is a graph displaying the correlation of two
characteristics. For example, the scatter diagram below is used to compare the tensile strength of
a wire versus its diameter.
TENSILE
WIRE DIAMETER
A fifth graphical tool is the flowchart. This is a pictorial representation of a process.
A sixth graphical tool is the Control Chart. Control Charts are line graphs that plot individual
events over a period of time. It is a method of monitoring the output of a process or system
through the sample measurement of a selected characteristics and the analysis of its performance
over time. The control chart below is a chart that plots the percentage of aggregate passing the
3/8" sieve in a gradation test. Each point is the average of two samples. The first thirty points
are used to calculate upper and lower control limits and an overall average. The overall average,
41.89%, is plotted as a solid line labeled x. The control limits are plotted as horizontal dashed
lines. There are formulas that are used to calculate these control limits. The five points above
the upper control limit indicate a problem area, and the cause should be investigated. control
charts are used to show trends, variation about an average, and whether a process has too much
variation.
140

The seventh graphical display tool is the Run Chart. Run charts are line graphs that show a trend
over time. They are similar to control charts, except that control limits are not shown, and the
average is not necessarily shown. The example below shows the reduction in time required to
install hardware and hang doors in an office building. The results were achieved as a result of a
study of the process. A contractor can do the same thing for virtually any process. Simply plot the
workhours per unit over a period of time. It can be workhours or equipment hours per cubic yard
of excavation, a cubic yard of concrete, a square yard of asphalt, a square foot of drywall, etc.
The value of the run chart is that it shows positive and negative trends, and provides a better
visualization of the level of process performance.
141

Project Delivery Methods
Owners have a variety of project delivery systems to choose from in the construction industry.
The delivery method refers to the Owners approach to developing the project team throughout
the entire design, procurement, construction and commissioning process. The three most
common project delivery methods are the tradition form, the design-build form and the
Construction Management approach. These project delivery methods and their variations are
discussed below.
The most common traditional project delivery method is the Fixed Price or commonly referred to
as the Lump Sum Contract. The Fixed Firm Price contract is primarily used for projects that are
completely designed and the scope is clearly defined. A fixed price contract is a guarantee by the
contractor to perform the work and provide the necessary labor, material and equipment in a
timely manner, no matter what the actual costs incurred. All financial risks are borne entirely by
the Contractor in a Lump Sum contract. The Owner agrees to pay the Contractor, normally on a
monthly basis, payments based upon progress.
A second traditional project delivery method is the Unit Price Contract. The Unit Price contract
provides the Contractor with a list of items and the estimated quantities to be installed. The
Contractor guarantees to perform an estimated quantity of work at a specified unit price.
Conversely, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the agreed upon unit price for the actual
quantity of work installed at the job site. Hence, the total contract amount will vary depending on
the actual quantities installed. However, the unit price for each particular item listed will not
change throughout the contract, unless there is a major variation in a particular line item.
Normally, the Unit Price contract contains a quantity adjustment clause for these major variances
which states that "if the Quantities of an item of work installed varies from the estimated
quantities by more than 20 percent, then the price will be adjusted. A unit price contract is
primarily utilized on civil projects such as roads, bridges and massive excavation projects.
A third traditional project delivery method is the Cost Plus Contract. The Cost Plus contract is
used for projects that contain a substantial amount of undefined design, undefined scope,
complex procurement system, and unstable or uncertain labor, material and equipment prices. In
the Cost Plus contract the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor for all actual direct costs of labor,
materials and equipment incurred on the project, and a fee for the Contractors services. There
are numerous methods used to calculate the Contractors fee on a Cost Plus contract such as the
Cost Plus a Percentage of Project Costs, a Cost Plus a Fixed Fee, a Cost Plus Fixed Fee with a
Target or Incentive Fee, and Cost Plus a Fixed Fee with a Guaranteed Maximum Price (GMP).
A fourth traditional project delivery method is the Turn Key Contract. The Turn key contract is
used mostly by developers. The Contractor/Developer agrees to design the project or build the
project according to your design. They will also purchase the property and finance the project.
The Owner agrees to make monthly payments on a long term lease.
142

The Design-Build project delivery method sometimes referred to as Engineer-Construct project is
a contract that the Owner enters into one contract with a company to provide all design,
procurement and construction on the project. The Design-Build firm then enters into contracts
with designers, contractors, subcontractors, vendors and suppliers to complete the project. One of
the advantages for an Owner in selecting this method is from the better communication that can
occur between the design professionals and the construction professionals during the early design
phases of the project. This collaboration allows the project to be fast-tracked which can reduce
the overall time of a project from schematic drawing to Owner occupancy. Fast-tracking is
defined as the overlapping accomplishment of design, procurement, construction and
commissioning of a project.
The Construction Management project delivery method the Owner hires both a design firm and a
construction management firm during the pre design phase of a project. Under the traditional
Construction Management Contract, the CM firm is hired as an Agent for the Owner similar to
hiring the Architect/Engineer as an Agent. Under this traditional CM contract the Owner holds
separate contracts with the A/E, the CM and each individual Trade Contractor. The CMs
responsibility provides advice during the design phase and they provide overall scheduling, trade
coordination, cost control and management services during construction of the project. The CM
receives a management fee for their services similar to the A/E receiving a design fee for their
services. This fee is called an agency fee and the two methods that an Agency CM may offer an
Owner is a Fixed price Fee or a Guarantee Maximum Price Fee.
Finally, on long term construction projects prices can fluctuate substantially from the time for
submitting the bid until the time for delivery and installation because of the risk of inflation.
Therefore, if the Contractor is forced to provide a fixed price they will often include in their bid
price a contingency for anticipated cost increases. These anticipated cost increases may or may
not actually materialize. Therefore, for the Owner to avoid paying for something not received, the
Owner should use an escalation clause. The escalation clause is used for price changes in labor
rates and material prices only from regularly published indexes.
143

Contract Formation Principles
The contract formation principles outlined below are required to form an enforceable contract or
subcontract. They are:
1.
Meeting of the Minds. This is the signed Agreement between the parties. The Agreement
must be provided to each prospective bidder during the bidding phase of the project. This
allows the prospective bidders time to review the terms and conditions and determine any
unusual risk involved before the Agreement is signed. The Agreement is Signed
(executed) by both parties after the receipt of the Notice of Award. The agreement
provides for the signing, or execution of the contract. In construction, the Subcontract
Agreements are written and signed by both parties after the signing of the Owner Contractor Agreement. The major elements needed to form a valid contract are:
A.
An offer is made. Normally the Contractor is required to submit a bid proposal on

the forms provided by the A/E firm. It is also a good practice to standardize the
Subcontractor Bid Proposal form which includes a Bid Breakdown Section.
B.
Acceptance of the Offer. The contractor receives a Notice to Proceed which

indicates that the site is free of any encumbrances, and that the contractor can
occupy the site. The date of the Notice to Proceed establishes the reference date
from which the beginning of the project is calculated. The Notice to Proceed
allows the Contractor to perform certain functions for the project.
2.
Consideration is received. In the prime contract, this is something that the contractor
must lose of value. This is normally submitted with the offer such as a Bid Bond or
certified check for a certain percentage of the total contract price. If the contractor decides
not to sign the agreement then they will forfeit the value of their security to the owner.
Consideration under the General-Subcontractor contract formation process must rely on
the equitable doctrine of promissory estoppel. This doctrine holds that if the prime
contractor reasonably relies on the promise or price of the subcontractor to its detriment,
then the subcontractor must be held to its promise in order to avoid harm to the prime
contractor. To ensure that this promise isnt indefinite or unreasonable, the subcontractor
provides a time limit for acceptance of their bid.
3.
The Contract must be for a Legal Purpose.
4.
The parties have the legal capacity to enter into a Contract. This means they must have
the legal authority to sign the proposal being submitted. Under most types of ownership,
the sole proprietor, the legal partners or the corporate officers have the legal authority.
This becomes a problem when the estimator signs the proposal and is not recognized as a
legal authority for the company.
144

Management, Legal Entities & Delivery Methods Exercise
1.
The Owner wants to Fast-Track a construction project, Which type of contract best
supports this process?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
A clause in the contract states that "if the Quantities of an item of work varies from the
estimated quantities by more than 20 percent, then the price will be adjusted. Which type
of contract will this clause be primarily used in?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Cost Plus.
Unit Price.
Fixed Price.
Design-Build.
A contract has been entered into whereby the Contractor agrees to design, build, purchase
the land and finance the project. What is this type of contract called?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Cost Plus.
Unit Price.
Fixed Price.
Design-Build.
Cost Plus.
Turn Key.
Partnering.
Design-Build.
A contract is entered into whereby the design and scope are undefined and the Owner
agrees to pay for all Direct Labor, Materials, Equipment plus some agreed upon
allowance to the Contractor for their services. What is this type of contract called?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Cost Plus.
Partnering.
Design-Build.
Construction Management.
145

5.
A contract is entered into whereby the Design, Scope and Bid quantities are established
and payment for the work is to be made upon the basis of the actual quantity placed. What
is this type of contract called?
A.
B.
C.
D.
6.
A contract is entered into whereby the Design and Scope are partially undefined, the
Owner holds a contract with the A/E, the Owner holds the contracts with each trade and
the Owner also holds a contract with a management service company to perform the trade
coordination, cost control and scheduling services. What is this type of contract called?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
Cost Plus.
Joint Venture.
Design-Build.
A contract is entered into whereby two Contractors agree to combine their resources to
bid and build a specific project. What is this type of contract called?
A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
Cost Plus.
Turn Key.
Unit Price.
Fixed Price.
Cost Plus.
Joint Venture.
Design-Build.
What is the name of the clause that is sometimes used if the contract has the potential of
an uncertainty in either labor or material prices?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Incentive.
Escalation.
Contingency.
Equitable Adjustment.
146

9.
What are the two FEE methods that an Agency CM firm may offer an Owner?
A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
Which legal entity is considered perpetual?

A.
B.
C.
D.
11.
Partnership.
Corporation.
Joint Venture.
Sole Proprietorship.
Which legal entity exposes the personal assets of a person to pay for actions of other
people involved in the business?
A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
Partnership.
Corporation.
Joint Venture.
Which legal entity affords an individual the most protection of individual assets from
creditors of the business?
A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
Incentive or Target.
Unit Price or Alternate Prices.
Fixed Price or Guaranteed Maximum Price.
Cost-Plus a Percentage or Cost Plus Fixed Price.
Partnership.
Corporation.
Joint Venture.
Which legal entity makes it extremely difficult to generate new capital to expand the
business?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Partnership.
Corporation.
Subchapter S Corporation.
147

14.
Which legal entity is taxed twice?

A.
B.
C.
D.
15.
Which type of legal entity allows the income and deductions of the corporation to flow
through to the individual tax returns of the shareholders and it avoids federal taxes?
A.
B.
C.
D.
16.
Partnership.
Corporation.
Joint Venture.
Which law are corporations formed under?

A.
B.
C.
D.
18.
Partnership.
Corporation.
Which type of legal entity requires a charter?

A.
B.
C.
D.
17.
Partnership.
Corporation.
City.
State.
Federal.
Municipal.
Which of the following contract formation principles are needed to form a valid contract?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Offer, Acceptance, Meeting of the Minds and Consideration.

Performance, Technical Specifications and Consideration.
General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and a Proposal.
Plans, Technical Specifications, General and Supplementary Conditions.
148

19.
The owner requests that you submit a proposal supplement titled, Statement of
Contractors Qualifications - All Contracts and under the officers/principals section it
requests the names and titles of the vice president and the president. A proposal is
submitted to the Owner with a bid bond, signed addenda, and the proposal form is
attached and signed by the chief estimator. Have all of the contract formation principles
been satisfied and your proposal would be considered responsive?
A.
B.
C.
D.
20.
Which law establishes basic rules governing the sale of goods, used to establish a
Purchase Order?
A.
B.
C.
D.
21.
Davis Bacon Act.

Uniform Commercial Code.
National Labor Relations Act.
Uniform Transportation Code.
Which of the following Safety criteria that has the greatest potential for reducing the costs
of accidents?
A.
B.
C.
D.
22.
The principle of Consideration has been met, therefore, responsive bid.

The principle of Legal Capacity has been met, therefore, responsive bid.
The principle of the meeting of the minds has been met, therefore, responsive bid.
The principle of Legal Capacity has not been met, therefore, a non-responsive bid.
Experience.
Safety Meetings.
Traditional Safety Program.
Behavior-based Safety Process.
What management concept has as its primary goal to get commitment from top
management of all project participants and stakeholders to develop open communications
and cooperation on a project to?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Partnering.
Total Safety Management.
Statistical Process Control.
Total Quality Management.
149

23.
What are the quality standards used internationally called?

A.
B.
C.
D.
24,
What management philosophy tries to maximize the competitiveness of an organization

through continuous improvement?
A.
B.
C.
D.
25.

Baldrige Award of Excellence.
What management philosophy is defined as a performance and processed-oriented

approach to safety and health that is improved continually and applies proven principles
to maximize an organizations long-term competitiveness?
A.
B.
C.
D.
27.
Partnering.
What is the name of the criteria that is utilized to improve an organization and evaluate
their progress toward becoming the best in their field?
A.
B.
C.
D.
26.
ISO 9000.

What makes TQM and TSM successful?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Applying the partnering process to an organization.

Applying the TQM and TSM principles to an organization.
Adding more Quality Control and Safety Managers to oversee the workers.
Eliminating the isolation problem and making quality and safety everybodys role.
150

28.
What graphical measurement tool is a bar graph displaying a frequency distribution?

A.
B.
C.
D.
29.
What graphical measurement tool is a pictorial representation of a process?

A.
B.
C.
D.
30.
Histogram.
Pareto Chart.
Control Chart.
Fishbone Chart.
What graphical measurement tool is a bar graph of identified causes shown in descending
order of magnitude?
A.
B.
C.
D.
32.
Run Chart.
Flow Chart.
Control Chart.
Scatter Diagram.
What graphical measurement tool displays the causes and effects on a diagram for
analyzing problems?
A.
B.
C.
D.
31.
Histogram.
Pareto Chart.
Control Chart.
Fishbone Chart.
Bar Chart
Histogram.
Gantt Chart.
Pareto Chart.
What graphical measurement tool is a graph displaying the correlation of two

characteristics?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Run Chart.
Flow Chart.
Control Chart.
Scatter Diagram.
151

33.
What graphical display tool contain line graphs that show a trend over time such as the
workhours per square yard of asphalt over a period of time?
A.
B.
C.
D.
34.
Which of the following principles of law states that if the prime contractor reasonably
relies on the promise or price of the subcontractor to its detriment, then the subcontractor
must be held to its promise in order to avoid harm to the prime contractor even though a
signed contract between the contractor and subcontractor does not exist at the bidding
phase of a project?
A.
B.
C.
D.
35.
Consideration.
Legal Purpose.
Promissory Estoppel.
Equitable Adjustment.
At which point in time must the Agreement be provided to each prospective bidder?
A.
B.
C.
D.
36.
Bar Chart
Run Chart.
Flow Chart.
Control Chart.
At the bid opening.

During the bidding phase of the project.
At the signing of the Owner- Contractor Agreement.
Just before the signing of the Owner- Contractor Agreement.
Which document establishes the reference date from which the beginning of the project is
calculated and that the contractor can occupy the site?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Notice of Award.
Notice to Proceed.
Instructions to Bidders.
Advertisement to Bidders.
Check Answers
152

Financial Statements
The three distinct financial statements are the Balance Sheet, the Income Statement and the Cash
Flow Statement and each serves a specific function as described below.
Balance Sheet
The Balance Sheet is a summary of the existing conditions of the company and it follows the
standardized format for classifying and ordering the Assets, Liabilities and, and Ownership
interests in the business. The balance sheet accounts are subdivided into the following basic
groups in the following order for presentation:
Assets are subdivided into these groups:
Current Assets
Fixed Assets or Long Term Property, Plant & Equipment
Other Assets
Liabilities are subdivided into these groups:
Current Liabilities
Long-term Liabilities
Owners Equity
Each separate asset, liability, and owners equity reported in a Balance Sheet is called an account
and every account has a title and a dollar amount which is called its balance. The Balance Sheet
is prepared at the close of business on the last day of the income statement period and lists the
assets, liabilities and net worth. Assets minus Liabilities equals Net Worth. The balance sheet
will always be in balance because Total Assets = Total Liabilities plus Net Worth.
Current assets are cash on hand, Accounts receivable, Inventories, Prepaid Expenses, and Other
current assets that will be converted into cash during one operating cycle. The Fixed assets or
Long-term assets are Land and Buildings, and Equipment. The cost of a fixed asset is reduced by
the depreciable amount allocable over the period.
Current Liabilities or short-term liabilities are accounts that will come due within one year. The
accounts are Accounts Payable, Notes payable, and Billings in excess of costs on uncompleted
contracts. Long-term Liabilities are those that maturity dates are more than one year such as a
long-term loan. The Net Worth or Stock holders Equity accounts in the Balance sheet is
comprised of Capital stock and Retained Earnings.
Working Capital is the net amount of current assets available. It is computed as follows. Working
Capital = Current Assets minus Current liabilities
$3,415,807 - $1,546,107 = $1,869,700 at End of Year.
153
BALANCE SHEET
Assets
End of Year
Start of Year
Cash
Contracts Receivable
Inventory
Prepaid expenses
Total Current Assets
Property, Plant, Equipment
Accumulated Depreciation
$ 565,807.00
1,000,000.00
1,690,000.00
160,000.00
$3,415,807.00
3,000,000.00
(800,000.00)
$ 750,000.00
825,000.00
1,250,000.00
185,000.00
$3,010,000.00
2,250,000.00
(540,000.00)
Total Assets
$5,615,807.00
$4,720,000.00
Liabilities and Owners Equity
End of Year
Start of Year
Accounts Payable - Inventory
$ 520,000.00
$ 450,000.00
Accounts Payable - Operating
120,000.00
85,000.00
Total Accounts Payable
$ 640,000.00
$ 535,000.00
Accrued Operating Expenses

Accrued Interest Payable
$ 240,000.00
17,167.00
$ 185,000.00
12,500.00
Total Accrued Expenses

Income Tax Payable
Short-Term Notes Payable
$ 257,167.00
23,940.00
625,000.00
$ 197,500.00
36,000.00
600,000.00
$1,546,107.00
$1,368,500.00
750,000.00
$2,296,107.00
600,000.00
$1,968,500.00
775,000.00
725,000.00
2,544,700.00
$3,319,700.00
$5,615,807.00
2,026,500.00
$2,751,500.00
$4,720,000.00
Total Current Liabilities

Long-Term Notes Payable
Total Liabilities
Capital Stock
Retained Earnings
Total Owners Equity
Total Liabilities and
INCOM E STATEM ENT FOR THE YEAR

Contract Revenues
$10,400,000.00
Cost of Contracts Completed
Gross Margin
Operating Expenses
Depreciation Expense
Operating Earnings
6,760,000.00
$ 3,640,000.00
2,080,000.00
260,000.00
$ 1,300,000.00
Interest Expense
Earnings before Taxes
103,000.00
$ 1,197,000.00
Income Tax Expense

Net Income
487,800.00
718,200.00
154

Financial Ratios and the Construction Industry Average Table
Ratio
Liquidity:
Formula for Calculation

Current Ratio
Quick Assets or Acid test
Leverage: Debt to total assets - high
Times interest earned - low
Fixed charge coverage
Industry Average
current assets
current liabilities
2.5 times
current assets - inventory - prepaid expenses

current liabilities
1.0 times
total liabilities
total assets
33 percent
operating earnings
interest expenses
8.0 times
income available for meeting fixed charges

fixed charges
5.5 times
Activity: Inventory turnover
sales
inventory
9 times
Average collection period
receivables
sales per day
20 days
Fixed assets turnover
sales
fixed assets
5.0 times
Total assets turnover
sales
total assets
2 times
net income after taxes

sales
5 percent
Return on total assets

total assets
8 percent
Return on Equity

Owners Equity
15 percent
G&A Overhead
Gross Profit Percent
20 percent
Profitability: Return on Sales
Break even
Days of Cash
W orking Capital
W orking Capital Turnover
(Cash & Cash Equivalents) x 360

Revenue
Current Assets minus Current Liabilities
Revenue
W orking Capital
155

Some of the Balance Sheet Ratios consists of the following. The Current ratio is expressed as
Current assets to Current liabilities. The current ratio is always expressed as x to 1. The current
ratio is:
Current ratio =
Current assets
Current Liabilities
= $3,415,807 = 2.21
$1,546,107
This ratio is favored by loan officers and creditors as an indicator of financial health. Generally, a
2 to 1 Current ratio is considered the satisfactory minimum. According to the Summary of
Financial Ratios and the Construction Industry Average Table, the Current ratio in the example is
2.21 and the construction industry average is 2.50. This is slightly below the average.
The Quick assets ratio, sometimes called the Acid test is expressed as Current assets without
inventories or Prepaid Expenses to Current Liabilities. The Quick assets ratio is as follows:
($1,565,807 = Cash + Receivable)
Acid Test = Current Assets - Inventories - Prepaid = $3,415,807- 1,690,000 - $160,000 = 1.01
Current Liabilities
$1,546,107
The acid test measures the immediate ability to pay current debts. This is a more conservative
approach since inventories are not necessarily available and may not be readily available.
Generally, a 1 to1 minimum is considered a healthy. The example shows a satisfactory ratio.
The Debt to Total Assets Ratio is an indicator of the companies Leverage. Leverage refers to
using the equity capital base to raise additional capital from nonowner sources. The Debt to Total
Assets ratio is calculated as follows:
($2,296,107)
Debt to Total Assets Ratio = Total Liabilities
= $1,546,107 + $750,000
= 40%
Total Assets
$5,615,807
According to the Construction Industry Average Table, the industry standard is 33 percent, The
Debt to Total Assets Ratio in the example is 40% which is poor or high for this company.
The Debt to Equity Ratio is an indicator of whether a company is using debt prudently or are they
overburdened with debt that may cause problems. The Debt to Equity ratio is as follows:
Debt to Equity Ratio = Total Liabilities
= $2,296,107 = .69 Debt to Equity Ratio
Total Owners Equity $3,319,700
This ratio says that the company is using $.69 of liabilities in addition to each $1.00 of Owners
Equity in the business. This business with its .69 to 1.00 debt to equity would be considered as
moderately leveraged.
156

Income Statement
The Income Statement summarizes sales revenue and expenses for a period of time which is one
year for the example. The ending date of that period is always the same as the closing date given
on the balance sheet and the period covered is always specified on the top of the report. For
example Income Statement for the Year ending December 31. The income statement is broken
down into these accounts. The Sales revenue is the top line and it is the total amount of income
from contact sales. The bottom line is called net income or net earnings. Net income is the final
profit after all expenses are deducted from sales revenue.
The income statement is designed to be read in a step-down process. Each step down is a
deduction fo one or more expenses. The first step deducts the cost of goods sold from the sales
revenue of goods sold or completed contracts, which gives the Gross Margin sometimes called
the gross profit.
Next, operating expenses and depreciation expenses are deducted, giving Operating Earnings
before interest and income tax expenses are deducted. Operating earnings is also called Earnings
before Income Taxes and is abbreviated EBIT.
Next, Interest expenses on debt is deducted which results in Earning before Income Taxes. The
last step is to deduct income tax expenses which results in Net Income. Publicly owned business
corporations report Earnings per Share which is net income divided by the number of stock
shares. Privately owned business do not have to report the Earnings per share.
In the example income statement, you see five different expenses identified, but you may find
more expense lines in an income statement. Sales revenue and expenses reported in income
statements generally follow accepted accounting practices, which are summarized below.
Completed Contract sales or Sales revenue is the total amount received or to be received from
contract sales. Contract sales revenue is net.
Cost of Completed contracts or Cost of Goods Sold Expense is the total cost sold during the
period.
Operating Expenses is a broad category of expenses such as Contract overhead, Selling expenses,
General and Administrative expenses and depreciation. This category excludes Cost of
Completed Contracts, Interest, and Income Tax.
157

Some of the Income Statement Ratios are as follows. The Times Interest Earned Ratio is used to
test the ability to pay interest from earnings. It is calculated below:
Operating Earnings
Interest Expenses
= $1,300,000 = 12.6 Times Interest Earned Ratio

$103,000
According to the construction industry, the low Time Interest Earned Ratio is 8.0 times, but the
example indicates a 12.6 Times Interest Earned ratio which exceeds the average which is good.
The Return on Sales Ratio shows the margin of profit as a percentage. From the income
statement, the company in this example earned $718,200 net income on its sales revenue of
$10,400,000 for the year. The net income to contract sales is calculated as follows:
Net Income =
Sales Revenue
$718,200
$10,400,000
= 6.9% Return on Sales Ratio
According to the construction industry, the average percentage Return on Sales is 5 percent and
the example indicates a 6.9 percent return on sales which is satisfactory.
The Return on Equity Ratio (ROE) shows this ratio as a percentage. It is calculated by dividing
the annual net income from the Income Statement by the Owners Equity from the Balance
Sheet. The Return on Equity is calculated as follows:
Net Income
Owners Equity
= $718,200 = 21.6% Return on Equity Ratio

$3,319,700
According to the construction industry, the average percentage Return on Equity is 15 percent
and the examples indicates a 21.6% Return on equity which is good.
The Return on Assets Ratio (ROA) indicates what the business earned before interest and income
tax expenses on the total assets employed during the year. The Return on Assets is calculated by
dividing the Operating Earnings from the Income statement by the Total Assets from the Balance
Sheet. The Return on Assets is calculated as follows:
Operating Earnings
Total Assets
= $1,300,000 = 23.1% Return on Assets

$5,615,807
The Return on Assets is compared to the annual interest rate on the companys borrowed money.
According to the construction industry, the average percentage Return on Total Assets is 8
percent and the business earned 23.1 percent on the money borrowed, as a measure of Return of
Assets. The difference between the two rates is a very favorable 15 percent.
158

The Cash Flow Statement is a summary of the sources of and uses of cash indicating where it
came from and where it went to for the same period of time as the income statement. The cash
flow statement example contains three sections. They are (1) Cash Flows from Operating
Activities sometimes referred to as cash flow from profit, (2) Cash Flows from Investing
Activities, and (3) Cash flows from Financing Activities.
From the Example Balance Sheet, if you compare the columns labeled End of Year and Start of
Year, the result will be a change in assets, liabilities, and owners equities. These increases and
decreases from the balance sheet tie directly in with the cash flow statement. For example, the
balance sheet Contracts Receivable line item indicates an increase of $175,000 and the heading
Cash Flows from Operating Activities contains a line labeled Accounts Receivable and it shows
a figure of ($175,000).
BALANCE SHEET
Assets
End of Year
Start of Year
Cash
Inventory
Prepaid expenses
$ 565,807.00
1,000,000.00
1,690,000.00
160,000.00
$3,415,807.00
3,000,000.00
(800,000.00)
$ 750,000.00
825,000.00
1,250,000.00
185,000.00
$3,010,000.00
2,250,000.00
(540,000.00)
Total Assets
$5,615,807.00
$4,720,000.00
End of Year
Changes
($184,193.00)
$175,000.00
$440,000.00
($25,000.00)
$750,000.00
($260,000)
Start of Year
Accounts Payable - Inventory
$ 520,000.00
$ 450,000.00

Total Accounts Payable
120,000.00
$ 640,000.00
85,000.00
$ 535,000.00

Accrued Interest Payable
$ 240,000.00
17,167.00
$ 185,000.00
12,500.00
Total Accrued Expenses

Income Tax Payable
Short-Term Notes Payable
$ 257,167.00
23,940.00
625,000.00
$ 197,500.00
36,000.00
600,000.00
$1,546,107.00
$1,368,500.00
750,000.00
$2,296,107.00
600,000.00
$1,968,500.00
$150,000.00
775,000.00
725,000.00
$50,000.00
2,544,700.00
$3,319,700.00
$5,615,807.00
2,026,500.00
$2,751,500.00
$4,720,000.00
$518,000.00

Long-Term Notes Payable
Total Liabilities
Capital Stock
Retained Earnings
Total Owners Equity
Total Liabilities and Owners Equity
159
$105,000.00
$59,667.00
($12,060.00)
$25,000.00

Cash Flow Statement
The cash flow statement reveals increases and decreases or changes in funds and it is expressed
as a change in the source and application of funds, and by the change in your working capital. In
conclusion, a change in your cash flow is a result of a change in (1) Cash Flows from Operating
Activities, (2) Cash flows from Investing, (3) and Cash flows from Financing Activities.
From the Cash Flow statement below, the business realized $540,807 from Operating Expenses
for the year ended. The company spent $750,000 on capital expenditures. Its financing activities
provided $$25,000 net of $200,000 cash dividends to stockholders. In summary, the three
sources of income (1) Cash Flows from Operating Activities, (2) Cash flows from Investing
Activities, (3) and Cash flows from Financing Activities, were less than the companys capital
expenditures during the year. Therefore, the companys cash balance decreased by $184,193.
CASH FLOW STATEM ENT FOR THE YEAR
Cash Flows from Operating Activities
Net Income from Income Statement
Contracts Receivable Increase
($175,000.00)
Inventory Increase
(440,000.00)
Prepaid Expenses Decrease
25,000.00
260,000.00
Accounts Payable Increase
105,000.00
Accrued Expenses Increase
Income Tax Payable Decrease
$718,200.00
59,667.00
(12,060.00
Cash Flow Adjustments to Net Income
($177,393.00)
Cash Flow from Operating Activities
$ 540,807.00
Cash Flows from Investing Activities

Purchases of Property, Plant & Equipment
($750,000.00)
Cash Flows from Financing Activities

Short-Term Debt Borrowing
$ 25,000.00
Long-Term Debt Borrowing
150,000.00
Capital Stock Issue
50,000.00
Dividends Paid Stockholders
(200,000.00)
25,000.00
($184,193.00)
Increase (Decrease in Cash during Year
160

Financial Analysis Exercise
Using the Balance Sheet, Income Statement and the Cash Flow Statement provided below and
the Summary of Financial Ratios and the Construction Industry Average Table. Answer the
following questions.
1.
What is the Working Capital for this company at the End of the year?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
What is the Current ratio for this company at the end of the year?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
0.51
0.95
1.07
2.07
What is the Leverage Ratio of Total debt to total Assets for this company at the end of the
year?
A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
0.47
1.97
2.07
4.36
What is the Acid Test Ratio for this company at the end of the year?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
$0,176, 177
$0,733,154
$1,463,403
$1,633,389
0.30
0.51
0.96
1.97
What is the Construction industry Average percentage for the leverage ratio?
A.
B.
C.
D.
5%
10%
20%
33%
161

Financial Analysis Exercise
6.
What is the Debt to Equity Ratio for this company at the end of the year?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
What is the Times Interest Earned Ratio for this company at the end of the year?
A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
5.50 Times
8.00 Times
9.00 Times
33.0 Times
Assuming the Times Interest Earned Ratio fort his company was calculated to be 5.00,
How does this compare to the Construction industry Average Times Interest Earned
Ratio?
A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
0.25
0.51
1.03
4.07
What is the Construction industry Average Times Interest Earned Ratio?

A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
0.22
0.47
1.03
1.96
This company exceeds the average.

This company is equal to the average.
This company is significantly below the average.
Not enough information to make a comparison.
What is the return on Sales percentage for this company at the end of the year?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.0%
6.2%
25.0%
37.1%
Check Answers
162

Financial Analysis Exercise Statements
BALANCE SHEET
Assets
Cash
Inventory
Prepaid expenses
Cost Less Accumulated Depreciation
Total Assets
End of Year
$ 260,631.00
423,731.00
640,020.00
91,433.00
$1,415,815.00
2,317,500.00
(753,917.00)
Start of Year
$ 233,171.00
385,259.00
517,936.00
85,559.00
$1,221,925.00
2,089,336.00
(764,900.00)
1,563,583.00
1,324,436.00
$2,979,398.00
$2,546,361.00
End of Year
Start of Year
281,915.00
242,294.00

Income Tax Payable
Short-Term Debt Payable
142,246.00
8,500.00
250,000.00
126,264.00
15,018.00
196,113.00
682,661.00
579,689.00
833,334.00
$1,515,995.00
650,000.00
$1,229,689.00
509,722.00
489,167.00
953,681.00
$1,463,403.00
$2,979,398.00
827,505.00
$1, 316,672.00
$2,546,361.00

Long-Term Debt Payable
Total Liabilities
Capital Stock
Retained Earnings
Total Owners Equity
Total Liabilities & Owners Equity
INCOM E STATEM ENT FOR THE YEAR

Contract Revenues
4,406,806.00
Cost of Contracts Completed
2,773,417.00
Gross Margin
Operating Expenses
1,633,389.00
1,263,032.00
10,983.00
Operating Earnings
Interest Expense
359,374.00
88,333.00
Earnings before Taxes

Income Tax Expense
271,041.00
94,864.00
Net Income
176,177.00
163

Financial Analysis Exercise Statements
CASH FLOW STATEM ENT FOR THE YEAR

Cash Flows from Operating Activities
Net Income from Income Statement
Contracts Receivable Increase
(38,472.00)
Inventory Increase
(122,084.00)
Prepaid Expenses Decrease
(5,874.00)
85,383.00
Accounts Payable Increase
39,621.00
Accrued Expenses Increase
Income Tax Payable Decrease
176,177.00
15,982.00
(6,518.00)
(31,962.00)
Cash Flow Adjustments to Net Income

Cash Flow from Operating Activities
144,215.00
Cash Flows from Investing Activities

Purchases of Property, Plant & Equipment
Proceeds from Disposals of Property, Plant & Equipment
Cash Used in Investing Activities
($354,028.00)
29,498.00
($324,530)
Cash Flows from Financing Activities

Short-Term Debt Borrowing
Long-Term Debt Borrowing
Capital Stock Issue
Dividends Paid Stockholders
Cash from Financing Activities
Increase (Decrease)in Cash during Year
53,887.00
183,334.00
20,554.00
(50,000.00)
207,775.00
27,460.00
164

Depreciation Methods
Depreciation is an accounting charge that provides for recovery of the capital that purchased the
physical asset. It is the process of allocating an amount of money over the recovery period (life)
of a tangible capital asset. There are three methods that are approved by the U.S. Revenue
Service (IRS). They are the straight-line, the double-declining balance or sum-of-the-year-digits.
Straight-line Example
Given the following information:
Purchase Price
Salvage Value
Service Life
= $20,000
= $05,000
= 5 Years.
The annual Depreciation Charge using the Straight Line is = $20,000 - $5,000
= $3,000
5 Years
The table below indicates the depreciation annual expense over the full service life.
Year
Remaining Book Value
Yearly Depreciation
Book Value
$0
$0
$20,000
$20,000
$3,000
$17,000
$17,000
$3,000
$14,000
$14,000
$3,000
$11,000
$11,000
$3,000
$8,000
$8,000
$3,000
5,000
Declining Balance Example

The Declining Balance is also referred to as the double declining or 200% declining balance for
new equipment and 150% declining balance for used equipment. This is a form of accelerated
depreciation. In using this depreciation method, an item is depreciated until the estimated salvage
value is reached.
The Declining Balance formula for equipment purchased new is = 2 (Remaining Book Value)
Service Life
The Declining Balance formula for equipment purchased used is= 2 (Remaining Book Value)
Service Life
Purchase Price
Salvage Value
Service Life
165
= $20,000
= $05,000
= 5 Years.

Therefore, the first year depreciation using the Declining Balance is 2 ($20,000) = $8,000.
5
The table below indicates the depreciation annual expense over the full service life using the
Double Declining Method until the salvage value is reached.
Year
Remaining
Book Value
Yearly Depreciation
Book Value
Beginning
$0
$0
$20,000
$20,000
2($20,000)/5 = $8,000
$12,000
$12,000
2($12,000)/5 = $4,800
$7,200
$7,200
2($7,200)/5 = $2,880 max ($2,200) =
$5,000
4
5
Sum-of-the-Year-Digits Example
Purchase Price
Salvage Value
Service Life
= $20,000
= $05,000
= 5 Years.
The denominator for Sum of the Digits is N/2 (N+1) = 5/2 (5 + 1) = 15 or = 5 + 4 + 3 + 2 + 1

The depreciable amount is $20,000 - $5,000 = $15,000. For the first year the numerator is 5, for
the second year it is 4, and so forth.
The table below indicates the annual depreciation expense over the full service life using the
Sum-of-the-Year-Digits method.
Year
Yearly Depreciation
$0
$0
$20,000
$20,000
5/15 ($15,000) = $5,000
$15,000
$15,000
4/15 ($15,000) = $4,000
$11,000
$11,000
3/15 ($15,000) = $5,000
$8,000
$8,000
2/15 ($15,000) = $2,000
$6,000
$6,000
1/15 ($15,000) = $1,000
5,000
166
Book Value
Beginning

Depreciation Methods Exercise
1.
$15,000
$16,667
$45,000
$50,000
What is the remaining book value amount at the beginning of year two using the Sum-ofthe-Year-Digits method?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
$30,000
$45,000
$66,667
$90,000
What is the depreciation amount at the end of year one using the Sum-of-the-Year-Digits
method?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
= $100,000
= $ 10,000
= 3 Years.
What is the depreciation amount at the end of year one using the Double Declining
Method?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
Purchase Price
Salvage Value
Service Life
$10,000
$45,000
$50,000
$55,000
What is the depreciation amount at the end of year one using the Straight line method?
A.
B.
C.
D.
$30,000
$33,333
$45,000
$90,000
Check Answers
167

Depreciation Methods and Formulas
168

Constructors Code of Ethics
The Constructor is an individual who commits to serve the construction industry in a professional
and ethical manner and engages in the continued development of skills and further education to
meet increasing industry challenges and changes. The Constructors Code of Ethics sets forth the
principles of professional conduct and standards to be observed by holders of certification
conferred by the AIC Constructor Certification Commission. Certificants shall, in their
professional activities, sustain and advance the integrity, honor and prestige of the profession of
Constructor and the construction industry.
The construction profession relies upon a system of ethical competence, management excellence,
and fair dealing in undertaking complex works to serve the public with safety, efficiency, and
economy. The AIC Constructor Certification Commissions, Constructors Code of Ethics sets
forth the principles of professional conduct and standards to be observed by holders of
certification conferred by the AIC Constructor Certification Commission. Certificants shall, in
their professional activities, sustain and advance the integrity, honor and prestige of the
profession of the Constructor and the construction industry. The Constructor Code of Ethics
principles and standards are stated below.
I.
The Constructor shall maintain full regard to the public interest in fulfilling their
professional responsibilities to the construction industry.
II.
Constructor shall not engage in any deceptive practice, or in any practice that
creates an unfair advantage for the Constructor or another.
III
A Constructor shall not maliciously or recklessly injure or attempt to injure the

professional reputation of others.
IV.
A Constructor shall insure that when providing a service that includes advice,
such advice shall be fair and unbiased.
V.
A Constructor shall not divulge to any person, firm or company, information of a

confidential nature acquired during the course of professional activities.
VI.
A Constructor shall carry out responsibilities in accordance with current

professional practice.
VII.
A Constructor shall keep informed of new concepts and developments in the

construction process relative to his or her responsibilities.
169

Ethics Exercise
These situations were adapted from the Column Mr. Ethics presented in previous issues of the
American Institute of Constructors (AIC) Newsletter. Read the situations below and circle the
best response to the situation.
1.
Contractor A was low bidder on a general-contacted project which has an extensive

number of alternative during bidding and negotiations. Contractor A received a
standard contract from Mary, the lead Architect, a source of business for several years, Ed
the Estimator at Contractor A, discovers the contract value was erroneously issued at
$365,000 instead of the $355,000. How should Ed handle this situation?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
Ignore the error and sign the contract.

Call Mary, the lead architect, and inform her of your discovery.
Inform Mary, the lead architect, of the error but encourage them to leave the
difference in the contract as a contingency.
Inform Mary, the lead, architect of the error and tell them to leave the amount in
the contract to cover the potential errors in the numerous alternatives.
Constructor Z is building an addition to an existing pharmaceutical plant of

approximately 20,000 square feet. There is space on the site for one more future addition.
After installing foundations, Ed, the Constructors Superintendent, is verifying the
dimensions with Jim the Bricklayer crew leader and they discover that the addition has
been laid out 1' - 0" out of square. All work can still be performed with very minor field
adjustments. The error will compound itself if the future addition ever takes place. Ed has
worked on Mary the Architects, projects for over twenty years but never for this owner.
What should Ed do?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Ignore the error and tell no one.

Inform Mary, the architect only.
Inform the Owner and Mary the Architect.
Have Ed, the superintendent, and Jim, the Bricklayer adjust as required.
170

Ethics Exercise
3.
A city electrical inspector makes the following statement after discovering that the new
condominium building # 13 of 25 buildings has been drywalled without an electrical
inspection. The inspector says to you, the superintendent, Gee! It will be pretty
expensive to remove all of the drywall. Id bet it will cost you at least $5, 000. Id like to
have that kind of money myself! (You suspect that the inspector is asking for a bribe).
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Contact the building department supervisor and ask to have hidden areas removed
Instruct your workers to remove all of the drywall for the electrical inspection.
Pay the inspector because you dont want to be bothered with the situation.
Contact the City Commissioners and the local newspaper and have the inspector
relieved of his duties.
You as a Masonry Subcontractor recently submitted a bid of $450,000 to a General

Contractor for the masonry portion of a new office building. You are invited to the
General Contractors office to discuss the project. In the midst of negotiations, the
General Contractors representative is called out of the room. In his absence, you notice
the spread sheet listing all the bids received including yours. It is apparent from the
spread sheet that you are $22,000 higher than the low bidder. The next highest bidder is
$8,000 above you. What action should you take?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Lower your price by $25,000 upon the General Contractors return, giving the
reason that you had a chance to re-examine your numbers.
Be concerned that the spread sheet may be a decoy with the intention of getting
you to lower your price enough to become the lowest bidder.
Continue negotiating with the General Contractor over price upon the General
Contractors return to the meeting. Always knowing you have the upper hand.
Maintain your original price quotation, extol the virtues of your company to be
able to meet the schedule, the high quality of your work and your relationship.
171

Ethics Exercise
5.
After a $15,000,000 bid on a new pump house. You are publicly regarded as the apparent
second low bidder. The following day one of the subcontractors for a $4,500,000 portion
of the project calls and asks how he compared with his competitors. He is the low bidder
with you. What do you tell the subcontractor?
A.
B.
C.
D.
6.
According to the Constructors Code of Ethics, The Constructor shall insure that when
providing a service or advice such advice shall be to treat all parties in a fair and unbiased
way. What is the best way for a Constructor to achieve this?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
Divulge all and hope to put your competitor at a negotiating disadvantage.

Maintain your silence in respect for the other subcontractors who provided quotes.
Provide the subcontractor a ball park idea where they stood, but dont be specific.
Tell him that it is none of his business and hang up on him for bothering you.
Fire someone for being considered unethical.

Review your mission and goal statement on ethical behavior.
Follow the guidelines provided in your employment contract.
Dont engage in any practice which creates an unfair advantage for one party.
According to the Constructors Code of Ethics, The Constructor shall not maliciously or
recklessly injure or attempt to injure the professional reputation of others. You have just
been notified in writing that you have not met the minimum score required to pass the
Level 2 Advanced Construction Applications Examinations even though you have over
twenty years of experience. What is the Best way to proceed?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Call the Commission office and criticize the poor quality of the examination.
Submit a written request to the Commission, postmarked no later than thirty days
after the notice of failure according to the Appeals Process procedures.
Obtain the e-mail addresses of all members and send a letter criticizing the quality
of the test questions and that certain portions of the examination were wrong.
Call the Commission office and ask for hints on how close you were to passing
and what questions should be appealed. Then provide a solid grounds for appeal.
Check Answers
172

CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS, METHODS AND PLAN READING
CSI MasterFormat Document Organization
In the early 1960s the need for a uniform system for organizing specifications was identified and
resulted in the publishing of the CSI MasterFormat, named after its author, the Construction
Specifications Institute (CSI). The CSI MasterFormat introduced the seventeen division format
associated with the ability to organize an infinite number of subject sections. In 1978,
Construction Specifications Canada (CSC) joined with CSI to produce the first edition of
MasterFormat.
The MasterFormat incorporates a complete organizational format for project manuals by
including bidding requirements, contract forms, conditions of the contract and the General
Requirements, in addition to the Technical Specifications Divisions 02 through 16. This
document has been the construction industrys consensus standard for the organization of
technical information. It is accepted by the U.S. federal agencies and most state and local
governments. It was subsequently adopted by the McGraw-Hill Sweets Catalogs, the R.S. Means
cost estimating books, and other organizations.
MasterFormat is intended to classify detailed construction information into a standard order or
sequence by materials and methods. This is done by establishing a detailed master list of
divisions, sections and parts. The MasterFormat facilitates construction communication,
promotes standardization in the industry, and facilitates the retrieval of information. It is
primarily used for the organization of project manuals, detailed construction cost estimates, and
product data filing.
CSI MasterFormat Structure
The MasterFormat groups information into these areas:
C
C
C
C
C
Bidding Requirements and Forms

Contract Forms (Agreement)
Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary)
General Requirements (Division 01)
Technical Specifications Division (02 through 16)
173

MasterFormat Numbering System
The MasterFormat number system categorizes the Bidding Requirements and Forms, Contract
Forms and Conditions of the Contract into Division 0 - Bidding Requirements. Second, the
MasterFormat uses a series of numbers associated with the sixteen divisions which address
detailed construction specifications associated with products and systems. Division 1 - General
Requirements outlines the specific administrative and procedural requirements that apply to all of
the Technical Specification sections. Divisions 02 through 16 - Technical Specifications contain a
written description of the specific requirements relating to a specific product or system. The
Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) has developed the following Standard MasterFormat
numbering system consisting of the following Documents and Divisions.
CSI MasterFormat Divisions
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
00 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
02 - SITE WORK
03 - CONCRETE
04 - MASONRY
05 - METALS
06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
09 - FINISHES
10 - SPECIALTIES
11 - EQUIPMENT
12 - FURNISHINGS
13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
15 - MECHANICAL
16 - ELECTRICAL
CSI Masterformat Sections

The CSI Masterformat breaks down Divisions 02 - 16 into Sections using a three-digit
numbering system. For example, in Division 02 - Sitework the Earthwork is under section
number 200. Therefore, the complete Division and Section number is 02200.
174

Masterformat- Broadscope Section Titles
00010
00100
00200
00300
00400
00500
00600
00700
00800
00900
PRE-BID INFORMATION
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS
BID FORMS
SUPPLEMENTS TO BID FORMS
AGREEMENT FORMS
BONDS AND CERTIFICATES
GENERAL CONDITIONS
DRAWINGS AND SCHEDULES
ADDENDA AND MODIFICATIONS
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04100
04150
04200
04400
04500
04550
04600
Note: Since the items listed above are not specification sections, they are referred to as
"Documents" in lieu of "Divisions or Sections" in the Master List of Section Titles,
Numbers, and Broadscope Explanations.
DIVISION 5 - METALS
DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01010
01020
01025
01030
01040
01050
01060
01070
01080
01090
01100
01200
01300
01400
01500
01600
01700
01800
05010
05030
05050
05100
05200
05300
05400
05500
05580
05700
05800
05900
SUMMARY OF WORK
ALLOWANCES
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
ALTERNATES/ALTERNATIVES
COORDINATION
FIELD ENGINEERING
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS
IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
REFERENCE STANDARDS
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
PROJECT MEETINGS
SUBMITTALS
QUALITY CONTROL
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
MAINTENANCE
06050
06100
06130
06150
06170
06200
06300
06400
06500
06600
DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK
SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
DEMOLITION
SITE PREPARATION
DEWATERING
SHORING AND UNDERPINNING
EXCAVATION AND SUPPORT SYSTEMS
COFFERDAMS
EARTHWORK
TUNNELING
PILES AND CAISSONS
RAILROAD WORK
MARINE WORK
PAVING AND SURFACING
PIPED UTILITY MATERIALS
WATER DISTRIBUTION
FUEL DISTRIBUTION
SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE
RESTORATION AND UNDERGROUND PIPELINES
PONDS AND RESERVOIRS
POWER AND COMMUNICATIONS
SITE IMPROVEMENTS
LANDSCAPING
FASTENERS AND ADHESIVES

ROUGH CARPENTRY
HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION
WOOD-METAL SYSTEMS
PREFABRICATED STRUCTURAL WOOD
FINISH CARPENTRY
WOOD TREATMENT
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PREFABRICATED STRUCTURAL PLASTICS
PLASTICS FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07100
07150
07190
07200
07250
07300
07400
07500
07570
07600
07700
07800
07900
WATERPROOFING
DAMPROOFING
VAPOR AND AIR RETARDERS
INSULATION
FIREPROOFING
SHINGLES AND ROOFING TILES
PREFORMED ROOFING AND CLADDING/ SIDING
MEMBRANE ROOFING
TRAFFIC TOPPING
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
SKYLIGHTS
JOINT SEALERS
DIVISION 8 - DOOR AND WINDOWS

08100
08200
08250
08300
08400
08500
08600
08650
08700
08800
08900
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03100
03200
03250
03300
03370
03400
03500
03600
03700
03800
METAL MATERIALS
METAL FINISHES
METAL FASTENING
STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
METAL JOISTS
METAL DECKING
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
METAL FABRICATIONS
SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
ORNAMENTAL METAL
EXPANSION CONTROL
HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
02010
02050
02100
02140
02150
02160
02170
02200
02300
02350
02450
02480
02500
02600
02660
02680
02700
02760
02770
02780
02800
02900
MORTAR
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
UNIT MASONRY
STONE
MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
REFRACTORIES
CORROSION RESISTANT MASONRY
CONCRETE FORMWORK
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
CONCRETE CURING
PRECAST CONCRETE
CEMENTITIOUS DECKS
GROUT
CONCRETE RESTORATION AND CLEANING
MASS CONCRETE
175
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

WOOD AND PLASTIC DOORS
DOOR OPENING ASSEMBLIES
SPECIAL DOORS
ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
METAL WINDOWS
WOOD AND PLASTIC WINDOWS
SPECIAL WINDOWS
HARDWARE
GLAZING
GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES
09100
09200
09230
09250
09300
09400
09500
09540
09550
09600
09630
09650
09680
09700
09780
09800
09900
09950
11700 MEDICAL EQUIPMENT

11780 MORTUARY EQUIPMENT
METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS

LATH AND PLASTER
AGGREGATE COATINGS
GYPSUM BOARD
TILE
TERRAZZO
ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT
SPECIAL SURFACES
WOOD FLOORING
STONE FLOORING
UNIT MASONRY FLOORING
RESILIENT FLOORING
CARPET
SPECIAL FLOORING
FLOOR TREATMENT
SPECIAL COATINGS
PAINTING
WALL COVERING
11850 NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12050 FABRICS
12100 ARTWORK
12300 MANUFACTURED CASEWORK
12500 WINDOW TREATMENT
12600 FURNITURE AND ACCESSORIES
12670 RUGS AND MATS
12700 MULTIPLE SEATING
12800 INTERIOR PLANTS AND PLANTERS
DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
13010 AIR SUPPORTED STRUCTURES
13020 INTEGRATED ASSEMBLIES
13030 SPECIAL PURPOSE ROOMS
13080 SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL
13090 RADIATION PROTECTION
13100 NUCLEAR REACTORS
13120 PRE-ENGINEERED STRUCTURES
13150 POOLS
13160 ICE RINKS
13170 KENNELS AND ANIMAL SHELTERS
13180 SITE CONSTRUCTED INCINERATORS
13200 LIQUID AND GAS STORAGE TANKS
13220 FILTER UNDERDRAINS AND MEDIA
13230 DIGESTION TANK COVERS AND APPURTENANCES
13240 OXYGENATION SYSTEMS
13260 SLUDGE CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
13300 UTILITY CONTROL SYSTEMS
13400 INDUSTRIAL AND PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS
13500 RECORDING INSTRUMENTATION
13550 TRANSPORTATION CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION
13600 SOLAR ENERGY SYSTEMS
13700 WIND ENERGY SYSTEMS
13800 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS
13900 FIRE SUPPRESSION AND SUPERVISORY SYSTEMS
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10100 CHALKBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS
10150 COMPARTMENTS AND CUBICLES
10200 LOUVERS AND VENTS
10240 GRILLES AND SCREENS
10250 SERVICE WALL SYSTEMS
10260 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
10270 ACCESS FLOORING
10280 SPECIALTY MODULES
10290 PEST CONTROL
10300 FIREPLACES AND STOVES
10340 PREFABRICATED EXTERIOR SPECIALTIES
10350 FLAGPOLES
10400 IDENTIFYING DEVICES
10450 PEDESTRIAN CONTROL DEVICES
10500 LOCKERS
10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10530 PROTECTIVE COVERS
10550 POSTAL SPECIALTIES
10690 PARTITIONS
10650 OPERABLE PARTITIONS
10670 STORAGE SHELVING
10700 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES
10750 TELEPHONE SPECIALTIES
10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10880 SCALES
10900 WARDROBE AND CLOSET SPECIALTIES
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS

14100 DUMBWAITERS
14200 ELEVATORS
14300 MOVING STAIRS AND WALKS
14400 LIFTS
14500 MATERIAL HANDLING SYSTEMS
14600 HOISTS AND CRANES
14700 TURNTABLES
14800 SCAFFOLDING
14900 TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11010 MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT
11020 SECURITY AND VAULT EQUIPMENT
11030 TELLER AND SERVICE EQUIPMENT
11040 ECCLESIASTICAL EQUIPMENT
11050 LIBRARY EQUIPMENT
11060 THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11070 INSTRUMENTAL EQUIPMENT
11080 REGISTRATION EQUIPMENT
11090 CHECKROOM EQUIPMENT
11100 MERCANTILE EQUIPMENT
11110 COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY AND DRY CLEANING EQUIPMENT
11120 VENDING EQUIPMENT
11130 AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11140 SERVICE STATION EQUIPMENT
11150 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
11160 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
11170 SOLID WASTE HANDLING EQUIPMENT
11190 DETENTION EQUIPMENT
11200 WATER SUPPLY AND TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
11280 HYDRAULIC GATES AND VALVES
11300 FLUID WASTE TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL EQUIPMENT
11400 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
11450 RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT
11460 UNIT KITCHENS
11470 DARKROOM EQUIPMENT
11480 ATHLETIC, RECREATIONAL AND THERAPEUTIC EQUIPMENT
11500 INDUSTRIAL AND PROCESS EQUIPMENT
11600 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
11650 PLANETARIUM EQUIPMENT
11660 OBSERVATORY EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION
15300 FIRE PROTECTION
15400 PLUMBING
15500 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
15550 HEAT GENERATION
15650 REFRIGERATION
15750 HEAT TRANSFER
15850 AIR HANDLING
15880 AIR DISTRIBUTION
15950 CONTROLS
15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16200 POWER GENERATION
16300 HIGH VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION (ABOVE 600-VOLT)
16400 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION (600-VOLT AND BELOW)
16500 LIGHTING
16600 SPECIAL SYSTEMS
16700 COMMUNICATIONS
16850 ELECTRIC RESISTANCE HEATING
16900 CONTROLS
16950 TESTING
176

CSI MaterFormat Parts
Each technical Specification Section within a Division is further broken down into Parts. Part 1
is titled General. Part 2 is titled Products, and Part 3 is titled Execution. Part 1 contains these
titles: Work Included, References, Quality Assurance, Submittals, Storage, and Environmental
Requirements. Part 2 contains these titles: Acceptable Manufacturers, Types of Materials and
Product Standards. Part 3 contains these titles: Preparation, Installation, Tolerances, Cleaning
and Protection of the finished work. The discussion and example below will primarily focus on
Part 1 titled General and the subsection titled Reference standards because it utilizes the law
principle called Incorporated by Reference.
Part 1 generally contains a list of additional reference standards with complete designations and
titles. It also identifies specific requirements for the submittal of shop drawings and product data
sheets for each section. Reference standards are documents that are not physically attached with
the Documents, but are referenced to in the documents may be part of the contract. The most
common clause used to incorporate an item by reference is to state in the documents that the
Reference Standards are "herewith made a part of the Specifications." This normally requires the
Contractor to have these available at the job site. The specific Reference Standards that the
Contractor must refer to are stated at the beginning of each Section of the Technical
Specifications under Part 1. For example, Division 3 is Concrete and Section 200 is Concrete
Reinforcement, PART 1.03 is Reference Standards and the A - J refers to the specific reference
Standards required. Numerous CSI Division numbers, Section numbers with Part 1 Reference
Standards and their abbreviations are shown below.
03100 Concrete Formwork
PART 1
GENERAL
1.03
Reference Standards
B.
ACI SP-4 Formwork for Concrete
American Concrete Institute. Special Publication -4.
03200 Concrete Reinforcement
1.03
Reference Standards
I.
CRSI 65 Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specifications
and Nomenclature. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute.
03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.03
Reference Standards
N.
ASTM C-94 Specifications for Ready-mixed concrete.
American Society for Testing Materials
02200 Excavation
1.06
Reference Standards
AASHTO - MI47-65 - Materials for Aggregate and Soil - Aggregate.
Am. Association of State Highway/Transportation Officials.
177

05120 Structural Steel
1.03
Reference Standards
AISC - Specification for the Design, Fabrication and Erection
American Institute of Steel Construction
AWS - D1.1 - Structural Welding Code
American Welding Society
SJI - Standard Specifications for Open Web Steel Joists
Steel Joist Institute
09250 Gypsum Board Systems
1.04
Reference Standards
ANSI/ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard.
American National Standards Institute.
15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods
1.06
Reference Standards
ASME B16 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration
American Society for Heating, Refrigerating, and Air
Conditioning Engineers.
AWWA C601 - Standard Methods for the Examination of Water & Waste
American Water Works Association
UL 378 - Standard for Draft Equipment.
Underwriter Laboratories, Inc.
AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
Air Movement and Controls Association
15300 Fire Protection Piping
1.03
Quality Assurance
NFPA 13 - Sprinkler Systems
National Fire Protection Association.
15880 - Air Distribution
1.03
Reference Standards
SMACNA Symbols for Ventilation and Air Conditioning.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association.
16700 - Communications
1.03
Reference Standards
NEC - National Electrical Code
TIA - Telecommunication Industry Association.
178

CSI Master Format Exercise
1.
What CSI Division contains technical information on Soil Compaction requirements?

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
What CSI Division contains technical information on Structural Steel?

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
06
09
10
14
What CSI Division contains technical information on Plumbing?

A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
01
03
05
15
What CSI Division contains technical information on Drywall?

A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
01
02
04
16
03
05
11
15
What CSI Division contains technical information on the Air Handling system?
A.
B.
C.
D.
11
13
14
15
179

6.
What CSI Division contains technical information on the Conveyor System?

A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
What CSI Division contains technical information on the Boiler System?

A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
02
06
09
16
What CSI Division contains technical information on Roofing?

A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
11
13
14
15
What CSI Division contains technical information on Painting?

A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
11
13
14
15
04
06
07
10
What CSI Division contains technical information on Food Service Equipment?

A.
B.
C.
D.
10
11
13
15
180

11.
According to CSI, What Division (s) are considered the Technical Specifications?
A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
What CSI Division applies to all contractors and subcontractors?

A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
00
01
04
16
What is the name of the legal principle for referring the contractor to other documents
that are not contained in the documents provided?
A.
B.
C.
D.
15.
01
02
09
15
What CSI Division contains the Bid Requirements for a project?

A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
00 - 01.
01
01 - 16.
02 - 16.
Reference Standards.
Incorporated by Reference.
Standard General Conditions
General Conditions of the Contract.
What is the official name of the technical reference source that is mentioned in the
documents to Design the Formwork and it is published by ACI?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Formwork Handbook.
Formwork for Concrete.
Formwork Design Manual.
Concrete Formwork Design Manual.
181

16.
What is the official name of the technical reference source that is mentioned in the
documents to Place the Slab Bolsters and it is published by CRSI?
A.
B.
C.
D.
17.
Your specifications reference this construction organization Acronym of ACI that

publishes numerous Technical Reference Sources. What is the correct name of ACI?
A.
B.
C.
D.
18.
Cost System Information.

Construction Standards Institute.
Construction Standards Information.
Your specifications reference this construction organization Acronym of CRSI that

publishes numerous Technical Reference Sources. What is the correct name of CRSI?
A.
B.
C.
D.
20.

Associated Contractors Institute.
American Construction Institute.
Associated Constructors Institute.
Your specifications reference this construction organization Acronym of CSI that

publishes numerous Technical Reference Sources. What is the correct name of CSI?
A.
B.
C.
D.
19.
Steel Riggers Handbook.

Steel Reinforcement Guide.
Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specifications & Nomenclature.
Manual of Steel Erection Practices.

Crane and Riggers Specification Institute.
Concrete Reinforcement Standards Institute
Concrete Reinforcement Specifications Institute.
Your specifications reference this construction organization Acronym of AISC that

publishes numerous Technical Reference Sources. What is the correct name of AISC?
A.
B.
C.
D.
American Institute of Steel Contractors.

American Institute of Steel Constructors.
American Institute of Steel Construction.
American Institute of Structural Concrete.
182

21.
Which CSI part number contains information on Reference Standards the contractor or
subcontractor must consult?
A.
B.
C.
D.
22.
Which CSI part number contains information on the installation procedures the contractor
or subcontractors must consult?
A.
B.
C.
D.
23.
02660
02700
15300
15400
Which Division and Section number contains technical information on the exterior
sewerage and drainage system?
A.
B.
C.
D.
25.
1
2
3
4
Which Division and Section number contains technical information on the interior
plumbing?
A.
B.
C.
D.
24.
1
2
3
4
02660
02700
15300
15400
Which Division and Section number contains technical information on the interior
Electrical Service and Distribution system?
A.
B.
C.
D.
02600
02780
15950
16400
183

26.
Which Division and Section number contains technical information on the

communications systems?
A.
B.
C.
D.
27.
Your specifications reference this construction organization Acronym of ASHRAE that

publishes numerous Technical Reference Sources. What is the correct name of
ASHRAE?
A.
B.
C.
D.
28.
American Steel Housing Rating Association of Engineers.

Associated Structural Hoists Rating Association of Engineers.
American Society for Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers.
Associated Society for Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers.
Your specifications reference this construction organization Acronym of TIA that

publishes numerous Technical Reference Sources. What is the correct name of TIA?
A.
B.
C.
D.
29.
02780
15950
16500
16700
Trade Industry Association.

Testing Industry Association.
Transportation Industry of America.
Telecommunication Industry Association.
Your specifications reference this construction organization Acronym of UL that

publishes numerous Technical Reference Sources. What is the correct name of UL?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Union Laboratories.
United Laboratories.
Utility Laboratories.
Underwriter Laboratories.
Check Answers
184

Construction Methods. Materials and Equipment
The contractor is responsible for the temporary shoring system selected and the design of the
shoring system. These are not shown on the plans or described in any detail within the
construction documents. The estimator is responsible for determining the number, size and cost
for all temporary structures. These structures are normally utilized to restrain water, soil, existing
structures, etc. Some of the more common temporary systems are described below.
Temporary Shoring Systems
The Cofferdam is a water tight rectangular structure built to restrain water and soil. It is utilized
around the foundations of bridge piers or to have working space to place an item below grade. A
cofferdam contains driven sheet piling (Uprights), wales(Walers) and Cross braces (Struts). To
ensure structural soundness of the cofferdam, the sheet piles are driven beyond the bottom of the
excavation at least two feet. This extension is called the Toe. The most common materials for
construction of a cofferdam are wood timber and structural steel. If moderate ground water is
encountered, Tongue & Groove sheeting is normally utilized to keep out the water. If
considerable water is present, steel sheet piling is used.
Cribbing and Tie Backs shoring is a method of restraining a vertical wall of soil where it is
impractical to slope the soil such as in a downtown area where the excavation and new
substructure are below the street level. This system requires timbers called cribbing to be placed
horizontally with rods (tiebacks) drilled through the cribbing at an angle back into the soil. This
shoring system allows the contractor to maximize the open space.
Underpinning is the process of supporting an existing structure when the new excavation will be
below the existing structures foundation. This requires temporary supports to support the
structure while an extension to the existing foundation is being placed.
Dewatering is the process of removing water or in some cases lowering the water table to install
an item below the existing water table. There are two dewatering methods. The first method is by
utilizing a pump with a suction hose and discharge hose. The second method is to utilize wells
points placed at specified intervals to lower the water table temporarily.
Equipment Mobilization is the process of loading off- road equipment, transporting it to the job
site and assembling at the site. The assembly of a large lifting crane can require 7 -9 workers
approximately three days if the crane requires the boom to be assembled and the cables to be run
through the cranes jib. Equipment Demobilization is the process of disassembling equipment.
185

Excavation Shoring Systems
A Support or Shoring System is a structure such as a timber shoring system or hydraulic shoring
system that supports the sides of an excavation and protects employees against cave-ins.
According to the OSHA Excavation Safety Standards, anytime a worker enters a trench at least
five (5) feet deep you must provide protection from cave-ins. After a qualified person has
determined the type of soil, they have a few options. First, they can design a shoring system using
the Shoring Designs provided in the Standards. The Second option is to design a support system
using a Manufacturer's system. Finally, they can use a trench box. Below we will define the
shoring options outlined in the excavation safety standards for shoring systems less than twenty
feet deep. According to the OSHA Construction Standards, for excavations more than twenty
(20) feet deep you must contact a Registered Professional Engineer (RPE) to design the
protection system.
The OSHA Standards for the Construction Industry 29 CFR Part 1926.650(b) titled, Definitions
applicable to subpart P - Excavations defines the following shoring terms.
The Sheeting means the individual members of a shoring system that are closely spaced together
to retain the earth. Sheeting is also called Uprights or Sheet Piling. OSHA defines the term
Uprightsas the vertical members of a trench shoring system placed in contact with the earth
and usually positioned so that individual members do not contact each other (p 253).
The Wales means the horizontal members of a shoring system placed parallel to the excavation
face whose sides bear against the vertical members of the shoring system. They are set
perpendicular to the sheeting. The Crossbraces or Struts are the horizontal members of the
shoring system that span across the width of an excavation. They are installed perpendicular to
the sides of the excavation and the ends are connected to either uprights or wales.
OSHA also defines Tight Sheeting as the use of specially-edged timber planks (e.g. Tongue and
Groove) at least three inches thick. These are used when conditions are saturated or submerged in
water as defined in the OSHA 1926.652(g). Also, Close Sheeting refers to the space between the
timber planks not to exceed inch when placed edge to edge according to OSHA 1926.652(g),
titled Notes for all Tables in paragraph 2.
The Shield or Trench Box is a structure that normally does not prevent a cave-in but protects
employees within the structure. Shields may be permanent structures or may be designed to be
portable and moved along the trench. Shields used in trenches are usually referred to as "trench
boxes" or "trench shields.
186

Concrete Support Systems
Concrete Formwork is a temporary support system for restraining the compressive force from the
concrete. The OSHA Standards for the Construction Industry 29 CFR Part 1926.700(b) titled,
Definitions applicable to subpart Q - Concrete and Masonry Construction defines the following
formwork terms. Formwork is the total system of support for freshly placed or partially cured
concrete, including the sheeting that is in contact with the concrete as well as all supporting
members including shores, reshores, hardware, braces, and related hardware. Shoring means a
supporting member that resists a compressive force imposed by a load. Reshoring means the
construction operation in which shoring equipment called reshores is placed, as the original
forms and shores are removed, in order to support partially cured concrete and construction loads
for elevated slab and beams. The slip form system is used to make a continuous vertical concrete
pour which moves up on the freshly poured concrete at a constant speed.
Another temporary operation is called a Lift-Slab or a jacking operation which takes cured
concrete slabs and lifts them vertically into placed using hydraulic jacks. An additional
temporary system is called tilt-up construction. This system has the concrete poured on the
ground into panels and after they are cured they are lifted or tilted up into place vertically.
Finally, there is a formwork system called a flying deck form system which is a complete
formwork support system that is repositioned using a crane for the next pour.
There are various methods for pouring the concrete such as direct chute, crane and bucket,
concrete buggies, concrete pumping, tremie, shotcrete and sometimes by conveyor. The Concrete
bucket is attached to the crane and a person pulls on a handle which opens the bottom of the
bucket and pours concrete. This method is called the crane and bucket operation. There are two
types of concrete buggies: Hand or Georgia buggies and the motorized buggies. The hand
Georgia buggy has a very limited capacity of about 1.5 cubic feet, therefore, it is used to move
small amounts of concrete. The Motorized Concrete Buggy is a small rubber tired vehicle with a
dump box that carries up to 14 cubic feet. A Concrete pump is a truck mounted equipped with a
placement boom or hose which pressurizes the hose system to pump the concrete to elevated
locations or an inaccessible location. Tremie is the process of pouring concrete under water using
a tube that is submerged into the fresh concrete at all times.
The Structural Engineering Institute (SEI) of the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE)
insists that more failures occur during construction than after completion, therefore, they have
developed a standard titled, SEI/ASCE 37-02, Design Loads on Structures During Construction.
Another temporary area that fails during construction is the masonry wall bracing. Under the
Construction OSHA Standards Part 1926.700 titled Masonry Construction it states that
temporary bracing should be provided for walls more than 8 feet high and the bracing shall not
exceed 20 feet horizontally. Recently, the Masonry Institute has developed a temporary masonry
bracing standard for construction.
187

Lifting Systems
The Jin Pole is a lifting system which utilizes a single pole or double pole above grade vertical
lifting system with the intended purpose of lifting an unusually long horizontal piece of
equipment into its permanent vertical position. The Jin poles are attached to a temporary
foundation and the guy lines are attached to the top of each Jin pole and tied to deadmen buried
in the ground.
Cranes are used to hoist and move loads from one location to another and it is necessary to know
the lifting capacity and working range of a crane selected to perform a given service.
Manufacturers and suppliers furnish this information in literature describing their products.
When a crane lifts a load there is a tendency to tip the machine over. This introduces what is
defined as the tipping condition. A machine is considered to be at the point of tipping when a
balance is reached between the overturning moment of the load and the stabilizing moment of the
machine when the crane is on a firm level supporting surface. A track mounted or a crawler
mounted crane sets on a track base which rotates 360 degrees and the boom is attached at the
base of the crane. A rubber tired crane is extremely mobile and it can be easily transported from
one job site to another over the road. The crane mat is normally made of large square timbers tied
together using cables threaded through the center of the timbers at specified spacings. It is best to
place the crane on a mat to ensure that the load is distributed evenly.
Tower Cranes are available as rail mounted units, stationary units, climbing units and mobile
units. The rail mounted units can be equipped with fixed or slewing towers. Tower cranes
generally have a larger area of coverage than climbing and stationary tower cranes. Tower cranes
have their boom above the structure and it lifts the load vertically until it is above the structure,
then it can move the load horizontally. A tower crane looks like an offset Tee.
A Crane Load Capacity Chart is provided with each crane by the crane manufacturer which
indicates its safe lifting capacity under differing conditions. The major factor for safely lifting a
load by a crane is its operating radius which is the horizontal distance from the center of the
rotation to the hook. Some other factors which affect lifting capacity are the position of the crane
in relationship to its base, the placement or use of outriggers and the soil conditions. Also, the
boom angle for a crawler mounted lifting crane is normally between 55 degrees and 80 degrees.
Working Range of a Crane Chart
This crane table shows lifting ranges for a dragline, a clamshell and a lifting crane. From the crane
table, the working range of a dragline is from 25 degrees to 39 degrees, the clamshell range is
between 40 degrees and 54 degrees and the crane lifting range is between 55 degrees and 80
degrees. The crane chart also contains the distance from the center line rotation in feet along the
horizontal axis and the height of a structure in feet such as a wall along the vertical structure. To
utilize the chart, lets assume that you are lifting an item over a vertical wall that is 45 feet above
the ground and the horizontal distance from the centerline of the rotation is 60 feet.
188

The fist step is to find the working range for a lifting crane which is between 55 degrees and 80
degrees. Next, find the length of boom in feet required by determining if the rotation distance or
the height above the ground is the controlling factor. In this example, using the height in feet
above the ground of 45 feet and in the lifting crane range of 55 - 80 degrees the length of boom,
the curved lines, needed is 50 feet. Now, using the center line rotation in feet of 60 feet and in the
lifting crane range of 55 - 80 degrees the length of boom needed is 100 feet. This is found by
entering the table along the horizontal axis at 60 feet and following the vertical line until it in
within the lifting crane range and finding the intersection of the length of boom in feet curved line
and the vertical (60 feet) line. The Crane Chart below indicates the working range of a crane.
Adapted from Peurifoy (1985). Construction Planning, Equipment, and Methods. Upper Saddle
River, NJ: Prentice-Hall. (p 224).
189

Sling Angles are formed by the legs of the sling and the horizontal plane and the rated capacity of
any sling depends on its size, its configuration and the angles. A sling with two legs that is used to
lift a 1000 pound object will have a 500 pound load in each leg when the sling angle is 90
degrees. The load in each leg will increase as the angle is decreased and at 30 degrees the load
will be 1000 pounds in each leg. Therefore, it is extremely important to keep the sling angles
greater than 45 degrees. Hence, sling angles approaching 30 degrees should be considered
extremely hazardous and avoided at all costs. Some load tables list sling angles as low as 15
degrees but the use of any sling at an angle less than 30 degrees is extremely dangerous. This is
not only because of the high loads associated with them but because of the effect on the load of an
error in sling angle measurement of as little as 5 degrees. It has been shown that an assumed sling
angle of 15 degrees has an assumed load of 1,932 pounds per Leg but, if the actual angle is
actually 10 degrees then the actual load is 2,880 pounds per leg. This illustrates how cautious you
must be in ensuring that the angle is greater than 45 degrees and the importance of measuring the
angle accurately.
The major types of crane attachments are the lift hook, the lifting beam and hook, the concrete
bucket, the clamshell bucket, orange peel bucket, the pile driver, the auger or drilled attachment,
and the dragline. Each attachment is described below. The Lift Hook has a sling or a configuration
of slings connected to the hook on the crane. The Lifting Beam is utilized to lift long items such as
beams for a bridge. The Beam has two lifting at each end with the crane hook connected to the
center of the lifting beam. The Clamshell bucket opens and is dropped straight down into the soil
being excavated and the jaws close toward each other. The Clamshell bucket is utilized to
excavate inside the cofferdam after the sheet piles are driven. The Orange Peel bucket is similar
to the Clamshell bucket but it opens and has straighter sides and it is dropped straight down into
the soil being excavated and the jaws close toward each other. The Pile Driver can replace the
boom or it can be attached to the boom via the hook and suspended from the crane. The Auger or
Drilled pile is an attachment to the crane for drilling Caissons. These drill attachments have a
mechanical device at the bottom of the caisson to form the bell.
Finally, the Dragline is used to excavate earth and load it into hauling units, such as trucks or
tractor-pulled wagons, or to deposit it in levees, dams, and spoil banks near the pits from which it
is excavated. A dragline usually does not have to go into a pit or hole in order to excavate. It may
operate on natural ground while excavating material from a pit with its bucket. This will be very
advantageous when earth is removed from a ditch, canal, or pit containing water. If the earth is
hauled with trucks, they do not have to go into the pit and contend with mud. If the earth can be
deposited along a canal or ditch or near a pit, it frequently is possible to use a dragline with a
boom long enough to dispose of the earth in one operation, eliminating the need for hauling units,
which will reduce the cost of handling the soil. A Dragline is an excellent unit for excavating
trenches when an angle of repose can be utilized without shoring.
190

Excavation Equipment
Power Shovels are normally utilized in an area where the excavation is above the location of the
machine. The shovels bucket opens at the bottom to place the soil into trucks. They are capable
of excavating all classes of earth, except solid rock, without prior loosening. They may be
mounted on crawler tracks, in which case they are referred to as crawler-mounted. They may also
be mounted on rubber-tired wheels. The non-self-propelled units mounted on the rear of trucks,
which are refereed to as truck-mounted, have separate engines for operating them. The Hydraulic
Backhoe is normally utilized in an area where the excavation is below the location of the
machine. The bucket action of a Backhoe is to pull the excavated material toward the machine.
Front End Loaders are used extensively to excavate earth, gravel or rock materials from a pile and
place the material into a truck to be transported over a road and deposited at another location.
There are basically two types of front-end-loaders, the crawler-tractor-mounted and the wheeltractor-mounted. They may be further classified by the capacities of the buckets or the weights
that the buckets can lift.
Scrapers are used to move large quantities of earth economically for relatively short haul
distances. There are a number of different types of scrapers such as the crawler-type tractor,
pulling a rubber-tired self-loading scraper. The high draw-bar pulls in loading a scraper, combined
with good traction, even on poor haul roads, gives the crawler tractor an advantage for short hauls.
However, as the haul distance is increased, the low speed of a crawler tractor is a disadvantage
compared with a wheel tractor. Unless the loading operation is difficult, a crawler tractor can load
a scraper without the aid of a bulldozer. However, if there are several scraper units on a job, the
increased output resulting from using a bulldozer to help load the scrapers usually will justify the
use of a bulldozer. Te wheel-tractor scrapers are for longer haul distances because of their higher
speed. Also, a wheel type tractor-pulled self-loading scraper will permit it to move earth more
economically than a crawler-type tractor. Although, the wheel-type tractor scraper lacks loading
ability, the higher travel speed, which may exceed 30 mph for some models, will offset the
disadvantage in loading when the haul distance is sufficiently long. The size of a scraper may be
specified as the struck, or heaped, capacity of the bowl, expressed in cubic yards. The struck
capacity is the volume of the material that a scraper will hold when the top of the material is
struck off even with the top of the bowl. In specifying the heaped capacity of a scraper, some
manufacturers specify the slope of the material above the sides of the bowl with the designation
SAE which means the Society of Automotive Engineers. The SAE specifies a slope of 2:1,
measured horizontally and vertically, respectively. Since, the slope will vary with the class of
material being hauled, the heaped capacity is only an approximate value.
The Bottom-dump Wagons are to be used to haul materials, such as sand, gravel, reasonably dry
earth, coal, etc., which flow easily, the use of bottom-dump wagons will reduce the time required
to unload the units. Such units are particularly suitable for use where the materials are distributed
in layers on a fill or are discharged through grizzlies into hoppers. The rapid rate of discharging
the load gives these wagons a time advantage over rear-dump trucks.
191

Compaction Equipment
The Technical Specifications normally state the compaction method and the optimum moisture
content range. The measurement testing method for determining if the desired compaction has be
attained is the Modified Proctor Test or the Standard Proctor Test. For a contractor to attain the
prescribed compaction, it must determine the number of passes for a roller with a specified unit
pressure under the roller areas and the depth of each layer of soil to produce the desired
compaction. Compaction is attained by applying energy to a soil by one or more of the following
methods. The different methods to apply the energy is by a kneading or tamping action, a static
weight, a vibrating action, or an impacting force. The common pieces of compaction methods are
described below.
A kneading roller is the sheep's-foot type. This roller, which may be towed by a tractor or selfpropelled, consists of a hollow steel drum on whose outer surface there are welded a number of
projecting steel feet, which on different pieces of equipment may be of varying lengths and cross
sections. A unit may consist of one or several drums mounted on one or more horizontal axles.
The weight of a drum may be varied by adding water or sand to produce unit pressures under the
feet up to 750 psi or more. As a sheeps foot roller moves over the surface, the feet penetrate the
soil to produce a kneading action and a pressure to mix and compact the soil from the bottom to
the top of the layer. With repeated passages of the roller over the surface, the penetration of the
feet decreases until the roller is said to walk out of the fill. The Sheep's-foot rollers are quite
effective in compacting clays and clay mixtures. However, they cannot compact granular soils
such as sand and gravel. Also, the depth of a layer of soil to be compacted is limited too
approximately the length of the feet.
Smooth-wheel Rollers may be classified by weight, which is usually stated in tons. A three-wheel
two-axle roller. The front wheel is used for steering, while the two rear wheels are used for
driving the unit. A two-wheel tandem roller of varying size is available. A three-wheel tandem
roller differs from the two-wheel tandem unit in that it has three drums and three axles. This unit
can be more effective than the two-wheel tandem or the three-wheel two-axle units in eliminating
or reducing transverse surface roughness because of the concentration of pressure on the middle
wheel when the unit passes over high spots in the surface being compacted. The rolls are steel
drums, which may be ballasted with water or sand to increase the weights. If a roller is designated
as 14-20 tons, it means that the minimum weight of the machine only is 14 tons and that it can be
ballasted to give a maximum weight of 20 tons. These rollers are effective in compacting granular
soils, such as sand, gravel, and crushed stone, and they are also effective in smoothing surfaces of
soils that have been compacted by tamping rollers. Another type designates the weight per linear
inch of roller, such as 300 lb. per inch of roller width. Specifying the minimum weight per linear
inch of width is a more definitive method.
Pneumatic-tired Rollers are surface rollers which apply the principle of kneading action to affect
compaction below the surface. They may be self-propelled or towed and they may be small or
192

large-tired units. The small-tired units usually have two tandem axles with four to nine tires on
each axle. The rear wheels are spaced to travel over the surfaces between the front wheels, which
produces a complete coverage of the surface. The wheels may be mounted in a manner that will
give them a wobbly-wheel effect to increase the kneading action on the soil. The Large-tired rollers
are available in sizes varying from 15 to 200 tons gross weight. These units are frequently used to
compact subgrade and base material on airfields and earth-fill dams.
The Manually Operated Vibratory Tamping Compactor is used in locations where larger units are
not practical. These are self-propelled and they are called a vibrating plate for compacting sand or a
vibrating sheepsfoot compactor for compacting clay.
The Manually Operated Rammer Compactor is normally gasoline-engine-driven rammer used for
compacting cohesive or mixed soils in confined areas. these units range in impact from about 300
to 900 or more ft-lb per sec at an impact rate up to 850 per minute, depending on the specific
model. Performance criteria include pounds per blow, area covered per hour, and depth of
compaction (lift) in inches. Rammers are self-propelled in that each blow moves them ahead
slightly to contact new soil.
Types of Equipment Suited for Compacting Different Types of Soils
Type compactor
Soil best suited for
Max. effect in
loose, lift, in.
Sheep's foot
Clay, silty clay, gravel with

clay binder
Steel tandem two-axle
Sandy silts, most granular

material with some clay
binder
Steel tandem three-axle
Max.
Tons.
Nearly uniform
20
4 to 8
Average*
16
Same as above
4 to 8
Average*
20
Steel three-wheel
Granular or granular-plastic
material
4 to 8
Average* to uniform
20
Pneumatic, small-tire
Sandy silts, sandy clays,

gravelly sand and clays with
few fines
4 to 8
Average* to uniform
12
Pneumatic large-tire
All types
? to 24
Uniform
50
Vibratory
Sand, silty sands, silty

gravels
3 to 6
Uniform
30
Combinations
All
3 to 6
Uniform
20
* The density may decrease with depth
193
7 to 12
Density gained in lift

Temporary Material and Equipment Exercise
1.
Which party is normally responsible for estimating and pricing the temporary structures?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
Which party is normally responsible for designing the temporary structures?

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Steel Piling.
Sheet Piling.
Wood Piling.
Concrete Piling.
Which of the following systems is designed to carry the vertical load of the structure?
A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
Owner.
Vendor.
Contractor.
Architect/Engineer.
Which of the following systems is designed to restrain horizontal temporary loads such as
soil and water?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Owner.
Vendor.
Contractor.
Architect/Engineer.
Piling.
Cofferdam.
Timber Shoring.
Cribbing and Tie-backs.
Which of the following systems is utilized for supporting an existing structure when the
new excavation will be below the existing structures foundation while the extension to the
existing foundation is being placed?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Piling.
Cofferdam.
Underpinning.
194

6.
Which of the following systems is utilized for restraining a vertical wall of soil and other
loads where it is impractical to slope the soil such as in a downtown area where the
excavation and new substructure are below the street level?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
Which of the following systems is designed as an enclosed structure to restrain soil and
water, therefore, allowing workers to work inside safely?
A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
Caisson.
Jin Poles.
Cofferdam.
Underpinning.
In construction, what is the proper terminology for transporting the off road equipment to
the job site?
A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
Piling.
Cofferdam.
Underpinning.
Hauling.
Mobilization.
Militarization.
Transportation.
What is the lifting system called which consists of two vertical towers with a cross beam on
top with the intended purpose of lifting an unusually long piece of equipment which was
transported horizontally and it is lifted into its permanent vertical position?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Caisson.
Jin Pole.
Cofferdam.
Tower Crane.
195

10.
What are the components of a cofferdam or a support system?

A.
B.
C.
D.
11.
What is a toe in relationship to a Cofferdam?

A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
The Architect shall design the protection system.

The Project Engineer shall design the protection system.
The designated Competent Person shall design the protection system.
The Registered Professional Engineer shall design the protection system.
What is another name for Sheeting?

A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
The Tie Back extension beyond the Cribbing at least 2 feet.

The horizontal Wales which extends beyond the wall at least 2 feet.
The braces set at a 45-degree angle and extended into the ground at least 2 feet.
The vertical sheeting extended below the bottom of the excavation at least 2 feet.
According to the OSHA Construction Safety Standards, what is required for shoring
systems more than 20 feet deep?
A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
Sheeting, Wales, and Cross braces.

Posts, Stringers, Joists and Pans.
Posts, Stringers, Joists and Plyform.
Wall forms, Wall Ties, Wales, Hairpins and Braces.
Piles.
Struts.
Uprights.
Caissons.
What does close sheeting mean in relationship to a shoring system?

A.
B.
C.
D.
The span across the width of an excavation.

The spacing between timber planks not to exceed inch.
Tongue and groove timber planks at least 3 inches thick.
The use of a trench box or trench shield while working in the excavation.
196

15.
Which piece of equipment and attachment would be the most efficient method to excavate
inside a cofferdam?
A.
B.
C.
D.
16.
Which piece of equipment sets below the excavation and the bucket pushes up?
A.
B.
C.
D.
17.
Shovel.
Backhoe.
Dragline.
Wheel-tractor Scraper.
Which piece of equipment has its boom above the structure and it lifts the load vertically
until it is above the structure, then it can move the load horizontally?
A.
B.
C.
D.
19.
Power Shovel.
Hydraulic Backhoe.
Dragline.
Wheel-tractor Scraper.
Which piece of equipment is used to excavate ponds or soil under water?

A.
B.
C.
D.
18.
Shovel with a 3-CY bucket.

Backhoe with a 3-CY bucket.
Crane with an Auger Attachment.
Crane with a Clamshell attachment.
Shovel.
Backhoe.
Tower Crane.
Track-mounted Crane.
Which piece of equipment is most efficient for compacting granular soils such as sand,
gravel, and crushed stone?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Backhoe.
Sheepsfoot.
Smooth-Wheel Roller.
Wheel-tractor scraper.
197

20.
Which of the following temporary systems is utilized to support freshly placed concrete
which is poured continuously in a vertical direction?
A.
B.
C.
D.
21.
Which of the following temporary systems is utilized to support freshly placed concrete
which is poured on the ground as a slab and lifted up to its final horizontal elevation using
hydraulic jacks?
A.
B.
C.
D.
22.
Tremie.
Conveyor.
Direct Chute.
Underpinning.
Which organization has published a new design standard targeting loads on structures
during construction?
A.
B.
C.
D.
24.
Slip form system.

Tilt-up for system.
Flying form system.
Lift slab form system.
What is the concrete pouring method called that is used to pour concrete under water?
A.
B.
C.
D.
23.
Slip form system.

Tilt-up for system.
Flying form system.
Lift slab form system.

Structural Engineering Institute of the American Society of Civil Engineers.
What is the primary cause for a masonry wall to collapse while under construction?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Poor soil conditions.

Lack of vertical reinforcement.
Lack of horizontal reinforcement.
Lack of masonry wall bracing and a change in wind conditions.
198

25.
Which of the following sling angle ranges is best for lifting without making the lift
extremely dangerous?
A.
B.
C.
D.
26.
1 degree to 14 degrees.
15 degrees to 30 degrees.
You have an assumed sling angle of 24 degrees but the actual angel is 19 degrees. What
effect does this have on the pounds per leg on the sling?
A.
B.
C.
D.
The pounds per leg will decrease.

The pounds per leg will increase.
The pounds per leg stays constant.
The pounds per leg does not matter since the cranes lifting capacity is not effected
Using the Working Range of a Crane Chart attached, answer questions 27 through 33.
27.
What is the working range of a Clam Shell?

A.
B.
C.
D.
28.
What is the working range of a Lift Crane?

A.
B.
C.
D.
29.
00 - 24 degrees
25 - 39 degrees
40 - 54 degrees
55 - 80 degrees
00 - 24 degrees
25 - 39 degrees
40 - 54 degrees
55 - 80 degrees
What is the working range of a Dragline?

A.
B.
C.
D.
00 - 24 degrees
25 - 39 degrees
40 - 54 degrees
55 - 80 degrees
199

30.
Assume you are lifting an item onto the roof. The Height of the exterior wall is 27 Feet
above the ground and the horizontal distance from the centerline of the rotation is 40 feet.
What is the minimum length of the boom required?
A.
B.
C.
D.
31.
Assume you are lifting an item onto the bridge deck. The Deck is 27 feet above the ground
and the horizontal distance from the centerline of the rotation is 40 feet. What is the
minimum boom angle?
A.
B.
C.
D.
32.
30 degrees.
40 degrees.
57 degrees.
72 degrees.
Assume you are lifting an item onto the bridge deck. The deck is 37 feet above the ground
minimum length of the boom required?
A.
B.
C.
D.
33.
20 Feet.
50 Feet.
60 Feet.
70 Feet.
70 Feet.
87 Feet.
110 Feet.
120 Feet.
Assume you are lifting an item onto the bridge deck. The deck is 37 feet above the ground
minimum boom angle?
A.
B.
C.
D.
26 degrees.
40 degrees.
47 degrees.
57 degrees.
Check Answers
200

Schedules on Plans and in the Technical Specification
Many of the CSI Divisions utilize schedules to represent the work. Therefore, it is essential that a
Constructor be able to identify and interpret information from various schedules as well as from
the technical specifications and the plans. Some of the most common schedules, construction
specifications and plans from various divisions will be discussed below.
Concrete Beam Schedule for Division 03 - Concrete
The Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) defines reinforced concrete as a combination of
both reinforcing steel and concrete using the best properties of each. They take into consideration
the compression properties of the concrete and the tension strength of reinforcing steel.
The Reinforcing Steel Bars are also referred to as deformed bars. Reinforcing steel is most
common in the form of deformed bars which contains ridges which makes a good bond with the
concrete instead of smooth reinforcing. Each reinforcing bar contains identifying marks. The
uppermost designation is usually a letter identifying the manufacturer, the next mark the bar size
such as a #11. The bar numbers designate eighths of an inch beginning with a No. 3. The rebar
diameter is determined by taking the bar # and dividing by eight. Therefore, a #3 bar is 3/8 inch in
diameter. A #4 bar is 4/8 or inch. The third mark down is type of steel used. Reinforcing bars are
made of either new billet, axle, or rail steel. The fourth identifying mark may be shown on the bar
is the tensile yield point. The tensile yield point indicates the minimum pounds per square inch
(psi). A grade of 40 reinforcing bar has a minimum yield of 40,000 psi. Other grades are 50 and 60.
Welded Wire Fabric (WWF) is used in slabs-on-grade and highways. It is made of wire generally
arranged to cross at right angles at each intersection. The welded wire fabric is made and delivered
in rolls or as sheets. The designation is 6 x 6 - W1.4 x W1.4 (10 x 10). The 6 x 6 means that the
spacing is 6 inches by 6 inches and the W1.4 xW1.4 is the wire (number) size for a 10-gauge
material. The parenthesis indicates the old designation indicating the wire gauge.
Bar supports are normally incorporated by reference and they are not shown on the plans. It is the
Contractors responsibility to ensure that they are placed properly. This requires the contractor to
review the CRSI 65 Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and
Nomenclature. Typically they are designed to raise the reinforcing bars to the required height
above the bottom of the forms and to hold the bars in place. Many times bar supports are placed in
the upper third of the slab and the lower third of the slab. This requires two sets of bar supports
placed in a slab or beam. Normally these bar supports are called slab bolsters and beam bolsters
and if their location is in the upper third of the slab or beam, then a U is placed at the end of the
abbreviation. For example, BB means Beam Bolster and BBU means Beam Bolster Upper. The
Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) publication titled, Manual of Standard Practice and
the adapted table titled Bar Support Designations is shown below.
201

The CSI Master Format has the bar supports under Division 03 CONCRETE, Section 200
REINFORCEMENT and Part 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS. A typical specification would
indicate that the Contractor must be in compliance with CRSI 65 Recommended Practice for
Placing Bar Supports, Specifications and Nomenclature. CRSI is an abbreviation for the Concrete
Reinforcing Steel Institute. Some of the typical Types and Sizes of Wire Bar Support with their
abbreviations, the type of support and the typical sizes are identified below.
SYMBOL
TYPE OF SUPPORT
TYPICAL HEIGHTS
SB
Slab Bolster
3/4, 1, 1-1/2, 2 inches
SBU
Slab Bolster Upper
Same as SB
BB
Beam Bolster
1,1-1/2, 2 to 5 inches in 1/4" increments
BBU
Beam Bolster Upper
Same as BB
BC
Individual Bar Chair
3/4, 1, 1-1/2 and 1-3/4 inches
JC
Joist Chair
3/4, 1, and 1-1/2 and 4, 5, 6 inches in widths
HC
Individual High Chair
2 to 15 inches in 1/4" increments
HCM
High Chair for M etal Decking
2 to 15 inches in 1/4" increments
CHC
Continuous High Chair
Same as HC
CHCU
Continuous High Chair Upper
Same as CHC
JCU
Joist Chair Upper
Heights -1 thru +3-1/2 in; 14 inch span
Adapted from the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (M arch 2001). Manual of Standard Practice. Schaumburg, IL:
author.
Column, Beam and Slab Schedules

Are utilized to provide the Constructor with detailed information for placing the reinforcing bars,
the stirrups, and the bar supports. Reinforcing bars are designated as either straight bars or bar
bends which are fabricated by the manufacturer in the shop and shipped to the job site.
Stirrups are also known as ties and they are used to wrap the around the horizontal or vertical bars
at specified on center spacings. A Beam schedule is provided below as an exercise.
202

Concrete Beam Exercise
Given the Beam Schedule attached, and Using Mark 1B1. Answer the following questions.
1.
What is the Size of the Beam?

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
How many total beams for Mark 1B1?

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
1
2
12
24
What is the Reinforcing in the top mat?

A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
1
2
12
24
How many layers or mats of reinforcement are required for Mark 1B1?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
12" wide x 24" deep.

24" wide x 10.5" deep.
4 Pieces - #6 bar, 20' 8 inches long.

12 Pieces - #6 bar - 20' 8 inches long.
2 Pieces - #6 bar - 15' 8 inches long.
2 Pieces - #6 bar - 15' 8 inches long and 4 pieces - #6 - 16' 0 inches long.
What is the size of the rebar in inches of the stirrups?

A.
B.
C.
D.
3/8"
4/6"
6/8"
36"
203

6.
How are the stirrups labeled for Mark 1B1 at column #4?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
What is the on-center spacing of the stirrups for Mark 1B1 at column #4?
A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
2 each, 15' - 8" long

4 each, 16' - 0" long.
4 each, 20' - 8" long
5 each, 21' - 7" long
What are the size, and type of bar supports?

A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
4" and 8"

6" and 8"
6" and 10"
8" and 12"
What are the quantity and length of the stirrup support bars for Mark 1B1?
A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
IB1
3A2
3A3
6A1
2 inch Slab Bolsters.

2 inch Beam Bolsters.
5 inch High Chairs.
5 inch Beam Bolsters.
What does the bar support abbreviation CHCU mean?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Concrete High Chair Upper.

Continuous High Chair Upper.
Concrete High Chair Unidentified.
Continuous High Chair Unidentified.
204

11.
What does the bar support abbreviation BBU mean?

A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
What does the bar support abbreviation SB?

A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
Slab Bar.
Slab Bolster.
Slab Bottom.
Beam Bolster.
Which of the following items are not shown or specified in the construction documents for
a reinforced concrete structure?
A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
Broad Beam Upper.

Beam Bolster Upper.
Bottom Bar Unidentified.
Beam Bolster Unidentified.
Rebar.
Concrete.
Bar Supports.
Welded Wire Mesh.
What is the name of the organization which publishes a manual on the spacing
requirements for bar supports?
A.
B.
C.
D.

Concrete Reinforcement Standards Institute.
Concrete Reinforcing Specifications Institute.
Check Answers
205

Concrete Beam Exercise - Schedule
Mark
No.
Beam Size
(inches)
Reinforcing
#3 Stirrups
Bottom
Top
Total
Support Bars
Col. # O.C.
2"
BB
Width
Depth
No.
Size
Length
No.
Size
Length
Mark
No.
Mark
OC
OC
No.
3
4
6"
6"
10"
8"
2
3
21' -7"
1B1
12
24
20'-8"
2
4
6
6
15' -8"
16' -0"
6A1
17
17
3A3
3A2
1B2
24
10.5
12'-8"
4
7
6
7
9' -4"
6A4
16
16
3A6
3A5
4"
4"
8"
8"
2' 0"
1B2A
24
10.5
12'-8"
4
7
6
7
11' -1"
6A4
16
16
3A6
3A5
4"
4"
8"
8"
2' 0"
1B3
24
10.5
17' -2"
11'- 1"
20
20
3A6
3A5
4"
4"
8"
8"
2' 0"
1B4
24
10.5
13' -4"
11' -1"
10
10
3A6
3A5
4"
4"
8"
8"
-----
-----
1B5
24
10.5
14' -3"
6A7
20
20
3A6
3A5
4"
4"
6"
8"
7' -0"
1B7
24
10.5
22' -9"
4
3
7
8
14' -6"
7A9
26
26
3A6
3A5
6"
6"
8"
8"
11' -0"
1B10
12
33
15' -2"
15' -8"
12
12
3A3
3A11
6"
12"
16' 8"
1B12
12
18
13' -9"
8
8
3A3
3A16
8"
8"
12"
12"
-----
------
5A15
206

Door and Window Exercise
Using the door schedule attached. Answer the following questions.
1.
What is the location of Door number 104 B?

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
What is the door size, type, door material, frame Material for Door No. 104 A?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Half Metal Frame

Hallway Metal Frame
Hollow Metal Frame.
Halloway Metal Frame.
What is the door size, type door material frame material for Door 107?
A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
3' - 6" x 7' -2" x 1-3/4", Type C Solid hollow metal door in a hollow metal frame.
3' - 0" x 7' -0" x 1-3/4", Type A Aluminum glass door in an aluminum frame.
3' - 0" x 7' - 2" x 1-3/4", Type D Wood door, w/sm. Window in a wood frame.
3' - 0" x 7' - 2" x 1-3/4", Type D Wood door w/sm. window, a hollow metal frame.
What does the Abbreviation HM stand for on the door schedule?

A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Crib.
Women.
Nursing.
Corridor.
3' -0" x 7-2 x 1-3/4, Type D Wood w/sm window in a hollow metal frame.
3' -0" x 7' -0" x 1-3/4", Type A, Aluminum, in an aluminum frame.
3-6" x 7-2 x 1-3/4, Type C, Solid Wood door in a hollow metal frame.
3-6x 7-2 x 1-3/4, Type C, Hollow metal door in a hollow metal frame.
What is the Fire rating of the door and the type of glass for Door No. 108B?
A.
B.
C.
D.
No rating, standard glass.

No rating, 1/4" Tempered
20 minute rating, 1/4" Wired Glass.
45 minute Rating, 1/4" Wired Glass.
207

Door and Window Exercise
6.
What is the Fire rating of the door and the type of glass for Door No. 102?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
What is the Finish on the Frame for Door No. 111?

A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
Stain.
Paint.
Aluminum.
Dark Bronze.
What is the Finish on the Door No. 108A?

A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
Stain.
Paint.
Aluminum.
Dark Bronze.
What is the Finish on the Door No. 108 B?

A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
No rating, standard glass.

No rating, 1/4" Tempered
20 minute rating, 1/4" Wired Glass.
45 minute Rating, 1/4" Wired Glass.
Stain.
Paint.
Aluminum.
Dark Bronze.
How many sets of Hardware are needed for Door Number 106?
A.
B.
C.
D.
1
3
5
10
Check Answers
208
Door and Window Exercise - Door Schedule

Door
No.
Door
Frame
Label
Glass
----
1/4" Temp
Location
Hrdwr
Sets
Size
Type
Material
Finish
Material
Finish
3'x7'x1-3/4"(pr)
Alum
Dk Bronz
Alum
Dk Bronz
W ood
Stain
HM
Paint
45 min
1/4" W ired
101
Lower Narthex
102
Infants
103
Crib
3x7-2x1-3/4
W ood
Stain
HM
Paint
----
1/4" Temp
104A
Nursing
3x7-2x1-3/4
W ood
Stain
HM
Paint
20 min
1/4" W ired
104B
Nursing
3x7-2x1-3/4
W ood
Stain
HM
Paint
-----
1/4" Temp
105
W omen
3x7-2x1-3/4
W ood
Stain
HM
Paint
20 min
-------
106
Men
3x7-2x1-3/4
W ood
Stain
HM
Paint
20 min
-------
107
Mechanical
3-6x7-2x1-3/4
HM
Paint
HM
Paint
20 min
-------
2-10x7-2x1-3/4
(pr)
W ood
Stain
HM
Paint
45 min
1/4" W ired
10
3x7x1-3/4
Alum
Dk. Bronz
Alum
Dk Bronz
-----
1/4" Temp
108A
Corridor
108B
Corridor
3x7-2x1-3/4
109
Classroom
3x7-2x1-3/4
W ood
Stain
HM
Paint
20 min
1/4" W ired
111
Classroom
3x7-2x1-3/4
W ood
Stain
HM
Paint
20 min
1/4" W ired
112
Classroom
3x7-2x1-3/4
W ood
Stain
HM
Paint
20 min
1/4" W ired
113
Storage
3x7-2x1-3/4
W ood
Stain
HM
Paint
20 min
--------
Stair
3x7-2x1-3/4
W ood
Stain
HM
Paint
1 hour
1/4" W ired
114A
209

Door and Window Exercise - Diagrams
210

Finish and Paint Exercise
Using the Room Schedule attached, answer the following questions.
1.
In room no. 105, which materials will be utilized on the floor?

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
In Room No. 201, which material and finish will be on the W/NW Wall?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Cast Metal Unit.

Cabinet Metal Unit.
Corrugated Metal Unit.
Concrete Masonry Unit.
What is the height of the ceiling in room No. 107?

A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
CMU and paint.

SF CMU, unpainted.
SF CMU/Wood, stain.
SF CMU/Wood, unpainted.
What does the abbreviation CMU on the Room Finish Schedule mean?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Vinyl.
Concrete.
Carpet #1.
Carpet #2.
8' - 0"
9' - 0"
10' - 3"
13' - 0"
What are the ceiling material and finish in room No. 132?
A.
B.
C.
D.
ACT #1 and paint.

SF CMU and no paint.
ACT #1 and no paint.
Gypsum board and paint.
211

Finish and Paint Exercise
Using the Paint Specifications. Answer the following questions.
6.
What types of paint are required on the interior gypsum board with a special finish?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
Which room(s) require the special paint finish on gypsum board walls?
A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
Sealer.
Semigloss enamel.
Alkyd flat enamel.
Stain. Use stain filler for open grain wood.
What is the second coat of paint on the Exposed Piping, Hangers, Ductwork, and
Equipment (Galvanized):?
A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
Stairwell 2 room 132.

116, 117, 118, 119, 120, 121, 122, 123, 124, 208, 209, 210, 211, 214 and 132.
104, 107, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112, 113, 114, 115, 201, 205, 206, 207, and 132.
101, 102, 103, 105, 106, 130, 202, 203, 204, 212, 213, 215, 223, 227, and 127.
What is the second coat of paint on the natural finish wood?

A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
First coat stain, second coat sealer, third coat Satin finish varnish.
First coat Vinyl primer-sealer, second coat Multicolored speckled paint.
First coat Vinyl primer-sealer, second coat Latex eggshell or semigloss, third coat
Latex eggshell or semigloss (deep accent colors).
First coat stain, second coat Chemgard Sealer, Guardsman Chemical coatings, I,
third coat Super Chemveer No. 20 Guardsman Chemical Coatings.4 coats.
Alkyd flat enamel.

Vinyl primer-sealer.
Zinc-chromate primer (Federal Spc TTP-57a).
Zinc-dust primer (Federal Spec. TTP641b, Type II).
What is the second coat on the aluminum jackets for the insulated piping?
A.
B.
C.
D.
No paint.
Epoxy paint.
Alkyd flat enamel.
212
Check Answers
Finish and Paint Exercise - Room Finish Schedule

Rm.
No
Room
Name
Floor
Material
N/NE & S/SW
E/SE W all
W /NW W all
Ceiling
Base
Material
Finish
Material
Finish
Material
Finish
Material
Finish
HT
101
Lower Narthex
Carpet #1
Carpet #1
CM U
Paint
CM U
Paint
CM U
Paint
ACT #1
9' -0"
102
Infants
Carpet #2
Carpet #2
CM U
Paint
CM U
Paint
CM U
Paint
ACT #2
8' -0"
103
Crib
Carpet #2
Carpet #2
CM U
Paint
CM U
Paint
CM U
Paint
ACT #2
8' -0"
104
Nursing
Carpet #2
Carpet #2
CM U
Paint
CM U
Paint
CM U
Paint
ACT #2
8' -0"
105
W omen
Vinyl
Vinyl
CM U
Paint
CM U
Paint
CM U
Paint
Gyp Bd
Paint
8' -0"
106
Men
Vinyl
Vinyl
CM U
Paint
CM U
Paint
CM U
Paint
Gyp Bd
Paint
8' -0"
107
Mechanical
Concrete
-------
CM U
Paint
CM U
Paint
CM U
Paint
Exposed
Paint
10'-3"
127
Stair
Carpet #1
Carpet #1
Glass
- - -- -
SP CMU
----
Glass
---
ACT #1
----
132
Stair
Carpet #1
Carpet #1
SF CMU
-----
SF CMU
----
SF CMU
---
ACT #1
8' -0"
201
Narthex A
Carpet #1
Carpet #1
Glass
SF CM U
- -/ - -
SF CMU
----
SF CMU/
W ood
- / Stain
ACT #1
13'-0"
206
Narthex B
Carpet #1
Carpet #1
SF CMU
-----
SF CMU
----
SF CMU
----
ACT #1
13'-0"
Abbreviations
Acoustical Ceiling Tile
ACT
Concrete Masonry Unit
CMU
Gypsum Board
Gyp Bd
Split Face cmu
SF
Specified cmu
SP
Vinyl Composite Tile
VCT
213

Finish and Paint Exercise - Painting Specifications
09900 - PAINTING SPECIFICATIONS
PART 1
GENERAL
1.01 WORK INCLUDED
A.
The term paint or painting as used in this section have reference to
sealers, primers, stains, paints, varnishes, and the application of these
materials.
B.
Surface preparation.
C.
Surface finish.
1.02
1.03
PART 3
3.07
RELATED WORK
A.
Division 3 - Concrete.
B.
Section 04300 - Unit Masonry System.
C.
Division 5 - Metals.
D.
Division 6 - Carpentry.
E.
Section 80111 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
F.
Section 09260 - Gypsum Board System.
G.
10522 - Fire Extinguisher Cabinets.
H.
Division 15 - Mechanical Equipment, Identification.
I.
Division 16 - Electrical Equipment, Identification.
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ASTM D16 - Definitions of terms Relating to Paint, Varnishes,
Lacquer, and Related Products.
EXECUTION
SCHEDULE - EXTERIOR SURFACES
A.
Exterior Metal (Ungalvanized Ferrous):
1.
First Coat:
Zinc-chromate primer (Federal Spec TTP-57a).
2.
Second Coat: Exterior latex enamel (semigloss or gloss).
3.
Both coats in addition to any factory primer.
B.
Exterior Metal (Galvanized):

1.
Treat metal with Galva-prep, as manufactured by Am-chem, Inc.
2.
First Coat:
3.
C.
Exterior Metal (Aluminum):

1.
Treat metal with Galva-prep, as manufactured by Am-chem, Inc.
2.
First Coat:
Zinc-chromate primer (Federal Spec TTP-57a).
3.
214

3.08
SCHEDULE - INTERIOR SURFACES

A.
Interior Gypsum Board (Standard Finish):
1.
First Coat:
2.
Second Coat: Latex eggshell or semigloss.
3.
Third Coat: Latex eggshell or semigloss (deep accent colors).
B.
Interior Gypsum Board (Special Finish):

1.
First Coat:
Vinyl primer sealer.
2.
Second Coat: Multicolored speckled paint.
3.
Apply per manufacturers instructions.
C.
Interior Block.
1.
First Coat:
Clear Block Sealer.
2.
Spray finish.
D.
Interior Roof Deck (Exposed Deck, Beams, and Joists).

1.
1 coat of spray flat.
E.
Interior Metal (Ungalvanized Ferrous):

1.
Both coast in Addition to any factory primer.
2.
First Coat:
Zinc-chromate primer (Federal Spc TTP-57a) tinted
3.
Second Coat: Alkyd flat enamel.
F.
Interior Metal (Galvanized):

1.
Treat metal with Galva-prep, as manufactured by Am-chem, Inc
2.
First Coat:
3.
G.
Interior Wood - Natural Finish:

1.
First Coat:
Stain. Use stain filler for open grain wood.
2.
Second Coat: Sealer.
3.
Third Coat: Satin finish varnish.
Or in lieu of the above, Contractor has the option of using:
1.
First Coat: Stain.
Use stain filler for open grain wood.
2.
Second Coat: Chemgard Sealer, Guardsman Chemical Coatings, I
3.
Third Coat: Super Chemveer No. 20 Guardsman Chemical Coatings.
215

H.
Interior Wood Painted:

1.
First Coat:
Wood primer undercoater.
2.
Second Coat: Semigloss enamel.
3.
Third Coat: Semigloss enamel.
I.
Exposed Piping, Hangers, and Equipment (Ungalvanized):

1.
First Coat:
Zinc-chromate primer (Federal Spc TTP-57a)
2.
3.
Note: Cast iron pipe shall first be throughly cleaned with rags soaked in
mineral spirits to remove oily film, then primed and finished as indicated
above.
J.
Exposed Piping, Hangers, Ductwork, and Equipment (Galvanized):

1.
Treat metal with Galva-prep, as manufactured by Am-chem, Inc
2.
First Coat:
3.
4.
Note: Use epoxy paint for PVC pipe.
K.
Covered (Insulated) Piping and Ductwork (Unprimed):

1.
First Coat:
2.
3.
Note: Aluminum jackets for insulated piping shall not be painted
L.
Back Priming (Interior Millwork and Trim):

1.
1 coat of white oil base primer for wood to receive paint finish.
2.
Clear sealer for wood to receive natural finish.
3.
Back prime interior millwork on unexposed areas as specified in Div.6.
M.
Apply special paint finish on gypsum board walls in the following rooms: 101, 102,
103, 105, 106, 130, 202, 203, 204, 212, 213, 215, 223, 227, and 127 (stair 1). See
Item B above.
N.
Exposed piping, hangers, ductwork, and equipment shall be painted the same color
as adjacent structure and deck.
END OF SECTION
216

Plumbing Schedule Exercise
1.
The plumbing plans have the abbreviation DWV on them. What does the DWV mean?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
The plumbing plans have the abbreviation DS on them. What does DS mean?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Storm Sewer.
Sanitary Sewer.
Domestic Water.
Sprinkler System.
The Site utility plans have the abbreviation I.E. on them. What does I.E. mean?
A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
Drain Spigot.
Down Spout.
Drain System.
Domestic System.
What system is the DS connected to?

A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Drain Waste and Vent.

Drain, Water and Vent.
Domestic Waste Valve.
Domestic Water Valve
Invert Elevation.
Inside Elevation.
Initial Elevation.
Interior Elevations.
At what point is the I.E. calculate to:

A.
B.
C.
D.
Top inside of the pipe.

Top outside of the pipe.
Bottom inside of the pipe.
Bottom outside of the pipe.
217

6.
What is the purpose of a water hammer arrestor?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Reduce the pressure in the line.

Reduce the vibration in the line.
Maintain a constant flow in the line.
Maintain a constant pressure in the line.
Given the Plumbing Pipe Size Schedule and the Natatorium Plumbing Plan, Answer the following
questions.
7.
What does the plumbing abbreviation VTR mean?

A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
What system is the VTR connected to?

A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
Storm Sewer.
Sanitary Sewer.
Domestic Water.
Sprinkler System.
What system is the CO connected to?

A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
Vent Thru Roof.

Vent Top Return.
Vertical Top of Roof.
Vertical Transfer Run.
Storm Sewer.
Sanitary Sewer.
Domestic Water.
Sprinkler System.
What is the size of the connection to the HB?

A.
B.
C.
D.
0"
"
3/4"
1"
218

11.
What is the size of the Domestic hot water connection to the EWC?
A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
What is the size of the waste line connection to the WC-2?
A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
0"
"
3/4"
1"
0"
1"
2"
4"
What is the size of the cold water connection to the LAV-1?

A.
B.
C.
D.
0"
"
3/4"
1-1/2"
Check Answers
Plumbing Exercise - Pipe Size Schedule
FIXTURE
COLD
HOT
W ASTE
RE
VENT
MAIN
VENT
TRAP
SIZE
1"
---
4"
2"
3"
4"
FLUSH
VALVE
URINAL
3/4"
---
2"
2"
2"
2"
W ALL MTD.
LAVATORY
1/2"
1/2"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
1-1/4"
SINK
1/2"
1/2"
1-1/2"
1-1/2"
2"
1-1/2"
ELECTRIC W ATER COOLER
1/2"
---
1-1/4"
1-1/4"
---
1-1/4"
HOSE BIB
3/4"
---
---
---
---
---
NON-FREEZE
FLOOR DRAIN
---
---
3"
2"
3"
3"
OR A NOTED
SERVICE SINK
3/4"
3/4"
3"
2"
2"
3"
W ATER CLOSET
219
REMARKS
Or as Noted

Plumbing Schedule Exercise - Natatorium Plans
220

Mechanical Equipment Exercise
Using the Mechanical Equipment tables provided, answer the following questions.
1.
What does the mechanical abbreviation FT mean?

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
What are the Depth and Height of FT-4?

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Toilet Room 105.

Toilet Room 125.
Toilet Room 209.
Prayer Room 205.
Where is AHU-1 located?

A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
4" D, 5" Height.

5" D, 12" Height.
4" D, 14" Height.
4" D, 12" Height.
What room does EF -3 service?

A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Fan Tube.
Fin Tube.
Fire Tube.
Furnace Tube.
Narthex 201.
Prayer Room 205.
Sanctuary Room 202.
Mechanical Room 107.
Where is CC -1 located?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Inside B-1.
Inside AHU-1.
Inside CUH-1.
Inside RTU-1.
221

Mechanical Equipment Exercise
6.
What service is P-3 connected to?

A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
What does the mechanical abbreviation CUH mean?

A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
Narthex 201.
Lower Level.
Sanctuary 202.
Prayer Room 205.
What service is L-2 connected to?

A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
Cabinet Unit Heater.

Chiller Unit Handler.
Cooling Unit Handler.
Convector Unit Heater.
What area does RTU-3 service?

A.
C.
D.
D.
9.
B-1
HC-1.
Heating Loop.
Chilled Water.
AHU-1 INTAKE.
EF-3 EXHAUST.
AHU-1 EXHAUST.
CEILING SUPPLY DIFFUSER.
What are the length and height in inches of L-1?

A.
B.
C.
D.
16" L and 16" H.

24" L and 18" H.
42" L and 84" H.
60" L and 84" H.
Check Answers
222

Mechanical Equipment Exercise - Fan and Fin Tube Schedules
FAN SCHEDULE
Mark
Service
Model
CFM
S.P.
HP/AMPS.
RPM
T.S./O.V.
W HEEL DIA.
SONES
VOLTAGE
EF-1
TOILET
105,106
DB-8
825
1/4
1000
2100
----
9.2
120v-1PH
EF-2
TOILET
125
360
125
1/8"
1.2
1200
0000
0000
120V-1PH
EF-3
PRAYER
205
GN-720
500
1/4"
1/4
1325
2200
0000
3.5
120V-1PH
EF-4
TOILET
208,209
GN-820
600
1/4"
1/4
700
1600
----
2.3
120v-1PH
1 Based on Cook
2 Based on Broan, Provide with wall cap
FIN TUBE SCHEDULE

MARK
LOCATION
ELEMENT
BTH/FT
FIN LENGTH
GPM
ROW S
ENCLOSURE
STYLE
D.
HT.
FT-1
SEE PLANS
3/4"C.-2 3/4"X3-48
720
SEE PLAN
SEE PLAN
FS-210
4"
14"
FT-2
SEE PLANS
3/4"C-2 3/4"X3-48
720
SEE PLAN
SEE PLAN
FS-210
4"
14"
FT-3
SEE PLANS
1"C.-3 1/4" -48
750
SEE PLAN
SEE PLAN
AA-1r2
4"
5"
FT-4
SEE PLANS
3/4"C.-2 3/4" X 4 1/4"
1050
SEE PLAN
SEE PLAN
DV4
5"
12"
1 BASED ON VULCAN, 180 * EWT, 160* LWT, 65* EAT

2 MOUNT INVERT AT 7'-6: A.F.F.
3 PROVIDE W/ 14GA PIPE ENCLOSURE AND PRESSURE CLIP FASTENERS AT LOCATIONS SHOWN ON PLANS
223

Mechanical Equipment Exercise - Convector, Unit Heaters and Cabinet Unit Heater Schedules
CONVECTOR SCHEDULE
MARK
C-1
MODEL
FW G-A-24
LOCATON
SEE PLANS
MBH
2.1
GPM
CABINET DIMENSIONS
1.0
24"
24"
4"
CONTROL
REMARKS
REC
4"
DAMPER
1 BASED ON VULCAN, 180* EWT, 160* LWT, 65* EAT
UNIT HEATER SCHEDULE

MARK
SERVICE
MODEL
CFM
MBH
GPM
LAT
RPM
HP
UH-1
MECH RM 107
HV-24
350
15.6
2.0
98
1350
1/20
REMARKS
CABINET UNIT HEATER SCHEDULE

MARK
CUH-1
MODEL
RW I-1130-06
CFM
630
MBH
38.4
GPM
3.0
LAT
125
CABINET DIMENSIONS
L
REC.
59"
25'
9 "
6"
224
RPM
HP
REMARKS
1050
1/10

Mechanical Equipment Exercise - Air Handling, Cooling Coil and Heating Coil Schedules
AIR HANDLING UNIT SCHEDULE
MARK
AHU-1
LOCATION
SERVICE
MECH RM 107
MODEL
LOW ER LEVEL
CFM
LML-122
10,100
S.P.
EXT.
TOTAL
1 1/4"
2 1/4"
O.V.
RPM
H.P.
REMARKS
1417
1291
1,2
1 BASED ON McQUAY
2 PROVIDE 4" HIGH RAIL UNDER UNIT
COOLING COIL SCHEDULE

MK
CC-1
Location
AHU-1
CFM
10,100
MBH
TOT/
SEN
340/282
CHILLED W ATER
AIR
P.D.
GPM
LW T
EWT
78
55*
458
.56
W ATER
P.D.
EDB
15.9
80*
EW B
65*
LDB
55*
LW B
54*
COIL
ROW S
FPF
F.V.
144
478
1 BASED ON MCQUAY
HEATING COIL SCHEDULE

MK
HC-1
Location
AHU-1
CFM
10,100
MBH
403
GPM
39
W ATER
P.D.
11.7
EW T
140*
LW T
119*
1 BASED ON McQUAY
2 MODEL #5WH1102C
225
AIR P.D.
.72
EAT
55*
LAT
90*
COIL
TYPE
ROW S
FPF
F.V.
132
819

Mechanical Equipment Exercise - Boiler and Pump Schedules
BOILER SCHEDULE
MARK
B-1
MODEL
CHN0990
MBH
INPUT
OUTPUT
990
831
RECOVERY
GPH
SUPPLY TEMP.
FULL SIZE
REMARKS
00
180*
10"
1,2,3
1 BASED ON LOCHINAR COPPER - FIN II

2 PROVIDE POWERED VENT CAP FOR SIDEWALL VENT & SEALED COMBUSTION
3 PROVIDE TEKMAR #254 4-STAGE BOILER CONTROL, INSTALLED & WIRED BY T.C.C.
PUMP SCHEDULE
MARK
SERVICE
MODEL
GPM
FT. HEAD
RPM
IMPELLER DIA.
HP
VOLTAGE
REMARKS
P-1
HEATING LOOP
1510-2 "AB
65
45'
1750
7"
480V-3PH
P-2
HEATING LOOP
1510-2 "AB
65
45'
1750
7"
480V-3PH
P-3
HC-1
60-2"A
39
30'
1750
6 "
480V-3PH
P-4
CHILLED W ATER
1510-2 "AB
78
45'
1750
7"
480V-3PH
1 BASED ON BELL & GOSSETT
226

Mechanical Equipment Exercise - Gas Fired Package Rooftop Unit Schedules
GAS FIRED PACKAGE ROOFTOP UNIT SCHEDULE

MK
LOCATION
MODEL
CFM
EXT
S.P.
SAF
HP
SAF
RPM
VOLTAGE
HTG. MBH
IN/OUT
COOLING
TOT/SEN
COM PRESSORS
Notes
KW
RLA
LRA
RTU-1
SANC. 202
558DE240
7500
1"
1210
480v-3PH
270/216
235/173
20.6
31.4
223
1,2,3
RTU-2
SANC. 202
558DE240
7500
1"
1210
480v-3PH
270/216
235/173
20.6
31.4
223
1,2,3
RTU-3
Narthex 201
558DE090
3000
3/4"
1470
480V-3PH
180/144
73/84
7.69
6.2
37.7
1,3
1 BASED ON BRYANT
2 PROVIDE W/INSULATED 24" HIGH ROOF CURB FOR SIDEWALL SUPPLY & RETURN
3 PROVIDE 2/100% ECONOMIZER
227

Mechanical Equipment Exercise - Louver, Diffuser, Register and Grille Schedules
LOUVER SCHEDULE
MARK
SERVICE
DIMENSIONS
LENGTH
HEIGHT
CFM
FREE AREA
SQ. FT.
S.P.
IN W .G.
AIR
VELOCITY
FPM
Notes
L-1
AHU -1 INTAKE
60"
84"
10,100
19.85
.05
510
L-2
AHU -1 EXHAUST
42'
84"
9,100
13.69
.07
660
L-3
EF - 3 EXHAUST
16"
16"
500
0.81
.06
620
L-4
EF -4 EXHAUST
24"
18"
600
1.11
.05
540
1 Based on Rusken
DIFFUSER, REGISTER AND GRILLE SCHEDULE
MARK
SERVICE
MODEL
VOLUME DAMPER
FINISH
REMARKS
D -1
CEILING SUPPLY DIFFUSER
TDC -3
-------
OFF-W HITE
1,2
D -2
CEILING SUPPLY DIFFUSER
TDC -1
-------
OFF-W HITE
D -3
FLOOR SUPPLY DIFFUSER
CT - PP - 0
AG - 35
CLEAR ANODIZED
1, 3
R -1
SIDEW ALL SUPPLY REGISTER
1700
AG - 15
OFF-W HITE
R -2
CEILING EXHAUST REGISTER
350FL
AG - 15
OFF-W HITE
G -1
CEILING RETURN GRILLE
50F
-------
OFF-W HITE
228

Electrical Exercise
Using the Electrical Plans, Schedules provided below and the Mechanical Equipment Schedules
previously attached, answer the following questions.
1.
Using the One-line Diagram, what are the electrical power requirements to the Chiller?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
Using the One-line Diagram, what are the electrical power requirements from the Pad
Mounted Transformer to the Main Switchboard?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Panel PP, Panel DP.

Panel PP, Panel DP and the Existing Service Panel.
Panel DM, Panel E, Panel F, Panel C and Panel D
Panel PP, Panel DP, Existing Service Panel, and the Chiller.
Using the One-line Diagram, what are the Feeders on the Distribution Panel going to?
A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
3 #4, 1"C
3 #4/0, 2" C
4 #1/0, 2-1/2" C
(4) #350 MCM & #2 Ground, 3" PVC
Using the One-line Diagram, what are the Feeders on the Main Switch Board going to?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
3 #4, 1"C
3 #4/0, 2" C
4 #1/0, 2-1/2" C
(4) #350 MCM & #2 Ground, 3" PVC
Panel PP, Panel DP.

Panel DM, Panel E, Panel F, Panel C and Panel D
Panel PP, Panel DP, Existing Service Panel, and the Chiller.
Panel DM, Panel E, Panel F, Panel C, Panel D, Existing Service Panel.
Using the One-line Diagram, what phase motor is required for the Chiller?
A.
B.
C.
D.
1
3
4
17
229

Electrical Exercise
6.
Using the Diagrams, you will see the symbol and the abbreviations EF-4 and 17, F.
What phase motor is required?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
What does the abbreviation 17, F refer to?

A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
RTU-3, 201.
Outlets Room 201.
Outlets in Room 206.
EF-3, Outlets in Room 205.
What is the horsepower for UH-1?

A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
Fan #17.
EF #17 on Panel F.
Circuit # 17 on Panel F.
Panel # 17 on Circuit F.
Which one of the following electrical receptacles is attached to 20, F?

A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
1
3
4
17
1/10
1/20
1.0
7-1/2
What is the voltage requirement for RTU-2?

A.
B.
C.
D.
120
208
240
480
230

Electrical Exercise
11.
What phase motor is required for P-2?

A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
What is the horse power required for P-3?

A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
1
3
20
50.
What is the mounting height of the outlet near the Narthex and on the south wall referred to
as 18, F?
A.
B.
C.
D.
15.
1/10
1.0
2.0
7-1/2
What size breaker in amperes is required for RTU-1?

A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
1
2
3
480
16 inches.
40 inches.
42 inches.
80 inches.
What is the mounting height of the Fire Alarm Smoke detector?

A.
B.
C.
D.
16 inches.
40 inches.
42 inches.
80 inches.
231

Electrical Exercise
16.
Which of the following pieces of electrical equipment has a disconnect switch?

A.
B.
C
D.
17.
What does the abbreviation GFI, WP mean?

A.
B.
C.
D.
18.
Eye Wash Container.

Electric Water Cooler.
Exhaust Waste Convenience.
Equalization Water Container.
Where are the lighting fixtures C 4 located?

A.
B.
C.
D.
20.
Ground Fixture Inside and Waterproof.

Ground Fault Interrupter and Waterproof.
Ground Fault Interrupter and Weatherproof.
Ground Fluorescent Inside and Weatherproof.
What does the abbreviation EWC mean?

A.
B.
C.
D.
19.
EF-3
CUH
EWC
RTU-2.
Narthex.
Exterior.
Bathrooms.
Stairs and Entrances.
Which Fixture types are attached to a Photo-cell?

A.
B.
C.
D.
A1 and EM1.
B2. and K.
E and EM1.
M and N.
232

Electrical Exercise
21.
What type of light is a B2 light?

A.
B.
C.
D.
22.
How are the EM-2 lights mounted?

A.
B.
C.
D.
23.
1
2
3
4
What is the electrical symbol

A.
B.
C.
D.
25.
Ceiling.
Surface.
Pendant.
Recessed.
How many lamp(s) are in fixture A2?

A.
B.
C.
D.
24.
2' x 2' Fluorescent Troffer with Prismatic lens.

2' x 4' Fluorescent Troffer with Prismatic lens.
2' x 4' Fluorescent Troffer with Prismatic lens with 3 lamps.
2' x 2' Fluorescent Troffer with Parabolic lens and 30K lamps.
with an E inside the circle mean?
Exit Sign.
Existing Sign.
Electrical Fixture.
Emergency Fixture.
Which of the following wire sizes has the greatest diameter?

A.
B.
C.
D.
#0
#1
#10
#14.
Check Answers
233

Electrical Exercise - Electrical Symbols Legend and Mounting Heights
ELECTRICAL SYM BOL LEGEND
SYM BOL
S
S3
D
O
O GFI
O WP
O
.
,,
J
1
2
3
4
5
e
|--------|
(
EM
ETR
ETBR
DESCRIPTION
SINGLE POLE SWITCH

THREE-WAY SWITCH
DIMMER SWITCH
CONVENIENCE OUTLET
CONVENIENCE OUTLET WITH GFI
WEATHERPROOF OUTLET
SAFETY CONVENIENCE OUTLET
DISCONNECT SWITCH
SINGLE PHASE MOTOR
3-PHASE MOTOR
BRANCH CIRCUIT PANEL BOARD
TELEPHONE OUTLET
DATA OUTLET
MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDER
JUNCTION BOX
FIRE ALARM PULL STATION
FIRE ALARM AUDIO/VISUAL DEVICE
FIRE ALARM VISUAL DEVICE
FIRE ALARM SMOKE DETECTOR
FIRE ALARM DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR
RECESSED INCAND. OR FLUORESCENT
HID FIXTURE, SURFACE OR PENDANT
INCAND. FIXTURE, SURFACE OR PENDANT
EXIT SIGN
RECESSED FLUORESCENT TROFFER
STRIP FLUORESCENT FIXTURE
SURFACE FLUORESCENT FIXTURE
BATTERY EMERGENCY FIXTURE
EMERGENCY FIXTURE
EXISTING TO REMAIN
EXISTING TO BE REMOVED
Note: All Mounting Heights are to Bottom.
234
M OUNTING HEIGHT
40"
40"
40"
16" OR AS NOTED
16" OR AS NOTED
16" OR AS NOTED
16" OR AS NOTED
------------16" OR AS NOTED
16" OR AS NOTED
------40"
80"
80"
----------------------------------------

Electrical Exercise - One Line Diagram
235

Electrical Exercise - Power Plan Upper Level
236

Electrical Exercise - Panel Board Load Sheet
PANEL: F
LOCATION
MOUNTING: RECESSED
MAINS: 3P100A MLD
PANEL LOCATION: 209
VOLTAGE: 120/480 -3
FEEDER SIZE: 4#3, 1-1/4 C
FEEDER FROM: DP
LOAD IN VOLT AMPS

LIGHT
RTU-1, 202
OUTLET
MOTOR
480
LIGHTING, 209
RTU-2, 202
480
BKR
CKT
CKT
BKR
P
AMP
LOAD IN VOLT AMPS

LIGHT
OUTLET
LOCATION
AMP
NO
NO
MOTOR
50
LIGHTING, 206
P. CELL, 201A, B, C
20
OUTLET 201, P. CEL
50
WP GFI, 202C
10
OUTLET 201, WP GFI
EF -3, 205
20
11
12
WP GFI ROOF
EWC
20
13
14
OUTLET R 206, 202B
CUH
20
15
16
OUTLET ROOM 209
EF-4 208, 209
20
17
18
OUTLETS ROOM 206
OUTLETS 201
20
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
237
70
480
RTU-3

Electrical Exercise - Lighting Plan Upper Level
238

Electrical Exercise - Lighting Fixture Legend
DESCRIPTION
MOUNTING
LAMPS
MANUFACTURER
A1
2' X 4' FLUORESCENT TOFFER

W / PRISMATIC LENS
RECESSED
(2) F40CW /RS/W M
LITHONIA #2SPG240
A2
2' x 4' SIMILAR TO A1

EXCEPT W / 3 LAMPS
RECESSED
(3) F40CW /RS/W M
LITHONIA #2SPG340
B1
2' X 2' FLUORESCENT

TROFFER W /PRISMATIC LEN
RECESSED
(2) FB40CW /6
LITHONIA #2SPG2U40
B2
SIMILAR TO B1 EXCEPT W /
PARABOLIC LENS & 30K
LAMPS
RECESSED
(2) F40SPX30/U/6
LITHONIA #2PM 3
6, 4
C1
INCANDESCENT DOW NLIGHT
RECESSED
(1)15ORFL120W M
KURT VERSEN #150
C2
SIMILAR TO C1 EXCEPT W /
LAMP
RECESSED
(1)300RFL
KURT VERSEN #300
C3
SIMILAR TO C1 EXCEPTW /
LAMP
RECESSED
(1)Q500 T4
KURT VERSEN #500
C4
SIMILAR TO C1 EXCEPT W /
FLUORESCENT LAM P
RECESSED
(2)PLC26W /27
KURT VERSEN #120
C5
SIMILAR TO C1 EXCEPT
W ALLWASH
RECESSED
(2)PLC26W /27
KURT VERSEN #120
PENDANT INCANDESCENT
FIXTURE, ACRYLIC DIFFUSER
PENDANT
(8)N150
VISA #CB3616
13
INCANDESCENT UP/DOW N
LIGHT
W ALL PER
DETAIL
(1)100A21/99
MANNING #DS89
10
HID DOW NLIGHT
RECESSED
(1)MS100BU/BDW
HALO #M6024
HID W ELL UPLIGHT
W ELL IN
GROUND
(1)MS100BU/BDW
HYDREL #9305
EM
1
EMERGENCY BATTERY
FIXTURE
SURFACE
PER UNIT
LITHONIA #ELM-H
EM
2
SAME AS EM1 EXCEPT

CEILING M OUNTED
CEILING
PER UNIT
LITHONIA #ELM-H
239
12

Electrical Exercise - Lighting Fixture Notes
1.
ALL BALLAST SHALL BE ENERGY SAVING TYPE, FLUORESCENT (T12) BALLAST.
2.
HID LAMPS BY VENTURE, PL LAMPS BY OSRAM AND ALL OTHER LAMPS BY G.E. W ITH
EQUAL BY SYLVANIA.
3.
EXIT SIGNS ARE BATTERY POW ERED LED TYPE.
4.
PARTIALLY SHADED FIXTURES SHALL INCLUDE 1/3 OR OF LAMPS ON BATTERY BACKUP

EMERGENCY PACK SUCH FIXTURES ARE NORMALLY MANUALLY CONTROLLED AND
AUTOMATICALLY LIGHT DURING LOSS OF POW ER.
5.
EQUAL FIXTURES BY LITHONIA, DAYBRITE, METALUX, HALO, AND CAPRI, ARE APPROVED.
FIXTURE CUTS MUST BE SUBM ITTED FOR SPECIFIC FIXTURES NOT LISTED ABOVE.
6.
NOT THE USE OF 30K LAMPS FOR THE PARABOLIC 2 X 2 FIXTURES.
7.
FIXTURES TYPE E1' & E2' SHALL MATCH D, INCLUDING THE BRASS RING AROUND THE
UPPER PART OF THE FIXTURE. FIXTURE E2' IS ONLY 1/4 OF A SPHERE FOR CORNER
MOUNTING, ACRYLIC OR M ATCHING PAINT FINISH. FIXTURE TO SET OUT FROM W ALL.
8.
OF THE 18 TYPE F FIXTURES, PROVIDING AT LEAST THREE (3) FIXTURES OF EACH BEAM
TYPE CL, VNSP, NSP, MFL, & W FL. INCLUDE THREE (3) SETS OF SPARE LENS #S4PAR-LS.
EQUAL FIXTURES BY STRAND SHALL BE APPROVED EQUALS. SEE ELEC. & ARCH DETAILS
FOR INSTALLATION.
9.
FIXTURE G TO HAVE CLEAR LENS TO PREVENT COLLECTION OF DUST IN REFLECTOR.

PROVIDE PHOTOMETRICS OF SIDE, FRONT & REAR W ITH FIXTURE INVERTED PER DETAIL #7
ON DW G. E2.
10.
UP/DOW N FIXTURE K TO MOUNT DIRECTLY TO W ALL PER DETAIL #1 ON DW G. E2.
11.
FLOOD LIGHTING FIXTURE P COLOR TO MATCH ROOF FINISH.
12.
FIXTURE MUST BE IC RATED.
13.
D FIXTURE BY VISA W ITH W HITE PENDANT, LBZ RING & NO FINAL. D FIXTURE BY
MANNING W ITH W HITE PENDANT DB RING & NO FINAL.
240

BIDDING AND ESTIMATING
Document Relationships
The Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) has established a specific terminology to indicate
the relationship among the documents. Each term is defined below.
The Basic Relationships Among the Various Documents
Construction Documents
Bidding Documents
Typical Project M anual
Bidding
Requirements
Bid
Invitation
Instructions
Information
Available
Bid Forms
and
Attachments
Contract
Forms
Agreement
Performance
Bond
Payment
Bond
(Labor/M at)
Contract
Conditions
General
Conditions
Supplementary
Conditions
Specifications
Division 01
General
Requirements
Division 2-16
Technical
Specifications
Plans
Drawings
Addendum
W orking
Drawings
Civil
Architectural
Structural
Mechanical
Electrical
Contract
Modification
Contract
Change
Orders
Change
Directives
Minor
Changes
Certificates
Bid Security
Forms
W hen Owner- Contractor Agreement is Signed, these become

CONTRACT DOCUM ENTS
The Construction Documents is the term utilized to refer to the inclusion of all seven categories.
The Bidding Document is the term utilized to refer to the inclusion of six categories excluding
the Contract Modification category.
The Project Manual is the term utilized to refer to the inclusion of the Bidding Requirements,
Contract Forms, Contract Conditions and the Specifications. The Contract Documents is the term
utilized to refer to the inclusion of the Contract Forms, Contract Conditions, Specifications,
Working Drawings, Addendum and the Contract Modifications.
241

Project Manual Arrangement
Introductory Pages
00001
TITLE PAGE
00003
TABLE OF CONTENTS
00010
PRE-BID INFORMATION
-030
Advertisement for Bids
-040
Prequalification Forms
00100
-120
Revisions to Instructions to Bidders
-130
Pre-Bid Conference
00200
Bidding Requirements
Contract Documents
-210
Preliminary Schedules
-220
Geotechnical Data - Geotechnical Report & Soil Boring Data
-230
Existing Conditions - Existing Site, Existing Buildings & Property Survey
-240
Project Financial Information
00300
BID FORMS
00400
-410
Bid Security Forms
-430
Subcontractor List
-440
Substitution List
-460
Alternates/Alternatives
-480
Noncollusive Affidavit
00500
AGREEMENT FORMS
00600
BOND AND CERTIFICATES
00700
GENERAL CONDITIONS
00800
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
-810
Modifications to General Conditions
-820
Additional Articles - Equal Employment Opportunity Goals
-830
Wage Determination Schedule
00900
01000
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
02-16
Adapted from Construction Specifications Institutes Manual of Practice.
242

Bidding Requirement Documents
The Advertisement for Bids, Notice to Bidders or Invitation to Bid is used to communicate to all
prospective bidders the nature, intent, and location of the work and the authority under which it
originates, together with the time, manner, and place in which bids are to be received. The
Advertisement for Bids/Notice to Bidders is normally used on Public Project notices. An
Invitation to Bid is normally used on Private projects.
The best sources for finding construction Advertisements for Bids are the Dodge Reports or your
local Builders Exchange office. The Dodge Reports and the Builders Exchange are services that
must be purchased by the Contractor but the Advertisements are updated daily and can be sent
directly to the Contractor. These notices can also be found in newspapers and trade magazines.
According to the Construction Specifications Institutes, Manual of Standard Practice they
recommend that the following information be contained in the Instructions to Bidders.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Project Identification: Name, Project Number, Date, Name and Address of the Owners
Representative.
Description of Work
Type of Bid
Time of Completion
Bid Opening
Examination and Procurement of Documents
Bid Security
Bidders Qualifications
Owners Right to Reject Bids
Laws and Regulations
Prepared by the Owners Representative (Architect or Engineer)
Sent to Dodge Reports, Newspapers, Magazines and Trade Publications.
The Contractors Responsibility is to consult Dodge Reports, Builders Exchange
and be informed through trade journals and magazines.
243

The Prequalification process is usually announced in the advertisement to bidders. The
Contractors are asked to submit documents that establish the firm's expertise and capability in
accomplishing similar types of work, before they can be issued bidding document & before they
can submit their proposal. The purpose of prequalification is to allow the owner the opportunity
to eliminate the incompetent, overextended, underfinanced, and inexperienced contractors from
consideration. The American Institute of Architect and the Associated General Contractors
recommend that the following information be contained in the Prequalification form.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
Submittal Parties
Name of the Project
Type of Work Performed
Type of Organization
Licensing Information
Experience and Claims Record
Laws and Regulations
References: Trade, Banks and Surety
Financial Statement
Signatures and Notarized
This is Completed by the Contractor
Sent to the Owners Representative or State Highway Department.
The Contractors Responsibility is to complete a prequalification questionnaire
and/or other owner documents Prior to receiving the Bidding documents.
244

The Instructions to Bidders is normally found at the beginning of the Bid Requirements. These
instructions review the requirements that the owner has set up for the form and content of the
bids, and prescribes certain procedures with which the bidding contractors are required to
conform. Conditions pertaining to the form of the bid, where and when it must be delivered,
whether it is a public opening, proposal security required and information concerning late bids.
Failure to comply with such instructions can result in a contractor's bid not being accepted.
According to the Construction Specifications Institutes, Manual of Standard Practice they
recommend that the following information be contained in the Instructions to Bidders.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Location of the Documents

Bid Submittal Procedures
Interpretation of the Construction Documents
Site Review Procedures
Bid Proposal Guarantees
Proposal Supplement Procedures
Time for Executing the Contract
Acceptance of Proposals
Erasure Procedures
Selection of Low Bidder
Bidder Qualifications
Withdrawal of Proposals
Selection of Alternates
Rejection of Proposals
Payment Form and Schedule of Values
Bid Authorization
This is prepared by the Owner or Owner's Representative
It is sent to the Contractor
The Contractors Responsibility is to READ! Thoroughly
245

The Prevailing Wage Rate Schedule is normally found at the beginning of the Bid Requirements.
On public construction projects the wage rates by craft may be established. This is sometimes
referred to as the Davis-Bacon Act.
Prepared by the Owner or Owner's Representative
Sent to the Contractor
Contractors Responsibility is to use these rates as a minimum
The Information Available to the Bidders consists of preliminary schedules, Geotechnical data
(Report), Soil Boring Information, existing conditions description, site maps, existing structures,
existing substructure and property surveys for the contractors review.
Prepared by the Owner, Owner's Representative and/or Testing Company
Sent to the Contractor with the bid package documents.
The Contractors Responsibility is to REVIEW THROUGHLY and COMPARE
to Standard Table for Relative Density and Consistency. Also, most of the time
these will indicate For Bidding Purposes Only which means that the Contractor
shall review for bidding but they cannot utilize the documents for requesting a
Contract Change Order.
The following questions can be utilized to determine whether the Information Available to the
Bidders section is a Part of the Agreement. The Soil Reports and the Soil Borings may not be a
part of the contract documents depending on their disclaimers. The A/E firms strongly suggest
that these bidding requirement and forms be excluded from the contract. The general law
principles are as follows:
QUESTIONS TO DETERMINE W HETHER INFORMATION IS PART OF THE AGREEMENT
Yes or No
Are these documents listed in the Owner/Contractor Agreement?

Is the index listed in the Owner/Contractor Agreement?
Is the Information Available listed in the Index?
Is the report numbering continuous within a Division such as 02120 - 1, etc.?
If you can answer yes to all of the questions then the information Available to the Bidders is
included as a part of the Agreement.
246

Contractors Bid Submittal Documents
The addenda are used to communicate any changes, modifications, corrections or additions that
arise BEFORE the Bids are opened. These will become a part of the bid package and they must
be included in the Bid Price. This is the form the Owner or the Owners Representative uses to
modify the scope and detail of the work prior to the bid opening.
Prepared by the Owners Representative
Sent to All Bidders at least five days prior to bid opening
The Contractors Responsibility is to Sign all Addenda and Submit
Acknowledgment with the Contractors Bid Submittal
The Proposal Supplements are used to request additional information concerning the Bid
Proposal. Typically, the Architect will request the name of each major Subcontractors, the names
of the major manufacturers and vendors. This information will be used to determine the
reliability of the contractor and whether the project materials are in compliance with the
Specifications.
Prepared by the Contractor on the Form Provided in the Bid Package.
Sent to the Owner with the Contractors Bid Submittal
The Contractors Responsibility is to obtain from the Subcontractors and
Suppliers and Submit with the Bid Submittal.
Alternates are normally found in Division 01 of the General Requirements and they are used to
request different methods of constructing a project. A Second purpose is to obtain bids on the
basic contract and requesting additional alternatives on specific items that the owner may or may
not decide to add or deduct form the Base bid. These Alternatives are requested during the
bidding phase and they must be submitted by the contractor at the bid opening.
Prepared by the Contractor on the Form Provided in the Bid Package.
The Contractors Responsibility is to submit Addition or Deduction in Price with
the Bid Submittal.
247

The Bid Bond also called a proposal security bond, is widely used for the purpose of bid security
to the owner. Other forms of bid security that some owners may allow are a certified check or a
cashier's check. This a guarantee to the owner that the successful bidder will enter into a contract
with the owner for the amount of their bid and they will provide the contract bonds as required.
A bond is a three-party instrument that protects one party from default on the part of a second
party. In the event a default occurs, a third party is legally bound to offset any damages resulting
from the default. In bonding terminology, the party in a position to be damaged by a default is
called the OBLIGEE(Owner). The party who is in a position to default is the PRINCIPLE
(Contractor). The third party offsetting the damages is the SURETY(Bonding Company). If the
bond is invoked, the Surety will provide the Owner with the face value of the bid bond and they
will in turn sue the contractor for the face value of the bid bond plus all additional expenses such
as lawyer fees.
Prepared by the Surety (bonding company)
Sent to the Owner with the contractors bid submittal
The Contractors Responsibility is to obtain from surety & properly submit with
his bid submittal. The process of obtaining a Bonding Capacity normally requires
the Contractor to Submit a Portfolios containing Financial Statements, Resumes
of Key People, Type of Ownership, Long Range Plan, Types of Projects
Completed and an Example of your Cost Control System.
The Noncollusive Affidavit is a sworn statement stating the bid submitted was arrived at without
any agreement or cooperation with other prime bidders on the contract.
Prepared by the Contractor on the Form Provided and it will be Notarized.
Sent to the Owner with the Contractors Bid Submittal.
The Contractors Responsibility is to have the form notarized and submit with bid
submittal.
248

The Proposal Form is the written offer, tendered by the contractor to the owner, which stipulates
the price for which the contractor agrees to perform the work described by the contract
documents. It is an offer and by itself is not a formal contract. However, upon acceptance of the
offer by the owner this results in a contractual relationship. The standardized proposal form,
provided in the bid package, is desirable and necessary so that all bids will be presented and
evaluated on the same basis. According to the Construction Specification Institutes Manual of
Standard Practice, they recommend that the following information be contained on the Bid Form.
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
Project Identification
Name and Address of Party to Whom the Bid is Directed
Entity Submitting Bid
Acknowledgments
Amount of Time for the Bids to be Held Open
Identification of Addenda
Prices
Alternates
Allowances
Combined Bids
Completion Date
Liquidated Damages
Attachments
Closing with Signatures, Date and Corporate Seal
Prepared by the Contractor on the form provided in the Bid Package
The Contractors Responsibility is to fill out and sign with correct prices in
writing and in figures, sealed in an envelope that is addressed as directed by the
instruction to bidders and clearly labeled as a proposal for the project being bid
including the contractors return address. Failure to use the proposal form
provided will result in disqualification of the bid.
249

The Contractors Bid Breakdown Form for a Lump Sum Contract is sometimes included in the
bid package and the Contractor is required to submit their proposal broken down by certain
divisions of work, as outlined in the Instructions to Bidders. Each division of work requested
must include all labor, material, equipment, overhead, profit and subcontractor cost associated
with performing the work. The contractor submits a lump sum price for each division. The
owner uses the bid breakdown to compare contractor prices.
Prepared by the Contractor on the Form Provided in the Bid Package
Contractors Responsibilities is to ensure all items are accounted for including
overhead and profit. To ensure that no alterations or conditions are included in
the bid submitted.
An example of a typical bid breakdown for a building is shown as follows
CSI DIV/SEC
MAJOR DIVISION
LUMP SUM AMOUNT ($)
01
GENERAL CONDITIONS
02
EXCAVATION & GRADING
03
CONCRETE
04
MASONRY
05
STRUCTURAL STEEL
06
CARPENTRY
07
ROOFING
08
DOORS, W INDOW S, STOREFRONTS & GLAZING
09250
DRYW ALL
09900
PAINTING
15300
FIRE PROTECTION
15400
PLUMBING
15500
HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
15550
BOILER
16
16700
ELECTRICAL
COMMUNICATIONS
TOTAL BID PRICE
250

The Contractors Bid Form for a Unit Price Contract is included as part of the bid package and
the Contractor is required to submit a prince which includes all costs by the items requested on
the Bid Item form as outlined in the Bid Instructions. Each item of work requested must include
all labor, material, equipment, overhead, profit and subcontractor cost associated with performing
the work. The contractor submits a unit price for each item and extends the price to determine
the total estimated Amount. The owner uses the unit price breakdown to compare contractor
prices.
Prepared by the Contractor on the Form Provided in the Bid Package
Contractors Responsibility is to ensure all items are accounted for including
overhead and profit. To ensure that no alterations or conditions are included in
the bid submitted.
An example of a typical unit price bid for a Road and Flood Control Project is shown below.
NAME OF PROJECT:
NAME OF BIDDER
ROAD AND FLOOD CONTROL PROJECT
_______________________________
BIG SIOUX RIVER
_______________________________
SIOUX CITY, IOWA AND SOUTH DAKOTA
_______________________________
DATE:
___________________
TO: District Engineer
In compliance with the above dated advertisement for bids, the undersigned hereby proposes to
perform all work for the Road and Flood Control Project, Stage I, Big Sioux River, Sioux City,
Iowa and South Dakota in strict accordance with the Standard Specifications, Standard Plans, Bid
documents and Supplementary Conditions. For the following amounts:
Item
No.
Description
Quantity
Unit
Clearing and Grubbing
Type A Excavation
113,900
C.Y.
TYPE B Excavation
25,000
C.Y.
Compacted Embankment
196,600
C.Y.
Riprap
42,300
Tons
Seeding
60
Acres
24" Dia CM P (12 Gage)
384
L.F.
Unit Price
L.S.
TOTAL
251
Estimated
Amount

Typical Bidding Process Time Line
O wner holds lowest 3
or 4 bidders
Advertisem ent to bidder
Subm ittals provide Bid

Bond
O btain C ontract
Bonds and
Insurances
If contractor can't provide

these at the signing of
contract the bid bond is Kept
by O wner
A pprox 30 days
30 days
14 days
must provide
Bid Period Pick up D oc.

D o Q uantity Takeoff
Select Subs
Review and
Acceptance of
Proposals and
Selection by O wner
Bid O pening D ate
C om mence W ork
1)Perform ance Bond

2) Labor & M aterial Bond
3) Insurance Certificate
N otice of Award
Sign/Execute Contract
Subm it Shop D rawings

Construction
Liquidated Damages is an assessment against the contractor for failure to complete the work
within the time limit specified in the contract. The amount for liquidated damages is stated in a
fixed sum per calendar day to cover the owners loss revenue. It must not be a penalty. If the
dollar amount is not stated in the documents, then the Owner can charge the Contractor for actual
damages incurred. Retainage is the amount withheld from the contractors progress payments
until final completion and acceptance.
Conditions of the Contract
The Agreement Between Owner and Contractor is attached as a supplement to the Bid
Requirements. The reason for providing the Agreement in the bid package is to allow the
contractor the opportunity to review the terms and conditions prior to bidding the work.
Sent to the Contractor with the Bid package documents
Contractors Responsibility is to READ thoroughly!
The Signed Agreement and its terms and conditions which are included in
the Agreement will rule over all other documents.
The General Conditions have been standardized by numerous associations. Below are two
common forms of the General Conditions written by different associations. They are the
American Institute of Architects (AIA) and the Engineers Joint Contract Document Committee.
These are incorporated by reference.
252

The General Conditions published by the American Institute of Architects (AIA) defines the
basic rights, responsibilities and relationships of all parties involved in the construction process.
It also sets forth the manner and general Business procedures whereby the provisions of the
contract are to be implemented according to accepted business practices in the construction
industry. The AIA Standard General Conditions have been approved and endorsed by the AIA
and the Associated General Contractors. The General Conditions describe the rights and
responsibilities using the following article numbers.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
General Provisions
Owners Responsibilities and Stop Work Procedures
Contractors Responsibilities and Shop Drawing Procedures
Architects Responsibilities and Claims Procedures
Subcontractors Responsibilities
Construction by the Owner or Separate Contractors
Changes in the Work Procedures
Time and Time Extensions
Payment and Completion Procedures
Safety and Protection of People and Property
Insurance and Bond Descriptions
Uncovering and Correction of the Work
Governing Laws, Tests and Inspections
Termination or Suspension of the Contract Procedures
Each of the provisions has legal implications, and the word cannot be changed without careful
consideration. The wording has evolved to establish a fair and equitable balance of protection
for all parties concerned.
Incorporated by Reference or sent to the Contractor
The Contractors Responsibility is to become thoroughly familiar with the
Standard General Condition forms. If the contractor finds considerable deviation
from the STANDARD, They should consult their attorney or they may decline the
opportunity to bid fearing costs of litigation in clarifying contractual problems.
There are numerous versions of the General Conditions and they are normally incorporated by
reference, therefore, the Contractor must ensure that they are using the correct version for their
project. Some previous editions of the AIA A 201 General Conditions are the 1997, 1987, 1976
and each edition is unique.
253

The General Conditions published by Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (EJCDC)
defines the basic rights, responsibilities and relationships of all parties involved in the
construction process. It also sets forth the manner and general Business procedures whereby the
provisions of the contract are to be implemented according to accepted business practices in the
construction industry. The EJCDC 1910-8 General Conditions have been issued and Published
Jointly by the National Society of Professional Engineers (NSPE), the American Consulting
Engineers Council (ACEC), the American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) and the
Construction Specifications Institute (CSI). This document has been approved and endorsed by
the Associated General Contractors. The Standard General Conditions describe the rights and
responsibilities using the following article numbers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Definitions
Preliminary Matters
Contract Documents: Intent, Amending, Reuse Procedures
Availability of Lands; Subsurface Physical Conditions;
Bonds and Insurance
Contractors Responsibilities
Other Work
Owners Responsibilities
Engineer's Status During Construction
Changes in the Work
Change of Contract Price
Change of Contract Time
Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal or Acceptance of Defective Work
Payment to Contractor and Completion Procedures
Suspension of the Work and Termination Procedures
Dispute Resolution
Miscellaneous
Incorporated by Reference or sent to the Contractor
The Contractors Responsibility is to become thoroughly familiar with the
Standard General Condition forms. If the contractor finds considerable deviation
from the STANDARD, They should consult their attorney or they may decline the
opportunity to bid fearing costs of litigation in clarifying contractual problems.
The EJCDC 1910-8 General Conditions has a 1990 and a 1996, etc. editions and each edition is
unique.
254

The Supplementary Conditions contain provisions or clauses that are Written expressly for a
GIVEN PROJECT. They reflect the peculiarities and special needs of a specific job. These
Conditions use the same Article Numbers as the General Conditions and They Overrule the
General Conditions. Items contained in Supplementary conditions are of two types:
1.
Modifications to the basic Articles of the General Conditions in the form of additions,
deletions, or substitutions.
2.
Additional Articles of a contractual-legal nature which may be desirable or necessary for

a particular project.
Typical provisions such as the duration of the project, commencement of work, owner-procured
materials, format required for project progress reporting, amount of liquidated damages, special
instructions requesting material substitutions, changes in insurance, etc.
Prepared by the Owner's Representative
The Contractors Responsibility is to READ THOROUGHLY!
The Application and Certificate for Payment is attached as a supplement to the Conditions of the
Contract. The continuation Sheets are called the Schedule of Values.
The Contractors Responsibility is to complete within 10 days of acceptance. If
not submitted prior to first payment request, the Contractor can have payment
withheld.
255

Conditions of the Contract vs. Division 1 - General Requirements
CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
DIVISION ONE
Are inherent part of the Agreement
An inherent part of the Specifications
W ith the Agreement govern the content of the entire

contract
Administratively governs the specification

sections
Contain contractual principles applicable to most projects

with supplements for a particular project
contain specifics directly applicable to a particular

project
GENERAL CONDITIONS
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SECTIONS OF DIVISION ONE
Are broad contractual conditions
Modify the contractual conditions
Contain specific administrative and procedural

requirements
Contain the constants
Modify the constants for a specific region or

project
Relatively static content thus allowing the use of

published standard documents
Contain variables directly applicable for specific

project
Take precedence over general conditions

Must be written separately for each project
Must be written separately for each project
Adapted
from the Construction Specification Institutes Manual of Practice (1992).
256

General Requirements - Division 01
Division 01 titled the General Requirements contains specific administrative and procedural
requirements that apply to all of the Technical Specification sections. The General Requirements
contain specifics directly applicable to a particular project and they are written separately for
each project. These expand the broad administrative and procedural requirements stated in the
General and Supplementary Conditions documents, but they apply to the work of ALL Technical
Specification sections. This document also Summarizes the Scope of Work, use of the site,
Owner Occupancy of building during construction, Phased construction activities, multiple
prime contract requirements and exclusions and inclusions as they relate to the Plans. The
General Requirements describe the Contractor's administrative, procedural and other activities
that the Contractor must provide. The General Requirements contain the following categories.
Administrative
01010 Summary
01020 Allowances
01030 Alternates
01040 Coordination
01060 Regulatory Requirements
01080 Identification Systems
01090 References
Procedural
01025 Measurement and Payment
01035 Modification Procedures
01050 Field Engineering
01100 Special Project Procedures
01200 Project Meetings
01300 Submittals such as Construction Schedule, Logs
01400 Quality Control
01600 Material and Equipment
01650 Facility Startup/Commissioning
01700 Contract Closeout
01800 Maintenance
Temporary Activities
01500 Temporary Facilities
The Contractors Responsibility is to include these items in Overhead.
257

Technical Specifications
Divisions 02 - 16 called the Technical Specifications contain the written description of the
specific requirements relating to a specific product or system. The specification provisions define
and establish the quality level procedures, standards of work and material standards. Each
subsection defines the scope, technical requirements, performance requirements, material
suppliers, and quality requirements. The Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) has
developed the following standard MasterFormat numbering system consisting of the following
Technical Specification Divisions.
CSI Technical Specification Division Numbers
Division 2 - Site Work
Division 3 - Concrete
Division 4 - Masonry
Division 5 - Metals
Division 6 - Wood and Plastics
Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection
Division 8 - Doors and Windows
Division 9 - Finishes
Division 10 - Specialties
Division 11 - Equipment
Division 12 - Furnishings
Division 13 - Special Constriction
Division 14 - Conveying Systems
Division 15 - Mechanical
Division 16 - Electrical
The Construction Specification Institute (CSI) breaks down each Division into Section Numbers
using three digits and a Standard Format. The following displays a portion of the section
numbers for Division 02.
DIVISION 02 - SITE WORK
SECTION 02200
SECTION 02210
SECTION 02220
Earthwork
Grading
Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting
SECTION 02300
Tunneling
258

The CSI Technical Specification Part Numbers are contained in each Specification Section
within a Division. Each Specification Section contains three PARTS in the following order.
SECTION 02210 GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01
SECTIONS INCLUDES
A.
Subsoil and Topsoil materials
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS
A.
Section 02050 - Demolition
B.
Section 02100 - Site Preparation
C.
Section 02140 - Dewatering
1.03
REFERENCES
A.
ANSI/ASTM C136 - Method for Sieve Analysis of Aggregates.
B.
ASTM D2487 - Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes.
1.04
SUBMITTALS
A.
Submit Cofferdam Design Drawings with engineers seal.
B.
Submit 10 pound sample of each type of soil in an air-tight container to test lab.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.
Store and protect materials under
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
MATERIALS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 INSTALLATION
END OF SECTION
The Contractors Responsibility is to determine whether there appears to be any
extraordinary or nonstandard aspects that will have an impact on cost, and should be
studied carefully. Provide a copy to subcontractors and suppliers if requesting price
quotations.
259

Plans or Drawings
Plans and Drawings are graphically portrays the physical aspects of the structure, showing the
arrangement, dimensions, construction details, materials, and other information necessary for
estimating and building the project. A job covered by drawings that are complete, intelligible,
accurate, detailed, and well correlated can be priced much more realistically and claims for extra
payment during construction are minimized, and the owner is likely to get a much better finished
product at a lesser cost.
The Contractors Responsibility is to examine & Study, Provide copy to
subcontractors and suppliers if requesting price quotations.
Document Contradictions
When Contradictions exist between the Plans and the Technical Specifications the more specific
or stringent item governs over the general item. The general principle of law described above is
that the specific takes precedence over the general. Now, in the instance of Plan Notes they take
precedence over the Technical Specification provisions because they are more specific than the
Technical Specification because the specification provisions are frequently standardized.
According to Bruce Jervis and Paul Levin in their book Construction Law Principles and
Practices (1989) they state that Drawings and Plan Notes must be customized for each individual
project. Therefore, in the event of a conflict between the Technical Specification and the Plans, it
is logical to assume that the Plan or Plan notes more accurately reflect the intent of the A/E. It is
for this reason that the old saying of specification rule over the plans is misleading and probably
incorrect in most instances (p 87).
The Contractors Responsibility according to the AIA General Conditions A201
(1987) Article 3.2, Review of Contract Documents is that if any errors, omissions,
inconsistencies or contradictions are discovered by the Contractor or
Subcontractor when comparing the documents, the Contractor shall inform the
A/E in writing, normally using a Letter of Transmittal (p 8).
260

Bid Document Exercise
1.
Which document is submitted to the Owner for bid consideration before the Contractor
can receive the bidding documents?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
Which document describes the duties and responsibilities of each party and the business
procedures for administering the contract?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Order of Precedence.
Standardized General Conditions.
Shop Drawings and Reference Standards.
Which of the following documents is normally incorporated by reference?

A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
General Conditions.
What is the name of the law principle for referring the Contractor to other documents that
are not contained in the package provided?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Proposal Supplements.
Noncollusive Affidavit.
Pre-qualification Forms.
General Conditions.
Which document establishes the forms, content and procedures for submitting the bid
proposals?
A.
B.
C.
D.
General Conditions.
261

6.
Which document makes changes, modifications and corrections prior to bid opening?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
Which document issued by the Architect illustrates what is to be built?

A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
Proposal Supplements
Owner/Contractor Agreement.
Which document describes quality of work and the quality of the materials and the
construction execution procedures?
A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
Plans.
Shop Drawings.
Product Data Sheets.
Schematics Drawings.
Which document is submitted by each bidder stating that their bid was arrived at without
any conferring with other prime bidders?
A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
Addenda.
Change Directive.
Agreement.
Which document applies to the Contractor and the Subcontractors and describes the
administrative, procedural and temporary procedures on the job site?
A.
B.
C.
D.
General Conditions.
262

11.
Which document describes the business procedures for a specific project and they change
the initial procedures?
A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
Which document requests that additional information be submitted by the bidder within
48 hours of bid opening?
A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
Prevailing Wage Rate Schedule.
What types of projects establish prevailing wage rates?

A.
B.
C.
D.
15.
Pre-qualification Forms.
Which document establishes the labor rates on a project?

A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
General Conditions.
Union projects.
Merit Shop Projects.
Privately Funded Projects.
Federally Funded Projects.
Which document contains a description of the alternate(s)?

A.
B.
C.
D.
General Conditions.
263

16.
What is the term called which requires all Bidders to include in their bid a specified
amount or unit price for a particular item?
A.
B.
C.
D.
17.
Which document specifies the existing soil conditions?

A.
B.
C.
D.
18.
Information Available to Bidders.
Which document specifies the Regulations required such as soil erosion or minorities?
A.
B.
C.
D.
20.
Which document specifies the temporary facilities needed on a project?

A.
B.
C.
D.
19.
Plug.
Alternate.
Contingency.
Cash Allowance.
Which of the following documents are submitted by the Contractor at bid opening?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Proposal Form, Bid Breakdown, Addendum, Bid Bond & Noncollusive Affidavit.
Proposal Supplements, Performance Bond, Payment Bond & Insurance certificate.
Prequalification Forms, Alternates, Cash Allowances, Prevailing Wages, Deposit.
Agreement, Regulatory Requirements, Shop Drawings, Product Data & Samples.
Check Answers
264

Laws, Regulations, Codes and Specifications
The legal system in the United States has the following characteristics. First, it is a common law
system. Second, There are more than fifty independent jurisdictions that are operating
simultaneously. Third, in most cases the right to a jury trial exists but the right can be waived.
Finally, it is based upon the belief that justice and truth shall prevail.
There are two types of legal systems that govern in the United States. They are the Civil Law
systems and the Common Law systems. The civil law system is based primarily on codes and
statues where judges and courts in the civil law system interpret the law and apply it to a case.
However, the decision of the civil law judge is not law for subsequent cases. The common law
systems also contain codes and statutes. In addition common law contains case law. In a common
law system the decisions of appellate and supreme courts, excluding trial courts, are laws that
apply to subsequent cases containing the same facts and issues. Other names for this type of law
are case law, judicial decisions and common law.
The United States consists of fifty states or jurisdictions which operate independently of one
another. In addition, to these fifty independent states, the federal government was formed to
operate in certain areas such as national defense, interstate trade, international affairs and the
national park system. The federal jurisdiction is independent of the state jurisdictions. In
addition, there are other jurisdictions such as military jurisdictions and Native American
jurisdictions. All state and the federal governments are divided into four areas. They are the
legislative branch, the executive branch, the judicial branch and the administrative agencies. The
legislative branch of each jurisdiction enacts laws which are called statutes. Also, many times the
similar statutes are collected together into a code. For example, a state legislature might enact
criminal statues, or mechanics lien laws and they may collect all similar laws into the Criminal
Law Code. The executive branch of each jurisdiction carries out the laws passed by the
legislature and it controls the police power of that state. The governor is the head of the executive
branch of a state government. The president of the United States is the head of the executive
branch of the U.S.
Finally, because of the complexity of the government, both the states and the federal
government have established administrative agencies to carry out the laws passed by the
legislature. These administrative agencies, such as the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA), the Department of Transportation(DOT) and the Equal Employment
Opportunity Commission (EEOC), have been set up by the federal legislature to aid the executive
branch in carrying out the laws enacted. Most administrative agencies have boards that resolve
contractor disputes and the U.S. Government has established the Armed Services Board of
Contract Appeals (ASBCA), the General Services Board of Contract Appeals GSBCA, the Board
of Contract Appeals (BCA) and the Decisions of the Comptroller General, etc. to handle most
disputes. These boards are sometimes referred to as the Federal Board of Contract Appeals.
265

The law can be divided into four Types of Law. They are constitutional, statutory, administrative
regulation, and case law. Constitutional law is considered the law of the land and it is given
respect by the courts and by the people of the United States. Constitutions are designed to be
fairly difficult to change because it contains core principles. Constitutions outline the basic
format of government operations and they define the basic rights the government cannot infringe
upon, such as freedom of speech and freedom of the press. An example of constitutional law is
Equality under the law shall not be denied because of sex, race, color, creed, or national origin.
Another type of law are statutes which are passed by the legislature. These can be changed more
easily than constitutions. An example of a statute would be Workers Compensation rates are set
by each state, therefore, this is a state statue. Also, the Davis-Bacon act applies to prevailing
wages on federally funded projects. Therefore, this would be considered a federal statue. It
should be noted that many states have enacted prevailing wage rate schedules on state public
projects and this is sometimes referred to as the Little Davis Bacon Act.
Administrative regulations are passed by administrative agencies such as the Occupational Safety
and Health Administration (OSHA). For example, under 29 Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)
Section 5. (a) reads that each employer (1) shall furnish to each of their employees a place of
employment which is free from recognized hazards that are causing or are likely to cause death or
serious physical harm to his employees; . . This section is normally referred to as the General
Duty Clause.
Case law is made by appellate and supreme court judges. Case law is more specific and covers
only the specific fact situation and issue raised in a particular case. Two well known judicial
decisions utilized in the construction industry are the Spearin Doctrine and the Eichleay Formula.
The Spearin Doctrine as interpreted by the courts has held that the owner gives the contractor an
implied warranty that the plans and specifications are adequate to perform the project. The
Eichleay was developed in the case of Eichleay Corp. versus Armed Services Board of Contract
Appeals (ASBCA) 5183, 60-2 BCA 2688 (1960).
There are numerous State Statues and Regulations that are designed to regulate the construction
industry. For example, many states have licensing laws, lien laws, building codes, school codes
and soil erosion requirements that the contractor must be in compliance. Licensing laws establish
the qualifications a person must possess to practice in the state as either an Architect or an
Engineer. Licensing also establishes the qualifications for certain people to perform work as a
Mechanical, Electrical or Plumbing Contractor. Mechanics Lien Laws are another set of state
statutes designed to apply specifically to the construction industry. The purpose of lien law is to
allow someone who provides labor and/or materials for a construction project to obtain a lien
attached to the real property for the value of the goods and services incorporated into the project.
The lien is normally filed at the Register of Deeds office. But Mechanics lien laws vary
significantly from state to state.
266

Most states have enacted their own unique Building Codes, either by statues or regulations. A
new International Building Code (IBC) has been developed by the International Code Council in
an effort to standardize state and local codes.
Local Ordinances are laws set by municipalities. For example, there are zoning or building
ordinances which specify the type of structure or the minimum size of the structure which can be
placed on the piece of property. You can also have height restrictions so that a new structure
cannot block the view of an existing structure. Most likely various permits are required on all
types of construction such as new homes, commercial buildings, additions to buildings, garages,
decks. Some of the permits are the building permit, a zoning permit, a health permit for the septic
system, an electrical permit, a plumbing permit, a heating permit, a highway permit and a soil
erosion permit. These permits are normally obtained at the local municipality but in some
instances they are obtained at the state level.
There are also laws attached to the piece of property which are referred to as Protective
Covenants or Protective Restrictions. These covenants are established so that the new owner
must meet these restrictions to build in the area. These are sometimes referred to as Protective
Restrictions. Many times a developer may what to establish the covenants, conditions,
reservations and restrictions for the benefit of each owner of land in the development. These
covenants are attached to each parcel within the development and they are filed with the Register
of Deeds office in each County within a state. The Protective Covenants are given a Liber
number and a page number.
The Uniform Commercial Code (UCC) involves the Sales and Purchase of Goods. This
relationship is governed by the form of the UCC adopted by a particular jurisdiction. The UCC is
a set of laws developed to make the law for the sale of goods consistent among various
jurisdictions within the United States.
Law can be divided into two broad categories. They are Criminal Law and Civil Law. The
purpose of criminal law is to prevent and punish certain acts against the public welfare that
society has deemed unacceptable. Federal and State occupational Safety and Health laws have
always contained criminal enforcement provisions but prosecutors and OSHA have just begun to
use these provisions more frequently. According to some reports, criminal charges are becoming
more common and in most cases prosecutors are establishing criminal liability under general
state criminal laws instead of under the state OSHA laws. Prosecutors in California, Illinois,
Michigan, Ohio, Texas and Wisconsin have used general state criminal laws in connection with
workplace accidents.
267

Civil Law Categories can be further divided into two broad categories. They are contracts and
torts. Contract law upholds the duties that the parties have voluntarily agreed to in a contract or
agreement. Tort law upholds the duties imposed by law between parties and it is not dependent
on any contract between parties.
The Term Tort refers to wrongful acts done by one person to another, but only those for which
the victim may demand legal redress. Torts may be committed intentionally or unintentionally
and with or without force. A tort is distinguished from a crime in that a tort is a private injury
upon which a suit may be brought, while a crime is an offense against the public for which
retribution must be sought by the appropriate governmental authority. It is entirely possible for a
single act to constitute at once a tort and a crime. The concept of due diligence was developed
out of common law tort cases.
Due Diligence is define under criminal tort law as a person has a duty of care to the injured party.
Most courts rely on the common traditions of tort cases to define torts (whether intentional or
unintentional). The courts have defined torts as wrongful acts, breaches of duty of care to the
injured, or willful or reckless indifference for the consequences of their actions. This duty of care
to the injured party is applied to the managers and supervisors behavior to see if it conforms to a
standard of reasonableness or due diligence in light of the known and recognized hazards to the
injured. There are a number of elements that go into this due diligence measurement. First,
there are the normal intellectual capacity and memory abilities. Second, are the minimum
knowledge, skill and experience that are deemed common to everyone. Third, there is the
superior knowledge, skill and experience the supervisor must possess. Finally, the physical traits
and disabilities of the supervisor are assessed. In determining the proper standard of conduct or
due diligence in a given situation, it is common to have testimony introduced concerning the
general trade customs and the supervisors adherence to, or departure from, these practices.
Therefore, a supervisor having responsibility over the safety of the employees must have
employed due diligence to prevent its occurrence. Therefore, the supervisor must prove that they
have employed due diligence in the area of safety, hence they must be able to prove the
following. First, they have taken an active role in safety. Second, they promptly abated all known
and recognized hazards. Third, they abated hazards that have caused harm previously to workers.
Fourth, they corrected all violations immediately. Fifth, they obtained and maintain competent
person designations. Sixth, they documented all decisions that they made about safety.
268

The Technical Specifications describe the type and quality of materials and equipment to be
incorporated in the project. They detail the methods of fabrication, installation and erection along
with these are code compliance requirements, the gauges of the materials and the recommended
manufacturers.
Types of Specifications
There are numerous types of specifications and the responsibility and liability if the Architect,
Contractor, and Subcontractor for the design of specific systems are defined in the contract
documents. Some of the most common types of specifications and their associated liabilities are
described below.
A descriptive specification also known as a design specification instructs the contractor on what
to do and they explicitly state how the work is to be performed. Detailed design specifications
contain an implied warranty that if they are followed, an acceptable result will be produced. The
engineer is liable to the contractor for defective construction caused by a faulty design
specification. The example below describes a descriptive or design specification.
03300 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 3
3.04
EXECUTION
Construction and Control Joints

G.
Provide a sealant at all construction joints and other joints in all walls
above grade and where shown on the plans.
A performance specification tells the contractor the final performance of the system or the
expected results of the work is to be but it leaves the methods up to the contractor. Performance
may be expressed in numerous ways, depending upon the item. For example, the performance
may be expressed in terms of operational capacity, functional qualities, appearance, finish, color,
texture, structural tolerances, smoothness or cleanliness. The contractor is liable for defective
construction. The example below describes a performance specification.
03100 CONCRETE FORMWORK
3.01
Concrete Formwork Installation

G.
Throughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove

chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and all other debris just prior to concrete
placement. Retighten forms and bracing prior to concrete placement as
required to prevent leakage of cement paste during concrete placement.
269

A proprietary specification states the exact manufacturer, make and model of the product or
method to be used. Sometimes they may allow for an or-equal or approved substitution. The
proprietary specification is a design specification, therefore, the Engineer is liable to the
contractor for defective construction caused by a faulty design specification. However, if the
contractor substitutes an or-equal or obtains an approved substitution, then the specification
becomes a performance specification and the contractor is liable for its performance. Also, it
should be noted that even though the designer has approved the or-equal, the contractor still has
liability. The example below describes a proprietary specification.
13320 PROCESS CONTROL EQUIPMENT
PART 2
2.02
PRODUCTS
AIR AND EFFLUENT DISCHARGE FLOWMETERS

A.
Meter shall be Hersey measurement Ramapo Mark V Target Meter.
A combination specification contains both a design specification and a performance

specification. Determining liability for a defect related to a combination specification requires
mediators, arbitrators, the judge and possibly a jury to determine whether the defect is related to a
design or performance flaw. The example below describes a combination specification.
07900 JOINT SEALERS
PART 3
3.03
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION
C.
Silicone rubber coating shall be applied in three separate and distinct

coats.
Note: The word applied in 07900 3.03 C. above specifies a performance specification
and the three separate words specify a design specification.
D.
Materials shall be applied to horizontal surfaces in three coats of

contrasting colors to ensure complete coverage.
Note: The word three coats in 07900 3.03 D above specifies the design specification and
the words complete coverage specify the performance specification.
270

Laws, Regulations, Codes and Specifications Exercise
1.
What are laws passed by a local government called?

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
What are laws passed by the legislature called?

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Statutes.
Covenants.
Ordinances.
Judicial Decisions.
Which type of law uses the Spearin Doctrine or the Eichleay Formula?
A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
Statutes.
Covenants.
Ordinances.
Judicial Decisions.
Which type of law passes workers compensation rates or mechanics lien laws?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Statutes.
Covenants.
Ordinances.
Judicial Decisions.
Statutes.
Covenants.
Ordinances.
Judicial Decisions.
Which type of law establishes restrictions or protective restrictions to a piece of property?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Statutes.
Covenants.
Ordinances.
Judicial Decisions.
271

6.
Which type of law is the most difficult to change?

A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
How are most U.S. government contract disputes initially handled?

A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
Tort Law.
Civil Law.
Transportation Code.
Uniform Commercial Code.
Which type of law governs agencies set up to carry out specific laws passed by the
legislature?
A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
U.S. Supreme Court.

Federal District Court.
Federal Circuit Court of Appeals.
Armed Services Board of Contract Appeals.
Which type of law governs the sales and purchase of goods?

A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
Civil Law.
Statute Law.
Constitutional Law.
Administrative Law.
Civil Law.
Statute Law.
Constitutional Law.
Administrative Law.
The Preamble to the OSHA Construction Safety Standards states that the company
representative must provide a place of employment free from known and recognized
hazards. What is the name of this clause?
A.
B.
C.
D.
OSHA Act
Indemnification.
Contractual Liability.
General Duty Clause.
272

11.
According to the Construction Safety Standards, what is the name of the wrongful act if a
person who is informed of a wrongful act and they indicate that they understand the safety
rules, but they proceed wrongfully anyway?
A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
Which type of law case requires you to prove due diligence?

A,
B.
C.
D.
13.
Report Violations.
Tell employees to be careful.
Correct hazards immediately.
Scream and threaten the workers.
Which party has all of the liability for a performance specification?

A.
B.
C.
D.
15.
Civil case.
Criminal case.
Statutory case.
OSHA Administrative case.
In a court case that requires the person to prove due Diligence. Which of the following
would be an example of due diligence?
A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
Disclaimer.
Due Diligence.
Wilful Violation.
Owner.
Contractor.
Architect/Engineer.
Separate Contractor.
Which party has all of the liability for a descriptive specification?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Owner.
Contractor.
Architect/Engineer.
273

16.
Which party has liability for a proprietary specification if it does not perform as stated?
A.
B.
C.
D.
17.
Which party has liability for a proprietary specification if an approved substitution does
not perform?
A.
B.
C.
D.
18.
Owner.
Contractor.
Architect/Engineer.
Owner.
Contractor.
Architect/Engineer.
A specification read as follows:

11305 STEP/STED SYSTEM EQUIPMENT
PART 2
2.05
PRODUCTS
STEP SYSTEM COMPONENTS

A.
Screened Pump Vaults:

1.
For Low Profile Concrete Tank:
a)
15 inches in diameter by 48 inches long with 4 inch flow
inducer. Model SV1548Fi, as manufactured by Orenco.
What type of specification is this called?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Proprietary Specification.
Performance Specification.
Combination Specification.
Descriptive or Design Specification.
274

19.
A specification reads as follows:

03200 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 2
2.02
PRODUCTS
Reinforcing Steel
C.
Provide deformed reinforcement prefabricated straight bars and bent bars

according to the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice of not less than 10 feet
with concrete coverage of at least 3 inches on exterior exposures and 2
inches elsewhere. Place bars at the on-center spacings shown on the plans.

A.
B.
C.
D.
20.

02140 DEWATERING
PART 3
3.01
EXECUTION
Dewatering
1.
Furnish, install, operate, and maintain all necessary pumping equipment

for dewatering the various parts of the work and for maintaining free of
water the foundations and trenches as required for construction operations.

A.
B.
C.
D.
275

21.

10105 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS
PART 2
2.02
PRODUCTS
Marker Board Material

A.
White LCS Writing surface or equal with 24-gauge porcelain enameled
steel face on 3/8-inch foil-backed particle board.

A.
B.
C.
D.
22.

07530 ELASTOMERIC ROOFING - BOARD INSULATION
PART 3
3.03
EXECUTION
INSTALLATION - INSULATION
D.
Pitch new roof surfaces to provide continuous drainage to roof drain
locations. Set drains at 2 inches above deck level of the new roof.
Gradually taper insulation at roof drains approximately 16 inch radius
from roof drains using factory-tapered edge strips down to minimum 1
inch thick at drain rings.

A.
B.
C.
D.
Check Answers
276

Types of Insurances
The Insurances are listed in the General Conditions and the dollar values are stated in the
Supplementary Conditions. Normally, these are calculated as a percentage of direct costs. Below is
a brief description of the types of insurance.
The All Risk Builders Risk Insurance protects against all risks of direct loss or damage to the
project. This covers permanent materials installed or stored at the site that are damaged due to
weather.
The Contractors Property Insurance covers the contractor's temporary facilities such as field
offices, storage sheds, concretes forms.
The Floaters Insurance covers the contractor's construction equipment regardless of location. This
is a percentage of Construction Equipment Values on a project.
The Contingent Liability Insurance protects the owner from damages arising out of the operations
of the General Contractor or its subcontractors.
The Public Liability and Property Damage Insurance protects the contractor from its legal liability
for injuries to persons not in its employment and for damage to the property of others. This covers
people passing by the job site.
The Automobile or Fleet Insurance protects the contractor against third-party claims of bodily
injury or property damage involving the contractor's vehicles or rented vehicles.
The Project Management Protective Liability is defined in the AIA General Conditions as
substitute liability for construction operations performed on behalf of the Contractor.
Sometimes the contractor must have specific coverages listed such as weather or else the
damages are not covered. For instance, the Weather is a specific case in which you have coverage
only for the items listed and the contractors representative acted with due diligence. Some
examples of weather items listed are fire, hurricane, tornado, flood or soil erosion.
In the example of Flood Insurance being listed, then the contractor has damage to the structure in
the event of an storm such as up to a 200-year storm. However, If the structure lifts off of its
foundation and flows down the river you must have Soil Erosion insurance to have coverage.
277

The Fire Insurance is in effect only if the Superintendent has performed their duties using due
diligence. For example, if the supervisor allows someone to store flammable materials near an
area where the cutting torches are being utilized, then there would be no coverage. This is
considered a form of negligence. Therefore, the insurance company can sue the contractor and
recover damages from the Contractor.
Another insurance consideration is the Scope of the Contract, the Work Area or the Contract
limits. The courts have defined work as within the scope of the construction contract. For
example, if the superintendent stored the materials in the existing portion of the building that
does not contain any work. Then the contractor has the liability and the insurance company can
recover all damages because you were storing materials outside the contract limits.
Unemployment Insurance is the second type of insurance coverage that most contractors find
mandatory by law. The unemployment insurance program has its basis in both federal and state
laws. In operation, the program is administered at the state level although backup funds for the
state programs are maintained by the U.S. Treasury in accounts reserved for the individual states.
The employer makes the only premium payments for unemployment compensation except in
Alabama, Alaska, and New Jersey where the employees are subject to a portion of the tax. There
are two components to the premium. The first component is for payment of federal costs in
connection with the program and for maintenance of a federal level loan fund used to back up the
state funds in time of high regional unemployment. The second component of the premium goes
into the state's account from which all benefits are withdrawn. This percentage is variable but
will average between 3% and 9% of payroll wages. The percentage multiplier is an average
considering all employers in the state. For a given employer, it can vary since employers are
experience rated. In the long-run, employers contributions must equal payments to former
employees who have filed for and received unemployment benefits following release from the
firm for lack of work. Thus, those with low layoff records pay less than those with high records.
Rates also vary by states because benefits vary by states. A state can increase both the average
rate and the ceiling if necessary to maintain adequate fund reserves. Rates are announced
annually. Therefore, the estimator must be certain that the latest information for all states is
available. It is difficult to project future contributions because they are dependent upon employer
layoff experience. An estimator may logically assume that unemployment benefits will tend to
increase with the overall cost of living and project future costs on the basis of present costs
increased by expected inflation.
The nature of unemployment insurance contributions leads to a note of caution. It sometimes
happens that an employer intending to fire an employee for cause will instead simply agree to
release the employee as if work were no longer available so that the former employee will not
lose unemployment benefits. The employer must realize that the firm will eventually pay for
those benefits and thus add another overhead cost to the operation.
278

The Worker's Compensation Insurance is designed to provide protection to employees who are
killed, injured, or suffer health problems due to job-related accidents or conditions. Each state
has its own law covering workers compensation (WC) insurance. Unfortunately, these laws,
although similar in principle, are quite different in detail so that costs associated with this
insurance program must be related to specific states. A feature of workers compensation laws is
that an employer, in carrying this insurance, is assuming liability without a fault. In return, an
employee injured on the job cannot bring further suit against the employer for damages, although
they can sue a fellow employee, another contractor on site, individual supervisors or business
other than the employer that may have been involved.
Depending on the state, an employer may obtain Workers Compensation insurance from a
commercial insurance company, or a state operated insurance fund, or the company may qualify
for a self-insurance. Whatever the source of coverage, benefits included must be those
established by state law. The rates paid by each contractor are a function of the state where the
project is located. The craft being insured, the source of insurance coverage, the accident
experience of the contractor and the loss tables are revised annually.
The Experience Modification Rating (EMR) is a multiplier that is calculated using the past
workers compensation insurance experience or claims of the individual policy holder. The
Experience Modification Rate (EMR) is applied to the workers compensation manual premium
to reflect an employer's variation from the average of others with the same classification code or
codes. The EMR is the ratio of actual losses to expected losses over a moving three-year period.
The adjustment process will result in a multiplier to be applied to the base rates of the insurer.
This multiplier will be greater than 1.0 for those firms with poor accident records and will be less
than 1.0 for the firms with good records.
The cost implications of poor safety records cannot be overemphasized. For example, the
worker's compensation base rate for structural steel workers in numerous states exceeds $30 per
$100 of the payroll. A contractor in a state with a $30 base rate who has a good safety record
may earn a multiplier of only 0.5 and pay only $15 per $100 of the payroll while a contractor
with a poor record and a possible multiplier of 2.0 will pay $60 per $100 of the payroll. For
example, if a contractor has an annual carpenter payroll of $100,000 and the insurance rate for
carpenters are $24.50/$100, the annual insurance premium is $24,500 for that particular craft. A
payroll includes base wages plus Overtime pay reduced to straight time pay for hours worked. A
contractor operating in more than one state will be subject to more than one rate structure so
estimators must insure that rates are for the proper state.
279

Another type of insurance is the Medical Insurance. It is quite common for employers to make
group medical insurance plans available to their employees. An employer may pay the full cost
of medical insurance for the employees or just a portion. Whatever the amount contributed by
the employer, it is an added cost that must be accounted for. Since the contribution may vary
from the employee to employee, an estimator would normally use an average contribution per
employee in estimates since estimates do not identify individual workers. This is calculated as a
percentage of the payroll.
Social Security is a federal program designed to bring eventual retirement, medical, survivor, and
other benefits to employees or their beneficiaries. The program is funded jointly by employees
and employers with each contributing an equal amount each pay period. Social security coverage
is mandatory for employees of most businesses, including construction. Social security premium
rates are established by law and are subject to annual adjustment. The rates are a combination of
a percentage multiplier and an income ceiling.
The percentage multiplier is applied to all income up to the ceiling, with no premium on amounts
over the ceiling. Assume that the current rate is 7.75% and the employee makes 35,000 per year
and the ceiling is 55,000 per year. The annual social security premium would be 7.75%
($35,000) = $2,712.50. This amount would be paid by both the employer and the employee so
that the total premium received by the federal government is $5425.00 for that employee. All
payments made are credited to the employee's individual social security records in Washington.
The estimator is concerned only with that part of the social security cost borne by the employer
since that paid by the employee is deducted from base salary or wages.
Indemnification sometimes referred to as an indemnity or a hold harmless clause. It is common
for the parties involved in a particular project to agree that one party, normally the contractor,
will assume the legal liability of another for certain events or risks. The AIA and EJCDC General
Conditions both contain an indemnification clause. These clauses can also be included in the
subcontract agreement. There are three types of indemnification or hold harmless clauses that
exist. They are limited form, intermediate form and broad form clauses. The limited form
indemnity clause states that one party will pay only for damages it causes. The limited form
indemnity clause is the easiest to acquire insurance coverage and it is standard in most
comprehensive liability policies. The intermediate form indemnity clause states that one party
will pay for all damages even if it is only partially responsible for the damage. This clause shifts
the legal liability off one party and onto another if both are partially liable. The broad form
indemnity clause states that one party will pay for all damages even if that one party has not
caused any of the damages. Broad form indemnity clauses are unlawful in many jurisdictions. It
should be noted that insurance does not automatically protect a party who accepts liability or risk
under an intermediate or broad form indemnity clause. For a party to acquire insurance for
intermediate or broad form indemnity, you must purchase an insurance rider which is not
normally available or it is extremely expensive insurance. The courts disfavor these clauses.
280

Types of Bonds
There are three bonds that are described in the Instructions to Bidders and these are sometimes
referred to as contract bonds. A bond provides a guarantee to the owner at a specific time and if
the guarantee is not fulfilled by the contractor, then the bond will be invoked by the owner. Each
bond is described below.
A Bid Bond guarantees to the owner that the contractor will enter into a contract with the owner
after bid opening. The bid bond is also referred to as a proposal bond and it is submitted with the
contractors bid proposal. This is a guarantee that the successful contractor will enter into a
contract with the owner for the amount of their bid. The Contractor will provide the contract
bonds as required in the Instruction to Bidders. The Bid Bond percentage is stated in the
Instructions to bidders and it is normally 5 percent of the bid proposal amount. This is called the
face value of the bid bond. Assume that the contract submits a bid proposal for a project bid at
$4,900,000. The contractor is the successful low bidder but they decide not to execute the
contract, then the owner will invoke the bond and the surety will pay to the owner the face value
of the bid bond of $245,000 which is 5% of $4,900,000. Then the Surety will sue the contractor
for $245,000 plus surety administrative and attorney fees.
The Performance Bond guarantees to the owner that the contract will be performed and that the
owner will receive his structure in compliance with the project specifications and with the terms
of the contract. The performance bond is submitted to the owner at the signing of the
Owner/Contractor Agreement and the bid bond is returned to the contractor. If the contractor
fails to fulfill their contractual obligations, the surety must complete the contract and pay all costs
up to the face amount of the bond. The performance bond percentage is normally found in the
supplementary conditions and the face value of the performance bond is normally 100 percent of
the contract amount. Assume that the successful contractors bid was for $4,900,000 then the
face value of the performance bond would be $4,900,000. If the bond was invoked, the costs over
and above the face value of the bond will be paid by the contractor and the contractor is
responsible to the surety for the face value of the bond plus all costs to complete including the
sureties administrative and attorney fees.
The Labor and Material Bond guarantees to the owner that all third party liens against the
property are paid. The labor and material bond is also known as a payment bond and it is
submitted to the owner at the signing of the Owner/Contractor Agreement and the bid bond is
returned to the contractor. If the contractor fails to pay the vendors and subcontractors, the surety
must complete the contract and pay all costs up to the face amount of the bond. The payment
bond percentage is normally found in the supplementary conditions and the face value of the
payment bond is normally 50 to100 percent of the contract amount. Assume that the successful
contractors bid was for $4,900,000 then the face value of the labor and material bond at 50%
would be $2,450,000.
281

A bond is a three-party instrument that protects one party from default on the part of a second
party. In the event a default occurs, a third party is legally bound to offset any damages resulting
from the default. In bonding terminology, the party in a position to be damaged by a default is
called the OBLIGEE (Owner). The party who is in a position to default is the PRINCIPLE
(Contractor). The third party off-setting the damages immediately is the SURETY (Bonding
Company), but immediately after the Surety off sets the damages on behalf of the Contractor the
Surety will take legal action against the Contractor to recover all damages plus any lawyer fees
from the Contractor.
The Bond Premium is the amount the contractor is charged after award of the contract for
submitting to the owner the face values of the three bonds. The bond premium is calculated using
a graduated scale provided by the bonding (Surety) company or in an estimating guide such as
Means Cost Data book. The example below uses the bond premium table below.
FIRST
$500,000
$6.00 PER M
NEXT
$2,000,000
$3,000 plus
$5.00 PER M
NEXT
$2,500,000
$13,000 plus
$4.10 PER M
NEXT
$2,500,000
$23,250 plus
$3.00 PER M
Assume the contractors bid proposal was for $4,900,000. Then the price of the bond premium is:
$4,900,000
Then
Plus $4,900,000 - $2,500,000 =
Proposal over $500,000
Yes
Proposal over $2,500,000
Yes
Proposal over $5,00,000
No
$2,500,000 =
$13,000
$2,400,000 x $4.10/$1000 =
$9,840
Total Bond Premium =
$22,840
282

Insurance and Bonds Exercise
1.
Which type of insurance protects the Contractors Off-road Construction Equipment?

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
Which document contains the coverage amounts for the insurances for the project?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Floaters.
Public Liability.
Product Liability.
Workers Compensation.
Which type of insurance covers workers being laid off from their job?
A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
General Conditions.
Which type of insurance covers injuries to persons not employed at the site but get
injured passing by the site?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Floaters Insurance.
Auto or Fleet Insurance.
Builders Risk Insurance.
Contractors Property Insurance.
Builders Risk.
Unemployment.
Public Liability.
Which type of insurance covers injuries to workers employed at the job site?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Floaters.
Public Liability.
283

6.
Which type of insurance is needed because the high winds blow down the 40 feet high
concrete wall forms?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
Which type of insurance is needed because the high winds mangle the rebar inside the
forms due to the high winds?
A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
Flood.
Floaters.
Soil Erosion.
Builders Risk.
Which type of insurance covers all parties and all risks under one unified insurance
program and purchased by the Owner?
A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
Floaters.
Builders Risk.
Product Liability.
Contractors Property.
Which type of insurance is needed because a 150-year rated rain storm has removed the
structure from its foundation and it flows down the river?
A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
Floaters.
Builders Risk.
Product Liability.
Contractors Property.
Builders Risk.
Wrap up policy.
Umbrella Excessive Liability.
Automobile General Liability.
Which type of insurance that covers the Contractor assuming the liability of another party
through a hold harmless clause?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Wrap-up Policy.
Indemnification.
Umbrella Excess Liability.
284

11.
You have a Contract for a Dredging Project on Lake Michigan. Which of the following is
required as an Insurance Rider?
1.
2.
3.
4.
12.
Which of the following Insurance Coverage items are purchased as a Rider?

A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
Builders Risk, Operations, Indemnify Limited, Contractual Liability

Broad Indemnify, Flood, Soil Erosion, Rail and Marine Workers Compensation.
Limited Indemnify, Umbrella Excessive and Wrap-up Insurance.
Comprehensive General Liability, Comprehensive Auto, and Workers Compensation
Assume that you are working on a three-story addition to an existing 3-story structure. You
allow your subcontractor to store their material on the 3rd floor of the existing structure
which does not contain any work. According to the legal system, WORK is defined by the
Contract Documents and the Builders Risk Policy and it has a very specific trade meaning
in Construction. Which of the following clearly Defines the word works according to the
courts?
A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
Builders Risk.
Soil Erosion.
Marine Workers Compensation.
Storage of material in the existing structure.

Storage of materials in an offsite location.
Work within the contract limits of the new structure.
Work within the contract limits of the new and existing structures.
Assume that you are working on a three-story addition to an existing 3-story structure. You
allow your subcontractor to store their material on the 3rd floor of the existing structure
which does not contain any work. A fire burns down the 3rd floor of the existing structure.
Does the Contractor have insurance coverage?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Yes. The Contractor is covered under their Property Insurance policy.

Yes. The Contractor is covered under their Builders Risk Insurance policy.
No. The Contractor is not covered and Insurance can recover under negligence.
Yes. The Contractor is covered under their Contractors Property Insurance policy.
285

15.
What does the abbreviation EMR stand for?

A.
B.
C.
D.
16.
What is the purpose of an EMR?

A.
B.
C.
D.
17.
State.
Federal.
Contractor.
Insurance Company.
Which period of time does the Bid Bond cover?

A.
B.
C.
D.
19.
Reduce Workers Compensations Rates.

Cover Medical Costs and Lost Wages due to an injury.
Adjust Workers Compensation Manual Rate to reflect a company.
Compare Actual Occurrences of Accidents to Predicted Occurrences.
Which entity sets the workers compensation manual rates?

A.
B.
C.
D.
18.
Employer Manual Rate.

Estimated Manual Rate.
Emergency Medical Rate.
Experience Modification Rating.
bid submittal plus thirty days.

bid advertising until bid submittal.
bid submittal until the signing of the agreement
signing the agreement through completion of construction
Which document specifies the Bid Bond Percentage?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Instruction to Bidders
Advertisement to Bidders
286

20.
The Contractor submits a bid for $1,303,071 with the appropriate forms. They receive a
Notice of Award letter indicating that their bid has been selected. The Contractor decides not
to accept the contract. Will the Contractor lose anything?
A.
B.
C.
D.
21.
Which document guarantees to the Owner that the successful Contractor will sign a contract?
A.
B.
C.
D.
22.
Bid Bond.
Performance Bond.
Labor/Material Bond.
Insurance Certificates.
Which document specifies the time frame for submitting the contract bonds & insurance?
A.
B.
C.
D.
24.
Bid Bond.
Performance Bond.
Labor/Material Bond.
Insurance Certificates.
Which document guarantees to the Owner that all third parties will be paid or else the Bond
will be invoked?
A.
B.
C.
D.
23.
Yes, they will lose the amount of their Bond Premium.

Yes, they will lose the amount of their Bid Bond Face Value.
No, they will lose nothing, they will withdraw without ramifications.
Yes, they will lose the amount of their Performance Bond Face Value.
General Conditions.
Which documents must be submitted to the Owner from the Contractor at the signing of the
Owner-Contractor Agreement?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Bid Bond, Shop Drawings and Product Data Sheets.

Bid Bond, Proposal Form and the Bid Breakdown Form.
Performance Bond, Payment Bond and Insurance Certificates.
.Estimate Summary Sheet, Project Overhead Sheet and the Unbalanced Bid Form.
287
25.

Which party backs the face value of the Bonds?
A.
B.
C.
D.
26.
Which party invokes a bond?

A.
B.
C.
D.
27.
Sue the Owner for the loss to the Contractor.

Sue the Subcontractors for their failure to follow the schedule.
Nothing, their obligations were complete at the time of submittal.
Pay the Owner the bond face value, then sues the contractor for face value plus.
What are the financial obligations of the Contractor if the Payment Bond is invoked?
A.
B.
C.
D.
29.
Surety.
Owner.
Architect.
Contractor.
What does the Surety do if a bond is invoked?

A.
B.
C.
D.
28.
Surety.
Owner.
Architect.
Contractor.
Nothing because they have already paid their Bond Premium.

Nothing because they have already obtained the face value for the Payment Bond.
Pay the Surety for the face value of the bond plus all other expenses incurred.
Pay the Owner then the Contractor sues the Surety for all expenses incurred.
Given the bond premium table, What is the Bond Premium for a $2,755,000 Project?
First $ 500,000
A.
B.
C.
D.
$12.00 per M
Next $ 2,000,000
$6,000 plus $7.25 per M
Next $ 2,500,000
$20,500 plus $5.75 per M
$19,974
$21,966
$25,974
$36,341
Check Answers
288

Productivity and Labor Unit Cost
A construction cost estimate is only as good as the productivity information on which it is based.
Currently, one of the most widely accepted standard numbering systems for collecting and
organizing construction activities, their crew makeups and productivity data are the Construction
Specifications Institutes (CSI) Master Format. Each activity has its own unique Composite Crew
Makeup and Daily Output which establishes the productivity rate. For more Standard information
on Composite Crews, Daily Outputs and Productivity Rates there are many reference guides
available from R.S. Means, Dodge and Richardson. But, the best and most effective manner to gather
productivity information is within your own company. Below are the definitions associated with
determining productivity from R.S. Means Building Construction Cost Data.
CSI Master Format
Each construction activity is identified by a unique ten-digit number using the CSI Division,
Subdivision, Major Classification coupled with an Individual Line Number.
CSI DIVISION
03
CONCRETE
CSI DIVISION & SECTION
03110
Concrete Formwork
CLASSIFICATION NUMBER
410
Forms in Place, Columns
LINE ITEM NUMBER
6500
24" x 24" Plyform Col. 1 Use
Composite Crew Makeup

The Composite Crew is established using the various skill levels within a craft such as Apprentice,
Skilled Craft Workers (Journeyman) and Crew Leaders (Foreman) coupled with other Crafts such
as Carpenters, Laborers, Brick Masons, Ironworkers, Sheet Metal Workers, Electricians, Plumbers,
Pipefitters, Insulators, Riggers, Millwrights and Operators. The Composite Crew makeup for the CSI
number 03110 410 6500 is shown below.
No.
CRAFT
Hours per
Day
Total
W orkhours
Hourly
Rate
Carpenters
x8
24
Building Laborer
x8
Total Per Day
x8
32
Crew Cost
per Day
Crew Workhours Expended per Day (Workhours per Day) is the number of Hours the Crew expends
in an 8-hour day. It is calculated by taking the Number of Workers per craft and multiplying by an
8-hour day. Then adding up the Workhours expended for each Craft. The Crew hours above indicate
24 hours expended for the Carpenters and 8 hours expended for the Laborer for a Total of 32
Workhours per Day for the Crew.
289

The Daily Output and Unit of Measure indicates the standard number of units that the Composite
crew will complete in an 8-hour day. The Daily Output and Unit of Measure for CSI number 03110
410 6500 are shown below.
Daily Output =190 S.F.C.A.
Some of the Unit of Measure Abbreviations are S.F.C.A which means Square Feet of Contact Area.
This indicates that the area calculated is in contact with concrete or the earth, etc. Another unusual
abbreviation is V.L.F. which means Vertical Lineal Feet and it indicates direction. This is utilized
for activities which are placed into the ground such as a catch basin or sheet piling. Some additional
abbreviations which are very unusual and can become confusing are C.S.F. which means Onehundred (C) Square Feet, or the abbreviation C.L.F. which means One-hundred (C) Lineal Feet. The
abbreviation C used alone means One-hundred units. The C placed in front of the other letters means
one-hundred of those units. Another set of abbreviations is M.S.F. or M.L.F or M.S.Y. or M.B.F.
The abbreviation M used alone means One-thousand units. The M placed in front of the other letters
means One-thousand of those units. For example, M.B.F. means One-thousand Board Feet. Finally,
the abbreviation Sq. means one-hundred square feet.
The Productivity Rates are expressed in Workhours per unit or Units per Workhours. The
Productivity Rate expressed in Workhours per Unit is calculated by taking the Crew Workhours
Expended and Dividing by the Daily Output. Using the CSI number 03110 410 6500, the
Productivity Rate expressed in Workhours per Unit is:
Crew Workhours Expended =
Daily Output
32 Whr/day = .168 Workhours

190 S.F.C.A./day
S.F.C.A.
The .168 Workhours represents the portion of an hour that it takes one worker to install a Square
Foot of Contact Area. This is the method that Means uses to express productivity.
The Productivity Rate may also be expressed in Units per Workhour. This is calculated by taking
the Daily Output and dividing by the Crew Workhours Expended. The Productivity Rate is:
Daily Output
=
Crew Workhours Expended
190 S.F.C.A./day =
32 Whr/day
5.94 S.F.C.A.
Workhour
The 5.94 Square Feet of Contact Area represents the amount of Square Feet that one Worker will
complete per hour. This is another method for expressing productivity.
290

The Total Workhours is the amount of workhours required to complete a construction activity based
upon the established productivity rate determined above. The Total Workhours is calculated by
multiplying the Workhours per Unit by the Quantity from the Construction Issued Plans or the
Quantity to be installed and it is expressed as follows:
Productivity Rate (Workhours per Unit) Times Plan Quantities = Total Workhours
Using the Productivity Rate expressed in Workhours per Unit from above, and the Plan Quantity of
1500 S.F.C.A. for CSI number 03110 410 6500, the Total Workhours are:
Productivity Rate in (Workhours per Unit) = .168 Workhours
S.F.C.A.
Plan Quantities = install 1500 Square Feet of Contact Area Column Forms.
.168 Whr x 1500 S.F.C.A. = 252 Workhours
S.F.C.A.
The Total Workhours calculated above can be verified by taking the Number of Plan Quantities and
dividing by the Productivity Rate in Units per Workhour
1500 S.F.C.A.
5.94 S.F.C.A.
Workhour
252.52 Workhours
The Total Number of Crew Days required to complete a construction activity is calculated by taking
the Amount of Plan Quantity to be Installed and dividing by the Daily Output for the crew.
Using the Plan Quantity and the Daily Output for CSI number 03110 410 6500, the Total Number
of Crew Days is:
Plan Quantities =
Daily output
1500 S.F.C.A. = 7.89 days

190 S.F.C.A./day
The Total Crew Days calculated above can be verified by taking the Total Workhours and dividing
by the Crew Workhours expended per Day.
Total Workhours
Crew Workhours expended per Day
252 Workhours
32 Workhours per/day
291

The Total Crew Cost per Day using Means Labor Rates is shown below. The Total Crew costs per
day are calculated by using the Composite Crew Makeup. This Makeup indicates the Number of
similar craft workers, the various skill levels within a craft coupled with the various craft
classifications. These Workhours per Craft Classification are then multiplied by the current hourly
base wage or prevailing wage rate if on a public project. Using the Composite Crew makeup and the
Means wage rates for the CSI number 031 142 6500, the Crew Cost per Day is shown below.
No.
CRAFT
Hours per
Day
Total
W orkhours
Hourly
Rate
Crew Cost
per Day
Carpenters
x8
24
$25.20
$604.80
Building Laborer
x8
$19.80
$158.40
Total Per Day
x8
32
$763.20
The Labor Unit Cost using Means Labor Rates is shown below. The Labor Unit Cost per unit of
Measure is calculated by using the Crew Cost Per Day and dividing by the Daily Output. Using the
Means Crew Costs per Day and the Daily Output per Day for the CSI number 031 142 6500, the
Labor Cost per Unit is shown below.
Crew Cost per Day
Daily Output
$763.20
=$4.02/S.F.C.A.
190 S.F.C.A.
Another method for determining the Crew Cost per Day is by using a construction companys wage
rates instead of Means. For example, using the composite crew makeup and the construction
companys bare wage rates for the CSI number 03110 410 6500, the Crew Cost per Day is shown
below.
No.
CRAFT
Hours per
Day
Total
W orkhours
Hourly
Rate
Crew Cost
per Day
Carpenters
x8
24
$22.00
$528.00
Building Laborer
x8
$10.00
$ 80.00
Total Per Day
x8
32
$608.00
Therefore, the Labor Unit Cost using Construction Companys Labor Rates is calculated as the Crew
Cost per Day divided by the Daily Output. For example, the Labor Cost per Unit for the Construction
Company using CSI number 03110 410 6500 is shown below.
Crew Cost per Day
Daily Output
$608.00
=$3.20/S.F.C.A.
190 S.F.C.A.
292

Productivity & Unit Cost Exercise
1.
What does the Means book unit of measure abbreviation M.B.F. stand for?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
What does the Means book unit of measure abbreviation C.S.F. stand for?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Square Feet Continuous Area.

Square Feet Cubic Area
Square Feet Contact Area
Square Feet Critical Area.
What does the Means Book unit of measure abbreviation Sq. stand for?
A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
Cubic Square Feet.

Contact Square Feet.
One-hundred Square Feet.
One-thousand Square Feet.
What does the Means Book unit of measure abbreviation S.F.C.A. stand for?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
One-hundred Board Feet

One-thousand Board Feet
One-million Feet
One-million Board Feet.
Square inches.
One Hundred Square Feet.
One-hundred Square inches.
One thousand Square Feet.
What does the Means Book unit of measure abbreviation V.L.F. stand for?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Five Lineal Feet.

Vertical Lineal Feet.
Volume Lineal Feet.
Vinyl Lineal Feet.
293

6.
What does the Means Book unit of measure abbreviation C stand for?
A.
A.
B.
D.
Ten.
One hundred.
One thousand.
One Million.
Questions number 7 through 14 will utilize the information given below.

The plans call for the contractor to Drive, Pull and Salvage Steel Sheet Piling, 15 feet deep.
The Estimated quantity is 12,000 Square Feet of Contact Area (S.F.C.A.).
CSI DIVISION & SECTION
02250
CLASSIFICATION NUMBER
400
LINE ITEM NUMBER
1300
Shoring & Underpinning

Sheet Piling
15' Deep exc., Drive, Extract & Salvage
Given the Crew Makeup and hourly rates based upon an 8-hour work day below and given
the Crew Daily output and unit of measure are 545 S.F.C.A. per Day
No.
Crew Leader(s)
$27.20
Pile Drivers
$22.80
Crane Operators
$25.26
Oiler(s)
$18.00
How many total crew workhours are expended per day?

A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
Hourly Rate
0.5
7.
CRAFT
28
32
60
100
What is the Productivity Rate expressed in Workhours per Unit (Whr/Unit)?

A.
B.
C.
D.
00.059
00.110
09.083
17.031
294

9.
How many total workhours are required to install 12,000 S.F.C.A.?

A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
How many days (whole) are required to install 12,000 S.F.C.A.?

A.
B.
C.
D.
11.
$ 746.08
$1,423.36
$2,071.36
$5,595.60
What is the Labor Cost per S.F.C.A. ($L/S.F.C.A.)?

A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
9
22
200
1500
What is the Total Crew Cost per day?

A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
708
1,320
65, 400
108,996
$ 0.06
$ 2.61
$ 23.72
$177.92
What is the Total Labor Cost for installing the 12,000 S.F.C.A.
A.
B.
C.
D.
$
720.00
$ 1,440.00
$ 31,320.00
$284,640.00
295

14.
What is the productivity rate in S.F.C.A. per Workhour?

A.
B.
C.
D.
15.
The plans call for you to purchase 4 x 4 - W2.9 x W 2.9 (6x6) of Welded Wire Fabric for
a reinforced concrete bridge deck. The estimated quantity is 13,200 Square Feet (SF). The
agreed upon purchase price is $18.30 per CSF. What is the Total Materials costs to purchase?
A.
B.
C.
D.
16.
0.045
0.110
9.083
68.130
$
241.56
$
721.31
$ 2,415.60
$241,560.00
Given the information below and you are MASS EXCAVATING, WET SANDY LOAM
using two- 21 CY self-propelled Scrapers, a 1/4 of a 300 HP Push Dozer and the haul
distance to be 3000 feet. The Mass Excavation total quantity to be moved is 289,000 CY.
Given the Equipment and their rates below.
No.
2
0.25
CRAFT
Daily Cost per Piece
Self Propelled, Scraper, 21 CY

Push Dozer
$2,400.00
$250.00
Given the Daily output and unit of measure are 910 CY per Day.
What is the Equipment Cost per Cubic Yard ($Eq/CY)?
A.
B.
C.
D.
$ 0.01
$ 2.91
$ 5.34
$57.23
Check Answers
296

Wood Sheet Piling Material and Unit Cost Example
Rough Lumber Quantities are measured and sold by the board foot or by the thousand board feet
which is expressed in M.B.F.. A board foot measures 1 inch thick by 12 inches long and 12 inches
wide. For example, assume that you want to convert a 12-foot long 2" x 4" into board feet. The
calculation would be 2" x 4" x 12' = .67 x 12 = 8 board feet.
12
The Wood Sheet Piling Quantities and the materials cost for a Cofferdam that is 10 feet wide by
forty-four feet long by nine feet deep enclosed with a three-foot toe is shown below. The Wales are
placed at a Maximum Vertical Spacing of Four Feet. The Wale at the bottom must not exceed 1 foot.
The Top Wale must be flush with the top of the upright. The Braces are 10' maximum on-center and
along each line of wales with one for the starter within 2.5 feet of ends.
MATERIAL
COMPONENT SIZES
PRICES
Sheet Piling
3" x 14"
$390/MBF
W ales
6" x 8"
$390/MBF
Braces
10" x 10"
$390/MBF
Salvage
45%
W aste Lumber
5%
1.
Determine the Square Feet of Contact Area (S.F.C.A.)

(10' + 44' + 10' + 44') = 108 LF x 12' deep =
2.
Determine the Total Vertical Lineal Feet (VLF) of Sheet Piling.

108 LF
=
14"/12" = 1.17'
3.
1,296 S.F.C.A.
93 PCS x 12' deep =
1,116 VLF
Determine the Total Board Feet (BF)

Piling
1,116 VLF x
3" x 14"
12
3,906
W ales 9'/4' = 2 +1 Starter = 3 lines
(10' + 44' + 10' + 44') = 108 LF x 3 = 324
6" x 8"
12
1,296
Braces 44'/10' OC = 5PCS/line
5 PCS/Line x 3 Lines x 10' Long = 150 LF
10" X 10"
12
1,250
Subtotal
W aste 5%
6,452
5% x 6,452 =
323
Total Board Feet
297
6,775

The Material Unit Costs would be calculated as shown below. Given the following Material Prices,
Calculate the Total Material Costs for the Wood Sheet Piling system and Calculate the Material Unit
costs.
MATERIAL
COMPONENT SIZES
PRICES
Cofferdam Lumber
$390/MBF
Nails
8Lbs/100 S.F.C.A..
Salvage
45%
$77 per 50 Lbs Box
Transportation
$40/MBF
Sales Tax
3.
4% of all Costs exclude Transportation
Calculate the Total Lumber Cost and the Lumber Cost Allocated to this project.
Lumber
6,775 BF
$390/1000 BF
45%
$2,642
Deduct Salvage
$2,642
($1,189)
Total Lumber Allocated to this Project
4.
Calculate the Pounds of Nails and the Total Cost of the nails.
Nails
5.
6.
8 Lbs/100 S.F.C.A. x 1,296 S.F.C.A. = 104 Lbs
$77/B
$231
Sales Tax
4% ($2,642 +$231) =
$115
Transportation
6,775 BF x $40/1000 BF =
$271
Calculate the Total Material Costs allocated to this project

$1,453 + $231 + $115 + $271 =
Determine the Material Costs per Square Foot Contact Area ($M/S.F.C.A.)
$2,070
1,296 S.F.C.A.
8.
50Lbs/Box = 3 Bx
Calculate the Costs for the remaining items.
Total Material Costs for this Project
7.
$1,453
= $1.60/S.F.C.A.
Determine the Material Costs per Vertical Lineal Feet ($M/VLF)

$2,070
1,116 VLF
= $1.85/VLF
298
$2,070

Wood Sheet Piling Material and Unit Cost Exercise
Given the information below for a Cofferdam that is 60 feet wide by 100 feet long and 10 feet
deep enclosed with a 3 foot toe. Answer the following questions.
Material
Size
Sheet Piling (Toe = 3 feet)
3" x 13"
$550.MBF
W ales - 3 lines around the outside perimeter
6" x 8"
$550.MBF
Braces - 3 lines, 12 Pcs per line, each 60 feet long
6" x 6"
$550.MBF
Nails - 12 Lbs/100 Square Feet Contact Area
$35/Box, Box = 50 Lbs
Salvage Value
60%
Transportation & Shipping
$3.78/MBF
Sales Tax on Materials
4%
Timber W aste Factor
1.
3,200
4,160
6,000
60,000
How many total vertical lineal feet (VLF) of sheet piling?

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
12%
How many total square feet of contact area (S.F.C.A.) Is required for the sheet piling?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
Prices or Percentages
320
2,960
3,848
60,000
Approximately how many total board feet (BF) for all of the cofferdam components including
the waste?
A.
B.
C.
D.
16
16,164
25,565
27,229
299

Wood Sheet Piling Material and Unit Cost Exercise
Given the information below and assume a Grand Total of 11,000 Board Feet, 3690 Square
Feet of Contact Area, 5500 Vertical Lineal Feet includes the Piling, Wales, Braces and Waste
for a Cofferdam. Answer the following questions.
Material
Size
Sheet Piling (Toe = 3 feet)
3" x 13"
$550.MBF
W ales - 3 lines
6" x 8"
$550.MBF
Braces - 3 lines 12 Pcs per line. Each 9 feet long
6" x 6"
$550.MBF
Nails - 12 Lbs/100 Square Feet Contact Area
$35/Box, Box = 50 Lbs
Salvage Value
60%
Transportation & Shipping
$3.78/MBF
Sales Tax on Materials
4%
Timber W aste Factor
4.
$2,420
$6,050
$24,200
$60,500
Approximately how many pounds of nails are required?

A.
B.
C.
D.
6.
12%
What is the Total Lumber Cost allocated to this project?

A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
Prices or Percentages
66
443
1,320
44,280
Assume the Total Material Costs for the Cofferdam above is $17,000 and using the
information provided above. What is the Material Unit Costs per Vertical Lineal Feet
($M/VLF)?
A.
B.
C.
D.
$0.65
$1.55
$3.09
$4.61
300
Check Answers

Equipment Production and Unit Cost Examples
Hauling Production Example
Given that the 3 CY Hydraulic Backhoe will load at a rate of 150 CY/Hr and the Trucks will Haul
12 CYs per load to the Disposal Site 3 Miles Away. The Trucks will h Average 12 Miles per Hour
(MPH) Loaded and 22 MPH Empty. Assume the truck Unload Time is 3 minutes.
1.
Determine the truck round trip cycle time in hours (decimal of an hour).
Categories
Calculation
Position
0 Minutes/60 minutes =
.000
Load
12 CY Truck/150 CY Backhoe =
.080
Haul Away
3 Miles Away/12.0 Miles Per hour Loaded
.250
Unload
3 minutes/ 60 minutes
.050
Return
3 Miles Away/22.0 MPH empty
.140
Total Round Trip Time for 1 Truck
.520
2.
Time
Determine the Number of Round Trips/hour for one-truck

1
= 1.92 trips/hour
.52/hr
3.
Determine the Number of Trucks needed to keep the Backhoe working efficiently.
Backhoe Production =
150 CY/hr
Haul Unit Production
12 cy x 1.92 Trips/hr
4.
6.5 use 7
Verify the Production Rate by Back-checking.

7 trucks x 1.92 Trips/hr x 12CY Truck capacity = 1.07hour or 64.26 minutes.
Backhoe capacity 150 cy/hr
301

Hauling Equipment Unit Cost Example
Given that you must excavate 2,532 CY and the equipment production rates and hourly rates,
mobilization, the crew size and hourly rates and the payroll burden.
No.
EQUIPMENT
Equipment
Hourly Rate
Backhoe
2,532 CY
150 CY/Hr
= 16.88 hr x
Backhoe Mobilization
$200/16.88 hr
$48.00 per hour
$810.24
$11.85 per hour
$200.00
Total Backhoe Costs
$1,010.24
Trucks
No.
$13.10 pe hour
CRAFT
Hourly Rate
Total Hourly Costs
Crew Leader
$15.25 per hour
$15.25 per hour
Backhoe Operator
$12.45 pe hour
$12.45 pe hour
Subtotal
$27.70 per hour
Payroll Insurance
9.87% x $27.70
$2.74 per hour
Payroll Taxes
14.55% x $27.70
$4.03 per hour
Total Hourly Costs
5.
$34.47 per hour
Determine the Backhoe Equipment Cost per Cubic Yard

$1,010.24
2,532 CY
6.
Total Costs
= $0.40/CY
or
$59.85 per hour = $0.40/CY

150 CY per hour
Assume 7 trucks. Determine the Hauling Equipment Cost per Cubic Yard.
No.
EQUIPMENT
12 CY Trucks
Equipment
Hourly Rate
$13.10/hour
Total
Hourly
CY per Hour
Cost per CY
$91.70
/150.00
=.$0.61/CY
7.
Determine the Labor Cost per Cubic Yard To Excavate.
8.
$34.47/hour = $0.23/CY
150 CY/hour
The rate includes burden. Determine the Labor Cost per Cubic Yard to Haul.
No.
7
CRAFT
Truck Drivers
Craft Hourly Rate

$14.85/hour
302
Total Hourly
CY/Hour
Cost per CY
$103.95
/150.00
=.$0.69/CY

Power Shovel Production Example
Given the Equipment Production Rates and Equipment Hourly Rates and the Labor Hourly
Labor Rates below. Answer the following questions concerning the Backhoe Production.
No.
1.
EQUIPMENT
Production Information
2.5 CY Shovel
36 Seconds
Efficiency
50 minutes per hour
12 CY Trucks
2 Trips per hour
Equipment
Hourly Rate
Craft
Hourly Rate
(Including Burden)
$55.00 per hour
$30.00 per hour
$37.50 per hour
$ 25.65 per hour
Determine the Bucket cycles per hour.

60 seconds x 60 minutes = 3600 seconds per hour = 100 cycles/hour
36 seconds per cycle
36 seconds per cycle
2.
Determine the (Theoretical) Production Rate for the 2-1/2 C.Y. shovel in CY per hour.
Bucket size/cycle x #cycles/hour =
3.
2.5CY x 100 cycles = 250 cy/hour(Theoretical)

cycle
hour
Determine the true (Actual) output for the shovel in Cubic Yards per hour.
50 minutes = 83.3% x 250 cy/hours = 208 cy/hour
60 minutes
4.
Determine the number of trucks required to keep the Shovel working efficiently.
Backhoe Production =
Haul Unit Production
5.
208 CY/hr
=
12 CY x 2.00 Trips/hr
8.66 use 9 Trucks
Using 1 standby truck, Determine the Hauling Equipment Cost per Cubic Yard.
No.
10
EQUIPMENT
12 CY Trucks
Equipment
Hourly Rate
$37.50/hour
303
Total
Hourly
CY per Hour
Cost per CY
$375.00
/208.00
=.$1.80/CY

Steel Drum Roller Compaction Production Example
Given That you must compact 12,000 CY of Fill and the equipment production rates, the
equipment hourly rates, mobilization and the crew size and hourly rates and the payroll
burden for compacting are provided below. Answer these questions.
No.
EQUIPMENT
Vibrating Roller
Equipment
Hourly Rate
10 Ton Roller, 5 feet wide
$12.00
Operating Costs
$1.50
Mobilization
No.
$3,500
CRAFT
Hourly Rate
Total Hourly Costs
Laborers
$12.00 per hour
$24.00 per hour
Roller Operator
$20.65 pe hour
$20.65 pe hour
Subtotal
$44.65 per hour
Payroll Insurance
9.87% x $44.65
$4.41 per hour
Payroll Taxes
14.55% x $44.65
$6.50 per hour
Total Hourly Costs
$55.56 per hour
Compaction Production Information

The Steel Drum Roller Compactor moves at 1.5 Miles per Hour working a 45 minute hour and
97% Proctor Density is developed after 6 passes for the 8 inch lifts.
1.
Determine the true (Actual) Production rate in Cubic Yards per Hour.
width roller x prod speed mph x 5,280 feet per mile x lift x efficiency
# passes x 27 CF/CY
Note: The lift must be in a decimal of a foot
The efficiency must be in a decimal equivalency.
Compact =
[5' x 1.5 mph x 5280 feet per mile]

6 passes x 27 cf/cy
39,600 x .67 x .75 = 122.83 CY per hour

162
304
x( 8") x (45 minutes)

x (12") x (60 minutes)

Steel Drum Roller Compaction Unit Cost Example
2.
Determine the Equipment Cost per Cubic Yard ($EQ/CY) for the Steel Drum Roller.
No.
EQUIPMENT
Vibrating Roller
Operating Costs
12,000 CY = 98 Hr
122.83 CY/ hr
= 98 Hr
Hourly Rate
Total Costs
$12.00 per hour
$1,176.00
$01.50 pe hour
$0,147.00
Mobilization
$3,500.00
Total Equipment $
$4,823
12,000 CY
= $0.40/CY or
$4,823.00
$13.50 per hour =

122.83 CY/hour
$0.11/CY
$3,500
12,000 CY
$0.29/CY
$0.40/CY
3.
Determine the Labor Cost per Cubic Yard ($L/CY) for the Steel Drum Roller.
$55.56/hour
122.83 CY/hour
= $0.45/CY
305

Vibrating Plate Production and Equipment Unit Cost Example
Given That you must compact 12,000 CY of Fill and the equipment production
rates and hourly rates, mobilization the crew size and hourly rates and the payroll
burden for compacting are provided below. Answer these questions.
No.
EQUIPMENT
Vibrating Plate
Equipment
Hourly Rate
21" wide and 24" long
$4.13
Operating Costs
$0.69
Total Equipment
$4.82
No.
CRAFT
Hourly Rate
Total Hourly Costs
Laborer
$15.50 per hour
$15.50 per hour
Payroll Insurance
9.87% x $15.50
$1.53 per hour
Payroll Taxes
14.55% x $15.50
$2.26 per hour
Total Hourly Costs
$19.29 per hour
Compaction Production Information

The vibrating plate moves at 50 feet per minute (FPM) working a 50 minute hour and 97%
Modified Proctor Density is developed after 4 passes for the 8 inch lifts.
1.
2.
Calculate the production rate in Cubic Yards per hour for the vibrating plate.
=
21"/12" plate width x 50 FPM x

4 Passes x27 C.F. per C.Y.
x
1.75 x 50 =
108
x 0.67 x 50 = 27.14 CY/hour
Determine the Equipment Cost per Cubic Yard ($EQ/CY) for the vibrating plate.
$4.82/hour
=
27.14 CY/hour
3.
87.5 = .81
108
(8 ") lift x 50 Minutes

(12")
$0.18/CY
Determine the Labor Cost per Cubic Yard ($L/CY) for the vibrating plate.
$19.29
=
27.14 CY/hour
$0.71/CY
306

Equipment Production and Unit Cost Exercise
Given that you must excavate 7,255 CY. The equipment production rates, the equipment hourly
rates, mobilization and the Crew, the Crew Hourly Rates and the Payroll Burden for Excavating
are provided below. Answer the following.
No.
EQUIPMENT
Backhoe
Equipment
Hourly Rate
80 CY per hour
Total Costs
$55.20 per hour
Backhoe Mobilization
$177
Total Backhoe Costs
Trucks
$22.77 pe hour
Excavation Crew
No.
CRAFT
Hourly Rate
Crew Leader
$12.35 per hour
Backhoe Operator
$11.85 per hour
Oiler
$10.15 per hour

Subtotal
Payroll Insurance
6.87%
Payroll Taxes
12.55%
Total Hourly Costs
Hauling Crew
No.
1.
CRAFT
Hourly Rate
Truck Drivers
$ 9.30 per hour
Given that the 1.5 CY Hydraulic Backhoe will load at rate of 80 CY/hr and the Trucks
will Haul 10 CY per load to the Disposal Site 12 Miles Away. The Trucks will h Average
35 Miles per Hour (MPH) Loaded and 45 MPH Empty. Assume the truck Unload Time is
6 minutes. What is the truck round trip cycle time in hours (decimal of an hour)?
A.
B.
C.
D.
0.343
0.720
0.835
6.620
307

2.
Assume that the round trip time is .266. How many Round Trips per hour for one-truck?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Assume that the round trips per hour for one truck is 1.197 Trips per hour. How many
whole Trucks are needed to keep the Backhoe working efficiently?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
$ 0.01
$ 0.71
$ 0.97
$36.80
Assume you are going to utilize 9 trucks. What is the Hauling Equipment Cost per Cubic
Yard?
A.
B.
C.
D.
6.
2
7
8
16
What is the backhoe Equipment Cost per Cubic Yard?

A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
0.266
3.759
15.960
225.563
$ 0.32
$ 2.56
$ 8.08
204.93
What is the Labor cost per CY ($L/CY) to EXCAVATE including Payroll Burden?
A.
B.
C.
D.
$ 0.51
$ 0.83
$ 2.14
$41.02
308

7.
What is the Labor cost per CY ($L/CY) to HAUL using 6 trucks Drivers needed to keep
the Backhoe productive including payroll burden.
A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
$ 0.12
$ 0.83
$ 1.20
$66.63
Given the Backhoe Equipment Production Rates and Equipment Hourly Rates and the
Labor Hourly Labor Rates below. Answer the following questions.
No.
EQUIPMENT
1.5 CY Backhoe
23 Seconds
Efficiency
45 minutes per hour
10 CY Trucks
3 Trips per hour
Equipment
Hourly Rate
$55.20 per hour
$10.20 per hour
How many Bucket cycles per hour can the backhoe complete?
A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
What is the (Theoretical) Production Rate for the Backhoe in Cubic Yards per hour?
A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
0.006
0.383
2.610
156.5
80.00
104.30
156.50
234.75
What is the true (Actual) output for the Backhoe in Cubic Yards per hour?
A.
B.
C.
D.
60.00
78.23
117.38
176.06
309

Given the Steel Drum Roller Compaction Production information and you must compact 7,500
CY of Fill. The equipment production rates, the equipment hourly rates, mobilization and the
Crew, the Crew Hourly Rates and the Payroll Burden for compacting are provided below.
Answer these questions.
No.
EQUIPMENT
Vibrating Roller
Equipment
Hourly Rate
9 Ton Roller, 4 feet wide
$22.00
Operating Costs
$1.00
Mobilization
No.
1
$3,000
CRAFT
Hourly Rate
Roller Operator
$20.20 pe hour
Subtotal
11.
6.87%
Payroll Taxes
12.55%
The Steel Drum Roller Compactor moves at 2 Miles per Hour working a 50 minute hour
and 95% Proctor Density is developed after 8 passes for the 6 inch lifts. What is the true
(Actual) Production rate in Cubic Yards per Hour?
A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
Payroll Insurance
0.017
1.832
81.480
21160.000
The Vibrating Plate is 24" wide and 26" long. The vibrating plate moves at 35 feet per
minute (FPM) working a 45 minute hour and 95% modified Proctor Density is developed
after 3 passes for the 6 inch lifts. What is the production rate in Cubic Yards per hour for
the vibrating plate?
A.
B.
C.
D.
0.32
19.44
38.89
76,999.99
310
Check Answers

Excavation Quantity Takeoff
The process of ensuring a complete Quantity Takeoff requires the estimator to takeoff items by
Division and Section number, Type of Work/Locations, Operations and sometimes type of
operations. The following information will describe the process of identifying items while
completing a quantity takeoff.
The Divisions or Disciplines are organized into basic groupings of related construction
information. The Construction Specifications Institutes (CSI) Master Format uses Division 02
Sitework for site clearing and grubbing, dewatering, shoring and underpinning, cofferdams,
earthwork, piles and caissons, paving and underground piping. The primary Division Sections
this quantity takeoff will focus on are 02315 Excavation and Backfill, 02315 Trench Excavation
and 02320 Hauling.
The Types of Work Locations are subsections within a Division or Major Discipline that indicate
the type of work or the location of an activity to be installed. This is done because productivity
and crew sizes differ by Type of work or Location. Some typical Type of Work Locations in the
Excavation and Backfill Section are Building Excavation, or Trench Excavation. The Operations
are the tasks performed for a particular Type of Work/Location such as Machine Excavate for the
building. This process of completing a quantity takeoff indicating the Division and Section, the
Type of Work/Location and the Operations for each Type of Work Location is a fundamental
principle to ensure a complete item takeoff. The outline below identifies the Division and
Section number and the Type of Work/Locations and Operations. For example, division 02 is
Sitework and Section 200 Excavation Section the Type of Work locations and the Operations for
02200 would be as follows:
TYPE OF W ORK LOCATIONS
OPERATIONS
TOPSOIL
MOBILIZE EQUIPMENT
SHEET PILING & COFFERDAMS
MACHINE EXCAVATE &
STRUCTURES-BUILDING EXCAVATION
DEW ATER
PIERS OR CAISSON EXCAVATION
HAUL & TRAFFIC ADJUSTMENTS
TRENCH EXCAVATION
PURCHASE BACKFILL (MATERIAL $)
SITE EXCAVATION
BACKFILL
BORROW PIT EXCAVATION
COM PACT
ROAD EXCAVATION
SOIL ADJUSTMENT/ STABILIZE SOIL
PILING
DRIVE PILING OR SHORING

PLACE PIPE AND M ANHOLES
311

The Topsoil Removal can be performed with numerous arrangements of construction equipment
and you have a couple of choices to make which are normally outlined in the Technical
Specifications. The topsoil must be segregated from the structural fill and backfill materials.
Therefore, you can remove the topsoil and haul it to another site or you may be instructed to
stockpile on the site and reuse as landscaping materials after the construction is complete. The
thickness for removal of topsoil can be found on the soil borings. Normally, the topsoil
dimensions are either the entire site or the building area and parking areas. Sometimes the reports
refer to topsoil as loam.
Assume that the site is 110' by 60 feet and the soil borings indicate an average of 6 inches to be
removed. It is understood that all calculations are in decimals of a foot. Therefore, the total
number of Cubic Yards of topsoil removal and stockpile for the entire site is
Description
Topsoil Removal
Length
W idth
Depth
Cubic Feet
Cubic Yards
110'
60'
.5
3300CF/27 =
122.22 CY
Depth of the Excavation (Cut) for the Building Excavation

The Depth of the Cut for the Building goes down to the bottom of the fill under the Slab. This is
an extremely important depth because it is utilized for the Building Excavation, the Working
Space and the Angle of Repose calculations. For the Excavation and Concrete Plan and Detail
Example attached, the depth of the cut is shown below.
214.5' - .5' - 204.00' - .33 - .42
= 214.00 - 203.25' = 10.75' deep
The rules for calculating the depth of the excavation are find the existing top elevation of the site
(214.5') and then subtract the topsoil (6"/12") which has already been removed. Next, find the
Finished Floor Elevation (204.00') and subtract the thickness of the concrete (4"/12") and also
subtract the thickness of the compacted fill (5"/12") under the finished floor. Finally, subtract the
Net Top Elevation (214.00') minus the Net Bottom Elevation (203.25') and the result will be the
depth for the bulk building excavation.
Bulk Excavation
Bulk Excavation consists of the cubic yards of Building Excavation, Footing Excavation,
Working Space, and Angle of Repose. These quantities of cubic yards added together is
normally considered the bulk excavation.
Building excavation is calculated by using the outside wall dimensions and breaking the structure
into recognizable shapes with dimensions to determine the areas. The areas are then multiplied
by the Depth of the Excavation (cut) determined above. For the Excavation and Concrete Plan
and Detail Example attached, the building excavation is shown below.
312
Description
Length
W idth
Depth
Cubic Feet
Cubic Yards
Shape I
30'
45'
10.75'
14,512.5CF/27
537.50
Shape II
30'
30'
10.75'
9,675CF/27
358.33
Shape III
30'
15'
10.75'
4,837.5CF/27
179.17
Total Building Excavation in Cubic Yards
1,075.00
Footing Trench Excavation is along the outside perimeter and the depth is from the bottom of the
Compacted area under the slab to the bottom of the footing. The trench width can be determined
from the Trench Width Table attached at the end of this section. For the Excavation and Concrete
Plan and Detail Example attached, the footing trench excavation is shown below. The length is
the outside perimeter of the walls (90 + 15' + 30' + 15' + 30' + 15' + 30' + 45' = 270'. The width is
from the Trench Width Table and for a 24' wide footing the trench with is 4.0 feet. Finally, the
Depth of the Footing Trench is from the bottom of the Compacted area under the slab (203.25')
to the bottom of the footing (198.00'). Therefore, the depth is 203.25 - 198.00 = 5.25'
Description
Length
W idth
Depth
Cubic Feet
Cubic Yards
Footing Trench
270'
4'
5.25'
5,670CF/27
210
Working Space Excavation is the amount of space needed outside the structure to work placing
footing forms, wall forms, drainage tiles and waterproofing the structure. The working space is
normally estimated to be between 3 feet and 6 feet measured horizontally. The addition of the
working space (12') to the wall perimeter (270') is called the Full Perimeter. For the Excavation
and Concrete Plan and Detail Example attached, the working space excavation is shown below.
Length
W idth
Depth
96'
3'
10.75'
90'
15'
16'
3'
10.75'
30'
30'
3'
10.75'
15'
15'
3'
10.75'
30'
30'
3'
10.75'
15'
15'
3'
10.75'
30'
30'
3'
10.75'
45'
51'
3'
10.75'
270
282'
3'
10.75'
W all
4x3=
W . S.
Full
Perimeter
313
Cubic Feet
Cubic Yards
9,094.5CF/27
336.83

Angle of Repose Excavation
The Angle of Repose Excavation is the amount of excavation need due to the type of soil being
excavated. The type of soil that will be excavated can be determined from the soil borings. The
OSHA Construction Safety Standards provide a guide based upon the Type of Soil classified as
either Type A, Type B, or Type C and then the maximum allowable slopes are provided
indicating the Run: Rise ratio. For our purposes, an Angle of Repose Table is provided for
various types of soil classifications with their appropriate Run: Rise ratio.
Using the Excavation and Concrete Plan and Detail Example attached, and we are given a Firm
Clay and we will use the 10.75' as the depth or vertical depth. Using the Angle of Repose Table
for a Firm Clay, then the Run: Rise is found to be 2/3:1. For our example, this means that the
vertical dimension is 10.75 feet and the horizontal dimension is 7.17 feet (.67' x 10.75'). For the
Excavation and Concrete Plan and Detail Example attached, the angle of repose excavation is
shown below.
Angle of Repose Building Exc = (bh) x Full Perimeter
= (10.75' x 7.17') x 282' = 10867.93CF/27 = 402.52 CY
Volume of the Corners Sloped Excavation is the amount of excavation needed because the
corners are sloped. The volume of the sloped corners is short. The formula for the Volume of the
Corners Short is:
VSHORT in CF
= (Depth)3
12 (n)2
n =Slope based on the type of soil and the run: rise ratio
Net Corners = Outside Corners - Inside Corners
V total short CF =Net corners x V short each corner = Net Corners x (Depth)3
12 (n)2
For the Excavation and Concrete Plan and Detail Example attached, the volume of the sloped
corners excavation is shown below.
Net Corners = 6 Outside Corners - 2 Inside Corners = 4 Net
n = Firm Clay = 2/3: = .67
V total short in CF = 4 net x (10.75') 3 = 4 x 1242.30 = 922.48CF/27 = 34.17 CY
12 (.67)2
12 x .4489
314

Total Excavation to be Hauled is the amount of excavation that must be hauled away which must
be increased by a swell percentage of a particular soil. The amount to be hauled will consist of
the cubic yards for the building excavation, the footing trench excavation, working space
excavation, the angle of repose excavation and the sloped corners excavation. For the Excavation
and Concrete Plan and Detail Example attached, the total excavation to be hauled for a Natural
Bed Wet Clay is shown below.
Swell % =
(BCY - 1)100 Wet Clay = (3400 -1) 100 = (1.214 - 1) = 21.43%
(LCY)
(2800)
Haul = (Building + Footing + Working Space + Angle of Repose + VSHORT) x Swell%
= (1,075.00 + 210.00 + 336.83 + 402.52 + 34.17) = 2,058.52 x 21.43%
Total Haul = 2,058.52 + 441.14 = 2,499.66 CY
Compacted Fill
Compacted Backfill is the backfill around the structure. The type of fill is normally specified in
CSI division and section number 02200. It normally states that backfill must be clean and free
from debris, therefore, in many cases you must utilize a purchased structural grade fill. The
backfill amount needed is increased by a shrinkage percentage. Backfill will consist of the cubic
yards to be placed in the footing trench, the working space excavation, the angle of repose
excavation and the corners short excavation. For the Excavation and Concrete Plan and Detail
Example attached, the total compacted fill for a Damp Sand using the Modified Proctor method
is shown below.
Shrinkage % = (1- BCY)100
CCY
Backfill
Damp Sand = (1 - 3,130) 100 = (1 - .892) = 10.8%

3,510
= (Footing Trench + Working space + Angle of Repose + VSHORT) Sh%

= (210.00 + 336.83 + 402.52 + 34.17) = 983.52 x 10.8%
= 983.52 + 106.22 = 1,089.74
315

Trench Excavation
The Sloped Utilities Trench Excavation quantities are calculated based upon average depth of the
trench. The technical specifications division and section number 02600 provide some of the
slope information but many times the site plan will also provide the horizontal distances and the
Invert elevations. The Invert elevation is the flow line of the pipe. The Trench Average Depth is
calculated using depth at the start and the slope per foot to determine the depth at the other end.
The average depth is an extremely important depth because it is used to determine the amount of
trench excavation and the amount of the angle of repose excavation for the trench. For our
example, assume that we have to place 75 feet of 30 inch diameter concrete pipe which is buried
6 feet at the building and the slope is 1/4 inch per foot. The average depth calculation is shown
below.
Increase Other End = 75' x 1/4 per foot = 18.75"/12 = 1.56 Feet increase
Total Depth Other End = 6' + 1.56' = 7.56'
Average Depth = Start Depth + Total Other End Depth
= 6' + 7.56' = 13.56'/2 = 6.78'
Trench Excavation is the amount of cubic yards based upon the length of the trench, the width of
the trench from the table and the average depth assuming the trench walls are vertical. Using our
trench above the trench excavation is shown below.
Table TRENCH W IDTH BASED UPON PIPE DIAMETER 30" Diameter = 4.5' Trench Width
Description
Length
W idth
Depth
Cubic Feet
Cubic Yards
Trench
75'
4.5'
6.78'
2,288,25CF/27
84.75
The Angle of Repose Excavation for the trench is based upon the type of soil to be excavated and
the angle of repose is on both sides of the trench. We are given a Compacted Angular Gravel and
we will use the 6.78' as the depth or vertical depth. Using the Angle of Repose Table for a
Compacted Angular Gravel, then the Run: Rise is found to be 1/2:1. For our example, this means
that the vertical dimension is 6.78 feet and the horizontal dimension is 3.39 feet (.50' x 6.78').
The angle of repose trench excavation is shown below.
Angle of Repose Trench = (bh) + (bh) x trench length
27
= (6.78 x 3.39) + (6.78 x 3.39) x 75'
27
= 1,723.82/27 = 63.85 CY
316

Cut Fill Excavation
The Cut and Fill Method uses the plot plan with the existing and proposed elevations shown and
it establishes a grid system or square with a specified distance in each direction. Also, each grid
has 4-points or corners each having an existing elevation and a proposed elevation. The corner of
each grid starts in the northwest corner and moves counter clockwise. A grid can have all cuts, or
all fills, or two cuts and two fills, or three cuts and one fill, or three fills and one cut. The
example below utilizes a grid system of 100 feet but depending upon the variation in contours the
grid system can change. Normally, if the elevations change drastically you will utilize a smaller
grid system. The Cut or Fill for Grid E are shown below.
[N
Grid = 100 Feet x 100 Feet

Existing Elevations
Proposed Elevations
GRID
NO.
-------------________________
CORNERS
TYPE OF
ELEVATION
Existing
102.75
102.00
101.25
101.75
Proposed
101.75
102.75
101.75
101.00
Net Result
C - 1.00
F - 0.75
F - 0.50
C - 0.75
CUT
VOLUM E
FILL
VOLUME
94.52
48.23
Using the information from Grid No. E above, the total volume for the cut and fill is:
Vc =
L2 x (Hc)2
=
108 x (Hc + Hf)
1002 x 1.752
108 x [(1+0.75) + (0.75+0.50]
= 94.52 CY
Vf =
L2 x (Hf)2
=
108 x (Hc + Hf)
1002 x 1.252
108 x [(1+0.75) + (0.75+0.50]
= 48.23 CY
Vc = Volume of cut in Cubic Yards (CY)
V f = Volume of fill in Cubic Yards (CY)
Hc = Sum of cuts on four corners of grid.
Hf = Sum of fills on four corners of grid.
L = Length of side of grid Square in feet.
108 CY
317
= 4 corners x 27CF per CY

Caisson Auger and Bell Excavation
The Caisson Auger Excavation and
Bell Excavation quantities requires you to calculate the

Volume of the Shaft (V shaft) in cubic feet and determine the Volume Net in the Bell(V net bell)
in cubic feet. Then add the Vshaft and the Vnet bell to determine the total Cubic Yards in the
pier. The Vshaft = ( x r2 x depth or 3.14 x r x depth + The Vnet bell (see Table) = Total
Excavation
For example you are given a Round Pier or Caisson that is 18 feet deep, 2 foot diameter and the
bell is 5 feet in diameter. The Vshaft = 3.14 x (1')2 x 18' = 56.52 Cubic Feet (CF)
Using the Net Bell Volumes in Cubic Feet Table (p 140) from Daniel Atchesons book
Estimating Earthwork Quantities (1986), we find a value by using the Diameter of the Shaft in
inches across the top of the table and using the Diameter of the bell along the side of the table in
inches. The intersection of these two numbers determines the Vnet of the Bell in cubic feet.
Using our example above, the Diameter of the Shaft is 24 inches and the Diameter of the bell is
60 inches. The intersection of these two values derives an additional Vnet of the Bell = 26.60
cubic feet. Therefore, the total volume of excavation is 56.52 CF + 26.6 CF = 83.12 CF/27 =
3.08 CY.
Dia.
Bell
Atchesons Table Net Bell Volumes (Cubic Feet) NET VOLUME IN THE BELL Diameter of Shaft
16"
18"
20"
22"
24"
26"
28"
24"
1.4
1.0
0.6
0.3
28"
2.6
2.1
1.6
1.2
30"
3.4
2.8
2.3
32"
4.3
3.7
36"
6.4
42"
1.7
1.3
0.8
0.2
3.1
2.5
1.9
1.3
0.8
5.7
5.0
4.3
3.5
2.8
2.2
1.5
10.7
9.8
8.9
8.0
7.1
6.2
5.2
4.3
1.9
44"
12.4
11.5
10.5
9.5
8.5
7.5
6.5
5.5
2.7
0.5
48"
16.3
15.3
14.2
13.1
12.0
10.8
9.6
8.4
4.8
2.1
54"
23.6
22.3
21.1
19.8
18.4
17.0
15.6
14.1
9.7
5.7
2.4
60"
32.5
31.1
29.7
28.2
26.6
25.0
23.4
21.6
16.3
11.1
6.5
2.7
64"
38.0
36.5
34.8
33.1
31.3
29.4
27.5
21.6
15.7
10.3
5.5
68"
45.8
44.2
42.4
40.5
38.5
36.5
34.4
27.8
21.3
15.0
9.1
4.4
72"
54.6
52.8
50.8
48.8
46.7
44.5
42.2
35.1
27..7
20.5
13.8
8.0
84"
87.0
84.8
82.4
80.0
77.4
74.6
71.8
62.8
53.2
43.6
34.0
24.9
318
30"
36"
42"
48"
54"
60"
319
320

Excavation Tables
Average Soil Weights & Formulas
SOIL TYPE
LCY
BCY
CCY 100%
STANDARD
PROCTOR
CCY 100%
MODIFIED
PROCTOR
LOAD
FACTOR
Clay - Dry
2050
2675
2835
3159
.81
Clay - Natural Bed W et
2800
3400
3575
3959
.82
Sand - Dry
2420
2740
3362
3510
.85
Sand - Damp
2760
3130
3362
3510
.85
Gravel - Damp
2623
2980
3375
3645
.85
Common Earth - Dry
2185
2883
3375
3510
.80
Common Earth - Moist
2463
3160
3375
3510
.79
Loam
2100
2600
2835
3150
.81
Sw % =(BCY - 1)100
LCY
Load Factor (LF)
100%
100% + % Swell
Sh % = (1- BCY)100
CCY
LCY x LF
BCY
Shrinkage Factor (SF)
CCY
BCY
BCY x SF
CCY
Volume Cut (Vc)
(L) 2 (Hc) 2
108 (Hc + Hf)
J r 2 x depth
Volume Fill (Vh)
(L) 2 (Hf) 2
108 (Hf + Hc)
Volume Mass Diagram
A1 + A2 x Length
2
Shaft
27
V total short CF = Net Corners x (Depth) 3

12 (n) 2
27
Roller Compaction
= width x mph x 5,280 feet per mile x lift x effic
# passes x 27 CF/CY
Vibrating Plate
plate width x FPM

x lift x effic (min)
# Passes x27 CF/CY x (12")
321

Excavation Allowable Slope or Angle of Repose
MAXIMUM ALLOW ABLE SLOPE (ANGLE OF
REPOSE) FOR THE SIDE OF AN EXCAVATION
IN EXCESS OF 3' DEPTH
SLOPE (ANGLE OF REPOSE):
Slope (Angle of repose) RUN: RISE

1.
Solid Rock Formation (90%)
2.
Fractured Rock Formation

1/4:1 (75 o)
3.
Stiff Clay with minimum 2.5 T.S.F.*

1/2:1 (63 o) or Compacted Angular
Gravel
4.
FIRM Clays with minimum 1.5

T.S.F.*
2/3:1 (56 o)
5.
Granular soil (dry) Dry Sand or Clay fill; dry

sand and clay mixtures: medium clay with
minimum of 1.0 T.S.F.*
1:1 (45 o)
6.
Granular soil (wet clay or silt seams), rubble

or trash fill, firm or medium clays with
running sand seams
1 1/2:1 (34 o) Compacted Sharp Sand
7.
Saturated granular soil

Soft Clays with less than 1.0 T.S.F.*
2:1 (26 o) W ell Rounded Loose Sand
8.
Running soil (Sand or Clay)

3:1 (18 o)
EXCAVATION - TRENCH W IDTH BASED UPON PIPE DIAMETER OR FOOTING W IDTH

Pipe
Diameter
Minimum Trench W idth at Bottom
8" and Under
2.5 Feet
10" -14"
3.0 Feet
15" - 20"
3.5 Feet
24"
4.0 Feet
30"
4.5 Feet
36"
5.0 Feet
322

Excavation Quantities Exercise
Given the information below for removal of topsoil from the entire site. Answer the
following question.
GIVEN:
Assume the lot size is 60' X 75'
Topsoil is to be removed to a depth of 8"
1.
How many Cubic Yards of topsoil must be excavated?

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
Using the EXCAVATION TABLES. What is the swell percentage using a Loam?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
111.67
335.00
1,333.33
3, 015.00
08.3%
23.8%
31.9%
81.0%
What does Building Excavation mean?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Excavation the entire site.

Remove the topsoil from the entire site.
Excavation to the bottom of the footing.
Excavation to the bottom of the compacted fill under the floor.
Questions Number 3 through 7.

will use the 45 feet by 32 feet L-shaped EXCAVATION PROBLEM PLAN AND THE
EXCAVATION PROBLEM DETAIL Attached.
4.
What is the Total depth of the cut in Feet for the Building Excavation?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.42
8.92
12.92
16.83
323

5.
How many Cubic Yards (CY) of Building Excavation must be excavated?

A.
B.
C.
D.
6.
Assume that the working space is 4 feet. How many the Cubic Yards (CY) of Working
Space Excavation must be excavated?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
125.24
250.49
480.88
751.15
What is the swell percentage for a Compacted Sharp Sand Damp?

A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
56.16
203.51
224.65
673.96
Assume that the excavation is for a Compacted Sharp Sand Damp. How many Cubic
Yards (CY) of excavation for the Angle of repose?
A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
40.00
356.60
1,070.40
9,633,60
6.9
11.8
13.4
85.0
Using a Wet Sand and the Modified Proctor method, What is the shrinkage percentage?.
A.
B.
C.
D.
10.8
12.1
13.4
85.0
324

10.
Assume the depth of the excavation is 14' and the soil is a Firm Clay. What is the Run
dimension in feet for the angle of repose?
A.
B.
C.
D.
11.
Assume the depth of the excavation is 14' and the soil is a Compacted Angular Gravel.
What is the Run dimension in feet for the angle of repose?
A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
3.00
9.33
14.00
21.00
1.91
7.00
9.33
14.00
Assume the depth of the excavation is 14' and the soil is a Compacted Sharp Sand. What
is the Run dimension in feet for the angle of repose?
A.
7.00
B.
9.33
C.
14.00
D.
21.00
Questions 13 through 16, utilizes the Trench information provided below.
13.
The Trench is 224 Feet long and its starts 5 Feet below grade at the building and slopes
1/8 inch per Foot away from the building. The pipe is a 12 inch diameter Reinforced
Concrete pipe. What is the Depth at the other end of the pipe in feet?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.33
7.33
28.00
33.00
325

14.
What is the Average Depth of the Excavation?

A.
B.
C.
D.
15.
Using the width of a trench for a 12 inch pipe is 3 feet. How many Cubic Yards of Trench
Excavation with vertical walls must be excavated?
A.
B.
C.
D.
16.
1.17
3.67
6.17
7.33
24.89
153.56
410.67
696.89
The Angle of repose is 9.25 feet (Run): 6.17 feet (rise). How many cubic yards of Trench
excavation must be excavated for the Angle of Repose?
A.
2.11
B.
236.75
C.
473.49
D.
12,784.24
Questions 17 through 19 , refer to the Topography on the following page.
17.
Looking at the existing elevations on the topography, which direction will the water flow
towards?
A.
B.
C.
D.
18.
NE
SE
NW
SW
What is the Net Result of the Cut/Fill in the South West corner?
A.
B.
C.
D.
C - 0.5
F - 0.5
C - 1.5
F - 1.5
326

19.
Given the Cut/fill Calculations for Grid Y below, What is the Fill Volume?
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
30.15
87.72
155.95
165.87
294.83
Check Answers
CUT AND FILL GRID CALCULATIONS

GRID
NO.
CORNERS
TYPE OF
ELEVATION
Net Result
NW
NE
SE
SW
C - 1.5
F - 2.25
F - 3.25
C - 2.50
N[
Grid = 75 Feet x 75 Feet

Existing Elevations
--------Proposed Elevations
___________
327
CUT
VOLUM E
(CY)
FILL
VOLUME
(CY)

328

329

Excavation Allowable Slope or Angle of Repose
MAXIMUM ALLOW ABLE SLOPE (ANGLE OF
REPOSE) FOR THE SIDE OF AN EXCAVATION
IN EXCESS OF 3' DEPTH
SLOPE (ANGLE OF REPOSE):
Slope (Angle of repose) RUN: RISE

1.
Solid Rock Formation (90%)
2.
Fractured Rock Formation

1/4:1 (75 o)
3.
Stiff Clay with minimum 2.5 T.S.F.*

1/2:1 (63 o) or Compacted Angular
Gravel
4.
FIRM Clays with minimum 1.5

T.S.F.*
2/3:1 (56 o)
5.
Granular soil (dry) Dry Sand or Clay fill; dry

sand and clay mixtures: medium clay with
minimum of 1.0 T.S.F.*
1:1 (45 o)
6.
Granular soil (wet clay or silt seams), rubble

or trash fill, firm or medium clays with
running sand seams
1 1/2:1 (34 o) Compacted Sharp Sand
7.
Saturated granular soil

Soft Clays with less than 1.0 T.S.F.*
2:1 (26 o) W ell Rounded Loose Sand
8.
Running soil (Sand or Clay)

3:1 (18 o)
EXCAVATION - TRENCH W IDTH BASED UPON PIPE DIAMETER OR FOOTING W IDTH

Pipe
Diameter
Minimum Trench W idth at Bottom
8" and Under
2.5 Feet
10" -14"
3.0 Feet
15" - 20"
3.5 Feet
24"
4.0 Feet
30"
4.5 Feet
36"
5.0 Feet
330

Concrete Quantity Takeoff
The Construction Specifications Institutes (CSI) Master Format uses Division 03 Concrete for
all activities related to the installation of concrete. The primary Division Sections this concrete
quantity takeoff will focus on are 03100 Concrete Formwork, 03200 Concrete Reinforcement
and 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete.
Types of Work Locations are subsections within a Division and Section that indicate the type of
work or the location of an activity to be installed. This is done because productivity and crew size
differs by Type of work or Location. Some typical Type of Work Locations in the Concrete
Division and Section are footings, walls and elevated slabs. The Operations are the tasks
performed for a particular Type of Work/Location such as place forms, place rebar and place
concrete for the building. This process of completing a quantity takeoff indicating the Division
and Section, the Type of Work/Location and the Operations for each Type of Work Location is a
fundamental principle to ensure a complete item takeoff. The outline below identifies the
Division and section number and the Type of Work/Locations and Operations.
03100 Formwork, 03200 Concrete Reinforcement and 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete
OPERATIONS
PILE FOUNDATIONS OR CAPS
HAND EXCAVATE/BACKFILL
FOOTINGS
HAND COM PACT
MAT FOUNDATIONS
PLACE & STRIP FORM S
FOUNDATION W ALLS
PLACE KEYW AY
FOUNDATION PIERS
PLACE W ALL FORM S & BULK HEAD FORM S
GRADE BEAMS
PLACE W ALL TIES
SLABS ON GRADE
PLACE REBAR
EQUIPM ENT FOUNDATIONS
PLACE BOLSTERS
ELEVATED SLABS
PURCHASE CONCRETE - PSI
W ALLS ABOVE GRADE
PLACE SCREEDS
COLUMNS
PLACE CONCRETE - METHODS
BEAMS AND GIRDERS
FINISH CONCRETE
STAIRS
ANCHOR BOLTS
EXPANSION JOINT/W ATER STOP
331

Concrete Formwork Systems
As shown above each Type of Work Location contains a set of Operations. The estimator must
identify all of the individual components which make up the system to place concrete. Below is a
brief description of the components which make up the various formwork and reinforcement
systems. The Footing Formwork System operations are forms, stakes, nails and keyway. The
Footing Rebar System operations are dowel bars, horizontal rebar in the top and bottom mats, tie
wire, upper chairs and lower chairs, bar splicing and overlap requirements, and waste.
The Wall Form System operations are plyform with studs, wales, braces, chamfer strip, wall ties,
tie clamps, nails, form oil, bulkheads and box outs. The Wall Rebar System operations are
vertical rebar, horizontal rebar, tie wire, corner rebar, bar splicing and overlap requirements, and
waste.
The Column Form Systems are either round or square columns and sometimes with capitals. The
operations are plyform, capital forms, yokes or patented column clamps, bracing, chamfer strip,
nails and form oil. The Column Rebar System operations are vertical bar, horizontal ties or a
continuous spiral hoop bars, bar splicing and overlap requirements and waste.
The Elevated Slab Form System operations are edge forms, plyform, joists, stringers, posts,
lacing, diagonal bracing and nails. There are numerous types of reinforced concrete floor
systems. They are a solid slab supported by girders and columns, a flat slab with one way beams
which uses pan forms, a flat slab with two way beams which also uses pan forms, a flat slab with
drop panels and capitals, flat plates and a waffle flat plate which uses steel domes or pans. The
Elevated Slab Rebar System operations are rebar in the top and bottom mats placed horizontally
and vertically, upper slab bolsters, lower slab bolsters, tie wire, bar splicing and overlap
requirements, and waste. The Elevated Beam System operations are plyform, joists, stringers,
posts, lacing, diagonal bracing, chamfer strips and nails. These beam rest on the columns and
they are sometimes an integral part of an elevated slab form system. The Elevated Beam Rebar
System operations are rebar in the top and bottom placed horizontally, stirrups wrapped around,
upper beam bolsters, lower beam bolsters, tie wire, bar splicing and overlap requirements, and
waste.
The Grade Beam System is a horizontal beam which rests on footings or caissons spaced at
specified intervals instead of resting on columns. The Grade Beam system operations are
plyform, blocking, toe plates, ledgers, cross bracing and T-head shores. The Grade Beam Rebar
System operations are rebar in the top and bottom placed horizontally, closed stirrups wrapped
around, upper beam bolsters, lower beam bolsters, tie wire, bar splicing and overlap
requirements, and waste.
The Stair System operations are stringer forms, riser forms beveled at the bottom and side forms.
332

Footing Formwork and Rebar Quantity Takeoff
Footing Forms are placed along the outside and the inside perimeter of the footing using the
footing dimensions. The unit of measure for footing forms is Square Feet of Contact Area
(S.F.C.A.) or Lineal Feet (L.F.). They are constructed of 2" lumber with the depth of the lumber
being equal to the depth of the footing. Lumber can be purchased as 2 by 4", or 6", 8", 10", 12",
14" and 16" widths and stock lengths of 8', 10', 12', 14', 16', and 18'. An overlap of 2" at the
corners is required along the outside perimeter. Also, lumber sizes are always referred to by its
nominal dimensions. The footing forms for the Excavation and Concrete Plan and Detail
Example attached is shown below.
Description
Forms Outside
Forms Inside
W all
Extends
Extends
Total
Length
90' +
.5' +
.5'
91'
15' +
.5' +
.5'
16'
30' +
30'
15' +
15'
30' +
30'
15' +
15'
30' +
.5' +
.5'
31'
45' +
.5' +
.5'
46'
270'
274'
91' -
2'
2'
87'
16' -
2'
2'
12'
30' -
30'
15' -
15'
30' -
30'
15' -
15'
31' -
2'
2'
27'
46' -
2'
2'
42'
274' -
8'
8'
258'
333
Depth
SFCA
1' =
274 SFCA
1' =
258 SFCA

Keyway is a trapezoidal shaped 2 inch deep material placed in the center of the concrete footing
around the perimeter. It is beveled for ease in removing when the concrete has set up. For
estimating purposes use the outside dimensions of the footing.
Keyway = 274'
Nails are ordered in 50# boxes using the table indicating the number of pounds per 100 S.F.C.A.
of formwork. Normally 8d or 6d common double head nails are used for ease in removing
formwork. Use the Nail Quantity Table provided for Footing Forms. The nails for the Excavation
and Concrete Plan and Detail Example attached is shown below.
274 SFCA + 258 SFCA = 532 SFCA x 9 Lbs per100 SFCA = 47.88 pounds = 1 Box
Nail Quantity Needed for 100 Square Feet of Form Surface
Type of Form
Nails, W ire,
Etc., Lb per 100 Square Feet of Contact Area (SFCA)
Footings and piers

W alls and partitions
Floors
Roofs
Columns
Beams and girders
Stairs
9
8
8
8
9
12
11
Note: Nails are purchased in 50 pound boxes.

Stakes are placed along the outside and the inside perimeter of the footing at three (3) to five (5)
foot intervals. They are made of 2" by 4" lumber normally 18" to 28" in length.
Footing Rebar is placed inside the forms with a minimum cover of concrete from the sides of 11/2 inches. The footing rebar for a portion of the Excavation and Concrete Plan and Detail
Example attached is shown below.
Description
Size
# Pieces
Length
Total LF
Lbs/ LF
Total Lbs
#5
90.75'
363'
1.043
378.61
#5
15.75'
63'
Inside 30' + 2' =
#5
31.75'
127'
Inside 15' +2' =
#5
16.75'
67'
Footing Rebar
334

Footing Rebar Lap Splices are needed whenever the length of a footing or wall is greater than 20
feet in length. This additional rebar known as lap splices must be added to the lineal feel of rebar.
This requires the estimator to determine the number of laps and the length of the laps. Many times
the splice lengths are specified as a certain number of bar diameters. The footing rebar for a portion
of the Excavation and Concrete Plan and Detail Example attached is shown below. Using the
90.75 length on one side of a continuous footing, the standard rebar is 20 feet long, the splice
length is specified as 24 bar diameter laps, and the plans call for #5 bar. From this information it
can be determined that there are:
Lineal Feet of one side of footing is =
90.75 feet
20 feet
~ 5 laps
Length of lap is = 24 x 5/8 inches = 24 x .625 inches = 15 inches or 1.25 feet per lap.
Lineal Feet of lap = 5 laps x 1.25 Feet = 6.25 feet per 90.75 feet. Therefore, the total lineal feet of
lap for side A is 6.25 feet x 4 bars = 25 feet. Therefore, the total lineal feet of #5 reinforcement
required for side A is 363 feet + 25 feet = 388 feet.
Wall Formwork and Rebar Quantity Takeoff
Height of the Wall
The height of the concrete wall is the distance in decimal of a foot from the top of the footing to
the bottom of the elevated slab-finished floor. This is an extremely important height because it is
utilized to calculate the wall forms, the reinforcement and the concrete. The height of the wall for
the Excavation and Concrete Plan and Detail Example attached is shown below.
216.5' - 198.00' + 1.0' = 17.50'
Wall Forms are placed along the outside and the inside perimeter of the wall and the full height
of the wall. The wall forms are calculated in Square Feet of Contract Area. The square feet of
contact area for the wall forms for side A the 90' length of the Excavation and Concrete Plan and
Detail Example attached is shown below.
Description
Length
W all Forms Outside
90'
W all Forms Inside
90' -
Extends
1.0'
Extends
1.0'
Total LF
Height
SFCA
90'
17.50'
1,575
88'
17.50'
1,540
Chamfer Strip is used to place a 45-degree angle on any exposed concrete corners such as outside
corners, or exposed inside edges of square columns or exposed beams. This is to ensure that the
aggregate is covered properly with cement paste. It is ordered in lineal feet.
335

Wall Rebars are placed opposite the force where the tensile force is greatest. In the Excavation
and Concrete example the tensile force is the soil and the vertical and horizontal bars are placed
approximately 1/3 the distance in from the interior concrete wall. Normally, the vertical and
horizontal rebars are placed approximately 1/3 the distance in from each face. This is done if the
forces are expected from both directions such as soil as a tensile force from outside and water as
a tensile force from the inside. In this explanation, the rebars are placed on the inside and on the
outside faces. The horizontal wall rebar for the Excavation and Concrete Plan and Detail
Example attached is shown below. The plans call for the vertical bar attached to the dowels to be
a #6 bar at 12 inches on-center with 2 inches of concrete cover. From this information, the
calculations are as follows:
# sets Horizontal Bar = 17.5' = 35 spaces + 1 starter = 36 Pieces
.5
W all
Horizontal W all Rebar
Size
# Pieces
Length
Total LF
90'
#4
36
89.75'
3,231.00
15'
#4
36
14.75'
531.00
Inside 30' + 1'
31'
#4
36
30.75'
1,107.00
Inside 15' + 1'
16'
#4
36
15.75'
567.00
Inside 30' + 1'
31'
#4
36
30.75'
1,107.00
Inside 15' + 1'
16'
#4
36
15.75'
567.00
30'
#4
36
29.75'
1,071.00
45'
#4
36
44.75'
1,611.00
36 x
272
9,792
274'
Lbs/ LF
Total Lbs
Wall Rebar Lap Splices for the horizontal wall rebar is shown as follows. Using the standard
rebar is 20 feet long, the splice length is specified as 30 bar diameter laps, and the plans call for
the horizontal bar to be a #4 bar at 6 inches on-center with 1-1/2 inches of concrete cover.
Lineal Feet of one side of footing is =
89.75 feet
20 feet
~ 5 laps
Length of lap is = 30 x 4/8 inches = 30 x .500 inches = 15 inches or 1.25 feet per lap.
Lineal Feet of lap = 5 laps x 1.25 Feet = 6.25 feet for wall A (89.75 feet). Therefore, the total
lineal feet of lap for side A is 6.25 feet x 36 bars = 225 feet. Hence, the total lineal feet of #4
horizontal reinforcement required for side A is 3,231 feet + 225 feet = 3,456 feet.
336

The Vertical Wall Rebar for the Excavation and Concrete Plan and Detail Example attached is
shown below.
W all
Horizontal W all Rebar
Size
# Pieces
Length
Total LF
90'
#6
90
17.50'
1,575.00
15'
#6
15
17.50'
262.50
Inside 30' + 1'
31'
#6
31
17.50'
542.50
Inside 15' + 1'
16'
#6
16
17.50'
280.00
Inside 30' + 1'
31'
#6
31
17.50'
542.50
Inside 15' + 1'
16'
#6
16
17.50'
280.00
30'
#6
30
17.50'
525.00
45'
#6
45
17.50'
787.50
274
17.50'
4,795.00'
274'
Side A 89.75' = 90 pieces

1'
Lbs/ LF
Total Lbs
Side B 14.75' = 15 pieces

1'
The Concrete for the Walls uses the inside and the outside dimensions and it is calculated in
Cubic Yards. The concrete for the Excavation and Concrete Plan and Detail Example attached is
shown below.
90'
15'
-1
-1
Length
W idth
Depth
90.00'
1.00'
17.50'
13.00'
17.50'
30'
30.00'
17.50'
15'
15.00'
17.50'
30'
30.00'
17.50'
15'
15.00'
17.50'
30'
30.00'
17.50'
45'
-1
-1
43.00'
17.50'
270
-2
-2
266.00'
1.00'
17.50'
337
Cubic Feet
Cubic Yards
4,655.00CF/27 =
172.41

Slab on Grade Rebar Quantity Takeoff
The Welded Wire Fabric (WWF) for the slab-on-grade is placed in the floor which uses the
interior dimensions for the structure. The unit of measure for the WWF is in one-hundred Square
Feet (C.S.F.). The welded wire mesh in hundred square feet for the Excavation and Concrete
Plan and Detail Example attached is shown below.
Description
Length
W idth
Square Feet
CSF
Shape I (inside)
28'
43'
1,204.00
12.04
Shape II (inside)
30'
28'
840.00
8.40
Shape III (inside)
30'
13'
390.00
3.90
2,434.00
24.34
Elevated Slab Formwork Quantity Takeoff

The Edge Forms for a slab are placed around the outside perimeter. It is normally calculated in
Lineal Feet (LF). The edge forms for the elevated slab for the Excavation and Concrete Plan and
Detail Example attached is: 90' + 15' + 30' + 15' + 30' + 15' +30' + 45' = 270 Lineal Feet (L.F.).
The Slab Forms for the elevated slab are placed under the slab on the inside of the walls. The
slab forms are in Square Feet of Contact Area (S.F.C.A.). The slab forms for the Excavation and
Concrete Plan and Detail Example would be 2,434 S.F.C.A.
Beam Rebar Quantity Takeoff
The Beam Stirrups for a beam are specified as an on-center spacing and usually the full length of
the beam. The length of the rebar for each stirrup is the outside perimeter of the beam size minus
the concrete cover. For our example below the concrete cover is 1-1/2 inches. Stirrups are
calculated in lineal feet (LF). Therefore, the total lineal feet of stirrups is shown below.
Mark
1B34
N
o.
Beam Size
(inches)
Reinforcing
Bottom
#3 Stirrups
Support Bars
Top
Width
Depth
No.
Size
Length
No.
Size
Length
O.C.
No.
12
33
22' -9"
22' -9"
8"
11'
2"
BB
4
# of Stirrups = 22.75'/8" OC = 34 spaces + 1 starter = 35 pieces

Length of a stirrup = 1' + 2.75' +1' + 2.75' = 7.5' - (4 x 0.125) = 7.0' per stirrup.
Total Lineal Feet of stirrups = 35 pieces x 7 LF per Stirrup =
Lineal Feet of #3 Stirrup support bars 2 pieces x 11 feet =
338
245.0
22.0

Concrete and Rebar Quantities Exercise
Questions 1 through 10 refer to the E&C Problem Plan and the E&C Detail from the Excavation
Quantities Exercise shown previously.
1.
What is the height of the concrete wall?

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
How many total Square Feet of Contact Area (S.F.C.A.) for the Footing Forms?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
154.00
2,411,64
4,676,70
5,226.20
How many total C.S.F.s in the slab-on-grade?

A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
114.67
185.08
298.64
348.41
How many total Square Feet of Contact Area (S.F.C.A.) for the Wall Forms?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
12.83'
15.66'
16.80'
18.00'
0.91
9.05
14.40
905.50
How many cubic yards of concrete for the slab-on-grade?

A.
B.
C.
D.
14.09
39.41
377.21
1,064.17
339

6.
How many Cubic Yards (CY) of Concrete for the Walls?

A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
Assume that the cover is 1 inch. Assume that the bar is in 20 foot lengths and the bar laps
are 28 bar diameters. How many total lineal feet of rebar in the elevated slab?
A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
Mark
1B22
506.35
2,237,17
4,474.32
4,654.00
Assume that the cover is 2 inches. How many lineal feet of horizontal rebar is required
for the walls excluding laps?
A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
6.47
77.43
101.33
1,212.48
156.37
1,094.59
4,377.52
8,755.04
You are given the following beam information. Assume the cover is 2 inches.
N
o.
Beam Size
(inches)
Reinforcing
Bottom
Support Bars
Top
Width
Depth
No.
Size
Length
No.
Size
Length
O.C.
No.
24
10.5
17' -2"
17' 2"
6"
10'
How many lineal feet of stirrups are required?

A.
B.
C.
D.
#3 Stirrups
23.00
60.32
217.80
638.12
340
2"
BB
4

10.
The Walls forms are job built for Wall A (45') which consists of 2"x 8" studs spaced 10
inches on-center with a top plate and a bottom plate and full height of the wall. How
many board feet of lumber is required?
A.
B.
C.
D.
11.
Where is the Keyway utilized in a forming system?

A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
Attached to the inside face of the formwork to form a texture.

Placed in the corners of exposed concrete to eliminate sharp edges.
Placed around the perimeter of an elevated slab to hold the concrete.
Placed in the exterior corners of the formwork to reinforce the walers.
On a Elevated Slab formwork system, Which dimensions do you use to calculate the
amount of plyform for the elevated slab?
A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
Placed in the footing horizontally.

Placed under a load-bearing wall.
Place in the vertical concrete joint(s) between pours
At the intersection of the concrete wall and the elevated slab.
Where is the chamfer strip utilized in a forming system?

1.
2.
3.
4.
13.
183.96
951.30
1,269.13
15,229.60
The inside plan lengths and widths added together.

The outside plan length and outside plan width added together.
The outside plan length and outside plan width multiplied together.
The height of the wall and the outside perimeter multiplied together.
On a Elevated Slab formwork system, Which dimensions are used to calculate the total
Edge forms?
A.
B.
C.
D.
The inside plan lengths and widths added together.

The outside plan length and outside plan width added together.
The outside plan length and outside plan width multiplied together.
The height of the wall and the outside perimeter multiplied together.
341

Assume that you have to form and pour a concrete stair that is 4 feet wide with a top landing that
is 4 feet by 4 feet. The total rise is 42 inches high and each step has a 7-inch rise and a 10-inch
tread which is 6 inches thick and the slant distance is formed on the back side. The forms for the
steps will consist of 5 stringers on the slant distance are made from 2' x 12 material and the risers
for the front faces are made of 2 inch thick material. Answer the following questions about the
stairs.
15.
What is the horizontal distance in inches of the stairs?

A.
B.
C.
D.
16.
What is the sloped distance for the stringers in feet?

A.
B.
C.
D.
17.
1.02
3.50
4.17
5.44
How many board feet of formwork materials are needed for the front-face of the stairs?
A.
B.
C.
D.
18.
6
42
50
65
20
44
72
864
How many cubic yards of concrete for the stairs including the landing?
A.
B.
C.
D.
0.91
8.82
24.66
238.11
Check Answers
342

Framing Quantity Takeoff
The Construction Specifications Institutes (CSI) Master Format uses Division 06 Wood and
Plastics for all activities related to the installation of carpentry. The Division and Section
Numbers are 06100 Rough Carpentry, 06200 Finish Carpentry and 06400 Architectural
Woodwork.
Types of Work Locations are subsections within a Division and Section that indicate the type of
work or the location of an activity to be installed. This is done because productivity and crew size
differs by Type of work or Location. Some typical Type of Work Locations in the Rough
Framing Division and Section are foundation walls, floors, walls and roofs. The Operations are
the tasks performed for a particular Type of Work/Location such as place studs, place sheathing,
and place the roof trusses for the building. This process of completing a quantity takeoff
indicating the Division and Section, the Type of Work/Location and the Operations for each
Type of Work Location is a fundamental principle to ensure a complete item takeoff. The outline
below identifies the Type of Work/Locations and Operations for Division 06 and Section
Number 06100 - Rough Carpentry
OPERATIONS
FOUNDATION W ALLS
PLACE STUDS
FLOORS
PLACE SILL PLATES
EXTERIOR W ALLS
BUILD HEADERS, FRAME OPENINGS
INTERIOR W ALLS
ATTACH SHEATHING, BRACING
ELEVATED W ALLS
INSTALL W INDOW S, DOORS
CEILINGS
PLACE JOISTS
DOORS AND W INDOW S
SHINGLE
FINISH MILLW ORK
INSTALL SIDING
FINISH HARDW ARE
INSTALL SOFFIT
SIDING
BUILD STAIRS
ROOFING
W ATERPROOF AND CAULKING

PLACE INTERIOR TRIM
INSTALL HARDW ARE
343

Sub Flooring Framing Components
The sub floor system usually consists of the following components.
Beam or Girder
It is supported by the foundation wall to carry the load of the floor. This
beam can be made of a solid wood beam, a steel beam or a built-up wood
beam.
Columns
Are placed along the length of the Beam or Girder at specified intervals.
These columns can be made of wood or steel.
Floor Joists
Are perpendicular to the beam and their size is governed by the floor load
and the joist span.
Floor Trusses
Floor Trusses can also be used to replace the joists. These floor trusses are
deeper but in return you can obtain longer spans and eliminate the center
beam.
Sill Plate
This is placed on top of the foundation wall and secured to the wall using
anchor bolts that have been placed in the concrete.
Rim Joists
Are nailed along on the ends of the joists.
Sub flooring
Placed perpendicular to the floor joists. Normally, consists of Tongue and

Groove edges.
Termite Shield
Placed on top of the foundation wall to prevent termite damage.
Bridging
This is placed between the joist to prevent movement. In a Truss flooring

system the bridging is along the bottom cord.
Floor Headers
Are headers placed perpendicular to the joists. They are normally doubled
to carry the load. The short joists are called tail joists. These are placed in
a floor opening for a stairs.
Trimmers
Are joists that have been doubled to carry the load. These are placed in a
floor opening to accommodate the stairs.
344

Sub Flooring Quantity Takeoff
This is an L-Shaped structure with outside dimensions of 56 feet by 40 feet. The ends are 24 feet
wide. The beam is placed in the center of the structure (12'). The Column Posts are placed 8' oncenter. The Floor Joists are at least 12' long and they are placed 16" on-center.
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
QUANTITIES
Beam or Girder
56 - 12 = 44 + 12 + 16 = 68' x 3=
204
Columns
44'/8' = 6+1 = 7,28/8' = 4+1 = 5
12 EA
Floor Joists
56'/1.33 = 42 + 1 = 43 x 2 = 86
16'/1.33 = 12 + 1 = 13 x 2 = 26
Under partition wall
=1
113 EA
Sill Plate
56' + 40' + 24 + 16 + 32 + 24 =
192 LF
Rim Joists
56' + 32 + 16 +16 =
120 LF
Subflooring
56' x 24' = 1344

16' x 24' = 0384
Total
1728 SF/ 32SF per Sheet
54 Sheets
Bridging
Interior Wall Systems

Bottom Plate
This is a single plate used to secure the studs.
Top Plate
This is normally a Double Top Plate used to carry the roof load.
Interior Studs
Can be load bearing or non-load bearing. Spaced evenly.
Intersecting
Are vertical studs placed in the exterior wall to secure interior.
Headers
Are horizontal members used to carry the upper floor and roof.
Jambs
Are vertical studs used to provide support for the header.
345

Wall Framing Components
The Wall system can be for interior or exterior walls and they normally consist of the following
components.
Exterior Wall System
Bottom Plate
This is a single plate used to secure the studs.
Double or
Top Plate
This is normally a Double Top Plate used to carry the load of the roof. Also, the studs are
secured to the plate.
Exterior Studs
Are normally load bearing and they are spaced evenly to carry the load of the upper
floors and Roof.
Corner Studs
Are vertical studs in the corner of exterior walls to provide a smooth corner and nailing
surface.
Headers/Lintels
Are horizontal members used to carry the upper floor and roof loads around a door or
window opening.
Jambs
Are vertical studs used to provide support for the header.
Sills
Are horizontal members under a window sill.
Cripples
Are the vertical members under the window sill.
W ind Bracing
Is diagonal bracing placed in the exterior wall to provide stability and it used to resist
horizontal wind loads.
Gable Ends
Are the vertical studs on the end of a Gable Roof.
Sheathing
Is the material placed on the exterior of the building to enclose the building, reduce air
infiltration, brace the wall and provide a subbase for connecting the siding or masonry to
the structure.
346

Wall Framing Quantity Takeoff
This is an L-Shaped structure with outside dimensions of 56 feet by 40 feet. The ends are 24 feet
wide. Studs are 16" on-center. Gable Ends with 4/12 Slope.
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
QUANTITIES
Bottom Plate
56 + 40 + 24 + 16 + 32 + 24 = 192
192 LF
Double Top Plate
192 x 2 = 384
383 LF
Exterior Studs
56/1.33=42+1=43 40/1.33=30+1=31
24/1.33=18+1=19
16/1.33=12+1=13
32/1.33=24+1=25
24/1.33=18+1=19
150 EA
Corner Studs
6 Corners x 2 studs =
012 EA
Headers/Lintels
2 doors x 2.92' wide x 3 headers

5 windows x 4.75' wide x 3 headers
Jambs
5 windows x 2 per = 10 studs
Sills
5 windows
Cripples
W ind Bracing
Studs Gable Ends
24'/1.33=18 +1 = 19 x 2 sides
038 EA
Sheathing Gable Ends
192'/4' = 48 Sheets
.5 (12' x 4') = 24SF x 4 =96/32 =3
51 EA
347

Types of Roofs
There are several common types of roof systems. They are the Shed Roof, the Gable Roof,
Gambrel Roof, Hip Roof, Intersecting Roof, and the Mansard Roof. They are described below.
Shed Roof
The Shed Roof slopes in one direction.
Gable Roof
The Gable Roof Slopes in two directions.
Hip Roof
The Hip roof slopes in four directions.
Gambrel Roof
The Gambrel Roof has four slopes and it is made up of two separate sets of common
rafters. This roof system is used to gain the use of the upper floor space. The upper set
of rafters is relatively flat and the lower set is steep. This is a barn roof.
Intersecting Roof
The intersecting roof has four to six slopes depending on if the roof is two intersecting
Gables or a Gable and a Hip.
Mansard Roof
The Mansard roof combines the Gambrel and Hip Roofs.
Roof Framing Components

The roof systems consist of the following components.
Common Rafters
The total length figures in the unit rise and the overhang.
Ridge Boards
Are at the peak of the roof.
Over hang
Is the horizontal projection beyond the exterior walls.
Hip Rafters
Are the longest rafters on a Hip roof.
Hip Jack Rafters
Are the shorter rafters on the ends of a Hip roof.
Valley Rafters
Are in the valley on both sides of an interesting roof.
Valley Jack Rafters
These are the short Rafters
Cripple Jack Rafters
Are between the Valley and the Hip in an intersecting roof.
Sloped Length
The top cord of the rafter. The increase in materials.
Roof Sheathing
Are placed perpendicular to the Rafters.
Fascia
Is attached to the tails of the rafters.
Barge board
Is the length of the common rafters at ends.
348

Roofing Terminology
These roofing terms are viewed as if you were looking at the cross section end (width) of a
structure. These terms are utilized to determine various roof lengths. Therefore, the following
terms and formulas are provided below.
The Building Run is considered one-half () of the Building Span.
The Building Span is the outside to outside width of the building.
The Total Rafter Run is considered one-half () of the Total Rafter Span.
The Total Rafter Span is the addition of the Building Span plus the Overhang distances.
The Unit Run is the horizontal run based upon 1 foot.

The Unit Rise is the Rise (height) for every 1 foot of Unit Run.
The Slope is the relationship of the Vertical Rise to the Horizontal Run.
The Pitch is the Vertical Rise divided by the Span. For Example, total roof rise is 4 feet
and total span is 24 feet, therefore, the Pitch is 4/24 = 1/6 = 16.66%.
The Unit Rafter Length of a Common Rafter or Rafter Constant
= rise2 + run2 = c2 or c = rrise2 + run2 = Unit Rafter Length
Assume a 7:12 roof slope, the Unit Rafter Length would be calculated as follows:
c = r (7)2 + (12)2 = r193 = 13.89 inches/12 = 1.1575 Rafter Constant
The Total Length of the Common Rafter is the Total run times the Unit Rafter Length
The Hip and Valley Unit Rater Length or Hip and Valley Constant
= common rafter2 + run2 = c2 or c = rcommon rafter2 + run2 = Unit Hip Length
Assume the 7:12 roof slope from above. The hip and valley unit Length is:
c = r (13.89)2 + (12)2 = r336.93 = 18.36 inches/12 = 1.53 Rafter Constant
349

Gable Roof Quantity Takeoff Example
This is an L-Shaped structure with outside dimensions of 56 feet by 40 feet. The Gable ends are a
total of 24 feet wide (Span), one side of the Gable has a 4/12 Unit rise: Unit run (slope) with a 14
foot Run. The other side of the Gable has a 3/12 Unit rise: Unit run (slope) with a 10' Run. The
Overhang is 3 Feet. The Rafters are 16 inches on-center. Determine the Roof Rafter Constant(s).
Roof slope constant = rise2 + run2 = c2 or c = rrise2 + run2
4/12 side c = r4 2 + 12 2 = 12.65"/ Foot = 1.05
12
3/12 side c = 3 2 + 12 2 = 12.37" / Foot = 1.03

12
The Total Rafter Run Length = Building Run plus the Overhang =
4/12 side = 14' + 3' = 17'
3/12 side = 10' + 3' = 13'
Total Length of the Common Rafter = Total Rafter Run x Roof Constant
4/12 side - 17' x 1.05 = 17.85'
3/12 side - 13' x 1.03 = 13.39'
Determine the Total Number of Common Rafters

DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
Common Rafters
TOTAL
Main 56'/1.33'
= 42+1 =43
Extend 16'/1.33' = 12+1 =13
Total
QUANTITIES
56 EA - 17.85'
56 EA - 13.39'
112 EA
Determine the Hip and Valley Constant = Common Rafter2 + Run2 = c2 or c = rCR2 + Run2
4/12 side c = r12.65 2 + 12 2 = 17.44"/ Foot = 1.45
12
3/12 side c = 12.37 2 + 12 2 = 17.23" / Foot = 1.44

12
Determine the length of the Valley and the Hip.

4/12 side - 17' x 1.45 = 24.65'
Ridge Boards
Sheathing
3/12 side - 13' x 1.44 = 18.72'
Main
Intersecting
Total
4/12
3/12
17' x
17' x
13' x
13' x
33'=561
32'=544
46'=598
47'=611
56'+3'+3' - 13'=49'
16'+17'+0 - 00=23
x
x
x
x
1.05=598
1.05=571
1.03=616
1.03=629
Fascia
56'+3'+3'=62'
40'+3'+3'=46'
16'+0'+0'=16'
32'+0'+0'=32'
Barge board
17.85' x 2=35.70'
13.39' x 2=26.78'
SF
SF
SF
SF
82 LF
2,414 SF
156 LF
62.48 LF
350
75 Sheets

Intersecting Gable Roof Quantity Takeoff Example
The main Gable roofs outside dimensions are 62 feet long and the Gable end is 28 feet wide. The
Intersecting portion extends 20 feet beyond the 28-foot side and the intersecting portion is 28 feet
wide. The overhang is 2 feet and the slope is 6:12. The Rafters are 16 inches on-center.
Determine the Roof Rafter Constant(s). Roof slope constant = rise2 + run2 = c2 or c = rrise2 +
run2
6/12 side c = r6 2 + 12 2 = 13.42"/ Foot = 1.12
12
14' + 2' = 16 feet
14' + 2' = 16 feet x 1.12 = 17.92 Feet use 18 Feet
Determine the Number of Common Rafters required.

DESCRIPTION
Common Rafters
LENGTH
Main
Intersecting
TOTAL
62'/16" = 46.5 + 1 = 48 x 2 =
20'/16" = 15.0 + 1 = 16 x 2 =
128
6/12 side c = r13.42 2 + 12 2 = 18.00"/ Foot = 1.50
12
Determine the Total Length of the valley rafters = Total Rafter Run x Valley Constant.
14' + 2' = 16 feet x 1.50 = 24 Feet
Valley Rafters
Ridge Boards
Roof
Sheathing
2
Main
Intersection
62' + 2' + 2'

20' + 14' + 2
= 66'
= 36'
Main
Intersection
66' x 32'
20' x 32'
= 2,112 SF
= 640 SF
351
2 - 24 Feet
102'
86 - 4' x 8' Sheets
2,752 SF

Hip Roof Quantity Takeoff Example
This is an L-Shaped Hip Roof structure with outside dimensions of 56 feet by 40 feet. The ends
are 24 feet wide. The slope is 3:12 with a 3-foot overhang. The rafters are 16 inches on-center.
Determine the Roof Rafter Constant(s). Roof slope constant = rise2 + run2 = c2 or c = rrise2 +
run2
3/12 side c = 3 2 + 12 2 = 12.37" / Foot = 1.03
12
12' + 3' = 15 feet
12' + 3' = 15 feet x 1.03 = 15.45 Feet use 16 Feet
Determine the Number of Common Rafters required.

DESCRIPTION
Common Rafters
LENGTH
Main
L Shape
62'/16" = 46.5 + 1 = 48 x 2 =
16'/16" = 12.0 + 1 = 13 x 2 =
TOTAL
122
3/12 side c = 12.37 2 + 12 2 = 17.23" / Foot = 1.44
12
Determine the Total Length of the valley rafters = Total Rafter Run x Valley Constant
12' + 3' = 15 feet x 1.44 = 21.6 Feet
Determine the number of hips and valleys for the L-Shaped Hip roof.
Hips
= 5 each 21.6 Feet long
Valleys = 1 each 21.6 Feet long
352

Framing Quantity Takeoff Exercise
This structure is an intersecting hip roof with the main hip roof outside dimensions being 73 feet
long and the width being 30 feet wide. The Intersecting portion extends 20 feet beyond the 30foot side and the intersecting portion is 20 feet wide. The overhang is 2' - 6" and the slope is
5:12. The Rafters are 16 inches on-center.
1.
What is the total length of the common rafters in lineal feet (LF)?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
What is the total number of common rafters required for the roof?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
55
72
112
144
What is the total length of the hip and valley rafters for the main roof in lineal feet (LF)?
A.
2.
C.
D.
4.
13.00
17.50
18.90
35.00
15.00
17.50
18.90
25.90
What is the total length of the hip/valley rafters for the intersecting roof in lineal feet?
A.
2.
C.
D.
12.50
13.50
18.50
25.00
353

Framing Quantity Takeoff Exercise
5.
What is the total number of hip rafters on the main portion of the roof?
A.
B.
C.
D.
6.
What is the total number of hip and valley rafters on the intersecting portion of the roof?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
4 hips
2 valleys
4 valleys
2 hips and 2 valleys
What is the total number of 4' x 8' sheathing required for the roof?
A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
2
4
6
8
86
101
109
150
What is the hip and valley constant for an 8:12 sloped roof?
A.
B.
C.
D.
0.64
0.83
1.20
1.56
Check Answers
354

BUDGETING, COSTS, AND COST CONTROL
The Estimate and the Project Budget
The estimate is a static document at a specific point in time (Bid time). The estimate reflects
what the project was bid for and the quantities and unit prices used.
The project budget continuously evolves until project completion. The project budget reflects
the actual scope at the site and the actual quantities from construction issued drawings and a
standard productivity rate. The project budget will always include change orders and extra work
orders in terms of changed quantities and costs. These terms are important because the
productivity and labor cost reports should reflect the project budget. Therefore, the project
budget should reflect the actual quantities placed and a standard unit rate for each work activity.
This is considered the project budget. The project budget should be compared to the estimate but
this comparison should only be made in the Project Cost Summary Report. This report compares
the actual and projected quantities, workhours and costs for the project to the estimated costs.
This reports the current status and the latest forecast of profit or loss by cost codes.
The Earned Workhour
An Earned Workhour is defined as the budgeted workhours earned for the quantity placed using
the budgeted standard. The earned workhours for a work activity are calculated by multiplying
the in place quantities (#units) by the budgeted standard workhours per unit rate (whr per unit).
Determining the Budgeted Quantities

The budgeted quantities should reflect the actual project being built, therefore, these quantities
should be calculated by someone in the office capable of determining the quantities for each
work item from the construction issued drawings. These budgeted quantity takeoffs should be
tabulated in enough detail for each work item that the field can easily identify the quantity. The
quantity tabulation form should identify the take off by drawing numbers, revision numbers, area
numbers, equipment item numbers, system numbers and elevation. These quantity tabulation
sheets are sent to the field and they are used to show work completed.
There are three basic Cost Control Reports. They are the Earned Workhour Report, the Labor
Cost Report and the Project Cost Summary Report. The purpose of the reports is to compare
actual expenditures to the budgeted costs by the cost code established by the company and
organized into a Work Breakdown Structure.
355

The Earned Workhour Report
This report is used by the superintendent to track productivity on each work activity. This report
compares the actual workhour per unit rate to the budgeted workhour per unit rate on a daily or
weekly basis for each activity. A budgeted Whr per unit rate is established for each work item
(cost code) using the contractors records for crew sizes and daily outputs. This budgeted Whr
per unit rate is standardized throughout the company so that all superintendents are compared to
the same workhour per unit rate for each work item. This budgeted standard unit rate may or may
not be the rate used in the estimate, but for productivity purposes, all superintendents must be
compared to the same rate. The budgeted standard unit rate is established by determining a base
year, the standard crew size and daily output for each activity. The budgeted standard will never
change, but the standard can be adjusted for each job due to working conditions, location and
trade agreements.
The Earned Workhour Report is used to compare the actual workhours expended to the budgeted
workhours and project the final workhours for each activity. The following discussion describes
each column of the Earned Workhour Report and the procedure used to arrive at the answer.
1.
Cost Code. The Cost Code in the Example is 035300.
2.
Activity Description. The cost code and description are from the contractors master code
of accounts and all projects within the construction firm are assigned the same cost code
with its respective activity description. The Activity Description in the example is Wall
Forms 12".
356
3.
QUANTITIES
Budgeted quantities are calculated from the plans and they reflect the actual quantities
that must be placed. The Budgeted Quantity is found in the Estimate Ledger and it is
1120 Square Feet of Contact Area.
4.
Weekly quantities are the accumulated quantities that have been placed during the week.
The Weekly Quantity is found in the Inplace Quantity Report and for the example it is
60 Square Feet of Contact Area
5.
To Date quantities are an accumulation of all previous weekly quantities. The Current
Weekly Quantities are added to the To Date Quantity to arrive at the current To Date
quantity placed. The To Date Quantity is found in the Inplace Quantity Report and for the
example it is
60 for Week + 64 (Previous Weeks) = 124 Square Feet of Contact Area.
6.
7.
8.
Unit is the unit of measure used for that cost code. The Unit of measure in the example is
SFCA which is an abbreviation for Square Feet of Contact Area..
EXPENDED WORKHOURS (Whr)
Weekly workhours are the accumulated workhours spent for the week. The Weekly
workhours are found in the Weekly Labor Distribution and in the example it is 9 whr
under the straight time (ST) column which are all hours worked.
To Date Workhours isare an accumulation of all previous weekly workhours. The Current
Weekly Workhours are added to the To Date Workhours to arrive at the current To Date
Workhours expended. The To Date Workhours is
The current week of 9 workhours plus the previous workhours from the Detail
Cost Ledger which is 15 workhours = 24 whr To Date.
357
9.
EARNED WORKHOURS
Earned Workhours in this column are the total workhours earned to date using the
budgeted workhour unit rate and the quantities placed To Date. The earned workhours
are calculated by multiplying the To Date Quantities times the Budgeted Workhour/Unit.
The Earned Workhours in the example are earned at the Budgeted unit Rate which is 192
Whr/1120 SF = .171 Whr/SF. Therefore, the total workhours earned is calculated as
Placed 124 SFCA x .171 Whr/SFCA = 21 Whr.
10.
11.
Budgeted Workhours are the total workhours estimated to perform this activity. The
Budgeted Workhours are found in the Estimate Ledger and is 192 Whr.
UNIT WORKHOURS
Budgeted Unit Workhour Rate is expressed in Whr per unit (Whr/Uint). The budgeted
standard rate is established company wide for each activity. The budgeted unit rate is
calculated by taking the total Budgeted Workhours and dividing by the Budgeted
Quantities. The Budgeted Workhours per unit rate in the example is
192 Whr/1120 SFCA = .171 Whr/SFCA
12.
Weekly Unit Workhour Rate is expressed in Whr per unit (Whr/Uint). The weekly unit
rate is calculated by taking the Weekly Expended Workhours and dividing by the Weekly
Quantities placed. The Weekly Workhour per unit rate in the example is:
9 Whr/60 SFCA = .150 Whr/SFCA.
13.
To Date Unit Workhour Rate expressed in Whr per unit (Whr/Uint). The To date unit rate
is calculated by taking the To Date Expended Workhours and dividing by the To Date Quantities
placed. The To Date Workhour per unit rate in the example is
24 Whr/124 SFCA = .194 Whr/SFCA.
14.
15.
PERCENTAGE these percentages are used to compare the total Earned to the Budgeted..
Earned Percentage is calculated by taking the total Earned Workhours and dividing by
the total Budgeted Workhours. The Earned Percentage in the example is 21 Whr /192
Whr = 10.9%
Expended Percentage is calculated by taking the total Expended Workhours and dividing
by the total Budgeted Workhours. The Expended Percentage in the example is 24 whr To
Date expended/192 Whr Budgeted = 12.5%.
358
16.
PROJECTED WORKHOURS
Projected at Completion Workhours is a forecast of the total Workhours to be spent when
the estimated quantity is 100% complete. Using the Straight Line projection method, the
projected workhours at completion is calculated by multiplying the to Date Workhour
Unit Rate times the Total Budgeted Quantities. The Workhours Projected at Completion
in the example is:
1120 SF x .19 Whr/SFCA = 213 Whr. (Three decimals .194 Whr/SF = 217 Whr.)
17.
Projected Gain or (Loss) is calculated by subtracting the Projected Workhours at

Completion from the Total Budgeted Workhours and showing the net result. A (loss) is
shown in parentheses. If the Projected Workhours at Completion is greater than the Total
Budgeted Workhours, you will show a (LOSS) in this column. If the Projected
Workhours at Completion is less than the Total Budgeted Workhours, you will show a
GAIN in this column. The Projected Workhour Gain or (Loss) in the example is:
Budgeted Whr = 192 Whr - 213 Projected = (21) a loss.
The completed Earned Workhour Report is shown on the following page.
359

Earned Workhour Report Example
PROJECT NAM E:
Jobsite USA
PROJECT NUMBER:
CODE
035300
001
D ESCR IPTIO N
W all Forms
Q U AN TITIES
U N IT
BU D G ET
W EEK
TO
D ATE
1120
60
124
Estimate
Ledger
Inplace
Q ty
C urrent
W eek
Inplace
Q ty
C urrent
W eek
+
Previou
s
Q ty's
60 + 64
W O R KHO U R S
U N IT W O R KHO U R S
PERC EN T
PR O JEC TED
W EEK
TO
D ATE
EAR N ED
BU D G ETED
BU D G ET
W EEK
TO
D ATE
EAR N ED
EX PEN D ED
C O M PLETIO N
G AIN /
LO SS
24
21
192
.17
.15
.19
10.9
12.5
213
(21)
Labor
D ist
C urrent
W eek
Labor
D ist
C urrent
W eek
+
D etail
cost
9+15
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
Estimate
Ledger
192
W hr
1120 Sf
9W hr
60 Sf
24 W hr
124 Sf
21 W hr
192 W hr
24 W hr
192 W hr
-------------------------------
--------------
.17 W hr
Sf
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------M inus
124
1120 Sf
EX PEN D ED
W O R KHO U R S
SF
Sf
192
360
.19 W hr
Sf
------------------------------------------------------213
[ 192
[ - 213
[ (21)
[
[
[
[
[
= (21)

Inplace Quantities Report for the Example
PROJECT NAME
Jobsite USA
PROJECT NUMBER
001
Cost Code
Description
Unit
W eek
Total
Previous
Total
035300
W all Forms
SFCA
60
60
64
To D ate
Total
124
Week 2 Labor Distribution Report for of the Example

PROJECT NAME
Jobsite U.S.A.
PROJECT NUMBER
001
Cost Code
Craft
WORKHOURS
M
035300
PAYROLL ENDING August 5

PAYROLL NUMBER ______6_______
Th
TOTAL
S
RATE
TOTAL
PT
ST
PRM
REG
PRM
Carp
2/3
2.50
5.00
5.00
Cp
1/3
4.25
8.50
4.25
Cp
/3
3/9
Note: PT indicates Premium Time.

ST indicates Straight Time.
PRM means Premium or the Overtime Pay a person earns.
REG Means the Regular Pay a person earns.
361
8.00
REG
25.50
24.00
9.25
64.50

Estimate Ledger for the Example
PRO JECT NAM E JO BSITE U SA
PR O JECT N U M BER
001
CO ST CLASSIFICATIO N
1
Cost Code
035300
D escription
Q uantity
W all Form - Original
720
C.C.O. #7
400
W all Forms 12"
1120
U nit
W orkhours
Labor Cost
2
M aterial Cost
4
Equipm ent
5
Subcontract
Total
122.00
2310.00
400.00
2710.00
Sf
70.00
1285.00
504.00
300.00
207.00
2296.00
Sf
192 W hr
3595.00
904.00
300.00
207.00
5006.00
Detailed Cost Ledger for the Example

PROJECT NAM E JOBSITE USA
PROJECT NUMBER 001
COST CLASSIFICATIONS
1
Cost Code
D ate
035300
7/24
D escription
Wall Forms
Ref
PR5
8/01
PO7
8/01
SC 44
Q uantity
W orkhours
Labor Cost
15
105.45
M aterial Cost
Equipm ent
Subs Cost
421.00
1141.00
15
105.45
362
1141.00
421.00
Total Cost
526.45
220.00
1141.00
220.00
220.00
1887.45

The Labor Cost Report
This report is used to compare the actual labor costs to the budgeted labor costs and project the
final cost for each activity. The budgeted labor costs are obtained from the estimate ledger which
shows the revised estimated cost. The actual labor costs are obtained from the weekly labor
distribution and balanced with the detail cost ledger. Finally, the Labor Cost Report could be
called the Equipment Cost Report and the report could be used to determine the equipment cost
per unit (equip $/unit) instead of labor cost per unit on construction projects that are equipment
intensive.
1.
2.
Cost Code. The Cost Code in the Example is 035300.

Activity Description. The cost code and description from the contractors master code of
accounts assigned to each activity that must be performed on the project. The Activity
Description in the example is Wall Forms 12".
3.
Budgeted quantities are calculated from the plans and they reflect the actual quantities
that must be placed. The Budgeted Quantity is found in the Estimate Ledger and for the
example it is 1120 Square Feet of Contact Area..
4.
Weekly quantities are the accumulated quantities that have been placed during the week.
The Weekly Quantity is found in the Inplace Quantity Report and for the example it is 60
Square Feet of Contact Area..
5.
To Date quantities are an accumulation of all previous weekly quantities. The Current
Weekly Quantities are added to the To Date Quantity to arrive at the current To Date
quantity placed. The To Date Quantity is found in the Inplace Quantity Report and for the
example it is 60 for Week + 64 (Previous Weeks) = 124 Square Feet of Contact Area..
6.
Unit is the unit of measure used for that cost code which is SFCA.
7.
EXPENDED LABOR DOLLARS

Weekly Expended Labor Costs are obtained from the Weekly Labor Distribution by
adding the Total Premium (PRM) costs plus the Total Regular (Reg) cost. The Weekly
Expended Cost from the Labor Distribution Week 2 is
$9.25 (PRM) + $64.50 (Reg) = $73.75.
8.
To Date Expended Labor Costs are an accumulation of all previous weekly labor costs.
The Current Weekly Labor Costs from the Weekly Labor Distribution are added to the To
Date Labor Costs from the Detail Cost Ledger to arrive at the Current To Date Labor
Cost. In the example, it is the $73.75 for the Week plus $105.45 from the Detail Cost
Ledger = $179.00.
363
9.
10.
BUDGETED COST
Total Budgeted Costs are obtained from the Estimate Ledger. This figure is the original
estimated labor cost plus or minus all approved contract change orders. The Total
Budgeted Cost in the Estimate Ledger from the labor column is $3,595.00
UNIT COSTS
Budgeted Unit Costs are calculated by taking the total estimated labor costs and dividing
by the Budgeted Quantities. The unit costs are always expressed in LABOR COSTS per
unit ($L/unit). The Budgeted Labor Cost per unit in the example is:
$3,595/1120 SFCA = $3.21/SFCA
11.
Weekly Unit Costs are calculated by taking the Weekly Expended Labor Costs and
dividing by the Weekly Quantities placed. The example Weekly Labor Cost per unit is:
$73.75/60 SFCA = $1.21/SFCA
12.
To Date Unit Costs are calculated by taking To Date Expended Labor Costs and dividing
by the To Date Quantities placed. The To Date Labor Cost per unit in the example is:
$179.00/124 SFCA = 1.44/SFCA
13.
PROJECTED LABOR COST

Projected at Completion Labor Costs is a forecast of the total labor cost to be spent when
the estimated quantity is 100% complete. Using the Straight Line projection method, the
projected labor cost at completion is calculated by multiplying the To Date Unit Cost
($/unit) times the Total Budgeted Quantities. The Projected Labor Cost at Completion is:
1120 SFCA x $1.44/SFCA = $1,613
14.
Projected Gain or (Loss) is calculated by subtracting the Projected Labor Cost at

Completion from the Total Budgeted cost and showing the net result. A (LOSS) is shown
in parentheses. If the Project Labor Cost at Completion is greater than the Total Budgeted
Cost, you will show a (LOSS) in this column. If the Projected Labor Cost at Completion
is less than the Total Budgeted Cost, you will show a GAIN in this column. The Project
Labor Cost Gain or (Loss) is:
$3595 Budgeted - $1,613 Projected = $1,982.
The completed Labor Cost Report is shown below.
364

Labor Cost Report for the Example
PROJECT NAME JOBSITE USA
PROJECT NUMBER 001
CODE
035300
DESCRIPTION
Wall Forms
QUANTITIES
EXPENDED COST
UNIT COST
BU D GET
W EEK
TO D A TE
UNIT
WEEK
TO D A TE
BUDGET
TOTAL
1120
60
124
Sf
73.75
179
Inplace
Qty
Current
Week
Inplace Qty
Current
Week
+
Previous
Qty's
60+64
Labor Dist.
Current
Week
+
Detail
Cost
$73.75
+
105.45
Estimate
Ledger
Qty
Labor
Dist.
Current
Week
$73.75
1120 Sf
3595
minus
365
PROJECTED
BUDGET
W EEK
TO D A TE
C O M P LE TIO N
G A IN /LO S S
3595
$3.21/Sf
1.21/Sf
1.44/Sf
1613
1982
Estimate
Ledger
$3595
1120Sf
$74
60 Sf
1.44/Sf
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
[
$179
124 Sf
[
[
_____[
1613
___ [

The Project Cost Summary Report
This report is the most valuable report in terms of the overall project because it sums up all
actual and projected quantities, workhours and costs for the project by cost code and compares
them to the budget by cost code. The projected cost compared to the estimated cost shows the
latest prediction of a profit or loss for the overall project. This report forewarns management of
specific work items that must be scrutinized closely to reduce losses to a minimum. If used
properly, the project cost summary can be used to implement accurate decisions before the costs
spiral out of control. The Projected Cost Summary Report is prepared from the budget and
detail cost ledgers and balanced to the accounting ledgers. The following discussion describes
each column of the Project Cost Summary Report and the procedure used to arrive at the correct
answer.
1.
Cost Code. The Cost code for the example is 035316.
2.
Activity Description. The activity description associated with the cost code of 035316 is
Wall Forms - 12".
3.
Item. This Column summarizes the Budget, Actual Costs and Projected costs for each
cost code by the following items.
CODE
ITEM
Quantity
Workhours
Labor
Material
Equipment
Subs
Sub Total Costs
4.
BUDGET INFORMATION from the Estimate Ledger

Original Budgeted column should reflect the quantities, workhours and cost
classifications taken from the original column in the estimate ledger. The Original
Budget in the example is 720 SFCA.
366

5.
Scope changes are increases or decreases in quantities, workhours and cost

classifications through approved contract change orders. The Scope changes are
obtained from the estimate ledger. Also, internal shifts in the cost classifications from
the original estimate to reflect the actual project being built called the budget are also
recorded here, but they must be kept separated from the contract change orders. The
Scope Changes in the example resulted in an additional 400 SFCA.
6.
Revised Budget is the Accumulative total for the actual project budget. The revised
budget is calculated by adding the Original Budgeted to the Scope Changes and showing
the net increase or decrease in the Revised Budget column. The Revised Budget in the
example is:
720 SFCA Original Budget + 400 SFCA Scope changes = 1120 SFCA
7.
8.
Expended Information from the Detail Cost Ledger

Period Expended column reflects the quantities, workhours and cost classifications that
have been expended since the last report. Normally, the period consists of one month.
The period items are obtained from the detail cost ledger. This is a stand-alone column it
is for reference purposes only.
Expended To Date. This column reflects the quantities, workhours and cost
classifications are an accumulation of previous period items expended. The Period
items are added to the to Date Figure from the Previous report to arrive at the Current
Expended To Date figure in this report. The To Date-Expended Column in the example
indicates that:
Expended
To Date
Committed
Cost
Expended
Total Costs
Quantity
124 SFCA
124 SFCA
Workhours
24 Whr
24 Whr
Labor Costs
$179
$179
Material Costs
$800
$341
$1,141
Equipment Costs
$421
$421
Subcontract Costs
$100
$120
$220
$1,500
$461
$1,961
Sub Total Costs for Cost Code 035316
367

9.
10.
Committed Costs are shown separately from the To Date Expended costs to indicate that
the contractor is contractually required to pay for an item but it has not actually been
paid for yet. This column is used to put cost items that you have contracted for such as
subcontracts and purchase orders immediately into the ledger system. The accounting
system usually only reflects actual expended costs, therefore, to obtain the Expended
Total Cost when the contract is 100% paid for it is placed into this column first. The
Committed Costs in the Example are:
Material Costs
$341.00
Subcontract Costs
$120.00
Subtotal Costs
$461.00
Expended Total column is calculated by adding the Expended To Date Column to the
Committed Costs column for each item. The Expended Totals in the example are:
Expended
Total
124 SFCA
24 W hr
$179
$1,141
$421
$220
$1,961
Committed Cost Example

For example, assume that you have signed a subcontract Agreement with the Electrical
contractor for $350,000. The contract calls for three monthly payments of $100,000 at the end
of the first month with subsequent payments of $125,000 and $125,000. Upon signing the
contract, the $350,000 would be placed into the Committed Cost column immediately and the
Committed Cost would be added to the Expended To Date Costs, which is $0 in the first month.
Therefore, the Expended Total Cost column would be $350,000.
Transaction
Date
Sub, Immediately
Expended
To Date
Committed
Cost
Expended
Total Cost
$350,000
$350,000
368

In the second month, the Expended To Date Costs would be $100,000 in the second month and
$250,000 would be placed into the Committed Cost column and the Committed Cost would be
added to the Expended To Date Costs of $100,000. Therefore, the Expended Total Cost column
would still be $350,000.
Transaction
Date
Sub, Second
Expended
To Date
Committed
Cost
Expended
Total Cost
$100,000
$250,000
$350,000
The purchase orders, subcontracts and rental Equipment are recorded into the detail cost ledger
as committed costs at the time they are written.
11.
Projections by the Project Manager

Current projection at Completion is a prediction of the total to be spent when the item is
100% complete. There are three methods for projecting at completion.
Using the Straight Line Projection Method and projecting the At Completion
(Forecast) number by multiplying the To Date Unit Cost ($/unit) times the Total
Budgeted Quantities.
Using the Expended Total Column and projecting the Expended Total column as
the projected at completion number.
Using the Revised Budget Column and projecting the Revised Budget as the
projected at completion number.
The Current Projection in the example was made based upon the following
methods.
Current
Projection
Quantity
Projection Method
1120 SFCA
Revised Budget
213 W hr
Straight Line
Labor Costs $179/124 SF = $1.44/SF x 1120 SF
$1,613
Straight Line
Material Costs
$1,141
Expended
Equipment Costs
$421
Expended
Subcontract Costs
$220
Expended
$3,395
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
W orkhours 24 W hr/124 SF = .19 x 1120 SF
Sub Total Costs for cost code 035316
369

12.
Projected Gain or (Loss) is calculated by subtracting the Current Projection from the
total Revised Budget and showing the net result: a gain or a (loss) shown in parentheses.
If the Projected Labor Cost at Completion is greater than the Total Revised Budgeted
Cost, you will show a (loss) in this column. If the Projected Labor Cost at Completion is
less than the total Revised Budgeted Cost, you will show a gain in this column.
Revised Budget
Quantity
Current Projection
Gain/(Loss)
1120 SFCA
1120 SFCA
192 W hr
213 W hr
(21) Whr
$3,595
$1,613
$1,982
Material Costs
$904
$1,141
($237)
Equipment Costs
$300
$421
($121)
Subcontract Costs
$207
$220
($13)
$5,006
$3,395
$1,611
W orkhours
Labor Costs
Sub Total Costs
035316
The completed Project Cost Summary Report is shown on the following page.
370

Project Cost Summary Example
PROJECT NAME JOBSITE USA
PROJECT NUMBER 001
CODE
ITEM
ORIGINAL
BUDGET
SCOPE
CHANGES
REVISED
BUDGET
EXPENDED
PERIOD
035316
COMMITTED
COST
EXPENDED
TO DATE
TOTAL COST
CURRENT
PROJECTED
COST
PROJECTED
GAIN/LOSS
W all Forms
Quantity
720Sf
400Sf
1120Sf
60Sf
124Sf
124Sf
1120Sf
0Sf
W orkhours
122W hr
70W hr
192W hr
24W hr
24W hr
213W hr
(21) Whr
Labor
$2310
$1285
$3595
$179
$179
$1613
$1982
Material
$400
504
904
800
1141
1141
(237)
Equipment
-0-
300
300
$421
421
421
(121)
Subcontracts
-0-
207
207
100
`120
220
220
(13)
$2710
$2296
$5006
$1500
$461
$1961
$3395
+1611
Sub Total Costs
[___
REVISED ESTIMATE 5006
MINUS
[_____
341
[______
CURRENT PROJECTION
$ 3395
371
[_____
EQUALS
PROJECTED GAIN(LOSS) BUDGET +1611

The Work Breakdown Structure
The Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) or the Master Code of Accounts should be developed by
the contractor for use on all projects throughout the company. The master Work Breakdown
Structure is a set of cost codes arranged into a hierarchy of recognizable categories used to
compare all estimated and actual costs on a project. The work breakdown structure is the key
element in a job cost control system. This portion of the cost control system is commonly
overlooked and little or no attention has been paid to its importance. For a control system to be
efficient, the work breakdown structure must follow a logical sequence of events and provide a
hierarchy of management reports designed to meet the information requirements at different
levels of management. The work breakdown structure is intended to provide a common basis
for integrating accounting, cost control, scheduling and estimating information. Flexibility must
be designed into the work breakdown structure to encompass all types of construction and it has
the capability of segregating costs for the client's capital cost records.
An approach commonly used to develop a code of accounts is to arrange the construction items
into the same categories and logical sequence the estimator uses when developing a quantity
takeoff and cost estimate. These categories are called a "hierarchy" and they are used to provide
management with reports that can be summarized at different levels. A typical Code of
Accounts requires a minimum of seven digits to work effectively. The components of a typical
code of accounts are shown below.
2
03
Size
Type of Operations
Tube & Coupler
Operations - Placing Scaffolding
1 _ _ _ Allocable Items or
2 _ _ _ Type of Work of Work Locations
Major Discipline or Division - Concrete Foundations
Cost Classification - Materials, Permanent
372

Cost Reports Exercise
Using the Earned Workhour Report information provided, Answer the following questions.
1.
What is the Budgeted Unit Workhours in Whr per Unit for the Column Forms?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
What is the Weekly Unit Workhours in Whr per Unit for the Column Forms?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
0.011
0.241
3.821
4.148
What are the Total Earned Workhours for the Column Forms?
A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
0.007
0.195
4.919
5.118
What is the To Date Unit Workhours in Whr per Unit for the Column Forms?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
0.045
0.171
0.241
5.838
19
27
465
2387
What is the Total Projected Workhours at Completion for the Column Forms?
A.
B.
C.
D.
27
104
602
2472
373

6.
What is the projected gain or loss in Workhours for the Column Forms?
A.
B.
C.
D.
(174)
325
1897
2396
Using the Labor Cost Report attached, answer the following questions.
7.
What is the Budgeted Labor Unit Cost in Dollars per unit for the Concrete Footings?
A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
What is the Week Labor Unit Cost in Dollars per unit for the Concrete Footings?
A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
0.70
1.43
3.14
14.60
What is the To Date Labor Unit Cost in Dollars per unit for the Concrete Footings?
A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
0.047
21.45
137.25
256.00
0.32
3.14
20.12
5125.00
What is the Total Projected Labor costs at Completion for the Concrete Footings?
A.
B.
C.
D.
81.41
803.84
5150.72
10615.00
374

11.
What is the projected gain or loss in Labor Dollars for the Concrete Footings?
A.
B.
C.
D.
(1.20)
(4685.00)
338.00
5452.46
Using the Project Cost Summary Report attached and the Forecast information below, answer
the following questions.
FORECAST the Current Projection column as follows:
QUANTITY - Project the REVISED ESTIMATE column
WORKHOURS - Project using the Straight Line Method
LABOR COST - Project using the Straight Line Method
MATERIAL COST - Project the REVISED ESTIMATE column
EQUIPMENT COST - Project the TOTAL EXPENDED column
SUBCONTRACT COST - Project the TOTAL EXPENDED column
12.
What is current projection for the quantities in Vertical Lineal Feet (VLF)?
A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
What is the current projection for the Workhours at completion?

A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
680
5300
5980
6700
78
473
618
686
What is the current projection for the labor costs at completion?

A.
B.
C.
D.
11,960
13557
14917
16817
375

15.
What is the current projection for the material costs at completion?

A.
B.
C.
D.
16.
What is the current projection for the Equipment costs at completion?

A.
B.
C.
D.
17.
0
7000
14000
21000
What is the current projection total costs at completion?

A.
B.
C.
D.
19.
1400
14640
16040
16960
What is the current projection for the subcontract costs at completion?

A.
B.
C.
D.
18.
7080
33470
40550
45225
29957
70170
76470
85080
What are the projected workhours gain or loss?

A.
B.
C.
D.
0
67
(134)
(218)
376

20.
What is the projected labor cost gain or loss?

A.
B.
C.
D.
21.
What is the projected material cost gain or loss?

A.
B.
C.
D.
22.
(6363)
(9843)
7975
14589
The estimated cost of a project if built today is $4,000,000 and the costs are expected to
rise 3.5 percent for the next 5 years. What will be the estimated cost if the project is
built five years from now?
A.
B.
C.
D.
24.
0
4675
7080
11755
What is the total projected gain or loss?

A.
B.
C.
D.
23.
(1900)
1900
2957
13557
$4,700,000
$4,750,745
17,936,133
24,213,779
The budget calls for 40,000 Lineal Feet of lumber and the labor is budgeted at $26,000.
The work completed to date is 8,000 Lineal Feet of lumber and the labor cost is $6,000.
What is the projected total labor cost savings or labor cost overrun at completion?
A.
B.
C.
D.
$2,000 savings.
$4,000 savings.
$4,000 overrun.
$10,000 savings.
377
Check Answers

Cost Reports Exercise - Earned Workhour Report Information
DESCRIPTION
QUANTITIES
BUDGET
Col. Forms
WEEK
UNIT
TO
DATE
WEEK
TO
DATE
WORKHOURS
EARNED
UNIT WORKHOURS
BUDGETED
SFCA
17
27
428
40
CY
40
85
360
30
34
CY
40
44
634
2417
210
410
SFCA
42
102
499
25,560
1880
3090
SFCA
364
664
5544
2499
87
112
Concrete Ftg
256
25
Concrete W a
453
Footing Frms
W all Forms
EXPENDED
WORKHOURS
378
BUDGET
WEEK
TO
DATE
PROJECTED
COMPLETION
GAIN/
LOSS

Cost Reports Exercise - Labor Cost Report Information
CODE
DESCRIPTION
QUANTITIES
EXPENDED COST
BUDGET
WEEK
TO
DATE
UNIT
WEEK
$
2499
87
112
SFCA
223
355
8022
Concrete Ftg
256
25
40
CY
365
805
5490
Concrete Walls
453
30
34
CY
394
431
9669
2417
210
410
SFCA
449
1038
8154
25,560
1880
3090
SFCA
3812
6855
90370
Col. Forms
Footing Form
W all Forms
TO
DATE
TOTAL
BUDGET
$
379
UNIT COST
BUDGET
WEEK
PROJECTED
TO
DATE
COMPLETION
GAIN/
LOSS

Cost Reports Exercise - Project Cost Summary Report Information
CODE
ITEM
ORIGINAL
ESTIMATE
SCOPE
CHANGE
REVISED
ESTIMATE
EXPENDED
WEEK
035600
COMMITTED
TOTAL
EXPEND
TO
DATE
PILES
Quantity
6700 VLF
(720)
5980 VLF
680
680
Workhours
618 W HR
(67)
551 W HR
78
78
Labor
16817
(1900)
14917
1360
1360
Material
45225
(4675)
40550
10000
23470
33470
Equipment
16040
(1400)
14640
7600
9360
16960
7000
7000
78082
(7975)
70107
25960
32830
58790
Subcontract
380
CURRENT
PROJECTION
PROJECTED
GAIN (LOSS)

PLANNING, SCHEDULING, AND CONTROL
The Components of the Precedence Diagram Method
The Precedence Diagram Method is referred to as Activity on the Node and each Box represents
an Activity. The Precedence Diagraming Method consists of the following parts.
A Rectangular Box represents a specific activity in the logic network. The Activity Description is
placed in the center of the box. The Activity Node Number is placed in the top center box. Each
activity is given a sequential non-consecutive number normally separated by 5 to 10.
The Duration is in Days and it is placed in the bottom center box. This Diagram Starts with Zero
(0) as the duration. The Activity Event Times are placed in the four corner boxes of each activity
for scheduling the project.
The Earliest Start (ES) Time is placed in the top left hand box. This Diagrams Earliest
Start (ES) Starts with Zero (0).
The Earliest Finish (EF) Time is placed in top right hand boxes.
The Latest Start (LS) Time is placed in the bottom left hand box
.
The Latest Finish (LF) Time is placed in the bottom right hand box
NODE NUMBER
|
ES
EF
START
LS
LF
|
DURATION
Precedence Diagram Abbreviations and Locations
381

The Project Activity Event Times
The Activity Event Times establish the Project Schedule. This step is dependent upon the logical
sequence being correct. Computations are performed to determine the overall project completion
date and the time requirements for each activity. To determine the project schedule, you must
perform these network computations. First, calculate the Forward Pass to determine the earliest
event times. The earliest event times calculations are described below.
The Earliest Start (ES) is placed in the top left hand portion of each activity. The ES is
calculated at each Activity by completing the Forward Pass (Tail to head of the arrow). Start at
the beginning of the project, use zero as the starting date and place in the top left hand portion of
the first activity. Then add the duration to the Earliest Start of the activity(s) and place in the top
right hand portion of the activity, called the Earliest Finish (EF).
To determine Earliest Start of the next activity(s) in the forward pass, select the Largest Early
Finish from all preceding paths coming into the specific activity and place in the top left hand
portion of the activity.
The Earliest Finish (EF) is placed in the top right hand portion of each activity. The EF is
calculated at each Activity by completing the forward pass (Tail to head of the arrow) and taking
the Earliest Start (ES) of that activity and adding the duration.
EF = ES + DURATION
Second, calculate the Backward Pass to determine the latest event times. The latest event time
calculations are described below.
The Latest Finish (LF) is placed in the bottom right hand portion of each activity. The LF is
calculated at each Activity by 1) completing the BACKWARD PASS (head to the tail of the
arrow). Start at the completion of the project and select the largest number and place in the
bottom right hand portion of the last activity or activities. Then, subtracting the duration from
the Latest Finish of that activity(s) and place in the bottom left hand portion of the activity, called
the Late Starts(LS).
To determine the Latest Finish of the next activity in the backward pass, select the smallest
Latest Start (LS) from all paths (head to the tail of the arrow) going into the specific activity and
place in the bottom right hand portion of the activity.
The Latest Start (LS) is placed in the bottom left hand portion of each activity. The LS is
calculated by taking the LATEST FINISH (LF) of that activity and subtracting the DURATION.
LS = LF - DURATION
382

The Total Float (TF) is defined as the amount of slack or leeway through a path of activities and
shared by all activities. Total Float is calculated by subtracting the Earliest Start (ES) from the
Latest Start (LS) or by subtracting the Earliest Finish (EF) from the Latest Finish (LF).
TF = LS - ES or TF = LF - EF
The Free Float (FF) is defined as the amount of slack or leeway within an activity. Free Float is
calculated by subtracting the Earliest Finish (EF) of that activity from the Earliest Start of the
next activity (ES(I)).
FF = ES(I) next activity - EF that activity
The Critical Path is defined as the longest continuous path or paths with zero float. This is the
path the project manager must focus their attention upon because if time is added to any of these
activities the project completion will be delayed. Also, to shorten the project schedule the
durations of the critical activities must be shortened.
The Critical Path is identified using this criteria For the Precedence Method:
A.
The Earliest Start (ES) is equal to the Latest Start (LS).

ES = LS
15
PLACE FOOTINGS
B.
The Earliest Finish (EF) is equal to the Latest Finish (LF).

EF=LF
C.
The Total Float (TF) and the Free Float (FF) are equal to Zero.
TF = 0 and FF = 0.
The critical path(s) is normally indicated on the diagram using slashed lines /////// or a heavy dark
line.
383

The Precedence Diagram Logic Network and Schedule Event Times Example
PRECEDENCE SCHEDULE EVENT TIME TABULATION SHEET

FOR THE PRECEDENCE DIAGRAM LOGIC
ACTIVITY
NODE
DAYS
EARLY
START
EARLY
FINISH
LATE
START
LATE
FINISH
TOTAL
FLOAT
FREE
FLOAT
START
15
0*
LAYOUT & EXC
20
0*
AWARD U/G UT
25
12
12 -3 = 9
PLACE FOOTING
30-35
12
12
0*
30-40
0*
PLACE WALL
35
12
17
12
17
12 - 12 = 0*
PLACE U/G UTIL
40
12
17
12
17
12 - 12 = 0*
END
45
17
17
17
17
0*
384

The Design Sequence for each Engineering Discipline
Each engineering discipline on a Design/Build Project must show the following design activities
on the logic diagram prior to the procurement sequence of activities. The general design
sequence of activities is shown below.
A.
Prepare the Schematic or Process Diagrams.
B.
Prepare the Design Development Drawing Packages.
C.
Formalize the Final Design and Develop the Contract Documents.
D.
Client Approves and Bid Plans Are Issued.
Each engineering discipline, such as civil engineering, structural engineering, processing piping
engineering, chemical engineering, mechanical engineering, electrical engineering and plumbing
design, will contain the following design sequence at the beginning of the logic diagram on a
separate line for each discipline. The design sequence for each engineering discipline will be
shown as follows.
The Procurement Sequence for each Discipline or Construction Trade

The Procurement Sequence (Material Leadtime) on a project is the amount of time required prior
to the item being installed at the jobsite. The following activities must be analyzed to determine
the total amount of leadtime required.
1.
Prepare Bid package, Request price Quotations, Select and award the contract to
the Vendor or Subcontractor.
2.
Vendor prepares and submits shop drawings, Product Data or Samples as outlined
in the Technical Specifications.
385

3.
Contractor reviews & approves field measurements and field construction

methods on the Shop Drawings.
4.
Architect or engineer reviews all design criteria prior to the fabrication or erection
of the item.
5.
Vendor or Subcontractor schedules the contract into their fabrication schedule and
shop fabricates the items according to the approved and revised drawings.
6.
Vendor arranges for shipment and delivers the materials to the job site.
Each Construction Trade, such as concrete, rebar, equipment, structural steel, sheet metal,
boilermaker, pipe fitter, instrumentation fitter, sprinkler fitter, insulator, electrical and plumbing,
will contain the following procurement sequence at the beginning of the logic diagram on a
separate line for each construction trade. The procurement sequence for each construction trade
will be shown as follows.
The courts have established rules for allowing the schedule to admissible evidence in a case. The
basic considerations are that the diagram method must show the interrelationships of activities.
Also, the project schedule must contain the design sequence, the procurement sequence, the
construction sequence, planned weather anticipated each month, inspections and testing, owner
furnished items, separate contracts negotiated by the owner, closeout procedures, and
commissioning activities. In addition the schedule must be updated regularly to show contract
change order and all delays whether caused by the contractor, the owner, the subcontractors or a
weather caused delay.
386

The Time Scaled Network Method
This method uses a graph with each column representing a duration, usually a day or week, and
each activity is displayed on the chart based upon the relationships of the other starting and
finishing activities. Also, described as a graphic display plotting the interrelationship of
activities using the Early Starts (ES) and Late Finishes (LF). The Time Scaled Diagraming
Method consists of the following parts.
The Activity is represented by an open bar.
The Length of Activity is represented by the length of the open bar. Stated in days.
The Activity Restraint is shown using a heavy vertical line with an arrow head.
The Activity Description is placed on the top of each bar.
The Duration is in Days. It is placed at the bottom left hand portion of each activity.
The Free Float is shown as a horizontal dotted line between each activity.
Given the Preceding and Following activities for the construction of a Basement Foundation.
Activity Description
Days
Preceding Activity
Following Activity
Layout & Excavate
None
Place Footing
Place Footing Forms
Layout & Excavation
Place Foundation W alls

Place U/G Utilities
Award U/G Utilities
None
Place Utilities
Place U/G Utilities
Award U/G Utilities

Place Footing Forms
None
Place Foundation W alls
Place Footing Forms
None
Time Scaled Network Example in Days

1
LAYOUT BLDG & EXCAVATE
10
11
13
15
PLACE FOOTING
PLACE END WALLS
AWARD U/G
UTILITIES
9 DAYS FLOAT
387
16
PLACE U/G UTILITIES
14
17
18
20
21

The Actual or the Effective Amount of Time
The Multi-crew Effective Durations is defined as the Actual or Effective amount of time
expended because multiple crews are working on a sequence of activities simultaneously. This
can be best shown using the following construction activities.
CSI
DIV
06
ACTIVITY
DESCRIPTION
CREW
SIZE
DAILY
OUTPUT
PLAN
QTY
ACTIVITY
DAYS
ACTUAL
DAYS
EXT STUDS
100 LF
280 LF
2.80
EXT SHEATH
1200 SF
3200 SF
2.67
INT STUDS
80 LF
160 LF
2.00
15
PLUMBING
58 LF
150 LF
2.58
15
HEATING
170 LF
120 LF
.70
16
ELECTRICAL
1300 LF
2600 LF
2.00
07
INSULATION
1000 SF
3200 SF
3.20
TOTALS
19
3.00
3.00
4.00
10.00
Using the Multi-crew Effective days from above, the Time-scaled Network & Crew Distribution
Chart is shown below. N showing each day and using the Time Scaled Network for the Multicrew information.
1
Place Exterior Studs
Plumbing
Place Exterior Sheathing
Heating
Place Interior Studs
Insulation
Electrical
388
10

The Crew Distribution (Utilization) Chart and Graph
Completing a construction project efficiently requires the efficient scheduling and allocation of
available resources, specifically the workers, equipment and materials available. Therefore, the
allocation or distribution of the workers and equipment required over the length of the project
provides you with the capability to determine if your planned schedule is feasible. This planned
schedule can than be compared to the physical size of the project and the availability of workers
and equipment within the area or within the company.
The crew distribution chart is developed using the Time Scaled Network and indicating the
number of workers for each activity. Finally, you total the number of workers for each day at the
bottom of the chart. This information is utilized to develop the crew utilization graph. This graph
indicates the planned crew sizes and the maximum total number of workers by month.
1
Place Exterior Studs
10
Heating
Place Interior Studs
Plumbing
Place Exterior Sheathing
Insulation
Electrical
10
10
Total Number of W orkers per Day
389

To Develop a Crew Utilization Chart the following steps are involved.
1.
Time Scale the Project using Latest Starts (LS)
2.
Determine the crew size for each activity and distribute for each activity. This can
be taken from the original estimate or it must be estimated for the Subcontractors.
3.
Total the number of workers required for each day.
4.
Using the worker totals, Prepare the crew utilization graph.
The Crew Utilization Graph below is for the number of workers anticipated for each day.
Number of Days
#
10
10
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
390

Project Scheduling Definitions
A Bar Chart is a graph showing the list of items down the left hand side, the Time periods across
the top, usually in months or weeks, and the time required to perform each activity is represented
by a thick dark line. The major disadvantages of a bar chart are 1) it does not show the
interrelationship of activities 2) it does not show the amount of float that may exist within the
activities and 3) it cannot predict a new course of action in case of a delay. The bar chart is an
extremely poor planning document for construction but it is an effective tool for displaying job
progress. Also, a bar chart which does not show the interrelationship of activities and the amount
of float available for each activity is not admissible evidence in court. But if the activities are
represented in a Time Scaled Network Form, showing the interrelationships of activities and their
available floats then it is admissible.
Fast Tracking is the overlapping accomplishment of Design, Procurement and Construction
activities to complete a project faster.
Crashing is the shortening of the project schedule along the critical path using the activities on
the critical path with the Least Cost. No activity can be crashed to a zero duration.
Resource Leveling is the shifting of activities within the schedule using the float times available.
This shifting occurs due to a limited number of resources available such as workers available,
equipment availability, material availability and subcontractors available.
Leadtime is the amount of time to procure the materials.
Activity Descriptions are extremely important because they convey to everyone using the logic
diagram what the primary activities that are included in each description. The activity
descriptions can be developed by reviewing the Technical Specifications Division and Section
headings such as CSI number 02225 titled Excavating, Backfilling and Compacting for
Trenching and 720 Storm Sewer System Piping. The two section from Division 02 Sitework can
be combined to have a construction activity description which reads Excavate, Place Pipe,
Backfill and Compact for the Storm Sewer System.
391

Activity Duration is the number of days required to install the quantity on a project. Using the
crew size and the daily output for an activity, you can determine the number of days required. For
example given the following crew size and daily output the number of days is calculated as
follows:
No.
CRAFT
Hours per
Day
Total W orkhours
Carpenters
x8
24
Building Laborer
x8
Total Per Day
x8
32
Hourly
Rate
Determine the Total Number of days to install the 1500 S.F.C.A.

Plan Quantities =
Daily output
1500 S.F.C.A. = 7.89 days

190 S.F.C.A./day
Activity Relationships
All logic diagrams require you to establish the interrelationship between activities by reading
each activity Forward and Backwards to establish the logic network. This requires you to
establish the interrelationship between activities using predecessors and successors. They are
defined below.
Predecessors are activities that must logically occur before another activity can start.
Successors are activities that must logically occur after another activity is completed
Precedence Activity Relationships
The Precedence Diagraming method lets you establish a variety of relationships between
activities. The Precedence Method allows you to establish these relationships. The Finish to Start
relationship is the most common relationship for non-overlapping activities. Other relationships
that can help you refine your schedule are the Start to Start and Finish to Finish relationships for
overlapping activity relationships. Below is a description of the Finish to Start relationship
The Finish-to-Start Relationship is the most utilized relationship and the one that is utilized in
establishing the initial relationships between activities. Finish-to-Start is a relationship in which
the successor activity can only start when the predecessor is finished. In other words, this
requires that the following activity (successor), cannot start until the preceding activity
(predecessor) is 100 percent complete. In the Example logic network, the Activity 70 cannot start
before the Client Review, Activity 10, is complete. In other words, the Design Process Diagram,
Activity 70, cannot start until the Client Review, Activity 10, is complete.
392

Planning & Scheduling Exercise
1.
Which of the following is the proper Design Activity Sequence that is used for every
design discipline (such as mechanical, electrical and structural) on a Design/Build logic
network according to acceptable legal practices.
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
Which of the following is the proper Procurement Activity Sequence that is used for
every Vendor or Supplier ( such as Rebar, Structural Steel and Sheet Metal) on a
Design/Build logic network according to acceptable legal practices.
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Design, Procurement, and Construction.

Order and Deliver Materials, Place Forms, Place Rebar, Pour Concrete, and Strip
Forms.
Award Vendor Contract, Vendor Prepares Shop Drawings, Contractor Reviews
Shops, A/E Reviews Shops, Vendor Fabricates and Delivers.
Prepare Design Plans, Award Vendor Contract, A/E Approves Design, Order
Materials, Fabricate, A/E Approves Shop Drawings, Contractor Approves Shop
Drawings, Vendor Delivers Materials.
Many times the contractor must indicate a sequence of activities as consecutive because
of crews or equipment available, What is the term for this sequence called?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Engineer, Design, and Build.

Design, Procurement, and Construction.
Prepare Schematic Diagrams, Prepare Preliminary Plans, Develop Contract
Documents, and Issue Bid Plans.
Obtain Construction Contract, Request Plans, Receive Plans, Award Subcontracts,
Procure materials, and Construct activities.
Restraints.
Total Float.
Critical Path.
Project duration.
Leadtimes are used to determine the estimated time durations for what type of activities?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Design Activities.
Procurement Activities.
Construction Activities.
Project Closeout Activities.
393

Questions 5 and 6 are based on the following information. A list of sequential activities
with a Finish to Start relationship and their estimated durations are provided below.
ACTIVITY DESCRIPTIONS
5.
Prepare the Reinforced Concrete Schematic drawings
28
Prepare the Preliminary Plans for the Reinforced Concrete Structure
32
Develop the Reinforced Concrete Bid and Contract Documents
12
Issue the Plans for Bidding and A/E Obtains bids
22
Award Rebar Vendor Contract
Vendor Prepares Rebar Shop Drawings
24
Contractor Reviews Rebar Shop Drawings
10
A/E Reviews Rebar Shop Drawings
10
Vendor Fabricates the Rebar according to Approved Shop Drawings
33
Deliver the Rebar to the Job Site
Contractor moves the Rebar from the storage area to the Placement Area (Rehandles)
Contractor installs the Rebar for the Footing Columns
Contractor calls for a Footing Inspection and the Inspector Inspects and Approves Rebar
Contractor Pours Concrete for the Columns
Contractor installs the Rebar for the Elevated Slab
What is the total estimated time in days for the Design of the Rebar?
A.
B.
C.
D.
6.
DAYS
60
94
184
197
What is the total estimated in days for the Rebar Leadtime?

A.
B.
C.
D.
90
94
103
197
394

7.
How should the nodes on a logic network be numbered?

A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
How is Free float defined?

A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
Crashing.
Fast tracking.
Resource Leveling.
Timed scaled networking.
What types of activities are considered first when shortening the length of a project?
A.
B.
C.
D.
11.
The amount of slack in a node.

The amount of slack within an activity.
The amount of slack within a path (series) of activities.
The amount of slack accumulated throughout the logic network.
What is the name of the term called for shortening a logic network?
A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
Consecutively.
Separated by a minimum of five numbers.
The preceding node is greater than the following node
The following node is greater than the concurrent node
Zero float and least cost.

Zero float and highest costs.
Highest floats and least cost.
High floats and highest costs.
What is the primary reason that the courts disfavor a Bar Chart?
A.
B.
C.
D.
It displays the activities time scaled.

It does not show the activity descriptions.
It displays the interrelationship of activities or the float within activities
It does not display the interrelationship of activities or the activity floats.
395

12.
How is the term fast tracking defined in construction?

A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
What is the name of the term for shifting the activities within their available free floats in
order to produce a uniform work force and reduce the maximum resource usage
requirements?
A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
Financial Reports and the Balance Sheets.
Estimate and the Earned Workhour report.
How is Total float defined?

A.
B.
C.
D.
16.
Crashing.
Crew Utilization.
Resource Leveling.
Time scaled Networking.
What is the best source for developing the activity descriptions for the logic network and
schedule?
A.
B.
C.
D.
15.
Planning and Scheduling the design

Overlapping execution of the construction activities.
Finalizing the design and procurement before construction begins.
Overlapping execution of the design, procurement and construction.
The amount of slack in a node.

The amount of slack within an activity.
The amount of slack within a path (series) of activities.
The amount of slack accumulated throughout the logic network.
For a Design-Build Schedule to be admissible evidence in court, it must contain the

Design Activity Sequence, Procurement Activity Sequence and the Construction Activity
sequence. Which of the following must also be on the preliminary schedule?
A.
B.
C.
D.
A bar-chart with owner-furnished items and planned weather losses each month
A time scaled with owner-furnished items and planned weather losses at the end.
A bar-chart with planned versus as-built activities, sequence changes & all delays.
A time scaled with owner-furnished items and planned weather losses each month
396

Questions 17 - 20 are based on the following diagram.
A letter has been placed at strategic locations within this diagraming method. Answer the
following questions concerning the locations.
17.
Using the diagram method above, What detail is displayed at Letter A?

A.
B.
C.
D.
18.
Using the diagram method above, What detail is displayed at Letter B?

A.
B.
C.
D.
19.
Late Start.
Late Finish.
Activity Node.
Activity Duration.
Using the diagram method above, What detail is displayed at Letter C?

A.
B.
C.
D.
20.
Late Start.
Early Start.
Early Finish.
Activity Node.
Late Start.
Early Finish.
Activity Node.
Activity Duration.
Using the diagram method above, What detail is displayed at Letter D?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Late Start.
Early Start.
Late Finish.
Activity Duration.
397

Questions 21 - 25 are based on the following diagram.
1
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
A
D
----B-------
A letter has been placed at strategic locations within this diagraming method.
21.
Using the Diagraming method above, What detail is displayed at letter A?

A.
B.
C.
D.
22.
Activity Duration.
Activity Restraint.
Activity Description.
Consecutive Activity.
Using the Diagraming method above, What detail is displayed at letter C?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Effective Days.
Job Description.
Activity Duration.
Activity Description.
23.
What does the Vertical line with arrowhead at D indicate?

A.
Float.
B.
Latest Start.
C.
Interrelationship.
D.
Activity Duration.
24.
What is this diagraming method called?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Arrow Diagraming Method.

Bar Chart Diagraming method.
Precedence Diagraming Method.
Time-scaled Diagraming Method.
398
18
20
21

Questions 25 - 27 are based on the following Crew information table.
ACTIVITY
CREW
SIZE
DAILY
OUTPUT
PLAN
QUANTITY
EXTERIOR MASONRY
400 SF
3220 SF
INTERIOR MASONRY
750 SF
8952 SF
BOND BEAM LINTELS
280 LF
338 LF
SAW ING MASONRY
300 LF
2522 LF
W ALL REINFORCING
20 CLF
35 CLF
W ASH INTERIOR W ALL
4000 SF
8952 SF
ACTIVITY
DURATION
EFFECTIVE
DAYS
Assume that the interior and the exterior walls both require bond beams lintels, joint
reinforcement and sawing of masonry.
25.
How many (whole) activity days are needed to complete the Interior Masonry?
A.
B.
C.
D.
26.
Which activities can be going on concurrently?

A.
B.
C.
D.
27.
1
8
12
34
Interior Masonry and Wash Interior Walls.

Exterior Masonry, Bond Beam, Sawing Masonry and Wall Reinforcement.
Exterior and Interior Masonry, Bond Beams, Sawing Masonry and Reinforcement.
Exterior and Interior Masonry, Bond Beams, Sawing, Reinforcement and Washing
the Interior Walls.
How many (whole) effective days to complete this sequence of activities?

A.
B.
C.
D.
9
15
21
34
399

Questions 28 - 31 refer to the John Adams Logic Diagram Exhibit # 1776.
28.
What is the total number of days to complete this sequence of activities?

A.
B.
C.
D.
29.
What are the critical activities for this logic network?

A.
B.
C.
D.
30.
B, G
A, C, F
A, D, E, G
A, C, F, G
What is the total float for activity B?

A.
B.
C.
D.
31.
13
14
18
31
0
1
2
8
What is the free float between activity C and G?

A.
B.
C.
D.
0
1
10
20
400

Planning & Scheduling Exercise for the John Adams Logic Network
ACTIVITY
NODE
DAYS
Start
B
EARLY
START
EARLY
FINISH
LATE
START
LATE
FINISH
0
12-35
John Adams Logic Network Exhibit # 1776
401
TOTAL
FLOAT
FREE
FLOAT

Questions 32 - 35 refer to the George Mason Logic Network Diagram Exhibit # 1777.
32.

A.
B.
C.
D.
33.

A.
B.
C.
D.
34.
R, P
M, Q, P
M, O, P, Q
M, N, O, P, Q
What is the total float for activity R?

A.
B.
C.
D.
35.
14
15
18
32
0
1
2
8
What is the free float between activity N and 0?

A.
B.
C.
D.
0
1
10
20
402

Planning & Scheduling Exercise for the George Mason Logic Network
Activity
NODE
DAYS
START
EARLY
START
0
EARLY
FINISH
0
M
N
O
P
Q
R
403
LATE
START
0
LATE
FINISH
0
TOTAL
FLOAT
0
FREE
FLOAT
0

Questions 36 - 40 refer to the George Washington Logic Network Exhibit # 1787.
36.

A.
B.
C.
D.
37.

A.
B.
C.
D.
38.
0
15
17
20
What is the free float between activity F and K?

A.
B.
C.
D.
40.
D, J, K.
A, E, M
D, G, M.
D, H, J, K
What is the total float for Activity C?

A.
B.
C.
D.
39.
21
25
37
93
12
16
17
28
Reduce activities A, B, D and G each by two days. What is the length of the project?
A.
B.
C.
D.
21
29
35
85
Check Answers
404

Planning & Scheduling Exercise for the George Washington Logic
405

Planning & Scheduling Exercise Event Times Schedule Tabulation Sheet
for the George Washington Logic Network Exhibit # 1787
ACTIVITY
NODE
DAYS
EARLY
START
EARLY
FINISH
LATE
START
LATE
FINISH
TOTAL
FLOAT
FREE
FLOAT
START
10
16
25
16
15
16
20
16
20
17
20
17
25
13
13
13
30
16
25
32
16
35
12
20
28
16
16
40
13
20
25
32
12
45
13
13
26
24
37
11
11
50
15
13
28
13
28
60
28
37
28
37
55
20
25
32
37
12
12
FINISH
65
37
37
37
37
406

CONSTRUCTION SAFETY
The Code of Federal Regulations (CFR)
This is a codification of the general and permanent rules published in the Federal Register by the
Executive departments and agencies of the Federal Government. The Code is divided into 50
titles which represent broad areas subject to Federal regulation. Each title is divided into chapters
which usually bear the name of the issuing agency. Each chapter is further subdivided into parts
covering specific regulatory areas. Based on this breakdown, the Occupational Safety and Health
Administration is designated Title 29-Labor, and Chapter XVII is set aside for the Occupational
Safety and Health Administration. Each volume of the Code is revised at least once each calendar
year and issued on a quarterly basis. OSHA's regulations (Title 29) are therefore issued as of July
1. The approximate revision date is printed on the cover of each volume.
The Code of Federal Regulations is kept up to date by the individual issues of the Federal
Register. These two publications (the CFR and the Federal Register) must be used together to
determine the latest version of any given rule. To determine whether there have been any
amendments since the revision date of the Code volume in which the user is interested, the
following two lists must be consulted: the "Cumulative List of CFR Sections Affected" which is
issued monthly and the "Cumulative List of Parts Affected" which appears daily in the Federal
Register. These two lists refer the reader to the Federal Register page where the latest
amendment of any given rule can be found. The pages in the Federal Register are numbered
sequentially from January 1 to January 1 of the next year.
The Title 29, Chapter XVII, the regulations are further broken down into Parts. For example, Part
1926, is titled Construction Safety Standards. Some Parts are considered general because they
apply to any employer in any industry. Other General Parts that are applicable to Construction are
Part 1903 titled OSHA Inspections, Part 1904 titled OSHA Record Keeping, specific portions of
Part 1910 titled General Industry such as fire protection is pertinent to construction, and the
General Duty clause under Section 5(a) (1) are additional regulations that the contractor must
comply with according to the Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
OSHA Paragraph Numbering
The paragraph numbering for the Code of Federal Regulations and the Federal Register is
shown below. We will use this citation number to describe each portion of the citation.
29 CFR 1926.950(c)(1)(iii)
From this example, the first number 29 is the Title 29 for Labor. The second abbreviation is CFR
which is the abbreviation for Code of Federal Regulations. The third number is the Part number
which is 1926 the Construction Safety Standards. Next you see a period. Following the period is
an arabic number which is the Section Number. This Section Number is also related to a Subpart
407

Letter and a Subpart Name. These subpart letters are used to organize the OSHA Compliance
officers Field Manual developed by the OSHA Training Institute (OTI). The OTI has taken the
major blocks of information in Part 1926 and broken them into subparts and categorized them as
A - Z. The OTI Compliance Officers Field Manual contains compliance (CPL) directives. Also,
it contains formal interpretations of an OSHA regulation using acronym STD for the standards.
In this example the Subpart V is titled, Power Transmission and Distribution case, and under the
Section .950 it is titled, General Requirements. Continuing the citation numbering system for
Subpart V is titled, Power Transmission and Distribution case, and under the Section .950 which
is titled, General Requirements.
29 CFR 1926.950(c)(1)(iii)
After the 1926.950, the next breakdown is by paragraphs. As you can see, the first tier of
paragraphs beneath the Section level will be numbered in parentheses using lowercase
alphabetical such as (a), (b), (c), (d), etc. as will all further designations, so that if you only had
three major paragraphs of information under a section, they would be numbered .950(a), .950(b),
and .950(c).
Using Section Number .950 General Requirements, Complete the Descriptions for each
Paragraph Number is 1926.950 (a) is titled Application, 1926.950 (b) is titled, Initial inspections,
tests, or determinations, 1926.950 (c) is titled, Clearances and 1926.950 (d) is titled, Deenergizing line and equipment.
The second tier of paragraphs beneath the section level will be numbered in parentheses using
arabic numbers. As an illustration, if there were three paragraphs of information between
subheadings (c) and (d), they would be numbered (c)(1), (c)(2), and (c)(3). In the Example,
1926.950(c)(1) states that No employee shall be permitted to approach or take any conductive
object without an approved insulating handle close to exposed energized parts than shown in
Table V-1, unless:
(iii) reads The Employee is isolated, insulated, or guarded from any other conductive
object(s), as during live-line bare-hand work. Also, 1926.950(c)(2) reads, The minimum
working distances and minimum clear hot stick distances shall not be violated.
The third tier of paragraphs beneath the section level will be numbered in parentheses using
lowercase roman numeral. An example would be between paragraphs (1) and (2). If there were
five paragraphs of information pertaining too arabic (1) they would be numbered (1)(i), (1)(ii),
(1)(iii), (1)(iv), and (1)(v). Finally, OSHA maintains a record of the most frequently cited Serious
Violations. For example, the serious violations in Subpart V - Power and Transmission
Distribution for a given year were 1926.950 (c)(1) Minimum Clearances for Working Near
energized parts were violated, and 1926.950 (c)(1)(I) Employees was not insulated.
408

OSHA Recordkeeping
According to the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) Title 29 CFR PART
1904 - Recording and Reporting Occupational Injuries and Illnesses and according to Section
number 1904.15 it states that Employers who had no more than ten (10) employees at any time
during the calendar year immediately preceding the current calendar year need not comply with
any of the requirements of this part except the following.
(a)
Obligation to report fatality or multiple hospitalization (3 or more employees, a

catastrophe) incidents within 8 hours from a work-related incident; and
(b)
Obligation to maintain a log of occupational injuries and illnesses and to complete

an Occupational Injuries and Illnesses Survey requested in writing from the
Bureau of Labor Statistics.
The regulation also states that an employer with eleven or more employees must maintain the
following OSHA records.
1.
OSHAs Log of Work-Related Injuries and Illnesses (OSHAs Form 300). This Log may
be maintained at an alternate location if updates are sent to the specific job site within 6
days of any recordable or within 45 days of the previous update.
2.
OSHAs Injury and Illness Incident Report (OSHAs Form 301). This record describes
how the accident or illness exposure occurred, lists the objects or substances involved,
and indicated the nature of the injury or illness and the part(s) of the body affected.
3.
OSHAs Summary of Work-Related Injuries and Illnesses (OSHAs Form 300A). Each
employer must post a copy of the companys summary in a location visible to all
employees. The summary will cover the previous calendar year and it shall be posted no
later than February 1, and shall remain in place until March 1 each year.
OSHA has also established some rules to determine if a case is recordable or non recordable.
Therefore, you must inquire about the following.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Determine whether a case occurred; that is, whether there was a death, illness, or injury;
Establish that the case was work related; that it resulted from an event or exposure in the
work environment;
Decide whether the case is an injury or an illness; and
If the case is an illness, record it and check the appropriate illness category on the log; or
If the case is an injury, decide if it is recordable based on a finding of medical treatment,
loss of consciousness, restriction of work or motion, or transfer to another job.
409

The first step in the decision making process is the determination of whether or not an injury or
illness has occurred. Employers have nothing to record unless an employee has experienced a
work-related injury or illness. In most instances, recognition of these injuries and illnesses is a
fairly simple matter. However, two situations have troubled employers over the years. They are
described below.
1.
Hospitalization for observation. If an employee goes to or is sent to a hospital for a brief

period of time for observation, it is not recordable, provided no medical treatment was
given, or no illness was recognized. The determining factor is not that the employee went
to the hospital, but whether the incident is recordable as a work-related illness or as an
injury requiring medical treatment or involving loss of consciousness, restriction of work
or motion, or transfer to another job.
2.
Differentiating a new case from the recurrence of a previous injury or illness. Employers
are required to make new entries on their OSHA forms for each new recordable injury or
illness. However, recurrence of symptoms from previous case(s) is not recordable, and it
is sometimes difficult to decide whether or not a situation is a new case or a recurrence.
The guidelines below describe recurring injuries and illnesses and whether they are
recordable.
For instance, if a previous injury is aggravated, it almost always results from some new
incident involving the employee such as a slip, a trip, a fall, or a sharp twist, etc.
Consequently, when work related, these new incidents should be recorded as new cases.
Another incident is an Illness. Generally, each occupational illness should be recorded
with a separate entry. However, certain illnesses, such as silicosis, may have prolonged
effects which recur over time. The recurrence of these symptoms should not be recorded
as new cases on the OSHA forms. The recurrence of symptoms of previous illnesses may
require adjustment of entries on the log for previously recorded illnesses to reflect
possible changes of the particular case. Some occupational illnesses, such as dermatitis or
respiratory conditions, may recur as the result of new exposures to sensitizing agents, and
should be recorded as new cases.
A case is work related if it meets the following criteria. If an Injury or an illness results from an
event or exposure in the employer's work areas of the premises, these are considered work
related. Situations where the work area would not apply include the following. First, (1) When a
worker is on the premises as a member of the general public and (2) when employees have
symptoms that surface on the employer's premises, but is a result of a non work-related event.
Also, the work premises excludes all employers controlled ball fields, tennis courts and other
similar recreational facilities which are used by employees on voluntary basis for their own
benefit. Finally, company parking lots are excluded as work premises.
410

Under the OSHA Record keeping regulations, all work-related illnesses must be recorded, while
injuries are recordable only when they require medical treatment (other than first aid), or involve
loss of consciousness, restriction of work or motion, or transfer to another job. The distinction
between injuries and illnesses, therefore, has significant record keeping implications.
Whether a case involves an injury or illness is determined by the nature of the original event or
exposure which caused the case, not by the resulting condition of the affected employee. Injuries
are caused by instantaneous events in the work environment. Cases resulting from anything other
than instantaneous events are considered illnesses. This concept of illnesses includes acute
illnesses which result from exposures of relatively short duration.
Some conditions may be classified as either an injury or an illness (but not both), depending upon
the nature of the event that produced the condition. For example, a loss of hearing resulting from
an explosion (an instantaneous event) is classified as an injury; the same condition arising from
exposure to industrial noise over a period of time would be classified as an occupational illness.
The OSHA record keeping regulations state that employers are required to record the occurrence
of all occupational illnesses, which are defined in the instructions of the log and summary as:
Any abnormal condition or disorder, other than one resulting from an occupational injury,
caused by exposure to environmental factors associated with employment. It includes
acute and chronic illnesses or diseases which may be caused by inhalation, absorption,
ingestion, or direct contact.
The instructions also refer to recording illnesses which were"diagnosed or recognized." Illness
exposures ultimately result in conditions of a chemical, physical, biological, or psychological
nature. Occupational illnesses must be diagnosed to be recordable. However, they do not
necessarily have to be diagnosed by a physician or other medical personnel.
A Recordable Work-related Injury under the OSHA regulations requires that all work-related
deaths and illnesses be recorded, It also requires the recording of nonfactual injuries, but it is
limited to certain specific types of cases such as those which require medical treatment; or
involve the loss of consciousness; or a restriction of work or motion; or transfer to another job.
Also, any minor injury which requires only first aid treatment is not recordable. The OSHA
regulations also distinguish between medical treatment and first aid treatment since many workrelated injuries are recordable only because medical treatment was given.
The regulations and the instructions on the back of the OSHA Log and Summary defines medical
treatment as any treatment, other than first aid treatment, administered to injured employees.
Essentially, medical treatment involves the provision of medical or surgical care for injuries that
are not minor through the application of procedures or systematic therapeutic measures.
411

The regulations also specifically state that work-related injuries which involve only first aid
treatment should not be recorded. First aid is commonly thought to mean emergency treatment
of injuries before regular medical care is available. However, first aid treatment has a different
meaning for OSHA record keeping purposes. The regulations define first aid treatment as:
...any one-time treatment, and any follow-up visit for the purpose of observation, of minor
scratches, cuts, burns, splinters, and so forth, which do not ordinarily require medical
care. Such one-time treatment, and follow-up visit for the purpose of observation, are
considered first aid even though provided by a physician or registered professional
personnel.
The distinction between medical treatment and first aid depends not only on the treatment
provided, but also on the severity of the injury being treated. First aid is: (1) Limited to onetime treatment and subsequent observation; and (2) involves treatment of only minor injuries, not
emergency treatment of serious injuries. Injuries are not minor if:
a.
b.
c.
d.
They must be treated only by a physician or licensed medical personnel;

They impair bodily function (i.e., normal use of senses, limbs, etc.);
They result in damage to the physical structure of a non superficial nature (e.g.,
fractures); or
They involve complications requiring follow-up medical treatment.
Physicians or registered medical professionals, working under the standing orders of a physician,
routinely treat minor injuries, such treatment may constitute first aid. Also, some visits to a
doctor do not involve treatment at all. For example, a visit to a doctor for an examination or other
diagnostic procedure to determine whether the employee has an injury does not constitute
medical treatment. Conversely, medical treatment can be provided to employees by lay person;
i.e., someone other than a physician or registered medical personnel. The following procedures
provide a guide for determining whether the injury is classified as medical treatment or first aid
treatment.
412

Recordable Work-Related Medical Treatment
The following are generally considered medical treatment. These are Work-related injuries for
which this type of treatment was provided or should have been provided. Medical Treatment
cases are almost always recordable. The following items are considered medical treatment cases.
*Treatment of INFECTION
*Application of ANTISEPTICS during second or subsequent visit to medical personnel
*Treatment of SECOND OR THIRD DEGREE BURN(S)
*Application of SUTURES (stitches)
*Application of BUTTERFLY ADHESIVE DRESSINGS(S) OR STERI STRIP(S) in lieu of
sutures
*Removal of FOREIGN BODIES EMBEDDED IN EYE
*Removal of FOREIGN BODIES FROM WOUND; if procedure is complicated because of
depth of embedment, size, or location
*Use of PRESCRIPTION MEDICATIONS (except a single dose administered on first visit for
minor injury or discomfort)
*Use of hot or cold SOAKING THERAPY during second or subsequent visit to medical
personnel
*Application of hot or cold COMPRESS(ES) during second or subsequent visit to medical
personnel
*CUTTING AWAY DEAD SKIN (surgical debridgement)
*Application of HEAT THERAPY during second or subsequent visit to medical personnel
*Use of WHIRLPOOL BATH THERAPY during second or subsequent visit to medical
personnel
*POSITIVE X-RAY DIAGNOSIS(fractures, broken bones, etc.)
*ADMISSION TO A HOSPITAL or equivalent medical facility for treatment
413

Non-recordable Work-Related First Aid Treatment
The following are generally considered first aid treatment (e.g., one-time treatment and
subsequent observation of minor injuries) and should not be recorded if the work-related injury
does not involve loss of consciousness, restriction of work or motion, or transfer to another job:
*Application of ANTISEPTICS during first visit to medical personnel
*Treatment of FIRST DEGREE BURN(S)
*Application of BANDAGE(S) during any visit to medical personnel
*Use of ELASTIC BANDAGES(S)during first visit to medical personnel
*Removal of FOREIGN BODIES NOT EMBEDDED IN EYE if only irrigation is required
*Removal of FOREIGN BODIES FROM WOUND; if procedure is UNCOMPLICATED,
*SOAKING THERAPY on initial visit or removal of bandages by SOAKING
*Application of hot or cold COMPRESS(ES) during first visit to medical personnel
*Application of OINTMENTS to abrasions to prevent drying or cracking
*Application of HEAT THERAPY during first visit too medical
*Use of WHIRLPOOL BATH THERAPY during first visit to medical personnel
*NEGATIVE X-RAY DIAGNOSIS
*OBSERVATION of injury during visit to medical personnel.
The following procedure, by itself, is not considered medical treatment:
*Administration of TETANUS SHOT(S) or BOOSTER(S).
414

Other Nonfatal Criteria to Determine if an Injury is Recordable
Other nonfatal criteria utilized for determining if an injury is recordable or not are described
below. First, if an employee loses consciousness as the result of a work-related injury, the case
must be recorded no matter what type of treatment was provided. The rationale behind this
recording requirement is that loss of consciousness is generally associated with the more serious
injuries.
Second, is a restriction of work or motion. Restricted work activity occurs when the employee,
because of the impact of a job-related injury, is physically or mentally unable to perform all or
any part of his or her normal assignment during all or any part of the workday or shift. The
emphasis is on the employee's ability to perform normal job duties. Restriction of work or motion
may result in either a lost work time injury or a non-lost-work time injury, depending upon
whether the restriction extended beyond the day of injury.
Third, is a transfer to another job. Injuries requiring transfer of the employee to another job are
also considered serious enough to be recordable regardless of the type of treatment provided.
Transfers are seldom the sole criterions for recordability because injury cases are almost always
recordable on other grounds, primarily medical treatment or restriction of work or motion.
Once the employer decides that a recordable injury or illness has occurred, the case must be
evaluated to determine its extent or outcome. There are three categories of recordable cases:
They are fatalities, lost workday cases, and cases without lost workdays. Every recordable case
must be placed in only one of these categories. A description of each category is provided below.
First, are Fatalities. All Work-related Fatalities must be recorded, regardless of the time between
the injury and the death, or the length of the illness. Second, are Lost Workday Cases. These
occur when the injured or ill employee experiences either days away from work, days of
restricted work activity, or both. In these situations, the injured or ill employee is affected to
such an extent that: (1) Days must be taken off from the job for medical treatment or
recuperation; or (2) the employee is unable to perform his or her normal job duties over a normal
work shift, even though the employee may be able to continue working.
415

Lost workday cases involving days away from work are cases resulting in days the employee
would have worked but could not because of the job-related injury or illness. The focus of these
cases is on the employee's inability, because of injury or illness, to be present in the work
environment during their normal work shift. Lost workday cases involving days of restricted
work activity are those cases where, because of injury or illness, (1) the employee was assigned
to another job on a temporary basis, or (2) the employee worked at a permanent job less than full
time, or (3) the employee worked at his or her permanently assigned job but could not perform all
the duties normally connected with it. Restricted work activity occurs when the employee,
because of the job-related injury or illness, is physically or mentally unable to perform all or any
part of his or her normal job duties over all or any part of his or her normal workday or shift.
The emphasis is on the employee's inability to perform normal job duties over a normal work
shift. Injuries and illnesses are not considered lost workday cases unless they affect the employee
beyond the day of injury or onset of the illness. When counting the number of days away from
work or days of restricted work activity, do not include the initial day of the injury or onset of
illness, or any days on which the employee would not have worked such as holidays, vacations,
etc.
Third, is Cases Not Resulting in Death or Lost Workdays. These cases consist of the relatively
less serious injuries and illnesses which satisfy the criteria for recordability but which do not
result in death or require the affected employee to have days away from work or days of
restricted work activity beyond the date of injury or onset of illness.
416

OSHA Record Keeping Exercise
Each multiple choice question in this examination will be followed by four choices for an
answer. Only one of these four choices is the correct answer. Please circle the correct answer.
1.
What is the correct name for the acronym OSHA mean?

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
What is the purpose of the OSHA law?

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Code of Federal Register.

Code of Federal Regulations.
Construction Federal Register.
Construction Federal Regulations.
Which document is utilized to keep the CFR up to date?

A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
Protect companies from safety violations.

Prohibit safety violations against individuals.
Provide a place of employment free from safety hazards.
Prohibit safety violations against individuals with disabilities.
The Safety Standards utilize the abbreviation 29 CFR Part 1926, What does the acronym
CFR stand for?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Office of Safety and Health Administration.

Occupational Safety and Health Association.
Organizational Safety and Health Affiliation.
Occupational Safety and Health Administration.
Federal Register.
Federal Regulations.
Federal Compliance Standards.
Federal Safety and Health Violations.
Which Part of the OSHA Standards is designated for Recordkeeping?

A.
B.
C.
D.
5(a)(1)
1904
1910
1926
417

6.
Which Part of the OSHA Standards is designated for Inspections?

A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
Which Part of the OSHA Standards is designated for General Industry?

A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
Compliance.
Code Personnel.
Competent Personnel.
Construction Personnel.
What does the safety acronym STD stand for?

A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
1903
1904
1910
1926
What does the safety acronym CPL stand for?

A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
5(a)(1)
1903
1910
1926
Standard.
Short Term Directive.
Safety Training Directive.
Safety Training and Development.
What is the purpose of an STD?

A.
B.
C.
D.
To provide a formal interpretation of an OSHA Regulation.

To provide advice about an OSHA Regulation.
To protect companies from safety violations.
To prohibit companies from safety violations.
418

11.
What does the safety acronym MSDS stand for?

A.
B.
C.
D.
12
Which of the following activities is considered a Work related recordable?

A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
Employee loses consciousness.

Treatment of first degree burn(s).
Application of bandage(s) during any visit to medical personnel.
Application of Antiseptics during first visit to medical personnel.
Which of the following is considered a Work related recordable?

A.
B.
C.
D.
15.
A worker employed by you, is on the premises to visit and gets injured.

You get ill from the fumes while working in a certain area of the project.
You are playing Racquetball at the employer owned courts on your break with
another employee and you are injured.
You are coming to work and you get injured in the parking lot as you exit the car.
Which of the following is considered a Work related recordable?

A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
Master Safety Data Sheet.

Material Safety Data Sheet.
Material Standard Data Sheet.
Management Safety Designated Standard.
Removal of foreign bodies embedded in the eye.

Removal of foreign bodies not embedded in the eye.
Removal of foreign bodies from uncomplicated wound.
Application of hot or cold compress(es) during first visit to medical personnel.
Which of the following is described in STD 3-1.1 of an accident prevention program?

A.
B.
C.
D.
A log of all previous safety violations for the company.

Written job safety analysis that must be available for OSHA inspector.
Guidelines for the minimum elements of an accident prevention program.
Evaluation of their accident program by a Certified Safety Professional (CSP).
419

16.
Which of the following is true of the OSHA training regulations?

A.
B.
C.
D.
17.
According to OSHA, which document must be filled out immediately after an accident by
the supervisor describing the accident in detail?
A.
B.
C.
D.
18
Company Safety Policy, OSHA Common Violations, Injury Log.

Variance Approval, Rights and Responsibilities Form, Citations.
Worker Compensation rules, Compliance Sheet, Supplemental Record of Injury.
Job Safety/ Health Regulations, Material Safety Data Sheet Notice, Emergency #.
When and Where must the OSHA Summary (OSHA 300A) be posted?
A.
B.
C.
D.
20.
Insurance forms.
OSHAs Summary of Work-Related Injuries and Illnesses (OSHAs 300A)
OSHAs Log of Work-Related Injuries and Illnesses (OSHAs Form 300)
OSHAs Injury and Illness Incident Report (OSHAs Form 301).
According to OSHA, which information must be posted at the job site and easily
accessible to all employees at all times?
A.
B.
C.
D.
19.
Employer must train all employees annually.

Employer must maintain a record of training with date, time, and subject.
Employer must train all employees regularly in safety recognition and avoidance.
Employer must have an OSHA Approved Certified Trainer to teach employees.
All year long and easily accessible to all employees at the job site.
All year long and in the Project Managers office in the main office.
February 1 - April 1 and accessible to all employees at the jobsite.
February 1 - April 1 and in the office employees break room in the main office.
The OSHA Act states that "each employer shall furnish too each employee a place of
employment which is free from recognized hazards that are causing or likely to cause
death or serious physical harm to an employee." Which section is this stated in?
A.
B.
C.
D.
5(a)(1)
1910.10 (a)
1926.10(a)
1903.10 (a)
420
Check Answers

OSHA Inspection Process
Under Section 5(a) (1) of the General Duty Clause it states that, "Each employer (and its
representatives) shall furnish to each of its employees, employment and a place of employment
which are free from recognized hazards that are causing or are likely to cause death or serious
physical harm to an employee."
What elements are necessary to prove a violation under the general duty clause?
According to OSHA for a violation to exist under the General Duty Clause, the compliance
officer must prove that the following four elements existed.
1.
The employer failed to keep the workplace free of a hazard to which employees of that
employer were exposed.
2.
The hazard was recognized.
3.
The hazard was causing or was likely to cause death or serious harm.
4.
There was a feasible and useful method to correct the hazard.
Element 1 - A Hazard to which Employees Were Exposed:

A general duty violation must involve both a serious hazard and exposure to employees. A
hazard is a danger which threatens physical harm to employees. It is not the lack of a particular
abatement method nor a particular accident.
The hazard was reasonably foreseeable.
The hazard must affect the cited employer's employees.
Element 2 - The Hazard Must Be Recognized:
Recognition of a hazard can be established on the basis of industry recognition, employer
recognition, or "common sense" recognition.
Element 3 - The Hazard Was Likely to Cause Death or Serious Physical Harm:
This element of a Section 5(a)(1) violation is similar to the substantial probability element of a
serious violation under Section 17(k) of the Act (P.L. 91-596).
Element 4 - The Hazard Must Be Corrected by a Feasible and Useful Method.
To establish a violation under 5 (a) (1), a method which is feasible, available and likely to correct
the hazard must be identified. The information must indicate that a recognized hazard, rather
than a particular accident, is preventable.
421

OSHA Inspection Priorities
OSHA has established a system of inspection priorities based upon the following criteria:
Imminent Danger situations are given top priority. An imminent danger is any condition where
there is reasonable certainty that a danger exists that can be expected to cause death or serious
physical harm immediately or before the danger can be eliminated through normal enforcement
procedures. If an imminent danger situation is found, the compliance officer will ask the
employer to voluntarily abate the hazard and to remove endangered employees from exposure.
The second priority for an inspection is a Fatal Accident or a Catastrophe resulting in the
hospitalization of three or more employees. The third inspection priority is Formal Employee
Complaints of alleged violations of standards or of unsafe or unhealthful working conditions.
The fourth inspection priority is Programmed Inspections which are aimed at specific high
hazard industries. Industries are selected for inspection on the basis of factors such as the injury
incidence rates, previous citation history, employee exposure to toxic substances, or random
selection. The fifth inspection category is Follow-up Inspections to determine if previously cited
violations have been corrected. If an employer has failed to abate a violation, the compliance
officer informs the employer that they are subject to a "Failure to Abate" citation for the alleged
violations and proposed additional daily penalties while such failure to abate or violation
continues.
The OSHA regulation also identifies the Safety Notices or Postings that must be posted at the job
site. You must have the following posters visible to all employees at the job site.
1.
2.
3.
A safety poster titled "Safety and Health Protection on the Job."

An MSDS poster indicating the location of all Material Safety Data Sheets.
An Emergency Information poster. This poster provides the local phone numbers for Fire,
Police, Ambulance, Hospital.
Also, the OSHA Officers compliance manual describes the Job site Safety Inspection process
that the Safety Compliance officer will follow when they arrive at the job site. First, they will
determine who is in charge or the person that is designated as the safety site representative. Then
the Safety Compliance Officer will present their credential. Finally, the Safety officer will
conduct an opening conference and they will explain the purpose of the visit and describe the
inspection is based on an immediate danger, fatal accident, employee complaint, programmed
inspection, or follow-up inspection. They will ask the Supervisor if the employees have a
representative. If there is not an authorized employee representative, then the compliance officer
must consult with a reasonable member of employees about Safety and Health at the job site.
422

Next, they will ask the supervisor if there were any recordable injuries of their workers on that
job site for the current year. Also, they will ask the Supervisor if there were 11 or more workers
on the job site at any time during the past calendar year. If 11 or more employees, they will ask to
see the OSHA No. 300 Form titled, Log and Summary of Occupational Injuries and Illnesses and
OSHA No. 301 Form titled Supplemental Record of Occupational Injuries and Illnesses. Finally,
they will verify the location of the safety poster and that it is prominently displayed on the site.
Another step in the safety officers inspection is they will conduct a walk through inspection of
the job site. The OSHA compliance officer will conduct an inspection of the work place with the
supervisor and the employees representative (if required). The route and duration of the
inspection are determined by the compliance officer while talking with employees, and the
compliance officer makes every effort to minimize any work interruptions. The compliance
officer observes safety and health conditions and practices; consults with employees privately,
and if necessary; they can take photographs and instrument readings; examine records, collect air
samples, measures noise levels, and survey existing engineering controls; and monitor employee
exposure to toxic fumes, gases, and dusts. Employees are consulted during the inspection tour.
The compliance officer may stop and question workers, in private, about safety and health
conditions and practices in their workplaces. Each employee is protected under the Act from
discrimination by the employer for exercising his or her safety and health rights.
Finally, the safety compliance officer will conduct a closing conference. At the conclusion of an
inspection, the compliance officer also will give the employer a copy of Employer Rights and
Responsibilities. If necessary, the supervisor and the employees representative have the right to
separate closing conferences.
Also, at the closing conference the compliance officer discusses with the employer all unsafe or
unhealthful conditions observed during the inspection and indicates all apparent violations for
which a citation may be issued or recommended. It should be understood that the actual citations
issued and the notices of the proposed penalties will be sent to the employer by certified mail.
The purpose of Citations is to inform the employer and employees of the regulations and
standards alleged to have been violated and of the proposed length of time set for their
abatement. The employer must post a copy of each citation at or near the place of violation for 3
working days or until the violation is abated, whichever is longer.
There are four factors that OSHA will use to determine if a violation exists. They are the: 1)
Type of Hazard, 2) Type of Exposure, 3) Type of Violation and, 4) the Severity Factor. OSHA
has three definitions of Types of Hazards. First, a Recognized Hazard is a hazard that requires
common knowledge or general recognition in construction. Second, a Detectable Hazard is a
hazard that is recognizable by means of the senses and by means of generally known and
accepted tests for its existence.
423

Third, is a Serious physical harm hazard which is any hazard that may cause Serious Permanent
or prolonged impairment of the body or could inhibit an internal bodily system as to shorten life.
OSHA classifies Exposure, when conducting an inspection or investigation, as the number of
employees that are exposed to a particular hazard. This exposure is one of the factors that
determines the cost of the penalty. OSHA views exposure in three different manners. First, is the
Past Exposure that could be repeated may be a factor for potential exposure. Second, is the
Present Exposure as observed by safety officer. Third, is the Potential Exposure inferred from the
work patterns or the anticipated work requirements indicate a possibility of exposure.
The Types of OSHA Safety Violations
OSHA classifies the Types of Violations according to the following guidelines: First, the OtherThan-Serious Violation (OTS) which is a violation that has a direct relationship to job safety and
health, but probably would not cause death or serious physical harm. A penalty of up to $7,000
for each violation is discretionary. Also, a penalty for an other-than-serious violation may be
adjusted downward by as much as 95 percent depending on the employers demonstrated efforts
to comply with the regulations. This is called the good faith credit.
Second, is the Serious Violation (S) which is a violation where there is a substantial probability
that death or serious physical harm could result and that the employer knew, or should have
known, of the hazard. A mandatory penalty for a serious violation could be assessed from $1,500
to a maximum of $7,000 for each occurrence. A penalty for a serious violation may be adjusted
downward, based on the employers good faith, history of previous violations, the gravity of the
alleged violation, and the size of the business.
Third, is the Willful Violation (W) which is a violation that the employer intentionally and
knowingly commits. The employer is aware that a hazardous condition exists, knows that the
condition violates a standard or other obligation of the Act, and makes no reasonable effort to
eliminate it. Penalties of up to $70,000 may be proposed for each willful violation, with a
minimum penalty of $5,000 for each violation.
Fourth, is the Repeat Violation (R) which is a violation of any standard, regulation, rule, or order
where the original citation has become a final order, and upon reinspection, a substantially
similar violation is found. Repeat violations can bring a fine of up to $70,000 for each such
violation. You should be aware of the long-term ramifications of receiving a second safety
violation citation concerning the same safety violation occurring within the company. OSHA can
categorize the second violation as a wilful violation. In essence, OSHA is evaluating the
companys complete history to establish the violation category. To calculate each repeat
violation, the initial penalty is adjusted for the size and then multiplied by a factor of 2, 5, or 10
depending on the size of the employer.
424

Fifth, is the Failure to Abate (FA) prior violation which is defined as the failure to correct a prior
violation. This may bring a civil penalty of up to $7,000 for each day that the violation continues
beyond the prescribed abatement date.
Additional violations for which citations and proposed penalties may be issued as follows.
Falsifying records and reports can, upon conviction, bring a criminal fine of $10,000 or up to 6
months in jail, or both. A violation of the posting requirements may bring a civil penalty of up to
$7,000. Finally, Assaulting or otherwise resisting, opposing, intimidating, or interfering with a
compliance officer in the performance of their duties is a criminal offense and is subject to a fine
up to $5,000 and imprisonment of up to 3 years.
OSHA has always taken the position that the penalty structure is not designed as a punishment
for violations nor as a source of income. The fines are designed as an incentive toward correcting
the violations voluntarily. Penalties are assessed on the basis of three factors. They are the: 1) the
size of the business, 2) the seriousness of the violations and, 3) the employer's history of previous
citations.
The Gravity of the Violation is the primary factor in determining penalty amounts. It shall be the
basis for calculating the basic penalty for both serious and other violations. To determine the
gravity of a violation the following two factors shall be considered. First, the Severity of the
injury or illness which could result from the alleged violation. Second, the Probability that an
injury or illness could occur as a result of the alleged violations. Finally, the size of the business
and the history of previous violations shall be taken into account in deciding whether the gravitybased penalty shall be reduced.
The classification of the alleged violations as serious or other-than-serious, is based on the
severity of the injury or illness which could result from the violation. This classification
constitutes the first step in determining the gravity of the violation. The most serious type of
injury or illness which is reasonably predictable as a result of the type of accident or health
hazard exposure shall be assigned a Severity Factor in accordance with the following chart.
425
Injury and Illness Violations

Category I - Other-than-serious violations.
Severity
0
Category II - Injury and Illness violations not resulting in hospitalization or temporary, reversible
illnesses requiring minor supportive treatment.
1-3
Category III - Injury and Illness violations resulting in hospitalization or temporary, reversible
illnesses with a variable but limited period of disability.
4-7
Category IV - Injuries involving permanent disability or chronic, irreversible illnesses or death.

8 - 10
Categories II, III, and IV apply to serious violations.

The Supervisors Responsibilities under OSHA
The supervisor must provide, at the companies expense, personal protective equipment to
employees when required by OSHA standards. If an employee requests, you must make available
for them to inspect or copy any medical records that you have pertaining to that employee. Also,
you must give an employee or an employee representative an opportunity to attend any meeting
concerning a citation or disposition of a complaint. Third, you must permit a Compliance Officer
to enter your workplace for the purpose of conducting an inspection.
During the Compliance Officers walk, you must allow an employee representative to accompany
the Compliance Officer during an inspection or investigation or allow the investigator to consult
with the employees representative and employees. Also, you cannot withhold wages or
discriminate against any employee or their authorized representative for time spent participating
in an inspection. After the Compliance Officers inspection, the employer must post a copy of
each citation at or near the place of violation for 3 working days or until the violation is abated,
whichever is longer. Also, you must provide a copy of any citation appeal to the affected
employees. Finally, you must post the notice of OSHA's decision concerning an appeal.
All supervisors must maintain accurate records of work related to illnesses and injuries. They
must maintain accurate records of any employee exposure to potentially toxic substances. Also,
they must provide Hazardous Communication training to all employees. Finally, before starting
an activity, all employees must be trained in the proper safety procedures for the activities they
are performing. Finally, if a fatality or catastrophe happens you must notify the Department of
Labor within 8 hours of a fatality or, a catastrophe. A catastrophe is defined as hospitalization of
three or more employees suffering injuries or illness resulting from the same incident.
426

Multi-employer Work Site Citations
According to OSHA Compliance Directive (CPL 2.45B CH-3), on a Multi-employer Work site,
both construction and non-construction citations normally shall be issued to employers whose
employees are exposed to hazards. This is referred to as the Exposing Contractor. Prior to issuing
citations to an Exposing Employer, it must first be determined whether the available facts
indicate that the exposing employer has a legitimate defense to the citation, as set forth below.
First, the exposing employer did not create the hazard. Second, the exposing employer did not
have the authority to have the hazard corrected. Third, the exposing employer did not have the
ability to correct or remove the hazard. Fourth, the exposing employer can demonstrate that the
creating, the controlling and/or the correcting employers have been notified of the hazards to
which their employees are exposed and that the Exposing contractor made an effort to persuade
the controlling contractor to correct the hazard.
Fifth, the exposing employer has instructed their employees to recognize the hazard and informed
them of how to avoid the dangers when the hazard was known or with the exercise of reasonable
due diligence could have been known. This requires where feasible, that an exposing employer
must have taken appropriate alternative means of protecting employees from the hazard. Also,
when extreme circumstances justify it, the exposing employer shall have removed their
employees from the job to avoid citation. If an exposing employer meets all the conditions in 5
above, that employer shall not be cited. If all employers on a work site with employees exposed
to a hazard meet these conditions, then the citation shall be issued only to the employers who are
responsible for creating the hazard and/or who are in the best position to correct the hazard. In
such circumstances, the controlling employer and/or the hazard-creating employer shall be cited.
Penalties for such citations shall be calculated using the exposed employees of all employers as
the number of employees for probability assessment. Finally, in the case of general duty clause
violations, only employers whose own employees are exposed to the violation may be cited.
427

Other Contractors can be cited on a Multi-Employer Job site, but prior to issuing citations to
other employers, the Inspector must prove that each employer to be cited has knowledge of the
hazardous condition or could have had such knowledge with the exercise of reasonable diligence.
Under these conditions the following employers normally shall be cited, whether or not their own
employees are exposed. First, the employer who actually creates the hazard, the Creating
Employer can be cited for the same hazard. Second, the employer who is responsible by contract
or through actual practice for safety and health conditions on the work site. This is the employer
who has the authority for ensuring that the hazardous condition is corrected can be cited. This is
referred to as the Controlling Employer. Third, the employer who has the responsibility for
actually correcting the hazard can also be cited for the same safety violation. This is referred to as
the Correcting Employer. In conclusion each violation will be evaluated on a multi-employer and
the Exposing Contractor, the Creating Contractor, the Controlling Contractor and the Correcting
Contractor can all be cited for the same violation.
A Supervisor can protect their company and themselves from citations and safety liability on a
multi-employer job site, if you can show that you have taken all necessary actions to protect your
employees. Depending upon the circumstances, you may not be liable for serious hazards that
you neither created nor controlled. But, to protect yourself you must have attempted the
following activities. First, you must have requested, in writing, that the controlling contractor
correct the hazard. Second, instructed your employees to avoid the hazard, you must prove that
you have enforced the instructions. Third, you instructed your employees on an alternative means
of protecting them.
Finally, the Contractor can appeal any and all citations and this is highly recommended practice
for the contractor to appeal or downgrade the citations. The contractor can request an informal
hearing to discuss with the review office. The contractor should describe in detail how they have
abated each violation and ask that the violations be downgraded. Second, the contractor can
contest each violation within 15 days and they must post the letter of contest at the job site.
Third, the contractor can submit a formal written appeal to the Administrative Law Judge.
Fourth, the contractor can submit a written appeal to the OSHA Review Commission. Finally,
the contractor can appeal the rulings to the U.S. Court of Appeals.
428

OSHA Inspection Exercise
1.
According to OSHA violations, what is the name of the violation where the firm or
designated person is aware that a hazardous condition exists, knows that the condition
violates a standard and makes no effort to eliminate the safety hazard?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
Which of the following would be an example of Due Diligence?

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Federal Register.
General Duty Clause.
Construction Safety Act.
Code of Federal Register.
What type of inspection is given top priority by OSHA?

A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
Reports violations to OSHA.

Tells employees to be careful.
Corrects the hazard(s) immediately.
Screams and threatens the workers to comply.
The compliance officer notices a potential hazard that is likely to cause serious physical
harm but a regulation does not exist, under which provision can the contractor be cited?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Willful Violation.
Serious Violation.
De Minimis Violation.
Other-Than-Serious Violation.
Imminent Danger.
Employee Complaints.
Catastrophe or Fatal Accident.
Programmed inspections.
In construction, What is the minimum number of employees that an employer must have
before they are required to maintain records of occupational injuries and illnesses?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2
11
20
100
429

6.
What is the minimum number of days for posting the De Minimis Violation?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
Which of the following is the definition of a work-related catastrophe?

A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
4
8
24
48
What is the maximum number of days that an employer has to contest any citations?
A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
The death of two or more workers.

An injury or illness that requires first aid treatment.
An injury or illness that requires medical treatment.
An injury or illness that requires hospitalization of 3 or more workers.
What is the maximum number of hours for reporting a Death or Catastrophe to OSHA?
A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
1
3
15
60
1
15
30
60
The Pipefitting Subcontractor is required to lay pipe in a trench that is 10 feet deep and 3
feet wide with vertical walls and no sloping or other protection. The trench was dug by
the Excavators. The General Contractor supervised the work, but had no employees in the
trench. The Concrete Sub told the General contractor and Excavator that the trench
needed to be sloped or shored before their employees could work in the trench. During
the OSHA inspection, OSHA observed the General at the trench supervising the pipefitter
in the trench. Which contractor(s) would receive a citation for an unsafe trench?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Pipefitter only
Pipefitter and excavator.
Pipefitter, excavator, and general contractor
Pipefitter, excavator, general contractor, and concrete contractor
430
Check Answers

Personal Protective Equipment
The Bureau of Labor Statistics reports indicates that 22 percent of all injuries occur to workers
eyes, and 7 percent to feet and toes. Many of these injuries can be avoided if you wear Personal
Protective Equipment. Personal protective equipment (PPE) should be thought of as the "last thin
line of defense" and it is required if there is a "reasonable probability of an injury."
According to the OSHA regulations, you are required to wear suitable eye and face protection
where eye injuries may occur. Protection is needed where hazards of flying particles, liquids,
welding, and radiation exist. Normally, you are required to wear Eye Protection on tasks such as
Sawing, nailing, cutting bands, or wires, grinding, handling chemicals, using compressed air,
welding. It is probably a good safety habit to wear eye protection all of the time.
If the tasks you are working on have the potential to cut, blister, burn, or irritate the skin you
should wear gloves. There are numerous types of hand protection from which you can select
effective and comfortable protection. Glove materials include canvas, latex, rubber, neoprene,
vinyl-impregnated, leather, plastic-coated, and nylon.
You should select the appropriate glove for the task at hand such as when grouting you should
use a rubber glove. Also, when lifting and carrying objects such as metal wood, glass or where
sharp edges pose a hazard you should wear leather gloves may be required. Another potential
hazard is where flame and heat are a factor, and various types of heat-resistant gloves should be
worn.
Chemical hazards may require rubber, neoprene, or plastic gloves. Wrists and arms may require
protection from high-temperature materials, solvents, or metal chips. Such protection is provided
by arm protectors or gloves that extend over the wrist and lower arm.
Most job sites require a hard hat to be worn at all times. In a recent case two workers were told
by the supervisor to put on their hard hats but they disregarded the instructions because they
figured that 100 feet was far enough away from the overhead dangers. Five minutes later, a gust
of wind lifted a piece of lumber off the fifth floor and it hit one of the workers in the head. Your
hard hat must have an ANSI-APPROVED emblem on the inside. When wearing the hard hat you
must leave at least a 1-1/4 inch clearance between your head and the shell.
431

TABLE E-1 - Eye and Face Protector Selection Guide
Table E-1 shall be used as a guide in the selection of face and eye protection for the hazards and
operations identified below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
7A.
8.
8A.
9.
10.
11.
GOGGLES, Flexible Fitting - Regular Ventilation

GOGGLES, Flexible Fitting - Hooded Ventilation
GOGGLES, Cushioned Fitting - Rigid Body
SPECTACLES, Metal Frame, with Side shields (1)
SPECTACLES, Plastic Frame - with Side shields (1)
SPECTACLES, Metal-Plastic Frame - with Side shields (1)
W ELDING GOGGLES, Eyecup Type - Tinted Lenses (2)
CHIPPING GOGGLES, Eyecup Type - Clear Safety Lenses
W ELDING GOGGLES, Coversepc Type - Tinted Lenses (2)
CHIPPING GOGGLES, Coverspec Type - Clear Safety Lenses
W ELDING GOGGLES, Coverspec Type - Tinted Plate Lens (2)
FACE SHIELD (Available with Plastic or Mesh Window)
W ELDING HELM ETS (2)
Footnote: (1) Non-side shield spectacles are available for limited hazard use requiring only frontal protection.
Footnote: (2) See Table E-2, in paragraph (b) of this section, Filter Lens Shade Numbers for Protection Against
Radiant Energy.
432

Recommended Protectors based upon the Operation and the Hazards
Applications
Operation
Hazards
Acetylene-Burning,
Acetylene-Cutting,
Acetylene-W elding
Chemical Handling
Sparks harmful rays, molten metal,

flying particles.
Chipping
Electric (arc)
welding
Flying particles
Sparks, intense rays, molten metal
Furnace operations
Glare, heat, molten metal.
7, 8, 9 (For severe exposure add 10)
Grinding-Light
Grinding-Heavy
Flying particles
Flying particles
Laboratory
Machining
Molten metals
Chemical splash glass breakage

Flying particles
Heat, glare, sparks, splash
Spot welding
Flying particles, sparks.
1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10
1, 3, 7A, 8A (For severe exposure add
10)
2 (10 when in combination with 4, 5, 6)
1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10.
7, 8, (10 in combination with 4, 5, 6, in
tinted lenses
1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10
Splash, acid burns, fumes.
433
Recom m ended protectors: bold type

numbers signify preferred protection
7, 8, 9.
2,10 (For severe exposure add 10 over

2).
1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7A, 8A
9, 11,(11 in combination 4, 5, 6 in
tinted lenses, advisable

Respirators Nonmandatory Table
HAZARD
RESPIRATOR
Oxygen deficiency
Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA). Hose mask with blower.

Combination air-line respirator with auxiliary self-contained air supply or
an air-storage receiver with alarm.
Gas and vapor contaminants

immediately dangerous to life and
health.
Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA). Hose mask with blower. Airpurifying full face piece respirator with chemical canister. (Gas mask). Self
rescue mouthpiece respirator (for escape only). Combination air-line
respirator with auxiliary self-contained air supply or an air-storage receiver
with alarm.
Not immediately dangerous to life

and health
Air-line respirator.
Hose mask without blower.
Air-purifying, half-mask or mouthpiece respirator with chemical cartridge.
Particulate contaminants
immediately dangerous to life and
health (IDHL).
Self contained breathing apparatus (SCBA).

Hose mask with blower.
Air purifying, full face piece respirator with appropriate filter. Self-rescue
mouthpiece respirator (for escape only).
Combination air-line respirator with auxiliary self-contained air supply or

and health
Air-purifying, half-mask or mouthpiece respirator with filter pad or

cartridge.
Air-line abrasive-blasting respirator.
Hose-mask without blower.
Combination gas, vapor, and

particulate contaminants
Immediately dangerous to life and
health (IDLH).
Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA) .

Hose mask with blower.
Air-purifying, full face piece respirator with chemical canister and
appropriate filter (gas mask with filter).
Self-rescue mouthpiece respirator (for escape only),
Combination air-line respirator with auxiliary self-contained air-supply or

and health.
Hose mask without blower.
Air-purifying, half-mask or mouthpiece respirator with chemical cartridge
and appropriate filter.
434

Personal Protection Equipment Exercise
Using the Eye and Face Protection Chart from the Construction Safety Standards, select the
Recommended Protector for the Operation and Hazards described below.
1.
You are Spot Welding, Which of the following types of Eye and Face Protection can be
worn?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
You are Chipping, Which of the following types of Eye and Face Protection can be worn?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Welding Helmets.
Goggles, Cushion Fitting, Rigid Body.
Goggles, Flexible Fitting, Hooded Ventilation.
Welding Goggles, Eyecup Type, Tinted Lenses.
You are Handling Chemicals considered severe exposure. Which of the following types
of Eye and Face Protection can be worn?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Welding Helmets.
Goggles, Flexible Fitting, Regular Ventilation
Welding Goggles, Eyecup Type, Tinted Lenses.
Spectacles, Plastic Frame, with Sideshields.

Goggles, Cushion Fitting, Rigid Body.
Goggles, Flexible Fitting, Hooded Ventilation with Face Shield.
You are performing light Grinding, Which of the following types of Eye and Face
Protection can be worn?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Spectacles with Sideshields.

Welding Goggles, Coverspec Type, Clear Safety Lenses.
Chipping Goggles, Coverspec Type, Clear Safety Lenses.
435

Personal Protection Equipment Exercise
5.
You are performing Heavy Grinding considered a severe exposure, Which of the
following types of Eye and Face Protection can be worn?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Spectacles with Sideshields.

Chipping Goggles, Coverspec Type, Clear Safety Lenses.
Chipping Goggles, Eyecup Type, Clear Safety Lenses with Face Shield.
Using the Respirator Chart, Select the Recommended Protector for the Operation and Hazards
described below.
6.
You need a Respirator for an Oxygen Deficient environment, Which of the following
types of Respirators must be worn?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
Air-purifying Respirator.
Supplied-air Respirator (SAR).
Powered air-purifying Respirator (PAPR).
Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA).
You need a Respirator for a combination gas ,vapor, and particulate contaminants not
immediately dangerous to life, Which of the following types of Respirators must be
worn?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Air-purifying Respirator.
Supplied-air Respirator (SAR).
Powered air-purifying Respirator (PAPR).
Self-contained breathing apparatus (SCBA).
Check Answers
436

Portable Fire Extinguishers
Portable fire extinguishers are classified to indicate their ability to control specific classes and
sizes of fires using a specific symbol and color for each fire classification in accordance with the
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). Fire extinguishers are all labeled using a Letter
and/or a pictograph, according to the type of material being extinguished. They are described
below.
A
is for ordinary combustibles such as wood, paper, trash, cloth, rubber and
many plastics. Old extinguishers can be identified by a GREEN
TRIANGLE containing the letter A. The New Extinguisher can be
identified by pictograph of a trash can and wood fire.
is for flammable liquids such as fuel oil, gasoline, liquids such as fuel oil,
gasoline, paint, and grease solvents. This extinguisher can be identified by
a RED SQUARE containing the letter B. The New Extinguisher can be
identified by a gas can pictograph.
is for fires in electrical wiring, overheated fuse boxes, or electrical

equipment. This extinguisher can be identified by a BLUE CIRCLE
containing the letter C. The New extinguisher can be identified by an
electrical plug and receptacle pictograph.
is for combustible metals such as aluminum or magnesium. This

extinguisher can be identified by a YELLOW FIVE-POINTED STAR
containing the letter D.
The latest development in portable fire extinguishers is an all-purpose extinguisher that is

effective on Class A, B and C fires or a combination of Fires such as B-C. Also, on the new
portable fire extinguishers the prohibited applications are displayed as a pictograph with the
background in Black and the Slash is shown in Bright Red.
There are four elements that must be present to start a fire. They are Fuel in the form of a
combustible material for the fire to consume. The next element is Oxygen which must be in a
sufficient volume for the fire to feed upon, and the supply must be continuous for the fire to
grow. This element is a component of the air around us. The third element is an Ignition Source
in the form of heat are needed to ignite the fire. These can be invisible or visible. An invisible
ignition source is normally called Spontaneous Combustion and it can occur in the form of oily
rags or loosely packed organic materials such as turpentine or top soil. A visible ignition source
is an open flame. This could be matches, welding sparks or a light bulb. Finally, these three
elements combine to produce a Chain Reaction, which is called a fire pyramid.
437

OSHA Standards Requiring Fire Extinguisher in Construction
STANDARD
LOCATION
150(c)(1)(i)
Building area
2A
100'
150(c)(1)(iv)
Each floor
2A
-------
150(c)(1)(iv)
Multistory
2A
adjacent to stairway
150(c)(1)(vi)
5 gallons of
Flammable/combustible or 5
pounds of flammable gas
10B
50'
151(c)(6)
Open yard storage
152(d)(1)
Flammable liquid storage room
20B
10', Outside
152(d)(2)
Outside Flammable liquid storage

area
20B
25'-75'
152(d)(4)
Vehicles
20B:C
152(g)(11)
Service or Fuel area
20B:C
75'
153(1)
LPG storage
20B:C
---------
352(d)
W elding,
cutting, or heating areas
Suitable
----------
550(a)(14)(i)
Crane cabs
5B:C
On crane
800(m)(8)
Tunnel
machinery not using fire-resistant
hydraulic fluid
Underground belt conveyors at
head and tail pulley
4A:40B:C
----
Vehicles used for transportation of

explosives
10A:B:C
----
800 (m)(11)
902(i)
Type of Extinguisher
2A
or suitable for hazard
438
DISTANCE
(feet)
100'
On vehicle for
dispensing or
transporting flammable
or combustible liquids

Fire Extinguishers Exercise
1.
Which type of fire extinguisher Letter, Old Symbol, Color and the New Symbol would be
used for extinguishing a fire caused by a combustible metals such as aluminum?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
used for extinguishing a fire caused by a flammable liquid?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
The old extinguishers can be identified by a Green Triangle around the letter A.
The New Extinguisher pictograph is of a trash can and wood fire.
This extinguisher can be identified by a Red Square around the letter B. The New
Extinguisher can be identified by a gas can pictograph.
This extinguisher can be identified by a Blue Circle around the letter C. The New
extinguisher pictograph is an electrical plug and receptacle pictograph.
This extinguisher can be identified by a Yellow Five-pointed Star around letter D.
used for extinguishing a fire caused by electrical wiring?
A.
B.
C.
D.
439

Fire Extinguishers Exercise
4.
On the new fire extinguishers, what are the Color and Pictograph Symbol used displayed
on the fire extinguisher to indicate that a specific class of fire is prohibited?
A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
What is the maximum horizontal travel distance to retrieve a fire extinguisher in a

Building Area?
A.
B.
C.
D.
6.
10 Feet
25 Feet.
75 Feet
100 Feet.
What is the maximum horizontal travel distance to retrieve a fire extinguisher in a Fuel
Service Area?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
The background is Green and a Slash is shown in Black.

The background is Bright Red and a Slash is shown in Black.
The background is Black and a Slash is shown in Bright Red.
The background is White and a Slash is shown in Bright Red.
10 Feet
25 Feet.
75 Feet
100 Feet.
What is the location of a Fired Extinguisher on a Multistory building?

A.
B.
C.
D.
On an Inside Wall.
On an outside Wall.
In the tool gang box.
Adjacent to Stairway.
Check Answers
440

Slings and Rigging Equipment
Slings require special attention because they are almost always subjected to severe wear,
abrasion, impact loading, crushing, kinking and overloading. They also merit special attention
because seemingly insignificant changes in sling angle drastically affect the loading. When using
slings exercise extreme caution because you are going to be developing unknown loads, under
less than ideal circumstances, in less than perfect equipment. Failure to provide blocking or
protective pads will permit sharp corners to cut slings. Pulling slings from under loads will result
in abrasion and kinking. Dropping loads on slings or running equipment over them will cause
crushing. Also, sudden starts and stops when lifting loads will increase the stresses in them. The
improper storage will result in deterioration of the sling. Finally, numerous errors can occur
while using a sling such as an error in determining load weight, the effect of the hook angle and
the effect of sling angles on the loading. Therefore, it is recommended that all safe working loads
be based on a factor of safety.
Sling Materials
According to 1926.251 (b), (c), (d) and (e), the slings are grouped as alloy steel chain, wire rope,
natural rope and synthetic fiber, and synthetic webbing. The Chain Slings are made for abrasion
and high temperature resistance. The only chain suitable for lifting is fabricated from alloy steel
and identified by a letter A or the number 8" or a combination of the two. The chain slings
must be padded on sharp corners to prevent bending stresses in the links.
The use of Wire Rope Slings for lifting materials provides several advantages over other types of
slings. While not as strong as a chain, it has good flexibility with minimum weight. Breaking
outer wires warn of failure and allow time to react. Properly fabricated wire rope slings are very
safe for general construction use. The Wire Rope Slings are called Improved Plow Steel Grade
Rope with an Independent Wire Rope Core (IWRC), an Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope with a
Fiber Core (FC) and a construction Galvanized Aircraft Grade Rope. The Wire Rope sling can
also be made into a Braided Rope, a Cable Laid Rope, a Strand Laid Grommet, a Cable Laid
Grommet, a Strand Laid Endless Sling and a Cable Laid Endless Sling. The Braided Slings are
fabricated from usually 6 or 8 small diameter ropes braided together to form a single rope that
provides a large bearing surface, tremendous strength and flexibility in all directions. They are
very easy to handle and almost impossible to kink. The braided sling can be used in all the
standard configurations and combinations but is especially useful for basket hitches where low
bearing pressure is desirable or where the bend is extremely sharp. The Endless Slings or
Grommet Slings are endless ropes that are made from one strand of a rope laid or twisted around
itself on each successive loop. There is only one tuck in the entire circumference where the two
ends enter the rope. These slings can be used in a number of configurations, as vertical hitches,
basket hitches, choker hitches and all combinations of these basic configurations. They are very
flexible but tend to wear and deteriorate more rapidly than the other slings because they are not
normally equipped with fittings and thus are deformed when bent over hooks and bear against
themselves.
441

The Natural Rope and the Synthetic Fiber Rope slings may be used in a temperature range from
minus 20 degrees Fahrenheit to 180 degrees Fahrenheit without decreasing the working load
limit. According to1926.251 (d) (6) The Natural Rope and the Synthetic Fiber Rope slings shall
be immediately removed from service if any of the following conditions are present: (i)
Abnormal wear; (ii) Powdered fiber between strands; (iii) Broken or cut fibers; (iv) Variations in
the size or roundness of strands; or (v) Discoloration or rotting; and (vi) Distortion of hardware
in the sling.
The Synthetic Webbing Slings are made of Nylon, Polyester and Polypropylene. According to
1926.251 (e) (6) (i)it states that the Nylon web slings shall not be used where fumes, vapors,
sprays, mists or liquids of acids or phenolics are present. Also, under 1926.251 (e) (6) (ii) it states
that the Polyester and polypropylene web slings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays,
mists or liquids of caustics are present. In addition, paragraph1926.251 (e) (6) (iii) it state that
Web slings with aluminum fittings shall not be used where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or
liquids of caustics are present. Finally, under paragraph 1926,251 (e) (8) The Synthetic Web shall
be immediately removed from service if any of the following conditions are present: (i) Acid or
caustic burns; (ii) Melting or charring of any part of the sling surface; (iii) Snags, punctures, tears
or cuts; (iv) Broken or worn stitches; or (v) Distortion of fittings.
Sling Configurations
The Sling Configuration and the sling angle are the most important considerations when deciding
how to lift an object. The term sling includes a wide variety of configurations for all fiber
ropes, wire ropes, chains and webs. The most commonly used Sling Configurations in
construction rigging will be considered here because improper application can affect the safety of
the lift.
The Single Vertical Hitch is a method of supporting a load by a single vertical part of leg of the
sling. The total weight of the load is carried by a single leg, the angle of the lift is 90o and the
weight of the load can equal the maximum safe working load of the sling and fittings. The end
fittings of the sling can vary but thimbles should be used in the eyes. Also, the eye splices on
wire ropes should be Mechanical-Flemish splices for best security. This sling configuration must
not be used for lifting loose material, lengthy material or anything that will be difficult to
balance. Use them only on items equipped with lifting eye bolts or shackles such as concrete
buckets. They provide absolutely no control over the load because they permit rotation.
The Bridle Hitch is the use of two, three or four single hitches to form a bridle hitch for hoisting
an object that has the necessary lifting lugs or attachments. They can be used with a wide
assortment of end fittings. They provide excellent load stability when the load is distributed
equally among the legs, when the hook is directly over the center of gravity of the load and the
load is raised level. In order to distribute the load equally it may be necessary to adjust the leg
442

lengths with turnbuckles. The use of a bridle sling requires that the sling angles be carefully
determined to ensure that the individual legs are not overloaded. Unless the load is flexible, it is
wrong to assume that a 3 or 4 leg hitch will safely lift a load equal to the safe load on one leg
multiplied by the number of legs because there is no way of knowing that each leg is carrying its
share of the load. With slings having more than 2 legs and a rigid load, it is possible for two of
the legs to take practically the full load while the others only balance it.
The Single Basket Hitch is a method of supporting a load by hooking one end of a sling to a
hook, wrapping it around the load and securing the other end to the hook. It cannot be used on
any load that is difficult to balance because the load can tilt and slip out of the sling. On loads
having inherent stabilizing characteristics the load on the sling will be automatically equalized
with each leg supporting half the load. Ensure that the load dies not turn or slide along the rope
during a lift because both the load and rope will become damaged.
The Double Basket Hitch consists of two single basket hitches passed under the load. They must
be placed under the load so that it is properly balanced. The legs of the hitches must be kept far
enough apart to provide balance but not so far apart that excessive angles are developed or to
create a tendency for the legs to be pulled in toward the center. On smooth surfaces, both sides
of the hitches should be snubbed against a step or change of contour to prevent the rope from
slipping as load is applied. The angle between the load and the sling should be approximately 60o
or greater to avoid slippage.
The Double Wrap Basket Hitch is a basket hitch that is wrapped completely around the load
rather than just supporting as does the ordinary basket hitch. The double wrap basket hitch can
be used in pairs like the double basket hitch. This method is excellent for handling loose
material, pipe, rod or smooth cylindrical loads because the rope or chain exerts a full 360o contact
with the load and tends to draw it together.
The Single Choker Hitch forms a noose in the rope that tightens as the load is lifted. It does not
provide a full 360 degree contact with the load. Hence, it should not be used to lift loose bundles
from which material can fall or loads that are difficult to balance. The single choker can also be
doubled. When it is necessary to turn a load, the choker is made by placing both eyes of the sling
on top of the load with the eyes pointing in the direction opposite the direction of the turn. The
center of the sling is passed around the load, through both eyes and up to the hook. This hitch
provides complete control over the load during the entire turning operation, and the load
automatically equalizes between the two supporting legs of the slings. If, the choker is incorrectly
made and the two eyes are placed on the crane hook and the supporting legs of the sling are not
equal in length, the load may be imposed on one leg only.
443

The Double Choker Hitch consists of two single chokers attached to the load and spread to
provide load stability. These like the single choker, do not completely grip the load but because
the load is less likely to tip they are better suited for handling loose bundles of pipes or rods, etc.
The Double Wrap Choker Hitch is one in which the rope or chain is wrapped completely around
the load before being hooked into the vertical part of the sling. This hitch is in full contact with
the load and tends to draw it tightly together. It can be used either singly on short, easily
balanced loads or in pairs on longer loads. The double wrap choker is made by placing both eyes
of the sling on top of the load with the eyes pointing in the direction opposite to the direction of
the turn. The center of the sling is passed around the load, through both eyes, and up to the hook.
This hitch provides complete control over the load during the entire turning operation. The load
automatically equalizes between the two supporting legs of the sling. Because the load is turned
into a tight sling, there is no movement between the load and the sling. If the double wrap choker
is incorrectly made, and the two eyes are placed on the crane hook, the supporting legs of the
sling may not be equal in length and the load may be carried by one leg only.
Sling Inspection Requirements
According to Subpart H titled Materials Handling, Storage, Use, and Disposal and in
section1926.251 titled Rigging Equipment Paragraph (a) titled General (1) it states that rigging
equipment for material handling shall be inspected prior to use on each shift and as necessary
during its use to ensure that it is safe. Also, under Paragraph1926.251 (a)(6) titled Inspections, it
states that each day before being used, the sling and all fasteners and attachments shall be
inspected by a competent person designated by the employer. Also, damaged or defective slings
shall be immediately removed from service. Another paragraph under Subpart H 1926.251 (c)
titled Wire Rope and subparagraph (4)(iv) it states that wire rope shall not be used if, in any
length of eight diameters, the total number of visible broken wires exceeds 10 percent of the total
number of wires, or if the rope shows other signs of excessive wear, corrosion, or defect.
444

Angle of the Hook and the Sling Hook Lifting Capacity
The Sling Hook condition can affect the lifting capacity. You must know what hardware to use,
how to use it, and how its safe working loads (SWL) compare with the rope or chain used with it.
All fittings must be of adequate strength for the application. Only forged alloy steel load-rated
hardware should be used for overhead lifting. Load-rated hardware is stamped with its SWL.
Inspect hardware regularly and before each lift. The signs to look for in the sling hook are any
wear, cracks, severe corrosion, deformation or bends, any mismatched parts and obvious damage
to the hook. The Sling Hook Capacity is effected by the angle of the hook. For example, the table
below provides the reduction of the rated load due to the angle of the hook.
Effect of Eccentric Load on Hook Capacity
% of Rated Load
A Balanced load with the load distributed evenly through the Hook can carry
100%
An Eccentric load on the hook that is 1/4 Off Center can carry
86%
An Eccentric load on the hook that is Off Center can carry
80%
An Eccentric load on the hook that is 3/4 Off Center can carry
70%
An Eccentric load on the hook that is carried by the end of the hook can carry
40%
445

Angle of the Sling and the Effect on the Lifting Capacity
The Sling Angles also affect the rated capacity of any sling. The rated capacity depends on its
size, its configuration and the angles formed by the legs of the sling and the horizontal. A sling
with two legs that is used to lift a 1000 pound object will have a 500-pound load in each leg
when the sling angle is 90 degrees. The load in each leg will increase as the angle is decreased
and at 30 degrees the load will be 1000 pounds in each leg. If at all possible, keep the sling
angles greater than 45 degrees. Also, sling angles that are approaching 30 degrees should be
considered extremely hazardous and avoided at all costs. Some load tables list sling angles as
low as 15 degrees, but the use of any sling at an angle less than 30 degrees is extremely
dangerous. This is not only because of the high loads associated with them but because of the
effect on the load of an error in sling angle measurement of as little as 5 degrees. The following
table illustrates the effect of a 5-degree error in sling angle measurement on the sling load.
EFFECT OF SLING ANGLE
MEASUREMENT ERROR ON LOADS
Assumed Sling
Angle
Assumed Load
(Pounds per Leg)
Actual Angle (is 5 o

Less Than Assumed
Angle)
Actual Load
(Pounds Per Leg)
Error %
90 o
75 o
60 o
45 o
30 o
15 o
500
518
577
707
1,000
1,932
85 o
70 o
55 o
40 o
25 o
10 o
502
532
610
778
1,183
2,880
0.4
2.8
5.7
9.1
18.3
49.0
As you can see that there is almost a 50% error in the assumed load at the 15-degree sling angle.
This illustrates how cautious you must be in not only ensuring the angle is greater than 45
degrees, but the importance of measuring it accurately. The easiest and most accurate way to
determine the angle is by measuring it with a large plywood measure graduated in degrees.
446

Rigging Equipment Exercise
1.
How often does a sling have to be inspected?

A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
A wire rope is designated as a 1-3/4 inch, 6 x 37 - IWRC. What does the 6 indicate?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Strands.
Diameter.
Rated Capacity.
The number of wires per strand.
A wire rope is designated as a 3/4 inch, 6 x 19 - IWRC. What does the IWRC mean?
A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
Strands.
Diameter.
Rated Capacity.
The number of wires per strand.
A wire rope is designated as a 3/4 inch, 6 x 19 - IWRC. What does the 19 indicate?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Yearly.
Monthly.
Once per day at the beginning of the shift.
Each day before sling use and during sling use.
Improved Wire Rope Core.

Improved Wide Rope Core.
Independent Wire Rope Core.
Independent Wide Rope Core.
What are the total number of broken wires that can be visible in any eight diameter
lengths given a 3/4 inch, 6 x 19 IWRC wire rope sling before it must be removed?
A.
B.
C.
D.
0
6
11
19
447

6.
Which type of material is suitable for a chain sling?

A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
Which type of sling material cannot be used where fumes, vapors, sprays, mists or liquids
of acids or phenolics are present?
A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
Chain Sling.
Wire Rope Sling.
Nylon Web Sling.
Natural Rope and Synthetic Fiber.
Which type of sling material may be used in a temperature range from minus 20 degrees
Fahrenheit to 180 degrees Fahrenheit?
A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
Chain Sling.
Wire Rope Sling.
Nylon Web Sling.
Which type of sling material is best for abrasion and high temperature resistance?
A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
Carbon Steel 160.

Structural Steel Grade 60.
Improved Plow Steel Grade.
Alloy Steel and identified by a letter A or the number 8" or a combination.
Chain Sling.
Wire Rope Sling.
Nylon Web Sling.
Which type of sling configuration is better suited for handling loose bundles of pipe or
rebar?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Bridle Hitch.
Single Basket Hitch.
Single Choker Hitch.
Double Choker Hitch.
448

11.
What is the Rated Load Capacity for a hook that is Off center?
A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
Assume you are lifting 1000 pounds, What is the load on each leg of two legged sling if
the horizontal sling angle is 45 degrees?
A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
500 Pounds
577 Pounds
707 Pounds
1000 Pounds
Using the OSHA Sling Tables Attached answer the following questions.
Given a single leg sling that is 3/4 inch in diameter, 6 x 19 construction, IWRC, used in a
choker hitch with a Mechanical Splice. What is the rated lifting capacity?
A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
70%
80%
86%
100%
3.3 Tons
3.6 Tons
3.9 Tons
4.9 Tons
Given a load of 7500 pounds, you will lift using a Wire Rope Sling in a 2 legged Bridle
Hitch in a 60 degree horizontal angle using a 6 x 19 Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope
with Fiber Core, Hand Tucked. What is the minimum Wire Rope Diameter?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3/8. inches
7/16 inches
1/2 inches
9/16 inches
449

15.
Given a 3 legged Bridle Hitch in a 30 degree horizontal angle using a 3/4 inch 6 x 19
Construction Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope with an Independent Wire Rope Core
(IWRC) and connected using a Hand Tucked. What is the Lifting capacity?
A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
5.8 Tons
6.3 Tons
6.6 Tons
6.8 Tons
7.3 Tons
10. Tons
11. Tons
13. Tons
Check Answers
450

Rigging Equipment Exercise using Table H - 3. Rated Capacities for Single Leg Slings
6x19 and 6x37 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope With Fiber Core(FC)
Rope Diameter
Rated Capacities, Tons (2,000 lb)

Construction
(Inches)
5/16
3/8
7/16
9/16
5/8
7/8
1
1 1/8
1
1 3/8
1
1 5/8
1
2
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
37
37
37
37
37
37
Vertical
HT
0.49
0.76
1.1
1.4
1.8
2.3
2.8
3.9
5.1
6.7
8.4
9.8
12.0
14.0
16.0
19.0
25.0
Vertical
MS
0.51
0.79
1.1
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.1
4.4
5.9
7.7
9.5
11.0
13.0
16.0
18.0
21.0
28.0
Vertical
S
0.55
0.85
1.2
1.6
2.1
2.7
3.3
4.8
6.4
8.4
10.0
12.0
15.0
17.0
21.0
24.0
31.0
Choker
HT
0.37
0.57
0.80
1.1
1.4
1.7
2.1
2.9
3.9
5.0
6.3
7.4
8.9
10.0
12.0
14.0
18.0
Choker
MS
0.38
0.59
0.85
1.1
1.5
1.9
2.3
3.3
4.5
5.8
7.1
8.3
10.0
12.0
14.0
16.0
21.0
Choker
S
0.41
0.64
0.91
1.2
1.6
2.0
2.5
3.6
4.8
6.3
7.9
9.2
11.0
13.0
15.0
18.0
23.0
Footnote(1) These values only apply when the D/d ratio for HT slings is 10 or greater, and for
MS and S Slings is 20 or greater where:
D=Diameter of curvature around which the body of the sling is bent; d=Diameter of rope.
HT = Hand Tucked Splice and Hidden Tuck Splice. For hidden tuck splice (IW RC) use values in HT columns.
MS = M echanical Splice.
S = Swaged or Zinc Poured Socket.
451
Vertical
Basket
HT
0.99
1.5
2.1
2.9
3.7
4.6
5.6
7.8
10.0
13.0
17.0
20.0
24.0
28.0
33.0
38.0
49.0
Vertical
Basket
MS
1.0
1.6
2.2
3.0
3.9
5.0
6.2
8.8
12.0
15.0
19.0
22.0
27.0
32.0
37.0
43.0
55.0
Vertical
Basket
S
1.1
1.7
2.4
3.3
4.3
5.4
6.7
9.5
13.0
17.0
21.0
25.0
30.0
35.0
41.0
48.0
62.0

Rigging Equipment Exercise using Table H - 4. Rated Capacities for Single Leg Slings
6x19 and 6x37 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope with Independent Wire Rope Core (IWRC)
Rope Diameter

Construction
(Inches)
5/16
3/8
7/16
9/16
5/8
7/8
1
1 1/8
1
1 3/8
1
1 5/8
1
2
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
37
37
37
37
37
37
Vertical
HT
Vertical
MS
Vertical
S
Choker
HT
Choker
MS
Choker
S
Vertical
Basket
HT
Vertical
Basket
MS
Vertical
Basket
S
0.53
0.81
1.1
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
4.2
5.5
7.2
9.0
10.0
13.0
15.0
18.0
20.0
26.0
0.56
0.87
1.2
1.7
2.2
2.7
3.4
4.9
6.6
8.5
10.0
12.0
15.0
17.0
20.0
24.0
30.0
0.59
0.92
1.3
1.8
2.3
2.9
3.6
5.1
6.9
9.0
11.0
13.0
16.0
19.0
22.0
26.0
33.0
0.40
0.61
0.86
1.2
1.5
1.8
2.2
3.1
4.1
5.4
6.8
7.9
9.6
11.0
13.0
15.0
20.0
0.42
0.65
0.93
1.3
1.6
2.1
2.5
3.6
4.9
6.4
7.8
9.2
11.0
13.0
15.0
18.0
23.0
0.44
0.69
0.98
1.3
1.7
2.2
2.7
3.8
5.2
6.7
8.5
9.9
12.0
14.0
17.0
19.0
25.0
1.0
1.6
2.3
3.1
3.9
4.9
6.0
8.4
11.0
14.0
18.0
21.0
25.0
30.0
35.0
41.0
53.0
1.1
1.7
2.5
3.4
4.4
5.5
6.8
9.7
13.0
17.0
21.0
24.0
29.0
35.0
41.0
47.0
61.0
1.2
1.8
2.6
3.5
4.6
5.8
7.2
10.0
14.0
18.0
23.0
26.0
32.0
38.0
44.0
51.0
66.0
Footnote(1) These values only apply when the D/d ratio for HT slings is 10 or greater, and for
MS and S slings is 20 or greater where:
D=Diameter of curvature around which the body of the sling is bent; d=Diameter of rope.
HT = Hand Tucked Splice. For hidden tuck splice (IW RC) use Table
H-3 values in HT column.
S = Swaged or Zinc Poured Socket.
452

Rigging Equipment Exercise using Table H - 7. Rated Capacities for 2-leg and 3-leg Bridle Slings
6x19 and 6x37 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope with Fiber Core (FC)
Rope
Dia
(Inches)
5/16
3/8
7/16
9/16
5/8
7/8
1
1 1/8
1
1 3/8
1
1 5/8
1
2

Constr
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
37
37
37
37
37
37
30 deg (1) (60

deg) (2)
HT
MS
0.85
0.88
1.3
1.4
1.8
1.9
2.5
2.6
3.2
3.4
4.0
4.3
4.8
5.3
6.8
7.6
8.9
10.0
11.0
13.0
14.0
16.0
17.0
19.0
20.0
23.0
24.0
27.0
28.0
32.0
33.0
37.0
43.0
48.0
2-leg bridle slings

45 deg. Angle
HT
0.70
1.1
1.5
2.0
2.6
3.2
4.0
5.5
7.3
9.4
12.0
14.0
17.0
20.0
23.0
27.0
35.0
MS
0.72
1.1
1.6
2.2
2.8
3.5
4.4
6.2
8.4
11.0
13.0
16.0
19.0
22.0
26.0
30.0
39.0
60 deg (1) (30

deg) (2)
HT
MS
0.49
0.51
0.76
0.79
1.1
1.1
1.4
1.5
1.8
2.0
2.3
2.5
2.8
3.1
3.9
4.4
5.1
5.9
6.7
7.7
8.4
9.5
9.8
11.0
12.0
13.
14.0
16.0
16.0
18.0
19.0
21.0
25.0
28.0
HT = Hand Tucked Splice.

1 Vertical angles.
2 Horizontal angles.
453
30 deg (1) (60

deg) (2)
HT
MS
1.3
1.3
2.0
2.0
2.8
2.9
3.7
4.0
4.8
5.1
6.0
6.5
7.3
8.0
10.0
11.0
13.0
15.0
17.0
20.0
22.0
24.0
25.0
29.0
31.0
35.0
36.0
41.0
43.0
48.0
49.0
56.0
64.0
72.0
3-leg bridle slings

45 deg. Angle
HT
1.0
1.6
2.3
3.0
3.9
4.9
5.9
8.3
11.0
14.0
18.0
21.
25.
30.0
35.0
40.0
52.0
MS
1.1
1.7
2.4
3.2
4.2
5.3
6.5
9.3
13.0
16.0
20.0
23.0
28.0
33.0
39.0
45.0
59.0
60 deg (1) (30

deg) (2)
HT
MS
0.74
0.7
1.1
1.2
1.6
1.7
2.1
2.3
2.8
3.0
3.4
3.7
4.2
4.6
5.8
6.6
7.7
8.9
10.0
11.0
13.0
14.0
15.0
17.0
18.0
20.0
21.0
24.0
25.0
28.0
28.0
32.0
37.0
41.0

Rigging Equipment Exercise using Table H - 8 Rated Capacities for 2-leg and 3-leg Bridle Slings
6x19 and 6x37 Classification Improved Plow Steel Grade Rope With Independent Wire Rope Core (IWRC)
Rope
Dia
(Inches)
5/16
3/8
7/16
9/16
5/8
7/8
1
1 1/8
1
1 3/8
1
1 5/8
1
2

Constr
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
37
37
37
37
37
37
30 deg (1) (60

deg) (2)
HT
MS
0.92
0.97
1.4
1.5
2.0
2.1
2.7
2.9
3.4
3.8
4.3
4.8
5.2
5.9
7.3
8.4
9.6
11.0
12.0
15.0
16.0
18.0
18.0
21.0
22.0
25.0
26.0
30.0
31.0
35.0
35.0
41.0
46.0
53.0
2-leg bridle slings

45 deg. Angle
HT
0.75
1.1
1.6
2.2
2.8
3.5
4.2
5.9
7.8
10.0
13.0
15.0
18.0
21.0
25.0
29.0
37.0
MS
0.79
1.2
1.8
2.4
3.1
3.9
4.8
6.9
9.3
12.0
15.0
17.0
21.0
25.0
29.0
33.0
43.0
60 deg (1) (30

deg) (2)
HT
MS
0.53
0.56
1.81
0.87
1.1
1.2
1.5
1.7
2.0
2.2
2.5
2.7
3.0
3.4
4.2
4.9
5.5
6.6
7.2
8.5
9.0
10.0
10.0
12.0
13.0
15.0
15.0
17.0
18.0
20.0
20.0
24.0
26.0
30.0
HT = Hand Tucked Splice.

1 Vertical angles.
2 Horizontal angles.
454
30 deg (1) (60

deg) (2)
HT
MS
1.4
1.4
2.1
2.3
3.0
3.2
4.0
4.4
5.1
5.7
6.4
7.1
7.8
8.8
11.0
13.0
14.0
17.0
19.0
22.0
23.0
27.0
27.0
32.0
33.0
38.0
39.0
45.0
46.0
53.0
53.0
61.0
68.0
79.0
3-leg bridle slings

45 deg. Angle
HT
1.1
1.7
2.4
3.3
4.2
5.2
6.4
8.9
12.0
15.0
19.0
22.0
27.0
32.0
38.0
43.0
56.0
MS
1.2
1.8
2.6
3.6
4.6
5.8
7.2
10.0
14.0
18.0
22.0
26.0
31.0
37.0
43.0
50.0
65.0
60 deg (1) (30

deg) (2)
HT
MS
0.79
0.84
1.2
1.3
1.7
1.9
2.3
2.5
3.0
3.3
3.7
4.1
4.5
5.1
6.3
7.3
8.3
9.9
11.0
13.0
13.0
16.0
16.0
18.0
19.0
22.0
23.0
26.0
27.0
31.0
31.0
35.0
40.0
46.0

OSHA Scaffolding
Under Paragraph 1926.450 (b) it groups all types of scaffolds as either a supported or a
suspension scaffold. OSHA believes that adding this information will make it easier for
employers to identify the appropriate general requirements in 1926.451. In paragraph 1926.451
(a) it sets the minimum strength criteria for all scaffolding components and in paragraph
1926.451 (a) Capacity. (1) requires that each scaffolding and scaffold component shall be
capable of supporting, without failure, its own weight and at least 4 times the maximum intended
load applied or transmitted to it. Paragraphs (a)(2), (a) (3), (a) (4), (a) (5) and (g) of 1926.451
provide exceptions to this general rule. Also Paragraph1926.451 (a) (2) requires that direct
connections to roofs and floors, and counterweights used to balance adjustable suspension
scaffolds, shall be capable or resisting at least 4 times the tipping moment imposed by the
scaffold operating at the rated load of the hoist, or 1.5 (minimum) times the tipping moment
imposed by the scaffolding operating at the stall load of the hoist, whichever is greater. Also,
1626.451 (c) establishes the Criteria for supported scaffolds and 1926.451 (d) establishes the
Criteria for suspension scaffolds.
According to Subpart L titled Scaffolding under Part 1926 and section number .452 describes the
typical types of scaffolding that are available. The major types are (a) pole scaffolds which
consist of single-pole scaffolds and independent pole scaffolds. Also, under 1926.452 (b) is tube
and coupler scaffolds, (c) is titled fabricated frame scaffolds. Some of the specialized scaffolds
include Plasterers, decorators, and large-area scaffolds; Bricklayers square scaffolds; Horse
scaffolds; Form scaffolds and carpenters bracket scaffolds; Roof bracket scaffolds, Outrigger
scaffolds; Pump jack scaffolds; Ladder jack scaffolds; Window jack scaffolds; Crawling boards
(chicken ladders); Step, platform, and trestle ladder scaffolds; Single-point adjustable suspension
scaffolds; Two-point adjustable suspension scaffolds; A multi-point adjustable suspension
scaffold which includes Stone setters multiple-point adjustable suspension scaffolds and
Masons multipoint adjustable suspension scaffolds; Float (ship) scaffolds; Interior hung
scaffolds; Needle beam scaffolds; Multi-level suspended scaffolds; Mobile scaffolds, and under
1926.453 is title Aerial Lifts.
Subpart L Scaffolding under section 1926.454 also addresses Training for Employees working
with scaffolds. This section supplements and clarifies the training requirements of the existing
paragraph 1926.21 (b) (2) which applies to all construction work and requires employers to
instruct each employee in the recognition and avoidance of unsafe conditions and the
regulations applicable to their work environment to control or eliminate any hazards or other
exposure to illness or injury. Section 1926.454 clarifies the types of hazards to be addresses in
all training programs given to employees working on scaffolds and establishes a framework for
training programs while allowing employers to tailor the program to fit their workplace. Section
.454 Paragraph (a) addresses employees who are working on scaffolds and paragraph (b) address
employees who are erecting, dismantling, inspecting and maintaining scaffolds.
455

The scaffolding safety standards also define a Competent Person under 1926.451 and it utilizes
the word a competent person numerous times throughout the section. It also contains the word
Qualified Person several times throughout the standard and it establishes that certain types of
scaffolding shall be designed by an engineer experienced in or a Registered Professional
Engineer. Finally, under the compliance Directive Number (CPL 2-1.23) it establishes the
guidelines for evaluating the duties and responsibilities of the competent person or qualified
person at the job site.
Subpart L Scaffolding provides a non-mandatory Appendices A - E. These are provided as guides
to assist employers in the general guidelines for design loads and allowable spans. The nonmandatory guideline also contains specific guidelines and tables for pole scaffolds, tube and
coupler scaffolds and fabricated frame scaffolds, and numerous other types of scaffolding. For
instance, supported scaffolds such as pole scaffolds, tube and coupler and fabricated frame
scaffolds are classified according to their loading capacity and there are three types of
classifications.
A Light-duty can handle a maximum load of 25 pounds per square foot of platform surface. You
must be particularly careful when working on this type of scaffold because it can be easily
overloaded. A light-duty scaffold requires the supports to be spaced not more than 10 feet apart
along the length of the scaffold. The Medium-duty, scaffold can handle a maximum of 50 pounds
per square foot of working surface. A medium-duty scaffold requires the supports to be spaced
not more than 8 feet apart along the length of the scaffold. Finally, the Heavy-duty scaffold can
handle a 75-pound load per square foot. A heavy-duty scaffold requires the supports to be spaced
not more than 6 feet apart along the length of the scaffold.
The maximum safe load of a scaffold is determined by measuring its platform area and
multiplying the area by the platforms capacity per square foot. For example, if the platform of a
medium-duty scaffold measures five feet by eight feet. To calculate the maximum loading
capacity, you take the area 5' x 8' = 40 Square Feet x 50 pounds per square foot (medium-duty
scaffold) = 2,000 pounds is the maximum loading capacity. However, this load must be evenly
distributed and not concentrated in one area of the platform.
Mobile or Rolling Scaffolds also has some design limitations such as when it is moved, all tools,
equipment, and workers must be secured or removed from the platform to prevent falling
accidents. The floor should be level and free of obstructions. Also, overhead obstructions should
be avoided. Once the scaffold has been positioned, the wheels must be locked to prevent any
sudden movement of the scaffold. Rolling scaffolds must have design and construction features
that will prevent their tipping. The height of the working platform must not exceed four times the
smallest dimension of the base. For example, if the base of a rolling scaffold is eight feet by ten
feet, the maximum height at which the scaffold can be used is 32 feet, which is four times the
smallest dimension of the base. (4 x 8' = 32').
456

The Suspension Scaffolds are the two-point suspension scaffolds, sometimes called the swinging,
or stage scaffold. The two-point suspension scaffold is suspended from the roof by roof hooks.
Another suspension scaffold is the multiple-point suspension scaffold. This type is used for
heavy-duty work and is designed to handle work loads of not more than 50 pounds per square
foot. The work platform is supported by wire ropes suspended from overhead outrigger beams.
The outrigger beam must be at least 15 feet long and should not extend more than six and one
half feet beyond the bearing point. The outrigger beams must be made of structural metal, with
the inside end anchored to the frame or floor system of the building by large U-bolts and anchor
plates. Because suspension scaffolds can swing and move in the wind, the platform must be tied
to the building while you are on it. All suspended scaffolds are hung from either fiber or wire
ropes. These ropes must meet safety requirements. Any rope used for scaffold suspension must
be able to support the weight of the scaffold, all workers and materials it carries.
The rope requirements for a suspended scaffolding supporting a swinging scaffold should not be
less than 3/4 of an inch in diameter. They must be properly rigged into a set of six-inch blocks
consisting of at least one double and one single block. If the scaffold is to be used with acids,
torches, or open flames that will weaken manila rope, then wire rope, not less than 9/16 inch in
diameter, must be used. Where wire rope is used, a hoisting mechanism must be provided on the
end of the scaffold platform. The rope needs to be carefully checked for damage each time it is
used. Otherwise, the damage will not be discovered until it is too late. Checking can be done by
twisting the rope until the strands spread apart. If there are a powdery appearance or broken
strands, the rope is damaged and must be thrown away. Knots and kinks cause damage to a rope
and should be avoided. If usage requires that a rope be continuously twisted in one direction,
compensating turns in the opposite direction should be made to avoid damage to the rope. When
not in use, rope should be stored in dry, well-ventilated areas away from extreme temperatures,
humidity, or dryness. A damp rope will rot, and a dry rope will become brittle, thus losing its
strength and durability. As with any elevated working surface, the platform of a suspended
scaffold must be equipped with a standard guardrail, toe board, and overhead protection where
needed to protect you from being hit by falling objects.
Most suspended scaffolds are raised and lowered with some type of hoisting mechanism. This
mechanism must be checked before each use to make certain it is operating safely. There should
always be at least three turns of rope left on the hoisting drum, to reduce the force exerted on the
rope where it connects with the drum. This measure will lessen the possibility of the rope
slipping from the drum and breaking. Scaffold planks should be inspected before each use to
ensure their safety. There are visible signs indicating that planks are unsafe. Some of the signs
are large knots, excessive grain slope, and decay. Any plank that contains these or other defects
should be discarded. Everyone on a suspended scaffold must wear a safety belt and lanyard. The
lanyard must be fastened either to a substantial member of the structure to which the scaffold is
suspended.
457
L = LOAD (IN POUNDS)

W = COUNTERWEIGHT (IN POUNDS),
X = LOAD LINE TO FULCRUM DISTANCE (IN FEET)
Y = CENTER OF COUNTERWEIGHT TO FULCRUM DISTANCE (IN FEET)
FORMULAS
LX - YW, BUT TO ADD 4 TO 1 SAFETY FACTOR, LX = 4 (YW)
W = 4 (LX), AND Y = 4 (LX)
Y
W
EXAMPLE #1
L = 400 LBS., X = 2 FT., Y = 12 FT., W = ?
W = 4 (400 X 2), W = 4 (800), W = 4 (66.6), W = 266.6 LBS.
12
12
EXAMPLE #2
L = 300 LBS., X = 2 FT., W = 100 LBS., Y = ?
Y = 4 (LX), Y = (300 X 2), Y = 4 (600), Y = 4 (6), Y = 24 FT
W
100
100
458

Scaffolding Exercise
1.
A scaffold must be capable of supporting its own weight and what is the minimum factor
that must be applied to the maximum intended load to determine the capacity?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
OSHA has grouped all scaffolds into two groups and they have established certain criteria
for each group. What are the two groups of scaffolds?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
3 inches.
6 inches.
9 inches.
12 inches.
What is the minimum height to base ratio which requires guying, tying, bracing?
A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
Horizontal Scaffolds and Vertical Scaffolds.

Supported Scaffolds and Suspended Scaffolds.
Mandatory Scaffolds and Non-Mandatory Scaffolds.
Required Scaffold Criteria and Not Required Scaffolds Criteria.
On scaffolds where platforms are overlapped to create a long platform, the lap shall occur
only over supports. What is the minimum lap in inches if they are not nailed?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
0 times.
1 times.
2 times.
4 times.
1:1
2:1
3:1
4:1
What is the maximum vertical tie-in distance range in feet for scaffolds that exceed the
height to base ratio?
A.
B.
C.
D.
20 - 26 feet.
30 - 36 feet.
40 - 46 feet.
50 - 56 feet.
459

6.
What is the maximum horizontal tie-in distance in feet for scaffolds that exceed the
height to base ratio?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
What of the following scaffold descriptions describes an independent pole scaffolding?

A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
A supported scaffolding consisting of a platform(s) resting on bearers supported

by ledgers and a double row of uprights without any support from any structure.
A supported or suspended scaffold consisting of a platform(s) supported by
tubing, erected by coupler devices connecting uprights, braces, bearers, & runners.
A supported scaffolding of a platform resting on thrustouts projecting beyond the
wall or face of the building or structure, the inboard ends are secured to inside the
building or structure.
A supported scaffolding consisting of a platform(s) resting on bearers, the outside
bearers ends are supported on runners secured to a single row of uprights, and the
inner bearer ends are supported on or in a structure or building wall.
At each end of a platform, what is the maximum extension range for extending the
platform beyond its support?
A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
30 feet.
35 feet.
50 feet.
75 feet.
12 - 18 inches.
19 - 24 inches.
25 - 31 inches.
32 - 36 inches.
What is the rated load capacity for a Medium-duty scaffold?

A.
B.
C.
D.
25 pounds per square foot applied uniformly over the entire span area.
250 pounds placed 18 inches to the left and right of the center of the span.
460

Questions 10 through 13 refer to the Non-Mandatory Appendix A in Subpart L, and the tables for
various types of scaffolding.
10.
Using an Independent Wood Pole Scaffold for a Medium Duty Rating. What is the size of
the poles and the maximum on-center longitudinal pole spacing?
A.
B.
C.
D.
11.
Using an Independent Wood Pole Scaffold for a Medium Duty Rating. What is the
maximum traverse pole spacing in feet?
A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
5' - 0"
6' - 0"
6' - 6"
7' - 0"
Using an Independent Wood Pole Scaffold for a Light Duty Rating. What is the
maximum post spacing using a nominal 2 inch OD?
A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
5
6
8
10
Using an Independent Wood Pole Scaffold for a Medium Duty Rating. What is the
maximum vertical spacing of the horizontal members?
A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
2 x 4 inches, spaced 6 feet on-center.

Nominal 2 inch OD steel, spaced 4 feet x 7 feet.
4 feet x 7 feet.
4 feet x 10 feet.
6 feet x 6 feet.
8 feet x 8 feet.
What is the minimum ladder extension above the point of contact?

A.
B.
C.
D.
1
2
3
8
461
15.
What is the maximum height in feet before a pole scaffolds must be designed by a
Registered Professional Engineer?
A.
B.
C.
D.
16.
What is the maximum height in feet before a tube and coupler scaffolds must be designed
by a Registered Professional Engineer?
A.
B.
C.
D.
17.
25
50
75
125
Given the following information concerning a Swing Stage Scaffold, the Load (L) is =
600 pounds, the load line to the fulcrum distance (X) = 2.5 feet, and the length of the
outrigger from the counterweight to the fulcrum point (Y) is 16 feet. What is the weight
(W) of the counter weight in pounds?
A.
B.
C.
D.
19.
25
50
75
125
What is the maximum height in feet before a fabricated frame scaffolds must be designed
by a Registered Professional Engineer?
A.
B.
C.
D.
18.
20
50
60
125
94
375
500
600
What is the maximum height in feet of a ladder jack platform?

A.
B.
C.
D.
20
30
60
125
462

20.
When free-standing mobile (manual rolling Scaffolding) scaffold towers are used, the
height shall not exceed how many times the minimum base dimension?
A.
B.
C.
D.
21.
A manual rolling scaffolding has a base of 7' x 9', What is the maximum height in feet?
A.
B.
C.
D.
22.
2x6
2x8
2 x 10
2 x 12
Using a maximum loading for a medium duty scaffold, What is the maximum permissible
span for a nominal plank 2 x 12?
A.
B.
C.
D.
24.
14 Feet
30 Feet
60 Feet
125 Feet
Using the Non-Mandatory Appendix A in Subpart L, and the Allowable spans table.
What is the minimum nominal size planking that can be used for scaffold planks?
A.
B.
C.
D.
23.
2
9
45
60
4 feet
6 feet
8 feet
10 feet
The point of contact for your ladder is 16' above the ground, What is the proper horizontal
distance from the wall?
A.
B.
C.
D.
03.33 Feet
04.00 Feet
12.00 Feet
16.00 Feet
463
Check Answers

Scaffolding Exercise for Single Wood Pole Scaffolds
Maximum intended load(lbs/sf

Poles or upright
Maximum pole spacing
(longitudinal)
Maximum pole spacing (transverse)
Runners
Bearers and maximum spacing of bearers:
3 feet
5 feet
Light duty up to 20 feet

high
25
2 x 4 in.
6 feet

high
25
4 x 4 in.
10 feet
Medium duty up to 60 feet

high
50
4 x 4 in.
8 feet
Heavy duty up to 60
feet high
75
4 x 6 in.
6 feet
5 feet
1 x 4 in.
5 feet
1 x 9 in.
5 feet
2 x 10 in.
5 feet
2 x 10 in.
2 x 4 in.
2 x 6 in. or 3 x 4 in.
2 x 10 in. or 3 x 4 in.
2 x 10 in. or 3 x 4 in.
2 x 10 in. or 3 x 5 in.
2 x 10 in. or 3 x 5 in.
2 x 10 in. or 3 x 4 in.
2 x 10 in. or 3 x 4 in.
2 x 10 in. or 3 x 5 in.
2 x 10 in. or 3 x 5 in.
6 feet
8 feet
-------
2 x 4 in.
2 x 6 in. or 3 x 4 in.
(rough)
---------
Planking
Maximum vertical spacing of horizontal
members
Bracing horizontal
Bracing diagonal
Tie-ins
1 x 9 in.
7 feet
2 x 10 in.
9 feet
2 x 10 in.
7 feet
2 x 10 in.
6 ft. 6 in.
1 x 4 in.
1 x 4 in.
1 x 4 in.
1 x 4 in.
1 x 4 in.
1 x 4 in.
1 x 6 in. or 1 x 4 in.
1 x 4 in.
1 x 4 in.
2 x 4 in.
2 x 4 in.
1 x 4 in.
Note: All members except planking are used on edge. All wood bearers shall be reinforced with 3/16 x 2 inch steel strip, or the equivalent, secured to the lower
edges for the entire length of the bearer.
464

Scaffolding Exercise for Independent Wood Pole Scaffolds
Light duty up to 20
feet high
25 lbs/ft (2)
2 x 4 in.
6 feet

high
25 lbs/ft (2)
4 x 4 in.
10 feet
Medium duty up to 60
feet high
50 lbs/ft (2)
4 x 4 in.
8 feet
Heavy duty up to 60
feet high
75 lbs/ft (2)
4 x 4 in.
6 feet
6 feet
1 x 4 in.
10 feet
1 x 9 in.
8 feet
2 x 10 in.
8 feet
2 x 10 in.
2 x 4 in.
2 x 4 in.
2 x 10 in.
2 x 10 in (rough).
6 feet
2 x 6 in. or 3 x 4 in.
2 x 10 in. (rough) or 3 x 8 in.
2 x 10 in.
2 x 10 in. (rough).
8 feet
2 x 6 in. or 3 x 4 in.
2 x 10kn. (rough) or 3 x 8 in.
2 x 10 in
10 feet
Planking
Maximum vertical
spacing of horizontal
members
Bracing horizontal
Bracing diagonal
Tie-ins
2 x 6 in. or 3 x 4 in.
1 x 9 in.
7 feet
2 x 10in. (rough) or 3 x 3 in.

2 x 10 in.
7 feet
2 x 10 in.
6 feet
2 x 10 in.
6 feet
1 x 4 in
1 x 4 in.
1 x 4 in.
1 x 4 in.
1 x 4 in.
1 x 4 in.
1 x 6 in. or 1 x 4 in.
1 x 4 in.
1 x 4 in.
2 x 4 in.
2 x 4 in.
1 x 4 in.
Maximum intended load

Poles or uprights
Maximum pole spacing
(longitudinal).
Maximum (transverse).
Runners
Bearers and maximum
spacing of bearers:
3 feet
Note: All members except planking are used on edge. All wood bearers shall be reinforced with 3/16 x 2 inch steel strip, or the equivalent, secured to the lower
edges for the entire length of the bearer.
465

Scaffolding Exercise for Tube and Coupler Scaffolds
(b)
MINIMUM SIZE OF MEMBERS
Light duty
Medium duty
Heavy duty
Maximum intended load
25 lbs/ft (2)
50 lbs/ft (2)
75 lbs/ft (2).
Posts, runners and braces
Nominal 2 in. (1.90 inches)

OD steel tube or pipe.


Bearers

OD steel tube or pipe and a maximum
post spacing of 4 ft. x 10 ft.
Nominal 2 in. (.190 inches)

OD steel tube or pipe and a maximum
post spacing of 4 ft x 7 ft. or
Nominal 2 in. (2.375 in.). OD steel
tube or pipe and a maximum post
spacing of 6 ft. x 8 ft.*
Nominal 2 in. (2.375 in.). OD

steel tube or pipe and a maximum
post spacing of 6 ft. x 6 ft.
Maximum runner spacing vertically
6 ft. 6 in.
6 ft. 6 in.
6 ft. 6 in.
Footnote(*) Bearers shall be installed in the direction of the shorter dimension. Note: Longitudinal diagonal bracing shall be installed at an angle of 45 deg. (+/- 5).
Allowable spans for 2 x 10 inch (nominal) or 2 x 9 inch (rough) solid sawn wood planks as shown in the following table which is in
compliance with the National Design Specification for Wood Construction published by the National Forest Products Association.
Maximum intended
nominal load (lb/sf)
Maximum permissible span using full thickness

undressed lumber (feet)
Maximum permissible span using

nominal thickness lumber (feet)
25
10
50
75
------
466

OSHA Soil Classification System
The Unconfined Compressive Strength is the load per unit area at which soil will fail in
compression. This measure can be determined by laboratory testing, or it can be estimated in the
field using a pocket penetrometer, Torvane Soil Tester or a thumb penetration test. OSHA has
established a Soil Classification System for categorizing soil and rock deposits in a hierarchy of
Stable Rock, Type A, Type B, and Type C, in decreasing order of stability. The categories are
determined based on an analysis of the properties and performance characteristics of the deposits
and the environmental conditions of the exposure. A Type A Soil is defined as a Cohesive soil
with an unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 tons per square Foot (tsf) or Greater. Cohesive
soil examples are clay, silty clay, sandy clay, clay loam. However no soil is Type A if:
1.
The soil is fissured; or
2.
The soil is subject to vibration from heavy traffic, pile driving, or similar
effects; or
3.
The soil has been previously disturbed; or
4.
The soil is part of a sloped, layered system where the layers dip into the
excavation on a slope of four horizontal to one vertical (4H:1V) or greater; or
5.
The material is subject to other factors that would require it to be classified as

a less stable material.
A Type B Soil means a cohesive soil with an unconfined compressive strength greater than 0 .5
tons per square foot but less than 1.5 tsf; or Granular Cohesionless soils including: angular gravel
(similar to crushed rock), silt, silt loam, sandy loam and, in some cases, silty clay loam and sandy
clay loam. Also, a soil is a Type B if previously disturbed soil except those which would
otherwise be classified as a Type C soil. Soil that meets the unconfined compressive strength or
cementation requirements for Type A, but is fissured or subject to vibration; or dry rock that is
not stable; or material that is part of a sloped, layered systems where the layers dip into the
excavation on a slope less steep than four horizontal to one vertical (4H:1V), but only if the
material would otherwise be classified as Type B.
A Type C soil means a cohesive soil with an unconfined compressive strength of 0.5 tsf or less;
or granular soils including gravel, sand and loamy sand; or submerged soil or soil from which
water is freely seeping; or submerged Rock that is not Stable; or material in a sloped, layered
system where the layers dip into the excavation or a slope of four horizontal to one vertical
(4H:1V) or steeper. Also, OSHA defines the Stable Rock classification as natural solid mineral
matter that can be excavated with vertical sides and remain intact while exposed.
467

Finally, according to the OSHA standards whenever you are classifying a soil and if any of the
following characteristics are encountered, then the soil type must be dropped. For example, if the
soil is: 1. Fissured or tension cracks on the surface or in the wall of the trench; 2. Vibrated from
nearby traffic, equipment or blasting; 3. previously disturbed or excavated areas; 4. Water freely
flowing into the trench; 5. sloped layers with a 4H: 1V or steeper; 6. excavation is below the
water table; 7. a rock layer is above a weaker soil layer; or 8. Blasting occurs nearby then the soil
type must be lowered. Below is a summary of the OSHA Soil Classification System.
CHARACTERISTICS
SOIL TYPE
W ater Table
Visual
Tilted Soil
Layers
TYPE A SOILS
Intact Hard Soils
Above water
table
*cohesive soils
*unconfined compressive strength
Not saturated
No tilting
layers
dipping
into the
trench with
a slope of
4H: 1V or
steeper
No soil
layers
below
bed
rock
layers
More than
1.5 tons per
sq. ft.
May have
Fissures or
Cracks
No tilting
layers
dipping
into the
trench with
a slope of
4H:1V or
steeper
No soil
layers
below
bed
rock
layers
Between 0.5 1.5 tons per

sq. ft.
May not be
able to
stand on
slope of
3H:1V
without
slumping
May
contain
layers
tilting in at
4H:1V
slope or
greater
clay, silty clay, sandy clay, clay

loam and, in some cases, silty clay
loam & sandy clay loam.
* cohesive soils
Above water
table
*unconfined compressive strength

Examples are: angular gravel; silt; silt
loam; fissured or subject to vibration;
dry unstable rock;
TYPE C SOILS
*cohesive soils
*granular soils such as gravel,
sand and loamy sand,
submerged soil, soil from which
Not saturated
May be
within water
table or
Saturated
Unconfined
Compressive
Strength
No
fissures,
cracks, or
weak
layers
*Examples of Type A Soils
TYPE B SOILS
Soil
Layers
water is freely seeping, and

submerged rock that is not stable.
Stable Rock
468

Soil Classification Exercise
1.
2.
You have performed the following Visual inspection and manual tests. How would you
classify a soil that has the following properties?
Visual Observations:
Trench 12 feet deep
Soil Observation:
Angular Gravel
Unconfined Compressive strength:
1.12 tsf
Surrounding Area & Trench Conditions:
an open field
A.
Type A soil
B.
Type B soil
C.
Type C soil
D.
Stable Rock
Trench 16 feet deep
Soil Observation:
Sand
0.43 tsf
an open field
A.
Type A soil
B.
Type B soil
C.
Type C soil
D.
Stable Rock
469

3.
4.
Trench 6 feet deep
Soil Observation:
Clay
1.73 tsf
An open Field
A.
Type A soil
B.
Type B soil
C.
Type C soil
D.
Stable Rock
Trench 14 feet deep
Soil Observation:
Sandy Clay
1.73 tsf
water is freely seeping
A.
Type A soil
B.
Type B soil
C.
Type C soil
D.
Stable Rock
470

5.
6.
Trench 9 feet deep
Soil Observation:
Silty Clay
2.40 tsf
Previously Disturbed Soil
A.
Type A soil
B.
Type B soil
C.
Type C soil
D.
Stable Rock
Trench 16 feet deep
Soil Observation:
Sandy Clay
0.47 tsf
Sloped Layered system with

4H:1V
A.
Type A soil
B.
Type B soil
C.
Type C soil
D.
Stable Rock
471

7.
8.
9.
Trench 13 feet deep
Soil Observation:
Clay Loam
1.56 tsf
Vibration Nearby
A.
Type A soil
B.
Type B soil
C.
Type C soil
D.
Stable Rock
Trench 7 feet deep
Soil Observation:
Sandy Loam
1.05 tsf
Previously Disturbed
A.
Type A soil
B.
Type B soil
C.
Type C soil
D.
Stable Rock
What is the maximum lateral travel distance to a means of egress in a 5' deep trench?
A.
25 feet
B.
50 feet
C.
75 feet
D.
100 feet
472
Check Answers

OSHA Timber Shoring
A Support System is a structure such as a timber shoring system or hydraulic shoring system that
supports the sides of an excavation and protects employees against cave-ins. According to the
OSHA Excavation Safety Standards, anytime a worker enters a trench at least five (5) feet deep
you must provide protection from cave-ins. After a qualified person has determined the type of
soil, they have a few options. First, they can design a shoring system using the Shoring Designs
provided in the Standards. The Second option is to design a support system using a
Manufacturer's system. Finally, they can use a trench box. Below we will define the shoring
options outlined in the excavation safety standards for shoring systems under twenty feet deep.
According to the OSHA Construction Standards, for excavations over twenty (20) feet deep you
must contact a Registered Professional Engineer (RPE) to design the protection system.
Subpart P titled Excavations under Paragraph1926.650, .651, .652 and Appendix C to Subpart P
titled Timber Shoring for Trenches contain information that can be used to design timber shoring
Systems or Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring. According to OSHA the Shoring Timber Tables are
taken from the National Bureau of Standards (NBS) report, "Recommended Technical Provisions
for Construction Practice in Shoring and Sloping of Trenches and Excavations."
Shoring Tables Classified by Soil Type
OSHA has classified shoring tables as C for Timber shoring and D for Aluminum Hydraulic
shoring. The Timber Shoring Tables C are further broken down by the type of material: Mixed
Oak or Douglas Fir. The C-1.1, C-1.2 and C- 1.3 are based on using Mixed Oak with actual
dimensions. Table C-1.1 is for a Type A soil. Table 1.2 is for a Type B soil. Table 1.3 is for a
Type C soil. Another group of Timber Shoring Tables C-2.1, C-2.2 and C-2.3 are based on using
Douglas Fir with nominal sizes (S4S). Table C-2.1 is for a Type A soil. Table 2.2 is for a Type B
soil. Table 2.3 is for a Type C soil.
The Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring Tables D-1.1 through D-1.4 state the maximum vertical and
horizontal spacings that may be used. Tables D 1.1 and D-1.2 are for vertical shores in Type A
and Type B soils. Tables D-1.3 and D-1.4 are for a Horizontal Waler Systems in Type B and
Type C soils. In conclusion, all of the tables are arranged by Soil Type and the data was
developed to apply to the situations that are most commonly experienced in current trenching
practice. Finally, all of the tables only apply to Timber and Hydraulic shoring systems that do not
exceed 20 feet deep excavations.
473

Shoring Components
The OSHA Standards for the Construction Industry 29 CFR Part 1926.650(b) titled, Definitions
applicable to subpart P - Excavations defines the following shoring terms. Sheeting means the
individual members of a shoring system that are closely spaced together to retain the earth.
Sheeting is also called Uprights or Sheet Piling. Uprights mean the vertical members of a trench
shoring system placed in contact with the earth and usually positioned so that individual
members do not contact each other (p 253).
Wales are the horizontal members of a shoring system placed parallel to the excavation face
whose sides bear against the vertical members of the shoring system or set perpendicular to the
sheeting. Crossbraces or Struts are the horizontal members of the shoring system that span
across the width of an excavation. They are installed perpendicular to the sides of the excavation
and the ends are connected to either uprights or wales.
Tight Sheeting refers to the use of specially-edged timber planks (e.g. Tongue and Groove) at
least three inches thick when conditions are saturated or submerged in water as defined in the
OSHA 1926.652(g), titled Notes for all Tables, paragraph 2.. Steel sheet piling when driven must
provide a tight wall to resist the lateral pressure of water and to prevent the loss of backfill
material. According to 1926 Subpart P Appendix C (g) Notes for all Tables. 2. When conditions
are saturated or submerged use Tight Sheeting. Tight Sheeting refers to the use of speciallyedged timber planks (e.g., tongue and groove) at least 3 inches thick, steel sheet piling, or similar
construction that when driven or placed in position provide a tight wall to resist the lateral
pressure of water and to prevent the loss of backfill material. According to 1926 Subpart P
Appendix C (g) Notes for all Tables. 2. Close Sheeting refers to the placement fo planks side-byside allowing as little space as possible between them. Close Sheeting refers to the space between
the timber planks not to exceed inch when placed edge to edge according to OSHA
1926.652(g), titled Notes for all Tables, paragraph 2.
Finally, under the Depth of Trench (Feet) column at the Over 20 (feet) row it says, See Note 1
and Note 1 under OSHA 1926.652(g), titled Notes for all Tables paragraph (1) states that
members sizes at spacings other than indicated are to be determined as specified in 1926.652(c)
titled, Design of Protective Systems. This section goes on to say that designs of supports
systems, shield systems and other protective systems shall be selected and constructed by the
contractor or their designee and shall be in accordance with the paragraph (c) (1) titled, Option
(1) - Designs using Appendices A, C and D. Another alternative in paragraph (c)(2) titled, Option
(2) - Designs Using Manufacturers Tabulated Data. A third alternative in paragraph (c)(3)
titled, Option (3) - Designs using other tabulated data. A fourth alternative in paragraph (c)(4)
titled, Option (4) - Design by a Registered Professional Engineer.
474

Given the Soil type, the depth and width of the trench and the type of timber available, below is
an example on how to utilize the timber tables to determine the size of the members and the oncenter spacing of each component.
Soil Type
Depth
13 Feet
W idth
5 Feet
Timber Species Available
Mixed Oak
From the information above, there are two acceptable arrangements from using the table selected.
Example of Timber Shoring Requirements for Arrangement #1
Type of Soil Identified
Type of Material Utilized
Shoring Table Number Selected
Mixed Oak
C - 1.3
MEMBERS
SIZE
ON-CENTER SPACING
Cross braces
8" x 8"
Horizontal _____6 Feet__
Vertical
W ales
Uprights
_____5 Feet__
10" x 12"
Vertical
5 Feet
2" x 6"
Spacing
Close
Arrangement #2
Type of Soil Identified
Uprights
Shoring Table Number Selected
Mixed Oak
C - 1.3
MEMBERS
SIZE
ON-CENTER SPACING
Cross braces
W ales
Type of Material Utilized
8" x 10"
Horizontal ______8 Feet
Vertical
______ 5 Feet
12 x 12"
Vertical
5 Feet
2" x 6"
Spacing
W ater Tight: Tongue & Groove
475
Close

OSHA Soil Classification System is outlined below. Type A is a cohesive soil with an
unconfined compressive strength of 1.5 ton per square foot (Tsf) or Greater. Cohesive soil
examples are clay, silty clay, sandy clay, clay loam and, in some cases, silty clay loam and sandy
clay loam. Cemented soils such as caliche and hardpan are also considered Type A. However, No
soil is classify as a Type A If:
(1)
The soil is fissured.
(2)
The soil is subject to vibration from heavy traffic or pile driving.
(3)
The soil has been previously disturbed soil.
(4)
The soil is a part of a sloped, layered system where the layers dip
into the Excavation on a slope of four horizontal to one vertical
(4H:1V) or greater
E.
The material is subject to other factors that would require it to be

classified as a less stable material.
.
Type B Cohesive Soil with an unconfined compressive strength greater than .5 tons per square
foot but less than 1.5 tsf. Granular Cohesionless soils including angular gravel, silt, silt
loam, sandy loam and in some cases silty clay loam and sandy clay loam. Also,
(1)
Previously disturbed soils except those which would otherwise be

classified as Type C soil.
(2)
Soil that meets the unconfined compressive strength or cementation

requirements of a Type A soil, but is fissured or subject to vibration.
(3)
Dry rock that is not stable.
(4)
Material that is part of a sloped, layered system where the layers dip
into the excavation on a slope less steep than four horizontal to one
vertical (4H:1V), but only if the material would otherwise be
classified as Type B.
Type C Cohesive soil with an unconfined compressive strength of .5 Tsf or less. Granular soils
include gravel, sand and loamy soil or
(1)
Submerged soil or Soil from which water is freely seeping
(2)
Submerged Rock that is not Stable.
(3)
Material in a sloped, layered system where the layers dip into the
excavation or a slope of four horizontal to one vertical (4H:1V) or
steeper.
476

OSHA Shoring Tables Exercise
1.
What does the term Uprights from the timber shoring tables mean?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
What is the Difference between the C series and D series Tables?

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Table C-1.1 is for Mixed Oak and Table C-2.1 is for Douglas Fir.
Table C-1.1 is for Douglas Fir and Table C-2.1 is for Mixed Oak.
Table C-1.1 is for Soil Type A and Table C-2.1 is for Soil Type B.
Table C-1.1 is for Steel Sheeting and Table C-2.1 is for Aluminum Hydraulic.
What is the difference between Table C-1.1 and C-1.2?

A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
Table C is for Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring. and Table B is for Soil Type A.
Table C is for Steel Sheeting and Table D is for Aluminum Hydraulic Shores.
Table C is for Maximum Allowable Slopes and Table D is for Sloping.
Table C is for Timber Shoring and Table D is for Aluminum Hydraulic.
What is the difference between Table C-1.1 and C-2.1?

A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
The vertical supports that separate the wales.

The vertical sheet piles that restrain the soil.
The studs or braces that support the vertical shoring system.
The posts or shores that support the horizontal shoring system.
Table C-1.1 is for Mixed Oak and Table C-1.2 is for Douglas Fir.
Table C-1.1 is for Douglas Fir and Table C-1.2 is for Mixed Oak.
Table C-1.1 is for Soil Type A and Table C-1.2 is for Soil Type B.
Table C-1.1 is for Steel Sheeting and Table C-1.2 is for Aluminum Hydraulic.
What is the maximum depth that you can use shoring tables C and D?
A.
B.
C.
D.
20 Feet
60 Feet
100 Feet
125 Feet
477

OSHA Shoring Tables Exercise
Questions 6 and 7 refer to the Timber Shore Tables C & the Hydraulic Shore Tables D attached.
6.
A trench is excavated in a Type A soil, 13 feet deep and 5 feet wide. The cross braces
available are a 6" x 6" and the shoring available is a Mixed Oak. What is the horizontal
and vertical spacing of the cross braces, the size and spacing of the wales and the size
and spacing of the sheeting?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
Cross braces are spaced 6 feet horizontally and 5 feet vertically. The wales are
8" x 8" spaced 5 feet vertically, and the uprights are 2" x 6" spaced 2 feet
horizontally.
6" x 8" spaced 4 feet vertically, and the uprights are 4" x 6" spaced 4 feet
horizontally.
Cross braces are spaced 10 feet horizontally and 4 feet vertically. The wales
are 8" x 10" spaced 4 feet vertically, and the uprights are 2" x 6" spaced 5 feet
horizontally.
are 8" x 8" spaced 4 feet vertically, and the uprights are 4" x 8" spaced 5 feet
horizontally.
A trench is excavated in a Type B soil, 19 feet deep and 5 feet wide. The cross braces
available are a 8" x 8" and the shoring available is a Douglas Fir. What is the horizontal
and vertical spacing of the cross braces, the size and spacing of the wales and the size
and spacing of the sheeting?
A.
B.
C.
D.
10" x 12" spaced 5 feet vertically, and the uprights are 3" x 6" spaced close
horizontally.
6" x 8" spaced 4 feet vertically, and the uprights are 4" x 6" spaced close
horizontally.
are 8" x 10" spaced 4 feet vertically, and the uprights are 3" x 6" spaced close
horizontally.
are 12" x 12" spaced 5 feet vertically, and the uprights are 4" x 6" spaced
close horizontally.
Check Answers
478

OSHA Shoring Tables Exercise using Table C-1.1 Timber Trench Shoring Minimum Timber Requirements
Soil Type A Pa = 25 x H + 72 PSF (2 FT Surcharge)
SIZE (A C TU AL) A N D SPAC IN G O F M EM BER S **
D E PT H
OF
TR EN C H
(FEET)
C R O SS BRA C ES
W ID TH O F TR EN C H (FEET)
HO R IZ.
SPAC IN G
(FEET)
U P TO 4
5
W ALES
U P TO 6
U P TO 9
V ER T.
SPAC IN G
(FEET)
U P TO 12
U P TO 15
SIZE
(IN .)
U PR IG HTS
M AX IM U M ALLO W ABLE HO R IZO N TAL SPAC IN G
(FEET)
V ER T.
SPAC IN G
(FEET)
C LO SE
U P TO 6
4X 4
4X 4
4X 6
6X 6
6X 6
NOT
R EQ D
U P TO 8
4X 4
4X 4
4X 6
6X 6
6X 6
NOT
R EQ D
U P TO 10
4X 6
4X 6
4X 6
6X 6
6X 6
8X 8
U P TO 12
4X 6
4X 6
6X 6
6X 6
6X 6
8X 8
U P TO 6
4X 4
4X 4
4X 6
6X 6
6X 6
NOT
R EQ D
U P TO 8
4X 6
4X 6
6X 6
6X 6
6X 6
8X 8
U P TO 10
6X 6
6X 6
6X 6
6X 8
6X 8
8X 10
U P TO 12
6X 6
6X 6
6X 6
6X 8
6X 8
10X 10
15
U P TO 6
6X 6
6X 6
6X 6
6X 8
6x8
6X 8
3X 6
TO
U P TO 8
6X 6
6X 6
6X 6
6X 8
6X 8
8X 8
3X 6
20
U P TO 10
8X 8
8X 8
8X 8
8X 8
8X 10
8X 10
3X 6
U P TO 12
8X 8
8X 8
8X 8
8X 8
8X 10
10X 10
3X 6
2X 6
TO
10
10
2X 8
2X 6
2X 6
3X 8
TO
2X 6
15
O V ER 20
SEE N O TE 1
* Mixed oak or equivalent with a bending strength not less than 850 psi.
** Manufactured members of equivalent strength may be substituted for wood.
479
2X 6
3X 8

OSHA Shoring Tables Exercise using Table C-1.2 Timber Trench Shoring Minimum Timber Requirements *
Soil Type B P a = 45 X H + 72 psf (2 ft. Surcharge)
D E PT H
OF
TR EN C H
(FEET)
C R O SS BRA C ES
W ALES
HO R IZ.
SPAC IN G
(FEET)
U P TO 4
U P TO 6
U P TO 9
V ER T.
SPAC IN G
(FEET)
U P TO 12
U P TO 15
SIZE
(IN .)
U PR IG HTS
(FEET)
V ER T.
SPAC IN G
(FEET)
C LO SE
U P TO 6
4X 6
4X 6
6x6
6X 6
6X 6
6x8
2x6
TO
U P TO 8
6x6
6x6
6x6
6x8
6x8
8x10
2x6
10
U P TO 10
6x6
6x6
6x6
6x8
6x8
10x10
2X 6
See N ote 1
10
U P TO 6
6x6
6x6
6x6
6x8
6x8
8x8
2x6
TO
U P TO 8
6x8
6x8
6x8
8x8
8x8
10x10
2x6
15
U P TO 10
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x10
10x12
2x6
See N ote 1
15
U P TO 6
6x8
6x8
6x8
8x8
8x8
8x10
3X 6
TO
U P TO 8
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x10
10x12
3X 6
20
U P TO 10
8x10
8x10
8x10
8x10
10x10
12x12
3X 6
See N ote 1
O V ER 20
SEE N O TE 1
480

OSHA Shoring Tables Exercise using Table C-1.3 Timber Trench Shoring Minimum Timber Requirements*
Soil Type C
Pa - 80 X H + 72 psf (2 ft. Surcharge)
D E PT H
OF
TR EN C H
(FEET)
C R O SS BRA C ES
W ALES
HO R IZ.
SPAC IN G
(FEET)
U P TO 4
U P TO 6
U P TO 9
V ER T.
SPAC IN G
(FEET)
U P TO 12
U P TO 15
SIZE
(IN .)
U PR IG HTS
(FEET)
V ER T.
SPAC IN G
(FEET)
C LO SE
U P TO 6
6x8
6x8
6x8
8x8
8x8
8x10
2x6
TO
U P TO 8
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x10
10x12
2x6
10
U P TO 10
8x10
8x10
8x10
8x10
10x10
12x12
2X 6
See N ote 1
10
U P TO 6
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x10
10x12
2x6
TO
U P TO 8
8x10
8x10
8x10
8x10
10x10
12x12
2x6
15
See N ote 1
8x10
8x10
8x10
8x10
10x10
12x12
3X 6
See N ote 1
15
U P TO 6
TO
See N ote 1
20
See N ote 1
See N ote 1
O V ER 20
SEE N O TE 1
481

Soil Type A Pa = 25 X H + 72 psf (2 ft. Surcharge)
D E PT H
OF
TR EN C H
(FEET)
C R O SS BRA C ES
HO R IZ.
SPAC IN G
(FEET)
U P TO 4
5
U P TO 6
W ALES
U P TO 6
U P TO 9
V ER T.
SPAC IN G
(FEET)
U P TO 12
U P TO 15
SIZE
(IN .)
U PR IG HTS
(FEET)
V ER T.
SPAC IN G
(FEET)
C LO SE
4X 4
4X 4
4X 4
4X 4
4X 6
N ot R eqd
N ot R eqd
U P TO 8
4x4
4x4
4x4
4x6
4x6
N ot R eqd
N ot R eqd
10
U P TO 10
4x6
4x6
4x6
6x6
6x6
8x8
U P TO 12
4x6
4x6
4x6
6x6
6x6
8x8
10
U P TO 6
4x4
4x4
4x4
6x6
6x6
N ot R eqd
N ot R eqd
TO
U P TO 8
4x6
4x6
4x6
6x6
6x6
6x8
15
U P TO 10
6x6
6x6
6x6
6x6
6x6
8x8
U P TO 12
6x6
6x6
6x6
6x6
6x6
8x10
15
U P TO 6
6x6
6x6
6x6
6x6
6x6
6x8
3x6
TO
U P TO 8
6x6
6x6
6x6
6x6
6x6
8x8
3x6
20
U P TO 10
6x6
6x6
6x6
6x6
6x8
8x10
3x6
6x6
6x6
6x6
6x8
6x8
8x12
3x6
O V ER 20
SEE N O TE 1
* Douglas Fir or equivalent with a bending strength not less than 1500 psi.
482
4x6
TO
U P TO 12
4x6
4x6
4x6
4x10
4x6
4x8
4x6
4x12
4x12
4x10

Soil Type B Pa = 45 X H + 72 psf (2 ft. Surcharge)
D E PT H
OF
TR EN C H
(FEET)
C R O SS BRA C ES
HO R IZ.
SPAC IN G
(FEET)
U P TO 4
5
W ALES
U P TO 6
U P TO 9
V ER T.
SPAC IN G
(FEET)
U P TO 12
U P TO 15
SIZE
(IN .)
U PR IG HTS
(FEET)
V ER T.
SPAC IN G
(FEET)
C LO SE
U P TO 6
4X 6
4X 6
4x6
6X 6
6X 6
6x8
U P TO 8
4x6
4x6
6x6
6x6
6x6
8x8
U P TO 10
4x6
4x6
6x6
6x6
6x8
8x10
3 x 12
4x8
4 x 12
TO
3x8
4x8
10
4x8
See N ote 1
10
U P TO 6
6x6
6x6
6x6
6x8
6x8
8x8
3x6
4 x 10
TO
U P TO 8
6x8
6x8
6x8
8x8
8x8
10x10
3x6
4 x 10
15
U P TO 10
6x8
6x8
8x8
8x8
8x8
10x12
3x6
4 x 10
See N ote 1
15
U P TO 6
6x8
6x8
6x8
6x8
8x8
8x10
4X 6
TO
U P TO 8
6x8
6x8
6x8
8x8
8x8
10x12
4X 6
20
U P TO 10
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x8
12x12
4X 6
See N ote 1
O V ER 20
SEE N O TE 1
*Douglas fir or equivalent with a bending strength not less than 1500 psi.
483

Soil Type C Pa = 80 X H + 72 psf (2 ft. Surcharge)
D E PT H
OF
TR EN C H
(FEET)
C R O SS BRA C ES
W ALES
HO R IZ.
SPAC IN G
(FEET)
U P TO 4
U P TO 6
U P TO 9
V ER T.
SPAC IN G
(FEET)
U P TO 12
U P TO 15
SIZE
(IN .)
U PR IG HTS
(FEET)
V ER T.
SPAC IN G
(FEET)
C LO SE
U P TO 6
6x6
6x6
6x6
6x6
8x8
8x8
3x6
TO
U P TO 8
6x6
6x6
6x6
8x8
8x8
10x10
3x6
10
U P TO 10
6x6
6x6
8x8
8x8
8x8
10x12
3x6
See N ote 1
10
U P TO 6
6x8
6x8
6x8
8x8
8x8
10x10
4x6
TO
U P TO 8
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x8
12x12
4x6
15
See N ote 1
8x8
8x8
8x8
8x10
8x10
10x12
See N ote 1
15
U P TO 6
TO
See N ote 1
20
See N ote 1
See N ote 1
O V ER 20
SEE N O TE 1
*Douglas fir or equivalent with a bending strength not less than 1500 psi.
** Manufactured members of equivalent strength may by substituted for wood.
484
4x6

OSHA Shoring Tables Exercise using Table D - 1.1 Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring - Vertical Shores for Soil Type A
DEPTH
OF
TRENCH
(FEET)
HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS
MAXIMUM
HORIZONTAL
SPACING
MAXIMUM
VERTICAL
SPACING
(FEET)
(FEET)
OVER
5
UP TO
10
UP TO 8
OVER 8 UP
TO 12
OVER 12 UP
TO 15
2 INCH
DIAMETER
2 INCH
DIAMETER
NOTE (2)
3 INCH
DIAMETER
OVER
10
UP TO
15
OVER
15
UP TO
20
OVER 20
W IDTH OF TRENCH (FEET)
NOTE (1)
Footnotes to tables, and general notes on hydraulic shoring, are found in Appendix D, Item (g)
Note (1): See Appendix D, Item (g) (1)
485

OSHA Shoring Tables Exercise using Table D - 1.2 Aluminum Hydraulics Shoring - Vertical Shores for Soil Type B
DEPTH
OF
TRENCH
(FEET)
HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS
MAXIMUM
HORIZONTAL
SPACING
MAXIMUM
VERTICAL
SPACING
(FEET)
(FEET)
OVER
5
UP TO
10
UP TO 8
OVER 8 UP
TO 12
OVER 12 UP
TO 15
2 INCH
DIAMETER
2 INCH
DIAMETER
NOTE (2)
3 INCH
DIAMETER
OVER
10
UP TO
15
6.5
OVER
15
UP TO
20
OVER 20
W IDTH OF TRENCH (FEET)
5.5
NOTE (1)
Footnotes to tables, and general notes on hydraulic shoring, are found in Appendix D, Item (g)
486

OSHA Shoring Tables Exercise using Table D - 1.3 Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring - Waler Systems for Soil Type B
DEPTH
OF
TRENCH
(FEET)
OVER
5
UP TO
10
OVER
10
UP TO
15
OVER
15
UP TO
20
OVER 20
WALES
VERTICAL
SPACING
SECTION
MODULUS
(FEET)
(IN)
UP TO 8
HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS
TIMBER UPRIGHTS
WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET)
MAX. HORIZ. SPACING

(ON CENTER)
OVER 8 UP TO 12
OVER 12 UP TO 15
HORIZ.
SPACING
CYLINDER
DIAMETER
HORIZ.
SPACING
CYLINDER
DIAMETER
HORIZ.
SPACING
CYLINDER
DIAMETER
3.5
8.0
2 IN
8.0
2 IN
NOTE (2)
8.0
3 IN
7.0
9.0
2 IN
9.0
2 IN
NOTE (2)
9.0
3 IN
14.0
12.0
3 IN
12.0
3 IN
12.0
3 IN
3.5
6.0
2 IN
6.0
2 IN
NOTE (2)
6.0
3 IN
7.0
8.0
3 IN
8.0
3 IN
8.0
3 IN
14.0
10.0
3 IN
10.0
3 IN
10.0
3 IN
3.5
5.5
2 IN
5.5
2 IN
NOTE (2)
5.5
3 IN
7.0
6.0
3 IN
6.0
3 IN
6.0
3 IN
14.0
9.0
3 IN
9.0
3 IN
9.0
3 IN
NOTE (1)
Footnotes to tables, and general notes on hydraulic shoring, are found in appendix D, Item (g)
Notes: (1): See Appendix D. item (g) (1).
Notes: (2): See Appendix D. item (g) (2). *Consult manufacturer/Qualified engineer for Section M odulus of wales.
487
SOLID
SHEET
2 FT
3 FT
---
---
3X12
---
3X12
---
3X12
---
---

OSHA Shoring Tables Exercise using Table D - 1.4 Aluminum Hydraulic Shoring - Waler Systems for Soil Type C
DEPTH
OF
TRENCH
(FEET)
OVER
5
UP TO
10
OVER
10
UP TO
15
OVER
15
UP TO
20
OVER 20
WALES
VERTICAL
SPACING
SECTION
MODULUS
(FEET)
(IN)
UP TO 8
HYDRAULIC CYLINDERS
TIMBER UPRIGHTS
WIDTH OF TRENCH (FEET)
MAX. HORIZ. SPACING

(ON CENTER)
OVER 8 UP TO 12
OVER 12 UP TO 15
HORIZ.
SPACING
CYLINDER
DIAMETER
HORIZ.
SPACING
CYLINDER
DIAMETER
HORIZ.
SPACING
CYLINDER
DIAMETER
3.5
6.0
2 IN
6.0
2 IN
NOTE (2)
6.0
3 IN
7.0
6.5
2 IN
6.5
2 IN
NOTE (2)
6.5
3 IN
14.0
10.0
3 IN
10.0
3 IN
10.0
3 IN
3.5
4.0
2 IN
4.0
2 IN
NOTE (2)
4.0
3 IN
7.0
5.5
3 IN
5.5
3 IN
5.5
3 IN
14.0
8.0
3 IN
8.0
3 IN
8.0
3 IN
3.5
3.5
2 IN
3.5
2 IN
NOTE (2)
3.5
3 IN
7.0
5.0
3 IN
5.0
3 IN
5.0
3 IN
14.0
6.0
3 IN
6.0
3 IN
6.0
3 IN
NOTE (1)
Footnotes to tables, and general notes on hydraulic shoring, are found in appendix D, Item (g)
Notes: (1): See Appendix D. item (g) (1).
Notes: (2): See Appendix D. item (g) (2). *Consult manufacturer/Qualified engineer for Section M odulus of wales.
488
SOLID
SHEET
2 FT
3 FT
3X12
---
---
3X12
---
---
3X12
---
---

CONSTRUCTION SURVEYING AND PROJECT LAYOUT
Trigonometry Functions
This section is concerned with the ability to establish distances and elevations from established
points, setup an instrument, layout the project, and interpret site information. Jack Roberts
surveying book (1995) provides numerous examples on project layout, math and trigonometry.
The three basic relationships in trigonometry, the sine, cosine, and tangent arise from the right
triangle. The angles of the right triangle are related by trigonometry, and the sides of the right
triangle are related by the Pythagorean theorem. For a right triangle the sides are related by:
a2+ b2 = c2
Also, a right triangle has a standard relationship of 3 (a): 4 (b) : 5 (c). This allows you to
determine the length of the third of a right triangle if you are given two side lengths. The
trigonometry relationships are given by:
SIN angle A = opposite side = a
hypotenuse
c
COS angle A= adjacent side = b
hypotenuse
c
TAN angle A = opposite side = a
adjacent side
b
How to Find the Length of One Side of a Right Triangle Given Other Side & One Angle
A side walk 4 feet wide and 58 feet long must be laid out. The 58 foot long side (hypotenuse c)
of the sidewalk intersects a street at an angle of 26 degrees (A). Find the length of side (b) street.
Select the formula which will give the length of side b, given the angle A and the length of the
hypotenuse. The formula is c COS A will work. This means that you should multiple the length
of c (58 feet) by the cosine COS (26 degrees) of angle A. The value for the COS 26 degrees from
a Trigonometric Function Table is .89879. Now multiply 58 feet by .89879 which results in the
length of side b of the right triangle being 52.13 feet.
Using the information for the sidewalk given above. You want to calculate the length of side a
which is perpendicular to the street. The formula is c SIN A. This means that you should multiple
the length of c (58 feet) by the sine SIN (26 degrees) of angle A. The value for the SIN 26
degrees from a Trigonometric Function Table is .43837. Now Multiply 58 feet by .43837 which
results in the length of side a of the right triangle being 25.43 feet.
489

Elevations and Surveying Calculations
Surveys are usually done in the horizontal plane and they are keyed to a reference elevation. This
reference elevation is referred to as the datum elevation. These points on the survey are noted as
being either at or a certain distance above or below the datum plane. The most common datum
plane used is mean sea level or MSL. The mean is given the elevation of 0'- 0". The federal
and state government have determined the elevations of various inland points throughout the
country in relationship to the elevation of 0'- 0". These points are called Benchmarks.
Job Benchmark Elevation = 100.00 feet.
Top of Footing (TOF) = 98.0 feet
BM
Benchmark.
HI
Height of the Instrument.
IP
Intermediate Point.
TP
Turning Point.
BS
Back sight.
FS
Foresight.
BOF
Bottom of Footing.
FF
Finish Floor.
Below are the Field Notes from a leveling operation.

IP
BM El.
BS Rod
Reading
HI
FS Rod
Reading
TP EL
#1
843.29'
4.68'
847.97'
5.91'
842.06
#2
842.06'
3.17'
845.23
3.94'
841.29
#3
841,29'
5.05'
846.34
4.72'
841.62
12.90'
minus
14.57'
Math Check = - 1.67'
TP El. =
841.62
BM El =
843.29'
-1.67'
Jack Roberts (1995) states that the primary principle to remember is to add the back sight and
subtract the foresight(p 85). This is expressed as
benchmark elevation + back sight - foresight = TP elevation
and also as benchmark + back sight = HI elevation.
490

Surveying and Layout Exercise
1.
You are required to establish grade to the bottom of a footing (BOF) that is 1 foot thick.
The elevation at the top of the footing(TOF) is 102.33'. The elevation of the existing
grade 106.14'. The backsight (BS) of the instrument on the benchmark (BM) of 100.00' is
6.78'. What is the correct reading of the rod at the bottom of the footing?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
Given a rectangular structure that is 60' - 9" long by 42' - 6" wide. What is the diagonal
measurement in feet and inches for squaring up the structure during layout?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
51' - 71/2"
74' - 13/4"
74' - 37/8"
103' - 3"
Using a right triangle, at the intersection point the slope distance or the hypotenuse is 310
feet long at a slope angle of 20 degrees 00' 00". What is the actual horizontal distance in
feet?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
0.64
3.81
4.45
5.45
106.02
112.84
291.09
851.73
What is the percentage grade for a slope ratio of 1:13 (rise:run)?

A.
B.
C.
D.
0.077
1.000
7.690
13.000
491

5.
A rod reading of 4.72' is taken on a BM whose elevation is 813.30. The finish floor (FF)
is 809.00. The top of the batter board is set one foot above the Finish Floor. What rod
reading is required to set the line for the top of the batter board?
A.
B.
C.
D.
6.
We want to mark the grade points at elevation 668.00 for a ceiling grid systems using a
rotating Lazer. When the inverted rod reading is placed on a BM with an elevation of
655.50 the receiver indicates a reading of 5.05 feet. At what reading on the inverted rod
will the receiver be placed so that the ceiling grid will be at the correct elevation?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
5.50
7.45
12.50
17.55
Using a right triangle, at the intersection point the slope distance or the hypotenuse is 240
feet long at a slope angle of 33 degrees 00' 00". What is the actual height distance?
A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
4.30
5.30
8.02
9.02
130.70'
155.81'
201.29'
369.58'
What are the length ratios for a right triangle?

A.
B.
C.
D.
3:3:3
3:3:5
3:4:5
3:6:9
492

9.
Assume you have a right triangle which is 36 feet high and perpendicular from the
baseline. What are the baseline distance and the diagonal distance?
A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
The jobsite has a primary vertical control point with a reference (BM) of 100 feet. An
instrument is set up with an HI of 5.42 above the BM. A grade stake is set at an elevation
of 96.00'. What is the height reading on the rod for setting the receiver at?
A.
B.
C.
D.
11.
1.42'
4.00'
5.42'
9.42'
Assume that you are looking at the cross section of a concrete lined dike which is 20 feet
wide at the bottom and the sides are set at a 70 degree angle from the bottom (horizontal)
of the dike, the depth of the water flow is 12 feet and the length of the dike is 166 feet.
Using the cross sectional view, how many lineal feet of wetted cross section is there?
A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
The baseline is 24 feet, the diagonal is 48 feet.

32.97
45.54
85.94
104.64
Assume that you have a concrete lined dike which is 20 feet wide at the bottom and the
sides are sloped at a 70 degree angle from the bottom (horizontal) of the dike. Also, the
depth of the water flow is 12 feet. Using the cross sectional view, how many square feet
are in the wetted cross-sectional flow?
A.
B.
C.
D.
52.32
104.64
292.32
344.64
493

13.
What does the surveying abbreviation of TP mean?

A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
Which of the following situations would be most advantageous for using an inverted rod?
A.
B.
C.
D.
15.
Tangent Point.
Turning Point.
Traverse Point.
Terminal Point.
Verifying a highway grid layout.

Verifying a building footing layout.
Verifying the elevation of a piece of equipment.
Verifying the elevation of ceiling mounted duct work.
The federal and state governments have established elevations of various inland points
throughout the country. What elevation are these points in relationship to?
A.
B.
C.
D.
0' - 0"
10' - 0"
100' - 0"
200' - 0"
Given the Back Sight and Fore Sight readings as follows.
16.
IP
BM El.
BS Rod
Reading
HI
#1
877.26
7.45
3.10
#2
7.12
1.10
#3
4.44
2.17
What is the Benchmark elevation at IP #4?

A.
B.
C.
D.
864.62
889.90
896.27
902.64
Check Answers
494
FS Rod
Reading
TP EL

PROJECT ADMINISTRATION
Vendors and Suppliers and The Uniform Commercial Code
The terms and conditions for Vendor or Supplier Agreements with contractors fall under the
Uniform Commercial Conditions. According to numerous feature articles in Construction Claims
Monthly (CCM, June 2000, May 1994, August 1987, & August 1984), edited by Bruce Jervis,
Esq., the book by Bruce Jervis and Paul Levin (1987) titled Construction Law Principles and
Practices, and an article by Kristin McLaughlin and Donald A. Jensen, Jr. (December 1997)
titled: The UCC: It Effects Construction Contracts published in the American Professional
Constructor state that different laws govern the sale of good. Also, Jervis in CCM (August 1987)
says that the Contractor - Supplier (Vendor) relationship creates legal issues unique within the
construction process (p 1). McLaughlin and Jensen (1997) state that there are two types of
contracts and a different set of laws apply to each (p 12).
The Sale of Goods and the Purchaser of Those Goods are governed by the Uniform Commercial
Code (UCC). Under UCC rules, the only thing agreed upon being the prices and the merchant
warranty provided. Therefore, a purchase order should be utilized for materials only. According
to Construction Claims Monthly (June 2000, August 1987) their article states that a purchase
order form should never be used for the procurement of construction services (p 1). A purchase
order does not meet the first element of a contract which is a meeting of the minds. The Uniform
Commercial Code applies to the sale of goods and in the CCC (June 2000) the Editor, Jervis
states that there are several legal complications in this process, however. Which party submitted
the offer? and which party submitted the acceptance? At what point, if ever, was an
agreement reached? And if the various documents contain additional or conflicting terms, which
provisions govern? He goes on to state that Conflicting terms and conditions are the most
difficult ramifications of this battle of the forms. Each party insists that its own preprinted
standard conditions govern the transaction (p 1). According to McLaughlin and Jensen
(December 1977) they insist that a Purchase Order under UCC Article 2-204(3) (1977) states
that a contract will not fail due to lack of definite terms (p 12). The feature article in CCM
(June 200) titled Supplier Relations: Which Terms Govern? He states that Section 2-207 of the
UCC provides that acceptance of an offer can be binding even though the acceptance contains
additional or different terms. The additional or deviating terms become part of the agreement
unless: (1) the offer expressly required acceptance in accordance with the terms of the offer; (2)
the additional terms materially alter the offer; or (3) the offeror gives a prompt objection to the
additional terms (p 1). The offering party accepts the differing terms unless they give 10 days
notice of an objection. In conclusion, the only things agreed upon under UCC rules are (1) the
prices and (2) the merchant warranty.
Jervis and Levin (1987) imply that under the UCC rules no meeting of the minds is necessary. In
other words, never put labor on any form titled Purchase Order because the meeting of the
minds element of a contract is difficult to establish and a different set of laws applies. This
495

becomes more apparent when the hybrid contract calls for the contracting party to provide a mix
of goods and services under the Uniform Commercial Code (UCC). The courts will apply
numerous tests if a hybrid contract is involved as discussed below.
McLaughlin and Jensen (December 1994) insist that many construction contracts are actually
Hybrid Contracts - a mix of goods and services and recognizing that an agreement is a hybrid is
important because the resolution of a dispute over a contract will differ depending on the nature
of the agreement (p 12). They also state that how a court interprets a hybrid contract as either for
labor services or one for goods will alter the outcome in court. They insist that the appellate
system applies various tests to determine if a contract is predominantly for services or for the sale
of goods. The most commonly used is the predominate thrust test. They refer to the Bonebrake v.
Cox (1974) which outlined the theory of the mixed contract test as follows.
. . . whether their predominate factor, their thrust, their purpose, reasonably stated, is the
rendition of service, with goods incidentally involved . . .or is a transaction of sales with labor
incidentally involved . . . (p 13).
The second test, predominate service, reviews the evidence regarding the intent of the parties to
the contract, the purpose for creation of the contract by the parties and which of the hybrid
transaction aspects, the services or goods, forms the basis of the bargain between the parties (p
14). The third test is the goods supplied test. This test focuses on the definition of goods as it
applies to the UCC. The fourth test is the policy test. This test the courts apply by considering
the circumstances surrounding the making of the transaction as more important than the goods or
services mix. The fifth test is the divisibility test is where the UCC code applies to only that part
of the contract that focuses on goods and general contract law applies to the services portion of
the transaction. The divisibility test is used infrequently. The sixth test is the contract language
test. This test relies upon the verbiage in the contract such as utilizing the words buyer and seller
indicate a contract for the sale of goods, whereas, the words Owner or Contractor and
Subcontractor indicate a contract for services. Finally, McLaughlin and Jensen (December
(1997) states that the gravamen test focuses on the action at the center of the case. If the case is
because of a mechanical failure then it is a goods contract. If it is because of a failure of
workmanship, then it is a service contract (p 14).
McLaughlin and Jensen (December 1997) conclude that the contractor must determine the
direction of the agreement then the character of the agreement itself must provide much of the
defense as to the contract being primarily a services contract or a sale of goods contract. They
also state that the court system most often uses the predominate thrust test, although it is
subjective. Therefore, contractors should use additional tests to advance their argument; such as
the language test and the divisibility test (p 15).
496

The Procurement Process
This process begins with preparing a list of materials required for the project by reading the
blueprints and specifications. This list of materials is sometimes called a want list. After the list
of materials, showing quantities required and complete item descriptions, is prepared, it is used
to request price quotations from the supplier (vendors) or the list is sometimes sent to the
purchasing department requesting them to obtain price quotations. The form sent to purchasing
department requesting price quotations is called a Purchase Requisition.
After requesting price quotations and detailed terms and conditions from the vendors (suppliers),
either by telephone or in writing, a vendor is selected and a formal purchase order is prepared.
The buyer (contractor) prepares the formal purchase order, sends the original to the vendor, and
distributes copies to keep all parties well informed.
The next step in the procurement process is to ensure that the required submittals and materials
arrive on the project at the exact time they are needed. This step requires someone from the
contractor's firm to follow up the orders arranged by delivery date by calling and visiting the
vendors' offices to verify that submittals of shop drawings, product data and fabrication
schedules are on schedule and they meet the specification requirements. The process of
following up orders to ensure compliance with the specifications and schedules is called
Expediting and the person who performs these duties is sometimes called an expediter.
The next step requires the vendor to prepare a packing list of the quantity and description of the
items being shipped and arranging for transportation, either by using their own trucks or by
contracting with a freight company. The form used to contract with a freight company, common
known as a Common Carrier for transportation of the items is called a Bill of Lading.
The final step in the procurement process is for the job site personnel to ensure that the proper
quantity and materials have been received by counting the items, inspecting them for damage and
comparing the packing list to the purchase order. The Purchase Order is under the Uniform
Commercial Code (UCC) rules and the only thing agreed upon being the prices and a
merchantability warranty. Therefore, a purchase order should be utilized for Materials only.
When requesting quotations for a purchase order, the buyer must know the quantity required,
item description, the name of the project, location of the project, project number, purchase order
number, warranties required, delivery date, where the bill should be sent for payment, and the
number of copies required. The buyer requests from the supplier unit prices, length of time the
unit prices are good for, taxes, shipping terms, freight and insurance costs, and the accounting
terms of the order.
497

Supplier Payment Request Form
An Invoice is a billing document from the supplier requesting payment for materials. The invoice
will state the quantities, items and unit prices billed. It is the responsibility of the accounting
department to verify the quantities with the receiving report and the unit prices with the purchase
order.
Shipping Terms on the Purchase Order
The Shipping Terms are normally arranged by the vendor for the shipment of materials to the job
site, but the buyer must thoroughly understand whether the price quotation includes the cost of
insurance and freight, the form of transportation, the point at which ownership changes hands,
and the party paying the shipping charges. The FOB terms indicate the point at which ownership
transfers from the supplier to the buyer. FOB means Freight on Board. There are several FOB
terms generally used. First, is the FOB Factory which means the vendor is only responsible for
loading the order on the shippers vehicle (a common carrier) at the factory and ownership
transfers from the supplier to the buyer at the factory. Another term is Fob Supplier's Sales
Location which means the vendor is responsible for loading your order on the shipper's vehicle at
the sales location and ownership transfers from the supplier to the buy at the sales location.
Finally, the Fob Job Site which means the vendor is responsible for shipment of the order and
ownership transfers from the supplier to the buyer at the job site.
The FOB location becomes a very important factor in the shipment of materials because it
establishes the point at which ownership transfers from the supplier to the buyer. This ownership
transfer determines the contractual parties on the shipping document. The shipping document is
known as a Bill of Lading. The Bill of Lading is a contractual agreement between a shipper and a
common carrier to move the material from location A to location B for specified price. If the
shipping terms are FOB Factory, the bill of lading is between the buyer and the common carrier.
If damage occurs during shipment of the materials, the buyer must seek damages from the
common carrier. If the shipping terms are FOB Job Site, the bill of lading is between the supplier
and the common carrier. If damage occurs during shipment, the supplier must replace the
damaged goods and seek damages from the common carrier.
When requesting a shipping quotation and the vendor quotes you the abbreviation CIF, they are
indicating to the buyer that the supplier will act as an agent for the buyer in arranging for
shipment and they will add to the cost of the items the additional costs for the Insurance and the
Freight. If the supplier quotes the buyer shipping terms of collect on delivery (COD), they are
indicating that the shipment costs will be paid by the buyer at the time of delivery.
498

The Accounting Terms on the Purchase Order
Accounting Terms are sometimes offered to the buyer from the vendor as a payment incentive
called material discounts. These material discounts are offered to the buyer as an incentive that
the buyer is able to reduce their payment to the vendor if the pay within a specified amount of
time after either the invoice date or the receipt of goods (ROG) date. The following material
discount terminology is commonly seen on purchase orders. First, there is the term shown as 1/10
NET 30. This means a 1% discount can be deducted from the purchase order amount if the
contractor pays within 10 days of the invoice date. The full payment is due in 30 days.
Expediting Materials and Leadtime
The Expediting of Materials is defined as the process of following up on materials and vendor
submittals to ensure that the proper materials and quantities are in compliance with the
specifications and they arrive as scheduled. The person performing this function is sometimes
called an expediter. To perform this function effectively, the expediter must be able to read and
review all specifications and contract documents to ensure the vendor is in compliance. They
must be able to compile a "material list" from the drawings and they must be able to follow up on
shop drawings and product data submittals. Other responsibilities of the expediter are for them to
review production schedules and delivery dates, maintain files by delivery dates, inform
construction personnel on material status, follow up on purchase orders by calling and visiting
vendors to verify work in progress to ensure deliveries arrive on time, communicate effectively to
maintain good vendor relations, troubleshoot delivery problems and determine the amount of
time, normally referred to as Leadtime, required to deliver the materials on time
Leadtime refers to the amount of time required by vendors to deliver materials to the job site.
When determining the amount of time required to deliver materials, the following steps must be
reviewed to determine the amount of Leadtime required for an item. The Leadtime process
requires the Contractor to consult the contract documents and prepare a material bid package to
request quotations from the vendors. Also, Leadtime requires the Contractor to mail the bid
package to vendors requesting price quotations and delivery dates. It also contains time for the
vendors to submit a price quotation (bids). After the vendors proposals are submitted to the
Contractor, they review the bids and they select a vendor. Then the Contractor issues a purchase
order and mails it to the vendor. Leadtime also includes the time it takes for the Vendor to submit
shop drawings and product data to the Contractor. When the shop drawing or product data sheets
are received, it is the Contractors responsibility to review and approve shop drawings for field
methods and means. After the Contractors approval they stamp each shop drawing or product
data sheet and forward them onto the Architect/engineer for approved. After the A/E reviews the
shop drawings or make changes as noted, then the Contractor mails the approved drawings back
to the vendor and request changes as noted. After all changes are made, the Vendor schedules the
order into their fabrication schedule and the Vendor arranges a shipment of the materials to the
job site.
499

Material Receiving Procedures
Material Receiving is the process of examining and verifying material deliveries at the job site
prior to or during the unloading of the materials. It is generally seen as unimportant and often the
deliveries are signed for before unloading. This type of procedure gives the suppliers an
invitation to short delivery items and substitute unsatisfactory materials. To avoid this problem,
a specific individual on each job site should be assigned the duties of examining and verifying all
material orders and receiving procedures should be established. The following steps outline a
good receiving procedure that all job sites should follow:
1.
Count the quantities received and compare with the packing list or Bill of Lading for
shortages or incorrect materials
2.
Inspect all deliveries for damages. If visual damage occurs, have the driver sign for
damaged cartons on the delivery receipt, contact the common carrier, request inspection
before unpacking and file a claim immediately. If the damages are concealed, save the
cartons and all packing material and contact the common carrier immediately.
3.
Compare the packing list with the purchase order, noting the amount ordered versus the
amount shipped.
4.
Verify the items shipped meet the requirements outlined on the purchase order
5.
Designate the lay down area where the materials are being stored
6.
Prepare a receiving report indicating the condition of material, amount ordered and
amount received and send copies to contractors purchasing department. You should also
notify them of any material shortages. Another copy should be sent to the contractors
accounting department for comparing the invoiced items to the items received. A third
copy should be sent to the expediters, informing them that the order has been received.
Finally, a copy should be sent to the field construction personnel, informing them where
the order is
located.
Stock Bins are utilized on large projects because certain materials are purchased in "bulk"
quantities for use throughout the project or projects. To control the use of materials, a stock
requisition is filled out by the person requesting the materials. This stock requisition identifies
the quantities requested, item description, the name of the project and project number and the
intended use. This document is then sent to the accounting department where a record of the
costs charged to a specific work item are kept. This record becomes a part of the cost control
system.
500

The Subcontract Agreement
There are a number of contract law principles that govern Subcontractors which are unique to the
construction industry. For instance, it should be understood that the subcontractor is a separate
legal entity which does not form a contract with the Owner of the project, but instead they submit
a subcontract proposal to the Contractor for performing construction services which is utilize by
the Contractor. Hence, the issues arising out of the relationship between the contractor and
subcontractor and the formation of a subcontract is extremely different from the formation of the
Owner - Contractor contracts. First, at the bidding phase of a prime contract, the subcontractor
submits a subcontractor proposal to the Contractor which is considered an offer or promise. This
promise to the Contractor is based upon the contractor utilizing the subcontractors bid and
submitting its bid to the Owner. Also, it is understood that the Contractor cannot request
additional money from the Owner if the subcontractor claims that a mistake has been made in
their bid proposal. This rule or doctrine is called Promissory Estoppel.
Therefore, if a subcontractor claims a mistake in its proposal, the law will rely on the principle of
promissory estoppel. It is defined as a promise which the promisor (subcontractor) provides to
the contractor and it induces the promisee (Contractor) to rely on that promise (Subs Bid
Proposal) in the Contractors bid to the Owner. This doctrine holds that if the prime contractor
reasonably relies on the promise or price of the subcontractor to its detriment, then the
subcontractor must be held to its promise in order to avoid harm to the prime contractor. This
promise is binding if the Contractor can prove that they relied on the offer and it caused harm to
the Contractor. The drawback of this legal principle is that the subcontractor is obligated to the
prime contractor, but the prime contractor is not obligated to the subcontractor. Therefore, once
the prime contractor executes the prime contract, the contractor is not obligated to the
subcontractor to sign a subcontract agreement. This practice of finding another subcontractor at a
lower price is called bid shopping. The American Society of Professional Estimators (ASPE)
brochure (2003) defines bid shopping as when, after the award of the contract, a contractor
contacts several subcontractors of the same discipline in an effort to reduce the previously quoted
price (p 1). Bid shopping is considered unethical.
ASPE also states that Bid peddling, . . . occurs when a sub-bidder approach a general who has
been awarded a project with the intent of voluntarily lowering the original price below the price
level established on bid day. This action implies that the subcontractors original was either
padded or incorrect (p 2). Bid peddling is also considered unethical under the American Society
of Professional Estimators Code of Ethics.
A subcontract agreement is governed by the common law of contracts for labor services.
Therefore, when contracting for labor services and to protect your rights under the common law
contract formation principles, it is essential that you utilize a form of agreement that is titled
Subcontract Agreement for all labor services. Under the contract formation principles in
construction, the Subcontract Agreements are written and signed by both parties after the signing
501

of the Owner - Contractor Agreement. The Subcontract Agreement must be provided to each
prospective bidder during the bidding phase of the project. This allows the prospective bidders
time to review the terms and conditions and determine any unusual risk involved before the
Agreement is signed. This process of providing the subcontract agreement during the bidding
phase of the project can reduce the risk of the subcontractor not understanding the terms and
conditions and trying to withdraw before the execution of the subcontract.. The major elements
needed to form a valid contract are:
1.
2.
Meeting of the Minds. This is the signed Subcontract Agreement between the parties. The
Subcontract Agreements are written and signed by both parties after the signing of the
Owner - Contractor Agreement.
A.
An offer is made. Normally the Contractor is required to submit a bid proposal on

the forms provided by the A/E firm. It is also a good practice to standardize the
Subcontractor Bid Proposal form which includes a Bid Breakdown Section.
B.
Acceptance of the Offer. The subcontractor receives a letter from the contractor
indicating that they have been awarded the contract and they will be executing the
subcontract agreement.
Consideration is received. Consideration under the General-Subcontractor contract

formation process must rely on the equitable doctrine of promissory estoppel. To
ensure that this promise isnt indefinite or unreasonable, the subcontractor provides a
time limit for acceptance of their bid.
A Subcontract agreement may contain numerous clauses which the subcontract and the
contractor must understand throughly. These are sometimes called killer clauses. First, is the
flown down clause. A flow down clause is a contract clause in the prime contract causing certain
duties between the owner and the contractor to be explicitly stated that they will flow down to the
subcontractor or the supplier/vendor. The typical flow down clause says:
The Subcontractor agrees to be bound to the Contractor by the terms of the contract
documents and assume toward the Contractor all of the obligations and responsibilities
that the Contractor by aforesaid documents assumes toward the Owner.
Another killer clause is the Pay when paid clause. It states that the subcontractor will not be paid
until the owner pays the contractor. The preceding clause makes payment by the owner a
condition precedent to the contractors obligation to pay the subcontractor. Some courts require
the words condition precedent in the clause before it is enforceable. Finally, many contracts
require the owner and the contractor to submit claims to binding arbitration. The arbitration
clause can flow down to the subcontractors.
502
1.
Vendor and Subcontractor Agreement Exercise

What is the primary difference in contract formation between a Subcontract Agreement
and a Purchase Order?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
Which law establishes basic rules governing the sale of goods used to establish a
Purchase Order?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
5.
Davis Bacon Act

Uniform Commercial Code
National Labor Relations Act
Uniform Transportation Code
Which of the following items must never be agreed upon utilizing a form titled Purchase
Order?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Meeting of the minds exists in a Subcontract but not in a Purchase Order.

Consideration exists in a Subcontract but not in a Purchase Order.
Legal purpose exists in a Subcontract but not in a Purchase Order.
There are not any contract differences between a Subcontract & a Purchase Order.
Labor.
Materials.
Overhead.
Rental Equipment.
Which test is most commonly used to determine if a contract is predominantly for

services or for the sale of goods?
A.
B.
C.
Policy Test.
Goods Supplied Test
Predominate Thrust Test
D.
Predominate Service Test.
Which test focuses primarily on that part of the contract that UCC applies to goods and
general contract law applies to the services portion of the transaction?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Gravamen Test
Divisibility Test.
Predominate Thrust Test
Contract Language Test.
503

6.
Assume that you are utilizing the verbiage Purchaser and Supplier in the terms and
conditions of the contract. How will the courts interpret this type of contract?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
Other than the most commonly utilized test, what other tests are suggested by
McLaughlin and Jensen to prove your arguments for a specific type of contract?
A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
Predominate Thrust Test and the Predominate Service Test.
Passes at the invoice date

Passes at the payment due date
Passes at time of pickup by carrier
Passes at time of receipt at the jobsite
If the Shipping terms are FOB JOBSITE, which parties is the Bill of Lading between?
A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
Language Test and the Divisibility Test.

Policy Test and the Goods Supplied Test.
Gravamen Test and the Predominate Service Test.
The terms on the purchase order indicate F.O.B. Factory, at which point does the
responsibility for the goods change?
A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
Services contract.
Agency Fee contract.
Sale of Goods contract.
Guaranteed Maximum Price contract.
Vendor and the contractor.

Common carrier and the vendor.
Common carrier and the architect.
Common carrier and the contractor.
If Damages should occur during shipment of construction materials and the terms on the
Bill of Lading are FOB Factory, who would be required to recover the loss from the
common carrier?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Vendor
Owner
Architect
Purchaser
504

11.
Which of the following terms is used to refer to the process of following up on materials
to ensure that the proper quantity and quality of materials arrive at the jobsite according
to schedule?
A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
Which of the following terms is used to refer to the complete process of obtaining
materials?
A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
Invoice
Bill of lading
Purchase order
Stock requisition
Which of the following documents is a contractual agreement used to move (ship) the
goods from the vendor to the jobsite?
A.
B.
C.
D.
15.
Leadtime
Expediting
Purchasing
Procurement
Which document is used to request payment for materials?

A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
Leadtime
Expediting
Purchasing
Procurement
Invoice
Bill of lading
Packaging list
Purchase order.
Which of the following documents is used to request materials from the contractors
storage bins?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Purchase order
Receiving report
Stock requisition
Purchase requisition.
505

16.
The Vendor has quoted you a price of $9,270 CIF for an item. Which of the following is
this price quote telling you?
A.
B.
C.
D.
17.
Which of the following descriptions defines the term 2/10 Net 30?
A.
B.
C.
D.
18.
2% Discount can be deducted if paid within 10 days of the arrival of goods.

Full payment Due in thirty days.
2% discount can be deducted if paid within 10 days of the invoice date.
Full payment due in thirty days.
2% discount is available for thirty days.
2% discount is available through the tenth of the month following the receipt of
goods. Full payment due in thirty days.
Which of the following documents is used internally to request the contractors

purchasing department to obtain the prices for the materials needed for a project?
A.
B.
C.
D.
19.
The $9,270 is the total to be paid and it includes freight and insurance.
The $9,270 is the total item cost plus the freight and insurance will be added.
The $9,270 will be collected on delivery and it includes freight and insurance .
The $9,270 will be collected on delivery in cash or certified check.
Invoice.
Purchase order.
Stock Requisition.
Purchase Requisition.
Which of the following are the best steps of a good material receiving procedure?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Inspect delivery, note damages, count items and compare to the bill of lading.
Inspect delivery, note damages, count items and compare to the accounting terms.
Review specifications, follow up on materials orders and call for delivery date.
Award contract, vendor prepare shop drawings, reviews, fabricate and deliver.
506

20.
A clause in the Subcontract Agreement reads that a Subcontractor binds themselves to

the Contractor for the performance of the Subcontractors Work in the Same manner as
the Contractor is bound to the Owner for such performance under Contractors contract
with the Owner. What is the name of this clause?
A.
B.
C.
D.
21.
For labor services to be considered under the formation principles, which form shall they
be placed on?
A.
B.
C.
D.
22.
Purchase Order.
Vendor Agreement.
Subcontract Agreement.
Owner-Contractor Agreement.
Which of the clauses below is considered a Condition Precedent?

A.
B.
C.
D.
23.
Flow down.
Arbitration.
Pay when paid.
Condition Precedent.
Submit a claim within the time frame stated.

The Sub will be paid when the Contractor is paid.
Install street one-block at a time and only close the block.
The Soil Report states For Informational Purposes Only.
What is the term called when a sub-bidder approaches a general who has been awarded a
project with the intent of voluntarily lowering the original price below the price level
established on bid day.
A.
B.
C.
D.
Bid Peddling.
Bid Shopping.
507

24.
What is the name of the law principle that allows the Contractor to receive an oral or a
printed quotation and then incorporate this price quotation into their bid proposal to the
Owner and if awarded the prime contract they can hold the subcontractor to their
quotation?
A.
B.
C.
D.
25.
During what phase of a project must the Contractor provide the Subcontractor Agreement
to the Subcontractor to avoid the subcontractor from refusing to sign an agreement that
they have not seen?
A.
B.
C.
D.
26.
At the bid opening.

During the bidding phase of the project.
After the Owner-Contractor Agreement is signed.
At the signing of the Contractor-Subcontractor Agreement.
A clause in the specifications states under 15333 1.3 A. Design and installation of an
engineered fire detection and INERGEN total flooding, gaseous agent, fire suppression
system shall be solely responsible for the performance of the fire suppression systems as
specified and shall modify, add to, or alter the equipment as necessary, without any
additional cost to Owner to provide satisfactory performance. Which party has the
responsibility for the design of this system?
A.
B.
C.
D.
27.
Flow Down.
Owner.
Contractor.
Subcontractor.
Architect/Engineer.
What are the agreed upon terms and conditions on a purchase order?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Freight and Insurance costs.

Delivery date of the materials.
Material prices and merchant warranty.
Subcontracted labor and material prices.
Check Answers
508

Organization and Job Descriptions
An Organizational Chart is a pictorial form showing all positions and lines of communication.
The horizontal Lines or positions indicate that these positions communicate with each other and
the Vertical Lines or positions indicate that the lower position reports to the upper positions.
The Duties are the specifically assigned tasks and the Job Description is a complete list of
specifically assigned duties for each position on the organizational chart. Many times the
descriptions imply a certain amount of decision making. For example, a person may have a level
of authority. Authority gives the person the ability to implement their decisions without the
approval of superiors. Other times, a person may have a level of responsibility. Responsibility
indicates that the person is burdened with the duties specified in the job description and they
must answer for all causes and effects.
The Organizational Plan is a formalized analysis of the necessary tasks, how they relate to the
company and it creates a clear understanding of the who, what, when and how. An organizational
plan is intended to remove confusion, indecision, duplication of efforts and neglected duties.
An effective organizational plan should:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Be put in writing in the form of a procedure manual.

List all duties for each individual.
Include an organizational chart for the company and each project
establishing the lines of communication.
Be discussed with everyone concerned.
The establishment of an effective operating organization requires the company to focus five (5)
management functions. The following two management functions that Establish the Team
through the process of Organizing which is the process of 1) determining what positions must be
created 2) defining the responsibilities of each position and write job descriptions. 3) establishing
the relationship between positions and draw an Organizational Chart.. Staffing is the process of
selecting the right person for each position created.
The following three management functions that Manage the Project through Planning which is
the process of determining what and how things will be done, and draw a construction logic
network showing the interrelationship of the design, procurement and construction activities.
Directing is the process of providing clear instructions and solving problems. Controlling is the
process of monitoring the project through cost control and scheduling which compares the actual
cost and schedule to the planned cost and schedule.
509

Project Management Team
The typical duties and responsibilities for specific construction positions are outlined below. The
Project Manager has the authority and responsibility for the successful completion of the
project(s) within the contract time and costs considerations. The project Manager devotes their
energy and expertise to the overall management of the project. The essential skills of a Project
Manager are:
1.
Writes the subcontract agreements.
2.
Write the purchase orders.
3.
Develop the overall project plan and schedule including design, procurement,
subcontracted and construction activities.
4.
Develops the Schedule of Values for the project.
5.
Produce the Progress Payment submittals.
6.
Approve payments to suppliers and subcontractors.
7.
Develops Contract Change Order Proposals.
8.
Prepares and negotiates claims.
9.
Manages safety.
10.
Arranges for permits.
11.
Travels between the home office and the job site.
510

The Superintendent supervises and coordinates the daily activities of foremen. They plan and
schedule the work force, the materials and equipment and they coordinate the subcontracts to
promote an efficient construction of the structure at a profit. The essential skills of a
Superintendent are:
1.
Plans the sequence of daily construction operations.
2.
Schedules daily labor, materials, equipment and tools required.
3.
Interpret the plans and specifications.
4.
Coordinates the subcontractors;
5.
Maintains the Daily Job Diary and the Construction Reports.
6.
Identifies and coordinates field changes.
7.
Conducts safety inspections.
8.
Conducts planning meetings on construction problems and solutions.
The Crew Leaders or Supervisors instructs the crew of skilled craftsmen and apprentices in the
actual erection or fabrication of a structure. The Essential skills of a Crew Leader are:
1.
Provides instructions to the crew about equipment and material needed.
2.
Prepares the daily time cards.
3.
Trains new personnel in proper safety and methods.
The Field Engineer or the Project Engineer assists the superintendent in solving engineeringrelated problems. The essential skills of a Project Engineer are:
1.
Reviews and approves shop drawings from the subcontractors and vendors.
2.
Performs surveying and dimensional layouts for the structure.
3.
Performs design calculations for vertical and horizontal formwork, and slip forms.
4.
Performs design calculations for temporary structures such as cofferdams and scaffolds.
511

The Planning and Scheduling Engineer collects the field material delivery information and they
develop the look ahead schedule for design, procurement and construction activities on large
complex construction projects. They verify that the materials have been received and coordinate
the efforts for obtaining the materials. The essential skills of a Planning/Scheduling Engineer are:
1.
Develops the project logic network.
2.
Determines sequences for design, procurement & construction.
3.
Develops project activity list for design, procurement and construction.
4.
Calculates activity durations for design, procurement and construction activities.
The Cost Engineer collects field data and compares, analyzes and forecasts the final costs at
completion. The essential skills of a Cost Engineer are:
1.
Develops and analyzes the weekly cost and productivity reports.
2.
Forecasts the productivity and costs at completion.
3.
Produces the variance analysis report.
4.
Maintains in-place quantity records.
The Estimator prices the contractors portion of the estimate and develops the contractors
overhead costs and reviews and selects the subcontractor proposal bids to be incorporated into
the Contractors proposal. The essential skills of an Estimator are:
1.
Develops labor, material & equipment unit costs.
2.
Analyzes the costs forecast data and predicts the future costs of the project.
3.
Utilizes cost adjustment factors to determining costs.
4.
Develops the overhead costs.
5.
Interprets the construction documents and sometimes performs quantity takeoffs.
6.
Gathers, reviews and selects the subcontract bids.
512

Construction Crafts
The Acoustical Tile Setter performs the layout and assembles the acoustical tile suspension
system and mounts the tile on the wall and ceilings to reduce the reflection of sound.
The Insulators, sometimes still referred to as the Asbestos Workers, pastes, staples, wires, tapes
or sprays insulation to pipes, walls, ceilings and boilers.
The Bricklayers place brick, block and structural tile in walls, floors, partitions, fireplaces. They
also install fire brick linings in industrial furnaces sometimes called boilers.
The Stonemasons cut and build stone walls using field stone, natural cut stone such as marble,
granite and limestone or artificial stone.
The Boilermakers fabricates and assembles structural steel for boilers, tanks, vats and pressure
vessels. In addition, they connect piping, valves, pumps, tubes and equipment inside the boiler.
The Carpenters layout, cut and erect concrete formwork for bridges, piers, tunnels, cofferdams
and wood framework. They also install manufactured windows, doors and finish materials.
The Cement Masons or Finishers will screed and trowel exposed concrete surfaces for floors,
highways, bridge decks and concrete sidewalks.
The Communications Electrician assembles, installs, connects and tests electronic
communication equipment for low power data communications systems, intercom systems,
sound systems, telephone systems, security systems and emergency signaling systems.
The Drywallers fasten drywall or gypsum board to the framework inside commercial buildings,
houses and other structures.
The Tapers or Jointer seals the joints between gypsum board or other wall board normally in
commercial buildings.
The Electricians assemble and install all fixtures, wiring, conduit, junction boxes and connect all
wiring for the high power electrical and lighting systems.
The Elevator Operators assemble, install and align all frameworks, counterbalances, pumps and
cylinders for electric elevators, hydraulic elevators and escalators.
The Fireproofers apply fire resistant materials to structural steel and they apply fire resistance
refractory material to the inside of boilers and tanks.
513

The Floor Covering Installers install and replace carpet or resilient floor covering material such
as vinyl tile, linoleum or vinyl flooring.
The Glaziers select, cut and install stationary pane glass, plastic materials or mirrors including all
hardware used in curtain walls, window walls or store front windows.
The Instrumentation Fitters connect, mount and install all pressure and flow instruments, valves,
tubing and panel boards associated with monitoring and controlling the process.
The Ironworkers shakeout and erect the structural steel framework, stairs, handrail and platforms
on buildings, process plants, power plants and bridges.
The Laborers perform many activities such as air and power tool operator, a mason tender,
concrete vibrator operator, carpenters assistant and they drive the motorized concrete buggies.
The Lathers fasten wooden, metal or rock board laths to walls and ceilings of buildings to
provide supporting base for plaster, fireproofing or acoustical material.
The Mechanics repair and maintain the construction equipment.
The Millwrights assemble and align rotating machines and equipment such as shafts, conveyors,
pumps and turbines.
The Oilers check the oil levels and lubricate the construction equipment.
The Operators run construction equipment such as air compressors, pumps, hoists, cranes,
loaders, backhoes, power shovels, sheepsfoot rollers, rubber tired rollers, drag lines, bull dozers
and concrete batching plants.
The Painters apply coats of paint, varnish and other finishes to interior and exterior surfaces.
The Paperhangers apply coverings to walls and ceilings made of fabric, vinyl or paper.
The Pile Drivers operates the pile driver mounted on skids or on the crane to drive permanent
wood, steel or concrete piles. They also drive and extract sheet piles made of wood or steel.
The Pipefitters, sometimes referred to as the Fitters, lay out, cut, align and install all high
pressure bolted and welded metallic piping on refineries, processing plants, water treatment
plants and power plants.
514

The Pipelayers place and align underground pipe for sanitary sewer, storm sewer and water
distribution systems outside the structure.
The Plasterers apply coats of plaster to interior walls and ceilings with many types of plaster
materials that form fire resistant and sound proof surfaces. Also, they apply stucco to exterior
surfaces.
The Plumbers fabricate and install domestic water, waste disposal and sanitary piping and
fixtures such as bath tubs, sinks, water closets and dishwashers in residential, commercial and
industrial buildings.
The Riggers assemble cranes, select and connect slings to the crane for lifting machinery,
Structural steel and equipment. They also erect jin pole lifting systems designed to lift an
unusually long piece of equipment which is shipped horizontally. The jin pole system allows the
extremely long piece of equipment to be lifted into its permanent vertical position.
The Rodbusters fabricate and install reinforcing bars and wire mesh to reinforce concrete floors,
columns, footings, beams and girders.
The Roofers apply various types of materials such as tar and gravel, rubber, asphalt or fiberglass
shingles to commercial, residential and industrial projects.
The Sheet Metal Workers layout, cut and install round and rectangular duct work for heating,
ventilating, air conditioning, pollution control systems, kitchen equipment, and sheet metal work
for roofs, siding, rain gutters, skylights and outdoor signs.
The Sprinkler Fitters layout, fabricate, assembles and installs all piping, sprinkler heads and
equipment associated with the Fire protection System.
The Teamsters drive a variety of construction equipment such as dump trucks, low boys, flat bed
trucks, transit mixers, tank trucks or pickup trucks to haul materials.
The Terrazzo Workers mix, pour, finish and polish mixture of cement, sand, pigment and marble
chips for floors and stairs.
The Tile Setters cut, apply an adhesive base and install tiles to floors and walls.
515

The Welders adjoin together metal components for structural steel, process metal pipe, heavy
rebar with cad welds, and heavy gage sheet metal using a variety of welding processes such as
arc or gas. The welders are commonly associated with the following crafts 1) Ironworkers 2)
Boilermakers and 3) Pipefitters and to a lesser degree Sheet Metal Welders and Rod Buster
Welders. They will take on the name of the craft that they are affiliated with such as Boilermaker
Welder, Pipefitter Welder, etc.
Traditionally within each craft listed above, there are at least four skill levels. The skill levels are
described below. The General Foreman is normally described under a union agreement and a
General Foremen is required after a specified number of Crew Leaders (Foreman) are on the job.
The Crew Leader generally referred to as the Foreman provides instructions to the workers and
many times they work with the craft worker. The Skilled Trade Person generally referred to as
the Journeyman is a trained and skilled craft or trade person. Finally, the Apprentice is a specific
craft or trade trainee.
516

Organization and Job Description Exercise
1.
What do the horizontal lines on an organizational chart with various positions indicate?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
Which duties change as a person moves up an organizational chart?

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Superintendent
Project Engineer
Project Manager
Planning Engineer.
Which position typically forecasts the cost at completion for field activities?
A.
B.
D.
C.
5.
Analysis skills increase and their communication skills increase

Technical skills increase and their negotiation skills decrease
Administration skills decrease and their Technical skills increase.
Communication skills decrease and their Administration skills decrease
Which position typically writes the subcontract agreements?

A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Communication
Responsibility
Promotion
Authority
Estimator
Cost Engineer
Superintendent
Project Engineer
Which position typically performs the Formwork design calculations?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Superintendent
Safety Engineer.
Project Engineer.
Project Manager.
517

6.
Which position typically draws the logical sequences and calculates the activity days?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
Which position typically assigns the crews, maintains a job diary and schedules
subcontractors?
A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
Accountant
Crew Leader
Craft person
Superintendent
Which party typically obtains the building permits?

A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
Cost Engineer
Superintendent.
Project Engineer
Project Manager.
Which position typically completes the time card?

A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
Cost Engineer
Superintendent.
Project Engineer
Planning Engineer
Owner.
Subcontractor.
Project Manager.
Architect/Engineer.
Which position typically develops the overall project logic network and schedule?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Estimator.
Cost Engineer.
Project Manager.
Planning Engineer.
518

11.
Which of the following activities does a Millwright perform?

A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
Which trade operates equipment to place the Steel Sheet Piling?

A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
Plumber.
Pipe Fitter.
Pipe Layer.
Building Laborer.
Which trade applies stucco to the outside of the building?

A.
B.
C.
D.
15.
Rigger.
Excavator.
Ironworker.
Pile Driver.
Which trade assemblies and aligns the underground pipe outside the structure?
A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
Cuts and installs trim and cabinets.

Assembles and aligns rotating equipment.
Fits and aligns high pressure process piping.
Fabricates and assembles sheet metal for duct work.
Plasterer.
Insulator.
Carpenter.
Drywaller.
Which trade installs piping and equipment for the fire protection system?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Plumber.
Pipe Fitter.
Fireproofer.
Sprinkler Fitter.
519

16.
Which trade applies heat resistant materials to structural steel and sprays refractory
material on the inside of steel Boilers and High Pressure Vessels or Tanks?
A.
B.
C.
D.
17.
Which trade ties and places the rebar?

A.
B.
C.
D.
18.
Plumber.
Pipe Fitter.
Pipe layers.
Sprinkler Fitter.
Which of the following trades Fabricates and Erects Air Distribution Duct work?
A.
B.
C.
D.
20.
Rigger
Rod busters.
Pile Driver.
Iron worker.
Which of the following trades Fits, Aligns & Installs Drain, Waste and Vent Piping?
A.
B.
C.
D.
19.
Insulator.
Fireproofer.
Boilermaker.
Asbestos Worker.
Glaziers.
Iron worker.
Terrazzo workers.
Sheet Metal Workers.
Which of the following trades installs and calibrates pressure and flow gauges?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Plumber.
Pipe Fitter.
Sprinkler fitter
Instrumentation Fitter.
520

21.
Which trade Installs low voltage intercom & security systems?

A.
B.
C.
D.
22.
Which trade wraps the high pressure process piping and equipment?
A.
B.
C.
D.
23.
Rigger.
Operator.
Millwright.
Ironworker.
Which trade Pours, finishes and polishes floors to bring out the marble chips?
A.
B.
C.
D.
25.
Insulator.
Plasterer.
Fireproofer.
Boiler Maker.
Which trade erects jin poles for making heavy lifts, assembles cranes and attaches slings
to the loads for the crane to lift?
A.
B.
C.
D.
24.
Electrician.
Instrumentation Fitter.
Security Systems Engineer.
Communications Electrician.
Tile Setter.
Terrazzo Worker.
Cement Finisher.
Flooring Installer.
Which trade cuts and installs panes of glass in store fronts and glass curtain walls?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Glazier.
Lathers.
Carpenter.
Iron worker.
521

26.
Which trade seals the head and butt joints for the drywall on a commercial project?
A.
B.
C.
D.
27.
Which trade operates the motorized concrete buggies?

A.
B.
C.
D.
28.
Plumber.
Pipe Fitter Welder.
Ironworker Welder.
Sheet Metal Welder.
What are the components of a job-built boiler that the Boilermaker will assemble
together?
A.
B.
C.
D.
30.
Oiler.
Laborer.
Operator.
Millwright.
Which trade welds the high pressure process piping?

A.
B.
C.
D.
29.
Taper.
Lather.
Plaster.
Drywaller.
Assembles the turbine and fits and aligns the rotating equipment.
Sets steel sheet piling, fabricates and assembles sheet metal and places piping.
Sets structural steel sides, assembles piping, welds water tubes, and sets pumps.
Assembles sheet metal, applies refractory material to boiler and paints the boiler.
The welders have associated themselves with numerous trades and they have taken on
their trade name. Which of the following crafts are the welders are associated with?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Millwrights, Pile Drivers and Operators.

Ironworkers, Boilermakers and Pipe fitters.
Plumbers, Sprinkler fitters and Pipe Layers.
Instrumentation fitters, plumbers and Jointers.
Check Answers
522

Employment Laws and Regulations
There are numerous hiring information and employment law regulations that the supervisor must
be in compliance with since they may be the first contact for the new employees. Therefore, your
actions in labor matters can have a major effect on an employees perception of the company and
your concern for their well being. It is the supervisors responsibility to abide by the labor laws
and/or to abide by the collective bargaining agreements (union) negotiated by the contractor. This
requires the supervisor to have a basic knowledge of the following labor laws.
Hiring Requirements
The Fair Labor Standards (Wages and Hours Law) act requires a poster to be posted in clear
view for all employees. This poster must be posted at the job site at the employee bulletin board.
This law regulates methods of wage payment and hours of work for all industries engaged in
construction between two or more states. The law restricts the employment of children more than
fourteen and less than sixteen to non construction jobs. Also, the employment of children under
the age of 18 in hazardous construction jobs is prohibited. They can be employed in construction
between sixteen and eighteen only in nonhazardous jobs. It is the contractors responsibility to
verify their age. The Fair Labor Standards law says that you cannot work nonexempt employees
for more than forty hours per week unless you pay them at least time and a half their regular rate
of pay for the overtime. Also, this Act specifies that you cannot use gender as basis for
discriminating in wages, except where wages are based on a seniority system, a merit system, a
piecework system, a commission or a bonus system. The law also specifies that you cannot
simply lower the wage rate of any employee just to settle a wage disparity. The Fair Labor
Standards Act does allow a manager to create a class of employees called exempt employees.
This allows you not to pay overtime to some people if they work more than forty hours per week.
This class normally consists of executives, managers, and first-line supervisors, and other
employees whose jobs require making decisions and using personal judgment, creativity, or
innovativeness but they are not classified as managers.
The Illegal Immigration Reform and Immigrant Responsibility Act requires that the supervisor
ask for detailed proof of an applicants eligibility to work in the United States. This is called the
I-9 form requiring all non U.S. citizens employed in the United States to complete this form and
it must be submitted to the federal government within three days of hiring. This form must be
completed at the time of hiring. Penalties exist to supervisors and companies for a
noncompliance. You can ask for proof of employment eligibility such as an alien registration
card, U.S. passport, or a U.S. Social Security card. It is illegal for you to ask an applicant where
they come from or which country they come from.
The Employee Withholding Exemption Certificate (W-4) for Federal and State Tax Withholdings
requires that this form be completed at the time of hiring for each employee hired. This form
requests the employee's name, address, social security number, marital status, the number of
exemptions claimed and it is signed by the employee..
523

Employment Law Legislation
Employment law covers numerous situations where managers and supervisors actions or
inappropriate actions may have severe legal ramifications on the individual and the company.
There are numerous possible actions which can be taken against an organization or its individuals
if they do not take appropriate actions concerning employment issues. You or your company
could face claims of breach of a contract for firing someone without just cause, retaliatory
discharge for firing someone after they made a claim, slander or defamation of character for
telling someone the reason for discharging an employee, sexual harassment for failure to take
immediate action to remedy a hostile situation, wrongful discharge because you did not follow all
of the progressive disciplinary steps and the list is extensive.
This section will focus on the daily activities concerning hiring, managing and discharging
personnel. It will outline what activities you cannot do and what activities you can do concerning
these numerous employment laws such as the civil rights laws, equal employment opportunity
laws, Americans with disabilities laws, labor laws, safety liability law, sexual harassment, and
due diligence under criminal law. The Civil Rights legislation was enacted in 1964 and it defined
discrimination, but it still exists today and it is still illegal today. The primary reason for enacting
numerous civil rights laws is prejudice against a group of people which cannot be erased by laws.
Prejudice means forming opinions or having feelings about a group of people on the basis of
special characteristics, such as race, color, religion, ethnicity, sex, age, disability, or making a
judgment in advance on the basis of stories, implications, or limited experience about people
from a particular place or background. Ignorance in the form of what you dont know about
people can also lead to prejudice. Ignorance and prejudice have prevented many productive
groups of people from taking full advantage of economic employment opportunities. Therefore,
laws have been enacted to protect people whose opportunities have been limited because they do
not hold the right characteristics by people making the hiring decisions. These laws are
designed to identify protected classes, or groups of people who have been identified as having
suffered from economic discrimination in the past.
Employment legislation defines a protected class as a group of people distinguished by the
special characteristic(s) that have inhibited their progress. These protected classes consist of race,
color, ethnic identification, national origin, religion, sex, age, disability, and veteran status.
Under the law, you cannot discriminate on the basis of a characteristic specific to any protected
class, unless the characteristic is a bona fide occupational qualification. A bona fide occupational
qualification is a trait that is integral or essential to the proper performance of the job. The
federal government defines discrimination with respect to hiring practices, the decisions and
actions that deny individuals in protected classes access to employment, advancement, benefits,
training, and compensation permitted to other people in the organization.
524

Employment Law Discrimination
Employment Discrimination can take many forms in the workplace. Some examples are Sex
Discrimination, Sexual harassment, Promotion discrimination, Hostile work environment,
Improper termination, Racial harassment, Recruitment discrimination of women and minorities.
Under the Civil Rights Act, the Federal District Court for the Western District of Missouri has
ruled that individual employees in a position of authority can be sued, held accountable for and
required to pay punitive damages for acts of discrimination. Recent cases that Supervisors have
been held liable for Intentional Infliction of Emotional Distress, Defamation Assault and Battery,
Malicious Interference with employment, Invasion of Privacy and other common law theories.
Also, the Civil Rights Act of 1991, expanded employment discrimination claims to allow for
recovery of compensatory damages for Emotional Pain, Suffering, Inconvenience, Mental
Anguish, and Loss of Enjoyment of Life. The act also allows for recovery of punitive damages if
the jury finds that the employer acted with malice or reckless indifference. If compensatory and/
or punitive are awarded, they are not covered by business liability insurance. The 1991 act also
provides for employee jury trial and it caps the compensatory and punitive damages.
A 1989 U.S. Supreme Court decision now allows plaintiffs to sue in court for an employers
intent to discriminate in employment. The result has been that these cases can be tried by a jury
where punitive damages and severe penalties can be assessed against the company and managers.
The plaintiff is required only to show that the companys or its representatives reckless disregard
for the consequences of an action is sufficient to prove intent to discriminate intended to produce
the outcomes. Therefore, the Equal Employment Opportunity (EEO) laws which are enforced by
the Commission (EEOC) have identified guidelines for what a manager cannot do as follows.
1.
Failure to hire or to discriminate against any person in a protected group.
2.
Limit, segregate, or classify applicants which have an adverse effect on their status.
3.
Failure to provide training because they are members of a protected group.
4.
Retaliation against any person because they made a claim or participated in an action.
5.
Print any employment notices that may adversely affect members of a protected group.
6.
Discharge any person because they are members of a protected group.
7.
Failure to maintain and post, in a conspicuous place, the contents of a civil rights law.
525

The American with Disabilities Act (ADA) of 1992 administered by the EEOC has expanded the
list of ADA-covered disabilities. ADA defines disabled individuals as persons with a physical
impairment, mental disorders, impaired or disabled person including individuals with AIDS,
epilepsy, obesity or diabetes which may affect the human biological system creates a disability,
alcoholics and drug abusers who have successfully undergone treatment. The ADA specifically
excludes any employee or applicant who currently, knowingly uses a controlled substance. It also
excludes homosexuals, bisexuals, transvestites, and persons whose sexual behaviors do not stem
from physical impairments. Below is a list of things a manager cannot do to a qualified disabled
person under the ADA guidelines.
1.
Limit, segregate, or classify applicants solely on the basis of the persons disability.
2.
Participates in an arrangement with employment agencies, labor unions, benefit providers

or training programs that subjects the qualified person to prohibited discrimination.
3.
Uses criteria, or employment tests that are not bona fide occupational qualifications.
4.
Excludes or denies equal employment or benefits to a qualified person solely because the
qualified individual has a relationship with a disabled spouse.
5.
Fails to make reasonable accommodations for a known physical or mental limitation.
6.
Requires medical examinations or ask a person whether they have a disability.
The Sexual Harassment Regulation according to the Equal Employment Opportunity

Commissions (EEOC) policy it states that an employer is liable for sexual harassment if it knew
or should have known upon reasonable diligent inquiry about a situation which created a hostile
work environment. The policy also insists that each company must have policy that has been
clearly and regularly communicated to all employees. Second, it must affirmatively raise the
subject with all employees. Third, it must express strong disapproval and it must explain the
consequences to all employees. Fourth, the company must have a sexual harassment complaint
procedure that ensures confidentiality and provides effective remedies including protection of
victims/witnesses. Fifth, the company must Investigate charges promptly and throughly. Sixth, it
must take immediate and appropriate corrective action. Finally, the company must provide
training on sexual harassment.
The courts have identified the situations below that created a Hostile Work Environment and they
are things that supervisors cannot do. First, a hostile environment is created when a supervisors
conduct had the purpose or effect of unreasonably interfering with the employees work
performance. Second, evidence can be submitted that a supervisor had sexually harassed others.
Third, evidence can be submitted of racial and sexual hostility created a hostile environment.
526

Fourth, a hostile environment is created by name calling or slurs. Fifth, offensive pictures or
jokes create a hostile environment. Sixth, an invasion of privacy by a supervisor is a hostile
environment. Seventh, a supervisors intentional infliction of emotional distress creates a hostile
environment. Supervisors can be held individually liable for sexual harassment claims and
punitive damages for pain and suffering have been awarded.
Affirmative Action plans have been established to ensure equal employment opportunities on
public projects. Many contracts with federal or state funds will establish goals and timetables for
minority and female participation expressed in percentage terms for the Contractors aggregate
workforce in each trade on all construction work. The Contractor must comply by executing and
submitting with their bid proposal, certifications relating to the following.
Minority Business Enterprises (MBE) on government projects require a dollar value or
percentage as a goal of the contract to be supplied by a registered MBE. Women Minority
Business Enterprises (WBE) on government projects require a dollar value or percentage goal of
the contract to be supplied by a registered WBE. Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (DBE) on
government projects require a dollar value or percentage overall goal of the contract to be
supplied by a registered DBE. If these goals cannot be met, then the contractor must provide
complete documentation of the names of the contacts with times and dates each MBE or WBE or
DBE was contacted. Without proper documentation a Contractor can be considered a nonresponsive bidder.
Another form of employment documentation is the Disciplinary Memorandum. It is imperative
that all disciplinary memorandums contain three sections. They are the format, vocabulary, and
the tone. Whenever you are required to write a disciplinary memo or letter, the memorandum
should never start or contain praise, it sends a Contradictory Message to the Employee. When
sending a Disciplinary memorandum, you must focus on three items. First, focus on the Format.
Second, focus on the Vocabulary. Third, focus on the Tone. Below you will find some advice on
the proper technique for writing each section of a disciplinary memorandum.
The Format section should contain these items: an introduction that should state what action is
being taken and what caused the need for the disciplinary action; a supporting paragraph
documenting the incident causing the action; a direct quotation from the company policy; a
conclusion which focuses on the future; and the Format should include specific review periods
and how they will be dealt within the future. The Vocabulary section should contain words that
are easily understood. Finally, the Tone section should state the facts only and the Tone should
not be harsh, exaggerated or judgmental. In summary, an improperly written disciplinary memo
can send a contradictory message to an employee. Therefore, the writer must be aware of the
format, vocabulary and tone.
527

Management and Union Labor Laws
There are numerous Labor Laws that apply to the construction industry which supervisor must be
aware of to comply with the requirements. Also, these Labor Laws apply to all contractors
whether you are a union or merit shop contractor. Managers and supervisors must be aware of
these labor laws. For example, the Davis-Bacon Act, the Norris LaGuardia Act, the National
Labor Relations Act, the Labor-Management Relations Act, the Fair Labor Standards Act, and
the Labor-Management Reporting and Disclosure Act applies to all contractors. Each of these
laws protects nonunion as well as union employees on the job and extends employees rights to
organize on their own behalf, including the right to form unions. These labor laws affect
management practices with regard to pay including prevailing wages and overtime, concerted
action, disciplinary procedures, and discharge policies. Therefore, they are defined below.
The Davis-Bacon Act was enacted in 1931, this act requires that in a contract for construction
work for the United States government there shall be stated the wage rates and benefits for
workers that the contractor and subcontractors must undertake to pay and they shall not be less
than those prevailing in the locality. It established prevailing wage rates for each craft
classification on all federally funded projects. This same act has been passed by many states and
it establishes prevailing wage rates on state-funded projects. This form is normally provided in
the Bidding Requirements section of the project. It identifies the name of the construction project
site, the County, the Date Issued, and the basic hourly rate, the hourly fringe benefit rate, the total
prevailing, and the overtime provisions. A contractor must ensure that all contractor employees
and subcontractor employees are in compliance with this requirement.
The Norris-LaGuardia Act of 1932 (1) restricted the courts use of injunctions against union
activities, (2) protected the right of workers to strike and picket peaceably, (3) prohibited Yellow
Dog Contracts which is defined as a pre-hiring agreement requiring the job applicant not to join a
union or to renounce their membership while employed.
The National Labor Relations Act of 1935 (NlRA) (Wagner Act) put into law protects
employees rights to take concerted action, that is, work together, to alter work conditions by (1)
using bulletin boards that publish general community information, (2) holding meetings during
work hours, with no loss pay or threat of retaliation, to discuss safety or other working
conditions. It allows all workers to engage in other concerted activities for the purpose of
collective bargaining through their own representatives. This includes forming, joining or
assisting labor organizations, but at the same time, it prevents nonunion employees from being
forced or coerced into joining a labor organization or engaging in collective bargaining except
where membership in a labor organization is a condition of employment created by contract. The
National Labor Relations Act created the National Labor Relations Board (NLRB) which is a
decision making board established to resolve conflicts between management and employees.
The National Labor Relations Board also defined unfair labor practices by employers. It states
528

that as a manager you cannot interfere with, restrain or coerce employees exercising their rights.
Second, you cannot discriminate against an employee in order to encourage or discourage union
membership. Third, you cannot discharge an employee because of membership or
nonmembership. Fourth, you cannot refuse to bargain collectively with the employees
representatives and you must bargain in good faith. Fifth, you cannot enter into a Hot-Cargo
Agreement. A Hot Cargo Agreement is where the employer agrees not to do business with or
purchase the products of another employer. Sixth, you cannot discriminate in hiring or tenure on
the basis of union or nonunion membership. The Wagner Act outlawed a closed shop. A closed
shop is an agreement requiring a worker to be a member of the appropriate union at the time of
hiring. Seventh, you cannot fire or otherwise discriminate against an employee for filing charges
or giving testimony under this act.
The things below are activities you can do as a manager as long as you do not interfere with your
employees rights to take collective action or form a union. As a manager under the National
Labor Relations Act you can freely express your own viewpoints, arguments, or opinions in
writing, print, graphics, or visuals about unions or collective bargaining while ensuring that what
you say does not threaten reprisal or force someone from forming or joining a collective
bargaining unit or promise benefits for not forming or joining. Second, you can counter
aggressive union recruiting tactics such as non-employee labor organizers. Third, you can hear
employee grievances and adjust them without union representation.
The Labor-Management Relations Act of 1947 (Taft-Hartley Act) is primarily focused against
unfair Union management Practices against its members or nonmembers while trying to
organize. Under this amendment to the NLRA, a manager cannot conduct unwarranted or sudden
lockouts against employees. Second, you cannot pay, lend, or deliver money or other assets to a
union, union official, union welfare fund, or an employee involved in a labor dispute. The Labor
Management Relations Act also included the following provisions against unions and union
officials. It prohibits featherbedding. Featherbedding is defined as paying for services not
performed. Second, it made secondary boycotts illegal. A Secondary boycott is a boycott using a
third party to put pressure on one of the other parties to conform. The Labor Management
Relations Act allows you the right to make every reasonable effort to reach an agreement with
your employees on rates of pay, hours, and working conditions including notice of changes, and
to arrange promptly to hold a conference to settle any differences. If the conference is
unsuccessful, the law requires that both of you participate fully in meetings by the Federal
Mediation Service.
The Labor-Management Disclosure Act of 1959 (Landrum-Griffin Act) has language similar to
that used in the NRLA which says that you cannot interfere with employees rights to work, to
organize, to choose representatives, bargain collectively, or engage in concerted action for their
mutual aid or protection. This act also requires the union officials to submit a personal financial
statement and union financial statements to the government each year.
529

The Collective Bargaining Agreement established the terms and working conditions agreed upon
between the contractor and the union are described in this document. These collective bargaining
agreements are usually negotiated by a contractor association such as the Associated General
Contractors (AGC) and they are signed by the contractor members. The supervisor should attain
a copy of the local agreements in effect before starting or assigning work. Each trade and local
have negotiated their own agreement.
The Doctrine of "Separate Gates" has established the rules for contractors to following in
designating gates on a union construction project so that the owners employees, the
subcontractors employees, the contractors employees and the material deliveries are separated.
Separate gates for each employer or each trade and they are in a different location from the job
site deliveries. Also, the owners employees entrance, and the owners deliveries are usually
away from the construction gates. Another clause is the Subcontract Clause which is under the
Wagner Act in Section 8e and it states that Contractors can agree to restrictions on
subcontracting if the owner requests restrictions. Also, there are rules established for a
construction company with a union arm and non-union arm. This is referred to as a Doublebreasted Operation, but it must have separate management of the daily activities.
Another term unique to the construction industry is a Merit Shop Contractor. This term was
coined by John Trimmer when nonunion firms were struggling for a market share with union
contractors. John Trimmer was the executive vice president from 1952 until 1976 and later he
was the assistant to the ABC presidents. These are also referred to as Open Shop Contractors.
Merit shop Contractors have the right to establish the crew size, the right to select the trade that
will perform each work activity and the right to select the installation methods for installing the
materials. Many Merit shop contractors belong to the Associated Builders and Contractors
(ABC).
Unions are under the Union Shops guidelines. A Union Shop requires employees to join within
stipulated time after employment. A Jurisdictional Dispute is a disagreement of the work rules
between two unions. Under a jurisdictional dispute the contractor must assign the work FIRST. If
not resolved the contractor must:
1. File with the National Labor Relations Board in the Region.
2. NLRB schedules a hearing within 10 days. Seek an injunction to stop.
3. If not resolved within 10 days, NLRB has a hearing and assigns work.
4. If not obeyed, fined. Taft Hatley Act. Private parties can sue.
530

Common Situs Picketing is used on a multiple employer job site and it has established these
rules.
1. Picketing is limited to working hours
2. Signs must indicate clearly
3. Picketing must be close to the work
Other labor law terms are a Lockout. A lockout is a contractor who withholds employment from
the workers. Also, there are Primary boycotts which are legal and they are a dispute between the
contractor and a specific union such as the painter. This dispute is primary if the painters union
strikes only the painting contractor. A Secondary Boycott which utilizes a third party to influence
another party, such as the contractor or the union to settle a dispute, is illegal.
Work Preservation is a clause that the union can negotiate for in the labor agreement which bars
the use of prefab products in construction. Product Boycott is a clause that the union can
negotiate with an employer to prohibit the use of a product to preserve work. If the product is
specified by the Architect or Engineer then it cannot be boycotted.
The Grievance Procedure is an internal step by step process up the organizational chart to
resolve employee complaints. Below is the grievance procedure flow for an individual.
Step 1 (Immediate supervisor)
Within twenty (20) days of the time a grievance might reasonably be known to exist, the
affected member of the bargaining unit shall present the grievance in writing to his or her
immediate supervisor with a copy to HRD.
The immediate supervisor shall respond in writing to the grievant no later than ten (10)
days after the grievance has been received. Any withdrawal of a grievance at this Step
shall not constitute a binding precedent in the disposition of similar grievances.
Step 2 Department level, unless the department head is the immediate supervisor, then advance
to Step 3. If the grievance is not resolved at step 1, it shall be presented in writing to the
Department manager or, where appropriate, the equivalent supervisory level, with a copy
to HRD, within seven (7) days after the response of the immediate supervisor or the date
the response was due, whichever is sooner. The grievance shall state the reasons the step
1 response is unsatisfactory. The Department manager or appropriate supervisor shall
meet with the grievant within seven (7) days and, if the grievant wishes, with a
representative of the Association. A written response shall be made not later than seven
(7) days after the meeting at which the grievance was discussed.
531

Step 3 (HRD level)
If the grievance is not resolved at the above steps, it shall be presented in writing to HRD
within seven (7) days after the decision at step 1 or 2, whichever applies, or the date the
response was due, whichever is sooner. The grievance must be signed by an authorized
representative of the Association and shall be part of the original grievance form. It must
include the reason the grievant considers the prior response unsatisfactory.
Following receipt, a meeting must be held between the representative of the Association
and the Director of HRD, or his/her designee, within ten (10) days. The Director of HRD,
or his/her designee, shall respond in writing within seven (7) days from the date of the
meeting.
Step 4 (Arbitration)
If the Association is not satisfied with the response at step 3, the grievance may be
submitted to arbitration by so notifying the Director of HRD in writing within two (2)
weeks of the step 3 response, or the date such response was due, whichever is sooner.
Once notified, the University and the Association will agree to an arbitrator within two
(2) weeks. If the parties cannot agree, the arbitrator shall be selected by alternately
striking one name from the following list. Determination of who strikes the first name will be by
a flip of a coin. The name remaining is selected as the arbitrator.
The American Institute of Architects (1997), General Conditions of the Contract A201-1997
edition has established a claims procedure which requires mediation before arbitration.
Mediation is defined as a third party using their influence to force two parties to negotiate.
Normally, the Contractor must conduct this dispute resolution method after they have perfected
the claim and it has been rejected. The next step is Arbitration. Arbitration is defined as a third
party establishing a binding decision as outlined in the contract. Finally, if the previous methods
have been exhausted and there is a legal flaw within the case then either party can file a law suit
called Litigation which is a court decision.
532

Employment Law Exercise
1.
When hiring employees, Which form must they fill out requesting their marital status,
number of exemptions and their social security number?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
Which form must be completed by all non United States citizens?

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
1
3
14
21
Which of the following posters describes the regulations for wage payment and hours of
work for all industries and must be posted at the job site?
A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
I-9
W2
W3
W4
According to the Federal government regulations, What is the maximum number of days
that a company has to submit the non United States Citizens form to the federal
government?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
I-9
W-2
W-4
1099
Fair Labor Standards.

Prevailing Wage Rates.
Material Safety Data Sheet.
Safety and Health Protection.
What is the correct name for the acronym EEOC?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Enterprise of Equal Occupational Council

Enterprise of Equal Opportunity Coalition
Equal Employment Opportunity Companies.
Equal Employment Opportunity Commission.
533

6.
What is the purpose of the EEOC law?

A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
What is the correct name for the acronym ADA?

A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
Prohibit discrimination against individuals with disabilities.

Protect companies from discrimination from their employees.
Prohibit discrimination against individuals due to race, sex, age.
Protect individuals from discrimination from sexual harassment.
What is the correct name for the acronym DBE?

A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
American with Disabilities Act.

Association of Disabled Americans.
American with Disabilities Association.
Association of Discriminatory Americans.
What is the purpose of the ADA law?

A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
Prohibit discrimination against individuals with disabilities.

Protect companies from discrimination from their employees.
Prohibit discrimination against individuals due to race, sex, age.
Protect individuals from discrimination from sexual harassment.
Disabled Business Enterprises.

Department of Business Enterprises.
Disadvantaged Business Enterprises.
Department of Business Employment.
What do the EEO, ADA and DBE laws have in Common?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Protection of unions from employment discrimination.

Protection of individuals from employment discrimination.
Protection of construction companies from discrimination.
Protection of individuals from disciplinary action from employers.
534

11.
What are the additional provisions that were ADDED by the 1991 Civil Rights Act to the
existing employment discrimination law that allows employees to recover compensatory
and punitive damages?
A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
What can be recovered by an individual from the officers or Managers of a company

under the Civil Rights Act of 1991 if a manager is found guilty?
A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
No damages can be recovered.

Business insurance will cover the damages awarded.
The company can be for awarded damages and lawyer fees.
The manager can be held personally for awarded damages and lawyer fees.
Which of the following activities creates a hostile work environment under the Sexual
Harassment provisions?
A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
,MBE, DBE, WBE, and ADA discrimination.

Disability, Gender, Sex changes, Veteran and Obesity.
Race, Color, Ethnic identification, sexual orientation and Age Discrimination.
Emotional Pain, suffering, inconvenience, mental anguish, and loss of enjoyment.
Using humor in the work place.

Consenting verbal flirtations with co-workers.
Talking with co-workers about social activities.
Conduct which interferes with work performance.
What are the content areas that a supervisor must take into consideration when writing a
disciplinary memorandum?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Format, Tone and Vocabulary.

Praising Introduction, Body and Conclusions.
Opening Question, Highlights, Specific Clauses and Recommendations.
Topic, Purpose, Specific Objective, Executive Summary and Lead-in with praise.
535

15.
In 1935 the Wagner act was enacted and the National Labor Relations Board (NLRB) was
formed, What type of disputes is the NLRB empowered to resolve?
A.
B.
C.
D.
16.
In 1959 the Landrum-Griffin act was enacted, which party and what rules were enacted?
A.
B.
C.
D.
17.
Union officials must follow established rules for picketing a job site.
Management must not coerce employees and they must bargain in good faith.
Management must pay employees on federal projects the prevailing wage rate.
Union officials must report organization activities and finances to congress yearly.
In 1947 the Taft-Hartley act was enacted, Which party were unfair practices established
against?
A.
B.
C.
D.
18.
Owner- Contractor disputes.

Architect- Contractor disputes.
Contractor- Subcontractor disputes
Organized Labor-Contractor disputes.
Unions management.
Owners management.
Contractors management.
Subcontractors management.
In 1932 the Norris-LaGuardia act was enacted, and it prohibited the use of a Yellow Dog
Contract. What is a Yellow Dog contract?
A.
B.
C.
D.
It outlawed secondary boycotts that required a contractor to put pressure on

another party to conform under the agreement.
It outlawed union-employer agreements that require the contractor to refrain from
handling the products of another contractor or supplier.
It outlawed the use of a pre-hiring agreement that requires employees to agree that
they will not join a union while employed with the company.
It prohibited the use of pre-hiring agreements requiring a job applicant not to join
a union or to renounce their union membership while employed.
536
19.

What is the name of the act that requires the contractor to pay prevailing wage rates on all
federally funded projects?
A.
B.
C.
D.
20.
In 1935 the Wagner Act was enacted and it made it unlawful to enter into a Hot-Cargo
Agreement. What is a Hot-Cargo Agreement?
A.
B.
C.
D.
21.
The practice of refusing to bargain in good faith.

The practice of paying the union for services not performed.
The practice of discharging an employee for union membership.
The practice of requiring a job applicant to sign a pre-hiring agreement.
What is a court order called that prohibits a union or contractor to stop certain activities?
A.
B.
C.
D.
23.
It outlawed the practice that requires employees to agree that they will not join a
union while employed.
It outlawed the practice that requires a worker to be a member of the appropriate
union at the time of hiring.
It outlawed secondary boycotts that required a contractor to put pressure on
another party to conform under the agreement.
It outlawed union-employer agreement that requires the contractor to refrain from
handling the products of another contractor or supplier.
The 1947 Taft-Hartley act prohibited Featherbedding. What is featherbedding?

A.
B.
C.
D.
22.
Wagner act.
Taft-Hartley act.
Davis-Bacon act.
Norris-LaGuardia act.
Strike
Lockout
Directive
Injunction
What is the name of the illegal dispute between a contractor and a union that causes the
employees of a neutral party to exert pressure on the contractor to settle called?
A.
Lockout
B.
Primary boycott
C.
Secondary boycott
D.
Jurisdictional dispute
537

24.
What is a dispute between two unions over work activities requiring the contractor to
assign the work to one of the unions involved called?
A.
B.
C.
D.
25.
What is a contractor referred to as that defends the concept of the right of each contractor
to decide the crew size, the job activities assigned and established their wages according
to each individuals ability and performance?
A.
B.
C.
D.
26.
Merit shop contractor

Union shop contractor
Agent shop contractor
Closed shop contractor
What is the procedure established in the labor agreement that provides for meetings
between successively higher levels of union-contractor management to resolve employee
disputes without work stoppage called?
A.
B.
C.
D.
27.
Primary boycott
Secondary boycott
Subcontractor dispute
Grievance procedure
Mediation procedure
Arbitration procedure
The EEO clause on a project states that on this project a total of 13 percent of the
contract award value shall be for DBEs. What is this DBE hiring percentage considered
according to the law?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Goal.
Obligation.
Minimum Requirement.
Maximum Requirement.
Check Answers
538

Job Site Administration and the Contract Administration Documents
The Notice of Award is an acceptance of the contractors offer from the owner. This notice is
normally accomplished by a letter indicating their selection and directing the contractor to obtain
necessary contract bonds, and insurance together with information concerning arrangements for
the signing of the contract. The Letter of Intent is a slightly different version which indicates
selection and acceptance of a proposal and states intent of entering into a suitable contract at a
later date because of certain activities not being met at the notification time such as
encumbrances at the site that have not been reconciled. The Notice of Award is prepared by the
Owner and Sent to the Contractor. It is the contractors responsibility to acknowledge receipt,
keep copy and send an original back to the owner within the specified amount of time, obtain
bonds. If the notification is a Letter of Intent you should determine how long you will guarantee
prices and verify with your subcontractors before notifying the owner. The Notice to Proceed
implies that the site is free of encumbrances and the contractor can occupy the site. The date of
the notice to proceed establishes the reference date from which the beginning of the project is
calculated. The Notice to Proceed is prepared by the Owner and sent to the Contractor. It is the
contractors responsibility to acknowledge by signing, keep copy, return original to the owner,
commence work within the specified amount of time.
The Stop Work Order is a document prepared by the Owner and used to notify the contractor to
stop work on the project for a variety of reasons such as Owner financial conditions, Owners
changed needs, labor disputes, unsatisfied liens, failure to perform according to the
specifications. Also, See the Termination clause in the General Conditions contains additional
reasons for the owner to stop work.
The Schedule of Value Forms are normally bound into the documents and they require the
Contractor to provide a cost breakdown for each category listed. These forms are normally
required to be submitted by the Contractor within fourteen days after the Notice of Award as
stated in the Instructions to Bidders. They are reviewed and accepted by the A/E firm prior to
first payment request. The Application and Certificate for Payment Forms are the same form as
the Schedule of Values which the Contractor has placed a Scheduled Value upon previously.
This form is completed and submitted by the Contractor to request all progress payments and
final payment. Also, Lien Waivers are submitted with each request for payment and attached to
the Schedule of Values form. These must be attached from all vendors and subcontractors.
The Construction Schedule is normally required to be submitted within fourteen days of the
Notice to Proceed and it is reviewed and accepted by the A/E firm prior to the first payment
request. Normally, the Contractor is required to prepare and submit a logic diagram indicating the
interrelationship of procurement and construction activities. Under a Design-Build contract the
organization is also responsibility for the design sequence. Sometimes the Owner will specify a
specific software package and the necessary schedule updates.
539

The Permits are typically obtained by the Project Manager after the signing of the agreement and
before commencement of the work. The contractor is responsible for obtaining the building
permit and the soil erosion permit. The mechanical, electrical and plumbing permits are normally
obtained by the specific trade.
The Soil erosion permit is required whenever any excavation is going to be performed within 500
feet of anybody of water such as a creek, stream, wetland, a lake, a river or drainage easement.
The Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Permit is required to be completed by anyone disturbing the
existing soil. This is to ensure the public that all runoff water and soil will be captured before
causing any harm to adjacent bodies of water. Some of the acts that the contractor shall be in
compliance with are Act 347 - Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Act, Act 346 - Inland Lakes and
Streams Act, Act 203 - Goemaere-Anderson Wetland Protection Act. This information is
normally found in the General Requirements and Division 02 Site Work.
The Stop Work Notice is a document used to notify the owner that the work on the project is
being stopped for non payment. The AIA General Conditions under the payments clause states
that if the contractor is not paid within seven days after the date stated in the contract or within
seven days after receipt of Application or Payment or Sworn Statement then the contractor may,
upon seven additional days written notice to the owner, Stop the Work until payment is received.
The Stop Work Notice is prepared by the General Contractor. It is the contractors responsibility
to Sign the form and sends it to the owner by certified or registered mail.
The Certificate of Substantial Completion is the substantial acceptance of the project which is
implemented by a joint inspection on the part of the owners representative and the contractor.
The contractor and the owners representative compile a list of items, called a "punch
list"containing the corrections to be completed. The punch list becomes the basis for accepting
the work as completed and releasing the final payment to the contractor. Substantial performance
may be defined as an accomplishment by the contractor of all things essential to the fulfillment of
the purpose of the contract, although there may be inconsequential deviations from certain terms.
It is the contractors responsibility to "walk the job" and compile a "punch list" for final
acceptance of subcontractors work. A completion date should be set for correction of
deficiencies by the prime contractor and subcontractors. An example of a punch list is shown
below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Caulking is required between the stucco and brick on the lower level
Streaks and cracking on stucco must be remedied.
Submit the Operation and Maintenance Manuals for the Mechanical Equipment
Install the Fire door stops in the Northeast end of corridor of hall #2
Balance the Air Conditioning System and submit records for the balancing.
Submit the "as built" construction drawings.
540

The Certificate of Occupancy involves the Fire Marshall, the Plumbing Inspector, the Heating or
Mechanical Inspector, the Electrical Inspector and the Building Inspector. Each inspector must
verify and sign off before owner occupancy. Finally, sometimes a maintenance bond is required
to be submitted to the owner at a project closeout.
The Requests for information (RFI) are sent to the A/E for clarification of an item during
construction. Some of these may become contract change orders.
Shop Drawings, Product Data Sheets and Reference Standards
The Shop Drawings are defined in the American Institute of Architects, General Conditions,
A201-1997, as drawings or diagrams which illustrate the fabrication and erection procedures for
some portion of the work. It continues and says that shop drawings, product data and samples
must be submitted after the signing of the Agreement and prior to fabrication or erection of the
item. In article 3.12.7 it states that the "Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work...
requiring Submittals... until the submittals have been approved by the Architect" ( p 8). It is the
contractor's responsibility is to verify materials, field dimensions and field construction criteria
with the requirements of the Contract Documents and Approve each Shop Drawing or Product
Data Sheet by affixing a Professional Engineers stamp to each drawing. Furthermore, the
Contractor must: 1.) Maintain a Submittal Schedule and 2.) Inform the Architect of any
Deviations. 3.) Inform by specific reference using a Letter of Transmittal.
The Supplementary Conditions states that "the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility
for any deviation, unless the Contractor has informed the Architect by specific reference in the
accompanying Transmittal Letter of such deviation at the time of submission and the Architect
has commented in writing on the specific deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved from
responsibility for errors or omissions in the Shop Drawings, Product Data, by the Architect's
review thereof" (p SC-4). Under this clause the contractor must:
The Letter of Transmittal is a cover form addressed to the receiver and attached to each package
of information being sent to inform the receiver what information is being sent. The letter of
transmittal provides the reader with a complete list of the items being sent and instructions to the
receiver outlining "what action is to be taken by the receiver. The letter of transmittal is
prepared by anyone transmitting data such as the contractor, architect, engineer, owner or
subcontractor.
The General Requirements states that "all Submittals shall be clearly identified with project
Name and location, and manufacturers name...and the Contractor shall indicate their approval by
means of their stamp." Furthermore, the Contractor must submit a specific number of copies as
of each submittal to the Architect/Engineer for their approval as stated in the General
Requirements.
541

The specific Shop Drawings required are stated at the beginning of each Section within each
Division of the Technical Specifications under Part 1. For example, Division 5 is Metals,
Section 200 is Steel Joists, PART 1.04 is Submittals and the B refers to the Shop Drawings
required to be submitted. The CSI number is shown below.
05200
JOISTS
PART 1
1.04
GENERAL
Submittals
B.
Shop Drawings
The Product Data Sheets are defined as Performance Charts, Standard Schedules or Brochures
which illustrate a Manufactured Material or Product that will be installed. The AIA General
Conditions states that the Product Data must be submitted prior to installation of the item for
Approval and Review by the Contractor and the Architect. The specific Product Data Sheets
required are stated at the beginning of each Section within each Division of the Technical
Specifications under Part 1. For example, Division 5 is Metals and Section 300 is Steel Roof
Deck, PART 1.04 is Submittals and the C refers to the Product Data information required. The
CSI number is shown below.
05300
STEEL ROOF DECK
PART 1
1.04
GENERAL
Submittals
C.
Product Data
The Reference Standards are documents that are not physically attached with the Documents,
but are referenced too in the documents and they may be part of the contract. This is the doctrine
of Incorporation by Reference. The most common clause used to incorporate an item by
reference is to state in the documents that the Reference Standards are "herewith made a part of
the Specifications." This normally requires the Contractor to have these available at the job site.
Some common construction reference manuals that are incorporated by reference and they should
be at the job site is the Riggers Manual for selecting slings under various lifting configurations.
Another reference standard is the Crane Lifting Tables showing the various angles, distances and
their lifting capacity. The Formwork for Concrete reference standard for designing the concrete
forms. Finally, the OSHA Construction Safety Standards are incorporated by reference.
The Record (As-built) Drawings must be maintained at the job site and marked currently to
record field changes and selections made during construction. This record set is given to the
owner upon completion. There should be only one master set where all changes are made.
542

Contract Changes
Change Orders or Contract Modifications are defined in the American Institute of Architects
(AIA) General Conditions as a written order, prepared by the A/E, to the Contractor issued after
execution of the Contract Agreement. It is signed in agreement by the Owner, Architect/Engineer
and Contractor. A Contract Change Order authorizes a change in the scope of work and/or an
adjustment in the Contract Sum and/or in the Contract Time. After a contract change order is
issued, the contractor must notify 1) All vendors effected by issuing a Purchase Order Change
Number and they must notify 2) All subcontractors effected by issuing a Subcontract Change
Order Number.
Example Contract Change Order Form
PROJECT:
OWNER:
CHANGE ORDER NO. _____________

DATE
August 29,__
A/E PROJECT NO.:
____99-116_______
JOBSITE, USA
Owner, Inc____________
261 Wash Ave.
Houston, TX
CONTRACT FOR:
JOBSITE, USA_____
TO:
Contractor, Inc.
345 Michigan Ave.
Houston, TX
The contract is changed as follows:
Not valid until signed by the Owner, A/E and Contractor
ORIGINAL CONTRACT SUM
$ ___________________________
NET CHANGE BY PREVIOUSLY AUTHORIZED CONTRACT CHANGES
$ ___________________________
CONTRACT SUM PRIOR TO THIS CHANGE ORDER
$ ___________________________
CONTRACT SUM WILL INCREASE/DECREASE BY THIS CHANGE ORDER
$ ___________________________
NEW CONTRACT SUM INCLUDING THIS CHANGE ORDER WILL BE
$ ___________________________
CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIME WILL BE

NEW DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION IS
______________________
Owners Signature
_________(DAYS)
________________
_____________________________________
Architects/Engineers Signature
543
_____________________________
Contractors Signature

Changes Ordered by the Architect/Engineer are called Extra Work Orders and they are frequently
used to authorize the contractor's field personnel (superintendent) to proceed with a change
immediately, with the sum and time extension to be settled later. The Extra Work Order is
issued by the Architect/Engineer to the superintendent, indicating the work order number, a full
description of the scope of work and the method for determining the total cost. It should be very
clear that an Extra Work Order does not change the Contract Scope, Price or Time until it is
converted to an executed Contract Change Order.
The Extra Work Orders place the contractor at an extreme disadvantage in settling the work
order fairly because the work has already been completed. Therefore, it is required that the field
personnel and subcontractors document all time, equipment and materials used daily by Extra
Work activity. The field supervisor should also require the Architect/Engineer to approve these
charges daily if possible. Immediately after completion of the extra work order, the contractor
should prepare a change order proposal and submit it to the owner requesting that a contract
change order be issued.
Extra Work Order
PROJECT:
______________________
EXTRA WORK ORDER NO.
OWNER:
DATE:
______________________
A/E PROJECT NO: ____99-116______

TO CONTRACTOR:
CONTRACT FOR:
________________
The scope is changed as follows: (Describe scope)
___________________________________
___________________________________
Superintendents Signature
544

The Architect can issue a Construction Change Directive which is defined in the American
Institute of Architects (AIA) General Conditions as a written order, prepared by the A/E, to the
Contractor issued after execution of the Contract Agreement. It is signed in agreement by the
Owner and Architect/Engineer authorizing a change in the scope of work and/or an adjustment in
the Contract Sum and/or an adjustment in the Contract Time. If the contractor disagrees, they
must:
1.
2.
3.
Proceed with the directive

Maintain all cost records
Negotiate approval into change order or file a claim.
If the contractor agrees, they must:

1.
2.
Proceed with the directive

Sign and execute a contract change order
Construction Change Directive Form
PROJECT:
OW NER:
JOBSITE, USA
Owner, Inc____________
261 W ash Ave.
DIRECTIVE NO. _____________

DATE
A/E PROJECT NO.:
August 22,__
_99-116__________
Contractor, Inc.
345 Michigan Ave.
Houston, TX
CONTRACT FOR:
JOBSITE, USA_____
Houston, TX
TO:
You are hereby directed to make the following change(s) in this Contract:
PROPOSAL ADJUSTMENTS
1. The proposed basis of adjustment to the Contract Sum is:
__
Lump Sum (increase) (Decrease) of $_______________
__
Unit Price of $________
per ____________
2. The Contract Time is Proposed to be (an increase or decrease of: ___________ (days)
______________________
Owners Signature
_____________________________________
_____________________
Contractors Signature
Signature indicates Contractors Agreement
545

Another change form is the Minor Change in the Work request from the A/E. A Minor Change in
the Work is defined in the American Institute of Architects (AIA) General Conditions as a
written order of the Architects/Engineers supplemental instructions to the Contractor and issued
after execution of the Contract Agreement. It is signed in agreement by the Architect/Engineer
authorizing a change in the scope of work but it indicates that there will be no modification
and/or an adjustment in the Contract Sum and/or an adjustment in the Contract Time.
Minor Change in the Work Form
PROJECT:
JOBSITE, USA
OW NER:____Owner, Inc____________
261 W ash Ave.
Houston, TX
SUPPLEM ENTAL INSTRUCTION NO.

__8_
DATE
SEPTEM BER 14
A/E PROJECT NO.:
__99-116_________
TO:
CONTRACT FOR:
JOBSITE, USA_____
Contractor, Inc.
345 Michigan Ave.
Houston, TX
A/E FIRM :
__________________________
The Work shall be carried out in accordance with the following supplemental instructions issued
in accordance with the Contract Documents without change in Contract Sum or Contract Time.
Prior to proceeding in accordance with these instructions, indicate your acceptance of these
instructions for minor change to the Work as consistent with the Contract Documents and return
a copy to the Architect/ Engineer.
Description:
As discussed in our telephone conversation at 10:15 A.M. on September 13, install Acme Desert
Beige ceramic tile, mfg. #701, in lieu of Star Chatum Tan ceramic tile in the menss and
womens bathrooms.
You reported that Star Manufacturing Companys Chatum Tan ceramic tile is currently out
of stock and unavailable for delivery.
Attachments:
Issued By
________________________
Architects/Engineers
Accepted By ______________________
Superintendent
546

There are only two parties that can request changes and they are the Owner and the Contractor
since they are the names of the parties on the Agreement. The owner or the architect authorized
by the owner, has the right to issue change order requests to the contractor for additions,
deletions, or revisions in the scope with an appropriate change in contract price or contract time.
Change requests may also be submitted by the contractor or the subcontractor through the general
contractor to take advantage of more efficient construction methods or materials. Immediately
after receiving a change request, the contractor should notify all parties who may be affected by
the change, such as construction personnel, vendors and subcontractor. An example of a change
request memo is shown below.
Change Order Request Memo
FROM:
Owner, Inc.
261 Wash Ave.
Houston, TX
TO:
Contractor, Inc.
345 Michigan Ave.
Houston, TX
PROJECT NAME:
Jobsite, U.S.A., Houston, TX
SUBJECT:
CHANGE REQUEST
NUMBER
1
DATE
July 25,
Addition of Face brick
The enclosed drawing shows the addition of face brick to the north exposed concrete block
basement wall.
Please submit a detailed bid breakdown indicating the net price. To ensure that this change can
be implemented, we must receive your quotation by July 28 so that a change order, if approved,
can be issued.
REQUESTED BY:
Authorized Signature
547

There are two types of Change Order Proposals that the Contractor can submit depending upon
the circumstances of the Proposal. Upon receiving a change order request memo from the owner,
the Contractor must first determine if the proposal is a New Change or a Net Change. A New
Change Order Proposal requires the contractor to provide a Change Order Proposal Summary
Cover Page indicating the Change in Scope, Price, Time and the Time Limit for Acceptance.
Second, the Contractor must prepare and submit to the owner a Change Order Proposal Backup
or Breakdown page showing a detailed cost breakdown, including all direct job costs, indirect job
costs, overhead and profit. The New Change for the Change Request Memo #1 is shown below
with a Summary Page and the Backup Page. The Supplementary Conditions will determine the
direct and indirect cost items that can be included in the Proposal, the percentage for overhead
and profit. The Prevailing Rate Table if they apply will specify the minimum wage rates and
benefits that must be paid on federal projects. The AIA General Conditions indicates that the
Contractor has 21 days from first occurrence to submit a Change Order Proposal.
FRO M :
TO :
C o ntra ctor, In c.
CHA NGE ORDER N UM BER
3 4 5 M ich ig a n A ve.
C H A N G E R E Q U E ST (E .W .O ) N U M B E R
H ou ston , TX
CHA NGE ORDER PR OPOSA L NO.
PRICE:
47
O w n er, In c.
26 1 W a sh A ve. , H ou ston TX
SCOPE:
P R O JE C T N A M E Job site, U .S .A ., H ou ston , TX
W e submit the following quotation to cover the addition of brown Chippewa brick 4" x 2-2/3" x 8"
to the north exposed basement wall.
Direct Job Costs
Material
$113.50
Labor
104.13
Subcontracts
0.00
Total direct costs
217.63
Indirect costs
68.91
Subtotal
286.54
Main Office 7%
20.06
Subtotal
306.60
Profit 10%
30.66
Total Price
337.26
TIME EXTENSION:
ACCEPTANCE TIME:
We request a time extension of one (1) working day for this

change.
Please issue a contract change order if you wish to proceed with
this change. We will not proceed without further written
instructions. This change order proposal is good for three days
from the date above.
548

A Change Order Proposal Bid Breakdown Support Page will be submitted as backup with the
change order proposal summary page to the owner. The bid breakdown shows how the Direct
Costs and Indirect Costs on the Change Order Proposal Summary page were arrived at by the
contractor. This Change Order Proposal Backup or Breakdown page is for New Changes to the
Scope and it must follow the Crew Sizes, Prevailing Wages established on public projects, Crew
Costs per day, Total Costs for Materials, Labor and Equipment by Type of Work/Locations and
Operations. The direct and indirect itemized costs that a Contractor can change on a Change
Order Proposal are stated in the Supplementary Conditions and the
Change Order Proposal Breakdown
Example of Direct Costs by Type of Work/Locations And Operations
Masonry Face Brick
Material 500 Brick @ $227/1000
=
$113.50
Labor 2-2/3 hr. 3 BL 8.01 Whr x $9.00/hr
72.09
2-2/3 hr. 2 BLH 5.34 Whr x $6.00/hr
32.04
JOB COSTS $217.63
Example of Itemized Indirect Costs
Indirect Labor (1 hr.)
Insurance 1% Job Cost
Small Tool 1% Labor
Job Truck 1% Labor
Job Office 2% of Labor
Sales Tax 4% of Material
Taxes: FICA 6.5% of Labor
Unemployment 4.5% of Labor
Insurance: Workers Compensation $8.87/$100
Public Liability $.37/$100 Labor
Property Damage $.30/$100 Labor
Fringes: Health & Welfare $.60/hr. 13.35 hrs.
Pension $.65/hr. 13.35 hrs.
Apprentice .01/hr. 13.35 hrs.
549
20.00
2.18
1.00
1.00
2.00
4.54
6.77
4.69
Labor 9.23
.38
.30
8.01
8.68
.13
TOTAL $68.91

The Net Change Order Proposal is for an item that currently exists in the original estimate, and
the change will result in either an increase or decrease in the contract price. The effect of the
change request must be determined by the contractor by comparing the original estimated cost of
the item with the new estimated cost of the item. This results in a net change in price. Normally,
the contractor does not charge the owner for overhead items. A Net Change requires the
contractor to provide a Change Order Proposal Summary Cover Page indicating the Change in
Scope, Price, Time and the Time Limit for Acceptance. The net change should reflect the
difference between the Original Direct Costs and the New Direct Costs. The Net change for the
Change Request Memo #2 is shown below.
FROM: Contractor, Inc.
TO:
CHANGE ORDER NUMBER
345 Michigan Ave.
CHANGE REQUEST (E.W .O) NUMBER 2
Houston, TX
CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL NO.
47
Owner, Inc.
261 W ash Ave. , Houston, TX.
Jobsite, U.S.A., Houston, TX
SCOPE:
In reference to your change order request No. 2, we submit the following

quotation to cover the relocation of the Domestic water line as shown on drawing
DW001 Revision No. 4
PRICE:
Direct Job Cost - Original

Material
Labor
Equipment
Subcontractor
Total
Direct Job Costs - New
Material
Labor
Equipment
Subcontractor
Total
Net Change in Price
$1500
$ 978
$ 0
$ 0
$2478
$1000
$ 652
$ 0
$ 0
$1652
$(826) Decrease
TIME EXTENSION:
We request a time extension of one (0) working day on this change.
ACCEPTANCE TIME:
Please issue a contract change order if you wish to proceed with

this change. We will not proceed without further written
instructions. This change order proposal is good for three days
from the date above.
550

Site Administration and Contract Documents Exercise
1.
Which document informs the contractor that their proposal has been accepted?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
Which document informs the owner that the work on a project will be stopped for failure
of the owner to make a progress payment?
A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
Schedule of Values.
Construction Schedule.
Labor and Material Bond.
Which document is issued to the contractor for failure to perform according to the
specifications?
A.
B.
C.
D.
5.
Stop Work Order.

Change Directive.
Stop Work Notice.
Which document is used to allocate the estimated costs for the items listed and for
requesting progress payments?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Contract Bonds.
Notice of Award.
Notice to Proceed.
Stop Work Order.

Change Directive.
Stop Work Notice.
Performance Bond.
Which document is signed in agreement by the Owner, A/E and the Contractor informing
the contractor to modify the agreements terms and conditions?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Addenda.
Change Directive.
Contract Change Order Proposal.
551

6.
Which document is signed in agreement by the Owner and the A/E and instructing the
Contractor to make a change prior to agreeing on the adjustment in scope or price?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
Which document establishes the actual start date from which the beginning of the project
is calculated?
A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
Notice of Award.
Stop Work Notice.
Certificate of Substantial Completion.
According to the AIA documents, assume that the Owner through the A/E has rejected a
claim that the Contractor has submitted. What action must the Contractor request in
writing next?
A.
B.
C.
D.
10.
Notice of Award
Notice to Proceed
Contractors Proposal
Which document terminates any liquidated damages from being assessed any further?
A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
Change Directive.
Extra Work Order.
Contract Change Order Proposal.
Lawsuit.
Mediation.
Arbitration.
Negotiation.
When is the Certificate of Substantial Completion prepared?

A.
B.
C.
D.
bid opening
signing of the agreement
end of the construction process
beginning of the bidding process
552
11.

Which of the following items is contained in the Certificate of Substantial Completion?
A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
What is an amount withheld from progress payments to ensure satisfactory completion of

the work called?
A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
Sworn Statement.
Stop Work Order.
Stop Work Notice.
Schedule of Values.
According to the project documents, which document lists the itemized content required
for submitting a Contract Change Order Proposal?
A.
B.
C.
D.
15.
Lien
Retainage.
Cost Plus Expenses.
Liquidated damages.
Assume that the Contractor has not been paid according to the contract payment due date.
According to the contract documents, which document must the contractor complete and
submit to the owner to inform them that they will be leaving the job site if the late
progress payment is not received?
A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
process payment schedule

starting date of the project
a list of items to be completed
a list of contract documents to be submitted
General Conditions.
According to the project documents, after the signing of the Agreement which documents
must be submitted by the contractor within fourteen days of executing the Agreement?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Performance Bond and Labor/Material Bond.

Extra Work Order and Contract Change Order.
Construction Schedule and Schedule of Values.
Stop Work Notice and Contract Change Order Proposal
553

16.
Which document lists the Contract Documents that shall be utilized to interpret the
contract?
A.
B.
C.
D.
17.
According to the construction documents, What is the procedure and the name of the
document that you must use to inform the Architect/Engineer of a change notation you
would like to make to a shop drawing?
A.
B.
C.
D.
18.
Architect.
Subcontractor.
Project Engineer.
Project Manager.
Which party is the primary developer of the shop drawings?

A.
B.
C.
D.
20.
Inform the A/E using a Contract Change Order.

Inform the A/E using a Letter of Intent to change a shop drawing.
Make the change on the shop drawing and Specify on the Change Directive.
Make the change on the shop drawing and specify on the Letter of Transmittal.
Which position is typically responsible for verification of all materials, field

measurements and field construction criteria on the shop drawings?
A.
B.
C.
D.
19.
General Conditions.
Owner/Contractor Agreement.
Owner.
Architect.
Contractor.
Subs and Vendors.
Which document explicitly tells the reader the specific shop drawings, product data, and
reference standards required on a project?
A.
B.
C.
D.
In Part 1 of each Section of the General Requirements.

In Part 1 of each Section of a Technical Specification Division.
In Part 2 of each Section of a Technical Specification Division.
At the beginning of the first Section of each Technical Specification Division
554

21.
During what phase of the project are Shop drawings submitted and approved?
A.
B.
C.
D.
22.
What is the name of the document that must be submitted which illustrates the
Fabrication and Erection Procedures for some portion of the Work?
A.
B.
C.
D.
23.
Schematic drawings.
Schedules or Diagrams.
Isometrics or Assembly plans.
Architect/Engineer Working drawings.
Which of the following items that must be submitted show the Fabrication and Erection
Process?
A.
B.
C.
D.
25.
Shop Drawings
Specifications
Working Drawings
Product Data Sheets.
Which of the following words specifically distinguishes shop drawings from product data
sheets?
A.
B.
C.
D.
24.
during the bidding phase of the project.

prior to fabrication or erection of the item.
after erection of the item and after the punch list.
after erection of the item and before project completion.
Pella Windows, Kitchen Cabinets, Furniture and Pre-hung Doors.

Structural Steel, Rebar, Formwork Design, Glazing and Frames for Store Fronts.
Plumbing Fixtures, Heating Fixtures, Electrical Fixtures and Prepackaged Equip.
Prepackaged Equipment, Brick Block, Roofing Membrane, and Kitchen Cabinets.
Which of the following items that must be submitted show the Fabrication and Erection
Process?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Sheet Metal Isometrics, Plumbing Isometrics, and Electrical Isometrics.

Acoustical tile, Paint Colors, Plumbing Fixtures and Prepackaged Equipment.
Kitchen Cabinets, Pella Windows, Prehung Doors and Interior Trim.
Plumbing Fixtures, Heating Fixtures, Electrical Fixtures and Prepackaged
Equipment, Piping Isometrics, Plumbing Isometrics, and Electrical Isometrics.
555

26.
Under what conditions are a Soil Erosion Permit Required?

A.
B.
C.
D.
27.
What are the names of the parties signing an Extra Work Order?
A.
B.
C.
D.
28.
Time
Scope and Price
All of the above
None of the above
A Contract Change Order has been issued, Which parties may the Contractor have to
issue changes to because of the contract change order being issued?
A.
B.
C.
D.
30.
Owner and Contractor

Surety and the Owner
Architect and the Subcontractor
Architect and the Superintendent
Which item (s) is changed in the Contract Agreement using an Extra Work Order?
A.
B.
C.
D.
29.
Whenever general permits are required on a project.

If any excavation is within 500 feet of a body of water.
Only if it is stated in the permit article number of the General Conditions.
Only if it is stated in the permit article number of the General Requirements.
Owner and the Architect

Suppliers and the Architect
Subcontractor and the Suppliers
Subcontractor and the Architect
According to CSI and AIA, Which Document contains the definitions for Shop Drawings,
Product Data and Samples?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Instructions to Bidders
General Conditions
556

31.
According to CSI and AIA, Which Document states the procedures for submitting Shop
Drawings?
A.
B.
C.
D.
32.
According to CSI and AIA, Which Document states the number of copies of the
Shop Drawings and Product Data Sheets that must be submitted?
A.
B.
C.
D.
33.
General Conditions
According to CSI and AIA, Which document specifies the number of copies of Owner
installation and operating manuals that must be submitted at a project closeout?
A.
B.
C.
D.
35.
General Conditions
According to CSI and AIA, Which Document states the time frame for Submitting the
Shop Drawings?
A.
B.
C.
D.
34.
General Conditions
General Conditions
You are To price a New Contract Change Order Proposal, for a Road and Bridge Project,
Which of the following items must be Consulted to properly price the proposal?
A.
B.
C.
D.
General Conditions and General Requirements.

Detailed Estimate and the Condensed Estimate Summary.
Supplementary Conditions and Prevailing Wage Rate Table.
Project Overhead Summary sheet and the Original Estimate.
557

36.
Which of the following parties issues the Certificate of Occupancy?

A.
B.
C.
D.
37.
Contractor, Architect and the Owner.

Banker, Surety, and the Title company.
Contractor, Mechanical Subcontractors, and the Electrical Subcontractor.
Fire Marshall, Mechanical Inspector, Electrical Inspector and Building Inspector.
Which document do you extract the ORIGINAL PRICES from for calculating a NET
CHANGE?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Estimate
Detail Cost Ledger
Contract Change Order Proposal
Project Overhead Summary Sheet
Given the following information, DETERMINE THE NET CHANGE AMOUNT that would be
shown on the Change Order PROPOSAL for a change to an existing item on the project.
Original Costs
Material
Labor
Subcontract
SUB
$1000
$2200
$ 600
$3800
New Costs
Material
Labor
Subcontract
Subtotal
$2000
$1200
0
$3200
Overhead
Total
38.
$ 900
$4100
What is the correct Net Change Amount using the information provided above?
A.
B.
C.
D.
$300 Increase
$300 Decrease
$600 Decrease
$600 Increase
558
Check Answers

Project Documentation
Daily Job Diary
The Daily Job Diary is the primary source of information about the construction job site is the
construction supervisor. Therefore, it is vitally important that the Supervisor/Foreman be aware
of their responsibility to maintain an accurate and complete account of each days activities. The
document used to record this information is called Daily Job Diary. The Daily Job Diary is used
to record Conversations, Technical Problems/Solutions and Safety Recommendations with
Subcontractors, Suppliers or the Architect. The content will describe information concerning
arrival dates, material delivery dates, design and contract changes. The supervisor should
maintain an accurate record of the material quantities and workhours spent. This information is
very important because this is the basis for requesting contract changes in time and money. The
Daily Job Diary Content is described in more detail below.
The Conversations describe any conversations or conflict concerning coordination with other
crews and personal conversations, observations or conflicts within your own crew.
The technical problems/solutions describe changes in drawings, elevations or construction
erection problems and how they were resolved. The safety problems and solutions describe all
potential Hazards that you feel exist in the lab and your recommended Plan of Action. Identify,
by NAME all individuals that are not wearing the proper safety Equipment such as heavy shoes,
hard hat and safety glasses. Also, state the action that you took to resolve the unsafe practice such
as asked employees to please put on their safety glasses. The signature/title & date of the person
completing the report must be signed each day in ink.
An example of a completed Daily Job Diary is shown below.
559

Daily Job Diary Example
PROJECT
JOBSITE, U.S.A.
REPORT NO.:
JOB NO.:
001
DATE:
CLIENT:
OWNER, INC
AUGUST 5
DAY: M TU W TH F S SU
CONTRACTOR: CONTRACTOR, INC.
SUPERINTENDENT:
262
TEMPERATURE: 50 F A.M. 75 F P.M.
JIM BOW
WEATHER:
BRIGHT
OVER
SUN
CLEAR CAST FOG RAIN
SAFETY ENGINEER: JOHN CAP

INSPECTOR: KEN OVERTURE
WIND:
STILL MODERATE HIGH
HUMIDITY: DRY MODERATE HUMID

CONVERSATIONS:
9:15 a.m. Mr. Lineman of L.A. Testing phoned and said that Walker hired him for mix designs
and Walker told him that he had talked to the civil eng. Dept and was given the OK to use A
Laguna Mix Design which contains Plastiment.
I disagreed with him because these specs allow only air entrained.
9:30 a.m. Phoned Mr. Blume to verify the concrete mix design criteria and he said that the
Laguna Mix Design is not approved for this project and that the design must be based on Air
Entrainment.
TECHNICAL PROBLEMS & SOLUTIONS: A waiver of continuous inspections at batch plant
has been signed and approved by Blume and he will accept certificates instead, but we must call
for occasional inspections.
SAFETY RECOMMENDATIONS: The state inspector approved the temporary Railing &
False work which is required for us to redirect the Tubers to the East Side of the river to avoid
injuring anyone from falling objects.
SIGNATURE
TITLE
DATE
560

Rules for Keeping a Job Diary or Daily Log
The general rules required for entering the job diary as court evidence is described below:
1.
Use only a BOUND book such as used by surveyors for their note keeping.
2.
Pages should be consecutively numbered in ink, and NO numbers should be skipped.
3.
No erasures should be made. In case of error, simply cross out the incorrect information
and enter the correct data next to it.
4.
No pages should be torn out of the book at any time. If a page is to be voided, place a
large "X" through the page, and mark "void."
5.
Every day should be reported, and every calendar date should be accounted for. If there is
no work performed on a given date, the date should be entered on the page followed by
the words "no work" or similar wording. It is still desirable to record the weather on "no
work" days, as it may have later bearing on WHY no work was performed in a case
involving a claim for liquidated damages.
According to the legal system, admissible evidence must meet the following criteria:
1.
All entries must be made on the same day as they actually occurred. If notes are kept on
separate scratch paper and later transcribed into the diary and this fact is disclosed during
a trial, the credibility of the entire diary comes into question.
2.
The documentation must have originated with the event. Therefore, you must record the
event as near to the actual event as possible. Recording the time and date of the event may
be extremely important.
3.
The recording must be based upon direct knowledge of the event. Therefore, the diary
cannot be written by someone else.
4.
The diary must be maintained as a regular business record. This means that if you only
record when you believe you are going to have a dispute the court will not allow the diary
to be admissible evidence.
5.
The diary must be detailed enough to permit reconstruction of all events.
561

The content of the diary or log is described below.
1.
Telephone calls made or received, and a substantial outline of the nature of such calls,
including any statements or commitments made during the call. Identify the parties
calling.
2.
Record any work or material in place that does not correspond with the drawings or
specifications, as well as the action taken. List any other problems or abnormal
occurrences that arose during each day, including notations of any particular lack of
activity on the part of the contractor. Note corrective actions taken.
3.
Record time and the name of the contractors representative to whom field orders are
delivered, and the nature of the contents of the field order.
4.
Note unforeseen conditions observed by the inspector that may cause a slowdown by the
contractor.
5.
Where a contractor is performing extra work because of an unforeseen underground

obstruction, make a careful field count of all personnel and equipment at the site and how
they are occupied. Log the number and craft of each person idled by such work, as well
as any idle equipment that would otherwise be capable of working.
6.
Record the content of all substantive conversations held with the contractor at the site, as
well as any tradeoffs, deals, or commitments made by either party.
7.
Record all field errors made by any party at the site. Identify in detail and indicate
probable effect.
8.
Show the name of the job at the head of every page.
9.
SIGN every diary entry and indicate job title immediately under the last line of entry on
each days report. This will preclude claims that additional wording was added later.
562

Daily Construction Report
The primary source of information about the construction activities being performed at the job
site is the construction supervisor. Therefore, it is vitally important that the superintendent be
aware of their responsibility to maintain an accurate and complete account of each days activities.
The document used to record this information is called the Daily Construction Report.
The Daily Construction Report is a report sent to the contractor's home office describing the
progress at the job site each day. This report contains the number of Workers Present, Weather
conditions, Construction Activities Completed and In Progress, Quantities Placed, Materials
Delivered, Construction Equipment, Visitors and meetings. The function and content are
described below.
Report No. should be Numbered Consecutively. The Workers Present section records the number
of workers present by craft and within each craft by craft classification. Each craft should also
indicate whether there are any employees that were Absent, Hired or Terminated during the day.
This section should include all of the contractors employees and Subcontractor employees. The
Weather Conditions section must record the Morning and Afternoon Conditions for the day.
These could be used to verify your claim for a time extension. The Construction Activities
describe the activities completed that day for your crew. You should reference exact locations.
The Materials Used section should state the number of materials placed such as number of
bricks, bags of mortar, cubic feet of Sand. The Construction Equipment used that day such as
Masonry Saw, Fork Lifts, Saw Buck, Radial Arm, Power Hand Saw, Chisels, Hammers,
Trowels, Mixers, Mixing Box. The Visitors section should indicate all visitors that arrived at the
site such as the Architect, the Owner, material suppliers or an inspector. The Meetings section
should describe any meetings that took place such as a tool box meeting, a crew meeting, a
planning meeting or a safety meeting. An example of a Daily Construction Report is shown
below.
563
Daily Construction Report Example

PROJECT
Jobsite, U.S.A.
REPORT NO.
JOB NO.:
001
DATE
CLIENT:
Owner, Inc.
DAY
CONTRACTOR
Contractor, Inc
DEGREES
SUPERINTENDENT
Jim Bow
WEATHER AM/PM
SUN
NY
SAFETY ENGINEER
John Cap
WIND SPEED
_5 MPH AM
INSPECTOR
Ken Overature
HUMIDITY
DRY
CONTRACTORS W ORKERS
CRAFT
CREW
LEADER
APPREN
JOURNEY
AUGUST 5
M
50 F AM
TOTAL
75 F PM
PARTLY
CLOUDY
OVER
CAST
FOG/
RAIN
20 MPH PM
MODERATE
CREW
LEADER
APPREN
1
1
HUMID
SUBCONTRACTORS W ORKERS
Boilermakers
Carpenters
262
JOURNEY
TOTAL
Electricians
15
Finishers
Instrument Fitters
Insulators
Iron W orkers
10
Laborers
Masons
Operators
Pipe Fitters
Plumbers
Riggers
Rod Busters
18
29
Sheet Metal
Sprinkler Fitters
Teamsters
TOTALS
564
Daily Construction Report Example Continuation

CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES:
Prefabricated wall forms @ Col. Line D Tied column rebar for Col A & B @ Col. Line B-B;
Placed Forms for Col C & D Stripped Wall Forms @ Col line B-B; Placed 100 Ft of 24" RCP
Drainage Pipe from Manhole #30 to #31; Subcontractor Excavated and Hauled 400 Cy of Dirt
south Lane of the Roadway from Sta 00 to Sta 1 + 01.
MATERIALS USED:
400 SF forms wall; 1.5 tons rebar columns; 100 lf reinforced concrete pipe; 400 PCS - 8" wall
ties
MATERIALS RECEIVED:
10 tons rebar; 4000 LF electrical conduit.
CONST. EQUIPMENT AT SITE:
Cat D-7; Cat 955K; Cat D-3; Gradall; Manitowoc 3000B; 2 Front End Loaders H90 & 570A; 2
Clamshell Buckets; 2 Backhoes H2254 & Koring; 2 Sets of Cutting Torches; Generator; 1 Pump.
VISITORS TO THE SITE:
City Inspector; Architect Jim Shane; Inland Steel.
MEETINGS THAT TOOK PLACE:

Steel Fabrication Problems; Tool box Talk Monthly Safety Meeting; Progress Meeting.
565
Job Site Records

The Field Records are the vital link between the home office and the job site. These records are
utilized to calculate the percentage complete, develop monthly progress payment requests,
identify materials delivered to the site, determine productivity rates, estimate a change order
proposal, calculate the payroll, compare actual progress to planned progress, establish a claim,
and document problems or potential problems. The field supervisor is required to maintain some
daily construction records pertaining to the job site activities. Some examples are a site storage
location, delivery gates, site layout plan, a daily job diary, a daily construction report, a daily time
card and a field one week look-ahead plan. Some additional records are the material delivery
status report, purchase orders, stock bin requisitions, changes - Contract Change Order Proposals
and Extra Work orders, construction equipment status report, subcontract agreements, collective
bargaining agreements, permits, project schedule, standard references, emergency safety plan,
OSHA safety manual, safety poster, Material Safety Data Sheet Location poster, Material Safety
Data Sheets, emergency numbers, hiring records, progress inspections, progress payments, shop
drawings, product data, samples, submittal log, planning meeting agendas and minutes, safety
meeting agendas and minutes, training records and certificates, warranties, owner manuals,
operating manuals, as-built drawings and certificate of occupancy.
Field correspondence can be a problem unless we have an effective and efficient method of
dealing with the different types of correspondence. Time management suggests that
correspondence accumulates for two reasons (1) we fail to make decisions about it immediately,
and (2) we dont have a systematic process for handling all of the correspondence. One of the key
concepts about correspondence and paperwork is that there are four things that we can do with it.
We can dump it, delegate it, do it or delay it. Which option gets us in the most trouble?
Some of the best recommendations for handling paperwork are: First, handle only once. either do
it, read it, trash it, or file it. Second, resist reading junk mail or junk e-mail and discard
immediately. Third, write an answer on the bottom of the letter and return. Fourth, you may want
to just telephone the person or e-mail them. Fifth, schedule a specific time for handling
correspondence each day. Sixth, use an electronic reminder file too follow-up on time. Finally,
always remember that many people find that at least eighty-percent of their mail and e-mail could
be answered immediately when they read it.
One of the most efficient methods to organize the project records is to utilize the Construction
Specifications Institutes Master Format. The Master Format facilitates construction
communication, promotes standardization in the industry, and facilitates the retrieval of
information. It is used for the organization of project manuals, detailed cost estimates, and
product data filing. The Master Format with its Divisions and Sections is also an effective filing
system for the field records listed above. Some of the best filing methods will be described
below. Also, the complete Master Format is provided later.
566

The Construction Reports must be completed Daily. This should be filed under Division 01,
Section 040 Coordination. Then file alphabetically within 01040 Coordination under
Construction Report. Also, the Construction Reports inside the folder should be filed with the
latest date on top. The Job Diary. This must be completed twice daily if it is going to become a
legal document admissible in court. This should be filed under Division 01, Section 040
Coordination. Then file alphabetically within 01040 Coordination under Job Diary. The Job
Diary is numbered consecutively, dated and signed. The Time Cards must be completed twice
daily and the hours must be allocated by construction activities. This should be filed under
Division 01, Section 040 Coordination. Then file alphabetically within 01040 Coordination
under Time Cards. Time cards are dated and signed. Also, the Time Cards inside the folder
should be filed with the latest date on top. To save writing time, it is advisable to preprint the
time cards with the Activity Descriptions and their associated cost codes on the Time cards. This
requires less writing and they can be easily reproduced requiring the field person too only have
to identify the hours worked for each worker. You should have some blank spaces on the time
card to allow for construction activities not listed or work that is identified as Extra work or a
The Equipment Status Report is an internal report identifying the construction equipment on the
job site or the time and date it was returned. This should be filed under Division 01, Section 040
Coordination. Then file alphabetically within 01040 Coordination under Equipment Status
Report. Also, the Equipment Status Reports inside the folder should be filed with the latest date
on top. The Material Delivery Status Report. This is also an internal report identifying the
materials delivered to the job site identifying the time, date it was delivered and any visible
damage to the shipment. This should be filed under Division 01, Section 040 Coordination. Then
file alphabetically within 01040 Coordination under Material Delivery Status Report. Also, the
Material Delivery Status Reports inside the folder should be filed with the latest date on top. The
Field Purchase Orders. This is also an internal report identifying items purchased at or near the
job site. These should state the intended use of the items. This should be filed under Division 01,
Section 040 Coordination. Then file alphabetically within 01040 Coordination under Field
Purchase Orders. Also, the Orders inside the folder should be filed with the latest date on top.
The Stock Requisition is also an internal report which identifies the job number and quantity of
materials taken out of the warehouse for a specific project. This should be filed under Division
01, Section 040 Coordination. Then file alphabetically within 01040 Coordination under Stock
Requisitions. The Stock Requisitions inside the folder should be filed with the latest date on top.
The Look Ahead Plan is another internal planning form. This is an internal form which identifies
the planned daily output, crew size, materials needed, tools and equipment needed, technical
information, safety plan, sequence plan, quality requirements, and sketches. This should be filed
under Division 01, Section 040 Coordination. Then file alphabetically within 01040 under Look
ahead Plans. Finally, the look-Ahead Plans inside the folder should be filed with the latest date
on top.
567

Visitors Log. This for requires each person not assigned to this project to state the date and time
of arrival, company name, their name printed, signatures and their departure time. This should be
filed under Division 01, Section 040 Coordination. Then file alphabetically within 01040 under
Visitors Log. Finally, the latest visitors log should be placed on top by date.
The Permits, Prevailing Wages, Minority Hiring Procedures and Goals can be filed under
Division 01, Section 060 Regulatory Requirements and then, alphabetically within 01060 such as
Minority, Permits - Building, Soil Erosion, Regulations - Prevailing Wages, Streams/Wetlands.
The Union Collective Bargaining Agreements can be filed under Division 01, Section 100
Special Project Procedures. Then file alphabetically within 01100 Special Project Procedures by
Craft name. An alternative is to file under the Subcontractor Division and/or Section.
The Project Meetings consists of Working agendas and Meeting Minutes. This can be filed under
Division 01, Section 200 Project Meetings. Then file alphabetically within 01200 Project
Meetings by type of meeting such as Planning, Safety, etc. Also, place the latest date on top with
the agendas on the left-hand side of the folder and the minutes of the meeting on the right.
The Submittal Log or Time Table can be filed under Division 01, Section 300 Submittals.
The Contractors Progress Payments can be filed under Division 01, Section 025 Measurement
and Payment.
The Change Requests, Change Order Proposals, Approved Contract Change Orders should be
filed under Division 00, Section 900 Modifications. Then file alphabetically by Approved
Contract Change Orders, Extra Work Orders, Proposals, and Requests and then within the folder
place the latest item on top. The Requests for information (RFI) can also be filed under Division
00, Section 900 Modifications. Then file alphabetically by RFI and then within the folder place
the latest number or date on top. Keep the A/E responses in the left side of the folder.
The Formal Purchase Orders and Purchase Order Changes can be filed under the Division
and/or Section number that pertain to their portion of the work. Then file alphabetically by types
of materials, then within the folder place the approved Purchase Change with the latest on top.
The Subcontract Agreements and Subcontract Change Orders can be filed under the Division
and/or Section number that pertain to their portion of the work. Then file alphabetically within
that Division/Section number. Then file Subcontract Agreement first and then within the folder
place the approved Subcontract Change Orders with the latest on top. An alternative method is to
have a separate folder for Subcontract Change Orders.
568

The Subcontract Extra Work requests can be filed under the Division and/or Section number that
pertain to their portion of the work. Then file alphabetically within that Division/Section number.
Also, the Progress Payment quantities inside the folder should be filed with latest on top.
The Subcontractor Progress Payment Requests can be filed under the Division and/or Section
number that pertains to their portion of the work. Then file alphabetically within that
Division/Section number. If you are collecting quantities for each subcontractor, then you might
want to maintain a folder of quantities placed by month. Also, the Progress Payment quantities
inside the folder should be filed with latest on top.
The Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples can be filed under the Division and/or Section
number that pertain to their portion of the work. Then file alphabetically within.
The Owner Installation and Operating Manuals can be filed under the Division and/or Section
number that pertain to their portion of the work. Then file alphabetically within.
The Record (As-Built) Drawings must be maintained at the job site and marked currently to
record field changes and selections made during construction. This record set is given to the
owner upon completion. There should be only one master set where all changes are made.
The Warranties can be filed under the Division and/or Section number that pertains to their
portion of the work. Then file alphabetically within that Division/Section number.
The Certificate of Substantial Completion can be filed under Division 01, Section 700 Contract
Closeout. The Certificate of Occupancy can also be filed under Division 01, Section 700
Contract Closeout.
In Conclusion, assume you have received the following items for the Drywall: a Drywall
Subcontract agreement, product data sheets, the Drywall Progress payment Requests, Change
request, installation instructions, warranty, a record of the drywall quantities installed and the
union Bargaining Agreement. The info is filed as follows: Division 09 Finishes and Section 250
Gypsum - Drywall and alphabetically as follows.
Agreement with Approved Sub Changes, Change Requests, Quantities Installed Drywall,
Owner Installation Manuals and Owner Operating Manuals, Progress Payment Request,
Product Data, Shop Drawings, and Warranties.
569
Job Site Records Filed According to the CSI Master Format

The CSI Master Format number system categorizes the Bidding Requirements and Forms,
Contract Forms and Conditions of the Contract into Division 0 - Bidding Requirements. Second,
the MasterFormat uses a series of numbers associated with the sixteen divisions which address
detailed construction specifications associated with products and systems. Division 1 - General
Requirements outlines the specific administrative and procedural requirements that apply to all of
the Technical Specification sections. Divisions 02 through 16 - Technical Specifications contain a
written description of the specific requirements relating to a specific product or system. The
Construction Specifications Institute (CSI) has developed the following Standard Master Format
numbering system consisting of the following Divisions.
CSI MASTER FORMAT DIVISIONS
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
DIVISION
00 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS
01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
02 - SITE WORK
0 3 - CONCRETE
04 - MASONRY
05 - METALS
06 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
08 - DOORS AND WINDOWS
09 - FINISHES
10 - SPECIALTIES
11 - EQUIPMENT
12 - FURNISHINGS
13 - SPECIAL CONSTRICTION
14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS
15 - MECHANICAL
16 - ELECTRICAL
570

04400
04500
04550
04600
MASTER FORMAT- Divisions & Sections

00010
00100
00200
00300
00400
00500
00600
00700
00800
00900
PRE-BID INFORMATION
BID FORMS
AGREEMENT FORMS
BONDS AND CERTIFICATES
GENERAL CONDITIONS
DRAWINGS AND SCHEDULES
DIVISION 5 - METALS
05010
05030
05050
05100
05200
05300
05400
05500
05580
05700
05800
05900
DIVISION 0 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01010
01020
01025
01030
01040
01050
01060
01070
01080
01090
01100
01200
01300
01400
01500
01600
01700
01800
SUMMARY OF WORK
ALLOWANCES
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
ALTERNATES/ALTERNATIVES
COORDINATION
FIELD ENGINEERING
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS
IDENTIFICATION SYSTEMS
REFERENCE STANDARDS
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES
PROJECT MEETINGS
SUBMITTALS
QUALITY CONTROL
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS
MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
CONTRACT CLOSEOUT
MAINTENANCE
06050
06100
06130
06150
06170
06200
06300
06400
06500
06600
FASTENERS AND ADHESIVES

ROUGH CARPENTRY
HEAVY TIMBER CONSTRUCTION
WOOD-METAL SYSTEMS
PREFABRICATED STRUCTURAL WOOD
FINISH CARPENTRY
WOOD TREATMENT
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PREFABRICATED STRUCTURAL PLASTICS
PLASTICS FABRICATIONS
DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

07100
WATERPROOFING
07150
DAMPROOFING
07190
VAPOR AND AIR RETARDERS
07200
INSULATION
07250
FIREPROOFING
07300
SHINGLES AND ROOFING TILES
07400
PREFORMED ROOFING AND CLADDING/ SIDING
07500
MEMBRANE ROOFING
07570
TRAFFIC TOPPING
07600
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
07700
ROOF SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES
07800
SKYLIGHTS
07900
JOINT SEALERS
DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK
SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
DEMOLITION
SITE PREPARATION
DEWATERING
SHORING AND UNDERPINNING
EXCAVATION AND SUPPORT SYSTEMS
COFFERDAMS
EARTHWORK
TUNNELING
PILES AND CAISSONS
RAILROAD WORK
MARINE WORK
PAVING AND SURFACING
PIPED UTILITY MATERIALS
WATER DISTRIBUTION
FUEL DISTRIBUTION
SEWERAGE AND DRAINAGE
RESTORATION AND UNDERGROUND PIPELINES
PONDS AND RESERVOIRS
POWER AND COMMUNICATIONS
SITE IMPROVEMENTS
LANDSCAPING
DIVISION 8 - DOOR AND WINDOWS

08100
METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
08200
WOOD AND PLASTIC DOORS
08250
DOOR OPENING ASSEMBLIES
08300
SPECIAL DOORS
08400
ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
08500
METAL WINDOWS
08600
WOOD AND PLASTIC WINDOWS
08650
SPECIAL WINDOWS
08700
HARDWARE
08800
GLAZING
08900
GLAZED CURTAIN WALLS
DIV ISION 9 - FINISHES
09100
M ET A L SUPPORT SY ST EM S
09200
LA T H A ND PLA STER
09230
A GGREGA T E COA T INGS
09250
GY PSUM BO A RD
09300
T ILE
09400
TERRA ZZO
09500
A C OU ST IC A L T REA T M EN T
09540
SPEC IA L SURFA CES
09550
W O OD FLO ORIN G
09600
ST O NE FLO ORIN G
09630
U NIT M A SO NRY FLO ORIN G
09650
RESILIEN T FLO ORIN G
09680
CA RPET
09700
SPEC IA L FLO ORIN G
09780
FLO OR T REA T M EN T
09800
SPECIA L COA T INGS
09900
PA IN T IN G
09950
W A LL C OV ERIN G
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE
03100
03200
03250
03300
03370
03400
03500
03600
03700
03800
METAL MATERIALS
METAL FINISHES
METAL FASTENING
STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING
METAL JOISTS
METAL DECKING
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
METAL FABRICATIONS
SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS
ORNAMENTAL METAL
EXPANSION CONTROL
HYDRAULIC STRUCTURES
DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS
02010
02050
02100
02140
02150
02160
02170
02200
02300
02350
02450
02480
02500
02600
02660
02680
02700
02760
02770
02780
02800
02900
STONE
MASONRY RESTORATION AND CLEANING
REFRACTORIES
CORROSION RESISTANT MASONRY
CONCRETE FORMWORK
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
CONCRETE ACCESSORIES
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
CONCRETE CURING
PRECAST CONCRETE
CEMENTITIOUS DECKS
GROUT
CONCRETE RESTORATION AND CLEANING
MASS CONCRETE
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY
04100
MORTAR
04150
MASONRY ACCESSORIES
04200
UNIT MASONRY
571

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
MASTER FORMAT- CONTINUED
13010 AIR SUPPORTED STRUCTURES

13020 INTEGRATED ASSEMBLIES
13030 SPECIAL PURPOSE ROOMS
13080 SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL
13090 RADIATION PROTECTION
13100 NUCLEAR REACTORS
13120 PRE-ENGINEERED STRUCTURES
13150 POOLS
13160 ICE RINKS
13170 KENNELS AND ANIMAL SHELTERS
13180 SITE CONSTRUCTED INCINERATORS
13200 LIQUID AND GAS STORAGE TANKS
13220 FILTER UNDERDRAINS AND MEDIA
13230 DIGESTION TANK COVERS AND APPURTENANCES
13240 OXYGENATION SYSTEMS
13260 SLUDGE CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
13300 UTILITY CONTROL SYSTEMS
13400 INDUSTRIAL AND PROCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS
13500 RECORDING INSTRUMENTATION
13550 TRANSPORTATION CONTROL INSTRUMENTATION
13600 SOLAR ENERGY SYSTEMS
13700 WIND ENERGY SYSTEMS
13800 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEMS
13900 FIRE SUPPRESSION AND SUPERVISORY SYSTEMS
DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES
10100 CHALKBOARDS AND TACKBOARDS
10150 COMPARTMENTS AND CUBICLES
10200 LOUVERS AND VENTS
10240 GRILLES AND SCREENS
10250 SERVICE WALL SYSTEMS
10260 WALL AND CORNER GUARDS
10270 ACCESS FLOORING
10280 SPECIALTY MODULES
10290 PEST CONTROL
10300 FIREPLACES AND STOVES
10340 PREFABRICATED EXTERIOR SPECIALTIES
10350 FLAGPOLES
10400 IDENTIFYING DEVICES
10450 PEDESTRIAN CONTROL DEVICES
10500 LOCKERS
10520 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
10530 PROTECTIVE COVERS
10550 POSTAL SPECIALTIES
10690 PARTITIONS
10650 OPERABLE PARTITIONS
10670 STORAGE SHELVING
10700 EXTERIOR SUN CONTROL DEVICES
10750 TELEPHONE SPECIALTIES
10800 TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
10880 SCALES
10900 WARDROBE AND CLOSET SPECIALTIES
DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS

14100 DUMBWAITERS
14200 ELEVATORS
14300 MOVING STAIRS AND WALKS
14400 LIFTS
14500 MATERIAL HANDLING SYSTEMS
14600 HOISTS AND CRANES
14700 TURNTABLES
14800 SCAFFOLDING
14900 TRANSPORTATION SYSTEMS
DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT
11010 MAINTENANCE EQUIPMENT
11020 SECURITY AND VAULT EQUIPMENT
11030 TELLER AND SERVICE EQUIPMENT
11040 ECCLESIASTICAL EQUIPMENT
11050 LIBRARY EQUIPMENT
11060 THEATER AND STAGE EQUIPMENT
11070 INSTRUMENTAL EQUIPMENT
11080 REGISTRATION EQUIPMENT
11090 CHECKROOM EQUIPMENT
11100 MERCANTILE EQUIPMENT
11110 COMMERCIAL LAUNDRY AND DRY CLEANING EQUIPMENT
11120 VENDING EQUIPMENT
11130 AUDIO-VISUAL EQUIPMENT
11140 SERVICE STATION EQUIPMENT
11150 PARKING CONTROL EQUIPMENT
11160 LOADING DOCK EQUIPMENT
11170 SOLID WASTE HANDLING EQUIPMENT
11190 DETENTION EQUIPMENT
11200 WATER SUPPLY AND TREATMENT EQUIPMENT
11280 HYDRAULIC GATES AND VALVES
11300 FLUID WASTE TREATMENT AND DISPOSAL EQUIPMENT
11400 FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT
11450 RESIDENTIAL EQUIPMENT
11460 UNIT KITCHENS
11470 DARKROOM EQUIPMENT
11480 ATHLETIC, RECREATIONAL AND THERAPEUTIC EQUIPMENT
11500 INDUSTRIAL AND PROCESS EQUIPMENT
11600 LABORATORY EQUIPMENT
11650 PLANETARIUM EQUIPMENT
11660 OBSERVATORY EQUIPMENT
11700 MEDICAL EQUIPMENT
11780 MORTUARY EQUIPMENT
11850 NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL
15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION
15300 FIRE PROTECTION
15400 PLUMBING
15500 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING (HVAC)
15550 HEAT GENERATION
15650 REFRIGERATION
15750 HEAT TRANSFER
15850 AIR HANDLING
15880 AIR DISTRIBUTION
15950 CONTROLS
15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL
16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
16200 POWER GENERATION
16300 HIGH VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION (ABOVE 600-VOLT)
16400 SERVICE AND DISTRIBUTION (600-VOLT AND BELOW)
16500 LIGHTING
16600 SPECIAL SYSTEMS
16700 COMMUNICATIONS
16850 ELECTRIC RESISTANCE HEATING
16900 CONTROLS
16950 TESTING
DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS
12050 FABRICS
12100 ARTWORK
12300 MANUFACTURED CASEWORK
12500 WINDOW TREATMENT
12600 FURNITURE AND ACCESSORIES
12670 RUGS AND MATS
12700 MULTIPLE SEATING
12800 INTERIOR PLANTS AND PLANTERS
572
Project Documentation Exercise

1.
What are the GENERAL RULES the courts require for considering the JOB DIARY to
be considered Admissible evidence in a court of law?
A.
B.
C.
D.
2.
Which of the following statements would be considered admissible evidence?

A.
B.
C.
D.
3.
At 7:30 AM, Ed was drunk. He was coming from the bar.

At 7:30 AM, Eds breath smelled of alcohol and his clothes of marijuana.
At 8:00 AM, Ed was carrying a bag of crack cocaine and he was swaying.
At 8:00 AM, Ed was staggering and he arrived at the job site drunk again.
Which of the following descriptions provides the BEST example of how to report
progress on the job site?
A.
B.
C.
D.
4.
Place in a three-ring Binder, Completed closest to the event as possible by the

home office, Place entries only when problems arise and Signed/Dated each day.
Place in a Bound book, Pages Numbered randomly, Completed closest to the
event as possible by the secretary, Erase entries that are wrong and make change.
Place in a Bound book, Pages Numbered consecutively, Completed closest to the
event as possible by Person with direct knowledge, and Signed/Dated each day.
Place in a three-ring Binder, Pages Numbered consecutively, Completed closest to
the event as possible by Person with direct knowledge Signed/Dated each day.
Poured Concrete for the Columns

Installed Rebar and Poured Concrete
Poured 75 CY Concrete Placed Rebar, Stripped Forms for Columns D1 -D4.
Poured 75 CY Concrete, Placed Rebar and Stripped Forms for the Building.
Which of the following items must be on an equipment time card for it to be admissible
evidence in a court of law?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Fuel Consumption and quantity moved.

Estimated durations, weight of the materials and Idle Time.
Total hours worked for each employee by day and their total hours for the week.
Hours distributed by Work activities performed and Idle time and Extra Work.
573
5.

Which of the following Categories are contained in the Daily Construction Report?
A.
B.
C.
D.
6.
Which of the following Categories are contained in the Daily Job Diary?
A.
B.
C.
D.
7.
Daily.
Hourly.
Weekly.
Twice per day.
How should conversations with solutions be recorded to ensure admissible evidence in

court?
A.
B.
C.
D.
9.
Weather Conditions, Construction Activities Completed and Conversations.

Weather Conditions, Meeting Agendas/Minutes and Time on activities.
Weather Conditions, Time on activities and Extra Work Orders.
Weather Conditions, Technical and Safety Problems/Solutions and Conversations.
How often should you distribute time to construction activities on the time cards to ensure
admissible evidence in court?
A.
B.
C.
D.
8.
Weather Conditions, Construction Activities Completed and Conversations.

Weather Conditions, Construction Activities Completed, Technical and Safety
Problems/Solutions, Equipment on Site, Meetings at Site, and Visitors at Job Site.
Weather Conditions, Construction Activities Completed, Equipment on Site,
Meetings at Job Site, Workers Present, Visitors at Job Site, and Materials Placed.
Weather Conditions, Construction Activities Completed, Technical and Safety
Problems/Solutions, Equipment on Site, Meetings at Job Site, Conversations,
Workers Present, Visitors at Job Site & Materials Placed.
Daily.
Weekly.
Hour and minutes of the event.
Only when a controversial event occurs.
How often should you record the weather conditions to ensure proper evidence?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Daily
Hourly
Weekly
Twice per day
574

10.
Which of the following reports would be considered admissible evidence in a court of

law?
A.
B.
C.
D.
11.
Which of the following construction activities can be impacted by the wind?

A.
B.
C.
D.
12.
Drywall installation.
Masonry wall placement.
Quarry tile installation.
Interior plumbing installation.
Which of the following items must be on a Time Card for it to be admissible evidence in
a court of law?
A.
B.
C.
D.
14.
Drywall installation.
Masonry wall placement.
Quarry tile installation.
Interior plumbing installation.
Which of the following construction activities can be impacted by the humidity?

A.
B.
C.
D.
13.
National Weather Station Report.

Local Radio Station Weather Report.
Contractors Job Site Weather Report.
Contractors Home Office Weather Report.
Total hours worked for each employee for each day.

Hours worked for each employee by work activity description or EWO each day.
Hours worked for each employee by cost code and completed at end of each week.
Total hours worked for each employee for the week and completed at end of week
Which of the following items is contained in the Job Diary?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Your observations and solutions.

Your opinion about people and events.
Conversations concerning coordination, technical problems and solutions.
A record of workers present, construction activities, and materials placed.
575
15.

Which of the following diary entries is considered admissible evidence in a court of law?
A.
B.
C.
D.
16.
Which of the following documents has the primary purpose of recording progress at the
job site?
A.
B.
C.
D.
17.
Make entries when you foresee a potential problem.

Have your Assistant in the office record your site observations.
Record the time and date of the conversation and make entries every day.
Make entries concerning your opinion as certain problems arise at the site.
Job Diary.
Memorandum.
Which document specifies the conditions for requesting a weather time extension?
A.
B.
C.
D.
General Conditions
Questions 18 and 19 refer to the following information.

You are required to file the safety agenda for April 15 and Safety minutes for April 8 and
the Planning Agenda for April 17 and Planning minutes for April 10.
18.
What Division and Section number is these agendas and minutes filed under?
A.
B.
C.
D.
19.
00700
01010
01040
01200
Within the Division and Section number how are the Safety Agenda, the Safety minutes,
the Planning Agenda and the Planning minutes filed?
A.
B.
C.
D.
In Alphabetical order with a Planning folder and Safety folder.

The Safety agenda and minutes under 01060 and the planning under 01100.
By Topic with the Safety agenda and minutes, then Planning agenda and minutes.
By date with Safety minutes, and Planning minutes, Safety, and Planning agenda.
576

20.
Within a folder, How are the agendas and minutes filed?

A.
B.
C.
D.
Latest on the Top, Agenda left side, Minutes Right Side.

Latest on the bottom, Agenda left side, Minutes on Right Side.
Latest on the Bottom, a folder for the Agenda and a folder for the minutes.
Latest on the Top, a Safety & Planning agendas folder and a Minutes folder.
You are required to files these documents. Purchaser Order - Heat Exchanger dated 8/3, Shop
Drawing - Heat Exchanger dated 8/5, Warranty - Heat Exchanger dated 8/6, Operating Manual Heat Exchanger dated 9/2 and a Subcontract Agreement dated 8/1 for installation of the Heat
Exchanger. Answer questions.
21.
What Division & Section number is these heat exchanger documents filed under?
A.
B.
C.
D.
22.
Using the Heat Exchanger documents provided above and a Division & Section number.
State the order you would place these within a Division and Section Number?
A.
B.
C.
D.
23.
00800
01025
01300
15750
One folder with the latest date on top as Operate, Warranty, Shop, P.O., and Sub
Separate folder for each item in this order Operate, P.O., Shop, Sub, & Warranty
Separate folder for each item with latest date on top as Op, Wa, Sh, PO and Sub
One folder with each item placed in alphabetical order as Op, PO, Sh, Sub, & Wa
You receive a Purchase Order Change for the Heat Exchanger. How should this be filed?
A.
B.
C.
D.
Under 00900 label folder Purchase Order Changes - Heat Exchanger.

Under 01010 label folder Purchase Order Changes - Heat Exchanger.
Under 01030 label Folder Purchase Order Changes - Heat Exchanger.
Under CSI number for Heat Exchanger in folder labeled P.O. on top of original
577
24.

You are required to file these documents. Job Diary, Construction Report, Time cards,
Equipment Status Report, Material Delivery Status Report, Visitors Log, and Look Ahead
Planning forms. What Division & Section number are all of these documents filed under?
A.
B.
C.
D.
25.
You are required to file the Contractors Progress Payment requests. What Division &
Section number is this document filed under?
A.
B.
C.
D.
26.
00600
00800
01040
01300
You are filing the Collective Bargaining Agreements for the Millwrights, Boilermakers,
Pipefitters, Carpenters and Operators. How should these documents be filed?
A.
B.
C.
D.
28.
00500
01020
01025
01300
You are required to file the submittal log. What Division & Section number is this
document filed under?
A.
B.
C.
D.
27.
00900
01040
01090
01900
00500 and each item in one folder and alphabetical order.

01040 and each item in separate folder and alphabetical order.
You are required to file the Prevailing Wage Rate Tables and Minority Contractors
Affidavits for the project, How should these documents be filed?
A.
B.
C.
D.
01060 and one folder in alphabetical order.

01100 and one folder in alphabetical order.
578
Check Answers
Project Documentation Instructions for Project Documentation Situations

All of these case incidents utilize this general information concerning the Taggart Building
project and the construction company. This is Project Number: 234
Client: Offices International
Contact: Keith Corbeil
676 Bell Street
Architect: Pro Design
Constructor: Ruse Const.
Mary Bockstahler
Ernest Meyer
775 Riverfront ST.
345 Michigan Avenue
Big Rapids. MI 49307

Cadillac, MI 49601 Mount Pleasant, MI 48858
The superintendent at the job site is Rick Fornsorg. The phone number at the Taggart job site is
(517) 555-1213. The job site is located seventy-five miles from the home office.
ORGANIZATION - Four employees report directly to Ruse: Jeff Skala, Comptroller; Ernest
Meyer, V.P., Sales/Estimating; Carol Pery, Office manager; and John Fryberger, General
Superintendent.
OFFICERS - Bruce Ruse, President; Jeff Skala, Comptroller and Treasurer; Ernest Meyer, Vice
President; Carol Percy, Office Manager and Secretary.
BOARD OF DIRECTORS - Bruce Ruse, Chairperson; Jeff Skala; Ernest Meyer; John Fryberger,
Harley Wallace, Attorney; and Claude Cook, President of Commercial Bank.
PROPERTY - The company owns an office building located outside Manton, Michigan. Ruse
Construction also owns a yard where all company equipment is stored. The yard is located
across the street from the office. Finally, the company owns or leases considerable equipment
including four office trailers for use by its field employees.
INSTRUCTIONS:
The Crew Size Discrepancy Case and the Gimpy Case incidents occurred
on the same day at the job site. Complete the requested documentation for
each incident.
579
Project Documentation Instructions for the Crew Size Discrepancy Case

First Case:
Case Participants:
Crew Size Discrepancy

Rick Fornsorg, Job Superintendent
Jim Agee, Plumbing Subcontractor Foreman
Your Position:
Its Wednesday, August 13 at 7:00 A.M. and you (Rick Fornsorg)have arrived. On the drive into
work the current weather was 57 degrees and foggy. The forecast for the afternoon is for 87
degrees, humid and sunny and you are wondering how todays progress will turn out. At 7:30
A.M., the plumbing subcontractor foreman, Jim Agee, arrives on the job site three days after you
had requested they start the mechanical rough-in. Furthermore, you noticed that the total crew
consists of three plumbers and you scheduled the plumbers work based on a crew of eight and an
output per day rate of 280 feet. Therefore, you ask, "Jim, how many plumbers will be on the
job?" and he replies, "Just the three of us. Hence, you ask Jim how many days will it take your
crew to complete the entire rough-in including an inspection and Jim replies, three days. You
reply, "Thank You, and then you instruct the plumbing crew leader where to start and you
indicate the location of the materials.
At 7:30 A.M., these workers arrive at the job site. Roy Stokes, a laborer, Jon Adams, a Carpenter
Apprentice, Stan Jackson, a Carpenter, and Mike Wards, the Carpenter Crew Leader, Hal Linsey,
Rod Buster Apprentice, Ken Peters, Rod Buster, Paul Boon, Rod Buster Crew Leader, Shari
Wes, a rigger, Lisa Wolverton, an Operator, Laura Stein, a rigger, and Janie Alton, the Rigger
Crew Leader on the job site today. Dave Vaun, a rodbuster, and Ed Crace, a rigger are absent
today. Youve placed the interior wall forms on the north side (100 feet) and on the east side (75
feet) each wall is 18 feet high, the rebar is a #5 in the north wall at 9 inches on center horizontal,
and 12-inches vertical. The riggers have been lifting the forms and rebar to the crews. You have
received concrete tickets for six, 10CY pours, and you are missing three tickets for todays pours
for the South and West Foundation Walls. In addition to the 50-ton crane, you have a welder and
cutting torches. The Project Manager conducted the monthly planning meeting from 7 - 8 AM.
with the Architect in attendance. An OSHA safety inspector unexpectedly stopped because of a
routine inspection and the County inspector was there to see the concrete pours and LA Testing
company was taking samples for the pours. Finally, at just about quitting time the Owner stopped
by. You also, have 3 Bill of Ladings from the trucking company for 17 tons of rebar, 3 bundles of
electrical conduit, 100 feet per bundle, and 14 Roof Vents.
1.
The subcontractors were selected and the subcontract agreements were written by Ernest
Meyer. This has been the policy since the company was formed.
2.
The estimate called for __840__ total feet to be installed.

580
Daily Construction Report Exercise for the Crew Size Discrepancy Case
Correspondence
Instructions:
Given the Crew Size Discrepancy Case information provided, complete

the Daily Construction Report provided below.
PR O JEC T
R EPO R T N O .
JO B N O .:
D ATE
C LIEN T:
D AY
C O N TR AC TO R
D EG R EES
SU PER IN TEN D EN T
W EATHER AM /PM
SUNNY
CLOUDY
SAFETY EN G IN EER
W IN D SPEED AM /PM
STILL
M O D ER ATE
HIG H
IN SPEC TO R
HU M ID ITY
DRY
M O D ER ATE
HU M ID
CREW
LEADER
APPREN
JOURNEY
Th
AM
AM /PM
C O N T R A C TO R S W O R K E R S
CRAFT
PM
OVERCAST RAIN/FOG
SU B C O N T R A C T O R S W O R K E R S
TOTAL
Boilermakers
Carpenters
Electricians
Finishers
Instrument Fitters
Insulators
Iron W orkers
Laborers
Masons
Operators
Pipe Fitters
Plumbers
Riggers
Rod Busters
Sheet Metal
Sprinkler Fitters
TOTALS
581
CREW
LEADER
APPREN
JOURNEY
TOTAL
Daily Construction Report Exercise for the Crew Size Discrepancy Case
CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES: _________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
MATERIALS USED: ___________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
MATERIALS RECEIVED: ______________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT AT THE SITE: ____________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
VISITORS TO THE SITE: _______________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
MEETINGS THAT TOOK PLACE: _______________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
582
Project Documentation Instructions for the Gimpy Case

Second Case:
Gimpy
Participants:
Roy Stokes, Laborer (Gimpy)

Stan Jackson, Carpenter
Mike Wards, Carpenter Foreman
Your Position:
Incident:
Its Wednesday at 10:45 A.M. and everything had been going great until you heard the clatter of
shattering glass. You ran to the door to see what had happened. Roy saw you just as you spotted
him, and he slowly dropped his raised arm. But he knew you had seen him, and he know too that
you hadn't missed noticing that the front window on the truck was smashed. You didn't even
have to tell him to come to the trailer, but as he entered the door his first words were, "It's all
Stan Jackson's fault." So you went back to the door and called Stan to come into the trailer.
Almost as soon as Jackson joined you and Roy Stokes, Roy launched into his tale of woe. "I just
can't take it anymore, Rick. Sure, I threw the rock at Jackson, but a man can just take so much.
Everybody's got a breaking point. He wont leave me alone. Gimpy this, Gimpy that. Gotcha,
Gimpy. Hey, Gimpy the eighth dwarf, where's Snow White? I mean, he just doesn't let up."
Before you could get a work out, Stan piped up with his side, "Hey, can't a guy kid a pal? He
takes everything so seriously. He can't even take a joke. He's getting dangerous! Hell, if I got
mad at everybody that kidded me, I'd . . . "
Additional Information:
1.
Roy Stokes hurt his leg in an auto accident about two years ago and ever since has had a
noticeable limp.
2.
The above incident represents the first time company equipment has been broken as a
result of a fight.
3.
Neither Stokes nor Jackson has been involved in any fights on the job before.
4.
The company has a written policy which says that employees who engage in fighting are
subject to dismissal.
583
Daily Job Diary Exercise for the Gimpy Case

Correspondence:
CASE NAME
Given the Gimpy Case information provided, complete the Job Diary
provided below. Briefly describe this incident in the daily log and indicate
the decision(s) and the action that you have taken.
Gimpy
DAILY JOB DIARY
PROJECT NAME:
PROJECT NUMBER:
DATE:
PAGE NUMBER
Th
W EATHER:
BRIGHT SUN
TEMPERATURE:
AM
W IND:
HUMIDITY:
TIME:
Su
CLEAR
OVERCAST
PM
FOG
RAIN
P.CLOUDY
COMMENTS
STILL
MODERATE
HIGH
DRY
MODERATE
HUMID
Describe the Conversation & State the Time and Your Solution
SIGNATURE
Title:
Date _____________________
_______________________________________________________
584

EXERCISE SOLUTIONS
Communication Skills Exercise Solutions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
585

Communication Skills Exercise Solution for the Memo
Correspondence
Instructions:
CASE NAME
Given the Gimpy Case information provided, if anyone else must be

informed about this incident, write a brief memo outlining the incident and
what action you have taken.
Gimpy
MEMO
TO:
John Fryberger
PROJECT NAME ____Taggart Building
FROM:
Rick Fornsorg
PROJECT NUMBER _234____________
SUBJECT:
Windshield Damaged
DATE:
August 13,
John:
There was a quarrel between Roy Stokes and Stan Jackson which resulted in Roy throwing a rock
and the rock broke the front window on the pickup truck. Roy said that the rock throwing
resulted from Stan constantly calling him Gimpy and he cant take it anymore. Therefore, I
have given Roy a written reprimand attached of the incident which is to be placed into his
employment record. I filed an accident report for the broken windshield and possible submittal
based upon your recommendation. Also, I gave Stan a written warning and we discussed in
private about how you would feel if you were called names that may provide a reminder of other
things that were out of your control. Stan agreed that he would stop calling Roy Gimpy and I
indicated that if I hear the word Gimpy from him or any of his friends that it would result in
another written reprimand and a one day suspension for him.
586

Communication Skills Exercise Solution for the Business Letter
August 13, 20_ _
Rick Fornsorg, Superintendent
Ruse Construction, LLC
345 Michigan Avenue
Mount Pleasant, MI 48858
Mary Bockstahler, Architect
775 Riverfront Street
Cadillac, MI 49601
RE:
Taggart Building Project, Project Number 234
Dear Ms. Bockstahler:

There is an elevation change of at least ten feet from the driveway approach to the existing
Michigan Department of Transportation (MDOT) business road. My initial review of the plans
and specifications does not indicate a retaining wall. In a conversation with Mr. Nelson, at the
regional office of MDOT in Rockford, MI on August 13, he indicated that MDOT requires a
retaining wall designed to their standard details and approved by them. Also, the rebar would
require approved shop drawings submitted to the Rockford office.
From the MDOT Standard Plan Details and the information available at the site, the retaining
wall will be at least 12 feet high, 15 inches thick and 100 feet long with reinforcing horizontally
and vertically. Ruse Construction is requesting that a change be issued before proceeding with
this work. Upon receipt of the change instructions we will submit a proposal for the impact on
the time and cost.
This retaining wall will result in the occupancy permit not being issued on August 18 unless we
can find an acceptable alternative for the new residents to access the complex. I can be reached at
the Taggart job site at (517) 555-1213, my cell (231) 250- 5555 and e-mail at rick@ruse.com.
Also, Ernest Meyers our Estimator/Project Manager can be reached in our home office at (517)
485-8535. Please notify Ernest Meyers at the above address in writing within three calendar days
of your acceptance of this change request.
Sincerely,
Rick Fornsorg, General Superintendent
cc:
Ernest Meyers, V.P. Sales and Estimating
Keith Corbeil, Offices International
John Fryberger, General Superintendent
587

Engineering Materials Exercise Solutions
1.
21.
41.
61.
2.
22.
42.
62.
3.
23.
43.
63.
4.
24.
44.
64.
5.
25.
45.
65.
6.
26.
46.
66.
7.
27.
47.
67.
8.
28.
48.
68.
9.
29.
49.
69.
10.
30.
50.
70.
11.
31.
51.
71.
12.
32.
52.
72.
13.
33.
53.
73.
14.
34.
54.
74.
15.
35.
55.
75.
B (225-900)
16.
36.
56.
76.
C (225 x 12)
17.
37.
57.
18.
38.
58.
19.
39.
59.
20.
40.
60.
588

Formwork Design Exercise Solutions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Rate of Pour in CF per hour = 375/8 = 46.875 CY/hr x 27 = 1265.625 CF/hr

Plan Area = 151.33' x 1.33' = 201.72 Square Feet
1265.625/201.72 = 6.27 Feet per hour
6.
Categories
Calculation
Minutes
Load
30 seconds/60 Seconds =
0.5000
Travel Up
55 Feet/ 80 Feet per minute
0.6875
Unload
4 minutes
4.0000
Travel Dn
55 Feet/ 100 Feet per minute
0.5500
5.7375
7.
60 minutes/7 minutes per round trip = 8.57 cycles/hour x 2.5CY/cycle = 21.43 CY
8.
151.33 feet x 16 feet x 1.33 feet = 3220 CF/27CF/CY = 119.27 CY
9.
119.27 CY/33 CY per hour = 3.61
10.
16 feet/2.25 hours = 7.11 Feet (vertical per hour)
11.
151.33 feet x 16 feet x 1.33 feet = 3220.30 CF/635CF/hour = 5.07 hours
589

Formwork Design Exercise Solutions
12.
150 + 9000(6) = 921 psi

70
13.
150 + 43,400 + 2800 (10) = 1102 psi

75
75
14.
150 x h = 150 x 6 = 900 psi
15
150 x h = 150 x 15 feet = 2250 psi
16.
ACI Table 7-2, Right of double line is Long Term and parallel to grain column
17.
1102 psi x 10inches/12 inches = 918
18.
ACI Table 7-5.2, Fv = 225, 2" x 8" studs
19.
1000 plf x 36/12 = 3000 plf
20.
ACI Table 7-8.1, Right of the Double vertical line and Fv = 225 psi
21.
1102 psf x 36/12 x 45/12 = 12,398 pounds
22.
150/12 = 12.5 pounds per square soot x 10 inches = 125 psf
23.
24.
25.
26.
590

Soil Mechanics Exercise Solutions
1.
24.
46.
2.
25.
47.
3.
26.
48.
4.
27.
49.
5.
28.
50.
6.
29.
51.
7.
30.
8.
31.
9.
32.
10.
33.
11.
34.
12.
35.
13.
36.
14.
37.
15.
38.
16.
39.
17.
40.
18.
41.
19.
42.
B Sw% = (BCY - 1) 100 = (2600 -1) 100 = 23.8%

(LCY
(2100
20.
43.
A Sh% = (1- BCY) 100 = (1- 3130) 100 = 10.8%

CCY
3510
21.
44.
22.
45.
23.
A
591

Psychrometric Exercise Solutions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
592

Management, Legal Entities & Delivery Methods Exercise Solutions
1.
21.
2.
22.
3.
23.
4.
24.
5.
25.
6.
26.
7.
27.
8.
28.
9.
29.
10.
30.
11.
31.
12.
32.
13.
33.
14.
34.
15.
35.
16.
36.
17.
18.
19.
20.
593

Financial Analysis Exercise Solutions
1.
1,415,815 - 682,661 = $733,154
2.
$1,415,815
$ 682,661
3.
$1,415,815 - $640,020 - 91433 =

Current Liabilities
4.
$1,515,995
$2,979,398
5.
Construction average is 33%. See Summary of Financial ratio table
6.
$1,515,995
$1,463,403
= 1.03
7.
$359,374
$88,333
= 4.07
8.
Construction average is 8.00 Times. See the Summary of Financial ratio table
The assumption is 5 times. The Construction average is 8.00 Times
10.
$176,177
$4,406,806
= 2.07
$684,362 = 1.00
$682,661
= .51
= 4.00%
594

Depreciation Methods Exercise Solutions
1.
Purchase Price
Salvage Value
Service Life
= $100.000
= $ 10,000
= 3 Years.
using the Double Declining Method
Year
Yearly Depreciation
$0
$0
$100,000
$100,000
2($100,000)/3 = $66,667
$33,333
$33,000
2($33,333)/3 = $22,222
$10,778
$778
$10,000
2.
Book Value
Beginning
Sum-of-the-Year-Digits.. Sum = 3 + 2 + 1 = 6. $100,000 - $10,000 = $90,000
Year
Yearly Depreciation
$0
$0
$100,000
$100,000
3/6 ($90,000) = $45,000
$55,000
$55,000
2/6 ($90,000) = $30,000
$25,000
$25,000
1/6 ($90,000) = $15,000
$10,000
3.
4.
Book Value
Beginning
Straight line method. Yearly depreciation = $100,000 - $10,000/3 = $30,000
Year
Yearly Depreciation
$0
$0
$100,000
$100,000
$30,000
$70,000
$70,000
$30,000
$40,000
$40,000
$30,000
$10,000
595
Book Value
Beginning

Ethics Exercise Solutions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
596

CSI Master Format Exercise Solutions
1.
21.
2.
22.
3.
23.
4.
24.
5.
25.
6.
26.
7.
27.
8.
28.
9.
29.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
597

Temporary Material and Equipment Exercise Solutions
1.
U.
2.
V.
3.
W.
4.
X.
5.
Y.
6.
Z.
7.
AA.
8.
28.
9.
29.
10.
30.
11.
31.
12.
32.
13.
33.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
T.
598

Concrete Beam Schedule Exercise Solutions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
599

Door and Window Schedule Exercise Solutions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
600

Finish and Paint Schedule Exercise Solutions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
09900 3.08 B.2.
7.
09900 3.08 M.
8.
09900 3.08 G.2.
9.
09900 3.08 J.3.
10.
09900 3.08 K.3.
601

Plumbing and Mechanical Schedule Exercise Solutions
Mechanical Schedule Exercise
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
3.
4.
4.
5.
5.
6.
6.
7.
7.
8.
8.
9.
9.
10.
10.
11.
12.
13.
602

Electrical Schedule Exercise Solutions
1.
21.
2.
22.
3.
23.
4.
24.
5.
25.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
C as noted on the Power Plan: Upper Level
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
See the Mechanical Schedule for the Gas

Fired Package Rooftop unit (RTU)
603

Bid Document Exercise Solutions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
604

Laws, Regulations, Codes and Specifications Exercise Solutions
1.
21.
2.
22.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
605

Insurance and Bonds Exercise Solutions
1.
21.
2.
22.
3.
23.
4.
24.
5.
25.
6.
26.
7.
27.
8.
28.
9.
29.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
606

Productivity & Labor Unit Cost Exercise Solutions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C = 1 x 8 + 4 x 8 + 2 x 8 + .5 x 8
8.
B = 60 WHR/545 SFCA = .110
9.
B = .110 X 12,000 SFCA = 1,320
10.
B = 12,000 SFCA/545 SFCA = 22
11.
B=
12.
B = 1423.36/545 = $2.61
13.
C = $2.61 x 12,000 = $31,320
14.
C = 545 SFCA/60 Whr = 9.08
15.
C = ($18.30/100) x 13,200 =$2,415.60
16.
C = 2 x 2400 + .25 x $250 =

$4862.50/910 CY
8 x 27.20 + 32 x 22.80 + 16 x
25.26 + 4 x 18.00
607

Wood Sheet Piling Material and Unit Cost Exercise Solutions
1.
2.
60 + 100 + 60 + 100 = 320 LF x 13 Feet = 4,160 SFCA
13"/12" =
3.
320 LF = 296 PCS x 13' long = 3848 VLF

1.083'
Component
Calculations
Piling
3848 VLF x 3" x 13" (3.25 BF/VLF) =

12
W ales
3 lines x 320 Feet = 960 Lineal Feet x 6" x 8" (4.0 BF/LF) =
12
3,840
Braces
3 lines x 12 PCS/line x 60' long =2,160 LF x 6" x 6" (3 BF/LF)

12
6,480
W aste
Board Feet
Subtotal Board Feet
22,826
12% x 17,318 BF =
2,739
Total Board Feet
4.
12,506
25,565
Component
Calculations
Cost
Lumber
11,000 BF x $550/MBF (M= 1000) =
$ 6,050
Salvage
Deduct 60% x $6,050) =
($3,630)
Total Allocated to this Project
5.
Nails
6.
$2,420
12 Lbs/100 SFCA x 3,690 SF = 442.8 Lbs = 9 Bxs x $35/Bxs

50 Lbs/Bxs
C
$17,000
5,500 VLF
$3.09/VLF
608

Equipment Production and Unit Cost Exercise Solutions
1.
C
Categories
Calculation
Decimal of
an Hour
Position
0 Minutes/60 minutes =
.000
Load
10 CY Truck/80 CY Backhoe =
.125
Haul Away
12 Miles Away/35.0 Miles Per hour Loaded
.343
Unload
6 minutes/ 60 minutes
.100
Return
12 Miles Away/ 45.0 MPH empty
..267
.835
2.
1 HOUR/.266 = 3.759 Trips per hour
3.
Backhoe Production = 80 CY per Hour

=
Haul Unit Production 10 CY x 1.197 Trips per hr.
4.
7255CY/80CY/hour = 90.68 hour $177/90.68 hour = $1.95/hour mobilization

$55.20 + 1.95 mobilization =
$57.15 per hour
80 CY per hour = .714
5.
9 Trucks x $22.77 per hour

80 CY per hour
609
6.72 Trucks
USE 7 Trucks
= $204.93 per hour =

80 CY per hour
$2.56/CY

6.
No.
A
CRAFT
Hourly Rate
Total Hourly Costs
Crew Leader
$12.35 per hour
$12.35 per hour
Backhoe Operator
$11.85 pe hour
$11.85 pe hour
Oiler
$10.15 per hour
$10.15 per hour
Subtotal
$34.35 per hour
Payroll Insurance
6.87% x $34.35
$2.36 per hour
Payroll Taxes
12.55% x $34.35
$4.31 per hour

Total Hourly Costs
Labor cost per CY ($L/CY) to EXCAVATE:
7.
No.
6
$41.02 per hour
$41.02 per hour =

80 CY per hour
$0.51/CY
B
CRAFT
Hourly Rate
Total Hourly Costs
Truck Drivers
$9.30 per hour
$55.80 per hour
Subtotal
$55.80 per hour
Payroll Insurance
6.87% x $55.80
$03.83 per hour
Payroll Taxes
12.55% x $55.80
$07.00 per hour

Total Hourly Costs
Labor cost per CY ($L/CY) to HAUL:
$66.63 per hour

80 CY per hour
610
$66.63 per hour

=
$0.83/CY

8.
60 seconds x 60 minutes
23 Seconds per Cycle
9.
1.5 CY per Cycle x 156.5 Cycles per Hour
= 234.75 CY/Hour
10.
234.75 CY/Hour x 45 Minutes

60 Minutes
176.06 CY/Hour
11.
4 feet wide x 2 miles per hour x 5,280 Feet x 6" x 50 minutes = 81.48 CY/hr
8 passes x 27 CF per Cubic Yard
12" (60 Minutes)
12.
[2 feet Wide x 35 FPM x 45 minutes/hour] x 06 inches

[3 passes x 27 Cubic Feet per CY] 12 inches
3600 seconds
= 156.5 Cycles per Hour
23 Sec./Cycle
611
= 19.44 CY/Hour

Excavation Quantities Exercise Solutions
1.
A
ITEM
SITE
2.
3.
4.
5.
LENGTH
W IDTH
60'
75'
Sw % =(BCY - 1)100
LCY
DEPTH
.67'
CUBIC
YARDS
3015CF/27CF/CY
111.67
= (2600 -1) 100

(2100)
=23.8%
204.00 - .58]- [195.25 - .42 - .33] = 8.92 Feet
ITEM
LENGTH
W IDTH
DEPTH
CUBIC FEET
CUBIC
YARDS
Shape I
45.0'
16.0'
8.92'
6,422.40
237.67
Shape II
22.5'
16.0'
8.92'
3,211.20
118.93
9,633.60
356.60
Total Building Excavation

6.
CUBIC FEET
C
ITEM
LENGTH
W IDTH
DEPTH
CUBIC FEET
CUBIC
YARDS
45' + 4' +
4' = 53'
4'
8.92'
1891.04
70.04
32' + 4' +
4' = 40'
4'
8.92'
1427.20
52.86
22.5'
4'
8.92'
802.80
29.73
16'
4'
8.92'
570.88
21.14
22.5'
4'
8.92'
802.80
29.74
16'
4'
8.92'
570.88
21.14
Full Perimeter = 170'
4'
8.92'
6,065.60
Total CY of Excavation for the W orking Space
612
224.65

Excavation Quantities Exercise Solutions
7.
Run = 1.5 x 8.92 Feet = 13.38'

Rise =
8.92'
Slope (Angle of Repose) = ( b x h) x Full Perimeter
= (8.92' x 13.38') 170' = 375.73 CY
Total Slope Volume = 105.15 CY + 375.73 CY = 480.88 CY
8.
9.
10.
Sw % =(BCY - 1)100 =
LCY
(3130) - 1 ]100 = 13.4%

(2760)
Sh % = (1- BCY)100 = (1 - 3130) 100 = 10.8%

CCY 3510)
From the Slope (Angle of Repose Table a Firm Clay Slope (RUN: RISE) = 2/3:1
RISE = 14 Feet
RUN = .6666666666 x 14 Feet = 9.33 Feet
11.
From the (Angle of Repose Table a Compacted Angular Gravel Slope = 1/2:1
RISE = 14 Feet
RUN = .5 x 14 Feet = 7 Feet
12.
Slope (Angle of repose) RUN: RISE for a Compacted Sharp Sand Damp = 1.5:1.0
RISE = 14 Feet
RUN = 1.5 X 14 = 21 Feet
13.
224 Feet x 1/8" per Foot = 28 inches/12 = 2.33 Feet + 5 Feet = 7.33 Feet
14.
(5.00 Feet + 7.33 Feet) = 12.33 Feet = 6.17 Feet

2
2
15.
224' x 3' x 6.17' = 4146.24 CF/27 = 153.56 CY
16.
(9.25' + 6.17') + (9.25' + 6.17') x 224' = 12,784.24 CF/27 = 473.49 CY
17.
18.
Corner 4 Existing Elevation 93.50 - 92.00 Proposed Elevation = C - 1.50 Feet
19.
(L)2 (Hf)2
= (75)2 (2.25 +3.25)2 =
108 (Hf + Hc) 108 (2.25 +3.25 +1 .50 + 2.5)
613
5626 x 30.25 = 165.87

108 x 9.5

Concrete Quantities Exercise Solutions
1.
2.
207.33' - 191.67 = 15.66'
Description
Forms Outside
Forms Inside
W all
Extends
Extends
Total
Length
45' +
.58' +
.58'
46.16'
16' +
.58' +
.58'
17.16'
22.50' +
22.50'
16' +
16.00'
22.50' +
.58' +
.58'
23.66'
32 +
.58' +
.58'
33.16'
154
2.32
2.32
158.64
46.16' -
2.33'
2.33'
41.50'
17.16' -
2.33'
2.33'
12.50'
22.50' -
22.50'
16.00' -
16.00'
23.66' -
2.33'
2.33'
19.00'
33.16' -
2.33'
2.33'
28.50'
158.64
9.32
9.32
140'
Depth
SFCA
1.16666
185.08
1.16666
163.33
Footing Forms Total Square Feet Contact Area
614
348.41

3.
Description
W all
W all Forms (Out)
W all Forms (Inside
Extends
Extends
Total
Length
W all
Height
45.00' +
45.00' +
15.66'
16.00' +
16.00' +
15.66'
22.50' +
22.50' +
15.66'
16.00' +
16.00' +
15.66'
22.50' +
22.50' +
15.66'
32.00 +
32.00 +
15.66'
154.00'
154.00'
15.66'
45.00' -
1.17'
1.17'
42.66'
15.66'
16.00' -
1.17'
1.17'
13.66'
15.66'
22.50' -
22.50'
15.66'
16.00' -
16.00'
15.66'
22.50' -
1.17'
1.17'
20.16'
15.66'
32.00 -
1.17'
1.17'
29.66'
15.66'
154.00' -
4.68'
4.68'
144.64
15.66'
W all Forms Total Square Feet Contact Area
4.
SFCA
2,411.64
2,265.06
4,676.70
B
Description
Length
W idth
Square Feet
CSF
Shape I (inside)
32 - 1.17' -1.17' = 29.67
22.5' - 1.17' - 1.17' = 20.16'
598.15
5.9815
Shape II (inside)
16 - 1.17-1.17 = 13.66
22.50'
307.35
3.0735
905.50
9.0550
5.
905.50 SF x 0.42 depth/27CF/CY = 380.31 CF/27CF/CY= 14.09 CY
615

6.
C
Length
W idth
Depth
45.00'
1.17'
15.66'
13.66'
1.17'
15.66'
45.00' -
16.00' -
22.50' -
22.50'
1.17'
15.66'
16.00' -
16.00'
1.17'
15.66'
22.50' -
22.50'
1.17'
15.66'
32.00 -
1.17'
1.17'
29.66'
1.17'
15.66'
154.00'
2.34'
2.34'
149.32'
1.17'
15.66'
7.
1.17'
1.17'
N-S = 32'/1' OC = 32 + 1 Starter = 33

Laps
Cubic Feet
Cubic Yards
2,735.87CF/27CF/CY
101.33
E-W = 45'/1' OC = 45 +1 = 46
Size
# Pieces
Length
Lineal Feet
Mats
Total LF
Top N-S Slab Rebar
#7
17
45'
765
1,530.00
Top N-S Slab Rebar
#7
16
22.5'
360
720.00
Top E-W Slab Rebar
#7
23
32
736
1,472.00
Top E-W Slab Rebar
#7
23
16
368
736.00
Splices N-S Slab Rebar
28
#7/8
2.04'
4.08
8.16
Splices N-S Slab Rebar
28
#7/8
2.04'
2.04
4.08
Splices E-W Slab Rebar
28
#7/8
2.04
2.04
4.08
Splices E-W Slab Rebar
28
#7/8
2,237.16'
616
4,474.32

8.
Out = 15.66'/ .5' =

W all
Size
# Pieces
Length
Total LF
Horizontal W all (Out)
45.0'
#10
32
45
1,440.00
Horizontal W all (In)
45.0
#9
24
45
1,080.00
16.0'
#10
32
16
512
16.0
#9
24
16
384
22.5 +1.17' Inside Cor
23.7
#10
32
23.67
757.44
Inside Corner
23.7
#9
24
23.67
568.08
16.0 + 1.17' Inside C
17.2
#10
32
17.17
549.44
Inside Corner
17.2
#9
24
17.17
412.08
22.5
#10
32
22.5
720.00
22.5
#9
24
22.5
540.00
32rizontal W all (Out)
32.0
#10
32
32
1,024.00
32.0
#9
24
32
768.00
Mat
8,755.04
9.
# of Stirrups = 17.17'/.5" OC = 34 spaces + 1 starter = 35 pieces
Length of a stirrup = 2' +.875' + 2' + .875' = 5.75' - (4 x 0.167) = 5.08' per stirrup.
Total Lineal Feet of stirrups = 35 pieces x 5.08 LF per Stirrup =
Lineal Feet of #3 Stirrup support bars 4 pieces x 10 feet =
Total Lineal Feet of Stirrups
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
177.8
40.0
217.8
45' + 45' + (55 x 15.66) = 951.30 x( 2 x 8/12) = 1,269.13
617

15.
42"/7" = 6 risers and 5 treads x 10" = 50"
16.
C = rb(4 .17)2 + (3.5)2 = 5.44'
17.
5 stringers x 4' wide =

6 risers x 4' wide
Total Board Feet
18.
Back 5.44' x
Description
No.
Concrete Slant
Concrete Steps
0.5
Concrete Landing
0.58'
0.83'
20' x (2" x 12"/12) = 40 Board Feet

24' x (2" x 8"/12) = 32 Board Feet
72 Board Feet
Length
W idth
Depth
Cubic Feet
5.44'
4.00'
0.50'
10.88
6 Step
4.00
4.00'
4.00'
5.78
0.50'
Total Concrete for the Stairs
618
Cubic Yards
8.00
24.66CF/27
0.91

Framing Quantity Takeoff Exercise Solutions
A.
15' + 2.5' = 17.50' x 1.08 = 18.90'
2.
Main
Extension
3.
15' + 2.5' = 17.50' x 1.48 = 25.90'
4.
12.50' x 1.48 = 18.50'
5.
4 hips
6.
parallellogram
7.
main = 73 + 2.5 + 2.5 = 78 , 30 +2.5 + 2.5 = 35 78 x 35 = 2,730 SF x 1.48 = 4041

Ext
= 20 (20 + 2.5 + 2.5) = 20 x 25 = 500 SF x 1.48
= 740
Total = 4781
= 73'/1.333333' = 55 + 1 = 56 x 2 sides = 112

= 20'/1.333333 = 15 + 1 = 16 x 2 sides = 32
Total
= 144
4,781 SF/32 SF per sheet = 150 Sheets

8.
c = r8 2 + 12 2 = r 64 + 144 = r208 = 14.42"/ Foot

12
c = r14.42 2 + 12 2 = r351.93
18.76"/ Foot = 1.563

12
619

Cost Reports Exercise Solutions
1.
21.
2.
22.
3.
23.
4.
24.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
620

Earned Workhour Report Exercise Solutions
EARNED WORKHOUR REPORT
PROJECT NAME
PROJECT NUMBER
DESCRIPTION
QUANTITIES
UNIT
EXPENDED
W ORKHOURS
WEEK
BUDGET
WEEK
TO DATE
Wall Forms
2499
87
112
SF
Concrete Footings
256
25
40
Concrete Walls
453
30
Footing Forms
2417
Wall Forms
25560
W ORKHOURS
UNIT W ORKHOURS
PROJECTED
TO DATE
EARNED
B U D G E TED
BU D GET
W EEK
TO D A TE
17
27
19.15
428
.171
.195
.241
602
(174)
CY
40
85
56.4
360
1.41
1.60
2.125
544
(184)
34
CY
40
44
47.6
634
1.40
1.33
1.29
586
+48
210
410
SFCA
42
102
84.5
499
.206
.200
.249
601
(102)
1880
3090
SFCA
364
664
670.53
5544
.217
.194
.215
5493
+51
621
C om pletion
( g a in/l(Loss s)

Labor Cost Reports Exercise Solutions
PROJECT NAME
PROJECT NUMBER
LABOR COST REPORT
COD
E
DESCRIPTION
U N IT
QUANTITIES
EXPENDED COST
W EEK
BUDGET
W EEK
TO D A TE
W all Forms
2499
87
112
SF
Concrete Footings
256
25
40
Concrete W alls
453
30
Footing Forms
2417
W all Forms
25560
TOT
$
UNIT COST
PROJECTED
TO D A TE
BUDGET
$
BUDGET
W EEK
TO D A TE
C O M P LE TIO N
G A IN /LO S S
$223
$355
$8022
$3.21/SF
$2.56/SF
$3.17/SF
$7921.83
$100.17
CY
$364.60
$804.97
$5490
$21.45/CY
$14.58/CY
$20.12/CY
$5150.72
#339.28
34
CY
$394.08
$430.54
$9669
$21.34/CY
$13.14/CY
$12.66/CY
$5734.98
$3934.02
210
410
SFCA
$449.05
$1038.25
$8154
$3.37/
$2.14/
$2.53/
$6115.01
$2038.99
1880
3090
SFCA
$3811.70
$6854.99
$90,370
$3.54.SF
$2.03/SF
2.22/SF
$56,743.02
$33626.98,
622

Project Cost Summary Reports Exercise Solutions
FORECAST the Current Projection column as follows:
QUANTITY - Project the REVISED ESTIMATE column
WORKHOURS - Project using the Straight Line Method
LABOR COST - Project using the Straight Line Method
MATERIAL COST - Project the REVISED ESTIMATE column
EQUIPMENT COST - Project the TOTAL EXPENDED column
SUBCONTRACT COST - Project the TOTAL EXPENDED column
ITEM
ORIGINAL
ESTIMATE
SCOPE CHANGES
REVISED
ESTIMATE
EXPENDED
TOTAL EXPENDED
COMMITT
PERIOD
CURRENT
PROJECTION
PROJECTED
GAIN/LOSS
TO DATE
Piles
Quantity
6700 VLF
(720)
5980 VLF
680 VLF
680 VLF
5980 VLF
686 WHR
(135) WHR
Workhours
618 WHR
(67)
551 WHR
78 WHR
78 WHR
Labor
16817
(1900)
14917
1360
1360
$11960.00
$2957
Material
45225
(4675)
40550
10000
23470
33470
$40550.00
Equipment
16040
(1400)
14640
7600
9360
16960
$16960
($2320)
Subcontracts
7000
7000
$7000.00
($7000)
78082
(7975)
70107
25960
32830
58790
$76470.00
($6363)
623

Planning & Scheduling Exercise Solutions
1.
21.
2.
22.
3.
23.
4.
24.
5.
25.
6.
26.
7.
27.
8.
28.
9.
29.
10.
30.
10 - 8 or 2 - 0 = 2
11.
31.
ES next - EF that = 10 - 10 = 0
12.
32.
15
13.
33.
14.
34.
15.
35.
16.
36.
17.
37.
18.
38.
17 - 0 or 20 - 3 = 17
19.
39.
28 - 12 = 16
20.
40.
Crash D (-2), J , K = 37-2 = 35
624

John Adams Logic Network Exercise Solutions
EXHIBIT #1776
ACTIVITY
NODE
DAYS
Start
10-15
10-20
EARLY
START
EARLY
FINISH
LATE
START
LATE
FINISH
TOTAL
FLOAT
FREE
FLOAT
0*
12-35
10
10-8 = 2
15-30
10
10
0*
10
10
15-35
D
20
25
10
10-9 = 1
30
10
14
10
14
0*
35
10
14
10
14
0*
625

George Mason Network Logic Exercise Solutions
EXHIBIT #1777
EVENT TIME SCHEDULE TABULATION SHEET FOR THE

GEORGE MASON LOGIC NETWORK EXHIBIT # 1777.
Activity
NODE
DAYS
EARLY
START
EARLY
FINISH
LATE
START
LATE
FINISH
TOTAL
FLOAT
FREE
FLOAT
START
10
0*
15
30
10
10
0*
35
10
15
10
15
0*
25
10
10
0*
20
10
FINISH
40
15
15
15
15
* Critical Activities are M, O, P, Q.
626

OSHA Recordkeeping and Inspections Exercise Solutions
OSHA Inspection Exercise
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
3.
4.
4.
5.
5.
6.
6.
7.
7.
8.
8.
9.
9.
10.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
627

OSHA Personal Protection Equipment and Fire Extinguishers Exercise Solutions
Personal Protection Exercise Solutions
Fire Extinguishers Solutions
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
3.
4.
4.
5.
5.
6.
6.
7.
7.
628

OSHA Rigging Equipment Exercise Solutions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
See 1926.251(c)(iv) 10% ( 6 x

19) = 10% x 114 = 11.4 wires
Table H-4 under MS
629

OSHA Scaffolding Exercise Solutions
1.
2.
3.
4.
1926.451 (a) (1)
21.
22.
1926.451 (b) (7)
23.
1926.451 (c)
24.
5.
1926.451 (c) (1) (ii)
6.
1926.451 (c) (1) (iii)
7.
1926.450 (b)
8.
1926.451 (b) (5) (i) & (ii)
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
1926.452 (a) (10)
16.
1926.452 (b) (10)
17.
1926.452 (c) (6)
18.
W = 4(600 x 2.5')/ 16' = 6000/16 = 375 Lbs
19.
20.
1926.452(w)(6)(ii)
630
2 times 7 feet = 14 feet
See Allowable Span Table

OSHA Soil Classification and Shoring Tables Exercise Solutions
OSHA Soil Classification Exercise Solutions
OSHA Shoring Tables Exercise Solutions
1.
1.
2.
2.
3.
3.
4.
4.
5.
5.
6.
6.
7.
7.
8.
9.
631

Surveying and Layout Exercise Solutions
1.
5.45 = 106.78 -101.33
2.
74.14' = a2 + b2 = c2, / (42.5)2 + (60.75)2 = 74' - 1/34"
3.
291.09 = cos 20 Degrees (.9397) x 310
4.
7.69% = 1/13 x 100
5.
8.02 = 818.02 - 810; BM 813.30 + 4.72 = 818.02 HI, FF = 809.00 +1 = 810
6.
17.55' = 668.00 El - 655.50 BM = 12.50 +5.05
7.
130.70 = 240 x SIN 33 Degrees (.5446)
8.
3:4:5
9.
a: baseline is 3 x 9 = 27' , b: vertical height is 4 (36'/4) = 9,

c: diagonal is 5 x 9 = 45'
10.
9.42 = 5.42 + 4.00
11.
TAN A = a/b; b= a/TAN A = 12/TAN 70 = 12/2.7475 = 4.36

hypotenuse c = / (12.0)2 + (4.36)2 = /163.076 = 12.77 + 12.77 + 20 = 45.54 LF
12.
(12 x 4.36) + ( 12 x 4.36) = 52.32 ; 12 x 20 = 240 + 52.32 = 292.32 SF
13.
14.
15.
16.
877.26 + 19.01 (BS) - 6.37 (FS) = 889.90
632

Vendor and Subcontractor Exercise Solutions
1.
21.
2.
22.
3.
23.
4.
24.
5.
25.
6.
26.
7.
27.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20..
633

Organization and Job Description Exercise Solutions
1.
21.
2.
22.
3.
23.
4.
24.
5.
25.
6.
26.
7.
27.
8.
28.
9.
29.
10.
30.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
634

Employment Law Exercise Solutions
1.
21.
2.
22.
3.
23.
4.
24.
5.
25.
6.
26.
7.
27.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
635

Site Administration and Contract Documents Exercise Solutions
1.
21.
2.
22.
3.
23.
4.
24.
5.
25.
6.
26.
7.
27.
8.
28.
9.
29.
10.
30.
11.
31.
12.
32.
13.
33.
14.
34.
15.
35.
16.
36.
17.
37.
18.
38.
19.
20.
636

Project Documentation Exercise Solutions
1.
21.
2.
22.
3.
23.
4.
24.
5.
25.
6.
26.
7.
27.
8.
28.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
637

Project Documentation Exercise Construction Report Solutions
PR O JEC T
Taggart Building
R EPO R T N O .
JO B N O .:
234
D ATE
C LIEN T:
O ffices International
D AY
C O N TR AC TO R
R use Construction
D EG R EES
SU PERIN TEN D EN T
R ick Fornsorg
W EATHER AM /PM
SUNNY
PM
CLOUDY
SAFETY EN G IN EER
W IN D SPEED A M /PM
ST IL L
M ODERATE
HIG H
IN SPECTO R
HU M ID ITY
DRY
M O D ER ATE
H U M ID
CONTRACTORS W ORKERS
CRAFT
August 13
M
T
57
AM /PM
Th
AM
87
PM
OVERCAST RAIN/FOG
AM
SUBCONTRACTORS W ORKERS
CREW
LEADER
APPREN
JOURNEY
TOTAL
CREW
LEADER
APPREN
JOURNEY
TOTAL
Boilermakers
Carpenters
Electricians
Finishers
Instrument Fitters
Insulators
Iron W orkers
Laborers
Masons
Operators
Pipe Fitters
Plumbers
Riggers
Rod Busters
11
Sheet Metal
Sprinkler Fitters
TOTALS
638

Project Documentation Exercise Construction Report Solutions
CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES:
Placed the interior wall forms on the north side (100 feet) and on the east side (75 feet) each wall
is 18 feet high, the rebar is a #5 in the north wall at 9 inches on center horizontal, and 12-inches
vertical. The riggers have been lifting the forms and rebar to the crews.
_____________________________________________________________________________
MATERIALS USED:
Placed 100 Feet of the interior wall forms on the north side and 75 lineal feet on the east side for
each of the 18 feet high walls. Placed, the #5 rebar on the north wall at 9 inches on center
horizontal, and 12-inches vertical. The riggers lifted the forms and rebar to the crews. Placed 90
CY of Concrete for the walls on the South wall and West walls..
MATERIALS RECEIVED:
17 tons of rebar, 3 bundles of electrical conduit, 100 feet per bundle, and 14 Roof Vents.
CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT AT THE SITE:

50-ton crane, welding Unit and cutting torches.
VISITORS TO THE SITE:

Project Manager, the Architect, the OSHA safety inspector, the County inspector, LA Testing
company and the Owner stopped by.
MEETINGS THAT TOOK PLACE: _7 - 8 AM.the Monthly planning meeting.
639

Project Documentation Exercise Daily Job Diary Solutions
CASE NAME
Gimpy
PROJECT NAM E: Taggart Building
PROJECT NUMBER:
DATE:
PAGE NUMBER
August 13
W EATHER:
Th
BRIGHT SUN
234
225
Su
CLEAR
Morning
OVERCAST
FOG
RAIN
P.CLOUDY
Afternoon
TEMPERATURE:
AM
WIND:
STILL
MODERATE
HIGH
DRY
MODERATE
HUMID
HUMIDITY:
57
PM 87
COMMENTS
TIME:
Describe the Conversation & State the Time and Your Solution
7:30 A
Jim Agee with the Plumbing subcontractor arrived today, 3 days late, with a crew of 3 workers.
I anticipated a crew of 8 workers. Jim indicated that it would take the present crew 3 days to complete.
10:45 A
Roy threw a rock at Stan and broke the front window of truck #274. I had a conversation with Roy
first and gave him a written reprimand to be placed into his file for throwing the rock in anger.
Also, I has a conversation with Stan about calling people names and in this case calling Roy Gimpy.
I also gave Stan a written reprimand for name calling names and teasing them. I tried to appeal to Stan
How you would feel if you had been in an accident and the result was a permanent limp.
SIGNATURE
Title
Rick Fornsorg
Date __August 13__________
___Superintendent_____
640

Associate Constructor Study Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Associate Constructor Study Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

American Institute of Constructors

Constructor Certification Commission

A Review for the

Revised and Printed May 11, 2005

Copyright July 2004 Edward M. Brayton

American Institute of Constructors

Level I Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

CONSTRUCTION FUNDAMENTALS EXAMINATION

Approximate Percentages of Subject Areas

Materials, Methods and Plan Reading

Bidding and Estimating

Budgeting, Costs and Cost Control

Planning, Scheduling & Schedule Control

Construction Surveying and Project Layout

Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

Engineering Material Properties

Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

Soil investigation testing methods and Soil Borings.

Field Soil Identification Methods

Volume Changes and Compaction Methods

Mechanics and Strength of Materials

Air and Fluid Mechanics

Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

Accounting and Financial Systems

Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

CSI Materials, Methods, Plan Reading, Specification

Selects proper construction equipment for based upon sling angles

Plan and Schedule Reading

Read site layout plans, find reinforced concrete rebar requirements

Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

Bidding and Estimating

Define bidding terms such as conceptual estimate, detailed

Perform quantity takeoff for excavation, concrete, rebar, rough

Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

Budgeting, Costs and Cost Control

Calculate productivity rates, determine total workhours budgeted

Labor Unit Costs

Forecasts at Completion Gains and Losses

Compute the budget, define a work breakdown structure, identify

Calculate forecasted cost at completion for labor, materials and

Define retainage and back charges, determine progress payment

Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

Planning, Scheduling and Schedule Control

Logical Sequences of Design, Procurement and Construction

Event Times, Calculations, and Scheduling Terminology

Identify design and leadtime activities, define fast tracking,

Distinguish design, procurement and construction activities,

Calculate event times using forward and backward pass

Crash a schedule and determine the impact, describe methods to

Level 1 Construction Fundamentals Study Guide

OSHA Administrative Requirements